JP2024045495A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of allowing operation when starting to supply operating power to be suitable.SOLUTION: In the setting value update processing, second RAM clear processing is executed. When operating power starts to be supplied, first RAM clear processing is executed based on execution of RAM clear operation. When the first RAM clear processing is executed or when the second RAM clear processing is executed, an area to be cleared in a main-side RAM 65 is initialized. In this case, in execution of one of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing or in execution of none of the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing when operating power starts to be supplied, initial display data for a special pattern are set to a first display data buffer to which display data for displaying on a special pattern display part are set.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

JP2009-261415A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary for the operation when the supply of operating power begins to be optimal, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can perform a suitable operation when the supply of operating power is started.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a specific display means,
a display data setting means for setting display data in a display memory area;
a specific display control means for controlling the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display memory area is performed;
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to an advantage level of a player in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power;
Equipped with
The display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started is characterized in that it is impossible to distinguish between a situation in which the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started and a specified situation in which the setting value to be used has not been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to the present invention, it is possible to perform a suitable operation at the start of supply of operating power.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main ROM. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a special chart special power control process executed by the main CPU. This is a flowchart showing the special chart change start processing executed by the main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensor are input to the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ball scoring detection process executed by the main CPU. A block diagram to explain the electrical configuration of a dispensing control device and various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device. It is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory; 13 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing output processing of a setting value update signal executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display output processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by a management CPU. 13A is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by a main CPU, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by a control CPU. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in a main ROM in the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a separate storage memory in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a repeated change monitoring process executed by a main CPU in the fourth embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a history memory in the sixth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the eighth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a setting update recognition process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by a management CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a display output process executed by a management CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a management side CPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory; FIG. 12 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor to the main CPU and management IC in the tenth embodiment. A front view of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. 10 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various displays in the first to fourth notification display devices based on the control of an MPU. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the game history management results are displayed, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices when the setting state of the pachinko machine is changed. 6A to 6H are time charts showing how the first to fourth notification display devices are put into display states. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the 1st information display device in a 12th embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the 2nd information display device. The first notification display device when displaying the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices and when displaying that the setting state of the pachinko machine is in a changeable state. and FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the second notification display device. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an abnormality display area in the thirteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an abnormality setting process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing an abnormality display process executed by a main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU in another embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting mode of each area in the main RAM. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of a work area for non-specific control used to manage game history. 3 is a flowchart showing a check process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal goal management processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the sixteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the seventeenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management execution processing executed by the main CPU in the nineteenth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twentieth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a management execution process executed by a main CPU. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in the twenty-first embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the twenty-second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing RAM monitoring processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU in another embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by a main CPU in another embodiment. A flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU in the 23rd embodiment. A flowchart showing a RAM monitoring process executed by the main CPU in the 24th embodiment. 25 is a flowchart showing a RAM monitoring process executed by a main CPU in the twenty-fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a management execution process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process executed by a main CPU. A flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU in the 26th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the management processing executed by the main CPU in the 28th embodiment. A flowchart showing the management process executed by the main CPU in the twenty-ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 30th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU. (a) It is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU, and (b) is a time chart showing how the reset signal is output by the reset signal output section. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting monitoring process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a management execution process executed by a main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process executed by the main CPU. 31 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU in the thirty-first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a clearing process in the event of an abnormality, which is executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a clearing process for non-specific control executed by a main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU in the 32nd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a checksum monitoring process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a clearing process for non-specific control executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 33rd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting monitoring process executed by a main CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration for controlling display of various display circuits by a main CPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining various buffers provided in a work area for specific control, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas provided in a work area for non-specific control. be. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of a display IC. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU to the display IC and how the display data transmitted from the display IC is received by the first display circuit or the second display circuit. 13 is a flowchart showing a second timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices in a situation where the setting value is updated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices in a situation where the setting value is confirmed. A flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU in the thirty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a calculation result storage area in the thirty-fifth embodiment. 5A to 5D are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices. 13A to 13E are time charts showing how base values for various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a result calculation process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal setting processing executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 13A to 13F are time charts for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. A flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU in the thirty-sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing a main process executed by a main CPU in the thirty-seventh embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing normal setting processing executed by the main CPU in the thirty-eighth embodiment. 39A to 39D are explanatory diagrams for explaining a setting corresponding memory area provided in the main ROM in the thirty-ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the process of reading the win/lose table executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer during setting update executed by the main CPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a setting corresponding storage area provided in the main side ROM in the fortieth embodiment. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining various display sections provided in an area visible from the front of the pachinko machine through the window panel in the 41st embodiment, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the round display section. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU in the 42nd embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing result calculation processing executed by the main CPU in the 43rd embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing display processing executed by the main CPU. 13A to 13G are time charts showing how base values for various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices. 44(a) to 44(g) are time charts showing how base values for various areas are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices in the forty-fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU in the 45th embodiment. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area related to setting values provided in a work area for specific control. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer during setting confirmation executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a fifth display data buffer during a setting update executed by the main CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed while a setting value update processing or a setting confirmation processing is being executed. 13A to 13E are time charts showing end timings of a setting value update process and a setting confirmation process in relation to the operation state of the setting key insertion section. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU in the 46th embodiment. Explanation to explain the contents of the process executed in the main process when the supply of operating power is resumed after the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process or the setting confirmation process is being executed. It is a diagram. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed in a situation where a setting value update processing or a setting confirmation processing is being executed in the 47th embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed in a situation where a setting value update processing or a setting confirmation processing is being executed in the 48th embodiment. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU in the forty-ninth embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU. 7(a) to (h) are time charts showing how the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are permitted in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed; FIG. (a) to (g) are time charts showing the progress of processing when an abnormality regarding a power outage flag, checksum, or set value occurs; 13A to 13G are time charts showing the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is started. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed while a setting value update processing or a setting confirmation processing is being executed. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process performed by sound-light side CPU. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU. FIG. A flowchart showing the performance control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU in the 50th embodiment. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU. FIG. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU in the 51st embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 52nd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 53rd embodiment. 13A to 13G are time charts showing the state of subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU is stopped while the setting value update processing is being executed. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by a main CPU. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a memory area provided in a work area for specific control. FIG. 6A to 6F are time charts showing how setting values to be updated are updated. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main CPU in the 54th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main CPU in the 55th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a clear target area and a non-clear target area provided in a work area for specific control. 13 is a flowchart showing a display start process executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing second timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display contents of the special map display unit and the general map display unit corresponding to the situation at the time when the supply of operating power begins. An explanatory diagram for explaining each area set in the clear target area of the work area for specific control in the 56th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display contents of the special map display unit and the general map display unit corresponding to the situation at the time when the supply of operating power begins. 12 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 57th embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display contents of the special map display unit and the general map display unit corresponding to the situation at the time when the supply of operating power begins. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided as a clear target area and a non-clear target area of a work area for specific control in the 58th embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a first timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a display start process executed by a main CPU. (a) It is an explanatory view for explaining a losing display lottery table for special symbols, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a losing display lottery table for regular symbols. A flowchart showing the display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 59th embodiment. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table for special symbols, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial display lottery table for regular symbols. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the display contents of the special map display unit and the general map display unit corresponding to the situation at the time when the supply of operating power begins. A flowchart showing the display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 60th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining display contents of a special figure display part and a regular figure display part corresponding to the situation at the time of the start of supply of operating power. A flowchart showing the display start processing executed by the main CPU in the 61st embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a setting value update process executed by the main CPU in the sixty-second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table for special drawings, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display allocation table for special drawings, (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table for regular drawings, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display allocation table for regular drawings. 13 is a flowchart showing display start processing executed by the main CPU in the sixty-third embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded form. For convenience, Fig. 2 omits the components within the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so that it can rotate forward. The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards connected at all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in an amusement hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to an island facility. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island facility of the amusement hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11. A roughly elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is removably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area PA formed on the front side of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail section 25 and an outer rail section 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26 form a guide rail as a guide means. Game balls launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see Figure 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

The game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launching rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 55a (described later) onto the launching rail 27a, and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launching rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating a launching operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game balls are launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning holes 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when one game ball enters the first operating opening 33 or when one game ball enters the second operating opening 34, one prize ball is paid out, when one game ball enters the general winning opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32, fifteen prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an outlet 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter the various winning holes are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 24a. In addition, numerous nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components such as windmills are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

When a ball wins the through gate 35, the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a ball wins the through gate 35, and a changing image is displayed on the normal map display section 38a of the normal map unit 38 located in the lower right corner of the play area PA, an area where the game ball does not pass. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning electric role release, the stop result corresponding to that result is displayed, and the changing display on the normal map display section 38a ends, the normal power open state is entered. In the normal power open state, the normal power role 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. It may also be constituted by a display device, CRT or other type of display device such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the normal map unit 38, a normal map reserve display section 38b is provided adjacent to the normal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls that enter the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting up the normal map reserve display section 38b.

A winning lottery is triggered by the entry into the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34. The lottery result is then displayed clearly through the display effects on the special symbol unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

Regarding the special chart unit 37 in detail, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a special chart display section 37a. The display area of the special chart display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special chart display section 37a, a winning lottery is held by triggering the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, and a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special chart display section 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of display segments using LEDs are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the pattern displayed on the special chart display section 37a may be a configuration in which multiple types of letters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

Regarding the pattern display device 41 in detail, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34, the symbol is changed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas, and in each symbol row, a main character numbered from "1" to "9" is set. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scrolling display for all symbol rows is first started, and then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and finally a predetermined display is displayed in each symbol row. The process ends with the symbol displayed statically. In a game round in which the game result is a jackpot, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, in the case of the most profitable jackpot result, which will be described later, the same odd-numbered symbol combination will be stopped and displayed, and in the case of a low-probability jackpot result, which will be described later, the same even-numbered symbol combination will be stopped and displayed. If the result is a low win/high probability jackpot result, the combination of symbols is not the same symbol combination, but the combination of symbols that would not be stopped and displayed if the result is not a low win/high probability jackpot result is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the pattern display device 41 not only performs display effects triggered by winning the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34, but also performs display effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the game is switched after a winning combination is achieved. In addition, based on the winning combination of either actuation port 33, 34, display is started on the special pattern display section 37a and the pattern display device 41, and one game round is played until a predetermined result is displayed and the game ends. In addition, the manner of the variable display of the patterns on the pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the variable display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the patterns displayed by the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above patterns, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are displayed as patterns may be used.

If a jackpot is won in a lottery based on winning the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the mode transitions to an open/close execution mode in which winning is possible in the special electric winning device 32. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a large winning port (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and is equipped with an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the large winning port. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win if an internal lottery is selected to transition to the open/close execution mode. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode transitions when a winning result is obtained. Note that while winning is not impossible in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which winning is more difficult than in the open state.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram to explain the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side The ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

The fourth discharge passage section 45 exists in correspondence with the special electric winning device 32. The special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the fourth discharge passage section 45, and the game ball that entered the special electric winning device 32 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a while passing through the fourth discharge passage section 45. The fifth discharge passage section 46 exists in correspondence with the first operating port 33. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that entered the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a while passing through the fifth discharge passage section 46. The sixth discharge passage section 47 exists in correspondence with the second operating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that there is a detection range at the midpoint of the sixth discharge passage section 47, and the game ball that entered the second operating port 34 is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a while passing through the sixth discharge passage section 47. A seventh discharge passage section 48 exists corresponding to the outlet 24a. An outlet detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists at a midpoint of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and a game ball that enters the outlet 24a is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a as it passes through the seventh discharge passage section 48.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

The various detection sensors 42a-49a are all electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but any sensor can be used as long as it can detect game balls individually. The various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to the main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a-49a output a LOW level signal when they are not detecting a game ball, and output a HI level signal when they are detecting a game ball. However, this is not limited to the above, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 of the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted into it. The window panel 52 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be formed of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, or may be formed of color and transparency as long as the game area PA can be viewed through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, we will explain the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) is equipped with a main control device 60 that is responsible for the main control of the game. FIG. 5 is a front view of the main control device 60.

As shown in FIG. 5, the main control device 60 is configured by housing a main control board 61 in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 61, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be seen from outside the board box 60a. Although the board box 60a is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 housed in the board box 60a can be seen from outside the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the back of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 60b of the base box 60a, and also to visually observe the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies 60c prevent separation of these case bodies 60c and leave traces when these case bodies 60c are separated. A connecting portion 60e is provided for leaving a . A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if some of the joints 60e are destroyed and the case body 60c is separated in a state in which separation of the case body 60c is prevented using some joints 60e, another joint By bringing the portion 60e into the connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body 60c from being separated again. Furthermore, since the joint 60e is destroyed when the case body 60c is separated and traces thereof remain, it is possible to visually check the joint 60e to determine whether or not the case body 60c has been illegally separated. It becomes possible. Furthermore, a seal 60f is pasted on one side of the board box 60a opposite to the side on which the joint portions 60e are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body 60c. Thereby, when the seal 60f is peeled off when the case body 60c is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of the seal 60f.

In the main control device 60 configured as described above, the main control board 61 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and turned on to trigger a change in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 within the range of "setting 1" to "setting 6", an update button 68b which is operated to sequentially change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, a reset button 68c which is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65 described later which is provided in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the management results of the game history. In addition, the MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 is provided with a read terminal 68d for connecting a connection terminal of an external device in order to read the management results of the game history or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device. The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to six stages from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" and can be any number of stages.

The setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, the read terminal 68d (i.e., the MPU 62), and the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all provided on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61. As already explained, the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a, but the setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the read terminal 68d are not covered by the opposing wall portion 60b. In other words, the opposing wall portion 60b has separate openings in the areas facing the setting key insertion section 68a, the update button 68b, the reset button 68c, and the read terminal 68d. This makes it possible to insert a setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a, press the update button 68b, press the reset button 68c, and connect the connection terminal of an external device to the read terminal 68d without having to open the board box 60a.

By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON. In this state, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (i.e., the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is started), and the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to a changeable state in which it is possible to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this state, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed by one step in ascending order in the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" each time the update button 68b is pressed once. Note that if the update button 68b is operated in the "Setting 6" state, the setting state is updated to "Setting 1". In addition, the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion section 68a is rotated from the ON operation position in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction to return it to the initial position, and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF. When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF, the changeable state ends, and the game is able to be played with the setting value at that time. In other words, even if you operate the update button 68b after the changeable state has ended, the setting value cannot be changed.

The ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a is valid only when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 is started). Therefore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the setting value cannot be changed.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time in the pachinko machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (i.e., the higher the setting value), the higher the degree of advantage. As will be described in more detail later, there are two winning/losing lottery modes that determine the probability of winning a jackpot result: a low probability mode with a relatively low probability of winning and a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of winning, and the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode. On the other hand, regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning a jackpot result in the high probability mode is constant.

As described above, the reset button 68c is operated to clear the data in the main RAM 65, but in order to clear the data, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the reset button 68c is pressed (i.e., it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). The ON operation of the reset button 68c is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 starts). Therefore, even if the reset button 68c is pressed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has finished, the data in the main RAM 65 cannot be cleared.

As already explained, the read terminal 68d is connected to a connection terminal of an external device to read the results of game history management or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 by the external device, but in order to output to the external device, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the connection terminal of the external device connected to the read terminal 68d (i.e., it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60). The connection of the external device to the read terminal 68d is only valid when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts (i.e., when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 starts). Therefore, even if an external device is connected to the read terminal 68d after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is completed, no external output to the external device is performed.

Each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposing wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. becomes possible. Further, as already explained, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third notifications are transmitted through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display surfaces of the display devices 69a to 69c.

The display surface of the first notification display device 69a displays not only the numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetical characters. On the other hand, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c display the numbers "0" to "9". The results of the game history management are notified using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the contents of this notification will be described in detail later. In addition, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, a value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Note that the value corresponding to the setting value may be configured to be displayed on the first notification display device 69a or the second notification display device 69b. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting value before the changeable state is displayed on one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and the current setting value is displayed on another of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13, including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, to which a dispensing mechanism 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached.

The payout mechanism 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls are successively replenished from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged into the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power source on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile memory means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63.

The main RAM 65 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages game history based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls into the general prize opening 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, and In accordance with the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is grasped. In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, is grasped by the management IC 66.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a includes a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, and a first operating opening detection sensor. A sensor 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an outlet detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a are included. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether the ball enters each ball entry section. Further, the main side CPU 63 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings to the first operating port 33 and various drawings based on winnings to the second operating port 34.

The input side of the MPU 62 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a, an update button 68b, and a reset button 68c, which are provided on the main control board 61. The setting key insertion section 68a is provided with a sensor (not shown), which detects whether the setting key insertion section 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position. The main CPU 63 then identifies whether the setting key insertion section 68a is located at the ON operation position or the OFF operation position based on the detection result from the sensor. The update button 68b is provided with a sensor (not shown), which detects whether the update button 68b is pressed. The main CPU 63 then identifies whether the update button 68b is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor. The reset button 68c is provided with a sensor (not shown), which detects whether the reset button 68c is pressed. The main CPU 63 then identifies whether the reset button 68c is pressed based on the detection result from the sensor.

A power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball corresponding entering part of the above-mentioned ball entering part where the occurrence of the ball entering corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Ru. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 81.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to the special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the opening and closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, the normal electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the normal electric device 34a of the second operating port 34, the special chart unit 37, and the normal chart unit 38. Incidentally, the special chart unit 37 is provided with a special chart display unit 37a and a special chart reserved display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal chart unit 38 is provided with a normal chart display unit 38a and a normal chart reserved display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open/close execution mode, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Also, when the open state of the normal electric role 34a is won, the main CPU 63 executes drive control of the normal electric drive unit 34b so that the normal electric role 34a is opened and closed. Also, during each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special chart display unit 37a. Also, when the lottery result of whether or not the normal electric role 34a is opened is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the normal chart display unit 38a. Also, when a win occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when a variable display starts in the special chart display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special chart reserve display unit 37b, and when a win occurs in the through gate 35, or when a variable display starts in the normal chart display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the normal chart reserve display unit 38b.

First to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Furthermore, the management results of the gaming history in the management IC 66 are notified through the display on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the current setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In this case, the display of the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b is controlled by the management IC 66 and not by the main CPU 63, whereas the third notification display device 69c is controlled by the main CPU 63. The display is controlled by the management IC 66. Regarding the display on the third notification display device 69c, display control by the main CPU 63 is given priority over display control by the management IC 66.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the third notification display device 69c may also be configured so that its display is controlled by the management IC 66 and not by the main CPU 63. In this case, when the current setting value is to be displayed on the third notification display device 69c upon changing the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable that the main CPU 63 instructs the management IC 66 to display the setting value.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d. The reading terminal 68d is provided with a sensor (not shown), and the sensor detects whether or not the reading terminal 68d is connected to a connection terminal of an external device. Then, the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not a connection terminal of an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d based on the detection result from the sensor. Further, when an external device is connected to the reading terminal 68d, the management results of the game history in the management IC 66 or the information (programs and data) stored in the main ROM 64 are outputted to the external device.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement hall. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the power supply and launch control device 78 generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure supplies memory retention power to the main RAM 65 of the main control device 60 and the payout control device 77. The power supply and launch control device 78 is also responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. As already explained, the payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a power switch, and when the power switch is turned ON, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the power switch is turned OFF, the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped.

The audio and light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on commands received from the audio and light emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be described using FIG. 7.

The master CPU 63 uses various counter information during play to perform a lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, settings for the display of the special chart display section 37a, settings for the display of the pattern display device 41, settings for the display of the normal chart display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the master CPU 63 uses a winning random number counter C1 used to draw a lottery for a winning occurrence, a winning type counter C2 used to determine the type of winning, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw a reach occurrence lottery when the pattern display device 41 misses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuating type counter CS that determines the display duration time in the special chart display section 37a and the pattern display device 41. In addition, the master CPU 63 uses a normal power role release counter C4 used to draw a lottery for whether or not the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 is in a normal power open state. The above counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the master RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 65a provided as acquired information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The reservation storage area 65a includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, a combination of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of reservation area RE2 → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .

The number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other multiple, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. At this time, a judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail below.

First, the normal power feature opening counter C4 will be described. The normal power feature opening counter C4 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and return to "0" after it reaches its maximum value. The normal power feature opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal power reserve area 65c of the main RAM 65 when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a specified timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the normal power feature 34a to an open state based on the stored value of the normal power feature opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support provided by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner into the game area PA, the general electrical accessory 34a of the second actuation port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity utility item release counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 in both cases). , In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. has been done. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display on the display section 38a is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 33 is higher than in the second actuation port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 is higher than in the first actuation port 33. When a winning entry into the second actuation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode becoming in the normal power release state per unit time compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration for increasing the probability of winning the normal power release state in the normal power release lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of reserved time (for example, the time of variable display executed in the normal power display unit 38a based on winning the through gate 35) are prepared for the time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of conditions from increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, shortening the reserved time reserved between one normal power release lottery and the next normal power release lottery, shortening the average time of the reserved time, and increasing the winning probability.

Here, as already explained, the pachinko machine 10 has setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode are different from each other. The setting values are the same, and the opening frequency and opening mode of the utility power accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode are also the same regardless of the setting values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the opening frequency and opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in at least one of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. It may also be a configuration. For example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the frequency of opening of the general electric accessory 34a in the low frequency support mode may be configured, and the second operation when the general electric accessory 34a is opened once in the low frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of a game ball entering the mouth 34 is increased. Furthermore, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of opening of the general electric accessory 34a in the high-frequency support mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the game ball entering the operating port 34 is increased.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 when a game ball enters the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/lose table in the main ROM 64. Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various tables stored in the main ROM 64. As win/lose tables, low probability win/lose tables 64a to 64f for the low probability mode and high probability win/lose table 64g for the high probability mode are stored.

The low probability accuracy tables 64a to 64f are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." In other words, the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and the setting is referenced when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". 2 low probability correctness table 64b, low probability correctness table 64c for setting 3 which is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3", and low probability correctness table 64c for setting 3 when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". , a low probability correctness table 64d for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", a low probability correctness table 64e for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5", and the pachinko machine 10 There exists a low certainty propriety table 64f for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 6".

These low probability tables 64a to 64f are set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. Specifically, when the low probability table 64a for setting 1 is referenced, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/320, when the low probability table 64b for setting 2 is referenced, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/310, when the low probability table 64c for setting 3 is referenced, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/300, when the low probability table 64d for setting 4 is referenced, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/290, when the low probability table 64e for setting 5 is referenced, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/280, and when the low probability table 64f for setting 6 is referenced, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/270. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is higher, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, only one type of high certainty validity table 64g is provided so that it is common to any setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". The high probability success/failure table 64g is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot result is higher than the low probability success/failure tables 64a to 64f in any setting state from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". Specifically, when the high probability success/failure table 64g is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/30. This makes it possible to make the high probability mode more advantageous than the low probability mode regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, even the lowest setting state "Setting 1" becomes a high probability mode, making it possible to make the probability of a jackpot result higher than the low probability mode of "Setting 6" which is the highest setting state. becomes. In addition, regarding the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of advantages or disadvantages depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and to suppress the storage capacity for storing the high probability probability table 64g in the main side ROM 64 in advance. becomes possible.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) the manner of opening and closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening and closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and (3) the support mode in the regular electric device 34a of the second operating port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, round games are executed up to a predetermined number of times.

A round play is a play that continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the special electric winning device 32. In addition, the number of round plays in the open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is the same fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round plays is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types are set for one opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long time mode in which the open duration is set to a long time of 29 seconds, and a short time mode in which the open duration is set to 0.06 seconds, which is a short time shorter than the above long time, is set.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. controlled. Further, in the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, the open duration time is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, if one opening is made in a long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will receive a prize equal to the upper limit number in one round game, and one in a short-time mode. When the number of rounds is opened, it is expected that no winnings will be made to the special electric winning device 32, or that only one prize will be won, if any.

In the high frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed, the number of rounds of play, the duration of opening for one opening, and the upper limit number of times per round of play in the high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary, so long as the frequency of winning in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode.

The distribution destinations of the jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main side ROM 64 as a distribution table 64h, as shown in FIG. In the allocation table 64h, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result are set as the destinations to which the jackpot result is distributed in the case of a jackpot result.

A low probability jackpot result is one in which the open/close execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose selection mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, this high frequency support mode will transition to the low frequency support mode if the number of plays reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 plays) after the transition.

For low winning and high probability jackpot results, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to a jackpot state accordingly.

In relation to each of the above gaming states, the normal gaming state refers to a state where the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode, not the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a low win/high probability jackpot result is not set as the game result. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode with a low winning/high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of a low probability jackpot result and a most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table 64h, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to low probability jackpot results. "15-29" corresponds to the most profitable jackpot result.

Only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so that it is common to all settings from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." This makes it possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage in the distribution pattern of the jackpot result from being caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and also makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to previously store the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the manner in which the jackpot results are distributed differs depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most profitable jackpot result, or the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of being allocated to the most profitable jackpot result or the low winning, high probability jackpot result. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the game will enter the high probability mode after a jackpot result. In addition, the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of being assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result.If the setting value is high, it will not be assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result, whereas if the setting value is low, the probability of being assigned to a low winning/high probability jackpot result will be lower. It may also be configured such that it can be distributed to jackpot results. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the opening/closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode will occur.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value. In this pachinko machine 10, an expectation effect is set as a type of display effect in the pattern display device 41. In a gaming machine equipped with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing a variable display of patterns, in which the final stop result in a game round resulting in a predetermined jackpot result is a grant-corresponding result, the expectation effect refers to a display state that makes the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the grant-corresponding result from the start of the variable display of patterns in the pattern display device 41 until the stop result is derived and displayed, in a gaming machine in which the final stop result is a grant-corresponding result in a game round resulting in a predetermined jackpot result. Specifically, the grant-corresponding result is a combination of patterns with the same number attached to one of the pay lines that is stopped and displayed.

There are two types of expectation effects: reach displays and warning displays that are set to anticipate the occurrence of reach displays or corresponding results before the reach display occurs.

The reach display includes a display state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed by stopping the display of the patterns for some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern. In addition, it includes a state in which the reach pattern combination is displayed as described above, the remaining pattern rows display a changing pattern, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on the background screen, and a reach performance is performed by displaying a reduced or hidden display of the reach pattern combination and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a video on almost the entire display surface 41a.

Pre-notification displays include a mode in which characters are displayed separately from the patterns on the pattern rows in a situation in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner in all pattern rows after the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 starts displaying the variable patterns, or in a situation in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner in some pattern rows. Pre-notification displays also include a mode in which the background screen is displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner, and a mode in which the patterns on the pattern rows are displayed in a predetermined manner different from the previous manner. Such pre-notification displays can occur in both game rounds when a reach display is made and when a reach display is not made, but are set to occur with a higher probability when a reach display is made than when a reach display is not made.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a game round in which the same symbol combination is ultimately displayed. Also, in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not displayed, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in a game round corresponding to a miss result, the reach display is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that a preview display with a low appearance rate is A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that the occurrence is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Here, the probability of a reach display occurring in a game that results in a losing result is the same regardless of the setting state of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." This makes it possible to ensure that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 does not result in an advantage or disadvantage in terms of the probability of a reach display occurring in a game that results in a losing result. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of a reach display occurring in a game that results in a losing result.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration time on the special symbol display section 37a and the display duration time of symbols on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is executed. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display section 37a and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the symbol.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In this power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses before proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of this power-on wait process, the operation start and initial settings of the pattern display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on (step S103). If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on (step S103: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S104). When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S104: YES), each area of the main side RAM 65 is " 0" is cleared, and initial settings are made for the area cleared to "0" (step S105). In other words, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while pressing the reset button 68c without turning on the setting key insertion part 68a, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 regarding the setting value information is Clearing of the main RAM 65 is performed while maintaining the state before the power supply was stopped, and the storage area where the clearing has been performed is initialized. This makes it possible to initialize other areas of the main RAM 65 without changing set values. In addition, in step S105, initial settings are performed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S104: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S106). The power outage flag is provided in the main RAM 65, and if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved at the time of power outage, that is, the validity of the stored data (step S107). If the process of step S105 is executed, or if a positive determination is made in step S107, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 65 (step S108). Specifically, if the setting value is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S106 to S108, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S109), and then an infinite loop is entered. The operation prohibition process is released by executing an all-clear process (step S117) described below.

If the determination is affirmative in all of steps S106 to S108, a power-on setting process is executed (step S110). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 is set to an initial value, such as initializing the power outage flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. After executing the process of step S110, a recognition process (step S111) is executed to cause the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process is executed to output various data to an external device connected to the read terminal 68d of the MPU 62 (step S112). The details of the recognition process and the data output process will be explained later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S112 is completed and before the process in step S113 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S112 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S113 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S113 to step S116 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S113 to S116 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S113, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S114, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S115, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 65, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S116, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. If the process of step S116 is executed, the process returns to step S113 and the processes of steps S113 to S116 are repeated.

On the other hand, if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (step S103: YES), all areas of the main RAM 65, including the areas in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the main RAM 65, are cleared to "0" and the areas cleared to "0" are initialized (step S117). In other words, if an operation to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, all areas of the main RAM 65 are cleared to "0" even if the reset button 68c is not pressed, and the memory areas in which the clearing process has been performed are initialized. In addition, in step S117, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. Note that this is not limited to this, and even if an operation to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the all-clear process of the main RAM 65 is not executed, and the all-clear process may be executed if an operation to change the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and the reset button 68c is pressed.

After that, a set value update process is executed in step S118, and a set value update signal output process is executed in step S119, and then the process moves to step S110. The setting value update process will be explained below. Note that the output process of the setting value update signal will be explained in detail later. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process.

First, the setting value counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S201). The setting value counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to identify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting the setting value counter to "1", when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "Setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Then, a process to start displaying the setting value is executed (step S202). In the process to start displaying the setting value, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed. When changing the setting value, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

After that, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned OFF (step S203: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing of the update button 68b has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. If a negative determination is made in step S204, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned OFF.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S204: YES), the value of the set value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S205). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S206: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S207). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S206, or if the process in step S207 is executed, a setting value display update process is executed (step S208). In the setting value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S208, the process returns to step S203, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF. If it has not been turned OFF (step S203: NO), the process of steps S204 and onwards is executed again. If it has been turned OFF (step S203: YES), a process of ending the display of the setting value is executed (step S209). In the process of ending the display of the setting value, the display of the setting value on the third notification display device 69c is ended.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 11. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds).

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S301). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an infinite loop is executed after executing power outage processing. Become. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S302). In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S303, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S114, and in step S304, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S115.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S305). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In the subsequent step S306, it is determined whether or not the game progress is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S306, the processes from step S307 onwards are executed.

In step S307, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to that output information to the various drive units 32b, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the special power winning device 32 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the special power drive unit 32b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when information is set to switch the normal power device 34a of the second operating port 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the normal power drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Thereafter, reading processing is executed (step S308). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Then, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S309). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the out gate 24a, the general winning gate 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating gate 33, the second operating gate 34, and the through gate 35. Details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S310). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Then, a launch control process is executed to control the launch of the gaming balls (step S311). When the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, one gaming ball is launched every 0.6 seconds, which is the predetermined launch cycle. In the following step S312, as an input status monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S308, a disconnection check is performed for each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and front door frame 14 is confirmed.

Then, a special chart special electricity control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the open/close execution mode (step S313). The special chart special electricity control process will be described in detail later.

Then, execute the normal map normal power control process (step S314). In the normal map normal power control process, if a winning entry has occurred in the through gate 35, execute a process to obtain the reserved information on the normal map side, and if reserved information on the normal map side is stored, execute an opening judgment for the reserved information, and execute a process to perform a normal map performance triggered by the opening judgment. Also, execute a process to open and close the normal power role 34a of the second operating port 34 based on the result of the opening judgment. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Also, if the opening and closing execution mode is selected, the support mode will be the low frequency support mode even if the previous support mode was the high frequency support mode.

In the following step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. , Output information is set to reflect the increase/decrease in the number of hold information related to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure pending display section 38b. In addition, in step S315, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S313 and step S314, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

Then, a payout status receiving process is executed to confirm the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 and perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S316). A payout output process is also executed to set the prize ball command as the output target (step S317). An external information setting process is also executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt processing (step S318). Then, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the ball entry result in the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S319). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

Next, the special chart special power control process in step S313 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 12.

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the reservation information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and if a winning has occurred, the number of pending in the pending storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“4” in this embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit value, the number of reservations is increased by 1, and each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S302 is set for reservation. It is stored in the first reservation area among the vacant reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of area RE. In addition, if winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 occur at the same time, the process for acquiring the pending information is executed within the range of executing the pending information obtaining process once. Run multiple times. Furthermore, when new hold information is acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of pending information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the increase in the pending information.

Then, the information of the special picture special charge counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S402), and the special picture special charge address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S403). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special picture special charge counter is obtained from the special picture special charge address table (step S404), and a jump is made to the process indicated by the obtained start address among the processes of steps S406 to S412 (step S405). The special picture special charge counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of steps S406 to S412 should be executed, and the special picture special charge address table is set with the start address of the program for executing the processes of steps S406 to S412 corresponding to the numerical information of the special picture special charge counter.

In step S406, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, the data setting process is executed on the condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S501: YES) (step S502). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is subtracted by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. Specifically, the data is shifted from the second reservation area RE2 to the first reservation area RE1. , third reservation area RE3 → second reservation area RE2, fourth reservation area RE4 → third reservation area RE3, and then the fourth reservation area RE4 is cleared to "0". At this time, a shift command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 to make it recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the command, it updates the display of the image showing the number of pending information on the symbol display device 41 to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the pending information.

After executing the data setting process, the validity table is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). Specifically, first, information indicating the winning/losing lottery mode from the main side RAM 65 is read out to grasp the current winning/failing lottery mode. If it is the high probability mode, the high probability correctness table 64g is read from the main side ROM 64. On the other hand, when the mode is low probability mode, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is grasped by reading the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65. Then, the low certainty propriety tables 64a to 64f corresponding to the grasped setting values are read from the main side ROM 64.

Thereafter, the validity determination process is executed with reference to the validity tables 64a to 64g read in step S503 (step S504). In the win/fail judgment process, the information for the win/fail judgment among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1 is replaced with the jackpot numerical information set in the win/fail tables 64a to 64g read out in step S503. Determine whether or not it matches.

If the result of the judgment process is a jackpot winning result (step S505: YES), a distribution judgment process is executed (step S506). In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2, is read out of the information stored in the execution area AE. Then, referring to the distribution table 64h provided in the main side ROM 64, it is specified to which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds. Specifically, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, a low-win high-probability jackpot result, and a most profitable jackpot result.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, information on the mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

Thereafter, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S508). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, and in step S508, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the flags used in the distribution determination process of step S506 are selected. Set "1" to the flag corresponding to the result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S505 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (step S509). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a in the game round related to the start of the current variation is obtained from the stop result table for miss results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The identified information is written to the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

After executing either step S508 or step S509, a process for determining the duration of a gaming session is executed (step S510). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-reach display will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if the game round related to the start of the current variation is a low-probability jackpot result or a most advantageous jackpot result, it is determined that the reach display will occur. Moreover, if it is not any jackpot result and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

If it is determined that a reach display will occur, the reach occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain the duration of the game corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. On the other hand, if it is determined that a reach display will not occur, the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced to obtain the duration of the game corresponding to the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS. Incidentally, the duration of the game that can be obtained by reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of the game that can be obtained by reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

The duration of the game round when no reach occurs is set such that the longer the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE, the shorter the duration of the game round. Also, in situations where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter game duration is selected than in situations where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, compared to cases where the number of pending information is the same. A duration table for reach non-occurrence is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of a game round does not vary depending on the number of pending information or the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the duration of the game round when the reach occurs. Further, in the case of various jackpot results, separate duration tables may be set for each of the case of a losing reach and the case of a losing result in which no reach occurs. In this case, the duration of the game round will be allocated according to each game result.

Then, the information on the duration of the game acquired in step S510 is set in the special chart special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S511). The update of the numerical information set in the special chart special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S310). Incidentally, as a performance for a game round, the display of changing patterns in the special chart display section 37a and the display of changing patterns in the pattern display device 41 are performed, and when each of these display of changes is ended, the final stop display is performed for the final stop period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) with the stop result of that game round displayed (a predetermined combination of patterns is waiting on the pay line in the pattern display device 41). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S510 is the total time for one game round.

Then, the variation command and the type command are sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step S512). The variation command includes information on the duration of the game round. Here, as described above, the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the reach duration table. Therefore, even if the variation command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the sound and light emission control device 81 can determine whether or not a reach has occurred from the information on the duration of the game round. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the variation command may also include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound and light emission control device 81 receives a variation command and a type command from the main CPU 63, it causes the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41 to execute the presentation for the game round. In this case, the presentation for that game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command. In addition, the pattern display device 41 displays a variation of the patterns as the presentation for the game round, and when the presentation for that game round ends, a combination of patterns corresponding to the results of the win/lose determination process and the allocation determination process is displayed in a stopped state.

Then, the display of the changing pattern on the special chart display section 37a is started (step S513). Then, the special chart special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S514). In this case, since the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter is "0" when the special chart change start process is executed, the numerical information of the special chart special electricity counter becomes "1". Then, the eleventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S515). The eleventh output flag is a flag for specifying to the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that a game round has started should be executed to the management IC 66.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52), in step S407, a process during special figure variation is executed. In the special figure variation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the duration of the game round and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set as a rule. Execute processing to change the When it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation. Update things. Note that in this embodiment, the final stop command is not sent from the main CPU 63 to the audio emission control device 81.

In step S408, special figure confirmation processing is executed. In the special figure confirmation process, the display mode of the symbols in the special figure display section 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. In addition, in the special figure confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening/closing execution mode will occur. If the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". When a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter changes from the one corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation to the one corresponding to the special electric line start process. Update.

In step S409, a special call start process is executed. In the special call start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the opening period setting process is executed. Further, an opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the opening command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute the opening effect. If the opening period has elapsed, start processing is executed to start the first round game. In the start process, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting this end condition, the upper limit duration time for keeping the special electric winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set, and the upper limit duration time when the special electric winning device 32 is allowed to win in the first round game of this time is set. The upper limit number of game balls is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.

In step S410, the special line open process is executed. In the special line open process, it is determined whether the end condition of the round game is met. If the end condition is met, the special line winning device 32 is closed. If the currently ended round game is not the last round game executed, the numerical information of the special chart special line counter is incremented by 1 to update the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line open process to that corresponding to the special line closed process, and if the currently ended round game is the last round game executed, the numerical information of the special chart special line counter is incremented by 2 to update the numerical information of the counter from that corresponding to the special line open process to that corresponding to the special line end process.

In step S411, special train closed processing is executed. In the special train closing process, it is determined whether the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set when the previous round game ends. When the interval period has elapsed, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and conditions for ending the round game are set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special train special train counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from that corresponding to the special train closed process to that corresponding to the special train open process.

In step S412, special call termination processing is executed. In the special electric signal termination process, if the process for starting the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not been executed yet, the ending period (for example, 5 seconds) is set and an ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 81. . By receiving the ending command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 to execute an ending effect. When the ending period has elapsed, each of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to a mode corresponding to the jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area in which information "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, this area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. Although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, in order to limit the types of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight types, the group of signals to be input to the input port 63a is switched through switching control by the driver IC.

In the ball entry detection process (step S309) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the exit detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not detecting as a detection signal when it does not detect the passage of a game ball, and outputs a HI level signal indicating that it is detecting as a detection signal when it detects the passage of a game ball. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, it stores "1" information in the corresponding bit. In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a do not detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "0" information corresponding to the information indicating that it is not detecting, and when the ball passage is detected, the corresponding bit stores "1" information corresponding to the information indicating that it is detecting.

Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S309 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

When it is confirmed that the 0th bit D0 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S601: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S602), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S603). The first output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. The 10-ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. If the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 11), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1 when the 10 prize ball command is output once. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S604: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S605), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S606). The second output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S607: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S608), and the value of the 10-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S609). The third output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S610: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S611), the fourth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S612), and The value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S613). The special electric winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric line control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric prize winning flag, it is possible to input one game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into a special electric winning device 32 in a round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the 15 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S614: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S615), and the fifth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S616). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S617). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the game is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a. Processing for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of pending information that has been stored is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S317 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

If it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S618: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S619), the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S620), and the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by one (step S621). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special chart special electric control process (step S313) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that the second activation winning flag is set to "1", a process is executed to store new reserved information, provided that the number of reserved information stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved storage area 65a is less than the upper limit of four. In the special electric special electric control process (step S313), it is confirmed that the second activation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the second activation winning flag is cleared to "0". The sixth output flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second activation port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has switched from a state in which "0" is stored to a state in which "1" is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S622: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S623). The seventh output flag is a flag that specifies to the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66.

If it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has switched from a state in which "0" information is stored to a state in which "1" information is stored, it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S624: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S625). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the normal map normal power control process (step S314) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), by confirming that the gate winning flag is set to "1", the process is executed to store the current numerical information of the normal power role release counter C4 as the normal map side reserved information in the normal power reserve area 65c, provided that the number of reserved information on the normal map side stored in the normal power reserve area 65c is less than the upper limit of four. In the normal map and normal power control process (step S314), it is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to that confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

As already explained, the timer interrupt process (Figure 11) is started at a 4 millisecond cycle, so when one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-49a starts to detect one game ball, the main CPU 63 determines that one game ball has been detected by the ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a while the ball entry detection sensor 42a-49a continues to detect that one game ball. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first through seventh output flags.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the dispensing control device 77. First, we will explain the electrical configuration of the dispensing control device 77 and the various devices that communicate with the dispensing control device 77, with reference to the block diagram in Figure 16.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM93, a payout side RAM94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (i.e., a volatile memory means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 is randomly accessible, and when compared with the payout side ROM 93 for the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires less time to read. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of two-way communication with the main CPU 63. By receiving a prize ball command from the main CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. The payout side CPU 92 also monitors whether or not the game balls can be paid out normally, and when it is determined that the game balls cannot be paid out normally, it stops the payout device 76 even if the payout side RAM 94 stores information on the number of prize balls that have not been paid out. The payout side CPU 92 also transmits a payout limit command to the main CPU 63 indicating that the game balls cannot be paid out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout limit command, it transmits a notification command to the sound and light emission control device 81 so that a notification indicating that the game balls cannot be paid out normally is executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light emission unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. The states in which it is not possible to normally dispense game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 has not been refilled with game balls, an abnormal dispense state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is open from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is open from the inner frame 13.

A full tank sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank sensor is canceled. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

A no-ball detection sensor (not shown) is provided at a midway point in the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that a no-ball state exists when the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball, and determines that the no-ball state has been released when the state in which the no-ball detection sensor continues to not detect a game ball is released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 identifies a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front part of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closed detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and when the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92. When the dispensing side CPU 92 receives a closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, it determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, it determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a front door close command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the front door frame 14 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the front door frame 14 is in an open state when it receives a front door open command, and determines that the front door frame 14 is in a closed state when it receives a front door close command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front part of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from a closed state to an open state, and transmits a main body close command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from an open state to a closed state. The main CPU 63 determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when it receives a main body open command, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when it receives a main body close command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 17. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 milliseconds).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S701). As already explained, the full tank process is a process to identify whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if the tank is full. At the same time, a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is sent to the main side CPU 63.

After that, the no-ball process is executed (step S702). In the no-ball process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the no-ball state is present based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and if the no-ball state is present, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls, and a command indicating the no-ball state is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the no-ball state is released, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a command indicating that the no-ball state has been released is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S703). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Then, a front door open monitoring process is executed (step S704). In the front door open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open or not based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is open, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls and a front door open command is sent to the main CPU 63. In addition, if the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls and a front door close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S705). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball is At the same time, a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Then, a command read process is executed (step S706). In the command read process, a process for reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed, and the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S707), a payout control process for controlling the execution of the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 is executed (step S708). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and when one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Then, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in this timer interrupt process (step S709).

Next, we will explain the configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC installed in the gaming hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are each electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. Regarding the configuration of this electrical connection in detail, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a midpoint of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 that branches from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is not only input to the dispensing side CPU 92, but also input to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through the control of the dispensing side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in detail, the signal relay board 98 has a branch path SL4 that branches off from the signal path SL3 that runs from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92, but also input to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without going through the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, we will explain the contents of the information that is externally output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC. First, we will explain the contents of the information that is externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC.

In the external information setting process (step S318) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that the first game round has ended. A predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the gaming area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

In the external information setting process (step S709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the payout CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC can grasp the manner in which the game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 via the external terminal board 97. For example,
・The ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. ・The ball payout rate in a normal game state other than the open/close execution mode and the high frequency support mode (hereinafter, this ball payout rate will be referred to as "B")
・The ball output rate in the open/close execution mode ・The ball output rate in the high frequency support mode ・The number of times the game is executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S")
B-S x "number of winning balls for winning the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34"
The number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that enter the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
B-(S1 x "number of winning balls for winning through the first actuation port 33" + S2 x "number of winning balls for winning through the second actuation port 34")
The probability of occurrence of the open/close execution mode per unit play time, the probability of occurrence of the high frequency support mode per unit play time, etc. are calculated. This allows the hall computer HC to manage the ball entry patterns of the game balls in the play area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls refers to the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing gaming history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101, and the read terminal 68d already explained.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Furthermore, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of various processes being executed by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, It is equipped with These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be able to communicate in both directions.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 68d. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 68d are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built into the MPU 62.

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. The management side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and outputs the measured date and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the management CPU 112. This is a configuration that allows this. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain data, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is used to store information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p. The contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described in detail later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain data, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the game history received from the main CPU 63 via the management I/F 111. The contents of the history memory 117 will be described in detail later.

The calculation result memory 131 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The calculation result memory 131 is used to sequentially store various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are sequentially displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and are output to an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a number of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p are provided. Each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p can receive one type of signal via signal paths 118a-118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a-122p stores "0" as the first data when the input signal is at a LOW level, and stores "1" as the second data when the input signal is at a HI level. Note that the relationship between LOW and HI and the first and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when no new game balls are detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and outputs a HI level first signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level first signal has been input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and outputs a HI level second signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level second signal has been input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when no new game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, and outputs a HI level fifth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level fifth signal has been input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when no new game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, and outputs a HI level sixth signal for a specific period of time when one game ball is detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HI level sixth signal has been input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal at a LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. In this case, a seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is being input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs a LOW level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is not in progress, and continuously outputs a HI level eighth signal when the open/close execution mode is in progress.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at LOW level when the mode is not high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at HI level when the mode is high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open period is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues to output the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. and output it.

An 11th signal corresponding to whether or not a game round has started is input to the 11th buffer 122k. In this case, the master CPU 63 continues to output a LOW level 11th signal until a game round starts, and outputs a HIGH level 11th signal for a specific period of time when a game round starts. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that a HIGH level 11th signal has been input to the 11th buffer 122k.

A setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the main CPU 63 has newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level setting value update signal in a situation where a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not performed, and when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Then, the HI level setting value update signal outputs a pulse signal that is maintained for a specific period for a number of minutes corresponding to the newly set setting value. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level setting value update signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

The 16th buffer 122p contains an output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize the opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d. is input. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

The 12th buffer 122l, the 13th buffer 122m, and the 14th buffer 122n can receive signals from the main CPU 63, but are blank to which normal signals are not input in the pachinko machine 10. In this way, by providing the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 with more buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, It becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the signal paths 118l to 118n are not formed between the buffers 122l to 122n to be blanked.

The input of a set value update signal to the 15th buffer 122o and the input of an output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p are determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 can determine that a set value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o and that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. On the other hand, the type of signals input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are identified by the management CPU 112 upon receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The identification of the types of these signals in the management CPU 112 is performed by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 when control is started in the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 as the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 begins, as will be described in detail later. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals when operating power is being supplied, the information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referenced.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, the second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored. The third correspondence area 123c stores information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is the special electric winning device 32, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal. The fourth correspondence area 123d also stores information indicating that the signal is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls (15) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32. The fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. The fifth correspondence area 123e also stores information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls (1) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33. The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth correspondence area 123f also stores information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is the one, as well as information indicating the number of game balls (one) that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second actuation port 34. The seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that the outlet 24a is the one that is used by the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the mode is the open/close execution mode, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. The ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the mode is the high frequency support mode, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. The tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that a game round has started, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k.

The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that it is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the twelfth buffer 122l, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores information indicating that it is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that it is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, as information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n.

As described above, the configuration is such that the management CPU 112 specifies what kind of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. , it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n, information for recognizing the type of signal is output in advance, and information for identifying the type of signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n by the management CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 each time a signal is output, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

In addition, the information for the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first through fourteenth buffers 122a through 122n is output when the supply of operating power begins. This allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of signal input to the first through fourteenth buffers 122a through 122n when play begins on this pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the information that a setting value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o and the information that an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p are set during the design stage of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to omit the process for identifying the type of signal input to the 15th buffer 122o and the 16th buffer 122p for the setting value update signal and output instruction signal that are reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the process for identifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, multiple pieces of pointer information are set in consecutive numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and 1 byte of data capacity is assigned as an area for storing RTC information, and 1 byte of data capacity is assigned as an area for storing correspondence information. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to a signal input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n (actually the first to eleventh buffers 122a to 122k in the case of this pachinko machine 10), the date and time information measured in the current RTC 115 is first stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer 122a-122n that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence area 123a-123n corresponding to the buffer 122a-122n in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 that corresponds to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry portion corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a detect game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning hole 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. If the buffer 122a to 122n that triggered the information storage this time is one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to the buffer 122a to 122g is the first to seventh buffer. The information about the type of ball entering part is read out from one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the information about the type of ball entering part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the open/close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open is inputted, and a signal indicating whether a game round has been started is inputted to the eleventh buffer 122k. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j, and information indicating that it is the game round is stored in the eleventh correspondence area 123k.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is not in effect, and continues to output the HI level 8 signal when the open/close execution mode is in effect. Therefore, the management CPU 112 can determine that the open/close execution mode has started when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, and that the open/close execution mode has ended when the 8th signal changes from HI to LOW. In addition, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, or when the HI to LOW signal changes, the management CPU 112 determines that an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 has occurred. In other words, when the 8th signal changes from LOW to HI, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. In addition, when the eighth signal changes from a high level to a low level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are stored in an area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at LOW level when it is not in high-frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the 9th signal at HI-level when it is in high-frequency support mode. , the management side CPU 112 specifies that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and the high-frequency support mode ends when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that. Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information. Furthermore, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the termination information are transferred to the history information storage area. It is stored in an area for storing 125 correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continue outputting, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both cases where the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored in the history information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125. Further, when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 11th signal at LOW level until the start timing of the game round, and when the start timing of the game round comes, the 11th signal at HI level is output for a specific period. Output a signal. Therefore, the management side CPU 112 specifies that a game round has started when the eleventh signal changes from LOW level to HI level. In other words, when the 11th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, information indicating that it is a game time read from the 11th correspondence area 123k is stored in the correspondence relationship information of the history information storage area 125. Store it in the area.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all the history information that has occurred during that period, even if there are 10 consecutive business days in which the pachinko machine 10 continues to fire game balls from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This allows all history information to be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information that specifies pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, if an opportunity to store history information exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage area 125 where the oldest history information is stored will be overwritten with new history information in order. Become.

Additionally, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by an external device, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0" and the pointer information of "0" becomes the writing target. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing game history using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition processing is executed in step S111 in the main processing (Figure 9).

First, a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "14" (step S801). The recognition output counter is the remainder of the information output for making the management side CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 correspond to. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify the required number of times. As already explained, since the 14 first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n are the targets of signal type recognition, "14" is set in the recognition output counter.

Then, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S802). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. In other words, the first to eighth signals (i.e., the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information are used to output a command to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n correspond to. This makes it possible to reduce the number of signal paths and simplify the configuration compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the output of the identification start command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal. By receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 specifies that it should start processing to store information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116.

Then, a type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S803). In this case, the first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and then the n+1 buffer is set as the signal type after the n buffer, so that the signal type recognition setting corresponding to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "14" to "12", a type identification command indicating that it is the general winning port 31 and the number of prize balls is read, if the recognition output counter is "11", a type identification command indicating that it is the special winning device 32 and the number of prize balls is read, if the recognition output counter is "10", a type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read, if the recognition output counter is "9", a type identification command indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and the number of prize balls is read, if the recognition output counter is "8", an out port 2 is set as the signal type recognition setting. If the recognition output counter is "7", it reads a type identification command indicating that it is in the open/close execution mode; if the recognition output counter is "6", it reads a type identification command indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode; if the recognition output counter is "5", it reads a type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14; if the recognition output counter is "4", it reads a type identification command indicating that it is a play count; if the recognition output counter is "3" to "1", it reads a type identification command indicating that it is blank.

Then, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S804). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits, like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started so that the management CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123n corresponding to the buffer that is the current setting target among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S805), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S806). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S806: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after being subtracted by 1 is executed (steps S803 and Step S804).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S806: YES), output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S807). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification end command is started, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11) is started. The combination of processes from step S908 onward in the management process is executed 16 or more times before the process starts.

First, it is determined whether or not an identification start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S901). If an identification start command has not been received (step S901: NO), a setting update recognition process is executed (step S902) and then the process returns to step S901. In the setting update recognition process, which will be described in detail later, when a new setting is made to the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63, a process corresponding to the new setting is executed.

When an identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S901: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S903). The setting target counter is a counter that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of buffer 122a to 122n for which the signal type is to be set. The first buffer 122a is the first to be set as the signal type, and thereafter the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer are set as the signal type.

After that, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES), a correspondence setting process is executed (step S905). In the correspondence setting process, information on the signal type set in the currently received type identification command is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n of the correspondence memory 116. Then, the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S906).

If a negative judgment is made in step S904, or if the processing of step S906 is executed, it is judged whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907). If an identification end command has not been received (step S907: NO), the process returns to step S904, and the processing of steps S905 and S906 is executed again on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S904: YES).

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S907: YES), the processes of steps S908 to S910 are repeatedly executed. In step S908, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, although the details will be described later. In step S909, although details will be described later, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the results of the calculations are reported on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Executes display output processing for In step S910, although details will be described later, external output processing is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 and various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to the reading terminal 68d.

Figure 24 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n is stored in the correspondence memory 116. Figure 24(a) shows the period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (i.e., the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), Figure 24(b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, Figure 24(c) shows the execution period of the identification state during which processing is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122n, and Figure 24(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S905) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 24(a). Ru. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t2, when the identification start command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that a command is being sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and outputs the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S901 of the management process (FIG. 23). Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). Further, at the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). Thereafter, at timing t5 when the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 24(d). In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 24(a).

After that, from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the master CPU 63, similar to the process from t4 to t6. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the 14th type identification command is completed from t16 to t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 24(a). Also, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 24(b). After that, at the timing of t20, when the output of the identification end command is continuing, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 24(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that a command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from HI level to LOW level, and grasps the contents of the command received from the main side CPU 63 by confirming the information of the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 24(c). After that, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 24(a).

As described above, the configuration allows the management CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output using the 9th signal, so that the management CPU 112 can clearly recognize that a command is being output even in a configuration in which the command is output using the 1st to 8th signals (i.e., the 1st to 8th signal paths) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 on the timing to store history information.

Next, the process configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S319 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "11" (step S1001). The managed target counter allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not there is a managed target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. It is also a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 11 items, including whether the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether the high-frequency support mode is executed, whether the front door frame 14 is opened or closed, and whether the game round is started. Therefore, first, the managed counter is set to "11".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S1002). If the level is not HI (step S1002: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed counter is 5 or more, the ball entering detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed counter. to 48a is specified (step S1003).

If a positive judgment is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S1004). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "11" and corresponds to the first winning port detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the second winning port detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the third winning port detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the managed counter is "8" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the third ... a, it determines whether the fourth output flag is set to "1"; if the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, it determines whether the fifth output flag is set to "1"; if the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, it determines whether the sixth output flag is set to "1"; if the value of the managed counter is "5" and corresponds to the out port 24a, it determines whether the seventh output flag is set to "1". As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (Figure 15).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S1005). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1003, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to a HI level has occurred (step S1007). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "4", it is determined whether or not a transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred; if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not a transition to the high frequency support mode has occurred; if the value of the managed counter is "2", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened; if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the eleventh output flag is set to "1" to determine whether or not a game round has started. If a positive judgment is made in step S1007, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to a HI level (step S1008). Note that, if the processing of step S1008 is executed when the value of the managed counter is "1", the eleventh output flag is cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is 5 or more or "1" and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a or the start of a game round, the first to seventh signals and determines whether a HI output continuation period (specifically 10 milliseconds) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the 11th signals was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. . This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S908) of the management process (FIG. 23) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably identify the state. In addition, if the value of the managed target counter is "4" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and if the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode has ended or not, and the value of the management target counter is "2" and the current management target is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1009: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S1009: YES). Step S1010).

If a negative determination is made in step S1004, if the process of step S1006 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1007, if the process of step S1008 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if a negative determination is made in step S1009, or When the process of S1010 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1012). If the value of the managed target counter is 1 or more (step S1012: NO), the processes from step S1002 onwards are executed for the managed target corresponding to the new managed target counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. The history setting process is executed in step S908 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S1101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information of the identified number is set in the check target counter. As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S1101 the check target counter is set to "11".

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1102). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122n are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th buffer 122k will be the target for checking numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e will be the target for checking numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1103). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123n corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, if the correspondence relationship information is any of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, the information indicating that it is in high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence areas 123a to 123n are the targets for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the 11th correspondence area 123k becomes the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

By executing the writing process as described above, the value of the counter to be checked is set to one of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the game round. If so, the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written contains the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 33. The combination of the operating port 34 and the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the game times is stored as history information. In addition, if the value of the counter to be checked is one of the opening/closing execution mode, high-frequency support mode, and front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Then, a combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S1105). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the increment of one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after the increment of one is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as the new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1102, or if the processing of step S1105 is executed, it is judged whether or not the correspondence information for checking whether the signal output has been switched to a LOW level is stored in the correspondence area 123a to 123n corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked (step S1106). Specifically, if the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j stores any of information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and information indicating the front door frame 14, so a positive judgment is made in step S1106.

If the determination in step S1106 is positive, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is checked to see if it has changed from "1" to "0", thereby determining whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S1107). If the determination in step S1107 is positive, the RTC information is read as in step S1103 (step S1108), and a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1109). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S1108 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence area 123a to 123n corresponding to the current counter value to be checked, and the correspondence information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this manner, when the value of the counter to be checked is either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, a combination of the RTC information, the correspondence relationship information indicating either the open/close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, or the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Thereafter, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S1105 (step S1110).

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, if a negative determination is made in step S1107, or if the process of step S1110 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1111). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1112). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S1112: NO), the process from step S1102 onward is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27(a) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, FIG. 27(b) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h, FIG. 27(c) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, FIG. 27(d) shows the period during which a HIGH level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and FIG. 27(e) shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117.

At timing t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIG. 27(a). Therefore, at the timing of t1, history information is written into the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 27(e). Thereafter, at timing t2, the signal that was switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level, as shown in FIG. 27(a). However, this signal is input to any of the first to seventh and eleventh buffers 122a to 122g, 122k, and the switching of the LOW level is not subject to storage of history information. At this timing, writing of history information is not executed as shown in FIG. 27(e).

Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. The output state of the signal input to any of the No. 11 buffers 122a to 122g, 122k is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 27(e).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from t4 to t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the occurrence or non-occurrence of the open/close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), history information is written at t4, when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level, and at t7, when the output state of the signal switches to LOW level. In this case, the history information written at t4 includes start information, and the history information written at t7 includes end information. This makes it possible to ascertain the execution period of the open/close execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the field is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high-frequency support mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t8 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode.

Furthermore, history information is written into the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also included in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has hit the field is in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 27(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27(e), the timing t12 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, the history information is written in chronological order to the history memory 117. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 was recorded while the front door frame 14 was open. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, it is also possible to distinguish whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the outlet 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 was recorded while the front door frame 14 was open by comparing the RTC information.

Next, we will explain the output process of the setting value update signal that is executed when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set by the main CPU 63. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the output process of the setting value update signal that is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the output process of the setting value update signal is executed in step S119 in the main processing (Figure 9).

A value corresponding to the currently set value of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the pulse number counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1201). Specifically, the value of the setting value counter in the main RAM 65 is set in the pulse number counter. Then, it is determined whether the setting value update signal directed to the management CPU 112 is at HI level (step S1202). As already explained, the setting value update signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management IC 66. Here, the output process of the setting value update signal is executed at a timing prior to the recognition process, which is a process for making the management CPU 112 identify the type of signal input to the 1st to 14th buffers 122a to 122n of the input port 121 in the main process (FIG. 9). In contrast, since the setting value update signal is set in the management IC 66 during the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 to be input to the 15th buffer 122o, even if the setting value update signal output process is executed before the recognition process, it is possible for the management CPU 112 to identify that the signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is a setting value update signal.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the value of the LOW level counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1203), and whether the value of the LOW level counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" or not is determined. (Step S1204). The LOW level counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not the set value update signal is maintained at the LOW level for a predetermined period of time while the set value update signal outputs a plurality of pulses that make the set value update signal go to the HI level. It is. If the value of the LOW level counter is "0" (step S1204: YES), it means that it is time to set the set value update signal to the HI level, so the set value update signal is set to the HI level. settings (step S1205).

Then, the HI level counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "20" (step S1206). The HI level counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to determine the period during which the set value update signal is maintained at a HI level. The value set in the HI level counter is decremented by 1 at approximately 10 microsecond intervals, so that the set value update signal is maintained at a HI level for 200 microseconds when one pulse is output. This period during which the HI level is maintained is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to determine that the set value update signal has changed from a LOW level to a HI level.

If the set value update signal is at HI level (step S1202: YES), the value of the HI level counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S1207), and it is determined whether the value of the HI level counter after decrement is "0" (step S1208). If the value of the HI level counter is "0" (step S1208: YES), this means that it is time to set the set value update signal to LOW level, so the set value update signal is set to LOW level (step S1209).

Thereafter, the value of the pulse number counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1210), and it is determined whether the value of the pulse number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1211). If the value of the pulse number counter is not "0" (step S1211: NO), the output of pulse signals by the set value update signal for the number corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10 set this time has been completed. Since this means that there is no data, "20" is set in the LOW level counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S1212). Since the value set in the LOW level counter is subtracted by 1 at a cycle of approximately 10 microseconds, the value is maintained at the LOW level for 200 microseconds between the plurality of pulse outputs caused by the set value update signal. This LOW level maintenance period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to identify that the setting value update signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level.

If the value of the pulse number counter is "0" (step S1211: YES), this means that the output of the pulse signal by the setting value update signal for the number of times corresponding to the currently set setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed, so the output process of the setting value identification end command is executed (step S1213). The setting value identification end command is a command for making the management CPU 112 recognize that the output of the setting value update signal for making the management CPU 112 recognize the currently set setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed. When outputting the setting value identification end command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used in the same way as the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command. However, the signal pattern of the setting value identification end command is different from that of the identification start command, type identification command, and identification end command.

As described above, in the output process of the setting value update signal, a number of pulse signals due to the setting value update signal corresponding to the value of the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 that was set when the current supply of operating power began are output to the management IC 66. The management CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process to determine the number of pulse signals due to the setting value update signal, and based on that, determines the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 that was set this time.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the setting update recognition process is executed in step S902 of the management process (FIG. 23).

It is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level (step S1301). If a positive determination is made in step S1301, the value of the setting value grasp counter provided in the management RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1302). The setting value grasp counter is a counter for identifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112; for example, a setting value grasp counter value of "1" means "setting 1," and a setting value grasp counter value of "6" means "setting 6."

Then, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HIGH level again (step S1303). If a positive determination is made in step S1303, the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). This causes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 identified by the management CPU 112 to increase by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the processing of step S1304 is executed, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S1305). If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the processing returns to step S1303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1306). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1307). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S1306 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1308). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

By executing the setting update recognition process as described above, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the fact that the setting was made, the date and time when the setting was made, and the combination of setting values when the setting was made are stored as history information in the history area 124. As a result, by reading and analyzing the information stored in the history memory 117 using an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is possible to know the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set and the contents of the setting values when the setting was made.

Here, even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the information stored in the history memory 117 is maintained as is. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, and various parameters described below are calculated using history information that exists across the timing of the change in the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, since the date and time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above is stored in the history memory 117, by connecting an external device to the reading terminal 68d and reading the information stored in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to calculate various parameters for the period after the timing when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set and during which the setting state is maintained.

Next, the display output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. Note that the display output process is executed in step S909 of the management process (FIG. 23).

First, it is determined whether it is the calculation timing (step S1401). If 51 seconds have passed since the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 started, or if 51 seconds have passed since the previous positive judgment in step S1401, a positive judgment is made in step S1401. If a positive judgment is made in step S1401, the number of balls entering during normal times is calculated (step S1402). Specifically, the number of balls entering the out hole 24a is calculated by first counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball is the out hole 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. In addition, the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball is the general winning hole 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. In addition, the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. In addition, the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. In addition, the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 where the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and the end information are stored, the exit that occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be detected. 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1403). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored; The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the end information are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where is stored, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1402 and S1403 (step S1404). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1403, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1402. Then, the following first to eighth parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1402 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1402 is The difference between the number of balls entered in the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1402 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1403. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 is defined as the number K3 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1403 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1402. The number of balls entered is K4, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1403 and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1402 is set as the number K5 of balls entered.
・First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/"Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Third parameter: Game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K3/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) 4th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K4/discharging from gaming area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
- Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 '') In step S1404, the first to eighth parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the normal storage area of the calculation result memory 131. The first to eighth parameters stored in the normal storage area are stored and held until the next step S1404 is executed. In other words, when step S1404 is executed next time and the first to eighth parameters are calculated, the newly calculated first to eighth parameters are stored in the normal storage area. The previous calculation results of the first to eighth parameters that were previously stored in the normal storage area are overwritten.

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored, the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred in the open/close execution mode is calculated (step S1405). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the opening and closing execution mode, all the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the opening and closing execution mode are stored is treated as being in the opening and closing execution mode.

After that, during the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1406). The method for calculating the number of balls entered is the same as in step S1403, except that the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1405 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1405 and S1406 (step S1407). Specifically, first, the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 while it was open, calculated in step S1406, is subtracted from the number of balls that entered the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1405. Then, the following 11th to 18th parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered the out port 24a calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered the out port 24a calculated in step S1406 is set as the number of balls entered K11, the difference between the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1406 is set as the number of balls entered K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered the special winning device 32 calculated in step S1405 and the number of balls entered K13 is set as the number of balls entered K14. The difference in the number of balls that enter the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1406 is designated as the number of entering balls K13, the difference in the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1406 relative to the number of balls that enter the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1405 is designated as the number of entering balls K14, and the difference in the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1405 relative to the number of balls that enter the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1406 is designated as the number of entering balls K15.
11th parameter: total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ratio (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D11")
・12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning port 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・13th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the special winning device 32 K13/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K14/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12")
15th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 (K15) to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of winning balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + D13 x "number of winning balls for winning into the second actuation port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K13 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") ratio. In step S1407, the 11th to 18th parameters, which are the results of the calculation, are stored in a memory area for the opening and closing execution mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 11th to 18th parameters stored in the memory area for the opening and closing execution mode are retained until the next time step S1407 is executed. In other words, when step S1407 is executed next time and the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 11th to 18th parameters are stored in the memory area for the opening/closing execution mode, overwriting the previous calculation results of the 11th to 18th parameters that had been stored in the memory area for the opening/closing execution mode.

Then, by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, the number of balls entering each of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34 that occurred in the high-frequency support mode situation is calculated (step S1408). The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in these history information storage areas 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information with consecutive numbers, if there are multiple sections between the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored and the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. In addition, if there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored, but the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored does not store the correspondence relationship information and end information indicating the high-frequency support mode, all the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored is treated as being in the high-frequency support mode.

Then, during the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1408, the number of balls that entered each of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is calculated (step S1409). The method of calculating these numbers of balls is the same as in step S1403, except that it is based on the period of the high-frequency support mode identified in step S1408.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1408 and S1409 (step S1410). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1409, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1408. Then, the following 21st to 26th parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1408 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1408 and the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1409. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 is defined as the number K23 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1409 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1408. The number of balls entered is K24, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1409 and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1409 is set as the number K25 of balls entered.
- 21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
・22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K22/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・23rd parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K23/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・24th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K24/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
・25th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
・26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
In step S1410, the 21st to 26th parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode in the calculation result memory 131. The 21st to 26th parameters stored in the high-frequency support mode storage area are stored and held until the next step S1410 is executed. In other words, when step S1410 is executed next time and the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 21st to 26th parameters are stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode. Then, the previous calculation results of the 21st to 26th parameters that were previously stored in the storage area for high frequency support mode are overwritten.

Thereafter, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is calculated and stored (step S1411). Specifically, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the opening/closing execution mode is determined. Calculate the number of occurrences. Furthermore, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating the start of a game session is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of occurrences of a game session is calculated. . Then, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game is calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode is assumed to be the number of occurrences K31, and the number of occurrences of the gaming session is assumed to be the number of occurrences K32.
・31st parameter: K31/K32
In step S1411, the 31st parameter, which is the calculation result, is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 31st parameter stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area is stored and held until the next step S1411 is executed. In other words, when step S1411 is executed next time and the 31st parameter is calculated, the newly calculated 31st parameter is stored in the opening/closing execution mode frequency storage area, so that the opening/closing execution mode is not used until then. The previous calculation result of the 31st parameter stored in the frequency storage area is overwritten.

Then, the occurrence frequency of the high-frequency support mode is calculated and stored (step S1412). Specifically, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. Also, the number of occurrences of the game times is calculated by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence relationship information indicating the start of the game times is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. Then, the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game time and the ratio of the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode to the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode are calculated. Note that the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode is the number of occurrences K41, the number of occurrences of the game times is the number of occurrences K42, and the number of occurrences of the opening and closing execution mode calculated in step S1411 is the number of occurrences K43.
41st parameter: K41/K42
42nd parameter: K41/K43
In step S1412, the 41st to 42nd parameters, which are the calculation results, are stored in a high support mode frequency storage area in the calculation result memory 131. The 41st to 42nd parameters stored in the high support mode frequency storage area are stored and held until the next execution of step S1412. In other words, when the next step S1412 is executed and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated, the newly calculated 41st to 42nd parameters are stored in the high support mode frequency storage area, overwriting the previous calculation results of the 41st to 42nd parameters that had been stored in the high support mode frequency storage area up to that point.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process in step S1412 is executed, display processing is executed (step S1413). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing display processing.

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S1501). The update timing counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to identify that it is time to update the display contents of the management results of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The management CPU 112 notifies the calculation results of the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of the parameter to be notified. In addition, the number corresponding to the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100 is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters are switched in sequence in a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the forty-second parameter, which is the last parameter to be displayed, is displayed, the calculation result of the first parameter, which is the first parameter to be displayed, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is two seconds.

The calculation period for the various parameters in the management CPU 112 is 51 seconds. In contrast, the number of various parameters is 25, and the period during which the calculation result for one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. Therefore, the various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When the process of step S1501 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" to determine whether it is time to update the display contents of the first to third alarm display devices 69a to 69c (step S1502). If a positive determination is made in step S1502, the value of the display target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1503). Then, if the value of the display target counter after incrementing 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S1504: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S1505).

The display object counter is a counter that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of parameter that is the display object on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters and the possible values of the display object counter, "0" to "24." For example, when the value of the display object counter is "0," the first parameter, which is the first display object, becomes the display object on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and when the value of the display object counter is "24," the forty-second parameter, which is the last display object, becomes the display object on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S1504 or if the process in step S1505 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. control (step S1506). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, The number corresponding to the 1's digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S1507). The content displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in steps S1506 and S1507 continues until the next update timing or until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped. Ru. Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S1508).

When the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started by executing the display process as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. be done. The management result of the game history is displayed regardless of whether the game is continued or not, and when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and the main controller 60 is opened from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This is done regardless of whether it is visible or not. In this way, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c is executed regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the first to third notification display devices 69a It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of .about.69c.

The display of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c starts after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similar to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the gaming history management results calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped are displayed.

When the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started, information corresponding to the setting value being changed is displayed on the third notification display device 69c, but the display of the information corresponding to the setting value is performed before the identification end command is sent from the main CPU 63, whereas the display of the game history management results on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c begins after the identification end command is sent from the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the display periods of these displays from overlapping, even if the third notification display device 69c is configured to be used as a display device for both displaying the information corresponding to the setting value and displaying the game history management results.

Furthermore, when information corresponding to the set value is to be displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game history management results are being displayed, the first notification display device 69a and the second notification display device 69b are not hidden. This makes it possible to identify which of the information corresponding to the setting value and the gaming history management result is being displayed on the third notification display device 69c.

Next, we will discuss the processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 to an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d of the MPU 62. explain. FIG. 32(a) is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output process is executed in step S112 in the main process (FIG. 9).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether a connection signal indicating that an external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d is received from the reading terminal 68d (step S1601). If a negative determination is made in step S1601, this data output processing is immediately terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. As a result, in order to output historical information and various parameters to the outside, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. It is necessary to The power switch for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided on the dispensing mechanism section 73 mounted on the back of the back pack unit 15. In order to do this, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 to expose the back side of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, in order to output historical information and various parameters to the outside, supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the external device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. By adopting a configuration in which it is necessary to read history information and various parameters, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the game hall manager to read the history information and various parameters.

If the positive determination is made in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a signal for confirming control information is received from the read terminal 68d, and whether or not the current connection of the external device to the read terminal 68d corresponds to confirmation of the control information (programs and data) of the main ROM 64 (step S1602). The external device is configured to be able to perform both confirmation of control information and confirmation of history information and various parameters, and when confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the external device, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the external device, and when confirmation of history information and various parameters is selected by manual operation of the external device, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the external device. Note that this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the external device for confirming control information and the external device for confirming history may be separate. In this case, when an external device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the read terminal 68d, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the external device, and when an external device for confirming history is electrically connected to the read terminal 68d, a signal for confirming history is transmitted from the external device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1603). In the output processing, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to read the control information with an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and confirm whether the control information is genuine or normal. It becomes possible to do this.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S1604). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32(b), when the output state of the output instruction signal input to the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HIGH level (step S1701: YES), the management CPU 112 reads out the history information stored in the history memory 117 and the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and outputs the read history information and various parameters to the read terminal 68d (step S1702). This makes it possible to read the history information and various parameters in an external device electrically connected to the read terminal 68d, and to analyze the information on the management results of the game history. In addition, when the management CPU 112 outputs the history information to the read terminal 68d, it clears the history memory 117 to "0" (step S1703). The history information in the history memory 117 is erased only when the history information is read by an external device.

Returning to the explanation of the data output process (FIG. 32(a)), when the process of step S1603 is executed or the process of step S1604 is executed, the electrical connection of the external device to the reading terminal 68d continues. It is determined whether or not (step S1605). If it is being continued (step S1605: YES), the process remains on standby in step S1605. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set to be executed after the data output processing from being executed until the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d. If the external device is disconnected from the reading terminal 68d (step S1605: NO), this data output process ends.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a game ball enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, the game ball is paid out, so the player plays the game while hoping that the game ball will enter any of these ball entry sections. In this configuration, when a game ball enters any of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entry section), the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the ball entry frequency in the pachinko machine 10, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball entry mode of each history target ball entry section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All ball entry sections that eject game balls from the game area PA are subject to the execution of the history information storage process and are also subject to management using the history information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry at any history target ball entry section using the history information. It also makes it possible to manage the ratio of the number of balls that enter each history target ball entry section to the number of balls that are ejected from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. This makes it possible to use the history information to obtain a detailed understanding of the game ball entry history at the history target entry part.

The history memory 117 stores not only history information corresponding to game balls entering the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, history information indicating whether the high frequency support mode is in effect, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which game balls enter the history target ball entry section.

The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to an external device that is a device outside the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information in the external device and use the read history information to analyze the manner in which game balls enter the history target entry portion.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 68d, and the program can be read from the main ROM 64 by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is outputted to the outside using the reading terminal 68d for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is determined whether the information to be output from the read terminal 68d is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the determination result is output to the outside through the read terminal 68d. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the read terminal 68d for external output of a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be output to the outside is a program or history information, and outputs the determined information to the outside. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the read terminal 68d is used for both purposes, it is possible to read out only the necessary information.

Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 68d is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be outputted from the outside from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62, which has a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, has a management IC 66 and a read terminal 68d. This makes it possible to consolidate the signal path to the read terminal 68d within the MPU 62. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the signal path to the read terminal 68d.

A management CPU 112 is provided in addition to the main CPU 63, which executes the process to have game balls paid out based on the game balls entering either the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, or the second operating port 34, and the management CPU 112 executes the process to have history information stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to manage the entry patterns of game balls into each history target entry port while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a to each of the buffers 122a-122g of the input port 121 of the management IC 66, using the signal paths corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a. This allows the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to correspond to each of the buffers 122a-122g (i.e., each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open, and information corresponding to the start of a game round to each of the buffers 122h-122k of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. This allows the type of information corresponding to each of these situations to correspond to each of the buffers 122h-122k (i.e., each signal path), making it possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing between each type of information in the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122k (that is, each signal path 118a to 118k) corresponds to to the management CPU 112. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . This allows the management IC 66 to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area. It becomes possible to do so.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This eliminates the need to provide information that enables the management IC 66 to identify the historical target goal location that corresponds to the information to be transmitted each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 regarding the detection results of each goal detection sensor 42a to 48a.

When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 switches from LOW level to HIGH level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 68d. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a-122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that need to be sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to accommodate an increase or decrease in the number of types of information depending on the model of pachinko machine 10 without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a-122p. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is sent from the management IC 66 to the read terminal 68d, the history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to use the read history information to identify the manner in which the game ball entered each history target ball entry section.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, 41st to 42nd parameters) corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball in the game area PA during a specified period. The various parameters resulting from these calculations are then displayed in sequence on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to notify the pachinko machine 10 of the various parameters that are the results of calculations using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated with the historical information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in the normal situation where the front door frame 14 is closed. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation where the opening and closing execution mode is in effect and the situation where the high frequency support mode is in effect are calculated. This makes it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to grasp the manner in which game balls enter the game depending on each situation.

When history information in history memory 117 is output to an external device, a process for clearing history memory 117 is executed to initialize history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which history information that would normally be stored is erased by overwriting, as a result of history information being stored in history memory 117 to the extent that it exceeds the storage capacity of history memory 117.

In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . As a result, by using the information outputted externally through the external terminal board 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the balls can be easily grasped, and the history By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entry section and the frequency of ball entry.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6". Thereby, even with a single pachinko machine 10, it is possible to create a situation in which the probability of a jackpot result is advantageous or disadvantageous in the low probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode varies depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode varies depending on the settings of the pachinko machine 10. It does not change depending on the state. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 on the probability of a jackpot result to the situation in the low probability mode. In addition, since it is possible to make the high probability correctness table 64g referred to in the high probability mode common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the accuracy tables 64a to 64g can be prepared in advance in the main side ROM 64. It becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity for storage.

While the probability of a jackpot result in low probability mode varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," the allocation manner of the types of jackpot results does not vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to limit the influence of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 to the situation in low probability mode. In addition, since the allocation table 64h that is referenced when allocating the types of jackpot results can be made common regardless of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for storing the allocation table 64h in advance in the main ROM 64.

Even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but is retained. This makes it possible to continue storing the previous history information in the history memory 117 even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and makes it possible to identify the results of management of the game history by using the history information accumulated in the history memory 117 over a long period of time.

In a configuration in which the history information stored in the history memory 117 is not erased but is retained even when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to distinguish between the history information before the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made and the history information after the new setting is made.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed and corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117, information corresponding to the setting value is included in the history information. This makes it possible to specify the contents of setting values set in the past by referring to the history information.

When the setting value update process (FIG. 10) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value update process (Fig. 10) is started, in the setting value update process (Fig. 10), the setting value can be changed from a certain starting setting value. It becomes possible to do this. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

The above-mentioned starting setting value is specifically "Setting 1," which has the lowest degree of advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (Figure 10) is started, the setting value is changed from "Setting 1," which has the lowest degree of advantage. This makes it possible to prevent unintended disadvantages to the amusement hall in such a situation, since the setting value will be the lowest degree of advantage even if the manager of the amusement hall unintentionally ends the setting value update process (Figure 10) immediately after it has started.

When calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, the history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 may be used as a reference, and the various parameters may be calculated using history information stored later. In this case, it is possible to derive the results of the management of the game history at the timing after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed as various parameters.

In addition, when calculating various parameters at the calculation timing, history information corresponding to a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117 and corresponding to a change in setting value is used as a reference. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated using history information stored later than that. In this case, it becomes possible to derive the gaming history management results at the timing after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed as various parameters.

Further, although the circuit board box 60a of the main controller 60 is provided with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 68d, the opening is not provided and the reading terminal 69d is exposed on the opposing wall 60b. It may also be covered by. In this case, it is necessary to open the board box 60a in order to connect an external device to the reading terminal 68d.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the contents of the winning/losing table corresponding to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are different from those of the first embodiment. The following describes the configurations that are different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various tables stored in the main side ROM 64 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 64 includes an area 161 for setting 1, an area 162 for setting 2, an area 163 for setting 3, an area 164 for setting 4, an area 165 for setting 5, and an area for setting 6. 166 are provided. The setting 1 area 161 includes a low probability win/fail table 161a for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 161b for setting 1 that is referred to when the setting state of is "setting 1" and the win/fail lottery mode is high probability mode is stored. The setting 2 area 162 includes a low probability win/fail table 162a for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 162b for setting 2 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 2" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 3 area 163 includes a low probability win/fail table 163a for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 163b for setting 3 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 3" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

The setting 4 area 164 includes a low probability win/fail table 164a for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 164b for setting 4 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 4" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 5 area 165 includes a low probability win/fail table 165a for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 165b for setting 5 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 5" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored. The setting 6 area 166 includes a low probability win/fail table 166a for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the pachinko machine 10 A high probability win/fail table 166b for setting 6 that is referred to when the setting state is "setting 6" and the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is stored.

The probability of winning the jackpot set in each of the low probability tables 161a to 166a is different from each other. Specifically, when the low probability table 161a for setting 1 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/320, when the low probability table 162a for setting 2 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/310, when the low probability table 163a for setting 3 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/300, when the low probability table 164a for setting 4 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/290, when the low probability table 165a for setting 5 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/280, and when the low probability table 166a for setting 6 is referenced, the probability of a jackpot result is about 1/270. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting value, the probability of a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the low probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

The winning probabilities of the jackpot results set in each of the high probability success/failure tables 161b to 166b are different from each other. Specifically, when the high probability success/failure table 161b for setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot result is approximately 1/45, and when the high probability success/failure table 162b for setting 2 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/40. When the high probability success/failure table 163b for setting 3 is referred to, the result is a jackpot at approximately 1/35, and when the high probability success/failure table 164b for setting 4 is referred to, the result is approximately 1/30. If the high probability success/failure table 165b for setting 5 is referred to, the result will be a jackpot at approximately 1/25, and if the high probability success/failure table 166b for setting 6 is referred to, the result will be approximately 1/20. This results in a jackpot. As a result, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting value, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode, which is advantageous for the player.

In other words, in the first embodiment, the higher the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, the higher the winning probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode is, while the winning probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is "setting 1". ~ "Setting 6" The configuration is the same regardless of the setting state, but in this embodiment, both the winning probability of the jackpot result in the low probability mode and the winning probability of the jackpot result in the high probability mode are The configuration is such that the higher the setting value of the machine 10, the higher the setting value. This makes it possible to increase the player's advantage of having a high set value set.

In addition, even if the jackpot result in the low probability mode has a winning probability in the case of "Setting 6" which is the highest setting state, the winning probability in the jackpot result in the high probability mode in the case of "Setting 1" which is the lowest setting state. It is set lower than the probability. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1", and it is also possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely low when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". 6'', it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from becoming extremely high.

On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, only one type of distribution table 64h is provided so that it is common to all settings from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." This makes it possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage in the distribution pattern of the jackpot result from being caused by the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, and also makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to previously store the distribution table 64h in the main ROM 64.

The probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is higher when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is higher, while the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is lower when the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is higher. In this case, it is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to have a higher setting of the pachinko machine 10 in low probability mode, and more advantageous for the player to have a lower setting of the pachinko machine 10 in high probability mode.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot result in the high probability mode is higher when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a higher value, while the probability of winning a jackpot result in the low probability mode is higher from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". '' may be configured to be constant in the setting state. In this case, in the high probability mode, the higher the setting value of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the more advantageous it is to the player, and in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 from giving rise to an advantage or disadvantage. Become.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the handling of the management result of the game history when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set is different from the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The management IC 66 is provided with a separate storage memory 171 in addition to each memory in the first embodiment as a memory for storing information. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the separate storage memory 171. The separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes.

The separate storage memory 171 is provided with a first separate storage area 172, a second separate storage area 173, a third separate storage area 174, a fourth separate storage area 175, and a fifth separate storage area 176. The first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 sequentially store information on the results of management of the game history calculated when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, more specifically, the various parameters (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters) described in the first embodiment. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the various parameters are first stored in the first separate storage area 172, and thereafter, the area to be stored is switched so that the nth separate storage area 172 to 176 → the n+1th separate storage area 172 to 176 each time the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Then, if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set after the various parameters have been stored in the fifth separate storage area 176, the various parameters are stored again in the first separate storage area 172. At this time, the various parameters already stored in the first separate storage area 172 are erased. As a result, the various parameters up to the time when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set five times are stored in the separate storage memory 171, and for parameters exceeding five times, the oldest various parameters are erased and stored.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by an external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to grasp the results of game history management before new settings are made to the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 35.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from a LOW level to a HIGH level (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S1802). The setting value grasp counter is a counter for identifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112; for example, a setting value grasp counter value of "1" means "setting 1," and a setting value grasp counter value of "6" means "setting 6."

Then, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HIGH level again (step S1803). If a positive determination is made in step S1803, the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). This causes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 identified by the management CPU 112 to increase by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803 or if the process in step S1804 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1805). If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process returns to step S1803.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1805, a process for monitoring repeated changes is executed (step S1806). The process for monitoring repeated changes is described in detail below, but executes a process for notifying the user when new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time. In a configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, it is expected that new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 will be repeatedly made in a short period of time in order to intentionally erase the management results of the game history when play has been performed over a predetermined period of time. In response to this, the process for monitoring repeated changes is executed, and a corresponding notification is executed when such an action is taken.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S1807). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, and 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time.

Then, the various parameters calculated in step S1807 are stored in the area currently being stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172-176 in the separate storage memory 171 (step S1808). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 to enable the management CPU 112 to identify the area currently being stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172-176. The information in the pointer information area is updated so that when various parameters are stored in the area currently being stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172-176, the storage target is changed to the next area in the order. By executing the process of step S1808, the various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S1809). In other words, in this embodiment, not only when history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the history memory 117 history information is deleted.

Then, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S1810). Then, a write process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1811). In the write process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the RTC information read in step S1810 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, both information for identifying the setting value and information on the value of the setting value grasp counter are written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S1812). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the repeated change monitoring process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.

First, it is determined whether the number of games played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S1901). Specifically, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are determined by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the start of a game round. The number of times the game has been played since the state was last set is determined, and it is further determined whether the determined number of times the game has been played is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter provided in the separate storage memory 171 is incremented by 1 (step S1902). As already explained, the separate storage memory 171 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain the memory, and thus does not require an external power supply to retain the value of the repeat change counter.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value of "5" (step S1903). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S1903, it is determined whether the number of times the new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeated without the execution of a game play exceeding the reference number of times exceeds the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, display processing for repeated changes is executed (step S1904). In the repeated change display process, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are changed to correspond to the number of times that the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 exceeds the notification standard value in a short period of time. The display content is subject to repeated changes. The display content of this repeated change is the display content of displaying "E" on all of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and this display content does not occur in other situations. In addition, the state in which the display contents of repeated changes are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c continues until the repeated change flag provided in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0". . The repeated change flag is a flag used by the management CPU 112 to specify that the display contents of repeated changes should be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. Further, when the repeat change flag is set to "1" and the display contents of the repeat change are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the display processing in the first embodiment is performed. (FIG. 31) is not executed. Thereafter, the repeat change flag in the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the value of the repeat change counter in the separate storage memory 171 is cleared to "0" (step S1906). Thereafter, on the condition that the repeat change flag in the separate storage memory 171 is set to "1" (step S1907: YES), the display contents of the repeat change on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are The display is ended (step S1908), and the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1909).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased. This makes it possible to leave in the history memory 117 the history information from games played after a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.

When a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, various parameters are calculated as a gaming history management result using the history information in the history memory 117 at that time. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history in the situation before a new setting is made in the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, even if the history information in the history memory 117 is deleted when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is not possible to grasp the management results of the gaming history based on the history information to be deleted. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information in the history memory 117 at that time when a new setting state is set in the pachinko machine 10, the various calculated parameters are stored in a separate storage memory. 171. As a result, even if a new setting is made in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting is made at any subsequent timing.

By providing a plurality of separate storage areas 172 to 176 in the separate storage memory 171, it is possible to store various parameters corresponding to the setting timing of a plurality of setting states. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of game history over a plurality of periods based on the timing when a new setting state is set. Furthermore, even if new settings for the pachinko machine 10 are repeated under conditions in which no games are being played, various parameters calculated using historical information of the conditions in which games are actually being played will remain unchanged. It is possible to increase the possibility that the data remains in the separate storage memory 171.

The various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 can be read by an external device by connecting the external device to the reading terminal 68d. This makes it possible to grasp the results of game history management before new settings are made to the pachinko machine 10.

In the configuration in which various parameters are stored in the separate storage memory 171 each time a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the management results of the game history are intended to be used when games are played over a predetermined period of time. It is assumed that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is repeatedly performed in a short period of time in order to erase the setting state. On the other hand, by repeatedly executing the change monitoring process, if such an act is performed, a corresponding notification will be issued. This makes it possible to notify the administrator and the like that new settings for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeatedly made in a short period of time.

The fact that new settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeatedly made in a short period of time is notified by the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to notify that new settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeatedly made in a short period of time by using the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c for notifying the results of game history management.

In a situation where it is necessary to notify that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly made in a short period of time, the display contents of the repeated change will continue to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. , the notification of the game history management results during normal times is not performed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. This makes it possible to emphasize the notification that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

In the above, a notification corresponding to the event where the number of times the game is played after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within a reference number of times exceeds a notification reference value and the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value, but the present invention is not limited to this. A notification corresponding to the event where the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within a reference number and the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value may be configured to be executed. Also, a notification corresponding to the event where the total number of game balls discharged into a predetermined ball entry section (e.g., any one of the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined combination) after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within a reference number and the event where the new setting is performed continues beyond the notification reference value may be configured to be executed. In addition, the system may be configured such that, when the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is within a reference number, if the number of consecutive events for which the new setting is performed exceeds a notification reference value, a corresponding notification is issued.

In addition, if a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed within a monitoring reference period (e.g., 600 seconds) that exceeds the notification reference value, a corresponding notification may be issued.

In addition, in a situation where the number of times a game has been played since a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within a reference number of times, and the number of consecutive times that the new setting is made exceeds a notification reference value, a corresponding notification is executed. However, it may also be configured so that in a situation where the number of times a game has been played since a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within a reference number of times, and the number of consecutive times that the setting value has been changed exceeds a notification reference value, a corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, in a situation where the number of times a game has been played since a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within a reference number of times, and the event in which the new setting is made exceeds a notification reference value and continues to occur, a corresponding notification is executed. However, it may also be configured so that in a situation where the number of times a game has been played since a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within a reference number of times, and the event in which various parameters are calculated due to the new setting is exceeded, and continues to occur, a corresponding notification is executed.

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration has been described in which a corresponding notification is executed, in addition to or in place of this, a configuration may also be adopted in which the progress of the game is restricted for a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in that the repeat change monitoring process is executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing repeated change monitoring processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the repeated change monitoring process is executed when the setting value update process (step S118) is executed in the main process (FIG. 9). That is, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the repeated change monitoring process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which repeated change monitoring processing is executed when a setting value is changed.

First, it is determined whether the number of times a game has been played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was last set is within a reference number (specifically, 100 times) (step S2001). The main RAM 65 is provided with a game count counter for measuring the number of times a game has been played since the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was newly set, and the main CPU 63 adds 1 to the value of the game count counter each time a new game is played. This game count counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clear process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105, S117) is executed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the value of the repetition change counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2002). The repeated change counter is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the repeat change counter after adding 1 exceeds the notification reference value of "5" (step S2003). The notification reference value corresponds to the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 provided in the separate storage memory 171. Therefore, in step S2003, it is determined whether the number of times the new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 have been repeated without the execution of a game play exceeding the reference number of times exceeds the number of the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2003, the repeat change flag stored in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2004). The repeat change flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify a situation in which a repeat change notification should be made. The repeat change flag is excluded from being cleared to "0" even when the clear process of the main RAM 65 (steps S105, S117) is executed.

If the result of step S2001 is negative, the value of the repeat change counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2005). Then, if the repeat change flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2006: YES), the repeat change flag is cleared to "0" (step S2007).

In the repeat change monitoring process, if the repeat change flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2008: YES), a repeat change notification command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S2009). When the audio light emission control device 81 receives a repeat change notification command, it causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 to notify the repeat change. The notification of the repeated change continues until the supply of operating power to the audio emission control device 81 is stopped.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify that a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been repeatedly performed in a short period of time based on the control by the main CPU 63. In addition, since the notification is performed by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54, the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed without opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward with respect to the outer frame 11. This makes it possible for the administrator to recognize that new settings have been repeatedly made in a short period of time.

Additionally, in addition to or in place of the configuration in which, when new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, a notification command for repeated changes is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound emission control device 81. A configuration may also be adopted in which external output corresponding to this is performed.

Also, the host CPU 63 may be configured to execute the process of monitoring repeated changes in this embodiment, while the management CPU 112 may be configured to execute the process of monitoring repeated changes in the third embodiment. This makes it possible to closely monitor whether new settings for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made within a short period of time.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting update recognition process in the management side CPU 112 is different from the third embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from a LOW level to a HIGH level (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is set to "1" (step S2102). The setting value grasp counter is a counter for identifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management CPU 112; for example, a setting value grasp counter value of "1" means "setting 1," and a setting value grasp counter value of "6" means "setting 6."

Then, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HIGH level again (step S2103). If a positive determination is made in step S2103, the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2104). This causes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 identified by the management CPU 112 to increase by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or if the process in step S2104 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2105). If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the process returns to step S2103.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, it is determined whether a predetermined number or more of predetermined history information exists in the history memory 117 (step S2106). Specifically, the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are determined by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 that store correspondence information indicating the start of a game round. The number of times the game has been played since the state was last set is determined, and it is further determined whether the determined number of times the game has been played exceeds a reference number (specifically, 100 times). However, it is not limited to this, and the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that game balls have been ejected from the game area PA is stored is the standard number (specifically, 1000 pieces). A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the value exceeds . In addition, correspondence relationship information indicating that the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined combination) The configuration may be such that it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the number of history information storage areas 125 in which are stored exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the total number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds a reference number (specifically, 1000 pieces).

In addition, if the number of games played after the new setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set is within the standard number of times, and the event in which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification standard value and continues. Although the configuration is such that the notification corresponding to the notification is executed, the notification is not limited to this, and the total ejection of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the new settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set. A configuration may also be adopted in which, when the number of events for which the new setting is performed exceeds the notification reference value and continues in a situation where the number is within the reference number, the corresponding notification is executed. In addition, after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a predetermined ball entrance part (for example, any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, or a predetermined If the event for which the new setting is made exceeds the notification standard value and the event for which the new setting is made continues in a situation where the total number of game balls that have been ejected after entering (combination) is within the standard number, the corresponding notification is executed. good. In addition, an event in which a new setting is made in a situation where the total number of pieces of history information newly stored in the history memory 117 after a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made is within the reference number is notified. It may be configured such that when the reference value is exceeded continuously, a corresponding notification is executed.

If a positive determination is made in step S2106, various calculation processes are executed (step S2107). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameter, and 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time.

Then, the various parameters calculated in step S2107 are stored in the area currently being stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172-176 in the separate storage memory 171 (step S2108). A pointer information area is set in the separate storage memory 171 to enable the management CPU 112 to identify the area currently being stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172-176. The information in the pointer information area is updated so that when various parameters are stored in the area currently being stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172-176, the storage target is changed to the next area in the order. By executing the process of step S2108, the various parameters at that time are stored in the separate storage memory 171 for the new setting of the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the processing of step S2108 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" (step S2109). In other words, in this embodiment, the history information in the history memory 117 is erased not only when the history information is read by an external device connected to the reading terminal 68d, but also when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set.

After that, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2110). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2111). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S2110 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, both information for identifying the set value and information on the value of the set value understanding counter are written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made. The combination is now stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer is updated (step S2112). In this update, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after incrementing by one has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value has not been exceeded, the pointer information after incrementing by one is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as the new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value has been exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the initial pointer information.

According to the above configuration, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, on the condition that a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the history memory 117, the history information is stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters are calculated using the history information and are stored in separate storage memory 171. As a result, even if new settings for the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly made in a short period of time, the separate storage memory 171 will essentially retain information on the game history management results as a result of the game being played. It becomes possible to store the information.

The process of step S2109 may be executed on the condition that the processes of steps S2107 and S2108 have been executed. In other words, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is erased on the condition that a predetermined number of pieces of history information or more are stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly performed in a short period of time.

Sixth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fourteenth counters 141a to 141n, 142a to 142n, 143a to 143n, and 144a to 144n are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. The first counters 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in the correspondence memory 116 among the first to fourteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123n that store information other than information indicating that they are blank is identified, and the information for the identified number is set in the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, information other than information indicating that they are blank is stored in the first to eleventh correspondence areas 123a to 123k, so in step S2201 the check target counter is set to "11".

Then, it is determined whether the buffer 122a-122n corresponding to the current counter to be checked is a buffer to which a status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the following correspondence information is stored in the correspondence area 123a-123n corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked: information indicating the open/close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, or information indicating the front door frame 14.

If the determination in step S2202 is affirmative, a setting process for state information is executed (step S2203). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from LOW level to HI level, first state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the first state information is erased from the management RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from LOW level to HI level, second state information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the ninth signal is switched from HI level to LOW level, the second state information is erased from the management RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the 10th signal, which indicates whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, switches from a LOW level to a HIGH level, information on the third state, which indicates that the front door frame 14 is open, is stored in the management RAM 114, and when the output state of the 10th signal switches from a HIGH level to a LOW level, information on the third state is erased from the management RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or if the process in step S2203 is executed, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is , it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level by checking whether it has been changed from "0" to "1" ( Step S2204). Note that if the numerical information stored in the eighth buffer 122h is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is the value corresponding to the eighth buffer 122h, the process proceeds to step S2203. The first state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Further, if the numerical information stored in the ninth buffer 122i is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is a value corresponding to the ninth buffer 122i, the process proceeds to step S2203. The second state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204. Furthermore, if the numerical information stored in the tenth buffer 122j is changed from "0" to "1" in a situation where the current value of the counter to be checked is the value corresponding to the tenth buffer 122j, the process proceeds to step S2203. The third state information is stored in the management side RAM 114, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2204.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fourteenth total counters 141a to 141n in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the eleventh counter 141k for totaling is the target of addition, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling is the target of addition, If the value of the check target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a becomes the addition target.

Then, by referring to the state information of the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the first state, i.e., whether or not the state is in the open/close execution mode (step S2206). If the state is the first state (step S2206: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the first state (step S2207). In this increment process, one is incremented from the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth counters 142a to 142n for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the eleventh counter 142k for the first state is the increment target, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state is the increment target.

Then, by referring to the state information of the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the second state, i.e., whether or not the state is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If the state is the second state (step S2208: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the second state (step S2209). In this increment process, one is incremented from the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth counters 143a to 143n for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the eleventh counter 143k for the second state is the increment target, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is the increment target.

Then, by referring to the state information of the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If the state is the third state (step S2210: YES), an increment process is performed on the corresponding counter for the third state (step S2211). In this increment process, one is incremented from the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fourteenth counters 144a to 144n for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "11", the eleventh counter 144k for the third state is the increment target, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is the increment target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is the increment target.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2204, if a negative judgment is made in step S2210, or if the processing of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether the value of the confirmation target counter after the decrement is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or greater (step S2213: NO), the processing from step S2202 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new confirmation target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the number of times a game ball enters the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the opening/closing execution The number of times a mode has occurred, the number of times a high-frequency support mode has occurred, and the number of times a game has occurred are not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but are stored as frequency information. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

By storing the number of times information instead of history information in this way, there is no need to execute a process to derive the number of times information from the history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2301: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "1". settings (step S2302). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Then, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HIGH level again (step S2303). If a positive determination is made in step S2303, the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2304). This causes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 identified by the management CPU 112 to increase by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303 or if the process in step S2304 is executed, based on the input states of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121. , it is determined whether a setting value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2305). If a negative determination is made in step S2305, the process returns to step S2303.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2305, the eleventh total counter 141k, which measures the number of times a game has been played in the total area 141 in the history memory 117, the eighth total counter 141h, which measures the number of times the open/close execution mode has occurred in the total area 141 in the history memory 117, and the ninth total counter 141i, which measures the number of times the high frequency support mode has occurred in the total area 141 in the history memory 117, are each cleared to "0" (steps S2306 to S2308). As a result, the number of times a game has been played, the number of times the open/close execution mode has occurred, and the number of times the high frequency support mode has occurred are cleared to "0" in response to the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the calculation results of the 31st parameter indicating the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit game, the 41st parameter indicating the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs per unit game, and the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs to the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs correspond to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In a configuration in which the probability of winning the jackpot result changes when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, by making the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter correspond to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set as described above, it becomes possible to determine whether the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting value.

On the other hand, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 will be " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry is managed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by new settings of the pachinko machine 10. becomes possible.

According to the above configuration, the number of times game balls enter the outlet 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs, the number of times the high frequency support mode occurs, and the number of times a game has occurred are stored as number information, rather than as history information as in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117, compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In addition, because the information is stored as frequency information rather than history information, there is no need to execute a process to derive frequency information from history information when calculating various parameters. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

The information on the number of times the game is executed, the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the number of times the high-frequency support mode occurs are cleared to "0" when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. Therefore, the 31st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit game, the 41st parameter indicates the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode per unit game, and the number of occurrences of the high frequency support mode with respect to the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. The calculation result of the 42nd parameter indicating the ratio of the number of occurrences corresponds to the game content after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. In a configuration in which the probability of winning a jackpot result is changed when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, as described above, the calculation results of the 31st parameter, the 41st parameter, and the 42nd parameter are the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. The calculation results of the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter are appropriate based on the current setting values by making them correspond to the game content after the new settings are made. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.

On the other hand, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the counters other than the eighth total counter 141h, the ninth total counter 141i, and the eleventh counter 141k in the history memory 117 will be " 0” is not cleared. As a result, the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry is managed based on long-term gaming history without being affected by new settings of the pachinko machine 10. becomes possible.

The configuration of the history memory 117 as in this embodiment may be applied to the first to fifth embodiments described above and the embodiments described after this embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the information in the history memory 117 is maintained as is even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Also, when applied to the third embodiment, the entire history memory 117 is cleared to "0" when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41) when the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed. As a result, even if a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting value is not changed before or after, information on the number of times the game has been executed, information on the number of times the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and high-frequency support The information on the number of times the mode occurs is never cleared to "0", and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, information on the number of times the game is executed, information on the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs, and high-frequency support mode It becomes possible to clear the information on the number of occurrences to "0".

Also, in the setting update recognition process (FIG. 41), before the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 are executed, various parameters may be calculated using the counters 141 to 144 in the history memory 117, and the calculated various parameters may be stored in the calculation result memory 131.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 includes history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting states of the pachinko machine 10, "setting 1" to "setting 6." Specifically, a history memory 181 for setting 1 is provided in correspondence with "setting 1," a history memory 182 for setting 2 is provided in correspondence with "setting 2," a history memory 183 for setting 3 is provided in correspondence with "setting 3," a history memory 184 for setting 4 is provided in correspondence with "setting 4," a history memory 185 for setting 5 is provided in correspondence with "setting 5," and a history memory 186 for setting 6 is provided in correspondence with "setting 6."

Each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 is provided with a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. This makes it possible to store history information in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 6." In this case, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is made are stored as history information. , it becomes possible to store history information separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when setting a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

Note that each of the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 includes a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144 in the sixth embodiment. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a combination of the following is set.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2401: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2402). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6". In addition, in this embodiment, since the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, is provided with a set value grasping counter, it is assumed that the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped. The value stored in the set value grasping counter is also memorized and held.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from the LOW level to the HI level again (step S2403). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, 1 is added to the value of the setting value grasping counter in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2404). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 specified by the management CPU 112 is increased by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, or if the processing of step S2404 is executed, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S2405). If a negative determination is made in step S2405, the processing returns to step S2403.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2405, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the value of the setting value understanding counter of the calculation result memory 131 are set as the storage target of history information and the reference target when calculating various parameters ( Step S2406). Specifically, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "1", it means that "setting 1" has been set, so the history memory 181 for setting 1 is used as a storage target for history information and for various parameters. Set as a reference target during calculation. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "2", it means that "setting 2" has been set, so the history memory 182 for setting 2 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "3", it means that "setting 3" has been set, so the history memory 183 for setting 3 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. Furthermore, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "4", it means that "setting 4" has been set. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value grasp counter is "5", it means that "setting 5" has been set, so the history memory 185 for setting 5 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target. In addition, if the value of the setting value understanding counter is "6", it means that "setting 6" has been set, so the history memory 186 for setting 6 is used as a storage target for history information and when calculating various parameters. Set as a reference target.

Thereafter, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2407). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2408). In the writing process, the history memories 181 to 186 set as the storage target of history information in step S2406 are selected from among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6. Then, by referring to the pointer area 126 in the history memory 181 to 186 that is the storage target, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified, and the pointer information that is the current writing target is identified. The RTC information read in step S2407 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information located therein. Further, information for identifying the set value is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set and RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made is stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S2409). In the update process, among the history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6, the history memories 181 to 186 that were set to store history information in step S2406 are selected, and the history memories 181 to 186 are The numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 is read out and added by 1. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

According to the above configuration, as the history memory 117, history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6 are provided to correspond to "settings 1" to "setting 6", respectively. This makes it possible to store game history in correspondence with each of the setting states of the pachinko machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." In this case, when a new setting is made for the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 181 to 186 corresponding to the setting value for which the new setting is made are stored as history information. , it becomes possible to store history information separately for each setting value without erasing the history information when setting a new setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since various parameters are calculated using history information corresponding to the currently set setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters corresponding to each set value.

The history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which six memories, history memories 181-186 for settings 1-6, are provided, and a configuration in which an area corresponding to history memory 181 for setting 1, an area corresponding to history memory 182 for setting 2, an area corresponding to history memory 183 for setting 3, an area corresponding to history memory 184 for setting 4, an area corresponding to history memory 185 for setting 5, and an area corresponding to history memory 186 for setting 6 are provided for one memory may be used.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment.

The history memory 117 includes a first history memory 191 and a second history memory 192. Each of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 includes a combination of the history area 124 and the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 in the first embodiment. In this case, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where history information is stored using one of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, the history information in the one history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 can be left without being erased until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, and new history information can be stored in both history memories 191 and the second history memory 192 until a predetermined number or more of history information is stored in the other history memory 191 and the second history memory 192.

Next, the setting update recognition process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45.

When the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 switches from LOW level to HI level (step S2501: YES), the value of the setting value grasping counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is changed to " 1" (step S2502). The setting value grasping counter is a counter for specifying the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the management side CPU 112. For example, if the value of the setting value grasping counter is "1", it means "setting 1", If the value of the setting value grasping counter is "6", it means that the setting is "setting 6".

Then, it is determined whether the setting value update signal input to the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 has switched from LOW level to HIGH level again (step S2503). If a positive determination is made in step S2503, the value of the setting value grasp counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2504). This causes the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 identified by the management CPU 112 to increase by one level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, or if the processing of step S2504 is executed, it is determined whether or not a set value identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 based on the input state of the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h of the input port 121 (step S2505). If a negative determination is made in step S2505, the processing returns to step S2503.

If the determination in step S2505 is affirmative, the setting change occurrence flag provided in the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2506). The setting change occurrence flag is a flag for the management side CPU 112 to identify whether or not, after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the other history memory 191, 192 is to be used as the storage target for history information in addition to the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 that had been set as the storage target for history information up until that point. In addition, since the setting change occurrence flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require an external power supply to store the memory, the value stored in the setting change occurrence flag is stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped.

Then, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2507). Then, a write process is executed to each history memory 191, 192 (step S2508). In the write process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191, and the RTC information read in step S2507 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, both information for identifying the setting value and information on the value of the setting value grasp counter are written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made is stored as history information in the first history memory 191. In addition, in this write process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192, and the RTC information read in step S2507 is written to the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information being written. In addition, both information for identifying the setting value and information on the value of the setting value grasp counter are written to the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information being written. As a result, a combination of information indicating that the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has been newly set, RTC information corresponding to the date and time when the setting was made, and information on the setting value when the setting was made is stored as history information in the second history memory 192.

Thereafter, update processing for each target pointer is executed (step S2509). In the update process, first, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the first history memory 191 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information. In addition, in the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the second history memory 192 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

Next, the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 46.

If the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is not set to "1" (step S2601: NO), the side that is the storage target of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is This means that only historical information should be stored. In this case, first, the history memories 191 and 192 that are current storage targets are determined (step S2602). A storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, and when the value of the storage target flag is "0", the first history memory 191 becomes the storage target, and the value of the storage target flag is "1". In this case, the second history memory 192 becomes the storage target. Note that since the storage target flag is provided in the calculation result memory 131, which is a memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, even if the supply of operating power to the management IC 66 is stopped, the storage target flag will remain unchanged. The value of is stored and retained.

Thereafter, a history setting execution process is executed for the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored (step S2603). Specifically, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored. As a result, the history information is stored in one of the history memories 191 and 192 that is the storage target.

On the other hand, if the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2601: YES), the storage target out of the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 is set to "1" (step S2601: YES). This means that the situation is such that history information should be stored not only on one side but also on the other side. In this case, history setting execution processing is executed for both history memories 191 and 192 (step S2604). Specifically, first, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed for the first history memory 191. As a result, the history information is stored in the first history memory 191. Thereafter, steps S1101 to S1112 of the history setting process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed on the second history memory 192. As a result, the history information is stored in the second history memory 192.

When the process of step S2603 is executed or when the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1" (step S2605). When the determination is affirmative in step S2605, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number or more of ball discharge history exists in the non-storage target history memories 191, 192 (step S2606). Specifically, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is the storage target, so it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored in the second history memory 192. Also, when the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "1", the second history memory 192 is the storage target, so it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (specifically, "1000") or more of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA is stored in the first history memory 191. Note that, instead of determining whether or not a predetermined number of pieces of history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA (specifically, "1000") have been stored, it is also possible to determine whether or not a predetermined number of pieces of history information indicating that a game round has been played (specifically, "100") have been stored.

If the determination is affirmative in step S2606, a process for changing the storage target is executed (step S2607). In the process for changing the storage target, the first history memory 191 or the second history memory 192 is changed to be the storage target by setting the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 to a value between two values that is different from the current value. Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the storage target is changed from the first history memory 191 to the second history memory 192 by setting the storage target flag to "1". Also, if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the storage target is changed from the second history memory 192 to the first history memory 191 by clearing the storage target flag to "0". As a result, the history memories 191 and 192 in which only history information from games executed after the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed is set as the storage target. Various parameters are then calculated using the history information in the newly stored history memories 191, 192, making it possible to derive various parameters for games played after the new settings for the pachinko machine 10 have been made.

Then, a clear process is executed for either the first history memory 191 or the second history memory 192, whichever had been the storage target up until that point (step S2608). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag is "0", the second history memory 192 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the first history memory 191 is cleared to "0". Then, the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0" (step S2609).

Next, the display output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

If it is the calculation timing (step S2701: YES), which side of the first history memory 191 and second history memory 192 is to be stored is determined (step S2702). Specifically, if the value of the storage target flag of the calculation result memory 131 is "0", the first history memory 191 is recognized as the storage target, and if the value of the storage target flag is "1", the second history memory 191 is determined as the storage target. The history memory 192 is grasped as a storage target. Thereafter, steps S1402 to S1412 of the display output process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed using the history information stored in the storage target history memories 191 and 192 ascertained in step S2702. By doing this, various parameters (1st to 8th parameters, 11th to 18th parameters, 21st to 26th parameters, 31st parameters, 41st to 42nd parameters) are calculated, and the various calculated parameters are calculated. The results are stored in the result memory 131 (step S2703). In this case, the history information is stored in both the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 because the setting change occurrence flag of the calculation result memory 131 is set to "1". Even if there is, various parameters are calculated using one of the history memories 191 and 192 to be stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or if the processing of step S2703 is executed, display processing is executed (step S2704). The processing content of the display processing is the same as the display processing in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 31).

According to the above configuration, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192 are provided as the history memory 117, and when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history memories 191 and 192 that had been the storage targets are still the storage targets, while history information is also stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not the storage targets. Then, when a predetermined number or more of history information corresponding to the discharge of game balls from the play area PA is stored in the history memories 191 and 192 that are not the storage targets, the history memories 191 and 192 that are not the storage targets are still the storage targets, and the history memories 191 and 192 that were the storage targets are cleared to "0". As a result, when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to calculate various parameters using only the history information of the games played at the newly set setting values.

On the other hand, with the above configuration, even if the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly changed in a short period of time to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed appropriately, the history memories 191, 192 to be stored are maintained without being changed. This makes it possible to properly derive the management results of the game history up to that point, even if the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are repeatedly changed in a short period of time.

Note that the history memory 117 is not limited to a configuration in which two memories, the first history memory 191 and the second history memory 192, are provided; A configuration may be adopted in which a first history area corresponding to the memory 191 and a second history area corresponding to the second history memory 192 are set.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only one history memory 117 is provided. In this case, if the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA exceeds a predetermined number after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, the new setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. The configuration may be such that the history information before the timing when the setting is made is deleted, and the history information after the timing when the setting is made is stored and held without being deleted. As a result, at the timing when a predetermined number or more of history information has been accumulated since a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was performed, the history information before the timing when the new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 was set It becomes possible to erase information. In addition, by storing history information corresponding to a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 in the history memory 117, new settings of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored in the history memory 117. It becomes possible to distinguish between history information before and after the timing at which the process was performed.

The timing for erasing the history information is not limited to when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined number after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set, but may be when the number of game plays executed becomes equal to or exceeds a predetermined number after the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set.

In addition, even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting value has not been changed before and after the setting, the history memories 191, 192 to be stored as described above will not be changed and the history information will not be erased. However, if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 and the setting value has been changed before and after the setting, the history memories 191, 192 to be stored as described above will be changed and the history information will be erased.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the type of buffer, of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management I/F 111, for which the type of input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, is different from that of the first embodiment. Also, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to cause the management CPU 112 to identify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations that differ from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input to the third buffer 122c, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the fourth buffer 122d, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is inputted as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is inputted as the 10th signal to the 10th buffer 122j, the signal corresponding to the start of the game round is inputted as the 11th signal to the 11th buffer 122k, and the setting value update signal is inputted to the 15th buffer 122j. 122o, but in this embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the start of a game round is input to the 11th buffer 122k as a game round signal, a set value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, and a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input during the opening/closing execution mode. The signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as a signal, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122n as a high-frequency support mode signal. It is input to buffer 122o.

The game time signal is input to the 11th buffer 122k, the setting value update signal is input to the 12th buffer 122l, the opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the 14th buffer 122n is inputted to the 14th buffer 122n. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the high frequency support mode signal is input, the door open signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. The management CPU 112 can specify, without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63, that the corresponding signals are input to the eleventh to sixteenth buffers 122k to 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S111 of the main process (Figure 9) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "10", which is the number of the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j whose signal types are to be recognized (step S2801). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S2802). In the output processing, the respective output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting the signal to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Then, the information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output count counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2803). The output count counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify the number of times the type identification signal has been output.

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal is determined. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as . The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to tenth buffer 122j in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the tenth buffer 122j are understood as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering portion corresponding to the signal type.

In step S2803, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "10", "9", and "8", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "5", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, if the value of the recognition output counter is "4", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the payout of the game ball will not be executed, so the output number counter will not be executed. Set "0" to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "3" to "1", the corresponding ball entry part does not exist and is blank, so the output number counter is set to "0".

After that, the output process of the start trigger signal is executed (step S2804). In this output process, the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is set to a HI level, thereby starting the output of the start trigger signal. The period during which the first signal is maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2805: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2803, The process advances to step S2806. In step S2806, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Then, the value of the output count counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S2807), and it is determined whether the value of the output count counter after decrement is "0" (step S2808). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S2808: NO), the process returns to step S2806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2809). In the output process, output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2810), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2811). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2811: NO), the process returns to step S2803 and executes processing to recognize the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2811: YES), output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S2812). In this output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are set to a HI level, thereby starting output of the identification end signal. The period during which these signals are maintained at a HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output states of these signals.

Next, the management process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 50. The management process starts when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 starts, as in the first embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2901). If the identification start signal has not been received, the setting update recognition process is executed in step S2902, and then the process in step S2901 is executed again. The contents of the setting update recognition process are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2901: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2903). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal has been received (step S2905: YES), the value of the reception frequency counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2906). The reception count counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception frequency counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2904.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2905, or if the processing of step S2906 is executed, it is judged whether or not a termination trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2907). If a termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2907: NO), the process returns to step S2905. If a termination trigger signal has been received (step S2907: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S2908). In the correspondence setting process, the value set in the reception count counter is stored in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114, among the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the correspondence memory 116. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set to "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning port 31, the fourth correspondence area 123d is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the special winning device 32, the fifth correspondence area 123e is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33, and the sixth correspondence area 123f is set to "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34. In addition, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2909).

If a negative determination is made in step S2904, or if the process in step S2909 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S2910: NO), the process returns to step S2904, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2904: YES), the process from step S2905 onward is executed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2910: YES), the history setting process of step S2911, the display output process of step S2912, and the external output process of step S2913 are repeatedly executed.

Figure 51 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 51(a) shows a period during which the output state of the first signal is at a HI level, FIG. 51(b) shows a period during which the output state of the second signal is at a HI level, FIG. 51(c) shows a period during which the output state of the third signal is at a HI level, FIG. 51(d) shows a period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at a HI level, FIG. 51(e) shows a period during which the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at a HI level, FIG. 51(f) shows an execution period of an identification state during which a process is executed to identify the correspondence between the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122j, FIG. 51(g) shows the timing at which the value of the reception counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 51(h) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S2908) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112, at the timing t1, the first signal , the output states of the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at a HI level from time t3 to time t4 as shown in FIG. 51(a). This results in a state in which a start trigger signal has been output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at a HI level from time t5 to time t7 as shown in FIG. 51(b). This results in a state in which a type identification signal has been output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at time t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 51(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t8 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 51(c). As a result, a state is reached in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "1" is written as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in FIG. 51(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the second The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, each type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG. 51(g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at HI level from timing t25 to timing t27 as shown in FIG. 51(c). This results in a state in which a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes a correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 51(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" when the correspondence setting process is executed, the information "10" is stored as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123j of the current setting target in the correspondence memory 116.

Thereafter, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 51(c), 51(d), and 51(e), the output state of the third signal, opening/closing execution mode signal, and high-frequency support mode signal becomes LOW. level is changed to HI level. As a result, output of an identification completion signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2910 of the management process (FIG. 50), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 51(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as correspondence relationship information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball part that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of objects is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple types of ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry parts in the history information. Specifically, since both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 have one prize ball, it is difficult to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the historical information even in a configuration in which historical information is stored as in this embodiment.

According to the embodiment described above in detail, not only the setting value update signal and the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether a game has started, the information corresponding to whether the opening and closing execution mode is in, the information corresponding to whether the high frequency support mode is in, and the information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open can be identified by the management CPU 112 as the signal path corresponding to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence between each information and each signal path 118a to 118j. Then, when the correspondence information is made to the management CPU 112, the number of pulse signals equal to the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for transmitting the correspondence information.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each shot result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. The fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. In addition, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching off from a midpoint of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without the intervention of processing by the main CPU 63. This eliminates the need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing to make the management CPU 112 recognize the results of each ball entry at the outlet 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, making it possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents fraudulent activity in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. .

<Eleventh embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of a display device for displaying game history management results. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 53 is a front view of the main control device 60 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 60 was provided with a first notification display device 69a, a second notification display device 69b, and a third notification display device 69c, but in this embodiment, a first notification display device 201, a second notification display device 202, a third notification display device 203, and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided. These first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side on the element mounting surface of the main control board 61.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitting body, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all installed so that their display surfaces face the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces, and are mounted on the opposite wall 60b of the board box 60a. covered. In this case, since the board box 60a is transparent, the display surfaces of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 housed in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. becomes possible. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in such a manner that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. When the main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 are exposed through the opposing wall portion 60b. It becomes possible to visually check the display screen of 204 to 204.

The display surface of the first notification display device 201 displays alphabets such as "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O". On the other hand, the second notification display device 202, the third notification display device 203, and the fourth notification display device 204 display numbers in the range of "0" to "9". The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used to notify the results of game history management. In this case, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 display information corresponding to the type of game history management result to be notified (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters in the first embodiment), and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display information corresponding to the content of the game history management result of the type to be notified.

Specifically, the types of game history management results are the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters in the first embodiment. exists. The first notification display device 201 displays a display corresponding to the type of parameter group to be notified. Specifically, "A" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 when any one of the 1st to 8th parameters is targeted for notification, and when any of the 11th to 18th parameters is targeted for notification. If the notification target is set, "E" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, and if any of the 21st to 26th parameters is the notification target, the first notification display device 201 displays If "H" is displayed in 201, and any of the 31st parameters are to be notified, "L" is displayed in the first notification display device 201, and the 41st to 42nd parameters are to be notified. If it is a target, "O" is displayed on the first notification display device 201.

The second notification display device 202 displays the order of the game history management results for the parameter group being notified, in a sequence that corresponds to the type of game history management result being notified. Taking the parameter group of parameters 1 to 8 as an example, when the first parameter is the subject of notification, a "1" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the second parameter is the subject of notification, a "2" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the third parameter is the subject of notification, a "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the fourth parameter is the subject of notification, a "4" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the fifth parameter is the subject of notification, a "5" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the sixth parameter is the subject of notification, a "6" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, when the seventh parameter is the subject of notification, a "7" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, and when the eighth parameter is the subject of notification, an "8" is displayed on the second notification display device 202. In addition, taking the parameter group of parameters 21 to 26 as an example, if the 21st parameter is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays "1", if the 22nd parameter is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays "2", if the 23rd parameter is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays "3", if the 24th parameter is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays "4", if the 25th parameter is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays "5", and if the 26th parameter is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays "6".

In detail, regarding the display contents of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number corresponding to the tens place of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100 is It is displayed on the display device 203, and the number corresponding to the ones place is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters Displays corresponding to the calculation results of the parameters are sequentially switched according to a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 42nd parameter, which is the display target in the last order, is displayed, the first parameter, which is the display target in the first order, is displayed. The calculation result will be displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 2 seconds. On the other hand, the calculation cycle of the various parameters mentioned above in the management side CPU 112 is 51 seconds, and the number of various parameters is 25. Therefore, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are to be reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 202 at least once.

In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the first embodiment, not only the game history management results are notified, but also a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. , the value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. Specifically, in the changeable state, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off, whereas the first to fourth notification display devices 204 arranged horizontally are located at the right end. The value corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. In other words, when "Setting 1" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when "Setting 2" is selected in the changeable state, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. "2" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and if "Setting 3" is selected in the changeable state, "3" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and the change is possible. When “Setting 4” is selected in the state, “4” is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when “Setting 5” is selected in the changeable state, the fourth notification display device 204 displays “4”. "5" is displayed on the display device 204, and when "setting 6" is selected in the changeable state, "6" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Next, the electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration for performing various displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 under the control of the MPU 62.

As already explained, the main control board 61 is provided with the MPU 62 and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Further, the main control board 61 is provided with a first display IC 205, a second display IC 206, a third display IC 207, and a fourth display IC 208.

The first display IC 205 is provided corresponding to the first notification display device 201, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via a signal path SL31 and electrically connected to the first notification display device 201 via a signal path SL32. It is connected. The first display IC 205 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the first notification display device 201 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the first display IC 205, the display data stored in the storage buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the first notification display device. 201 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the first notification display device 201 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the first display IC 205 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the first notification display device 201 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the first display IC 205, the display can be performed on the first display IC 205 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the first notification display device 201 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the first notification display device 201.

The second display IC 206 is provided corresponding to the second notification display device 202, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through a signal path SL33 and electrically connected to the second notification display device 202 through a signal path SL34. It is connected. The second display IC 206 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the second notification display device 202 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the second display IC 206, the display data stored in the memory buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the second notification display. 202 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the second notification display device 202 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the second display IC 206 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, Then, the second notification display device 202 is in a non-display state, that is, in a light-off state.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the second display IC 206, the display can be displayed on the second display IC 206 even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the second notification display device 202 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the second notification display device 202.

The third display IC 207 is provided corresponding to the third notification display device 203, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 through a signal path SL35 and electrically connected to the third notification display device 203 through a signal path SL36. It is connected. The third display IC 207 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and the display control of the third notification display device 203 is performed according to the display data stored in the storage buffer, that is, each display Controls the light emission of the segment. When operating power is supplied to the third display IC 207, the display data stored in the memory buffer can be stored and held, and the display content corresponding to the stored display data is displayed on the third notification display device. 203 to continue displaying. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display on the third notification display device 203 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, in a situation where the display data has not been set by the MPU 62 after the supply of operating power to the third display IC 207 has started, the display data becomes all "0" data, but in this case, In this case, the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state, that is, a light-off state.

However, this is not limited to the above configuration, and the third display IC 207 may be configured to store and hold display data even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped by supplying backup power to the third display IC 207. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was being performed on the third notification display device 203 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped will be started on the third notification display device 203.

The fourth display IC 208 is provided in correspondence with the fourth alarm display device 204, and is electrically connected to the MPU 62 via signal path SL37 and to the fourth alarm display device 204 via signal path SL38. The fourth display IC 208 is provided with a storage buffer for storing display data received from the MPU 62, and performs display control of the fourth alarm display device 204, i.e., light emission control of each display segment, according to the display data stored in the storage buffer. When operating power is supplied, the fourth display IC 208 can store and hold the display data stored in the storage buffer, and causes the fourth alarm display device 204 to continuously display the display content corresponding to the stored display data. Then, when the display data is changed by the MPU 62, the display of the fourth alarm display device 204 is changed to the display content corresponding to the changed display data. In addition, after the supply of operating power to the fourth display IC 208 has started and the display data has not yet been set by the MPU 62, the display data will be all "0" data, in which case the fourth notification display device 204 will be in a non-display state, i.e., turned off.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and by supplying backup power to the fourth display IC 208, the fourth display IC 208 can display information even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. It may also be configured to be able to store and retain data. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the display that was displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is It will be started on the fourth notification display device 204.

The output of display data to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 is performed by the MPU 62, but output settings for the display data are performed by the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, respectively. That is, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the management side CPU 112 executes display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, the period during which the display data output setting is performed in each of the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 is adjusted so that the display data output setting is not performed at the same time. Specifically, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, the output setting of display data by the main CPU 63 is performed. In contrast, the management side CPU 112 does not perform display data output settings. On the other hand, in a state where the set value is not changeable, the management side CPU 112 sets the display data output, whereas the main side CPU 63 does not set the display data output.

If the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 are performed synchronously, the display data output setting by the main CPU 63 takes precedence. However, this is not limited to this, and the display data output setting by the management CPU 112 may take precedence.

Next, the display process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 55.

First, the value of the update timing counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3001). The update timing counter is a counter used by the management side CPU 112 to specify that it is the timing to update the display content of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Thereafter, by determining whether the value of the update timing counter after subtraction by 1 is "0", it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. is determined (step S3002).

If a positive judgment is made in step S3002, the value of the display target counter in the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S3003). Then, if the value of the display target counter after incrementing by 1 exceeds the maximum value of "24" (step S3004: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S3005). The display target counter is a counter that allows the management CPU 112 to identify the type of parameter that is to be displayed in the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters and the possible values of the display target counter, "0" to "24". For example, when the value of the display object counter is "0", the first parameter, which is the first display object, becomes the display object of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and when the value of the display object counter is "24", the 42nd parameter, which is the last display object, becomes the display object of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S3004 or if the process in step S3005 is executed, display data corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3006). Then, a setting process for display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is executed (step S3007), and a process for setting display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is executed (step S3008). For example, if the value of the display target counter is "0" and the first parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "A" on the first notification display device 201 is sent to the first display IC 205. At the same time, display data for displaying "1" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206. For example, if the value of the display target counter is "24" and the 42nd parameter is the display target, display data for displaying "O" on the first notification display device 201 is displayed in the first display. At the same time as being output to the IC 205, display data for displaying "2" on the second notification display device 202 is output to the second display IC 206.

Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result memory 131, and the display data corresponding to the tens digit and the display data corresponding to the ones digit of the result of multiplying the read parameter by 100 are displayed. It is read from the management side ROM 113 (step S3009). Then, the display of the third notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the tens digit of the result is displayed (step S3010), and the fourth notification display device 203 is controlled so that the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed. Display control is performed on the notification display device 204 (step S3011). For example, when the result of multiplying by 100 is "53", display data for displaying "5" on the third notification display device 203 is output to the third display IC 207, and at the same time, it is output to the fourth notification display device 204. Display data for displaying "3" is output to the fourth display IC 208.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the management side RAM 114 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3012).

By executing the display process as described above, the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The game history management results are displayed regardless of whether or not play is continuing, and regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened relative to the outer frame 11 and the main control device 60 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. By executing display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in this way regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 starts after the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started and after the identification end command is received from the main side CPU 63. be done. In this case, the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is retained even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, similar to the information stored in the history memory 117. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, the gaming history management results calculated before the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is stopped are displayed.

While operating power is being supplied to the first to fourth display ICs 205-208, they store and hold the display data output from the MPU 62, and control the display of the corresponding first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 according to that display data. Therefore, after the display of the game history management results begins, the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 are never turned off (i.e., not displayed), but are turned on (i.e., displayed) to display some kind of information.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56.

First, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are turned off (step S3101). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first to third display ICs 205 to 207. As a result, the display segments of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are all turned off, and the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are placed in a non-display state. Immediately after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, all the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are off, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 are in a non-display state. Therefore, step S3101 is a process for maintaining the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 in a non-display state, and if any of the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are If it is in a display state, it is a process of turning it into a non-display state.

Thereafter, the setting value counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3102). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a process to start displaying the set value in the fourth display notification device 204 is executed (step S3103). In the setting value display start process, display data for displaying "1" is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S3104: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing operation of the update button 68b has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3105: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3106). If the value of the setting value counter after incrementing by 1 exceeds "6" (step S3107: YES), the setting value counter is set to "1" (step S3108). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher level each time the update button 68b is pressed, and if the update button 68b is pressed once when the setting is "setting 6", the setting will return to "setting 1".

If a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process in step S3108 is executed, a process to update the display of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3109). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. Thereby, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process in step S3109, the process returns to step S3104, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3104: NO), the processes from step S3105 onward are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3104: YES), a process to start displaying the management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3110).

In the display start processing, a management result display start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112, which has received the management result display start command, executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, a display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Next, the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management results are displayed and when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated will be described. Figure 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the game history management results are displayed, and Figure 57(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

When the gaming history management results are displayed, at least one display segment is illuminated in each of the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 57(a). In other words, each of the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. This is the same regardless of whether the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameters, or the forty-first to forty-second parameters are the ones to be notified. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to visually confirm that all of the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 are in a display state and to ascertain that the gaming history management results are being displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204.

On the other hand, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, all display segments are turned off in each of the first to third alert display devices 201 to 203 as shown in FIG. 57(b). In other words, each of the first to third alert display devices 201 to 203 is turned off. Also, the fourth alert display device 204 displays one of the numbers "1" to "6." In this way, the fourth alert display device 204 displays one of the numbers "1" to "6" and each of the first to third alert display devices 201 to 203 is turned off, so that the manager of the amusement hall can know that the first to fourth alert display devices 201 to 204 are displaying values corresponding to the setting values, and can clearly understand the current setting values.

Next, we will explain how the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 enter a display state, with reference to the time charts in Figures 58 (a) to 58 (h). FIG. 58(a) shows a period during which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changeable, FIG. 58(b) shows the timing of updating the setting display on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 58(c) shows a period during which the results of game history management are displayed on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 58(d) shows the timing of updating the display corresponding to the results of game history management on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 58(e) shows a period during which the first display device 201 is in a display state, FIG. 58(f) shows a period during which the second display device 202 is in a display state, FIG. 58(g) shows a period during which the third display device 203 is in a display state, and FIG. 58(h) shows a period during which the fourth display device 204 is in a display state.

The setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 58(a) by starting supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key insertion part 68a turned on. It becomes a changeable state where it can be changed. At the timing t1, the setting display is updated as shown in FIG. 58(b), and the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state and continues the display state as shown in FIG. 58(h). In this case, since "Setting 1" is selected, "1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, at timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, that is, all display segments are turned off. maintained.

Thereafter, by operating the update button 68b to change the set value at each of timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, and timing t5, each of these timings is changed as shown in FIG. 58(b). This is the timing to update the setting value display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(h), the display content of the fourth notification display device 204 is switched to the number corresponding to the changed setting value at each of these timings, but this display content switching The fourth notification display device 204 is maintained in the display state including each timing when the notification is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are in the non-display state at each of these setting value display update timings, that is, all display devices are in the non-display state. The segment remains unlit.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off at timing t6, thereby ending the changeable state as shown in FIG. 58(a). In this case, at the timing t6, the display period of the gaming history management results starts as shown in FIG. 58(c). Specifically, display of the first parameter stored in the calculation result memory 131 is started. Therefore, at the timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 58(e) to 58(g), the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 are switched from the non-display state to the display state, and the fourth notification display is Although the display contents of the device 204 are changed, the display state is maintained.

After that, at times t7, t8, t9, t10, t11, and t12, the display of the gaming history management results is updated as shown in Fig. 58(d). In this case, as shown in Fig. 58(e) to Fig. 58(h), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will switch to the display content corresponding to the updated gaming history management results at each of these times, but all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be maintained in the display state, including at each time when this display content is switched.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In a configuration in which the results of game history management are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a changeable state in which it is possible to change the setting state, a corresponding display is made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 not only for displaying the results of game history management, but also as display devices for making a corresponding display in the changeable state.

A distinction is made between the period during which the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 display the game history management results and the period during which the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 display information corresponding to the setting value being in a changeable state. This makes it possible to identify which display is being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 by understanding the state in which the display is being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204.

When a display corresponding to a changeable state of the setting value is made, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are controlled to have a different display mode than the display mode when the gaming history management results are displayed. This makes it possible to identify which display is being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by grasping the display mode of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Multiple notification display devices 201-204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays corresponding to the results of game history management. Furthermore, the presence of multiple notification display devices 201-204 makes it possible to greatly differ the display mode when the results of game history management are displayed from when a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is performed.

When a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is made, the first to third notification display devices 201-203, which are not in a hidden state when displaying the game history management results, are in a hidden state. This makes it possible to clearly identify which of the display of the game history management results and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value are being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, simply by checking whether the first to third notification display devices 201-203 are in a hidden state.

When the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is displayed, the fourth notification display device 204 enters the display state, and the display content is the same as that of the fourth notification display device 204 when displaying the game history management results. This is the display content that can be displayed in . By making it possible for the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 to overlap in this way, it is possible to overlap each case when the game history management results are displayed and when the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed. This makes it possible to avoid placing restrictions on the displayed content. Furthermore, even if the display contents on the fourth notification display device 204 are configured to overlap, if the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, the display contents on the first to third notification display devices 204 may overlap. Since 201 to 203 are in a non-display state, it is possible to specify which display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the game history management results are displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are each in a display state. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display modes of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 between when the game history management results are displayed and when a display corresponding to a changeable state of the setting value is made.

When the gaming history management results are displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not maintained in a hidden state even if the type of gaming history management results to be displayed is changed. . This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked in a situation where the gaming history management results are displayed. In addition, regardless of the timing at which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are checked, the game history management results can be displayed and the setting values can be changed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to specify which of the corresponding displays is being performed.

When a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is performed, only one of the fourth notification display devices 204 is in the display state. This makes it easier to understand whether or not a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is being displayed.

In a configuration in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged horizontally, a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is displayed using only the fourth notification display device 204 located at the right end. It will be done. This makes it easier to understand whether or not a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is being displayed.

When the game history management results are displayed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are used to display a result corresponding to the type of game history management result to be displayed, and the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 are used to display a result corresponding to the content of the game history management result. This makes it easier to understand the game history management result. In this case, when the setting value is in a changeable state, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which display the type of game history management result, are both in a non-display state. This means that the non-display state of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 for displaying the type corresponds to the changeable state of the setting value, making it easier to understand that a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being performed.

In addition, when a display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is displayed, not only the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 that display the type of management result of the game history, but also the game The third notification display device 203 on which the contents of the history management results are displayed also goes into a non-display state. This makes it easier to understand that the display corresponding to the setting value changeable state is being displayed.

In a configuration in which display data is output from the MPU 62 to the first to fourth display ICs 205-208, and the first to fourth display ICs 205-208 cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 to perform a predetermined display in accordance with the display data, the display data is stored and held in the first to fourth display ICs 205-208. As a result, even if the execution of processing for progressing the game is stopped in the main CPU 63 due to the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality (when a positive judgment is made in step S306), it is possible to maintain the display of the game history management results in the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204.

It should be noted that among the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the objects that become non-displayed (all lights out) in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed are the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The present invention is not limited to the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and may be the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. In this case, the third notification display device 203 displays a predetermined display (for example, “5”) that is different from the current setting value, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the current setting value. The configuration may be such that a number corresponding to the number is displayed, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays a predetermined display (for example, "5") that is different from the contents of the current setting value, and the third notification The configuration may be such that the display device 203 displays numbers corresponding to the current setting values. Further, the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 are in a display state. Alternatively, the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification display device 202 and third notification display device 203 may be in a display state. It may be configured such that the second notification display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 are in a non-display state (all lights out), and the first notification display device 201 and the fourth notification display device 204 are displayed. The second notification display device 202 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the first notification display device 201 and the third notification display device 203 It may be configured such that the is displayed.

Further, in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in a non-display state (all lights out), and the second notification A configuration may be adopted in which only the display device 202 is in a non-display state (all lights out), a configuration in which only the third notification display device 203 is in a non-display state (all lights out), and the fourth notification display device may be in a non-display state (all lights out). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only 204 is in a non-display state (all lights out).

Furthermore, in the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, only the first notification display device 201 may be in the display state, and only the second notification display device 202 may be in the display state. It is good also as a structure where only the third notification display device 203 is in the display state.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the setting value changeable state are different from the above-described eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 59(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first notification display device 201, and FIG. 59(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second notification display device 202.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the first notification display device 201 includes seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g is formed into a rod shape and has a light emitting body such as an LED inside. These seven first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g are arranged so that the first notification display device 201 becomes a so-called 7 segment display.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), the second alarm display device 202 has seven display segments, numbered 1 to 7, 202a to 202g. Each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is formed in a rod shape and has an LED or other light emitter inside. These seven display segments, numbered 1 to 7, 202a to 202g, are arranged so that the second alarm display device 202 is a so-called 7-segment display.

FIG. 60 shows a case where the management results of the game history are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and a case where the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in a changeable state where the setting state can be changed. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in FIG.

The display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 when displaying the results of game history management are the same as those of the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, the first notification display device 201 displays any of "A", "E", "H", "L" or "O", and the second notification display device 202 displays any of "1" to "8".

In this case, each of the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g of the first alarm display device 201 becomes an illumination target when at least one of the following displays is displayed on the first alarm display device 201: "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O". In other words, there are no display segments 201a to 201g that do not become illumination targets when the first alarm display device 201 displays any of "A", "E", "H", "L", and "O".

Similarly, regarding the second notification display device 202, each of the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g of the second notification display device 202 corresponds to “1” to “8” in the second notification display device 202. The light is emitted in at least one type of display among the displays. That is, even when displaying any of "1" to "8" on the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 202a to 202g that are not subject to light emission.

In the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e of the first notification display device 201 are in a light emitting state. As already explained, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e can be in a light-emitting state when the first notification display device 201 displays the game history management results. Furthermore, in any case where the game history management results are displayed on the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state. On the other hand, among the first to seventh display segments 201a to 201g, only the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state.The display content of the first notification display device 201 is the management of game history. Does not exist when displaying results. As a result, in the setting value changeable state, display segments 201b and 201e that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management results of the gaming history are used, but the display is not displayed when displaying the management results of the gaming history. It becomes possible to display the mode on the first notification display device 201. Therefore, it is possible to cause the first notification display device 201 to display a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 201a to 201g used when displaying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible.

In the setting value changeable state, the third display segment 202c of the second notification display device 202 is in a light emitting state. As already explained, the third display segment 202c can be in a light emitting state when the second notification display device 202 displays the game history management results. On the other hand, the display content of the second notification display device 202 in which only the third display segment 202c among the first to seventh display segments 202a to 202g is in a light emitting state exists when displaying the management results of game history. I haven't. As a result, while the display segment 202c that can be in a light emitting state when displaying the management results of gaming history in the setting value changeable state is used, a display mode that is not displayed when displaying the management results of gaming history can be used. It becomes possible to display it on the second notification display device 202. Therefore, it is possible to cause the second notification display device 202 to display a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value while also using the display segments 202a to 202g used when displaying the management results of the game history. It becomes possible.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 61.

First, a process to start displaying set values on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is executed (step S3201). Specifically, in the first notification display device 201, the second display segment 201b and the fifth display segment 201e are in a light emitting state, and the other display segments 201a, 201c, 201d, 201f, and 201g are in a light-off state. This display data is output to the first display IC 205. Further, regarding the second notification display device 202, display data is outputted to the second display IC 206 such that the third display segment 202c is in a light-emitting state and the other display segments 202a, 202b, 202d to 202g are in a light-off state. As a result, a display is started on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is in a changeable state in which the setting state can be changed.

Then, the third alarm display device 203 is turned off (step S3202). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the third display IC 207. As a result, all display segments of the third alarm display device 203 are turned off, and the third alarm display device 203 is turned off.

Then, the setting value counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3203). The setting value counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to identify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is. By setting the setting value counter to "1", when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "Setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Thereafter, a process to start displaying the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3204). In the setting value display start process, display data for displaying "1" is output to the fourth display IC 208. As a result, the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

After that, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned OFF (step S3205: NO), it is determined whether the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206). Specifically, it is determined whether the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing of the update button 68b has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned OFF.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S3206: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3207). Further, if the value of the set value counter after adding 1 exceeds "6" (step S3208: YES), the set value counter is set to "1" (step S3209). As a result, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated to one step higher, and if the update button 68b is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", it is changed to "Setting 1". I will be going back.

If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process in step S3209 is executed, a process for updating the display of the set value on the fourth notification display device 204 is executed (step S3210). In the setting value display update process, display data for displaying a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the main side RAM 65 is output to the fourth display IC 208. Thereby, the number corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. By checking the fourth notification display device 204, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process in step S3210, the process returns to step S3205, and it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned off. If the OFF operation has not been performed (step S3205: NO), the processes from step S3206 onwards are executed again. If the OFF operation has been performed (step S3205: YES), a process to start displaying the management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed (step S3211).

In the display start processing, a management result display start command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. The management side CPU 112, which has received the management result display start command, executes processing for displaying the first parameter among the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131. The processing contents in this case are the same as steps S3006 to S3012 in the display processing (FIG. 55). As a result, a display corresponding to the first parameter calculated immediately before the operating power of the pachinko machine 10 was stopped last time is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Setting values can be changed by setting the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which can be in a light emitting state when the game history management results are displayed, to a light emitting state. A display corresponding to the status is performed. As a result, in order to diversify the display of the gaming history management results, it is possible to minimize restrictions on the content of the display corresponding to the gaming history management results. On the other hand, for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202a, which are in a light emitting state when a display corresponding to a setting value changeable state is performed. The combination 202g does not exist when the game history management results are displayed. As a result, by understanding the combinations of the display segments 201a to 201g and 202a to 202g that are in a light emitting state for each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, the game history management results are displayed. It becomes possible to grasp which display is being performed among the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value.

For each of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202, there are no display segments 201a-201g, 202a-202g that do not light up even if all patterns of the game history management results are displayed. This makes it possible to diversify the display corresponding to the game history management results without placing any restrictions on the display content of the game history management results.

When a display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is made, the third notification display device 203, which is not in a hidden state when displaying the game history management results, is made in a hidden state. As a result, by checking not only the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 but also whether the third notification display device 203 is in a hidden state or not, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display of the game history management results and the display corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value is being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Note that this configuration is limited to a configuration in which only one type of display content corresponding to a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 is set. The configuration may be such that multiple types are set. In this case, the display order of the plurality of types of display contents is determined in advance, and each time the changeable state is newly executed, the display contents to be displayed may be changed according to the display order. Even if there are multiple types of display contents corresponding to the changeable state of the setting value in this way, these display contents are displayed in the display segment 201a which becomes a light emitting state when displaying the management results of the game history. 201g, 202a to 202g, and the display content is not displayed when the game history management results are displayed.

In addition, when displaying the game history management results or when displaying a display corresponding to a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 may be configured to flash in one case, and to keep the display on in the other case. In this case, the manager of the game hall can specify whether the display corresponds to the game history management results or the changeable state depending on whether the display is flashing or on, so the combination of the display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g that are in the light-emitting state in the display corresponding to the changeable state may be a combination used when displaying the game history management results, or may be a combination that is not used when displaying the game history management results. In addition, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 may be configured to have a configuration in which the light-on period and the light-off period in the flashing display are mutually consistent, may be configured to be completely different, or may be configured to overlap only partially.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the eleventh embodiment in that when an abnormal state occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a corresponding display is made using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. There is. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the eleventh embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the eleventh embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the abnormality display area 211 provided in the main RAM 65.

The abnormality display area 211 is an area for storing abnormal state information to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The abnormality display area 211 is provided with a plurality of unit areas 211a to 211d. Specifically, a first unit area 211a, a second unit area 211b, a third unit area 211c, and a fourth unit area 211d are provided. It is possible to store one piece of information about the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d. That is, the abnormality display area 211 can store and hold a maximum of four pieces of information about abnormal states of the pachinko machine 10.

In this embodiment, all information on abnormal conditions occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is identified by the main CPU 63. For example, if an abnormality occurs with respect to the payout of game balls (for example, the lower tray 56a is full, there are no balls in the tank 75, or a payout abnormality by the payout device 76), a command corresponding to the abnormality is transmitted from the payout CPU 92 to the main CPU 63. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a radio wave detection sensor and a vibration detection sensor (not shown), and when the radio wave detection sensor detects an illegal radio wave, a corresponding abnormality signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63, and when the vibration detection sensor detects an abnormal vibration, a corresponding abnormality signal is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, based on identifying that normal signals are no longer being transmitted from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the occurrence of a disconnection abnormality in these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a is identified.

The number of types of abnormal states specified by the main CPU 63 is greater than the maximum number of abnormal state information that can be stored in the abnormal display area 211. Then, when a large number of abnormal states occur simultaneously, it is assumed that new abnormal information will be generated even though the maximum number of abnormal state information has already been stored in the abnormality display area 211. On the other hand, storage priority is set for abnormal state information at the setting stage of the pachinko machine 10, and in a situation where the maximum number of abnormal state information is already stored in the abnormality display area 211, a new If an abnormal state occurs in the abnormal state, information on the abnormal state with a high storage priority is left in the abnormal display area 211. This makes it possible to give priority to notification of an abnormal state with a high storage priority.

Next, the abnormality setting process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 63. Note that the abnormality setting process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred (step S3301). The types of abnormality that can be displayed include a full lower tray 56a, no balls in the tank 75, a payout error by the payout device 76, an abnormal radio wave detection error, an abnormal vibration detection error, and a disconnection error in each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a. The number of types of abnormality that can be displayed is greater than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3301, it is judged whether or not information on the abnormal condition corresponding to the currently occurring abnormal display object has already been stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 (step S3302). If information on the abnormal condition corresponding to the currently occurring abnormal display object has already been stored, it is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. This makes it possible to prevent information on the same type of abnormal condition from being redundantly stored in the abnormality display area 211.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined whether the value of the abnormality target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is the maximum value (specifically, "4") (step S3303). The abnormality target counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the number of areas in which abnormal state information is stored among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d in the abnormality display area 211.

If the value of the abnormality object counter is the maximum value (step S3303: YES), a priority comparison process is executed (step S3304). In the priority comparison process, first, the abnormality information with the lowest storage priority is identified among the abnormality information stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211. The storage priority is determined in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and specifically, the storage priority increases in the following order: full bottom tray 56a → no balls in tank 75 → vibration detection abnormality → payout abnormality by payout device 76 → disconnection abnormality of ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a → radio wave detection abnormality. In the priority comparison process, a comparison is made to determine which of the information on the abnormality with the lowest storage priority stored in the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d and the currently occurring abnormality display object has a higher storage priority.

If the storage priority of the currently occurring abnormality display object is low (step S3305: NO), information on the abnormal state corresponding to the currently occurring abnormality display object is not stored in the abnormality display area 211. This makes it possible to leave information on the abnormal state with a high storage priority in the abnormality display area 211 in a configuration in which the number of types of abnormality display objects is greater than the number of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d provided in the abnormality display area 211.

If the storage priority of the abnormality display target that has occurred this time is higher (step S3305: YES), a setting process for the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In the abnormality display area 211 setting process executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the current occurrence Overwrites the abnormal state information corresponding to the abnormality display target.

On the other hand, if the value of the abnormality object counter in the main RAM 65 has not reached the maximum value (step S3303: NO), the value of the abnormality object counter is incremented by 1 (step S3307), and then the setting process of the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3306). In this setting process, one area is selected from the unit areas 211a to 211d in which no abnormality state information is stored in the abnormality display area 211, and the abnormality state information corresponding to the currently occurring abnormality display object is stored in the selected area.

Note that in step S3306, if there is only one piece of abnormal state information stored in the abnormal display area 211, the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and the abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a. If there is a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information stored in the n-th unit area 211a to 211b, the abnormal state information is stored in order from the area with the smallest value of "n".

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether a cancellation event of the abnormality display target has occurred (step S3308). For example, it is determined whether a command indicating that the lower tray 56a is no longer full, that the tank 75 is no longer filled with balls, or that the dispensing abnormality caused by the dispensing device 76 has been received from the dispensing side CPU 92 is determined. judge. In addition, whether or not an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a radio wave detection abnormality, whether or not an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a vibration detection abnormality, or whether an abnormality release operation was performed in response to the occurrence of a disconnection abnormality. judge.

If the determination in step S3308 is positive, the process of erasing the abnormality display area 211 is executed (step S3309). In the erasure process, it is determined whether or not the abnormality information corresponding to the abnormality display target that has been released this time is stored in any of the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, and if it is stored, the abnormality information is erased by clearing the area in which it is stored to "0". In this case, if there is only one abnormality information stored in the abnormality display area 211 after erasure, the abnormality information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and if there are multiple abnormality information stored in the abnormality display area 211 after erasure, the abnormality information is stored in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b in order from the area with the smallest value of "n". In addition, the value of the abnormality target counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3310).

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether or not an operation to start an abnormality display has occurred (step S3311). The operation to start an abnormality display is performed by pressing the update button 68b with the gaming machine body 12 open forward relative to the outer frame 11 in a situation in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a changeable state in which it is possible to change the setting state.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, it is determined whether information on one or more abnormal conditions is stored in the abnormality display area 211 (step S3312). If abnormal state information is not stored, abnormality display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not started. This makes it possible to prevent abnormality display from starting even though there is no abnormality information to be reported.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the abnormality displaying flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3313). The abnormality displaying flag stops the display corresponding to the management result of the game history and starts the display corresponding to the abnormal state information stored in the abnormality display area 211 on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the current situation is such that it should be carried out in the next step. Note that even if the abnormality display start operation is performed in a situation where the abnormality display flag has already been set to "1", a negative determination is made in step S3311.

Then, a process for setting the display of the management results to be stopped is executed (step S3314). In this process, a display stop command is sent to the management CPU 112, which temporarily stops the update of the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Upon receiving the display stop command, the management CPU 112 stops the execution of the display process (FIG. 55). However, even if the management CPU 112 receives the display stop command, it does not set display data to be all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, the display of the game history management results at that time continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until the display data is sent from the main CPU 63 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208.

In the abnormality setting process, it is determined whether an operation to end abnormality display has occurred (step S3315). To terminate the abnormality display, press the reset button 68c with the gaming machine main body 12 opened forward relative to the outer frame 11 in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is not in a changeable state where the setting state can be changed. This is done by manipulating. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3315, the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3316). Note that even if the abnormal display termination operation is performed in a situation where the value of the abnormal display flag is already "0", a negative determination is made in step S3315.

Thereafter, a process for canceling the display of management results is executed (step S3317). In the cancellation cancellation process, by transmitting a cancellation cancellation command to the management CPU 112, it is possible to confirm that the update of the display of the game history management results on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 has been canceled. unlock. Upon receiving the cancellation cancellation command, the management CPU 112 resumes execution of the display process (FIG. 55). However, even if the management side CPU 112 receives the cancellation cancellation command, it does not set display data that is all "0" data in the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208. Therefore, until the display data is transmitted from the management side CPU 112 to the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208, the abnormality display at that point continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In addition, the management CPU 112 continues to store history information and calculate various parameters even when updating of the display of game history management results is stopped, and the results of calculating various parameters are It is stored in the result memory 131. Therefore, when the state in which the update of the display of the gaming history management results is canceled is canceled, the display of the most recent gaming history management results will be immediately displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It will be restarted.

In the abnormality setting process, if the abnormality display flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3318: YES), an abnormality display process is executed (step S3319). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing abnormality display processing.

First, the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 are turned off (step S3401). Specifically, display data that is all "0" is output to the first and second display ICs 205, 206. As a result, all display segments of the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 are turned off, and the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 are turned off.

Then, the value of the update timing counter provided in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3402). The update timing counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether it is time to update the display contents of the abnormality display on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. If the value of the update timing counter is already "0", this state is maintained. Then, by determining whether the value of the update timing counter is "0", it is determined whether it is time to update the display contents of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 (step S3403).

If the determination in step S3403 is affirmative, the display object counter in the main RAM 65 is updated (step S3404). In this update process, if this is the first abnormality display process since the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 was set to "1", the display object counter is set to "0". The values of the display object counter correspond to the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211, and specifically, the value of "0" of the display object counter corresponds to the first unit area 211a, the value of "1" of the display object counter corresponds to the second unit area 211b, the value of "2" of the display object counter corresponds to the third unit area 211c, and the value of "3" of the display object counter corresponds to the fourth unit area 211d. In the update process, if this is not the first abnormality display process since the abnormality display flag in the main RAM 65 was set to "1", the value of the display object counter is incremented by 1.

Thereafter, it is determined whether abnormal state information is stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d (step S3405). Here, as already explained, when only one piece of abnormal state information is stored, that abnormal state information is stored in the first unit area 211a, and a plurality of pieces of abnormal state information are stored. In this case, abnormal state information is stored in the order of the areas with the smallest value of "n" in the n-th unit areas 211a to 211b. Therefore, if abnormal state information is not stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the display target counter, abnormal state information is also stored in the area corresponding to a value larger than the value of the display target counter. There will be no. In addition, if the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3", the corresponding area does not exist in the first place, so the abnormal state information is treated as not being stored. .

If a positive judgment is made in step S3405, the value of the display target counter in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3406). At this point, it is assumed that all abnormal conditions that are the subject of abnormality display in a situation where an abnormality display is being performed are cancelled. In this case, even in a situation where abnormality display processing is being executed, no abnormality information is stored in the abnormality display area 211. In such a situation, a display indicating that no abnormality information is stored is performed on the third and fourth alarm display devices 203, 204.

When a negative determination is made in step S3405, or when the process in step S3406 is executed, display data to be displayed corresponding to the value of the display target counter in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64 (step S3407). Specifically, information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter of the main side RAM 65 among the first to fourth unit areas 211a to 211d of the abnormality display area 211 is read out. Then, display data corresponding to the information is read from the main ROM 64. The display data is set in one-to-one correspondence with the abnormal state information, and the display contents of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 based on the display data are set for each type of abnormal state information. They are different. Further, there is also display data corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information, and this display data is different from display data corresponding to abnormal state information. Therefore, when abnormal state information does not exist, the display content of the third and fourth notification display devices 203 and 204 becomes different from the display content when abnormal state information exists.

On the other hand, the display contents of the display corresponding to the abnormal state information on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 and the display contents of the display corresponding to the absence of abnormal state information overlap with the display contents when the game history management results are displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 and the display contents of the setting value on the fourth notification display device 204. In contrast, when the game history management results are displayed, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 are in a display state, and in a changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, the first to third notification display devices 201-203 are in a non-display state and the fourth notification display device 204 is in a display state, and when an abnormality is displayed, the first and second notification display devices 201, 202 are in a non-display state and the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 are in a display state, so that even if the display contents overlap as described above, the manager of the game hall can understand which situation the display corresponds to.

Then, the display of the third alarm display device 203 is controlled according to the display data read in step S3407 (step S3408), and the display of the fourth alarm display device 204 is controlled (step S3409). In this case, whether a display corresponding to information on an abnormal state is made or a display corresponding to the absence of information on an abnormal state is made, neither the third alarm display device 203 nor the fourth alarm display device 204 is in a non-display state (i.e., they are not in a completely off state), but in some display state.

Thereafter, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the update timing counter of the main side RAM 65 as a value corresponding to the next update timing (step S3410).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration in which game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. will be carried out. This allows the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to be used not only as display devices for displaying game history management results but also as display devices for displaying abnormal conditions.

When the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 are made to display an abnormal state when no abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that no abnormal state has occurred. This makes it possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by checking the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204.

A distinction is made between the period during which the first to fourth alert display devices 201-204 display the game history management results and the period during which the first to fourth alert display devices 201-204 display information corresponding to abnormal conditions of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to identify which display is being made on the first to fourth alert display devices 201-204 by understanding the status of the display being made on the first to fourth alert display devices 201-204.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are controlled to display in a different manner than when the results of the game history management are displayed. This makes it possible to identify which display is being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by grasping the display manner of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

A plurality of notification display devices 201 to 204 are provided. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of displays corresponding to the management results of the game history. In addition, due to the presence of multiple notification display devices 201 to 204, the display mode can be made larger depending on whether the game history management results are displayed or when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It becomes possible to make the difference.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, which are not in a non-display state when displaying the game history management results, become a non-display state. As a result, by simply checking whether the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are in the non-display state, the management results of the game history and the display corresponding to the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed. It becomes possible to clearly specify which of these is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 are in a display state, and the display contents are the display contents that can be displayed on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 when displaying the game history management results. By allowing the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 to overlap in this way, it is possible to avoid restricting the display contents when the game history management results are displayed and when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is made. Even if the display contents on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 are configured to overlap in this way, when a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, the first and second notification display devices 201, 202 are made in a non-display state, so it is possible to identify which display is being made on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In addition, if an operation to start the abnormality display is performed when no abnormality information is stored in the abnormality display area 211, a display corresponding to the fact that no abnormality information is stored at that time may be displayed in the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management output process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the management output process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3501). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not it is a situation in which history information should be stored in the history memory 117. In this embodiment, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 has started (i.e., after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 has started), the history memory 117 does not store history information until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA becomes equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, and when the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA becomes equal to or greater than the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the history memory 117 starts storing history information. At the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and the subsequent operation is checked. In response to this, by not storing history information in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins reaches or exceeds the management start reference value, it is possible to prevent ball entry results and the like during the above-mentioned operation check from being stored as history information.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3501, the start management counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "7" (step S3502). The start management counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine which of the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is in a situation where the ball detection state needs to be determined when the management start flag is not set to "1".

Then, it is determined whether the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the start-time management counter is set to "1" (step S3503). Specifically, if the value of the start-time management counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning port detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning port detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is "5" and corresponds to the third winning port detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is "4" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third ...5" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is "4" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is "5" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is "5" and corresponds to the special power detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the third output flag is set to "1", if the value of the start-time management counter is " If the value of the start management counter is "3" and corresponds to the first actuation port detection sensor 46a, the fifth output flag is determined to be set to "1". If the value of the start management counter is "2" and corresponds to the second actuation port detection sensor 47a, the sixth output flag is determined to be set to "1". If the value of the start management counter is "1" and corresponds to the out port 24a, the seventh output flag is determined to be set to "1". As already explained, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (Figure 15).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the output flag corresponding to the value of the start management counter is cleared to "0" (step S3504). Thereafter, the value of the discharge number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3505). The ejected number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag of the main RAM 65 is not set to "1".

Then, it is determined whether the value of the discharged number counter is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506). The management start reference value is set to "300", but is not limited to this and may be a number less than "300" or a number greater than "300".

If a negative judgment is made in step S3503, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3506, the value of the start-time management counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S3507). Then, it is determined whether the value of the start-time management counter after the decrement is "0" (step S3508). If a negative judgment is made in step S3508, the process returns to step S3503, and if a positive judgment is made in step S3508, the management output process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the discharged number counter in the main RAM 65 is equal to or greater than the management start reference value (step S3506: YES), the management start flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3509). Then, management processing is executed (step S3510). Also, if the management start flag is set to "1" and a positive judgment is made in step S3501, management processing is executed (step S3510). The processing content of the management processing is the same as steps S1001 to S1012 of the management output processing (Figure 25) in the first embodiment described above.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started) is managed. History information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value. storage of history information in the history memory 117 is started. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 may be checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and subsequent operations are checked. In contrast, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball entering results and the like during the operation check as described above from being stored as history information.

In the configuration in which the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started as described above reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the management result of the game history during that period cannot be calculated. In such a situation, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display a message corresponding to the situation. For example, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to have all display segments illuminated. The display content is not displayed in either the case of displaying the game history management result or the case of displaying the changeable state in which the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed, so that it is possible to identify whether the situation is such that the history information is not stored by checking the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Furthermore, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the setting mode of the information of the management start flag in the main side RAM 65 differs depending on whether the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 has become changeable or not. It is also possible to have a configuration in which FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the other embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Steps S3601 to S3609 execute the same processes as steps S101 to S109 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment, and steps S3611 to S3620 execute the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment. The same processing as step S110 to step S119 of 9) is executed. On the other hand, in this alternative embodiment, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3610), and after the process of step S3620 is executed, the management start flag of the main side RAM 65 is cleared. is set to "1" (step S3621). According to this configuration, if the process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is not executed, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. The history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the value exceeds the management start reference value, and when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the History information is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of the number of game balls ejected after the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible to manage the game history immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 in a situation where there is a high possibility that the operation check at the time of shipping the Pachinko machine 10 does not apply.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins reaches or exceeds the management start reference value, a configuration may be adopted in which an area is provided separate from the history memory 117 for storing history information until the total number of game balls reaches or exceeds the management start reference value. This makes it possible to identify the management results of the game history in that situation.

In addition, as a condition for the occurrence of a situation in which history information is not stored in the history memory 117 from when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value, a condition may be added in which the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins when no history information is stored in the history memory 117. In this case, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins when history information is already stored in the history memory 117, history information will be stored in the history memory 117 from the beginning, regardless of whether the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA becomes equal to or greater than the management start reference value.

In addition to or instead of a configuration in which history information is not stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 begins reaches or exceeds the management start reference value, if an abnormal state such as a radio wave detection abnormality or vibration detection abnormality occurs, history information may not be stored in the history memory 117 until the abnormal state is resolved. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for events that occur in an abnormal state.

Further, history information is stored in the history memory 117 until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open, the history information may not be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored for events that occur when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in terms of the entity that executes the processing for managing game history. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 is provided with the management IC 66, but in this embodiment, the MPU 62 is not provided with the management IC 66. Although the management IC 66 is not provided, in this embodiment, the processing for managing the game history is executed by the main CPU 63. Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes various types of control by distinguishing between specific control and non-specific control. Specifically, control related to the management of game history is defined as non-specific control, and control other than non-specific control, including control for advancing the game based on the game operation by the player, is defined as specific control.

Specifically, the specific control includes all of the controls by the main processing (FIG. 9) that are executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In this embodiment, the recognition process (step S111), the data output process (step S112), and the setting value update signal output process (step S119) of the main processing (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are not executed. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed by interrupting the processes in steps S113 to S116 in the main processing (FIG. 9), and all of the various processes in the timer interrupt process other than the management process described below are included in the specific control. In addition, some of the management processes are also included in the specific control.

Figure 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting mode of programs and data in the main ROM 64. In accordance with the distinction between specific control and non-specific control in the control executed by the main CPU 63, as shown in Figure 67, the addresses of the areas in the main ROM 64 where programs and data for specific control are stored and programs and data for non-specific control are stored are clearly distinguished.

Specifically, specific control programs are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each successive address within the range of addresses X(1) to X(k+2). In addition, addresses X(k+3) to X(k+5) successive to addresses X(1) to X(k+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and specific control data are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each successive address within the range of addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2). In addition, addresses X(m+3) to X(m+5) successive to addresses X(k+6) to X(m+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control programs are stored in a concentrated manner in the area of each successive address within the range of addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2). In addition, addresses X(n+3) to X(n+5) that are consecutive to addresses X(m+6) to X(n+2) are unused area addresses where no data is stored, and non-specific control data is collectively stored in each consecutive address area within the range of addresses X(n+6) to X(p+2). The relationship between the above programs and data and addresses is set in both the physical addresses in the main ROM 64 and the logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

As described above, the program and data for specific control and the program and data for non-specific control are stored in different address ranges regardless of the execution order of the process for executing the corresponding control. Therefore, when checking only the program and data for specific control, it is necessary to check only the address range area in which the program and data for specific control are stored, and when checking only the program and data for non-specific control, it is necessary to check only the address range area in which the program and data for non-specific control are stored. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently check the program and data for specific control and non-specific control separately. It is also possible to efficiently correct the program and data for specific control and non-specific control separately.

No data is stored between the address range of the area where specific control programs and specific control data are stored and the address range of the area where non-specific control programs and non-specific control data are stored. By setting the address range of an unused area that has not been used, it becomes easier to grasp the boundary between the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control during checking work.

In the address range for specific control and the address range for non-specific control, programs and data are stored in different address ranges, regardless of the execution order of the processes for executing the corresponding controls, which makes it possible to efficiently check programs and data separately. In addition, an address range for an unused area in which no data is stored is set between the address range of the area in which the program is stored and the address range of the area in which the data is stored, which makes it easier to grasp the boundary between the address range of the program and the address range of the data when checking.

Figure 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting mode of each area in the main RAM 65. In accordance with the fact that the control executed by the main CPU 63 is distinguished between specific control and non-specific control, as shown in Figure 68, the address range of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is also clearly distinguished from the address range of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65.

Specifically, the area of each successive address within the range of addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) is set as the work area 221 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y(r+3) to Y(r+5) successive to addresses Y(1) to Y(r+2) are unused area addresses, and the area of each successive address within the range of addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) is set as the stack area 222 for specific control. In addition, addresses Y(s+3) to Y(s+5) successive to addresses Y(r+6) to Y(s+2) are unused area addresses, and the area of each successive address within the range of addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) is set as the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, addresses Y(t+3) to Y(t+5) that are successive to addresses Y(s+6) to Y(t+2) are unused area addresses, and the areas of successive addresses within the range of addresses Y(t+6) to Y(u+2) are set as stack areas 224 for non-specific control. The relationship between each area and address as described above is set in both the physical addresses in the main RAM 65 and the logical addresses on the memory map recognized by the main CPU 63.

As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control are set separately, so that different areas of the main RAM 65 are used when performing various calculations when the main CPU 63 executes specific control and when it executes non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which information in the main RAM 65 required for the execution of one of specific control and non-specific control is erased when the other is executed. Incidentally, a load command is issued by the main CPU 63 when writing information to each work area 221, 223 and reading information from each work area 221, 223.

Since the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set separately, it is possible to Different areas of the main side RAM 65 are used when saving information stored in the register of the side CPU 63 and when storing information on a return address on the program. As a result, when one of the specific control and non-specific control is being executed, when saving information stored in the register of the main CPU 63 and when storing information on the return address on the program, it can be used in the other. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the information that is displayed is deleted. Incidentally, when writing information to each stack area 222, 224, the main CPU 63 performs a push command, and when reading information from each stack area 222, 224, the main CPU 63 performs a pop command. Furthermore, when reading information from each stack area 222, 224, the information that is written to the stack area 222, 224 later in the order of writing is read out first.

Here, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and Information can be read from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control; , information cannot be written to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to non-specific control from being accidentally deleted in a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed.

In addition, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can write information to the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and can read information from the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. On the other hand, when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the main CPU 63 can read information from the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but cannot write information to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to prevent information used in processing corresponding to specific control from being accidentally erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed.

Note that backup power will be supplied to the main side RAM 65 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, but the backup power will be supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the non-specific control. It is supplied to all of the work area 223 for use and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. As a result, the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Even afterward, the data will be retained as long as backup power is supplied.

Next, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 69. As in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes in steps S113 to S116 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 9). Note that the program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

Steps S3701 to S3718 execute the same processing as steps S301 to S318 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. In step S3719 in the timer interrupt processing, management processing is executed. When the management processing is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the management processing set in the program for specific control is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing after the management processing is executed is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the management process. Note that steps S3801 to S3805 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S3801). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described below), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S3802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the subroutine program corresponding to management execution processing is started, the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the relevant subroutine starts. It becomes possible to save it to the stack area 222 for specific control. Note that the amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Then, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control (step S3803). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the management execution process is executed is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop command, and the process returns to the program for the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after the management execution processing is executed, the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP PSW" (step S3804). This causes the flag register information of the main CPU 63 to return to the information at the time step S3802 was executed. In other words, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S3805). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing management execution processing. Note that the processes from step S3901 to step S3915 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as "LD SP, Y(u+2)", Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S3901). The stack pointer is an area in which address information is set for the main CPU 63 to specify a storage area in the stack areas 222 and 224 to which information is to be written by a push command. Each time a push instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the next order, and each time a pop instruction is executed, the stack pointer information is updated to the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order. The address information of the storage area is updated. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information to be stored is stored starting from the storage area at the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and each time information to be stored is added. Then, the storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Therefore, in step S3901, information on the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set in the stack pointer. The same holds true for the specific control stack area 222, where information is stored from the storage area at the last address to the storage area at the first address.

By the way, if an additional push command is executed even though information has been set in all storage areas for both the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, All areas of the main side RAM 65 are cleared to "0", assuming that an abnormality has occurred in the storage process. This makes it possible to prevent the game from continuing even though an abnormality has occurred in the storage process.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S3902). Further, as "LD (_BCBUF), BC", the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3903). Also, “LD
(_DEBUF), DE", the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3904). Further, as "LD (_HLBUF), HL", information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3905). Further, as "LD (_IXBUF), IX", information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3906). Further, as "LD (_IYBUF), IY", the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load instruction (step S3907).

The registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in addition to the flag register described above. In this case, in steps S3902 to S3907, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, is is saved in a corresponding buffer in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Note that the information amount of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S3908), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control before executing the check process (step S3908), the information in these registers that was used for specific control can be used for non-specific control. This makes it possible to evacuate the area before it starts. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, the status of these registers can be changed by restoring the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control to these registers when terminating non-specific control. It becomes possible to restore the state to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the check process, which is a process corresponding to the non-specific control, is selectively saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control, thereby making it possible to reduce the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the above-mentioned register information while securing a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that is available during the check process. Of course, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63 other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

Furthermore, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some kind of noise, etc. If this happens, all subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After the processes of steps S3902 to S3907 are executed, a check process is executed (step S3908). When the check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the program for non-specific control is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the check process is executed is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program returns to the program for the management execution process indicated by the return address. Details of the check process will be explained later.

After the check process is executed, a load command is issued to set Y(r+α) in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as a fixed address at the time of returning to specific control, as "LD SP, Y(r+α)" (step S3909). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

The amount of information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control immediately before the subroutine of the management execution process is executed in step S3803 of the management process (FIG. 70) is always constant, and accordingly, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 at that timing (i.e., the value of the stack pointer) is constant. In this case, the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control includes, for example, the return address information of the management process (FIG. 70) after the management execution process (FIG. 71) is completed, and the return address information of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) after the management process (FIG. 70) is completed. The above-mentioned fixed information of the stack pointer is Y(r+α). Therefore, when the check process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control, is completed and the process corresponding to the specific control is returned to, the fixed information Y(r+α) is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63, making it possible to restore the information of the stack pointer to the information immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started. By setting fixed information in the stack pointer in this way, the stack pointer information is restored to the information immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started, eliminating the need to save the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control in the main RAM 65 before starting the processing corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load and eliminates the need to reserve an area in the main RAM 65 for the save.

Then, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a load command as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S3910). Also, the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by a load command as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)" (step S3911). Also, the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by a load command as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)" (step S3912). Also, the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load command as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)" (step S3913). Also, the load command "LD IX, (_IXBUF)" overwrites the IX register of the main CPU 63 with the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3914). Also, the load command "LD IY, (_IYBUF)" overwrites the IY register of the main CPU 63 with the information saved in the IY buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S3915). By executing the processes of steps S3910 to S3915, it is possible to restore the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started.

Here, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed is not saved to the main side RAM 65 when the process corresponding to the specific control is restarted. . Thereby, there is no need to secure a storage area for saving the above information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

In addition, the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed is the same as the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 when the process corresponding to non-specific control is executed after returning to the process corresponding to specific control. This information is not used when restarted. In other words, the information necessary for multiple processing times of processing corresponding to non-specific control that is executed with processing corresponding to specific control in between is the work area 223 for non-specific control or the stack area for non-specific control. 224, and is not stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63. Therefore, even if the information stored in the flag register and various registers of the main CPU 63 is not saved to the main RAM 65 when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the No problem occurs.

Next, a description will be given of the check processing executed when the subroutine program is called in step S3908. In the checking process, a process for collecting game history information, a process for deriving a game history management result, and a process for notifying the management result are executed. That is, the processing for collecting information on gaming history, the processing for deriving management results of gaming history, and the processing for notifying the management results are executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Before explaining the check process, we will explain the contents of the various areas 231-234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control that are used to manage the game history. Figure 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various areas 231-234 of the work area 223 for non-specific control that are used to manage the game history.

The non-specific control work area 223 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, and a high-frequency support mode counter area 233. Each of these areas 231 to 233 is provided with a general winning counter 231a, 232a, 233a, a special winning counter 231b, 232b, 233b, a first operation counter 231c, 232c, 233c, a second operation counter 231d, 232d, 233d, and an out counter 231e, 232e, 233e. The general winning counters 231a, 232a, 233a are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the general winning port 31 since a predetermined measurement start trigger. The special winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the special winning device 32 since a predetermined measurement start trigger. The first operation counters 231c, 232c, and 233c are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The second operation counters 231d, 232d, and 233d are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start trigger. The out counters 231e, 232e, and 233e are counters for counting the number of game balls that enter the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start trigger.

The counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is closed and the game is neither in the open/close execution mode nor in the high-frequency support mode. The counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232 are used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is closed and the game is in the open/close execution mode. The counters 233a to 233e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is closed and the game is in the high-frequency support mode.

The reason why the situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is not included in the measurement is to exclude from the measurement the number of balls that enter the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 by hand when the front door frame 14 is open. However, this is not limited to this, and the situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state may be included in the measurement in the same way as the situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state.

The work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 234 in addition to a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, and a high frequency support mode counter area 233. The calculation result storage area 234 is an area for storing information on game history management results calculated using the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233. . The information on the game history management results stored in the calculation result storage area 234 is stored and held until the newly calculated information is overwritten by the new calculation of the information on the game history management results.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the check process executed by calling the subroutine program in step S3908. The processes in steps S4001 to S4008 in the check process, including the subroutine process, are executed in the main CPU 63 using the non-specific control program and non-specific control data. When the subroutine process is executed, the return address information after the execution of the subroutine process is written in the non-specific control stack area 224 in the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer value of the main CPU 63, and the stack pointer value is updated to the address information of the storage area to be stored in the next order. When the subroutine process is completed, the return address information is read from the storage area corresponding to the previous order value with respect to the current stack pointer value of the main CPU 63, and the program corresponding to the return address information is returned to, and the stack pointer value is updated to the address information of the storage area from which the return address information was read.

In the check process, if the front door frame 14 is in an open state (step S4001: YES), normal ball entry management processing (step S4004), ball entry management processing in opening/closing execution mode (step S4005), and high frequency ball entry management processing are performed. The result calculation process (step S4007) and the display process (step S4008), which will be described later, are executed without executing any of the ball entry management processes (step S4006) in the support mode. Since the gaming area PA is formed by a space divided into the front and back by the back side of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front side of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, if a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is open, the game hall manager may This is a case where the front door frame 14 is left open and game balls enter the game ball due to maintenance or the like. Since such entering of a game ball is not an entering of a game ball in the execution situation of a regular game, it is not necessary to manage such entering of a game ball. Therefore, in the check process, if the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes from step S4004 to step S4006 is executed.

If the front door frame 14 is closed and is not in the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode (steps S4001 to S4003: NO), normal goal entry management processing is executed (step S4004). Also, if the front door frame 14 is closed and is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S4001: NO, step S4002: YES), goal entry management processing during the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4005). Also, if the front door frame 14 is closed and is in the high-frequency support mode (step S4001: NO, step S4003: YES), goal entry management processing during the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4006).

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing normal ball entry management processing in step S4004.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S4101: YES), i.e., when it is confirmed that the signal received from the first winning hole detection sensor 42a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a (step S4103: YES), i.e., when it is confirmed that the signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 43a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S4105: YES), i.e., when it is confirmed that the signal received from the third winning hole detection sensor 44a has switched from LOW level to HIGH level, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1 (steps S4102, S4104, S4106).

If the ball entry management process is performed during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 232a for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106, and if the ball entry management process is performed during the high frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 233a for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to steps S4102, S4104, and S4106. In addition, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, the detection results of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a are also monitored, and if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by any of the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 31.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S4107: YES), that is, it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 45a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If so, 1 is added to the value of the normal special electric winning counter 231b (step S4108).

If the ball entry management process is during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 232b for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4108, and if the ball entry management process is during the high frequency support mode, the value of the special electric winning counter 233b for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4108. In addition, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is also monitored in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as the process corresponding to the specific control, and if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and a process is executed to identify the trigger for ending the round game.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first actuation port detection sensor 46a (step S4109: YES), that is, if it is confirmed that the signal received from the first actuation port detection sensor 46a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level, the value of the normal first actuation counter 231c is incremented by 1 (step S4110).

Note that if the ball entry management process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 232c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4110, and if the ball entry management process is in the high frequency support mode, For example, as a process corresponding to step S4110, the value of the first operation counter 233c for high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1. Also, in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) that is executed as a process corresponding to the specific control, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is monitored, and the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is monitored. If it is determined in step 46a that one game ball has been detected, a process is executed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operation port 33 is paid out, and at the same time, reservation information for special symbols is obtained. Execute processing to identify the trigger.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second actuation port detection sensor 47a (step S4111: YES), i.e., if it is confirmed that the signal received from the second actuation port detection sensor 47a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level, the value of the normal second actuation counter 231d is incremented by 1 (step S4112).

If the ball entry management process is during the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 232d for the opening and closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4112, and if the ball entry management process is during the high-frequency support mode, the value of the second operation counter 233d for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S4112. In addition, the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is also monitored in the ball entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) executed as a process corresponding to specific control, and if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, a process is executed to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the second operation port 34, and a process is executed to identify the trigger for obtaining reserved information for the special chart.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S4113: YES), that is, if it is confirmed that the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1 (step S4114).

If the goal entry management process is in the open/close execution mode, the value of the out counter 232e for the open/close execution mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4114, and if the goal entry management process is in the high frequency support mode, the value of the out counter 233e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 as the process corresponding to step S4114. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is not monitored in the goal entry detection process (step S3709) of the timer interrupt process (Figure 69) executed as the process corresponding to specific control.

By executing the processes from step S4004 to step S4006 as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 is measured using the general winning counters 231a, 232a, and 233a, and the special electric winning device 32 The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the special electric winning counters 231b, 232b, 233b, and the number of gaming balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counters 231c, 232c, 233c. The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is measured using the second operating counters 231d, 232d, 233d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counters 231e, 233d. It is measured using 232e and 233e. This allows the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are each provided separately, it is possible to avoid situations in which neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode exists. It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of the check process (FIG. 73), if a positive judgment is made in step S4001, if the process of step S4004 is executed, if the process of step S4005 is executed, or if the process of step S4006 is executed, then a result calculation process is executed in step S4007, and a display process is executed in step S4008.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process of step S4007.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4201). The management start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that collection of game history for calculating the game history management results is in order. In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the game ejected from the gaming area PA is Until the total number of balls reaches or exceeds the number corresponding to the management start reference value, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA is not collected to calculate the game history management results. When the number of pieces exceeds the management start reference value, collection of game history is executed to calculate the game history management result. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and the subsequent operation is checked. On the other hand, until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 reaches or exceeds the management start reference value, the game for calculating the game history management result is not performed. By disabling history collection, it is possible to prevent the ball entry results during the operation check described above from being collected as the gaming history for calculating the gaming history management results. Become.

Here, when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured (that is, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started), the value of the management start flag is "0". It becomes. In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. is also "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the management start flag is "1", the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and then in a situation where backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. When the supply of the data is started, the value of the management start flag remains at "1". In this case, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. The pachinko machine 10 is also maintained in the state before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. With the above configuration, when the value of the management start flag is "0", the values of each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of each counter 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, The values of each of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 also become "0".

Incidentally, when clearing the main RAM 65 is executed in step S105 or step S117 in the main processing (FIG. 9), the targets of the clearing are the work area 221 for specific control and the stack for specific control. The area 222, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are excluded from the targets of the clearing process. As a result, the game hall manager is configured to be unable to intentionally clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0".

In addition, the main CPU 63 checks whether an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which will be described later. If it is confirmed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". Thereby, if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, it becomes possible to initialize them. In addition, if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control in this configuration, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". However, when an abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" without clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0". Good too. Furthermore, even if an abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the calculation result storage area 234 may be excluded from being cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode. The total number is calculated by summing all the values of each counter 233a to 233e (step S4202). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference value "300" (step S4203).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the management start flag of the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S4204). Also, each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, each counter 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and each counter 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0". (Step S4205). As a result, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 has started (that is, after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 has started) is set to the management start reference value. All game history information collected until the number corresponds to or more will be deleted. Therefore, after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 starts, until the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA reaches or exceeds the management start reference value, the game history cannot be collected for calculating the game history management results. It is possible to prevent this from being executed.

If the determination in step S4201 is positive, the total number is calculated in the same manner as in step S4202 (step S4206). That is, the total number is calculated by adding up the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the values of the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the values of the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233. Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number of "6000" (step S4207).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4207, calculation processing of various parameters is executed (step S4208). Specifically, the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are set to K61 to K65, the values of the various counters 232a to 232e in the counter area 232 for the open/close execution mode are set to K71 to K75, and the values of the various counters 232a to 232e are set to K71 to K75 in the counter area 232 for the open/close execution mode. When the values of the various counters 233a to 233e in the counter area 233 are K81 to K85, the following 61st to 68th parameters are calculated.
・61st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83 ”דNumber of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33” + “K64+K74+K84”דNumber of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34”)/Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA ( K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K72+K73+K74+K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) ・62nd parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in normal time (K61 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K62 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32") number”+K63 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K64 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in normal times (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 ) ratio/63rd parameter: Total number of game balls paid out during opening/closing execution mode (K71 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K72 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32") +K73 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K74 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA during the opening/closing execution mode Ratio of the number (K71+K72+K73+K74+K75)/64th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out in high-frequency support mode (K81 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K82 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32""Number of prize balls" + K83 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K84 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/Ejected from the gaming area PA during the high-frequency support mode Ratio of the total number of game balls (K81 + K82 + K83 + K84 + K85) / 65th parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the general prize opening 31 (K61 + K71 + K81) / Total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K61 + K62 + K63 + K64 + K65 + K71 + K72 + K73 + K74 + K7 5+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85) ratio・66th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 (K63+K73+K83)/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K61+K62+K63+K64+K65+K71+K72+K73+K74+K75+K81+K82+K83+K84+K85)・67th parameter: ( "K62+K72+K82"× "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + "K64 + K74 + K84" x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" x "General winning port 31") "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32" + "K63 + K73 + K83" × "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + "K64 + K74 + K84" Ratio of "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") 68th parameter: "K62 + K72 + K82" x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out ("K61 + K71 + K81" × “Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31” + “K62 + K72 + K82” × “Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32” + “K63 + K73 + K83” × “Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating opening 33” ”+“K64+K74+K84”דNumber of prize balls that hit the second operating port 34”) After that, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated in step S4208 are overwritten in the calculation result storage area 234 (step S4209). . In this case, the 61st to 68th parameters of the calculation results from the previous processing time, which were already stored in the calculation result storage area 234, are deleted. Note that even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so if the backup power is being supplied, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is Even immediately after the start of supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, information on the 61st to 68th parameters calculated before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped is stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

Then, the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, the counters 232a to 232e in the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the counters 233a to 233e in the high frequency support mode counter area 233 are all cleared to "0" (step S4210). This makes it possible to erase the game history information once the 61st to 68th parameters have been calculated.

In addition, immediately after the management start flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed if the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number minus the management start reference value, and thereafter, the processing of steps S4208 to S4210 may be executed if the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA is equal to or greater than the calculation reference number.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the display processing of step S4008 in the check processing (FIG. 73).

First, the value of the update timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S4301). The update timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify that it is time to update the display contents of the game history management results in the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The main CPU 63 notifies the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters by controlling the display of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In this case, the first notification display device 69a displays information corresponding to the type of parameter to be notified. In addition, the number corresponding to the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the parameter to be notified by 100 is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, and the number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c. In the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the displays corresponding to the calculation results of the 61st to 68th parameters are switched in sequence in a predetermined order, and after the calculation result of the 68th parameter, which is the last to be displayed, is displayed, the calculation result of the 61st parameter, which is the first to be displayed, is displayed. In this case, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds.

Here, the calculation cycle of the 61st to 68th parameters in the main CPU 63 is 60 minutes at the shortest. On the other hand, the number of the 61st to 68th parameters is eight, and the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Therefore, the 61st to 68th parameters calculated by the main CPU 63 are displayed at least once on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

When the process of step S4301 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the update timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0" to determine whether it is time to update the display contents of the first to third alarm display devices 69a to 69c (step S4302). If a positive determination is made in step S4302, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S4303). Then, if the value of the display target counter after incrementing 1 exceeds the maximum value of "7" (step S4304: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S4305).

The display object counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to identify the type of parameter that is the display object on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the 61st to 68th parameters and the possible values of the display object counter, "0" to "7." For example, when the value of the display object counter is "0," the 61st parameter, which is the first display object, becomes the display object on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, and when the value of the display object counter is "7," the 68th parameter, which is the last display object, becomes the display object on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If a negative determination is made in step S4304 or if the process in step S4305 is executed, the first notification display device 69a is displayed so that information corresponding to the type of parameter corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed. control (step S4306). Further, the parameter corresponding to the value of the counter to be displayed is read from the calculation result storage area 234, the read parameter is multiplied by 100, and the number corresponding to the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 69b, The number corresponding to the ones digit is displayed on the third notification display device 69c (step S4307).

Here, a display IC is provided corresponding to each of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. In step S4306, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the first notification display device 69a, and in step S4307, the main CPU 63 outputs display data to the display IC corresponding to the second notification display device 69b and the display IC corresponding to the third notification display device 69c. When operating power is supplied to these display ICs, they can store and hold display data, and the display contents corresponding to the stored display data are continuously displayed on the corresponding notification display devices 69a to 69c. Then, when the display data is changed by the main CPU 63, the display of the notification display devices 69a to 69c is changed to the display contents corresponding to the changed display data. As a result, even after the management execution process (FIG. 71), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, is completed and the process corresponding to specific control is returned to, the display corresponding to the display data set in the execution status of the process corresponding to non-specific control is continued on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

Then, the update timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds as the value corresponding to the next update timing (step S4308).

By executing the display process as described above, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has begun, the game history management results are displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c. The game history management results are displayed regardless of whether or not play is continuing, and regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened relative to the outer frame 11 and the main control device 60 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. By executing display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in this way regardless of the game situation or the state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for display control of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control. A work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control are used when processing corresponding to specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. While it is possible to store and read information, the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control. In some cases, it is possible to read the information, but it is not possible to store the information. Further, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are capable of storing and reading information when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63. On the other hand, when the process corresponding to the specific control is executed by the main CPU 63, it is possible to read the information, but it is not possible to store the information. As a result, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area for non-specific control 224 can be treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the main RAM 65 between processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control. Therefore, when executing one of the processing corresponding to specific control and the processing corresponding to non-specific control, it is possible to prevent information used in the other processing from being deleted.

Processing corresponding to specific control includes processing for controlling the progress of the game, and processing corresponding to non-specific control includes processing for managing game history. As described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 222 for non-specific control are treated as storage areas dedicated to processing corresponding to specific control. The stack area 224 is treated as a dedicated storage area for processing corresponding to non-specific control. As a result, when executing the process for controlling the progress of the game, information used in the process for managing the game history, such as the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for the open/close execution mode, and the high-frequency support mode. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 from being rewritten.

A normal counter area 231 in which information for managing game history is stored, a counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, a counter area 233 for high frequency support mode, and a calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the main side RAM 65. This allows the main CPU 63 to complete the processing for managing the game history. Further, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of information on gaming history and information on various parameters calculated using the information on gaming history.

When a situation changes from a situation in which a process corresponding to specific control is being executed to a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, or a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is executed, various types of the main CPU 63 Register information is saved to the main RAM 65. As a result, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, it is possible to prevent information stored in various registers of the main CPU 63 from being rewritten when executing processing corresponding to specific control. Become. Further, when or after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is ended, the information saved in the main side RAM 65 is returned to the various registers of the main side CPU 63. As a result, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to specific control based on the states of various registers of the main CPU 63 before execution of the processing corresponding to non-specific control. Become.

When the state where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed changes to a state where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, or when the state where processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed changes, the information in some of the various registers in the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the main RAM 65 to save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

When the situation changes from one in which processing corresponding to specific control is being performed to one in which processing corresponding to non-specific control is being performed, or when the situation changes to one in which processing corresponding to non-specific control is being performed, information in the various registers of the main CPU 63 that are the target of information storage in the processing corresponding to non-specific control is saved to the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the main RAM 65 to save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63, while making it possible to resume the processing corresponding to specific control from the state of the registers of the main CPU 63 before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

When processing corresponding to non-specific control is started, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in the processing corresponding to specific control, and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the WA register, BC register, Each information of the DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the process corresponding to non-specific control. This makes it possible to save the information stored in the various registers of the main CPU 63 at a timing that is preferable, and also to make the process for saving information compatible with specific control and non-specific control. It becomes possible to perform the processing in a distributed manner.

The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. In this case, the information in the flag register is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in the process corresponding to specific control before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. This makes it possible to save information in the flag register in the state before it changes after calling a subroutine corresponding to non-specific control or starting the subroutine in the stack area 222 for specific control.

By saving the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is It is possible to keep the capacity of the stack area 224 for specific control small. In addition, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the later information is read out first, so if the readout order of information is shifted due to some kind of noise, All subsequent readout order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

When the state where processing corresponding to specific control is executed changes to a state where processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed or when the state where processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed is reached, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information, and the stack pointer information is not saved to the main RAM 65 when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started. This eliminates the need to secure capacity in the main RAM 65 for saving the stack pointer information, making it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main RAM 65 accordingly. Even in this configuration where the stack pointer information is not saved, when the state where processing corresponding to specific control is executed changes to a state where processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed or when the state where processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed is reached, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 becomes fixed information, so that even if the stack pointer information is not saved as described above, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

In addition, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in processing corresponding to specific control, but this is not limited to this, and the information in the flag register may be saved to the main RAM 65 in processing corresponding to non-specific control. Also, after processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in processing corresponding to specific control, but this is not limited to this, and the information is restored to the flag register in processing corresponding to non-specific control.

In addition, after the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is started, the information in the main CPU 63 is used in the process corresponding to the non-specific control. Although the configuration is such that the information is saved in the side RAM 65, the configuration is not limited to this, and the information in these registers may be saved in the main side RAM 65 in a process corresponding to specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, information is returned to each of the above registers in the process corresponding to non-specific control. However, this is not limited to this, and each of the above A configuration may be adopted in which information is returned to the register in a process corresponding to specific control after a process corresponding to non-specific control is completed.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the management process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4401 to S4405 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4401). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described below), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the load command "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW" is used to save the flag register information of the main CPU 63 to the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S4402). The flag register includes a carry flag, zero flag, P/V flag, sign flag, and half carry flag, and the flag register information changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or started in the work area 221 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control, the management execution process is started (step S4403). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, the program is saved as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" to the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S4402 by a load command. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S4404). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S4402 was executed last time. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S4405). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 immediately before switching from specific control to non-specific control is saved to the work area 221 for specific control instead of the stack area 222 for specific control. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register while suppressing the capacity of the stack area 222 for specific control.

The PSW buffer in the work area 221 for specific control is secured as a dedicated area, but is not limited to this, and may be configured as a shared area in which other information can also be written. In other words, since there is no need to save the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 corresponding to the specific control when the management process is not being executed, a shared area that is also used as a PSW buffer when performing a predetermined arithmetic process in the process corresponding to the specific control when the management process is not being executed may be configured to be used. In this case, since the shared area will be used reliably to save the information in the flag register when the management process is executed, it is necessary to configure the shared area so that information other than the information in the flag register, that is no longer necessary before the management process is executed, is written to the shared area.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 78 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4501 to S4515 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the 15th embodiment, a load command is used to set "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to Y(u+2) as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 (step S4501).

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH WA" (step S4502). In this case, the information in the WA register is saved to the storage area corresponding to the fixed address set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S4501. Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the BC register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a push command as "PUSH BC" (step S4503). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Thereafter, the information in the DE register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the storage area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control using a push command as "PUSH DE" (step S4504). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the next order.

Then, by using the push command "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to a memory area in the non-specific control stack area 224 corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 (step S4505). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

Then, the information in the IX register of the main CPU 63 is saved to a memory area in the non-specific control stack area 224 corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 by a push command "PUSH IX" (step S4506). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

Then, the information in the IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to a memory area in the non-specific control stack area 224 corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 by a push command "PUSH IY" (step S4507). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written to next.

After steps S4502 to S4507 are executed, a check process is executed (step S4508). When the check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the program for non-specific control is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for identifying the return address of the management execution process after the check process is executed is written by a push command to a memory area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. Then, when the check process is completed, information for identifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program for the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check process are the same as those in the fifteenth embodiment.

Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (r+α)" when returning to the specific control. Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at (step S4509). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the previous order information is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command "POP IY" in relation to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 (step S4510). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, the IX register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the previous order information in the non-specific control stack area 224 by a pop command as "POP IX" (step S4511). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, the POP HL command is used to overwrite the HL register of the main CPU 63 with the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the previous order information with respect to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the non-specific control stack area 224 (step S4512). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

After that, the DE register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the previous order information in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a pop command as "POP DE" (step S4513). In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written in the previous order.

Thereafter, as "POP BC", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous order information is sent to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction. The BC register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4514). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

After that, as "POP WA", the information saved in the storage area corresponding to the previous order information is sent to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by the pop instruction. The WA register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten (step S4515). Further, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written in the previous order.

By executing the processing from step S4510 to step S4515, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

In addition to the flag register, the main CPU 63 also has various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4502 to S4507, the information of some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, namely, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, is saved to the stack area 224 for non-specific control. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4508), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control prior to the execution of the check process (step S4508), it is possible to save the information of these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, when the non-specific control is terminated, the information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is restored to these registers, making it possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control was executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, WA Register information is saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control by selectively saving the information of the registers, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of capacity secured for this purpose. Therefore, it is possible to save the register information as described above while ensuring a large capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control that can be used during the check process.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 79 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4601 to S4605 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u+2)" at the start of non-specific control. Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at (step S4601).

After that, the load command "LD (_ALLBUF), ALL" is used to save the information of all registers of the main CPU 63 to the ALL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S4602). As a result, not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register used in the check process, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, but also the information of all registers including other registers are saved together in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By saving all registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control in this way, there is no need to selectively save the information of the registers of the main CPU 63.

Here, the registers to be saved include the flag register. The flag register information is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S3802 of the management process (Figure 70), but in step S4602, the flag register information is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control. This eliminates the need to selectively save the information in the registers of the main CPU 63, including the flag register information. Even if the flag register information is saved in a redundant manner in this way, the information is restored from the stack area 222 for specific control to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in step S3804 of the management process (Figure 70) after the management execution process is completed, so that when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 can be restored to the state it was in immediately before the management execution process was executed.

Then, the check process is executed (step S4603). When the check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the program for non-specific control is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for identifying the return address of the management execution process after the check process is executed is written by a push command to a memory area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. Then, when the check process is completed, information for identifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program for the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check process are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the above fifteenth embodiment, a load command is used to set "LD SP, Y(r+α)" to Y(r+α) as a fixed address at the time of return to specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 (step S4604). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the information saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the registers corresponding to each of the main CPUs 63 by a load command "LD ALL, (_ALLBUF)" (step S4605). This makes it possible to restore each piece of information in all registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, by saving the information in the register of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the stack area for non-specific control is 224 capacity can be kept small. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the information is written in the order in which later information is read first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some kind of noise, All subsequent readout order information will be returned to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

In addition, when saving the information of the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, and HL register used in the check process, which is the process corresponding to the non-specific control. , IX register, and IY register, as well as other registers, the information of all registers is collectively saved in the ALL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control. By saving all the registers of the main CPU 63 to the work area 223 for non-specific control in this way, there is no need to selectively save information in the registers of the main CPU 63.

Although the configuration is such that the information in all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information in all the registers may be saved in the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. In addition, when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, information is returned to all registers in the process corresponding to non-specific control. The information may be returned in a process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of management execution processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4701 to S4706 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is saved to the SP buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load command "LD (_SPBUF), SP" (step S4701). As a result, the stack pointer information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (u+2)" at the start of non-specific control. Y(u+2) is set as a fixed address at (step S4702).

After that, the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 is evacuated by a push command as "PUSH ALL" to a memory area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 and a memory area continuous from that memory area (step S4703). In this case, since it is not possible to store the information of all the registers of the main CPU 63 in one memory area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the memory area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 and a memory area continuous from that memory area are set as the destination for evacuating the register information as described above. In addition, the stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the memory area to be written next in the order in which the last information was stored when evacuating the information of all the registers.

Then, the check process is executed (step S4704). When the check process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the program for non-specific control is executed. When the subroutine program is executed, information for identifying the return address of the management execution process after the check process is executed is written by a push command to a memory area in the stack area 224 for non-specific control corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. Then, when the check process is completed, information for identifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program for the management execution process indicated by the return address is returned to. The contents of the check process are the same as those of the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, the pop command "POP ALL" overwrites the information saved in the memory area corresponding to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 224 for non-specific control and in the memory area adjacent to that memory area in the registers corresponding to the main CPU 63 (step S4705). This makes it possible to restore the information in all registers of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to non-specific control was started.

Then, the information saved in the SP buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 by a load command as "LD SP, (_SPBUF)" (step S4706). As a result, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is restored to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started.

According to the above configuration, when the register information of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, not only the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register used in the check process, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, but also the information of all registers, including other registers, is saved together in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. By saving all registers of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 224 for non-specific control in this way, there is no need to selectively save the register information of the main CPU 63.

Information on the stack pointer corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started is saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control. As a result, even if the stack pointer information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started may change, the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the specific control returns. When returning to the corresponding process, it is possible to return the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 to the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

In addition, the information in all registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the non-specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started, but this is not limited to this, and the information in all registers may be saved to the main RAM 65 in the process corresponding to the specific control. Also, when the process corresponding to the non-specific control is terminated, the information is restored to all registers in the process corresponding to the non-specific control, but this is not limited to this, and the information is restored to all registers in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is terminated.

<Twentieth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configurations of the management process and the management execution process are different from those of the fifteenth embodiment. The configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 81 is a flowchart showing the management process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4801 to S4811 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S4801). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described below), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Thereafter, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S4802). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program corresponding to management execution processing, the flag register's state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. It becomes possible to save information to the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the WA register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD WA, 0" (step S4803). The BC register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD BC, 0" (step S4804). The DE register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD DE, 0" (step S4805). The HL register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD HL, 0" (step S4806). The IX register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD IX, 0" (step S4807). The IY register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD IY, 0" (step S4808).

In addition to the flag register, the registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S4803 to S4808, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are Clear “0”. These WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in check processing (step S4902), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S4809), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In addition, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is unnecessary for the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problems will occur in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

After executing the processes from step S4803 to step S4808, the management execution process is started by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program (step S4809). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after execution of the management execution processing, the main CPU 63 uses a pop instruction to send the information of the flag register saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S4802 as "POP PSW". flag register (step S4810). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S4802 was executed last time. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (Figure 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S4811). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

Figure 82 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S4901 to S4909 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, as in step S3901 of the management execution process (Figure 71) in the 15th embodiment, a load command is used to set "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to Y(u+2) as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 (step S4901).

After that, a check process is executed (step S4902). When executing a check process, a subroutine program corresponding to the check process set in the non-specific control program will be executed, but when executing the subroutine program, management after execution of the check process will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the execution process is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push instruction. When the check process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management execution process indicated by the return address. The contents of the check process are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment.

After that, the WA register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD WA, 0" (step S4903). The BC register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD BC, 0" (step S4904). The DE register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD DE, 0" (step S4905). The HL register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD HL, 0" (step S4906). The IX register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD IX, 0" (step S4907). The IY register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD IY, 0" (step S4908).

As already explained, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the check process (step S4902), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to returning from the process corresponding to non-specific control to the process corresponding to specific control, it is possible to set the state of these registers to the state they were in immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was started, before returning to the process corresponding to specific control.

In addition, each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to the specific control is started is non-specific after the process corresponding to the specific control is finished. This information is unnecessary in the process corresponding to control. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem will occur in the process corresponding to the non-specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment, a load instruction is used to set the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y (r+α)" when returning to the specific control. Y(r+α) is set as a fixed address at (step S4909). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

According to the above configuration, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, and IX register of the main CPU 63 The configuration also clears the IY register to "0". This eliminates the need to save the information in these registers to the main RAM 65. Therefore, there is no need to secure capacity for saving each piece of information.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" when returning to processing corresponding to specific control from a situation in which processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed. This makes it possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state it was in immediately before processing corresponding to non-specific control was started when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

The state in which each of the above registers is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the above registers to predetermined states when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control. .

When starting the process corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the registers to be cleared to "0" are some of the various registers of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting each register to a predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

When starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0," but other registers are not cleared to "0." This makes it possible to prevent information necessary for processing corresponding to specific control from being erased when processing corresponding to non-specific control begins.

Furthermore, information in registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is not saved in the main side RAM 65 at the start of processing corresponding to non-specific control. This eliminates the need to secure an area in the main RAM 65 for saving this information.

The information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 before processing corresponding to non-specific control is started is information that is not used in processing corresponding to specific control after processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the processing corresponding to specific control after processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed from being affected, even if the above registers are configured to be cleared to "0" when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started.

In addition, instead of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), these registers may be initialized. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, each of these registers of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0" and then information is set in each register to be in the initial state, but in steps S4803 to S4808, each register may be set to this initial state. In this case, by configuring each register to be set to the above-mentioned initial state in steps S4903 to S4908 as well, when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control, it is possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state immediately before the process corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

In addition, instead of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 in the management process (FIG. 81), all of these registers may be set to "1." In this case, by setting all of the above registers to "1" in steps S4903 to S4908 as well, when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, it is possible to return the state of each of these registers to the state it was in immediately before the process corresponding to non-specific control was started.

In addition, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is executed, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65 in processing corresponding to specific control, but this is not limited to this, and the information in the flag register may be saved to the main RAM 65 in processing corresponding to non-specific control.In addition, after processing corresponding to non-specific control is completed, the information is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63 in processing corresponding to specific control, but this is not limited to this, and the information is restored to the flag register in processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Additionally, the process of clearing the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 to "0" is performed before the process corresponding to the non-specific control starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of clearing these registers to "0" may be executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control. In addition, although the configuration is such that when the process corresponding to non-specific control ends, the process of clearing each of the registers to "0" is performed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the process of clearing each register to "0" is performed in the process corresponding to the specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Furthermore, in the management process (FIG. 81), the "PUSH PSW" process in step S4802 was configured to be executed before each register is set to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808, but instead of this, , the "PUSH PSW" process in step S4802 is executed after each register is set to "0" in steps S4803 to S4808 and before the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process is read in step S4809. It is also possible to have a configuration in which This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register after it has been changed by the load instructions in steps S4803 to S4808 to the stack area 222 for specific control.

<21st embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in the configuration for collecting game history information. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65, similar to the fifteenth embodiment. Also, unlike the fifteenth embodiment, a management RAM 241 is electrically connected to the MPU 62. In other words, a management RAM 241 is provided in addition to the main RAM 65 built into the MPU 62, and the management RAM 241 is externally attached to the MPU 62.

The main RAM 65 is provided with a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control, a work area 223 for non-specific control, and a stack area 224 for non-specific control, as in the fifteenth embodiment. ing. Therefore, when the main CPU 63 executes a process corresponding to specific control using the specific control program and data for specific control in the main ROM 64, the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 and When using the stack area 222 for specific control and using the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main ROM 64 in the main CPU 63 to execute processing corresponding to non-specific control, A work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main side RAM 65 are used.

The management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, a high frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234. The contents of each of these areas 231 to 234 are the same as in the fifteenth embodiment. Also in this embodiment, management execution processing including check processing is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control in the main CPU 63. In the checking process, game history is collected by updating the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, as in the fifteenth embodiment. The 61st to 68th parameters calculated using the collected game history are written into the calculation result storage area 234. That is, since the management RAM 241 is used when the main CPU 63 executes processing corresponding to non-specific control, the management RAM 241 is used as a work area for non-specific control.

In addition, when collecting game history and calculating parameters 61 to 68 using the collected history information, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control in the main RAM 65 are used as appropriate.

According to the above configuration, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are provided in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. This makes it possible to store collected game history information without increasing the required storage capacity in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the main side RAM 65, and to use the game history to It becomes possible to store the calculated 61st to 68th parameters. Further, while using the general-purpose MPU 62, it is possible to increase the storage capacity for storing game history information.

When collecting gaming history and calculating the 61st to 68th parameters using the collected history information, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control of the main side RAM 65 are used as appropriate. be done. This makes it possible to prevent the processing speed from decreasing excessively when processing related to history information is executed.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the management RAM 241 is provided with a normal counter area 231, an open/close execution mode counter area 232, a high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and a calculation result storage area 234, the first embodiment described above may be used. A configuration may also be adopted in which a storage area corresponding to the history memory 117 in the form, etc. is set. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required to store the history information, but the configuration is such that the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62 is used as a storage means for storing the history information. Therefore, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to increases in storage capacity.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the fifteenth embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S5001 to S5019 in the main processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S5001). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5002).

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S5003), whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step S5004), whether the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 (step S5005), and whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S5006).

In this embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63. The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving an opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

In this embodiment, a main body open sensor 96 for detecting whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the main CPU 63, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003: YES) and a negative judgment is made in any of steps S5004 to S5006, a clear process for non-setting update is executed (step S5007). In the clear process for non-setting update, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" except for the area (specifically, the setting value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221, and the initial setting is performed for the area cleared to "0". As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the regular power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display section 37a is erased and the reserved information for the regular map display section 38a is erased. In addition, in the clearing process for non-setting updates, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the clearing process for non-setting updates, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" before being initialized.

In the clearing process when updating non-settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the reset button 68c is pressed.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S5003: NO), it is determined whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S5008). The power failure flag is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is executed normally, the power failure flag is set to "1". If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the checksum calculation result matches the checksum saved at the time of power interruption, that is, the validity of the stored data (step S5009). If the clear processing at the time of non-setting update is executed in step S5007, or if the judgment is affirmative in step S5009, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5010). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S5008 to S5010, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S5011), and then an infinite loop is entered. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a clear process (step S5018) when updating settings, which will be described later.

If the determination is affirmative in all of steps S5008 to S5010, a power-on setting process is executed (step S5012). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control, such as the initialization of the power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but timer interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring when main processing is started. This state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released when step S5012 is completed and before step S5013 is executed, and timer interrupt processing is permitted to be executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S5012 is completed, and timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before step S5013 is started. Therefore, processing to progress the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S5013 to step S5016 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S5013 to S5016 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S5013 to S5016, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5003: YES) and all of steps S5004 to S5006 are judged to be positive, a process for updating the setting value is executed. Specifically, a copy process of the setting value is executed first (step S5017). In the copy process, the information of the setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the clear process (step S5018) executed afterwards when the setting value is updated, it is possible to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the clear process (i.e., the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped) when the setting value is updated.

After that, the clearing process at the time of updating the settings is executed (step S5018). In the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode or not and the copy area, and the initial setting is performed for the area cleared to "0". As a result, the game round is not being executed, the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display section 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the normal power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display section 37a is erased and the reserved information for the normal map display section 38a is erased. In addition, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed for the area cleared to "0". In addition, in the clearing process at the time of updating the settings, the setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to "0". In addition, when the settings are updated, various registers in the main CPU 63 are cleared to "0" before the initial settings are performed.

On the other hand, the clearing process when updating the settings does not clear to "0" the area indicating whether the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode or not, so even if the setting value update process (step S5019) is executed, it is possible to maintain the win/lose lottery mode in the mode before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped. Also, since the clearing process when updating the settings does not clear to "0" the copy area, it is possible to subsequently identify the setting value that was set before the clearing process when updating the settings was executed.

In the clearing process when updating settings, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if a setting value update process that can change the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". It becomes possible to do so.

Then, in step S5019, the setting value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5012. The setting value update process is described below. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processes in steps S5101 to S5114 in the setting value update process are executed in the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, a set value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5101). The setting value counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify which setting value the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is at. By setting "1" to the setting value counter, when the setting value update process is executed, the setting value becomes "setting 1" regardless of the previous setting value.

Then, a process to start displaying the setting value is executed (step S5102). In the process to start displaying the setting value, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the number "1" corresponding to "Setting 1" is displayed. When changing the setting value, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the third notification display device 69c.

Then, it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S5103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the outlet detection sensor 48a has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal from the sensor that detects the pressing of the update button 68b has switched from a LOW level to a HIGH level. If a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

If the update button 68b has been pressed once (step S5104: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S5105). If the value of the setting value counter after incrementing by 1 exceeds "6" (step S5106: YES), the setting value counter is set to "1" (step S5107). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher level each time the update button 68b is pressed, and if the update button 68b is pressed once when the setting is "setting 6", the setting will return to "setting 1".

If a negative determination is made in step S5106, or if the process in step S5107 is executed, a setting value display update process is executed (step S5108). In the setting value display update process, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that a number corresponding to the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. By checking the third notification display device 69c, the game hall manager can grasp the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 after pressing the update button 68b.

After executing the process of step S5108, the process returns to step S5103, and it is determined whether or not one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. If one game ball has not been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S5103: NO), the process of steps S5104 and onward is executed again. If one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a (step S5103: YES), it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S5109). In this case, it is not determined whether or not the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state, but rather whether or not a switch from the ON state to the OFF state has occurred, and if it is determined that the switch has occurred, a positive determination is made in step S5109.

If it has not been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: NO), the process of step S5109 is executed again. This causes the process to wait for the progress of the process until the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF. If it has been switched to the OFF state (step S5109: YES), a process to end the display of the setting value is executed (step S5110). In the process to end the display of the setting value, the display of the setting value on the third notification display device 69c is ended. In this case, the display of information on various parameters stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is started on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

Thereafter, a setting value comparison process is executed (step S5111). In the setting value comparison process, it is determined whether the information on the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control matches the information stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control. That is, it is determined whether or not the set value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is the same as the set value that was set in the current set value update process.

If the setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is the same as the setting value that was set in the current setting value update process (step S5112: NO), the A notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5113). In the non-change notification processing, a setting maintenance command indicating that the setting value has not been changed is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting maintenance command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting maintenance, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying "Setting maintenance is maintained." Further, the character image "Settings are maintained" is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the setting maintenance command is sent, and are terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the set value has been maintained. In addition, in the notification process when no change is made, the setting value is maintained by changing the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to setting maintenance. It may be configured to notify that the setting value has been maintained, or it may be configured to provide an external output indicating that the set value has been maintained.

If the setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is not the same as the setting value set in this setting value update process (step S5112: YES), a notification process at the time of change is executed (step S5114). In the notification process at the time of change, a setting change command indicating that the setting value has been changed is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81. Upon receiving the setting change command, the sound and light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting change, and outputs a sound saying "The setting has been changed" from the speaker unit 54. In addition, a text image saying "The setting has been changed" is displayed on the pattern display device 41.

These notifications are maintained until a notification execution period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the setting change command is sent, and are terminated when the notification execution period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By checking the above-mentioned notification, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the set value has been changed. In addition, in the notification processing at the time of change, it is determined that the setting value has been changed by changing the display content on at least one of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c to the display content corresponding to the setting change. The configuration may be configured to notify the user of the changes, or the configuration may be configured to provide an external output indicating that the set value has been changed.

As described above, in order to execute the setting value update process in this embodiment, not only the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, but also the reset button 68c is pressed, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to illegally execute the setting value update process, it becomes difficult to do so.

Further, in order to execute the setting value update process, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently execute the setting value update process, the fraudulent act will be noticeable because the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are open, and the gaming hall manager will It becomes easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to execute the setting value update process, it is necessary not only to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the main controller 60, but also to open the front door frame 14. It is possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it is also possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act noticeable.

In addition, in a configuration in which the process for proceeding with the game does not return if the setting value update process is not completed, in order to finalize the setting value selected in the setting value update process and end the setting value update process, It is necessary to enter the game ball into the out port 24a and have the out port detection sensor 48a detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion part 68a. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to terminate the setting value update process and return to the process for proceeding with the game, even if the setting value update process is executed fraudulently.

Also, the setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped and the setting value selected in the setting value update process are compared, and whether or not the two setting values are the same is determined. A corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can easily understand whether or not the setting value has been changed by the setting value update process.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes in steps S5013 to S5016 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 84). Note that the program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

Steps S5201 to S5205 execute the same processes as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

Thereafter, a setting confirmation process is executed (step S5206). When executing the settings confirmation process, a subroutine program corresponding to the settings confirmation process set in the specific control program will be executed; Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt process after execution of is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the setting confirmation process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that steps S5301 to S5312 in the setting confirmation process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, it is determined whether the third notification display device 69c is displaying a setting value corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S5301). If a negative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether the mode is neither a game time nor an open/close execution mode (step S5302), whether the picture display unit 38a is displaying a variable pattern time, and whether the normal power role 34a is in a normal power open state in which it can be opened (step S5303), whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13 (step S5304), whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11 (step S5305), and whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned ON (step S5306). Whether the front door frame 14 is open or not is determined based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, similar to step S5005 in the main processing (Figure 84), and whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open or not is determined based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, similar to step S5006 in the main processing (Figure 84).

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S5302 to S5306, this setting confirmation process ends without executing the processes of steps S5307 to S5309. If a positive judgment is made in all of steps S5302 to S5306, a process to start displaying the setting value is executed (step S5307). In the process to start displaying the setting value, the display of the third notification display device 69c is controlled so that the setting value number corresponding to the information of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is displayed. When checking the setting value, the manager of the gaming hall can visually check the third notification display device 69c to grasp the current setting state of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S5308). The game stop flag is a flag for the master CPU 63 to identify whether or not a situation exists in which a positive judgment is made in step S5207 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 86) and the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed, i.e., the execution of the processes for progressing the game should be stopped. By setting the game stop flag to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 86) and the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed. This allows the setting value to be checked in a situation in which the execution of the processes for progressing the game is stopped. However, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S5201 to S5205 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 86) are executed, so even if the setting value is being checked, power outage monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, big win type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

Then, a confirmation notification start command is sent to the audio and light-emitting control device 81 (step S5309). By receiving the confirmation notification start command, the audio and light-emitting control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the setting confirmation in progress, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice message saying "Settings are being confirmed." In addition, the pattern display device 41 is caused to display a text image saying "Settings are being confirmed." These notifications continue until a confirmation notification end command is received from the main CPU 63. Note that a configuration may also be adopted in which an external output is provided to indicate that the setting value is being confirmed.

As described above, under the condition that the game is not in play mode or open/close execution mode, and further, the game is not in a state in which the image on the normal picture display unit 38a is changing, or the normal power open state in which the normal power device 34a can be opened, a display for checking the setting value is displayed on the third notification display device 69c, making it possible to prevent the setting value from being checked while the game is being played.

In addition, in order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary not only to turn on the setting key insertion part 68a but also to make the front door frame 14 open. Therefore, the gaming machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, it becomes difficult to do so.

Further, in order to display a display for confirming the set value on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, so the fraudulent act will be noticeable, and the gaming hall management This makes it easier for those involved to discover the fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to have the display for checking the setting value displayed on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary to open not only the gaming machine main body 12, which is necessary to expose the main control device 60, but also the front door frame 14, making it possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent acts more complicated and to make the above-mentioned fraudulent acts more noticeable.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S5310). If the OFF operation has been performed (step S5310: YES), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S5311). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S5207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), resulting in a situation in which the processes in steps S5208 to S5221 are executed. As a result, the state in which execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped is released.

Thereafter, a confirmation notification end command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5312). By receiving the confirmation notification end command, the audio light emission control device 81 ends the notification indicating that the setting values in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are being confirmed.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86), after the setting confirmation process of step S5206 is completed, it is determined whether or not play is stopped (step S5207). In this case, if the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" in the setting confirmation process of step S5206, a positive determination is made in step S5207 and the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed. Also, if the occurrence of fraud is detected in the fraud detection process of step S5205, a positive determination is made in step S5207 and the processes of steps S5208 to S5221 are not executed.

Steps S5208 to S5219 execute the same processing as steps S307 to S318 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment described above. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Also, step S5221 executes the same processing as step S3719 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment described above.

Meanwhile, in step S5220, RAM monitoring processing is executed. When the RAM monitoring processing is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the RAM monitoring processing set in the program for specific control is executed, and when the program for the subroutine is executed, information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing after the RAM monitoring processing is executed is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the RAM monitoring processing is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing program indicated by the return address.

Figure 88 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S5401 to S5412 in the RAM monitoring process is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, a monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5401). In the monitoring process, whether or not an abnormality occurs in the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control due to noise or the like is monitored. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, a method of monitoring whether or not the state of a memory area in the work area 221 for specific control in which information is not written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state, and judging that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state, can be mentioned. In this case, if the initial state of the memory area is a state where the value of "0" is set, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the memory area, and if the initial state of the memory area is a state where the value of "1" is set, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the memory area is "0". In addition to the above monitoring method, a configuration may be used in which an abnormality is judged to have occurred when the value of a specified byte is a value different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5401 that there is an abnormality (step S5402: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. If it is determined in step S5401 that there is no abnormality (step S5402: NO), the process advances to step S5403.

In step S5403, a monitoring process of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed. In this monitoring process, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 222 for specific control due to noise or the like is monitored. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, a method of monitoring whether or not the state of a memory area in the stack area 222 for specific control in which no information is written by various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state, and judging that an abnormality has occurred when the state is different from the initial state, can be mentioned. In this case, if the initial state of the memory area is a state where the value of "0" is set, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred when "1" is stored in the memory area, and if the initial state of the memory area is a state where the value of "1" is set, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred when the value of the memory area is "0". In addition to the above monitoring method, a configuration may be used in which an abnormality is judged to have occurred when the value of a specified byte is a value different from the value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5403 that an abnormality exists (step S5404: YES), execute the processes in steps S5409 to S5412. If it is determined in step S5403 that an abnormality does not exist (step S5404: NO), proceed to step S5405.

In step S5405, monitoring processing of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed. In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the non-specific control work area 223 due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, in the work area 223 for non-specific control, check whether the state of the storage area to which information is not written due to various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. One method is to monitor this and determine that an abnormality has occurred if the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to the value "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is set to "1". ”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if the storage area has a value of “0”. Furthermore, in addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5405 that an abnormality exists (step S5406: YES), execute the processes of steps S5409 to S5412. If it is determined in step S5405 that an abnormality does not exist (step S5406: NO), proceed to step S5407.

In step S5407, monitoring processing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed. In this monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the stack area 224 for non-specific control due to noise or the like. This monitoring method is arbitrary, but for example, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, check whether the state of the storage area to which information is not written due to various controls in the main CPU 63 is different from the initial state. One method is to monitor this and determine that an abnormality has occurred if the state is different from the initial state. In this case, if the initial state of the storage area is set to the value "0", it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if "1" is stored in the storage area, and the initial state of the storage area is set to "1". ”, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred if the storage area has a value of “0”. Furthermore, in addition to the monitoring method described above, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the value of a predetermined byte is different from a value that can be set in a normal state.

If it is determined in step S5407 that an abnormality exists (step S5408: YES), the processes of steps S5409 to S5412 are executed. Specifically, a setting value copy process is executed first (step S5409). In this copy process, the setting value counter information used to identify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the setting value counter information is cleared to "0" in the abnormality clear process (step S5410) executed subsequently, it is possible to know the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clear process was executed.

Then, a clear process is performed when an abnormality occurs (step S5410). In the clear process when an abnormality occurs, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". After clearing to "0", an initial setting is performed. In other words, in the RAM monitoring process, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent any process corresponding to specific control and any process corresponding to non-specific control from being executed in the current state when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

Note that if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the information on the return address after execution of the RAM monitoring process will also be erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5412 is completed, the program is uniquely returned to the predetermined program. Specifically, the configuration is such that the process returns uniquely to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program that uniquely returns is not limited to step S5013, but may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). Further, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first storage area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that abnormality clear processing has occurred is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S5411). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing, and causes the speaker section 54 to output a voice saying "Forcibly cleared." Further, the character image "Forcibly cleared" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above-mentioned notification, the administrator of the game hall can understand that the main side RAM 65 has been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5412). In other words, if clearing processing occurs in the event of an abnormality, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control will be cleared to "0", so the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 must be reset. To do this, execute setting value update processing. The contents of the setting value update process are the same as step S5019 of the main process (FIG. 84). Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the set value is updated by one step, and the currently selected set value is determined by detecting a game ball with the exit detection sensor 48a. The setting values that are being updated and the set values that have been finalized are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Thereafter, when the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the termination condition for the setting value update process is satisfied.

Here, the termination condition is not determined to be met just because the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state; the termination condition is determined to be met when the setting key insertion section 68a switches from the ON state to the OFF state. When the setting value update process is executed in the RAM monitoring process (Figure 88), the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value update process, so in order to establish the termination condition of the setting value update process, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a and turn it ON once, and then turn it OFF. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value update process from terminating even if the correct operation has not been performed by the amusement hall manager.

When the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state and the termination condition for the setting value update process is satisfied, step S5111 in the setting value update process (FIG. 85) is executed. It is compared whether the set value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control and the set value currently set in the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control are the same. That is, it is determined whether the setting value set before the abnormality clearing process (step S5410) is executed and the setting value set in the current setting value update process are the same. If both setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the setting maintenance notification described above is performed by executing the process for notification when no change is made (step S5113). On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the setting change notification described above is performed by executing the process for notification at the time of change (step S5114).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In order for the setting value update process to be executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, not only must the setting key insertion section 68a be turned ON, but the reset button 68c must also be pressed, the front door frame 14 must be in the open state, and the gaming machine main body 12 must be in the open state. This makes it difficult for someone to fraudulently execute the setting value update process.

The front door frame 14 and the gaming machine body 12 must be in an open state in order for the setting value update process to be executed. As a result, even if someone attempts to execute the setting value update process fraudulently, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine body 12 are in an open state, making the fraudulent act noticeable, and making it easier for the manager of the amusement hall to discover the fraudulent act.

In particular, in order to execute the setting value update process, it is necessary not only to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the main controller 60, but also to open the front door frame 14. It is possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it is also possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act noticeable.

In a configuration in which the process for progressing the game is not returned to if the setting value update process is not completed, in order to confirm the setting value selected in the setting value update process and end the setting value update process, it is necessary to insert a game ball into the outlet 24a to have the outlet detection sensor 48a detect the game ball, and then turn off the setting key insertion unit 68a. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform operations to end the setting value update process and return to the process for progressing the game, even if the setting value update process is executed fraudulently.

The setting value that was set before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped is compared with the setting value selected in the setting value update process, and it is determined whether the two setting values are the same. A corresponding notification is executed. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can easily understand whether or not the setting value has been changed by the setting value update process.

The setting value is set on the condition that it is neither the game time nor the opening/closing execution mode, nor is the symbol change display time in the general figure display section 38a nor the general electric open state in which the general electric accessory 34a can be in an open state. By displaying the display for confirmation on the third notification display device 69c, it is possible to prevent the setting value confirmation work from being performed while a game is being played. .

In order to display a display for confirming the set value on the third notification display device 69c, not only the setting key insertion portion 68a is turned on, but also the front door frame 14 is opened. The game machine main body 12 must be in an open state. Thereby, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, it becomes difficult to do so.

In order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 need to be in an open state. As a result, even if an attempt is made to fraudulently display a setting value confirmation display, the front door frame 14 and the gaming machine main body 12 are in an open state, so the fraudulent act will be noticeable, and the gaming hall management This makes it easier for those involved to discover the fraudulent activity.

In particular, in order to display the setting value on the third notification display device 69c, it is necessary to perform not only the opening operation of the game machine main body 12 necessary to expose the main control device 60 but also By also requiring an opening operation of the front door frame 14, it becomes possible to make the work of the above-mentioned fraudulent act complicated, and it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned fraudulent act conspicuous.

If it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent any processing corresponding to specific control and any processing corresponding to non-specific control from being executed in the current state if there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

In the process corresponding to specific control, an information error occurs not only in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It will be monitored whether they are doing so or not. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control are separated to monitor whether or not an information abnormality has occurred.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in any one of the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. In the process corresponding to specific control, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are set to "0". ” will be cleared. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which "0" clearing is performed separately for processing corresponding to specific control and processing corresponding to non-specific control.

When an abnormality occurs and the abnormality clear process is executed, the setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the game from proceeding even if the setting value has not been set. In this case, if the setting value set before the abnormality clear process is executed and the setting value set in the setting value update process after the abnormality clear process are executed are the same, a setting maintenance notification is issued. As a result, even if the abnormality clear process is executed, the setting value set in the previous situation is reset to be notified, and it is possible to clearly inform the player that the setting value has not changed even if the abnormality clear process is executed. Incidentally, since it is common for the setting values of each pachinko machine 10 installed in amusement halls to be recorded, it is possible to execute the setting value update process after the abnormality clear process is executed so that the recorded setting value is used.

Note that the conditions for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started may be different from those in the above embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing another form of main processing. In the main processing, steps S5501 to S5506 and steps S5508 to S5520 are the same as steps S5001 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the above embodiment. On the other hand, in the main processing, it is determined in step S5507 whether the operating handle of the firing operation device 28 operated to launch the game ball into the gaming area PA has been rotated from the initial rotation position. Then, the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5503: YES), the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (step S5504: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. (Step S5505: YES), the game machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11 (Step S5506: YES), and the operation handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position. If so (step S5507: YES), setting value update processing (step S5520) is executed. As a result, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary not only to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a and perform the ON operation, but also to perform the ON operation. It is necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the operating handle of the operating device 28 is being rotated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value. Note that in step S5507, instead of determining whether or not the operating handle of the firing operating device 28 has been rotated from the initial rotation position, it is determined whether the firing operating device 28 is being touched by the player. It may also be a configuration.

In addition, the conditions for the setting value update process to be executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started are set to both that the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 and that the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11, but it is also possible to set only one of these conditions.

In addition, the configuration is such that the reset button 68c is pressed as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started. However, a configuration may be adopted in which this condition is not set.

In addition, as a condition for executing the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the operation to the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where a game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. The configuration may be such that a condition is set that power supply has started. As a result, in order to execute the setting value update process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, it is necessary not only to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion section 68a and perform the ON operation, but also to perform the ON operation. It becomes necessary to start supplying operating power to the pachinko machine 10 while the game balls are retained at the gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value.

Further, the content of the operation for finalizing the setting value in the setting value update process may be different from that in the above embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing another example of setting value update processing. In the setting value update process, steps S5601 to S5602 and steps S5604 to S5614 execute the same processes as steps S5101 to S5102 and steps S5104 to S5114 of the setting value update process (FIG. 85) in the above embodiment. . On the other hand, in step S5603, in the setting value update process, instead of determining whether or not the exit detection sensor 48a has detected a game ball, the ON signal is continuously output from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined whether the ON duration period is equal to or longer than the end reference period (specifically, 5 seconds). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the currently selected setting value is determined and the process advances to step S5609. According to this configuration, in order to confirm the selected setting value, it is necessary to intentionally keep the game ball in the through gate 35 for a period longer than the end reference period. Game balls staying in the through gate 35 for longer than the end reference period does not occur in a situation where a normal game is being played. Thereby, it is possible to make the conditions for determining the currently selected setting value not satisfied or difficult to be satisfied in a situation where a normal game is being played. Further, even if the setting value update process is started by fraud, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation to confirm the selected setting value in the setting value update process.

Furthermore, in the setting value update process, the selected setting value may be determined when the operating handle of the firing operating device 28 is rotated from the initial rotation position, and the firing operating device 28 may be touched by the player. The currently selected setting value may be determined when the selected setting value is selected.

In addition, in the setting value update process, when the special electric detection sensor 45a detects that a game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 provided with an opening/closing member, the selected setting value is determined. Often, the setting value being selected may be configured to be determined when the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects that a game ball enters the second operating port 34 provided with the opening/closing member. In this case, in order to confirm the selected setting value, it is necessary to manually open the target ball entry part and then clean the game ball, making it difficult to illegally change the setting value. becomes possible.

In addition, in the setting value update process, the selected setting value may be determined based on the detection of a game ball entering the first ball entry section and then the detection of a game ball entering the second ball entry section. In this case, since it is necessary to manually enter multiple ball entry sections in a predetermined order in order to determine the selected setting value, it is possible to make it difficult to change the setting value fraudulently. In this case, by making both the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section into ball entry sections that do not have an opening/closing member, it is possible to prevent the ease of performing regular work from being extremely reduced.

Furthermore, in the setting value updating process, the setting key insertion section 68a may be switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby confirming the selected setting value and satisfying the termination condition for the setting value updating process.

In addition, the operation for updating the setting value by one step in the setting value update process is not limited to pressing the update button 68b, but may be configured so that the setting value is updated by one step by pressing the reset button 68c.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on by the setting key, If the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the frame 13 or if the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is configured to be executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not executed at the time of non-setting update. This makes it possible to prevent the clearing process at the time of non-setting update from being executed against the will of the manager of the gaming hall.

Also, if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is not turned on by the setting key, If the front door frame 14 is not in an open state with respect to the frame 13 or if the gaming machine main body 12 is not in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11, the clearing process at the time of non-setting update (step S5007) is configured to be executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the clearing process is not executed at the time of non-setting update. As a result, even if an unauthorized person tries to execute the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, it becomes difficult to do so.

<23rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main process. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S5701 to step S5720 in the main process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S5701). In this power-on wait process, for example, the main process is started and a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses before proceeding to the next process. During the execution period of this power-on wait process, the operation start and initial settings of the pattern display device 41 are completed. After that, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S5702).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 (step S5703), and the outer frame 14 is determined based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96. It is determined whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S5704), and it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step S5705). If a negative determination is made in any of steps S5703 to S5705, the processes of steps S5706 to S5714 are executed. These steps S5706 to S5714 are the same as steps S5008 to S5016 of the main process (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

If all of steps S5703 to S5705 are judged to be positive, a selection process is executed (step S5715). In the selection process, a process is executed to determine whether the situation is one in which a clear process is executed when no settings are updated and the setting value update process is not executed, or one in which a clear process is executed when settings are updated and the setting value update process is executed, based on a selection operation by the manager of the amusement hall. Specifically, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the situation is switched from one of the above situations being selected to the other situation being selected. Note that the selection operation may be performed by operating the reset button 68c, or may be performed by operating another operating unit. In addition, if a situation in which the clear process is executed when the setting is not updated and the setting value update process is not executed is selected, the first notification display device 69a displays "O" and the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c are turned off, and if a situation in which the clear process is executed when the setting is updated and the setting value update process is executed is selected, the second notification display device 69b displays "O" and the first notification display device 69a and the third notification display device 69c are turned off. In addition, if the reset button 68c is pressed continuously for a selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or longer, the selected one of the above situations is confirmed as the current selection.

The configuration may be such that when the update button 68b is continuously pressed for a selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or longer, the selected one of the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target, or when another operating unit is continuously pressed for a selection period (specifically, 10 seconds) or longer, the selected one of the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target. Also, the configuration may be such that when the operating handle of the firing operating device 28 is rotated, the selected one of the above situations is confirmed as the current selection target.

In the selection process, if the situation in which the clear process for non-setting updates is executed and the setting value update process is not executed is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: NO), the clear process for non-setting updates is executed (step S5717). The processing content of the clear process for non-setting updates is the same as that of step S5007 in the main process (FIG. 84) in the above 22nd embodiment.

In the selection process, if the situation in which the clear process at the time of setting update is executed and the setting value update process is confirmed as the current selection target (step S5716: YES), the setting value copy process is executed (step S5718), clear processing at the time of setting update is executed (step S5719), and setting value update processing is executed (step S5720). The processing contents of steps S5718 to S5720 are the same as steps S5017 to S5019 of the main processing (FIG. 84) in the twenty-second embodiment.

With the above configuration, even if the configuration does not include the setting key insertion unit 68a, the amusement hall manager can select whether to execute the clear process when there is no setting update and the setting value update process is not executed, or execute the clear process when there is a setting update and execute the setting value update process.

Furthermore, not only when executing the setting value update process but also when executing the clear process when the setting is not updated, operating power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the reset button 68c is pressed. In addition to starting the game, it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 and to open the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11. As a result, even if an unauthorized person tries to execute the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, it becomes difficult to do so.

Note that the conditions for the selection process to be executed when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started are that the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 and that the outer frame Although the configuration has been described in which both the conditions that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state for 11 are set, it is also possible to have a configuration in which only one of these conditions is set.

Additionally, as a condition for executing the selection process when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, a condition is added that the firing handle of the firing operation device 28 is rotated. A configuration may be adopted in which a condition is added that the firing operation device 28 is being touched, and a configuration in which a condition is added that the game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a may be configured. Good too.

<Twenty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the RAM monitoring process is different from that of the twenty-second embodiment. The configuration that differs from the twenty-second embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twenty-second embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 92 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S5801 to S5814 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, a monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5801). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment. If it is determined in step S5801 that an abnormality exists (step S5802: YES), the processes of steps S5805 to S5808 are executed.

If it is determined in step S5801 that no abnormality exists (step S5802: NO), a monitoring process of the specific control stack area 222 is executed (step S5803). The contents of this monitoring process are the same as those of step S5403 in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment. If it is determined in step S5803 that an abnormality exists (step S5804: YES), the processes of steps S5805 to S5808 are executed.

Regarding the process of steps S5805 to S5808 in detail, a copy process of the setting values is first executed (step S5805). In this copy process, the information of the setting value counter used to identify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the subsequent abnormality clear process (step S5806), it is possible to know the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clear process was executed.

Then, a clear process is performed when an abnormality occurs (step S5806). In the clear process when an abnormality occurs, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, after clearing to "0", the initial setting is performed. On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". In other words, in the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the process corresponding to the specific control from being executed in the current state when there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. Furthermore, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", so that it is possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" as a result of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control.

When the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the return address information after the RAM monitoring process is executed is also erased. Therefore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", after the process of step S5808 is completed, a specific program is returned to unambiguously. Specifically, the process is configured to unambiguously return to the process of step S5013 in the main process (FIG. 22). However, the program to which the specific control is returned unambiguously is not limited to step S5013, and may be step S5221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86). Furthermore, when the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first memory area in the storage order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, an abnormal command indicating that the abnormal clear process has occurred is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step S5807). By receiving the abnormal command, the sound and light emission control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clear, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying "Forced clear has been performed." In addition, the pattern display device 41 is configured to display a text image saying "Forced clear has been performed." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, this is not limited to this, and the above notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. For example, the update button 68b may be pressed as the notification termination operation, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forced cleared.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5808). The contents of the setting value update process are the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in both steps S5801 and S5803 (steps S5802 and S5804: NO), a monitoring process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S5809). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment. If it is determined that there is an abnormality in step S5809 (step S5810: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized (step S5811). In this case, the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for the open/close execution mode, the counter area 233 for the high frequency support mode, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to resolve the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5811, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if an information anomaly occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Note that in step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0", the management start flag is not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration. In addition, in step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high-frequency support mode counter area 233, and the management start flag are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration. In addition, in step S5811, although the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 are cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag are not cleared to "0". It may also be a configuration.

If a negative determination is made in step S5810 or if the process in step S5811 is executed, a process for monitoring the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S5812). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment. If it is determined in step S5812 that there is an abnormality (step S5813: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed (step S5814). This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S5814, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if an information anomaly occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

According to the above configuration, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the copy area, and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the processing corresponding to the specific control from being executed in the current state if there is a possibility that some information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to an information error in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" in response to an information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" due to an information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. becomes possible.

In addition, if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", but the stack area 222 for specific control may not be cleared to "0".

In addition, when an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", but the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0". You can also use it as In this case, even if the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", the process of steps S5805 to S5808 may not be executed.

<25th embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the twenty-second embodiment in the processing configuration for monitoring whether an information abnormality has occurred in each of the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the twenty-second embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the twenty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S5901 to step S5908 in the RAM monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, a monitoring process of the work area 221 for specific control is executed (step S5901). The contents of the monitoring process are the same as step S5401 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment. If it is determined in step S5901 that an abnormality exists (step S5902: YES), the processes of steps S5905 to S5908 are executed.

If it is determined in step S5901 that no abnormality exists (step S5902: NO), a monitoring process of the specific control stack area 222 is executed (step S5903). The contents of this monitoring process are the same as those of step S5403 in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment. If it is determined in step S5903 that an abnormality exists (step S5904: YES), the processes of steps S5905 to S5908 are executed.

More specifically, regarding the processing in steps S5905 to S5908, first, a setting value copying process is executed (step S5905). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . As a result, even if the information of the set value counter is cleared to "0" in the abnormality clearing process (step S5906) to be executed subsequently, the present pachinko machine 10 before the abnormality clearing process is executed. It becomes possible to understand the setting value of.

Thereafter, a clearing process in the event of an abnormality is executed (step S5906). In the clearing process at the time of abnormality, the work area 221 for specific control except for the copy area is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". Initial settings are also performed after clearing to "0". On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". In other words, in the RAM monitoring process in this embodiment, if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in either the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the specific control is performed except for the copy area. The work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". As a result, if there is a possibility that some kind of information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the process corresponding to the specific control will be executed in the same state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Furthermore, even if an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0". As a result, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

Then, an abnormal command indicating that a clear process has occurred during an abnormality is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step S5907). By receiving the abnormal command, the sound and light emission control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clear of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying, "A forced clear has been performed for specific control." In addition, the pattern display device 41 is made to display a text image saying, "A forced clear has been performed for specific control." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, this is not limited to this, and the above notification may be terminated when a notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. For example, the update button 68b may be pressed as the notification termination operation, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By checking the above notification, the manager of the amusement hall can understand that the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control have been forcibly cleared.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed (step S5908). The contents of the setting value update process are the same as step S5412 in the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the RAM monitoring process executed using the specific control program and specific control data as described above, information abnormality monitoring is executed for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. However, information abnormality monitoring is not performed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Monitoring of information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is performed by processing corresponding to non-specific control in which programs for non-specific control and data for non-specific control are used. is executed.

Figure 94 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management execution process is executed by reading out a subroutine program in the management process (Figure 70) in the same way as in the 15th embodiment. Also, the processes in steps S6001 to S6016 in the management execution process are executed in the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps S6001 to S6008 and steps S6010 to S6016 execute the same processing as steps S3901 to S3915 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, step S6009 executes another monitoring process. When the other monitoring process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the other monitoring process set in the program for non-specific control is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the other monitoring process is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the other monitoring process ends, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing separate monitoring processing. Note that the processes from step S6101 to step S6108 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, a monitoring process is performed on the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S6101). The content of this monitoring process is the same as step S5405 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment. If it is determined in step S6101 that there is an abnormality (step S6102: YES), the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized (step S6103). In this case, the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to resolve the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6103, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the work area 223 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are 0” can be prevented from being cleared.

In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the counter area for opening and closing execution mode 232, the counter area for high-frequency support mode 233, and the calculation result storage area 234 may be cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the counter area for opening and closing execution mode 232, the counter area for high-frequency support mode 233, and the management start flag may be cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In step S6103, the normal counter area 231, the counter area for opening and closing execution mode 232, and the counter area for high-frequency support mode 233 may be cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 and the management start flag may not be cleared to "0".

Thereafter, clear notification processing is executed (step S6104). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and also outputs a message from the speaker section 54 saying "History information has been forcibly cleared." Outputs a voice saying "I have done this." Further, a character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. The notification termination operation may be, for example, pressing the update button 68b or pressing the reset button 68c. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S6102 or if the processing of step S6104 is executed, a monitoring process of the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S6105). The content of this monitoring process is the same as that of step S5407 of the RAM monitoring process (FIG. 88) in the 22nd embodiment described above. If it is determined in step S6105 that there is an abnormality (step S6106: YES), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized (step S6107). This makes it possible to resolve the information abnormality in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

On the other hand, in step S6107, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if an information abnormality occurs in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control are 0” can be prevented from being cleared.

Thereafter, clear notification processing is executed (step S6108). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and also causes the speaker unit 54 to emit light in a manner that corresponds to the forced clearing of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. "Forcibly cleared." will be output. In addition, a character image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 saying "The stack of non-specific control has been forcibly cleared." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the manager of the game hall. The notification termination operation may be, for example, pressing the update button 68b or pressing the reset button 68c. By confirming the above notification, the administrator of the gaming hall can understand that the stack area 224 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

When the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the address of the program in step S6010 in the management execution process (FIG. 94) is set uniquely as the return address information after execution of another monitoring process. This makes it possible to return to the program that should have been returned to in the management execution process, even if the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared. Furthermore, when the stack area 224 for non-specific control is forcibly cleared, the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is also set to the address of the first memory area in the storage order in the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

According to the above configuration, monitoring of whether an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is executed by the process corresponding to specific control in the main CPU 63, Monitoring of whether an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed in a process corresponding to non-specific control in the main CPU 63. As a result, not only the areas 221 to 224 of the main RAM 65 to be used are clearly distinguished between the processing corresponding to specific control and the processing corresponding to non-specific control, but also the areas of the main RAM 65 to be monitored 221 to 224 can also be clearly distinguished.

Note that when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to specific control is stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control. The saved information is also cleared to "0". In this case, even if the process corresponding to the non-specific control ends and the process corresponding to the specific control returns, there is a possibility that the state before the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started cannot be restored. Therefore, when the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control may also be cleared to "0". In addition, in this configuration, the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0", so when returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value update process is executed first as a corresponding process.

<26th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 20th embodiment in the processing configuration of management processing. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 20th embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 20th embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 96 is a flowchart showing the management process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S6201 to S6219 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6201). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described below), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load command "LD HL, SP" (step S6202). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, the consecutive 8 bits of information from the upper side of the stack pointer are overwritten in the H register, and the consecutive 8 bits of information from the lower side of the stack pointer are overwritten in the L register.

Then, a load command is issued to clear to "0" a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the master CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control as "LD (HL), 0" (step S6203). Note that the HL register of the master CPU 63 has been overwritten with the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 in step S6202, and the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 has not been updated by the time the processing of step S6203 is executed. Therefore, in step S6203, a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

Then, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated by a load command to the address information of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6204). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the storage destination storage area is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 for specific control each time information to be stored is added. Therefore, in step S6204, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information corresponding to the storage area with one address smaller in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process of step S6204, the next storage area is set as the storage target of information by the next push command with respect to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203, and the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203 is set as the target for reading information by the next pop command.

Thereafter, the WA register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD WA, 0" (step S6205). Further, as "LD BC, 0", the BC register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6206). Further, as "LD DE, 0", the DE register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6207). Furthermore, the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL,0" (step S6208). Further, as "LD IX,0", the IX register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6209). Further, as "LD IY, 0", the IY register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction (step S6210).

In addition to the flag register, the main CPU 63 also has various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6205 to S6210, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to "0". The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are used in the management execution process (step S6212), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to the execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, it is possible to set the state of these registers to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started.

In addition, the information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is unnecessary for the processing corresponding to the specific control after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problems will occur in the processing corresponding to the specific control that is restored after the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as "POP PSW", information is read from the storage area in the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6211). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6211 is executed is the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6203. The information corresponds to Therefore, the storage area in the write order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control becomes the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6203. . Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. It is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control, the management execution process is started (step S6212). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

Note that the processing contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 82) in the 20th embodiment. Therefore, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0". As a result, these registers will be cleared to "0" before returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, and the state of these registers will be cleared before returning to processing corresponding to specific control. It is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

When returning to the management processing program after the management execution process is executed, a process is executed to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0". In detail, first, a push command "PUSH HL" is issued to save the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6213). After the push command is executed, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the next memory area in the write order relative to the memory area in which the information in the HL register was saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load command "LD HL, SP" (step S6214). In this case, since the amount of information of the stack pointer is 16 bits and the amount of information of each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, the consecutive 8 bits of information from the upper side of the stack pointer are overwritten in the H register, and the consecutive 8 bits of information from the lower side of the stack pointer are overwritten in the L register.

After that, a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is set to "0" by a load instruction as "LD (HL), 0". Clear (step S6215). Note that the HL register of the main CPU 63 has been overwritten with the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in step S6214, and the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 has not been updated by the time the process of step S6215 is executed. Since this has not been carried out, in step S6215, the 1-byte storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, as "LD SP, SP-1", the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the address information of the storage area to be written in the next order in the stack area 222 for specific control by a load instruction. (Step S6216). When using the stack area 222 for specific control, information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and each time information to be stored is added, information for specific control is stored. The storage area of the storage destination is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 of . Therefore, in step S6216, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with the smaller address by one in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process in step S6216, the storage area in the next order with respect to the storage area cleared to "0" in step S6215 is set as the storage target of information by the next push command, and in addition, in step S6215 The storage area cleared to "0" is set as the information read target by the next pop command.

Thereafter, as "POP PSW", information is read from the storage area in the previous writing order with respect to the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a pop instruction, The read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6217). The information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop instruction in step S6217 is executed is the storage area in the next writing order with respect to the storage area in the specific control stack area 222 cleared to "0" in step S6215. The information corresponds to Therefore, in the stack area 222 for specific control, the storage area in the writing order immediately before the storage area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is the memory area for specific control cleared to "0" in step S6215. This is a storage area in the stack area 222. Then, by overwriting the flag register of the main CPU 63 with the information read from this storage area, the flag register is cleared to "0". Note that one storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), and the flag register of the main CPU 63 also has an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). . By clearing the flag register to "0" after executing the management execution process (step S6212), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to "0" by the main CPU 63 after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It is possible to set the state immediately after the supply of operating power to has started. Furthermore, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area whose write order in the stack area 222 for specific control is one previous.

Thereafter, the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction as "POP HL" (step S6218). Note that since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the end of the management execution process (step S6212), the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6213. At the same time, in step S6218, the information cleared to "0" is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63, resulting in the HL register of the main CPU 63 being cleared to "0". Furthermore, when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S6219). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

The above configuration can achieve the following effects in addition to those described in the 20th embodiment.

The flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from a situation where processing corresponding to specific control is being executed. This eliminates the need to save information in the flag register used in the process corresponding to specific control to the main RAM 65 in a situation where the process corresponding to non-specific control is being executed. Therefore, there is no need to secure capacity for saving the information.

The flag register of the main CPU 63 is also cleared to "0" when returning to processing corresponding to specific control from a situation in which processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed. This makes it possible to return the state of the flag register to the state it was in immediately before processing corresponding to non-specific control was started when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

The state where the flag register is cleared to "0" is the state when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for setting the flag register to a predetermined state when starting processing corresponding to non-specific control and when returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

The information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started is information that is not used in the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is finished. As a result, even if the flag register is cleared to "0" when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It is possible to avoid any influence.

A predetermined storage area of the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0", and the flag register is cleared to "0" by overwriting the information in the cleared storage area to "0" using a pop instruction. It is the composition. This makes it possible to clear the flag register to "0" even in a configuration where it is prohibited to directly clear the flag register to "0" by a load instruction.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the flag register is cleared to "0", a configuration in which the flag register is initialized may be used. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0" and then information is set so that it is in the initial state. In S6204 and S6211, the flag register may be set to be in this initial state. In this case, by configuring the flag register to be set to the above-mentioned initial state in steps S6213 to S6218, the state of the flag register can be changed to non-specific control when returning to the process corresponding to specific control. It becomes possible to return to the state immediately before the processing corresponding to the start.

Furthermore, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, a structure may be adopted in which all flag registers are set to "1". In this case, all flag registers are set to "1" in steps S6213 to S6218, and when returning to the process corresponding to specific control, the state of the flag register is changed to start the process corresponding to non-specific control. It is possible to return to the state immediately before the change.

Furthermore, instead of the processing in steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD PSW, 0". Further, instead of the processing in steps S6213 to S6218, the flag register of the main CPU 63 may be directly cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD PSW,0".

Further, instead of the configuration in which the processes of steps S6213 and S6218 are executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the HL register is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL,0". Even in this case, it is possible to restore the state of the HL register to the state immediately before the management execution process, which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, was executed.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which the process to clear the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the twentieth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the twentieth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the twentieth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6301 to step S6323 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), interrupt prohibition is set (step S6301). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described below), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

After that, as "PUSH AF", a push command is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63. The data is saved to each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6302). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. will be evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the A register information and flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6302 are overwritten in the HL register of the master CPU 63 by the pop command "POP HL" (step S6303). In this case, the A register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the master CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the master CPU 63. The H register and L register of the master CPU 63 each have an information volume of 8 bits (1 byte). When the pop command is executed, the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two memory areas back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD A,0" (step S6304). Then, as "LD L, A", the information in the A register of the main side CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S6305), and as "LD H, A", by the load instruction, The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6306). Since the A register was cleared to "0" in step S6304, by overwriting the information in the A register to each of the L and H registers, each of the L and H registers is cleared to "0". becomes.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6307). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the H register and the information in the L register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the BC register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD BC, 0" (step S6308). The DE register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD DE, 0" (step S6309). The IX register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD IX, 0" (step S6310). The IY register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load command as "LD IY, 0" (step S6311).

In addition to the flag register, the registers of the main CPU 63 include various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S6308 to S6311, the BC register, DE register, IX register, and IY register, which are some of these various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, are cleared to "0". Furthermore, the HL register is cleared to "0" in steps S6305 and S6306. These BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in management execution processing (step S6313), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control. By clearing such registers to "0" prior to execution of the management execution process (step S6313), which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, the state of these registers can be changed before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. In addition, it is possible to create a state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

In addition, each information of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started is used for specific control after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is finished. This information is unnecessary in the corresponding process. Therefore, even if the information in these registers is cleared to "0" without being saved, no problem will occur in the process corresponding to the specific control that is returned after the process corresponding to the non-specific control is completed.

Thereafter, as "POP AF", the information in the H register and the information in the L register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6307, are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction ( Step S6312). In this case, the information in the H register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is used as the flag of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. Since the information in the H register and the information in the L register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all "0" information, the A register of the main CPU 63 is At the same time, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". This makes it possible to set the state of the flag register to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, before the process corresponding to non-specific control is started. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the non-specific control program, the management execution process is started (step S6313). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

After the check process is completed in the management execution process, the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are cleared to "0." This clears these registers to "0" prior to returning from processing corresponding to non-specific control to processing corresponding to specific control, making it possible to set the state of these registers to the state they are in immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins before returning to processing corresponding to specific control.

When returning to the management processing program after the management execution process is executed, a process is executed to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0". In detail, first, a push command "PUSH HL" is issued to save the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6314). After the push command is executed, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the next memory area in the write order relative to the memory area in which the information in the HL register was saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, as "PUSH AF", a push command is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63. The storage area and the storage area are saved to each of the storage areas in the next writing order (step S6315). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the HL register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten with the information of the A register and the information of the flag register, which were saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6315, by a pop instruction (step S6316). . In this case, the information in the A register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63, and the information in the flag register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the main CPU 63. The register will be overwritten. The H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the A register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD A,0" (step S6317). Then, as "LD L, A", the information in the A register of the main side CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the main side CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S6318), and as "LD H, A", by the load instruction, The information in the A register of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the H register of the main CPU 63 (step S6319). Since the A register was cleared to "0" in step S6317, by overwriting the information in the A register to each of the L and H registers, each of the L and H registers is cleared to "0". becomes.

After that, the push command "PUSH HL" is used to save the information in the HL register (i.e., the H register and L register) of the master CPU 63 to the memory area in the stack area 222 for specific control that corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 and to the memory area in the next write order for that memory area (step S6320). Since the H register and L register of the master CPU 63 each have an information volume of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the H register and the information in the L register are saved separately to two memory areas with consecutive addresses. Note that when the above push command is executed, the information in the stack pointer of the master CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, as a "POP AF", the H register information and L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6320 are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the master CPU 63 by a pop command (step S6321). In this case, the H register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the master CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the flag register of the master CPU 63. Since the H register information and L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control are all "0" information, the A register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0" by the processing of step S6321, and the flag register of the master CPU 63 is cleared to "0". By clearing the flag register to "0" after the management execution process (step S6313), which is a process corresponding to non-specific control, is executed, the state of the flag register can be set to the state immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. When the above pop command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information of the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the pop command "POP HL" (step S6322). Note that since the HL register is cleared to "0" immediately before the management execution process (step S6313) ends, the information cleared to "0" is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6314, and the information cleared to "0" is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 in step S6322, so that the HL register of the main CPU 63 is cleared to "0". Also, when the pop command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S6323). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" without executing the process of clearing a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" by a load instruction. becomes. This makes it possible to clear the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" even in a configuration where clearing to "0" of a predetermined storage area in the stack area 222 for specific control is restricted by a load instruction. becomes possible.

Instead of clearing the flag register to "0", the flag register may be initialized. In other words, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the flag register of the main CPU 63 is once cleared to "0" and then information is set to the initial state, but the flag register may be set to this initial state in steps S6302 to S6307 and S6312. In this case, by configuring the flag register to be set to the above-mentioned initial state in steps S6314 to S6322 as well, when returning to processing corresponding to specific control, it is possible to return the state of the flag register to the state immediately before processing corresponding to non-specific control was started.

In addition, instead of clearing the flag register of the main CPU 63 to "0" in steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312, all of the flag registers may be set to "1". In this case, by also setting all of the flag registers to "1" in steps S6314 to S6322, when returning to processing corresponding to specific control, it is possible to restore the state of the flag register to the state it was in immediately before processing corresponding to non-specific control was started.

The processing of steps S6302 and S6303 may also be omitted. In this case, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the processes in step S6315 and step S6316 are not executed. In this case, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Also, instead of the configuration that executes the processing from step S6302 to step S6306, the HL register is cleared to "0" by a load instruction as "LD HL, 0", and then the HL register cleared to "0" is cleared by a push instruction. The flag register of the main CPU 63 may be cleared to "0" by saving the information to the stack area 222 for specific control and then returning the saved information to the AF register using a pop instruction.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of clearing the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which the process to clear the flag register to "0" is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing management processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step S6401 to step S6416 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6401). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and started in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

After that, as "PUSH WA", the information in the WA register (i.e., W register and A register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6402). Since the amount of information in the W register and A register of the main CPU 63 is 8 bits (1 byte) each, the information in the W register and A register is saved individually to two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Ru. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information in the flag register of the master CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the master CPU 63 by a load command as "LD A, PSW" (step S6403). In this case, the amount of information in both the flag register and the A register is 8 bits (1 byte). Then, the information in the A register of the master CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load command as "LD (_FGBUF), A" (step S6404). Since the A register has been overwritten with the information in the flag register in step S6403, the execution of step S6404 results in the information in the flag register being saved in the work area 221 for specific control.

After that, the information of the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6402 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP WA" (step S6405). As a result, even if the A register is used to save the information of the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to restore the state of the A register to the state before the save. Note that when the pop command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control is read out, thereby starting the management execution process (step S6406). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the management execution process is executed is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop command, and the program for the management process indicated by the return address is returned to.

Note that the processing contents of the management execution process are the same as the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the fifteenth embodiment. Therefore, before the check process is started in the management execution process, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control. At the same time, after the check process is completed in the management execution process, each piece of information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is stored in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. will be reinstated. This makes it possible to keep the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 in the same state before and after the check process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and may be the same as the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. (FIG. 79), or may be the same configuration as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

When returning to the program for management processing after execution of the management execution processing, processing is executed to return the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the management execution processing was executed. In detail, first, the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control using a push command as "PUSH HL" (step S6407). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the HL register was saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command as "PUSH WA" (step S6408). After execution of the push instruction, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is changed to the information corresponding to the storage area of the next write order in the storage area where the information of the WA register has been saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Become.

Thereafter, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD HL, SP" (step S6409). In this case, the amount of information in the stack pointer is 16 bits, and the amount of information in each of the H register and L register is 8 bits, so 8 bits of information consecutive from the upper side of the stack pointer are stored in the H register. The L register is overwritten with consecutive 8 bits of information from the lower side of the stack pointer.

Thereafter, as "LD A, (_FGBUF)", the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6406 is overwritten in the A register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction (step S6410). Then, as "LD (HL), A", a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the stack pointer information stored in the HL register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is stored on the main side by a load instruction. The information in the A register of the CPU 63 is stored (step S6411). As a result, the information in the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address of the storage area to be written next in the stack area 222 for specific control by the load command as "LD SP, SP-1" (step S6412). When the stack area 222 for specific control is used, the information to be stored is stored from the storage area of the last address in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the storage destination storage area is changed toward the first address side in the stack area 222 for specific control each time information to be stored is added. Therefore, in step S6412, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information of the address corresponding to the storage area with one address smaller in the stack area 222 for specific control. By executing the process of step S6412, the next storage area is set as the storage target of information by the next push command with respect to the storage area where the information of the A register was saved in step S6411, and the storage area where the information of the A register was saved in step S6411 is set as the target for reading information by the next pop command.

Then, as "POP PSW", information is read from the previous memory area in the write order for the memory area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by the pop command, and the read information is overwritten in the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S6413). The information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 immediately before the pop command of step S6413 is information corresponding to the memory area in the next write order for the memory area in which the information of the A register was saved in step S6411. Therefore, the memory area in the previous write order for the memory area corresponding to the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control is the memory area in which the information of the A register was saved in step S6411. Then, by overwriting the information read from this memory area in the flag register of the main CPU 63, the information of the flag register saved in the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control in step S6404 is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63. When the pop command is executed, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the previous memory area in the specific control stack area 222.

Thereafter, as "POP WA", the information in the WA register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6408 is restored to the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6414). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control. Furthermore, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6407 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6415). Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which generation is permitted (step S6416). This enables new execution of timer interrupt processing.

According to the above configuration, when processing corresponding to non-specific control is started from a state in which processing corresponding to specific control is being executed, it is possible to save the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the work area 221 for specific control instead of the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when processing corresponding to specific control is returned to from a state in which processing corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, the information in the flag register saved in the work area 221 for specific control is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63. As a result, since it is only necessary to restore information to the flag register of the main CPU 63 from the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control specified in the program without referring to the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63, it is possible to restore information to the flag register of the main CPU 63 even if the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is rewritten due to noise or the like.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the process of saving the flag register information to the main RAM 65 is executed by a process corresponding to a specific control, it may be configured to be executed by a process corresponding to a non-specific control.In addition, instead of a configuration in which the process of restoring the flag register information saved to the main RAM 65 to the flag register of the main CPU 63 is executed by a process corresponding to a specific control, it may be configured to be executed by a process corresponding to a non-specific control.

<Twenty-ninth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the management process is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 99 is a flowchart showing the management process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S6501 to S6519 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) (step S6501). This prevents the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69), which is a process that corresponds to specific control, from being interrupted and activated in the middle of the management execution process, which will be described later, which is a process that corresponds to non-specific control. becomes possible.

After that, as "PUSH HL", the information in the HL register (i.e., H register and L register) of the main CPU 63 is made to correspond to the information of the current stack pointer of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. The data is saved in each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6502). Since the H register and L register of the main CPU 63 each have an information amount of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the H register and L register is saved individually to two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Ru. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, which corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. The area and the storage area in the next writing order are saved (step S6503). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. Evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the storage area that is two storage areas later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the A register information and flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6503 are overwritten in the HL register of the master CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP HL" (step S6504). In this case, the A register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the master CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the master CPU 63. Note that when the pop command is executed, the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two memory areas back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information in the L register of the master CPU 63 is overwritten in the A register of the master CPU 63 by a load command as "LD A, L" (step S6505). Since the information in the flag register of the master CPU 63 has been overwritten in the L register in step S6504, the information in the L register is overwritten in the A register, and the information in the flag register is overwritten in the A register. Then, the information in the A register of the master CPU 63 is saved in the FG buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control by a load command as "LD (_FGBUF), A" (step S6506). Since the information in the flag register has been overwritten in the A register in step S6505, the information in the flag register is saved in the work area 221 for specific control by executing step S6506.

After that, the push command "PUSH HL" is used to save the information in the HL register (i.e., the H register and L register) of the master CPU 63 to the memory area in the stack area 222 for specific control that corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 and to the memory area in the next write order for that memory area (step S6507). In this case, since the A register information and flag register information have been overwritten in the HL register in step S6504, in step S6507 the A register information and flag register information are saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. When the push command is executed, the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places later in the write order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, as "POP AF", the H register information and L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6507 are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the master CPU 63 by a pop command (step S6508). In this case, the H register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the master CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the flag register of the master CPU 63. The H register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the A register information at the time of step S6503, and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag register information at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6508, the state of the A register and flag register of the master CPU 63 is restored to the state at the time of step S6503. When the above pop command is executed, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places back in the writing order in the specific control stack area 222.

Thereafter, as "POP HL", the information in the HL register saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6502 is returned to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop instruction (step S6509). As a result, the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 returns to the state at step S6502. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the management execution process is started by reading out a subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control (step S6510). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after the management execution process is executed is written into the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. Then, when the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by a pop command, and the process returns to the program for the management process indicated by the return address.

In addition, in the management execution process, before the check process is started, the information in the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control, and after the check process is completed in the management execution process, the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control is restored to the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to keep the states of the BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63 the same before and after the check process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the management execution process may be the same as the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the seventeenth embodiment, and may be the same as the management execution process in the eighteenth embodiment. (FIG. 79), or may be the same configuration as the management execution process (FIG. 80) in the nineteenth embodiment.

When returning to the management processing program after the management execution process is executed, a process is executed to restore the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the state before the management execution process was executed. In detail, first, a push command "PUSH HL" is used to save the information in the HL register of the main CPU 63 to the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6511). After the push command is executed, the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 becomes information corresponding to the memory area in the next write order in the stack area 222 for specific control relative to the memory area where the information in the HL register was saved.

Thereafter, as "PUSH AF", a push instruction is used to store the information in the A register and the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 in the stack area 222 for specific control, which corresponds to the current stack pointer information of the main CPU 63. The data is saved to each of the storage areas and the storage areas in the next writing order for the storage area (step S6512). Since the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 each have an amount of information of 8 bits (1 byte), the information in the A register and the information in the flag register are separately stored for two storage areas with consecutive addresses. will be evacuated. Note that when the push instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places later in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the A register information and flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6512 are overwritten in the HL register of the master CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP HL" (step S6513). In this case, the A register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the H register of the master CPU 63, and the flag register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the L register of the master CPU 63. Note that when the pop command is executed, the stack pointer information of the master CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503, which was saved in step S6506 to the FG buffer in the work area 221 for specific control, is overwritten in the A register of the master CPU 63 by a load command as "LD A, (_FGBUF)" (step S6514). Then, the information in the A register of the master CPU 63 is overwritten in the L register of the master CPU 63 by a load command as "LD L, A" (step S6515). Since the information in the flag register of the master CPU 63 at the time of step S6503 has been restored to the A register in step S6514, overwriting the information in the A register in the L register results in the L register being overwritten with the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503.

After that, the push command "PUSH HL" is used to save the information in the HL register (i.e., the H register and L register) of the master CPU 63 to the memory area in the specific control stack area 222 corresponding to the information of the current stack pointer of the master CPU 63 and to the memory area in the next write order for that memory area (step S6516). In this case, since the information in the A register at the time of step S6512 has been overwritten in the H register in step S6513, the information in the A register has been saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6516. Also, since the information in the flag register at the time of step S6503 has been overwritten in the L register in step S6515, the information in the flag register has been saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S6516.

After that, the H register information and L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6516 are overwritten in the A register and flag register of the master CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP AF" (step S6517). In this case, the H register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the A register of the master CPU 63, and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is overwritten in the flag register of the master CPU 63. The H register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the A register information at the time of step S6512, and the L register information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is the flag register information at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the state of the A register of the master CPU 63 is restored to the state of step S6512, and the state of the flag register is restored to the state at the time of step S6503.

Incidentally, the A register of the main CPU 63 is not used in the management execution process. Therefore, the state of the A register at the time of step S6512 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6508, and the state of the A register at the time of step S6508 is the state of the A register at the time of step S6503. Therefore, by executing the process of step S6517, the states of the A register and flag register of the main CPU 63 are returned to the states at the time of step S6503. Note that when the pop instruction is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to the information corresponding to the storage area two places earlier in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

After that, the information of the HL register that was saved in the stack area 222 for specific control in step S6511 is restored to the HL register of the main CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP HL" (step S6518). This causes the state of the HL register of the main CPU 63 to return to the state at the time of step S6511. Note that when the pop command is executed, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is updated to information corresponding to the memory area two places back in the writing order in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Then, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 69) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S6519). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

With the above configuration, it is possible to save the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to the work area 221 for specific control by a load command without executing a process that directly overwrites the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 to another register of the main CPU 63.

In addition, instead of executing the processes of steps S6505 to S6508, the process of step S6504 may be executed, and the information in the L register, which has been overwritten with the information in the flag register by a load command as "LD (_FGBUF), L", may be saved to the FG buffer, thereby saving the information in the flag register to the work area 221 for specific control.

In addition, without executing the processing in steps S6514 and S6515, instead, after executing the processing in step S6513, a work area for specific control is created as "LDL, (_FGBUF)" by a load command. The configuration may be such that the information in the flag register saved in 221 is overwritten in the L register.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the process of saving the information in the flag register to the main side RAM 65 is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, a configuration may be adopted in which the process is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. Also, instead of the configuration in which the process of restoring the information of the flag register saved in the main side RAM 65 to the flag register of the main side CPU 63 is executed in the process corresponding to specific control, it is executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control. It may also be configured to be executed.

Thirtieth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the fifteenth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifteenth embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S6601 to S6621 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S6601). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process was started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S6602).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S6603). If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S6603: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6604).

The checksum can be calculated in any way, but for example, a calculation method that adds all the numerical values in the storage area that is the target of the checksum calculation can be used. This checksum calculation method is the same as the checksum calculation method in the power outage processing described later. The checksum calculated in the power outage processing described later will be stored in the work area 221 for specific control, but the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which this checksum is stored is for calculation of the checksum. It is excluded from the storage area subject to calculation.

That is, when calculating the checksum, some storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to calculation. In the storage area to be calculated, a checksum is calculated in the power outage processing when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, and then the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed and the process of step S6604 is executed. This storage area is basically a storage area where information is not rewritten if power supply such as backup power is continued to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control until the specific control work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control are continued. Therefore, the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is not changed after the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is restarted. In this case, the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are the same as those immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. Note that the storage area to be calculated when calculating this checksum includes an area where setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, a setting value counter )It is included.

After that, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area for specific control that were calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 was stopped and saved in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for 222 is read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S6604 (step S6605). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step S6606).

Here, the power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 101. The power outage information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) described later.

In the power outage information storage process, first, the repetition counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "10", which is the repetition count information for the power outage signal (step S6701), and the power outage detection counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S6702).

Thereafter, a process of reading information on the power outage signal received at the input port of the MPU 62 is executed (step S6703). In this case, if a power outage signal (LOW level power outage signal) corresponding to the fact that a power outage has not occurred is received, information of "0" is stored in the input port as non-power outage information. When a power outage signal (HI level power outage signal) corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is being received, information of "1" is stored in the input port as power outage occurrence information. In step S6703, a process is executed to read information on the power outage signal into the register of the main CPU 63.

If the information on the power outage signal read in step S6703 corresponds to the occurrence of a power outage (occurrence of power outage) (step S6704: YES), 1 is added to the numerical information of the power outage detection counter (step S6705). If a negative determination is made in step S6704 or if the process in step S6705 is executed, the numerical information of the repetition counter is subtracted by 1 (step S6706). Then, it is determined whether the numerical information of the repetition counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S6707). If a negative determination is made in step S6707, the process returns to step S6703 and repeats the processing of steps S6703 to S6706. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6707, the process advances to step S6708.

In step S6708, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the power outage detection counter is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number of times corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage. If it is less than the trigger reference number of times, the main power outage information storage process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of times is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the power outage processing in steps S6709 to S6712 is executed.

Specifically, first, a power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S6709). As a result, if power outage processing is executed normally and information is stored and retained in the main side RAM 65 normally, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted, the specific control This means that the power outage flag of the work area 221 is set to "1".

Then, a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S6710). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control that are the objects of calculation when calculating the checksum are the same as the storage areas in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control that are the objects of calculation of the checksum in step S6604 of the main processing (FIG. 100). In addition, the storage areas that are the objects of calculation when calculating this checksum include an area in the work area 221 for specific control where information on a setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, a setting value counter). Then, the calculated checksum is stored in a storage area in the work area 221 for specific control for storing the checksum, which is excluded from the objects of calculation of the checksum.

Then, all output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S6711), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S6712). Then, an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

In addition, by executing the power outage information storage process as the first process of the timer interrupt process, it is no longer necessary to execute the timer interrupt process from the middle after power is restored. This eliminates the need to store the address of the process that was being executed when the power outage occurred as stack information in the main RAM 65, making it possible to reduce the processing load when a power outage occurs.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 100), if a negative judgment is made in step S6603 or step S6606, a clear process for non-setting update is executed (step S6607). In the clear process for non-setting update, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area (specifically, the setting value counter) in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the regular power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display section 37a is erased and the reserved information for the regular map display section 38a is erased. In addition, in the clearing process for non-setting updates, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed. In addition, in the clearing process for non-setting updates, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initial settings are performed.

On the other hand, the clearing process during non-setting updates does not clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if the power outage processing was not executed normally and the power outage flag was not set to "1". Also, even if an abnormality occurs with the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, it makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

If a negative judgment is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the clear process for non-update is executed in step S6607, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is judged to be normal or not by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6608). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is any of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is judged to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is judged to be abnormal. If the setting value is abnormal (step S6608: NO), a process (steps S6619 to S6621) for setting a new setting value, which will be described later, is executed. This makes it possible to monitor whether the setting value is normal or not even if a negative judgment is made in step S6603 or step S6606 and the clear process for non-update (step S6607) is executed, and to reset the setting value if it is abnormal.

If the set value is normal (step S6608: YES), power-on setting processing is executed (step S6609). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the work area 221 for specific control such as initialization of a power outage flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, but timer interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring when main processing is started. This state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited is released when step S6609 is completed and before step S6610 is executed, and timer interrupt processing is permitted to be executed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the power-on setting process of step S6609 is completed, and timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before step S6610 is started. Therefore, processing to progress the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S6610 to S6613. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S6610 to S6613 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processing in steps S6610 to S6613 can be said to be non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S6610 to S6613, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" or the checksum does not match, the clear process for non-setting update is executed, and if the setting value is normal (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to the process for progressing the game. As a result, even if the power failure process was not executed normally and the power failure flag was not set to "1", it is not necessary to turn the power on and off again after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Also, even if an abnormality occurs in the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, it is not necessary to turn the power on and off again after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in both step S6603 and step S6606, it is determined whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal by checking the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control (step S6614 ). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or more, it is determined to be abnormal. It is determined that there is. If the set value is abnormal (step S6614: NO), processing for newly setting the set value (steps S6619 to S6621), which will be described later, is executed.

If the set value is normal (step S6614: YES), it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615), and whether the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key. It is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 (step S6617), and it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 11. It is determined whether there is one (step S6618).

In this embodiment, a front door open sensor 95 for detecting whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63. The detection result of 95 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the main CPU 63, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and when receiving the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a main body open sensor 96 for detecting whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the main CPU 63. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closed detection signal to the main CPU 63, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the main CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives a closed detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state, and when it receives an open detection signal from the main body open sensor 96, it determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state.

If the reset button 68c has not been pressed (step S6615: NO), the power-on setting process is executed in step S6609, and the remaining processes in steps S6610 to S6613 are repeated. In other words, if the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the process proceeds to control the progress of the game without executing the process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES) and a negative judgment is made in any of steps S6616 to S6618, the process executes a clear process for when settings are not updated (step S6607), and then, on the condition that the setting values are normal (step S6608: YES), the process proceeds to a process for controlling the progress of the game in steps S6609 and onward. The details of the clear process for when settings are not updated have already been explained.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S6615: YES) and all of steps S6616 to S6618 are answered in the affirmative, processing for updating the set value is executed. Further, even if it is determined in step S6608 or step S6614 that the set value is abnormal, processing for updating the set value is executed.

Specifically, first, a copy process of the setting values is executed (step S6619). In this copy process, the information of the setting value counter used to identify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. As a result, even if the information of the setting value counter is cleared to "0" in the clear process (step S6620) executed afterwards when the setting value is updated, it is possible to know the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the clear process (i.e., the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped) when the setting value was updated.

Thereafter, a clearing process when updating settings is executed (step S6620). In the clearing process when updating the settings, the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0", except for the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode in the work area 221 for specific control is the high probability mode and the above-mentioned copy area. ” and perform the initial settings. As a result, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. A certain situation arises. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the clearing process when updating settings, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the clearing process when updating the settings, a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the clearing process when updating settings, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0".

On the other hand, the clearing process when the settings are updated does not clear to "0" the area indicating whether the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode, so even if the setting value update process (step S6621) is executed, the win/lose lottery mode can be maintained in the mode before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 was stopped. Also, the clearing process when the settings are updated does not clear the copy area to "0", so it is possible to identify the setting value that was set before the clearing process when the settings were updated. Note that this is not limited to the above configuration, and the clearing process when the settings are updated may be configured not to clear to "0" the setting value counter used to identify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, and the clearing process when the settings are updated may be configured to clear to "0" the area indicating whether the win/lose lottery mode is a high probability mode.

The clearing process during setting updates does not clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0." This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" even if a setting value update process that can change the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

Thereafter, setting value update processing is executed in step S6621. The contents of the setting value update process are the same as the setting value update process (FIG. 85) in the twenty-second embodiment. After executing the setting value update process, the process moves to the process for controlling the progress of the game starting from step S6609.

According to the above configuration, if the setting value is abnormal, the setting value update process is started without requiring any special operation by the amusement hall manager. Then, when the setting value update process is completed, the process moves to a process for controlling the progress of the game. This makes it possible to play in a situation where the setting value is set to the normal setting. On the other hand, since the setting key insertion section 68a must be turned OFF using the setting key to complete the setting value update process, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an incident in which the setting value is arbitrarily set by someone other than the amusement hall manager and game play is started.

Next, a configuration for forcibly stopping the progress of the game when the main CPU 63 is unable to perform various processes normally will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the MPU 62.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), the MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, and a main RAM 65, as well as a reset signal output section 251 and a program monitoring section 252. The reset signal output section 251 has a function of outputting a reset signal to the main CPU 63. Specifically, the reset signal output unit 251 outputs the reset signal to the main side as a HI level signal when operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78 and the output disabling condition is not satisfied. A reset signal is output to the CPU 63, and a reset signal is output to the main CPU 63 when operating power is not supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78, or when an output disable condition is satisfied even when operating power is supplied. Do not output to . The main CPU 63 executes various processes when operating power is supplied from the power source/launch control device 78 and receives a reset signal from the reset signal output section 251, and Even if operating power is being supplied, various processes are not executed if a reset signal is not received from the reset signal output section 251. Furthermore, when the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power from the power supply/launch control device 78 and switches from not receiving a reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 to receiving a reset signal, The main process (FIG. 100) is started.

The program monitoring unit 252 has a function of monitoring whether or not the main CPU 63 is in a state where various processes can be performed normally. Specifically, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter provided in the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value. The program counter is for storing an address where an instruction to be executed by the main CPU 63 is stored. The possible values of the program counter are determined, and the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the value of the program counter is a value other than the possible values. Furthermore, when writing information to the specific control work area 221 by a load command, the program monitoring unit 252 monitors whether the address specified as the write destination area is an abnormal address. Note that the program monitoring unit 252 may be configured to monitor whether or not the address specified as the area to be read is an abnormal address when information is read from the specific control work area 221 by a load command.

When the program monitoring section 252 determines that the value of the program counter is an abnormal value or when determining that the address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output section 251 Outputs a monitoring abnormality signal. When the reset signal output unit 251 receives a monitoring abnormality signal from the program monitoring unit 252, it temporarily stops outputting the reset signal and continues the stop even if operating power is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 78. After stopping the output of the reset signal for a period, the output of the reset signal is restarted. The stop duration period is a period sufficient for the main CPU 63 to identify that the output of the reset signal is stopped. As a result, if the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value, or if the address specified when writing information by a load instruction becomes an abnormal address, the main CPU 63 The main processing will be executed.

Figure 102(b) is a time chart showing the output of a reset signal by the reset signal output unit 251. Figure 102(b1) shows the period during which operating power is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 78, Figure 102(b2) shows the period during which a reset signal is output from the reset signal output unit 251, and Figure 102(b3) shows the timing at which a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252.

First, to explain the case where a monitoring abnormality signal is not output from the program monitoring unit 252, the supply of operating power from the power source/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 102 (b1). , t2, the reset signal output section 251 starts outputting the reset signal as shown in FIG. 102(b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102(b1) at timing t3, the supply of operating power from the power source/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, and the reset is performed as shown in FIG. 102(b2) at timing t4. The output of the reset signal from the signal output section 251 is stopped.

Next, a case where a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 will be explained. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 102(b1), the power supply and launch control device 78 starts supplying operating power to the MPU 62, and at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 102(b), the reset signal output unit 251 starts outputting a reset signal. Then, at timing t7, the program counter value becomes abnormal, or the address specified when writing information by a load command becomes abnormal, and as shown in FIG. 102(b3), a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 to the reset signal output unit 251. As a result, as shown in FIG. 102(b2), the output of the reset signal from the reset signal output unit 251 is temporarily stopped at timing t7, and then resumed at timing t8.

In this case, the main CPU 63 stops executing various processes at timing t7, and starts main processing (FIG. 100) at timing t8, which is the timing at which the rise of the reset signal is confirmed. However, since the power outage process is not executed when the execution of various processes of the main CPU 63 is stopped, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1". At the same time, the main processing (FIG. 100) is started without saving the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. Therefore, in the main processing (FIG. 100), a negative determination is made in step S6603 or step S6606, and a clearing process (step S6607) at the time of non-setting update is executed. As a result, when a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by a load command becomes an abnormal address, It becomes possible to perform a clearing process at the time of non-setting update, in which a predetermined storage area of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". .

However, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". As a result, even if a monitoring abnormality signal is output from the program monitoring unit 252 because the value of the program counter becomes an abnormal value or the address specified when writing information by a load command becomes an abnormal address, it will not occur. It is possible to prevent the work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 102(b), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102(b1) at timing t9, the supply of operating power from the power source/launch control device 78 to the MPU 62 is stopped, and at timing t10. As shown in FIG. 102(b2), output of the reset signal from the reset signal output section 251 is stopped.

Next, the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 103. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) while the processes of steps S6610 to S6613 are being executed in the main process (FIG. 100). Note that the program corresponding to timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

Steps S6801 to S6819 are the same as steps S5201 to S5219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 86) in the 22nd embodiment. These processes are executed in the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control. Then, setting monitoring processing is executed (step S6820). FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring processing.

The setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is checked to determine whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal or not (step S6901). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or greater, it is determined to be abnormal.

If the set value is abnormal (step S6901: NO), a copy process of the set value is executed (step S6902). In the copy process, information of a setting value counter used to specify the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the work area 221 for specific control is stored in a copy area provided in the work area 221 for specific control. . Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 before execution of the setting value update process to be executed thereafter.

Then, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the set value is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step S6903). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound and light emission control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality in the set value, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying "An abnormality in the set value has been detected." In addition, the pattern display device 41 is made to display a text image saying "An abnormality in the set value has been detected." These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, this is not limited to this, and the above notification may be terminated when an operation to terminate the notification is performed by the manager of the game hall. For example, the update button 68b may be pressed as the notification termination operation, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can grasp that an abnormality in the set value has occurred.

Then, the setting value update process is executed (step S6904). That is, each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 103) is executed, whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value is monitored, and if an abnormality in the setting value is identified, the setting value update process is executed to reset the setting value of the pachinko machine 10. The processing content of the setting value update process is the same as the setting value update process (Fig. 85) in the 22nd embodiment. Therefore, each time the update button 68b is pressed once, the setting value is updated by one step, and the selected setting value is confirmed by detecting a game ball with the outlet detection sensor 48a. The setting value being updated and the confirmed setting value are displayed on the third notification display device 69c. Then, if the setting key insertion section 68a is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the end condition of the setting value update process is satisfied. After the setting value update process is executed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (Fig. 103).

In the setting value update process, the termination condition is not determined to be met simply because the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state; the termination condition is determined to be met when the setting key insertion unit 68a switches from the ON state to the OFF state. When the setting value update process is executed in the setting monitoring process, the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state at the start of the setting value update process, so in order to satisfy the termination condition of the setting value update process, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion unit 68a and turn it ON once, and then turn it OFF. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value update process from terminating even if the proper operation has not been performed by the amusement hall manager.

When the setting key insertion section 68a switches from ON to OFF and the end condition of the setting value update process is satisfied, step S5111 in the setting value update process (FIG. 85) is executed to compare whether the setting value stored in the copy area in the work area 221 for specific control is the same as the setting value currently set in the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control. In other words, it is determined whether the setting value that was set before the setting value update process (step S6904) is executed is the same as the setting value set in the current setting value update process. If the two setting values are the same (step S5112: NO), the non-change notification process (step S5113) is executed to perform the setting maintenance notification already described. On the other hand, if the two setting values are different (step S5112: YES), the change notification process (step S5114) is executed to perform the setting change notification already described.

In a configuration in which a setting value update process is executed when a setting value abnormality occurs, a setting maintenance notification is issued if the setting value set before the setting value update process is executed is the same as the setting value set in the setting value update process. As a result, even if the setting value update process is executed due to a setting value abnormality, the setting maintenance notification is issued by resetting the setting value set in the previous situation, making it possible to clearly inform the player that the setting value has not changed even if the setting value update process is executed due to a setting value abnormality. Incidentally, since it is common for game halls to record the setting values of each pachinko machine 10 installed, it is possible to execute the setting value update process due to a setting value abnormality so that the recorded setting value is used.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103), after the setting monitoring process is executed in step S6820, the management process is executed in step S6821. When executing management processing, the subroutine program corresponding to the management processing set in the specific control program will be executed. Information for specifying the return address of the timer interrupt processing in is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push instruction. When the management process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the timer interrupt process indicated by the return address.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the management process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S7001 to S7005 in the management process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103), interrupt prohibition is set (step S7001). This makes it possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103), which is processing corresponding to specific control, from interrupting and being started in the middle of the management execution processing (described later), which is processing corresponding to non-specific control.

Then, the load command "LD (_PSWBUF), PSW" is used to save the flag register information of the main CPU 63 to the PSW buffer set in the work area 221 for specific control (step S7002). The flag register includes a carry flag, zero flag, P/V flag, sign flag, and half carry flag, and the flag register information changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of the subroutine corresponding to the management execution process is started, it is possible to save the flag register information in the state before it changes after the subroutine is called or started in the work area 221 for specific control.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the management execution process set in the program for non-specific control, the management execution process is started (step S7003). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the management process after execution of the management execution process is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. When the management execution process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the management process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the management processing program after executing the management execution processing, it is saved as "LD PSW, (_PSWBUF)" to the PSW buffer in the specific control work area 221 in step S7002 by a load instruction. The information in the flag register is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7004). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7002 was executed last time. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

After that, the interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 103) is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S7005). This allows a new execution of the timer interrupt processing.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the management execution process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S7101 to S7116 in the management execution process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps S7101 to S7108 and steps S7110 to S7116 execute the same processing as steps S4501 to S4515 of the management execution process (FIG. 78) in the 17th embodiment. In addition, step S7109 executes another monitoring process. When the other monitoring process is executed, a subroutine program corresponding to the other monitoring process set in the program for non-specific control is executed, and when the subroutine program is executed, information for specifying the return address of the management execution process after the execution of the other monitoring process is written to the stack area 224 for non-specific control by a push command. Then, when the other monitoring process is completed, information for specifying the return address is read by a pop command, and the program returns to the management execution process program indicated by the return address.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing another monitoring process. Note that the processes from step S7201 to step S7206 in the separate monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

In the separate monitoring process, it is determined whether the value of the pointer indicating the processing position of the process being executed in the non-specific control program exceeds the normal numerical range (step S7201). In addition, the information stored in the normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and high-frequency support mode counter area 233 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control has clearly become abnormal information. It is determined whether or not (step S7202). For example, if the value of the normal out counter 231e in the normal counter area 231 is "0" but the value of the normal general win counter 231a is 1000 or more, it is determined that there is an abnormality. Furthermore, it is determined whether the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is clearly abnormal information (step S7203). For example, if any of the 62nd to 64th parameters is not "0" even though the 61st parameter is "0", it is determined to be abnormal.

If a positive judgment is made in any of steps S7201 to S7203, it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and a partial clear process for the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7204). In the partial clear process, all storage areas in the work area 223 for non-specific control other than the management start flag are cleared to "0". In this case, the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, the counter area 233 for high frequency support mode, and the calculation result storage area 234 are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to resolve the information abnormality in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Furthermore, by not clearing the management start flag to "0", it is possible to maintain the state in which the management start flag is already set to "1", and the pachinko machine 10 has already been used in the game hall. It is possible to prevent restrictions on the collection of history information from being imposed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 even though the pachinko machine 10 is in use. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire non-specific control work area 223 including the management start flag may be cleared to "0" in step S7204.

Furthermore, in step S7204, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0". In the stack area 224 for non-specific control, information of various registers used in the process corresponding to specific control in steps S7102 to S7107 in the management execution process (FIG. 106) is saved. In this case, by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0", information on various registers used in processing corresponding to this specific control can be stored in the stack area 224 for non-specific control. This makes it possible to prevent the information saved in H.224 from being deleted. In addition, the stack area 224 for non-specific control stores information on the return address of the management execution process (FIG. 106) after the end of another monitoring process, but the stack area 224 for non-specific control is stored as "0". ” By not clearing the return address information, it is possible to prevent the return address information from being erased.

After that, the initial setting process is executed (step S7205). In the initial setting process, initial settings are made to the memory areas in the non-specific control work area 223 that were cleared to "0" in step S7204.

After that, clear notification processing is executed (step S7206). In the clear notification process, a command indicating that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been cleared to "0" is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. By receiving the command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the forced clearing of the work area 223 for non-specific control, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying "History information has been forcibly cleared." Outputs a voice saying “I have done this.” Further, a character image "History information has been forcibly cleared." is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned notification may be terminated when the notification termination operation is performed by the administrator of the game hall. As the notification end operation, for example, the update button 68b may be pressed, or the reset button 68c may be pressed. By confirming the above notification, the manager of the game hall can understand that the work area 223 for non-specific control has been forcibly cleared.

If a negative determination is made in all steps S7201 to S7203, or if the process in step S7206 is executed, the separate monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the monitoring execution process (FIG. 106).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

If the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the address specified when writing information by a load instruction is an abnormal address, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, thereby causing the main CPU 63 to Then, the main process (FIG. 100) is executed in the same way as when the supply of operating power is newly started. If the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of power outage is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since the setting has not been updated, the clearing process for non-setting update (step S6607) is forcibly executed. In the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the storage areas other than the storage area where the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0". 0'' is cleared, and the initial setting process for these areas is further executed. As a result, if there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control or the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control On the other hand, by executing the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process, it is possible to eliminate the information abnormality.

When the program monitoring unit 252 identifies that the program counter value of the main CPU 63 is an abnormal value, the reset signal output unit 251 turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, and the main CPU 63 executes the main processing (FIG. 100) in the same manner as when the supply of operating power is newly started. When the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON, the power failure flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" and the checksum at the time of the power failure is not stored in the work area 221 for specific control, so that the clear processing at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is forcibly executed. In the clear processing at the time of non-setting update, the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, including various registers, is cleared to "0" and an initial setting process is executed. As a result, when there is a possibility that an information abnormality has occurred in the internal storage area of the main CPU 63, the information abnormality can be eliminated by clearing the internal storage area of the main CPU 63 to "0" and executing the initial setting process.

On the other hand, the clearing process during non-setting updates does not clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the information on the game history from being erased and to prevent the information on the management results of the game history from being erased even when an information anomaly is identified by the program monitoring unit 252 as described above and the internal memory area of the main CPU 63, the work area 221 for specific control, and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0" and an initial setting process is executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main process (Fig. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or if the checksums do not match, clear when updating non-settings. In the configuration in which the process (step S6607) is executed, if the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality, the reset signal is turned from OFF to ON to ensure that the power outage flag is not set to "1". At the same time, the main processing (FIG. 100) is executed in a situation where no checksum is stored. This makes it possible to eliminate the information abnormality identified by the program monitoring unit 252 by using the configuration for resolving the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power.

In a configuration in which whether or not the checksum is normal is monitored in the main processing (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the target for calculating the checksum is A work area 221 for specific control and a stack area 222 for specific control are included, and a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included. This makes it possible to specify whether or not an information abnormality has occurred only in the storage area corresponding to the specific control in the main side RAM 65.

If it is identified that the checksum is abnormal in the main process (FIG. 100) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the clear process at the time of non-setting update (step S6607) is executed. However, in the clearing process at the time of non-setting update, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0" and initial setting processing is executed. On the other hand, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0". This prevents the processing corresponding to specific control from continuing to be executed in the same state even though an information error has occurred in the specific control work area 221 and specific control stack area 222. At the same time, when an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, even the storage area corresponding to non-specific control in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0". It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the power outage processing (steps S6709 to S6712) of the power outage information storage processing (Figure 101), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but a checksum is not calculated for the storage area corresponding to non-specific control in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to prevent the processing period required to complete the power outage processing from becoming excessively long.

When an abnormality is identified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in another monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" in the other monitoring process (FIG. 107) which is the process corresponding to non-specific control, and an initial setting process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the process corresponding to non-specific control from being executed in a state where the information in the work area 223 for non-specific control is retained as it is, even if some abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control. In addition, since the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initial setting are executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the process corresponding to specific control from being involved in updating the information in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

In another monitoring process (FIG. 107) corresponding to non-specific control, monitoring is performed to see if an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and if an abnormality has occurred, a process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and a process of initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control are performed. This makes it possible to monitor whether an abnormality has occurred in the work area 223 for non-specific control and to initialize the work area 223 for non-specific control as a series of processes in the process corresponding to non-specific control.

If the occurrence of an abnormality is identified in the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) executed in the process corresponding to non-specific control, the Although the work area 223 is cleared to "0" and initialized, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" and initialized. This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control, while also managing the information of various registers used in processes corresponding to specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and separately managing the information. It is possible to prevent the return address information from being deleted after the processing is completed.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and initializing them is executed by the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and initializing them is executed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible for such initialization processes to be treated as the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control as dedicated memory areas for the process corresponding to the specific control, and for the work area 223 for non-specific control as dedicated memory areas for the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Note that the main process (FIG. 100) is configured to monitor whether or not the set values are normal in steps S6608 and S6614, but the process of monitoring whether or not these set values are normal is not necessary. It may be configured so that it is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power, which is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In addition, even if the set value is not monitored to see if it is normal in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, the timer interrupt executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. Since the setting monitoring process (step S6820) of the process (FIG. 103) monitors whether the set value is normal or not, it is possible to deal with it if the set value is abnormal.

Furthermore, the configuration monitoring process (step S6820) is not limited to a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 103) is started. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed every time the process is executed a number of times (for example, 10,000 times). In this case, it is possible to periodically monitor whether or not the set value is normal, while reducing the frequency with which the monitoring is performed.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed in the remaining process (steps S6610 to S6613) in the main process (FIG. 100). In this case, it becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is normal by using idle time in a situation where timer interrupt processing is not being executed.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting monitoring process (step S6820) is executed when a new gaming session is started. More specifically, when a game round is newly started, the setting monitoring process (step S6820) may be executed before the validity determination process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the validity determination process from being executed in a situation where the set value is abnormal.

In addition, when the setting value is identified as abnormal in the setting monitoring process (step S6820), instead of proceeding to the setting value update process (step S6904), the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control may be set to "1". In this case, since the processes of steps S6808 to S6821 are not executed by making a positive judgment in step S6807 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 103), the progress of the game is stopped if the setting value is abnormal. However, since the processes of steps S6801 to S6806 are executed, power outage monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further, fraud detection is executed. In addition, when the game stop flag is set to "1", a notification indicating that the setting value should be updated may be executed to prompt the execution of the setting value update process. In this case, the manager of the gaming hall who has confirmed the notification can turn the power OFF and then turn the power ON in a manner that executes the setting value update process, clearing the game stop flag to "0" and releasing the state in which game progress has been stopped, while also executing the setting value update process and setting the correct setting value.

In addition, if the setting monitoring process (step S6820) identifies an abnormal setting value, the main process (FIG. 100) may be started with the setting abnormality flag set in the work area 221 for specific control set to "1", and the game progress may be stopped with the setting abnormality flag set to "1", and the power must be turned OFF and ON to release the stopped state of the game progress. In this case, even if no operation is performed in the main process (FIG. 100) to execute the setting value update process, by forcibly executing the setting value update process when the setting abnormality flag is set to "1", it is possible to forcibly set a new setting value using the setting value update process set in the main process (FIG. 100).

Also, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality and forcibly turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, an initialization process is executed on the work area 221 for specific control, so that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."Also, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality and forcibly turns the reset signal from OFF to ON, an initialization process is executed on the work area 221 for specific control, and then a setting value update process is executed.

In addition, when the program monitoring unit 252 identifies the occurrence of an information abnormality, the reset signal may not be forcibly turned from OFF to ON, and a clear process (step S6607) may be executed when no setting is updated, or a clear process (step S6620) and a setting value update process (step S6621) may be executed when the setting is updated.

In addition, in the clear process when the setting is not updated (step S6607), the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be "Setting 1" by initializing the memory area that stores information on the setting value in the work area 221 for specific control, or may be configured to be a predetermined setting value other than "Setting 1". This makes it possible to set the setting value to a predetermined value when the clear process when the setting is not updated is executed.

In addition, in the clearing process when updating non-settings (step S6607), the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to "0", but they may be cleared to "0".

In addition, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the management start flag is not cleared to "0", but the management start flag may be cleared to "0". In addition, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0", and the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

Furthermore, in step S7204 in the separate monitoring process (FIG. 107), "0" clearing processing and initial setting processing are executed not only for the work area 223 for non-specific control but also for the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may also be a configuration. In this case, in the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the return address information of the management execution process after the end of another monitoring process and the process corresponding to the specific control saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control are used. It is preferable not to erase the information in the various registers.

The separate monitoring process (FIG. 107) may also be configured to monitor whether an abnormality has occurred in the non-specific control stack area 224, and if an abnormality is identified, to execute a process of clearing the non-specific control stack area 224 to "0" and an initial setting process. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the information on the return address of the management execution process in the non-specific control stack area 224 after the separate monitoring process has ended.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which both the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to checksum calculation, and only the work area 221 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation. Alternatively, only the stack area 222 for specific control may be subject to checksum calculation.

Thirty-first embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 30th embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 30th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 30th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S7301 to S7322 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S7301). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S7302).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S7303). If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S7303: YES), a checksum is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7304). The checksum calculation method is the same as step S6604 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment.

Then, the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control that were calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control during the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped are read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksums are compared with the checksum calculated in step S7304 (step S7305). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S7306).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7306, the processes of steps S7307 to S7320 are executed. In this case, the processing contents of steps S7307 to S7314 are the same as steps S6614 to S6621 of the main processing (FIG. 100) in the thirtieth embodiment, and steps S7316 to S7320 are the same as the main processing in the thirtieth embodiment. This is the same as steps S6609 to S6613 in the process (FIG. 100).

In addition, when the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7308: YES), if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311, a clear process for non-setting update is executed (step S7315). The processing content of the clear process for non-setting update is the same as step S6607 in the main processing (FIG. 100) in the 30th embodiment. However, in this embodiment, after the clear process for non-setting update is executed, the process proceeds to steps S7316 to S7320 without judging whether the setting value is normal or not. The clear process for non-setting update (step S7315) is executed only if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S7309 to S7311. However, since the judgment of whether the setting value is normal or not is made in step S7307 before the processing of steps S7309 to S7311 is executed, it is not necessary to judge whether the setting value is normal or not after the clear process for non-setting update is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7306, that is, if the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" or if a checksum abnormality occurs, clear processing at the time of abnormality is executed. (Step S7321). FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the clearing process in the event of an abnormality. Note that the processing in steps S7401 to S7405 in the abnormality clearing process is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, a clear process is performed on the work area 221 for specific control (step S7401). In this clear process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (specifically, the setting value counter), and the initial setting is performed on the area cleared to "0". As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is a high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes a low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner, and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the normal power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display unit 37a is erased and the reserved information for the normal map display unit 38a is erased.

Thereafter, clearing processing of the stack area 222 for specific control is executed (step S7402). In the clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed.

After that, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" (step S7403). The flag register includes a carry flag, zero flag, P/V flag, sign flag, and half carry flag, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the program of a subroutine corresponding to a clear process for non-specific control is started, it becomes possible to save the information in the flag register in the state before it changes after the call of the subroutine or the start of the subroutine in the stack area 222 for specific control. The amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Thereafter, by reading the subroutine program corresponding to the clearing process for non-specific control set in the program for non-specific control, the clearing process for the non-specific control is started (step S7404). In this case, information for specifying the return address of the clearing process in the event of an abnormality after the execution of the clearing process for non-specific control is written to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command. When the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, information for specifying the return address is read out by the pop instruction, and the program returns to the abnormality clearing process indicated by the return address.

When returning to the program for the abnormality clear process after the execution of the non-specific control clear process, the flag register information saved in the specific control stack area 222 in step S7402 is restored to the flag register of the main CPU 63 by a pop command as "POP PSW" (step S7405). This causes the flag register information of the main CPU 63 to return to the information at the time step S7402 was executed. In other words, the flag register information of the main CPU 63 returns to the information for executing specific control.

Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the clearing process for non-specific control. Note that the processes in steps S7501 to S7516 in the clearing process for non-specific control are executed in the main CPU 63 using the program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

First, a load command is used to set "LD SP, Y(u+2)" to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as a fixed address at the start of non-specific control, Y(u+2) (step S7501). In this case, the information of the last address in the stack area 224 for non-specific control is set to the stack pointer, similar to step S3901 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the 15th embodiment.

Thereafter, the information in the WA register of the master CPU 63 is saved to the WA buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_WABUF), WA" (step S7502). Also, the information in the BC register of the master CPU 63 is saved to the BC buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control by a load command as "LD (_BCBUF), BC" (step S7503). Also,
The load command is "LD (_DEBUF), DE" to save the information in the DE register of the master CPU 63 to the DE buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7504). The load command is "LD (_HLBUF), HL" to save the information in the HL register of the master CPU 63 to the HL buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7505). The load command is "LD (_IXBUF), IX" to save the information in the IX register of the master CPU 63 to the IX buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7506). The load command is "LD (_IYBUF), IY" to save the information in the IY register of the master CPU 63 to the IY buffer set in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step S7507).

In addition to the flag register already described, the main CPU 63 also contains various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers. In this case, in steps S7502 to S7507, the information of some of these general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers, namely the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, is saved to the corresponding buffer in the non-specific control work area 223. Note that the amount of information in the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register is all 2 bytes.

The WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register are registers used in the partial clearing process (step S7508) and initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, which are processes corresponding to non-specific control. By saving the information set in such registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control prior to the partial clearing process (step S7508) and initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to save the information of these registers used during specific control before the non-specific control is started. Therefore, even if these registers are overwritten during non-specific control, by restoring the information saved in the work area 223 for non-specific control to these registers when the non-specific control is terminated, it is possible to restore the state of these registers to the state corresponding to the specific control before the non-specific control is executed.

In addition, instead of saving all the information of the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers to the work area 223 for non-specific control, the information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register to be used in the partial clearing process (step S7508) and initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control, which are processes corresponding to the non-specific control, is selectively saved to the work area 223 for non-specific control, thereby making it possible to reduce the capacity reserved for saving the register information in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Therefore, it is possible to save the above-mentioned register information while securing a large capacity of the work area 223 for non-specific control that is available for the partial clearing process (step S7508) and initial setting process (step S7509) of the work area 223 for non-specific control. Of course, for the various general-purpose registers, auxiliary registers, and index registers in the main CPU 63, other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register, the information set before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is started is stored and held until the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is completed and the processing corresponding to the specific control is resumed.

Furthermore, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control instead of saving it to the stack area 224 for non-specific control, the capacity of the stack area 224 for non-specific control can be kept small. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when using the stack area 224 for non-specific control, as described above, the information is written in the order in which the later information is read out first, so if the order in which the information is read is shifted due to some noise or other cause, If this happens, all subsequent reading order information will be restored to different registers. The probability of occurrence of such an event increases as the amount of information saved in the stack area 224 for non-specific control increases. In contrast, by saving register information to the work area 223 for non-specific control, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring even when there is a large amount of information to be saved. .

After executing the processes of steps S7502 to S7507, a process of partially clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7508). In the partial clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, storage areas other than the storage area where information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to specific control are saved Clear to "0". Specifically, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to "0", while the memory other than these various buffers is Clear the area to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Also, by not clearing to "0" the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to specific control is saved, it becomes possible to restore the information used in the processing corresponding to specific control to the various registers of the main CPU 63 when the processing corresponding to non-specific control ends and returns to the processing corresponding to specific control.

In addition, in step S7508, the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0." The stack area 224 for non-specific control stores return address information for the clearing process (FIG. 109) in the event of an abnormality after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, but by not clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0," it is possible to prevent this return address information from being erased.

After that, the initial setting process is executed (step S7509). In the initial setting process, initial settings are made to the storage areas in the non-specific control work area 223 that were cleared to "0" in step S7508.

After that, as in step S3909 of the management execution process (FIG. 71) in the 15th embodiment, a load command is issued to set Y(r+α) as a fixed address at the time of return to specific control in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 as "LD SP, Y(r+α)" (step S7510). The address of Y(r+α) is set as an address between Y(r+8) and Y(s) in the stack area 222 for specific control.

Thereafter, the information saved in the WA buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the WA register of the main CPU 63 by a load instruction as "LD WA, (_WABUF)" (step S7511). Also, as "LD BC, (_BCBUF)", the information saved in the BC buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the BC register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7512). Further, as "LD DE, (_DEBUF)", the information saved in the DE buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the DE register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7513). Also, as "LD HL, (_HLBUF)", the information saved in the HL buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the HL register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7514). Further, as "LD IX, (_IXBUF)", the information saved in the IX buffer of the work area 223 for non-specific control is overwritten in the IX register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7515). Further, as "LD IY, (_IYBUF)", the information saved in the IY buffer of the non-specific control work area 223 is overwritten in the IY register of the main CPU 63 by the load instruction (step S7516). By executing the processing from step S7511 to step S7516, processing corresponding to non-specific control is started for each information of the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register of the main CPU 63. It becomes possible to restore the information corresponding to the specific control immediately before the control.

According to the above configuration, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 108) executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or if the checksum is abnormal, the abnormality clear processing (step S7321) is executed, and not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized. If an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, an information abnormality may also occur in the work area 223 for non-specific control. However, by initializing the work area 223 for non-specific control in the abnormality clear processing, it is possible to prevent the processing corresponding to non-specific control from being executed in the same state despite the information abnormality occurring in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Even if the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing it are executed in the clear process at the time of abnormality (step S7321), the work area for non-specific control The information in various registers used in the process corresponding to the specific control saved in 223 is not cleared to "0". As a result, the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" while not erasing the information used in the process corresponding to specific control after the process corresponding to non-specific control is completed. It becomes possible to perform initial setting processing.

Even if the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" and initialized in the abnormality clear process (step S7321), the stack area 224 for non-specific control is not cleared to "0" and initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the return address information from being erased after the clear process for non-specific control (Figure 110) is completed.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed by the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to be treated as a dedicated memory area for the process corresponding to the specific control, and for the process of clearing to "0" and the process of initializing, too, and for the work area 223 for non-specific control to be treated as a dedicated memory area for the process corresponding to the non-specific control.

Note that the configuration is not limited to one in which both the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are subject to checksum calculation, and it may be one in which only the work area 221 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation, or one in which only the stack area 222 for specific control is subject to checksum calculation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the work area 223 for non-specific control is the target of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets, and the stack area 222 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be checked. The configuration may be such that the checksum is calculated, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, and the work area 223 for non-specific control may be subject to checksum calculation.

The stack area 224 for non-specific control may also be configured to be the target of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may also be configured to be the target of checksum calculation, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may also be configured to be the target of checksum calculation, or the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may also be configured to be the target of checksum calculation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are the targets of checksum calculation. In this case, the work area 221 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets, and the stack area 222 for specific control, the stack area 224 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured. The work area 223 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured as checksum calculation targets. The work area 223 and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured to be checksum calculation targets.

In addition, in steps S7508 and S7509 in the non-specific control clear process (FIG. 110), the process of clearing to "0" and the initial setting process may be performed not only on the non-specific control work area 223 but also on the non-specific control stack area 224. In this case, it is preferable not to erase the return address information for the clear process in the event of an abnormality after the non-specific control clear process is completed.

Further, in step S7508 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the management start flag is cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". Further, in step S7508 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110), the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 may be configured not to be cleared to "0". A configuration may also be adopted in which the calculation result storage area 234 is not cleared to "0".

<Thirty-second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment in the processing configuration regarding monitoring of information abnormalities in the main side RAM 65 using a checksum. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the above-mentioned 30th embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the above-mentioned 30th embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the power outage information storage process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. The power outage information storage process is executed in step S6801 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 103). The processes in steps S7601 to S7613 in the power outage information storage process are executed in the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

Steps S7601 to S7608 in the power outage information storage process execute the same process as steps S6701 to S6708 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 101) in the 30th embodiment. If a power outage is identified, a positive determination is made in step S7608 and power outage processing in steps S7609 to S7613 is executed.

Specifically, first, a power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7609). As a result, if power outage processing is executed normally and information is stored and retained in the main side RAM 65 normally, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted, the specific control This means that the power outage flag of the work area 221 is set to "1".

Then, the checksums are calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7610). In this case, the storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 that are the objects of calculation when calculating the specific control checksum are the same as the storage areas in the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 that are the objects of calculation of the specific control checksum in step S7701 of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) described later. In addition, the storage areas that are the objects of calculation when calculating the specific control checksum include an area in the specific control work area 221 where information on the setting value indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, a setting value counter). Then, the calculated specific control checksum is stored in a storage area for storing the specific control checksum in the specific control work area 221, which is excluded from the objects of calculation of the specific control checksum.

Thereafter, checksums are calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7611). In this case, the storage areas in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are the targets of calculation when calculating the checksum for non-specific control, are used for checksum monitoring processing (FIG. 112), which will be described later. This is the same storage area as the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, which are the targets of calculation of the checksum for non-specific control in step S7706. Then, the calculated checksum for non-specific control is stored in a storage area for storing the checksum for non-specific control in the work area 221 for specific control, and is excluded from the calculation target of the checksum for specific control. The data is stored in the storage area where the data is stored.

Thereafter, all output port information in the register of the main CPU 63 is set to "0" (step S7612), and access to the main RAM 65 is prohibited (step S7613). Then, the infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and the process can no longer be executed.

Next, the checksum monitoring process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 112. Note that the checksum monitoring process is executed in place of steps S6604 to S6606 in the main processing (FIG. 100). Also, the processes in steps S7701 to S7711 in the checksum monitoring process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for specific control and data for specific control.

First, a checksum for specific control is calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step S7701). The method of calculating the checksum for the specific control is the same as step S7610 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 111). Thereafter, the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7610 of the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control is specified. At the same time as reading from the control work area 221, the read checksum for specific control is compared with the checksum for specific control calculated in step S7701 (step S7702). Then, it is determined whether the checksums for specific control match (step S7703).

If the checksums for specific control do not match (step S7703: NO), a clear process is performed on the work area 221 for specific control (step S7704). In this clear process, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed, except for the area in the work area 221 for specific control in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically, the setting value counter). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the regular power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display unit 37a is erased and the reserved information for the regular map display unit 38a is erased. In addition, in this clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then initial settings are performed. In addition, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed (step S7705).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703 or if the process in step S7705 is executed, a checksum for non-specific control is calculated for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control (step S7706). The method of calculating the checksum for non-specific control is the same as step S7611 in the power outage information storage process (FIG. 111). Thereafter, the checksum for non-specific control that was calculated in step S7611 of the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control. While reading from the work area 221 for specific control, the read checksum for non-specific control is compared with the checksum for non-specific control calculated in step S7706 (step S7707). Then, it is determined whether the checksums for non-specific control match (step S7708).

If the checksums for non-specific control do not match (step S7708: NO), the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control by a push command as "PUSH PSW" ( Step S7709). The flag register includes a carry flag, a zero flag, a P/V flag, a sign flag, a half-carry flag, and the like, and the information in the flag register changes depending on the execution results of arithmetic instructions, rotate instructions, input/output instructions, and the like. By saving such flag register information before the start of the subroutine program that corresponds to clear processing for non-specific control, the flag in its state before it changes after the subroutine is called or the subroutine starts. Register information can be saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Note that the amount of information in the flag register is 1 byte.

Then, the subroutine program corresponding to the non-specific control clear processing set in the non-specific control program is read out, thereby starting the non-specific control clear processing (step S7710). In this case, information for identifying the return address of the checksum monitoring processing after the non-specific control clear processing is executed is written to the specific control stack area 222 by a push command. Then, when the non-specific control clear processing is completed, information for identifying the return address is read out by a pop command, and the program for the checksum monitoring processing indicated by the return address is returned to.

When returning to the abnormality clear processing program after executing clear processing for non-specific control, the flag register saved to the stack area 222 for specific control in step S7709 by a pop instruction is stored as "POP PSW". information is returned to the flag register of the main CPU 63 (step S7711). As a result, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to the information at the time when step S7709 was executed. In other words, the information in the flag register of the main CPU 63 returns to information for executing specific control.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing clear processing for non-specific control. Note that the processing from step S7801 to step S7818 in the clearing process for non-specific control is executed by the main CPU 63 using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control.

Steps S7801 to S7807 in the clearing process for non-specific control are the same as steps S7501 to S7507 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 110) in the 31st embodiment.

Thereafter, a partial clearing process of the work area 223 for non-specific control is executed (step S7808). In the partial clearing process, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, storage areas other than the storage area where information of various registers of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to specific control are saved Clear to "0". Specifically, among the storage areas of the work area 223 for non-specific control, the WA buffer, BC buffer, DE buffer, HL buffer, IX buffer, and IY buffer are not cleared to "0", while the memory other than these various buffers is Clear the area to "0".

In this case, the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency support mode counter area 233, the calculation result storage area 234, and the management start flag are all cleared to "0". This makes it possible to eliminate information abnormalities in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Also, by not clearing to "0" the storage area in which the information of the various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to specific control is saved, it becomes possible to restore the information used in the processing corresponding to specific control to the various registers of the main CPU 63 when the processing corresponding to non-specific control ends and returns to the processing corresponding to specific control.

Thereafter, initial setting processing is executed (step S7809). In the initial setting process, initial setting is performed for the storage area that was cleared to "0" in step S7808 in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, a process of partially clearing the stack area 224 for non-specific control is executed (step S7810). In the partial clearing process, information on the return address of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed is stored in each storage area of the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Clear all memory areas other than the memory area to "0". This prevents the return address information of the checksum monitoring process (FIG. 112) from being erased after the clearing process for non-specific control is completed, while also preventing information errors in the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being erased. It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

After that, the initial setting process is executed (step S7811). In the initial setting process, initial settings are made to the memory area in the non-specific control stack area 224 that was cleared to "0" in step S7810.

Thereafter, the processes of steps S7812 to S7818 are executed. These steps S7812 to S7818 are the same as steps S7510 to S7516 in the non-specific control clearing process (FIG. 110) in the thirty-first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control and the checksum for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are Calculated separately. This makes it possible to individually identify information abnormalities in the storage area corresponding to specific control in the main side RAM 65 and the storage area corresponding to non-specific control in the main side RAM 65.

If there is an abnormality in the checksum for specific control, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0" and initialized, and the checksum for non-specific control is If there is an abnormality in the checksum, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to 0 and initialization processing is executed. This makes it possible to narrow down the targets for executing the "0" clearing process and the initial setting process to the area where the checksum abnormality has been identified.

The process of clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed by the process corresponding to the specific control, and the process of clearing the work area 223 for non-specific control to "0" and the process of initializing are executed by the process corresponding to the non-specific control. This makes it possible to treat the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control as dedicated memory areas for the process corresponding to the specific control, and to treat the work area 223 for non-specific control as a dedicated memory area for the process corresponding to the non-specific control, even with regard to the process of clearing to "0" and the initial setting process.

In step S7808 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the management start flag is cleared to "0", but the management start flag may not be cleared to "0". In addition, in step S7808 in the clearing process for non-specific control (FIG. 113), the normal counter area 231, the open/close execution mode counter area 232, and the high frequency support mode counter area 233 may not be cleared to "0", and the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0".

<33rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifteenth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S7901 to step S7924 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S7901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S7902). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds). In addition, the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set to a second interrupt cycle that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle. (Specifically, set to 2 milliseconds).

That is, in this embodiment, the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process exist so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short as the timer interrupt process. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process interrupts the second timer interrupt process and is not activated. In addition, if both the first and second interrupt cycles have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are not being executed, the second timer interrupt process The timer interrupt processing is activated first. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is a process that is activated with priority over the first timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process is set in a specified register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. In addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, the internal function register setting process also executes processes for setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1.

Then, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7903). The start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify a situation in which the first timer interrupt processing should be ended without executing the various processes set in the first timer interrupt processing, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started. By setting the start-up processing flag to "1", even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the various processes set in the first timer interrupt processing will not be executed, and the first timer interrupt processing will be ended.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step S7904). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt period. However, since the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, various processes set for the first timer interrupt processing are executed. The first timer interrupt process is ended without any interruption.

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S7905). In other words, it is determined whether the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on while the reset button 68c has been pressed, and whether the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has begun. In this embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Also, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the 11th embodiment, rather than first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S7905: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7906). The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage information storage processing (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) described later. The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the previous time the power was shut off.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S7906: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S7907). The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but the calculation method is the same as the calculation method when the checksum is calculated in the power outage process in the power outage information storage process (step S8202) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which will be described later. That's the method. The checksum calculated in the power outage processing will be stored in the work area 221 for specific control, but the storage area of the work area 221 for specific control in which this checksum is stored is Excluded from the storage area subject to calculation.

In other words, when the checksum is calculated, the storage area to be calculated, which is a part of the storage area in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, is the storage area to be calculated. This storage area to be calculated is a storage area in which information is not basically rewritten if the supply of power such as backup power to the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is continued from the time the checksum is calculated in the power failure processing when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed and the processing of step S7907 is executed. Therefore, if the information in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control has not been changed from the time the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is resumed, the checksum for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped. The storage areas that are the objects of calculation when calculating this checksum include an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control. Note that the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not included in the calculation of the checksum.

Then, the checksums for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control that were calculated and stored in the work area 221 for specific control during the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped are read from the work area 221 for specific control, and the read checksums are compared with the checksum calculated in step S7907 (step S7908). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S7909).

If a negative determination is made in step S7906 or step S7909, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). The game stop flag is used in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S8207 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) described later and the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed, that is, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that it should be used. By setting the game stop flag to "1", a positive determination is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), which will be described later, resulting in a situation in which the processes in steps S8208 to S8221 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag was not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power outage, the progress of the game will be stopped, and the specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control since the last time the power was shut off, the progress of the game will be stopped. The state will be as follows.

In this case, the memory area that is the subject of calculation when calculating the checksum includes an area (specifically, a setting value counter) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above. Therefore, if an abnormality in the setting value occurs after the previous power outage, the checksum will not match, and the progress of the game will be halted.

On the other hand, even in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) are executed. Therefore, even in a situation where the progress of the game is stopped, power outage monitoring is executed, and the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further Fraud detection is performed.

Thereafter, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or checksum is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 at the time of starting supply of operating power (step S7911). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker unit 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

When the game progress is stopped, the manager of the game parlor who has confirmed the above notification will temporarily stop the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and then perform an operation to execute the setting value update process (step S7918) when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed. This makes it possible to set new setting values in the setting value update process (step S7918) if an abnormality occurs with the power outage flag or checksum when the supply of operating power begins.

In particular, the storage area that is subject to calculation when calculating the checksum is an area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control as described above (specifically, the setting value counter), so if an abnormality occurs in the checksum, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the set value. On the other hand, if an abnormality occurs regarding the checksum as described above, execution of the setting value update process (step S7918) is prompted to prevent the game from being played with the abnormal setting value. It becomes possible to do so.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S7906 and S7909: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned on using the setting key (step S7912), and it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S7913). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13, as in the 30th embodiment, and the main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11, as in the 30th embodiment. If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7912: YES), and further, the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open relative to the outer frame 11 (step S7913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S7914). In the setting confirmation process, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, which are used to display various parameters that are the management results of the gaming history, execute a process to display a message indicating that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a message indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing in steps S8001 to S8003 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, a setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8001). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed. By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", the corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which will be described later. be exposed. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. will be held.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned off using the setting key (step S8002). In this case, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or to determine whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in an OFF state. If the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned off (step S8002: NO), the process of step S8002 is repeated.

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S8002: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8003). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The state in which this occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will start displaying the gaming history management results.

As described above, in this embodiment, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion section 68a turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts and the main processing starts, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is executed in a state in which processing is being executed when the supply of operating power starts, which is the state before the processing that enables the game to progress in the main processing is executed. This makes it possible to check the setting values when no game is being played.

Assuming that the setting value is checked while the game is continuing, for example, if the setting value is checked during the execution of a game round, there is a risk that the transition to the open/close execution mode will occur while the setting value is being checked. In this case, even though the open/close execution mode has started, it may not be possible to launch the game ball toward the special electric winning device 32. Also, if the setting value is checked during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the open/close execution mode will proceed while the setting value is being checked, so in this case too, it may not be possible to launch the game ball toward the special electric winning device 32.

Assuming that the game progress is stopped when the setting value is confirmed, if the confirmation of the setting value is started while the game is being played, the process for stopping the game progress midway may become complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of a game round and the game progress is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the game round midway is required. In this case, if the display of the pattern change in the pattern display device 41 is stopped midway when the confirmation of the setting value is started, and the display of the pattern change in the pattern display device 41 is resumed when the confirmation of the setting value is completed, a process that is that much more complicated is required. Also, for example, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode and the game progress is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the opening and closing execution mode midway is required. Also, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of the display of the pattern change in the normal picture display unit 38a and the game progress is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the display of the pattern change midway is required. In addition, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of the open execution state of the normal power role 34a and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process is required to stop the open execution state midway. On the other hand, a configuration is also possible in which the confirmation of the setting value is performed after waiting until all games are completed. In this case, however, it becomes necessary to wait until a situation in which none of the game rounds, the open/close execution mode, the display of the changing patterns in the normal picture display section 38a, and the open execution state of the normal power role 34a are being executed, and there is a risk of a long wait time until the confirmation of the setting value can be started.

In contrast to this, the setting confirmation process is executed in a state where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, which is the state before the process that enables game progress is executed in the main process that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, so the setting value is confirmed in a state where game progress has already been stopped. This makes it possible to avoid checking the setting value while game progress is in progress, and there is no need to stop game progress midway when checking the setting value, or to wait until game progress is stopped to check the setting value. This makes it possible to properly check the setting value.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 114), if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S7905: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S7915). In the RAM clearing process, in the work area 221 for specific control, excluding the area in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (specifically the setting value counter), the work area for the specific control is 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, in the RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, in the RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing (step S7902) is executed.

On the other hand, the RAM clearing process does not clear the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control from being cleared to "0" by the clearing operation performed by the manager of the amusement hall.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. Then, it is determined whether the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state (step S7917). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the above-mentioned 30th embodiment. The setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S7916: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. 12 is in the open state (step S7917: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S7918).

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processing of steps S8101 to S8107 in the setting value update process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8101). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated. By setting the setting update display flag to "1", corresponding display control is performed on the first to fourth alert display devices 201 to 204 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described below. As a result, the first to fourth alert display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display showing the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is equal to or greater than 1, which corresponds to "setting 1," and equal to or less than 6, which corresponds to "setting 6" (step S8102). If the value of the setting value counter is "0" or equal to or greater than 7, a negative determination is made in step S8102, and the setting value counter is set to "1" (step S8103). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8102 or if the process in step S8103 is executed, it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off using a setting key (step S8104). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in an OFF state may be adopted.

If the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned off (step S8104: NO), and if the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8105: YES), the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8106). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher setting value each time the reset button 68c is pressed. Also, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8105: NO) or the setting value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8102. However, if it is determined in step S8102 that the setting value counter value is 7 or more, the setting value counter is set to "1" in step S8103. As a result, if the reset button 68c is pressed once in the "setting 6" situation, the setting value returns to "setting 1."

If the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned OFF (step S8104: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8107). This cancels the state in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the results of the game history management.

As described above, in this embodiment, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c, and the reset is performed in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing is started. The button 68c is pressed, and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S7915), and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is It becomes possible to make the operation contents for generating the game easy to understand for the game hall manager.

Even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information in the setting value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being changed even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed.

Not only is the power to the pachinko machine 10 turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed based on the power being turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on with the setting key. As already explained, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed based on the power being turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to make the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a a common operation for executing processing related to the setting value. This makes it possible to make the operation content for generating processing related to the setting value easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, a setting confirmation process is executed, and if the reset button 68c is pressed, a setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, depending on whether the reset button 68c is pressed or not. This makes it possible to make the operation contents for executing the desired process between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process easy to understand for the manager of the amusement hall. Also, by making the operation contents for executing the setting value update process more than the setting confirmation process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to carry out fraudulent acts of setting value update processing.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 114), if the processing of step S7911 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S7912 or step S7913, if the processing of step S7914 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S7916 or step S7917, or if the processing of step S7918 is executed, the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S7919). By clearing the start-up processing in progress flag to "0", the state in which various processes set in the first timer interrupt processing are not executed even if the first timer interrupt processing is started is released. Note that in step S7919, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Then, a return command is sent to the sound and light control device 81 (step S7920). The return command includes information indicating the number of pending information for the special chart display unit 37a, information indicating the current win/lose lottery mode, information indicating the current support mode, information indicating whether the open/close execution mode is in progress, and information indicating whether a game round is in progress. These pieces of information are set based on the information stored in the work area 221 for specific control. By receiving the return command, the sound and light control device 81 sets the display contents of the pattern display device 41, the light emission contents of the display light-emitting unit 53, and the sound output contents of the speaker unit 54 to contents corresponding to the various information set in the return command.

Here, when checking the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key. Then, for example, if it is necessary to check the setting value during the execution of a game round, the power supply operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed during the execution of the game round, and then the setting key insertion part 68a is pressed by the setting key. While performing the ON operation, the power ON operation of the Pachinko machine 10 will be performed. In this case, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM provided in the audio emission control device 81, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the game replay in the RAM of the audio emission control device 81 is The information used to control it will be erased. On the other hand, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 and the clearing process of the main RAM 65 is not executed when checking the set values, the power OFF operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is performed in the middle of playing a game. , If the pachinko machine 10 is then turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, after the setting confirmation process is executed, the special figure display part 37a will display a changing pattern. will be restarted. In this case, a situation arises in which the symbol display device 41 does not display the symbols in a variable manner even though the special symbol display section 37a displays the symbols in a variable manner.

In response to this, a return command is sent to the audio and light emitting control device 81 after the setting confirmation process is completed, and the return command includes information indicating whether or not a game round is in progress. When the audio and light emitting control device 81 receives the return command, it starts displaying the changing patterns on the pattern display device 41. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the pattern display device 41 does not display the changing patterns even though the special pattern display unit 37a is displaying the changing patterns. This display of the changing patterns is performed at a relatively fast speed so that each of the patterns being displayed is indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish for the player. In addition, the return command does not include the results of the win/loss determination process and the allocation determination process for the game round to be resumed, and does not include information indicating the end timing of the game round to be resumed. Therefore, when the sound and light emission control device 81 starts the display of changing patterns on the pattern display device 41 based on a return command, if the game turn to be resumed corresponds to a miss result, when a command indicating the start of the next game turn or a command to start a demo display on the pattern display device 41 is received, the sound and light emission control device 81 ends the display of changing patterns based on the return command and starts a display corresponding to the newly received command, and if the game turn to be resumed corresponds to a jackpot result, when an opening command indicating the start of the open/close execution mode is received, the sound and light emission control device 81 ends the display of changing patterns based on the return command and starts an opening performance.

In addition, if the return command includes information indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is currently being executed, the sound and light emission control device 81 causes the pattern display device 41 to start a display effect indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening and closing execution mode is being executed.

Then, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924. In this respect, the remaining process of steps S7921 to S7924 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically. In steps S7921 to S7924, the same processing is executed as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment.

Next, the first timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 117. Note that, as already explained, the first timer interrupt process is started periodically at a 4 millisecond cycle, which is the first interrupt cycle. Further, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set as a specific control program.

First, it is determined whether the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8201). As already explained, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in step S7903 of the main processing (FIG. 114). Then, if the start-up processing flag is set to "1" (step S8201: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is terminated without executing the various processes of steps S8202 to S8221. As a result, even if the first timer interrupt processing and the second timer interrupt processing are permitted to be executed early when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the main processing (FIG. 114) is started, it is possible to prevent the various processes for controlling the progress of the game from being executed in the first timer interrupt processing until the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed and the execution of the process for controlling the progress of the game is permitted.

As already explained, the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" in step S7919 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed in the main processing (FIG. 114). In the first timer interrupt processing, if the start-up processing flag is not set to "1" (step S8201: NO), the processing from step S8202 onward is executed.

Steps S8202 to S8219 and S8221 execute the same processes as steps S3701 to S3719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 69) in the fifteenth embodiment. These processes are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data. In this case, as already explained, if it is determined in the main process (FIG. 114) that the power outage flag is not set to "1" (step S7906: NO) or if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S7909: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S7910). If the game stop flag is set to "1", the first timer interrupt process executes steps S8201 to S8206, but if an affirmative determination is made in step S8207, steps S8208 to S8221 are executed. Not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag was not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power outage, the progress of the game will be stopped, and the specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information in at least one of the work area 221 and the stack area 222 for specific control since the last time the power was shut off, the progress of the game will be stopped. The state will be as follows. For example, firing of game balls is prohibited by not executing the process of step S8212. Further, since the process of step S8214 is not executed, execution of the game round and opening/closing execution mode is prohibited. Further, since the process of step S8218 is not executed, the payout of game balls is prohibited.

On the other hand, even in such a situation where the progress of the game is stopped, power outage monitoring is executed in step S8202, and the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are executed in steps S8203 and S8204. The random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and fraud detection in step S8206 is performed.

In the first timer interrupt process, the setting monitoring process is executed in step S8220. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the setting monitoring process. Note that the processing in steps S8301 to S8303 in the setting monitoring process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

The setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is checked to determine whether the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is normal or not (step S8301). Specifically, if the setting value set in the setting value counter is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or 7 or greater, it is determined to be abnormal.

If the set value is abnormal (step S8301: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8302), similar to step S7910 in the main process (Fig. 114). By setting the game stop flag to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S8207 of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117), resulting in a situation in which the processing of steps S8208 to S8221 is not executed. As a result, if it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, even if the game stop flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8202 to S8206 in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) is executed, so that even if the progress of the game is stopped, power outage monitoring is executed, and the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

Then, an abnormal command indicating that the setting value is abnormal is sent to the audio light-emitting control device 81 (step S8303). By receiving the abnormal command, the audio light-emitting control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormal setting value, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying "Please change the setting." In addition, a text image saying "Please change the setting" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification may be configured to continue when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S7918) of the main process (FIG. 114) is executed.

When the manager of the gaming hall confirms the above notification while the game progress is stopped, he or she will temporarily stop the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, and then perform an operation to execute the setting value update process (step S7918) when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed. This makes it possible to set new setting values in the setting value update process (step S7918) if a setting value abnormality occurs.

Here, a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is activated periodically. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even when a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value is abnormal. Furthermore, monitoring to determine whether or not the set value is abnormal is performed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

The main process (FIG. 114) does not include a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (Figure 114), the power failure flag and check sum are set at the start of supply of operating power. In addition to monitoring the settings, it is also necessary to monitor whether the set values are normal or not, which increases the monitoring load. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to execute the RAM clearing process (step S7915) and the setting value update process (step S7918) when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of operating power, the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the main process (FIG. 114) does not have a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not, the process configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power is not suitable. It becomes possible to make it a thing. Furthermore, even if the process to monitor whether the set value is normal is not set in the process at the start of the supply of operating power, as described above, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) Since the configuration is such that the settings monitoring process (step S8220) is executed based on the settings, if the settings are abnormal, it is possible to deal with it.

In the configuration in which the first timer interrupt processing is executed as described above, in this embodiment, as already explained, there is a second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in addition to the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) as a timer interrupt processing, and the second timer interrupt processing is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing even if the first timer interrupt processing is being executed. In this case, although not shown in the first timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited and permitted before and after each process of steps S8201 to S8221. For example, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited before executing the lottery random number update processing (step S8203), and the timer interrupt processing is permitted after executing the lottery random number update processing (step S8203). This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing from interrupting and starting while the lottery random number update processing is being executed. In addition, the timer interrupt process is prohibited before the special chart special power control process (step S8214) is executed, and the timer interrupt process is permitted after the special chart special power control process (step S8214) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the second timer interrupt process from interrupting and starting while the special chart special power control process is being executed.

Next, we will explain the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main CPU 63. Figure 119 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration for controlling the display of various display units by the main CPU 63.

The objects for which display control is performed by the main CPU 63 include the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the regular chart display unit 38a, the regular chart reserved display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. All of these are provided as segment display units in which multiple display segments made of LEDs are arranged. These segment display units are illuminated when data corresponding to the illuminated state (for example, data "1", which is one of the binary data values) is set, and are turned off when data corresponding to the unlit state (for example, data "0", which is the other of the binary data values) is set.

The main control board 61 is provided with a first display circuit 261 that corresponds to the special figure display section 37a, a second display circuit 262 that corresponds to the special figure reservation display section 37b, and a second display circuit 262 that corresponds to the special figure reservation display section 37b. A third display circuit 263 is provided to correspond to the display section 38a, a fourth display circuit 264 is provided to correspond to the general figure reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to A fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to 204 . In the eleventh embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with the first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. However, in this embodiment, these first to fourth display ICs 205 to 208 are not provided.

The first display circuit 261 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the special display unit 37a. As a result, each display segment of the special display unit 37a becomes lit or unlit in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the first display circuit 261. In this case, the first display circuit 261 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (e.g., 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the special display unit 37a that are lit by the display data provided to the first display circuit 261 gradually become unlit as the predetermined period has passed without new display data being provided to the first display circuit 261. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the special display unit 37a is changed, but also when the display content of the special display unit 37a is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the first display circuit 261.

The number of display segments provided in the special figure display section 37a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the first display circuit 261 as display data for controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a.

The second display circuit 262 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments of the special figure reservation display section 37b. As a result, each display segment of the special figure pending display section 37b enters a light emitting state or a light extinguishing state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262. In this case, the second display circuit 262 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segment of the special figure pending display unit 37b that is in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the second display circuit 262 will remain in the predetermined period without new display data being provided to the second display circuit 262. As time passes, the light will gradually turn off. In addition, with this configuration, not only when the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is changed, but also when the display content of the special figure reservation display section 37b is not changed, the previous display data is The same display data as in the output processing time is supplied to the second display circuit 262.

The number of display segments provided in the special drawing reservation display section 37b is four. Therefore, four bits of data are provided to the second display circuit 262 as display data for controlling the display of the special drawing reservation display section 37b. However, since the display data is provided in eight-bit units, eight bits of data are also provided when display data is provided to the second display circuit 262, but four bits of that data are used as display data for controlling the display of the special drawing reservation display section 37b.

The third display circuit 263 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the general map display unit 38a. As a result, each display segment of the general map display unit 38a is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the third display circuit 263. In this case, the third display circuit 263 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the general map display unit 38a that are illuminated by the display data provided to the third display circuit 263 gradually turn off as the predetermined period passes without new display data being provided to the third display circuit 263. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the general map display unit 38a is changed, but also when the display content of the general map display unit 38a is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the third display circuit 263.

The number of display segments provided in the ordinary figure display section 38a is eight. Therefore, 8-bit data is provided to the third display circuit 263 as display data for controlling the display of the general figure display section 38a.

The fourth display circuit 264 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the multiple display segments of the regular map reserved display unit 38b. As a result, each display segment of the regular map reserved display unit 38b is illuminated or turned off in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In this case, the fourth display circuit 264 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data gradually approaches an all-zero state. Therefore, the display segments of the regular map reserved display unit 38b that are illuminated by the display data provided to the fourth display circuit 264 gradually turn off as the predetermined period passes without new display data being provided to the fourth display circuit 264. In addition, due to this configuration, not only when the display content of the regular map reserved display unit 38b is changed, but also when the display content of the regular map reserved display unit 38b is not changed, the same display data as that of the previous display data output processing is supplied to the fourth display circuit 264.

The number of display segments provided in the regular map pending display section 38b is four. Therefore, four bits of data are provided to the fourth display circuit 264 as display data for controlling the display of the regular map pending display section 38b. However, since the display data is provided in 8-bit units, 8 bits of data are also provided when display data is provided to the fourth display circuit 264, but four bits of this are used as display data for controlling the display of the regular map pending display section 38b.

The fifth display circuit 265 provides data corresponding to the supplied display data to each of the plurality of display segments provided in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, each display segment of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 enters a light-emitting state or a light-off state in a manner corresponding to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265. In this case, although the fifth display circuit 265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), after the predetermined period elapses, the display data gradually becomes all "0". This will bring us closer to the state of Therefore, the display segments of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 that are in a light emitting state due to the display data provided to the fifth display circuit 265 are provided with new display data to the fifth display circuit 265. As a predetermined period of time passes without any interruption, the light gradually turns off. Moreover, with such a configuration, not only the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed, but also the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed. Even if this is not the case, the same display data as the previous display data output processing time is supplied to the fifth display circuit 265.

Each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided with seven display segments. In contrast, display data is provided in 8-bit units. When the display data of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is provided to the fifth display circuit 265, the 7-bit display data corresponding to the first notification display device 201 is provided as data in 8-bit units. After that, 7-bit display data corresponding to the second notification display device 202 is provided in 8-bit units, and then 7-bit display data corresponding to the third notification display device 203 is provided in 8-bit units. Finally, 7-bit display data corresponding to the fourth notification display device 204 is provided as 8-bit data.

In a configuration in which the first to fifth display circuits 261-265 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266. In other words, the display ICs 266 are not provided one-to-one with the first to fifth display circuits 261-265, but rather one display IC 266 is provided so that it is common to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261-265. When the main CPU 63 supplies display data to the display IC 266, it also supplies type data to the display IC 266 indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261-265 the display data corresponds to.

Regarding the electrical connection between the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266, in detail, the main CPU 63 and the display IC 266 are electrically connected using a type data signal line LN1, a type clock signal line LN2, a display data signal line LN3, and a display clock signal line LN4. All of these signal lines LN1 to LN4 are signal lines for transmitting signals from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 in one-way communication.

Type data is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 by serial communication using the type data signal line LN1. In this case, the delimitation of each bit of type data by serial communication is indicated by the type clock signal transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the type clock signal line LN2. The type data is data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data to be transmitted corresponds to. The type data is transmitted as 5-bit data consisting of the first bit to the fifth bit. When the display data corresponds to the first display circuit 261, the first bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the second display circuit 262, the second bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the third display circuit 263, the third bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fourth display circuit 264, the fourth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level. When the display data corresponds to the fifth display circuit 265, the fifth bit becomes HI level and the other bits become LOW level.

Display data is transmitted by serial communication from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display data signal line LN3. In this case, the division of each bit of the display data by serial communication is indicated by a display clock signal transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 using the display clock signal line LN4. The display data is transmitted in 8-bit units using the 1st to 8th bits.

In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) described later, the main CPU 63 transmits display data corresponding to each of the first to fifth display circuits 261-265 to the display IC 266. In this case, in one processing round of the second timer interrupt process, display data is transmitted to one of the first to fifth display circuits 261-265, and the display circuits 261-265 to which the display data is transmitted are changed one by one each time a new processing round of the second timer interrupt process occurs in the order of the nth display circuit → the n+1th display circuit. In addition, in the second timer interrupt process in the processing round following the processing round in which display data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265, which is the last in the order, is transmitted, display data corresponding to the first display circuit 261, which is the first in the above order, is transmitted. In addition, in the second timer interrupt process in which display data is sent to one of the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one 8-bit display data is sent, but in the second timer interrupt process in which display data is sent to the fifth display circuit 265, four 8-bit display data are sent corresponding to the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

In the configuration in which the main CPU 63 transmits display data as described above, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 223 for non-specific control include various storage areas that are referenced by the main CPU 63 to transmit display data. is set. FIG. 120(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, and FIG. 120(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various buffers 271 to 275 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various storage areas 234 and 276.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), the work area 221 for specific control is provided with a first display data buffer 271, a second display data buffer 272, a third display data buffer 273, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275.

The first display data buffer 271 stores display data to be supplied to the first display circuit 261. As already explained, the first display circuit 261 is provided corresponding to the special figure display section 37a, so the first display data buffer 271 contains display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display. It will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the first display data buffer 271 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special figure special electric line control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). . Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the first display circuit 261, only when the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The second display data buffer 272 stores display data to be supplied to the second display circuit 262. As already explained, the second display circuit 262 is provided in correspondence with the special drawing reserved display unit 37b, so the second display data buffer 272 stores display data for causing the special drawing reserved display unit 37b to perform a predetermined display. In this case, the display data is stored in the second display data buffer 272 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the special drawing special power control process (step S8214) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the second display circuit 262 is processed, the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the second display data buffer 272 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The third display data buffer 273 stores display data to be supplied to the third display circuit 263. As already explained, the third display circuit 263 is provided corresponding to the general figure display section 38a, so the third display data buffer 273 contains display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display. It will be stored. In this case, storage of the display data in the third display data buffer 273 is performed in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the general electric power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). be exposed. Furthermore, when it comes to the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) for transmitting display data to the third display circuit 263, only when the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 has been changed. Instead, even if the display data has not been changed, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data to be supplied to the fourth display circuit 264. As already explained, the fourth display circuit 264 is provided in correspondence with the normal map reserve display unit 38b, so the fourth display data buffer 274 stores display data for causing the normal map reserve display unit 38b to perform a specified display. In this case, the display data is stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 in the display control process (step S8216) based on the contents of the normal map normal power control process (step S8215) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117). In addition, when the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) that transmits display data to the fourth display circuit 264 is processed, the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 is transmitted to the display IC 266 not only when the display data stored in the fourth display data buffer 274 has been changed, but also when the display data has not been changed.

The fifth display data buffer 275 stores display data to be supplied to the fifth display circuit 265. As already explained, the fifth display circuit 265 is provided corresponding to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, so that the fifth display data buffer 275 includes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 .about.204 store display data for performing a predetermined display. When it is time to process the second timer interrupt process for transmitting display data to the fifth display circuit 265, not only when the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is changed, but also when the display data Even if the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is not changed, the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the results of the game history management, and when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) or the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed, a display corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. In this case, since the fifth display data buffer 275 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, the process of storing display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed as a process corresponding to specific control. On the other hand, the process of deriving the game history management results is performed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, and the 61st to 68th parameters, which are the results of the game history management, are displayed sequentially on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120(b), the work area 223 for non-specific control includes not only the calculation result storage area 234 for storing the 61st to 68th parameters, but also the 61st to 68th parameters. A display target setting area 276 is provided for storing parameters to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even in this embodiment, as in the fifteenth embodiment, the period during which the calculation result of one parameter is continuously displayed is 10 seconds. Every second, the calculation results of the parameters to be displayed are read out from the calculation result storage area 234 in accordance with a predetermined display order, and the calculation results of the read parameters are stored in the display target setting area 276. Ru. If the game history management results are to be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to specific control, is performed. , the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 is read, and the read display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275.

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and display an indication of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to the specific control. Also, when the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and display an indication of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which is a process corresponding to the specific control.

In a configuration in which the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 are provided as described above, the main CPU 63 reads display data from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to each processing round of the second timer interrupt processing (Figure 123) and transmits the read display data to the display IC 266, while also transmitting type data indicating which of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 the display data corresponds to to the display IC 266. Figure 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 121, the display IC 266 includes a type data buffer 281, a selection signal output section 282, a display data buffer 283, and a display data output section 284. The display data buffer 283 stores display data received from the main CPU 63. The display data output unit 284 transmits the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The type data buffer 281 stores type data received from the main CPU 63. The selection signal output unit 282 outputs a selection signal for specifying the display circuits 261 to 265 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281 among the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 as display data reception destinations. Output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119, the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261 are electrically connected using a display signal group 291. The display signal group 291 is provided to make it possible to transmit 8-bit display data at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 by parallel communication. Further, a branch signal group 292 is provided branching off from the display signal group 291, and the branch signal group 292 includes a second display circuit 262, a third display circuit 263, a fourth display circuit 264, and a fifth display circuit 265. electrically connected to each of the Like the display signal group 291, the branch signal group 292 is provided to make it possible to transmit 8-bit display data at once, and the display data in 8-bit units is transmitted from the display IC 266 through parallel communication. Ru.

Since the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 are provided as described above, when the display data stored in the display data buffer 283 is transmitted by the display data output unit 284, the display data is transmitted to the first - Supplied to all of the fifth display circuits 261 to 265. In this case, first to fifth selection signal lines 301 to 305 are provided to designate display circuits 261 to 265 to receive and use the supplied display data.

The first selection signal line 301 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the first display circuit 261. When type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the first display circuit 261 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 through the first selection signal line 301. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the first display circuit 261.

The second selection signal line 302 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the second display circuit 262. When type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the second display circuit 262 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 through the second selection signal line 302. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the second display circuit 262.

The third selection signal line 303 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the third display circuit 263. When type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the third display circuit 263 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a third selection signal to the third display circuit 263 through the third selection signal line 303. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the third display circuit 263.

The fourth selection signal line 304 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fourth display circuit 264. When type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is stored in the type data buffer 281, in order to cause the fourth display circuit 264 to receive and use the display data supplied from the display data output section 284. , the selection signal output section 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fourth selection signal to the fourth display circuit 264 through the fourth selection signal line 304. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fourth display circuit 264.

The fifth selection signal line 305 is provided to electrically connect the display IC 266 and the fifth display circuit 265. When type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is stored in the type data buffer 281, the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 transmits a fifth selection signal to the fifth display circuit 265 through the fifth selection signal line 305 so that the fifth display circuit 265 receives and uses the display data supplied from the display data output unit 284. As a result, the display data supplied to all of the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 through the display signal group 291 and the branch signal group 292 is received and used only by the fifth display circuit 265.

Figure 122 is a time chart showing how type data and display data are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, and how the display data transmitted from the display IC 266 is received by the first display circuit 261 or the second display circuit 262. FIG. 122(a) shows a period during which a type data signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(b) shows a period during which a type clock signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(c) shows a period during which a display data signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(d) shows a period during which a display clock signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266, FIG. 122(e) shows a period during which a first selection signal is transmitted from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261, FIG. 122(f) shows a period during which a second selection signal is transmitted from the display IC 266 to the second display circuit 262, and FIG. 122(g) shows a period during which display data is transmitted from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265. The same applies when display data is received in the third to fifth display circuits 263 to 265.

At timing t1 after the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10, including the main CPU 63, the display IC 266, and the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, has begun, the main CPU 63 begins transmitting category data and display data to the display IC 266. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a pulsed category clock signal is transmitted at timings t1, t2, t3, t4, and t5, and as shown in FIG. 122(a), a pulsed category data signal is transmitted in response to the transmission of the pulsed category clock signal at timing t1. As a result, information corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is stored in the category data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulsed display clock signal is transmitted at each of t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, t6, t7, and t8, and a pulsed display data signal is transmitted in response to the transmission of the pulsed display clock signal at each of t2, t3, t5, and t7, as shown in FIG. 122(c). As a result, display data corresponding to the above information format is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

Then, by completing the transmission of the 8th bit display clock signal as shown in FIG. 122(d) at the timing t9, the data is stored in the type data buffer 281 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. The selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the first selection signal to the first display circuit 261 corresponding to the stored type data, and at the timing t9, the first selection signal is transmitted as shown in FIG. 122(g). The display data output section 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. Thereby, the display data is received and used by the first display circuit 261.

After that, at timing t10, as shown in Figures 122(a) to 122(d), the main CPU 63 starts to transmit new type data and display data to the display IC 266. In this case, at timing t10, as shown in Figures 122(e) and 122(g), the transmission of the first selection signal from the display IC 266 to the first display circuit 261 is stopped, and the transmission of display data from the display IC 266 to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is stopped.

In detail, regarding the new transmission of type data and display data, as shown in FIG. At the same time as the signal is transmitted, as shown in FIG. 122(a), a pulsed type data signal is transmitted in correspondence with the transmission of the pulsed type clock signal at timing t11. As a result, information corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is stored in the type data buffer 281 of the display IC 266.

As shown in FIG. 122(d), a pulsed display clock signal is transmitted at each of t10, t11, t12, t13, t14, t15, t16, and t17, and as shown in FIG. 122(c), a pulsed display data signal is transmitted in response to the transmission of the pulsed display clock signal at each of t10, t11, t12, t15, t16, and t17. As a result, display data corresponding to the above information format is stored in the display data buffer 283 of the display IC 266.

Then, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 122(d), the transmission of the 8th bit of the display clock signal is completed, and at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 122(f), the selection signal output unit 282 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting a second selection signal to the second display circuit 262 corresponding to the type data stored in the type data buffer 281, and at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 122(g), the display data output unit 284 of the display IC 266 starts transmitting the display data stored in the display data buffer 283. As a result, the display data is received by the second display circuit 262 and used.

Note that for the first to fourth display circuits 261 to 264, only one piece of display data is transmitted in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) to which display data is transmitted, but for the fifth display circuit 265, only one piece of display data is transmitted. In the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) to which display data is to be transmitted, four pieces of display data are transmitted corresponding to the number of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As already explained, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is activated at the second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds), but even if it is a process for transmitting four pieces of display data, Each processing time is set so that one processing cycle is completed in less than the second interrupt period.

The above configuration makes it possible to transmit display data to multiple display circuits 261-265 using one display IC 266. Here, as already explained, each of the first to fifth display circuits 261-265 can store and hold the provided display data for a predetermined period (for example, 16 milliseconds), but after the predetermined period has passed, the display data will gradually approach an all-zero state. In this case, if the reception of display data in each display circuit 261-265 exceeds the predetermined period, even if the display content has not been changed in the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, the display segments that are in an illuminated state will temporarily approach an unlit state, which may result in the light flashing in the display segments. In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in addition to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is started at the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is started at a second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt period is set, and the transmission of display data to the display IC 266 is performed in a consolidated manner in the second timer interrupt process.

The second timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123. Note that the processes from step S8401 to step S8413 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) (step S8401). By prohibiting occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) from interrupting and starting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) even if the first interrupt period has elapsed. Also, by prohibiting occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) from being started redundantly even if the second interrupt period has elapsed during execution of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S8402). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 116). As already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63. Even if the value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated by interruption.

The setting update display flag being set to "1" means that the current processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is a processing run that was started by interrupting a situation in which the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is being executed by the main CPU 63. If a positive determination is made in step S8402, a setting process is executed in the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (step S8403). In this setting process, display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 to cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display an indication that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being updated and to display the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are explained in FIG. 124(a). The display shown in the figure is displayed. Specifically, when a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 At least one display segment in each is illuminated. In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, even if a display indicating that the setting value is being updated is displayed, the game hall can be informed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not malfunctioning. This makes it possible for the administrator to understand the information. Note that even when the gaming history management results are displayed, at least one display segment in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a light emitting state Each of the display devices 201 to 204 enters a display state.

Regarding the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in detail, in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off. Even when the gaming history management results are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the first notification display device 201 may be illuminated, but the display contents of the first notification display device 201 when the gaming history management results are displayed do not include display contents in which one central display segment is illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off. This makes it possible to use display segments that may be illuminated even when the gaming history management results are displayed, while making the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in a situation where the setting value is being updated display contents that are not displayed in the gaming history management results.

In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off. Even when the gaming history management results are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 may be illuminated, but the display content of the second notification display device 202 when the gaming history management results are displayed does not include display content in which one central display segment is illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off. This makes it possible to use display segments that may be illuminated even when the gaming history management results are displayed, while making the display content of the second notification display device 202 in a situation where the setting value is being updated display content that is not displayed in the gaming history management results.

In the third notification display device 203, some of the display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state so that the letter "H" is displayed. In this case, the display segments that are in a light-emitting state can be in a light-emitting state even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204; The display contents of the third notification display device 203 when displayed do not include the display contents in which the character "H" is displayed. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the setting value is updated can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results. Moreover, the display content of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the set value is being checked does not include the display content in which the character "H" is displayed. Thereby, by displaying "H" on the third notification display device 203, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the setting value is being updated.

In the fourth alert display device 204, some of the display segments are illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off to display the current setting value. In the case of FIG. 124(a), the current setting value is "Setting 2", so the fourth alert display device 204 displays "2" corresponding to "Setting 2". By checking the fourth alert display device 204, the manager of the amusement hall can understand the current setting value. Note that the display content of the fourth alert display device 204 when the setting value is being updated can be displayed both in the situation where the game history management results are displayed and in the situation where the setting value is being checked.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8402, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". (Step S8404). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115). As already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set it in the main CPU 63. Even if the confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is activated as an interrupt.

The setting confirmation display flag being set to "1" means that the current processing of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is a processing run that was started by interrupting a situation in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is being executed by the main CPU 63. If a positive determination is made in step S8404, a setting process is executed in the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation (step S8405). In this setting process, display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 to cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display an indication that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and to display the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10.

When the display data stored in the fifth display data buffer 275 is transmitted to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are explained in FIG. 124(b). The display shown in the figure is displayed. Specifically, when a display indicating that a setting value is being updated is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 At least one display segment in each is illuminated. In other words, each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a display state. As a result, even if a display indicating that the set value is being checked is displayed, the game hall can be informed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not malfunctioning. This makes it possible for the administrator to understand the information.

In detail, regarding the display contents of each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, in the first notification display device 201, one display segment in the center is in a light emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a non-lighting state. becomes. Even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one display segment in the center of the first notification display device 201 may be in a light emitting state. When the game history management results are displayed, the display content of the first notification display device 201 does not include display content in which one display segment in the center is in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state. Not yet. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the first notification display device 201 in the situation where the setting value is being checked can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results.

In the second notification display device 202, as in the first notification display device 201, one central display segment is illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off. Even when the gaming history management results are displayed in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, one central display segment in the second notification display device 202 may be illuminated, but the display content of the second notification display device 202 when the gaming history management results are displayed does not include display content in which one central display segment is illuminated and the remaining display segments are turned off. This makes it possible to use display segments that may be illuminated even when the gaming history management results are displayed, while making the display content of the second notification display device 202 in a situation where the setting value is being confirmed display content that is not displayed in the gaming history management results.

Here, the display contents on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are the same regardless of whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. This allows the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 to indicate that the display target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is related to setting values rather than game history management results. This display makes it possible to clearly notify the game hall manager.

In the third notification display device 203, some of the display segments are in a light-emitting state and the remaining display segments are in a light-out state so that the letter "k" is displayed. In this case, the display segments that are in a light-emitting state can be in a light-emitting state even when the game history management results are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204; The display contents of the third notification display device 203 when displayed do not include the display contents in which the letter "k" is displayed. As a result, while using the display segment that can be in a light emitting state even when the management results of the game history are displayed, the display contents of the third notification display device 203 in the situation where the setting value is confirmed can be changed to the game history. This makes it possible to display content that is not displayed in the management results. Furthermore, while the setting value is being updated, “H” is displayed on the third notification display device 203, while the setting value is being checked, “k” is displayed on the third notification display device 203. " is displayed. As a result, by checking the display contents of the third notification display device 203, the administrator of the game hall is notified whether the setting value is being updated or the setting value is being confirmed. becomes possible.

In the fourth alert display device 204, some of the display segments are lit and the remaining display segments are turned off so that a display corresponding to the current setting value is displayed. In the case of FIG. 124(b), the current setting value is "Setting 2", so the fourth alert display device 204 displays "2" corresponding to "Setting 2". By checking the fourth alert display device 204, the manager of the amusement hall can understand the current setting value. Note that the display content of the fourth alert display device 204 when the setting value is being checked can be displayed both in a situation where the gaming history management results are displayed and in a situation where the setting value is being updated.

Returning to the explanation of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), if a negative determination is made in step S8404, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 in normal times is executed (step S8406). In this case, information is read from the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are configured to display parameters corresponding to the read information. Display data is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. By transmitting the display data to the fifth display circuit 265 via the display IC 266, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 calculate the current display target parameter among the 61st to 68th parameters. The results will be displayed.

When the processing in step S8403, step S8405, or step S8406 is executed, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned OFF (step S8407), and the display data signal line LN3 and the display The transmission state of the signal through the clock signal line LN4 is set to the OFF state (step S8408). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step S8409).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target of transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "5", the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission targets are sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

Then, the type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S8410). Specifically, if the type counter value is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64; if the type counter value is "2", the type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64; if the type counter value is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64; if the type counter value is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64; and if the type counter value is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main ROM 64.

Thereafter, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 corresponding to the value of the type counter (step S8411). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data is read from the second display data buffer 272. The display data is read, and if the value of the type counter is "3", the display data is read from the third display data buffer 273, and if the value of the type counter is "4", the display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274. The display data is read out, and if the value of the type counter is "5", the display data is read out from the fifth display data buffer 275.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step S8412). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S8410 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S8411 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) (step S8413).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. In the situation where the main process (FIG. 114) is started, the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and the process that allows the game to proceed is executed in the main process. The setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, which is the situation before the operation. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Assuming that the setting values are checked while the game continues to progress, for example, if the setting values are checked in the middle of a game round, There is a risk that a transition to the open/close execution mode may occur. In this case, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be fired toward the special electric winning device 32 even though the opening/closing execution mode has been started. In addition, if the setting value is confirmed during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode will proceed under the situation where the setting value is being confirmed. There is a possibility that the game ball will not be able to be fired towards the player.

Assuming that the game progress is stopped when the setting value is confirmed, if the confirmation of the setting value is started while the game is being played, the process for stopping the game progress midway may become complicated. For example, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of a game round and the game progress is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the game round midway is required. In this case, if the display of the pattern change in the pattern display device 41 is stopped midway when the confirmation of the setting value is started, and the display of the pattern change in the pattern display device 41 is resumed when the confirmation of the setting value is completed, a process that is that much more complicated is required. Also, for example, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of the opening and closing execution mode and the game progress is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the opening and closing execution mode midway is required. Also, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of the display of the pattern change in the normal picture display unit 38a and the game progress is to be stopped midway, a process for stopping the display of the pattern change midway is required. In addition, if the confirmation of the setting value is started during the execution of the open execution state of the normal power role 34a and the progress of the game is to be stopped midway, a process is required to stop the open execution state midway. On the other hand, a configuration is also possible in which the confirmation of the setting value is performed after waiting until all games are completed. In this case, however, it becomes necessary to wait until a situation in which none of the game rounds, the open/close execution mode, the display of the changing patterns in the normal picture display section 38a, and the open execution state of the normal power role 34a are being executed, and there is a risk of a long wait time until the confirmation of the setting value can be started.

On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is started, which is the situation before the processing that allows the game to proceed in the main processing that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Since the setting confirmation process is executed in a situation where the process is being executed, the setting value is confirmed in a situation where the progress of the game has already been stopped. This makes it possible to prevent setting values from being checked while the game is in progress, as well as to stop the game progress midway when checking the setting values, or to stop the game progress. There is no need to wait until the settings are confirmed. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm the setting values.

The reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, and thereby the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 114) is started. is pressed, and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed regardless of whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on. As a result, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c is uniquely linked to the execution of the RAM clearing process (step S7915), and the RAM clearing process (step S7915) It becomes possible to make the operation details for generating the event easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

Even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and the information in the setting value counter is not changed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from being changed even if the RAM clear process (step S7915) is executed.

Not only is the power to the pachinko machine 10 turned on while pressing the reset button 68c, but also the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed based on the power being turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on with the setting key. As already explained, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed based on the power being turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to make the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a a common operation for executing processing related to the setting value. This makes it possible to make the operation content for generating processing related to the setting value easy to understand for the manager of the game hall.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on with the setting key, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, a setting confirmation process is executed, and if the reset button 68c is pressed, a setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, depending on whether the reset button 68c is pressed. This makes it possible to make the operation contents for executing the desired process between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process easy to understand for the manager of the amusement hall. Also, by having more operation contents for executing the setting value update process than the setting confirmation process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to carry out fraudulent acts of setting value update process.

A process for monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) that is activated periodically. This makes it possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal even when a game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the set value is abnormal.

Monitoring to determine whether or not the set value is abnormal is performed every time a monitoring trigger occurs. More specifically, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed every time it is activated. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether or not the set value is abnormal.

The main process (FIG. 114) does not include a process for monitoring whether or not the set value is normal. If a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal is set in the process at the start of supply of operating power in the main process (Fig. 114), the power failure flag and check sum are set at the start of supply of operating power. In addition to monitoring the settings, it is also necessary to monitor whether the set values are normal or not, which increases the monitoring load. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to execute the RAM clearing process (step S7915) and the setting value update process (step S7918) when it is specified that the set value is abnormal at the start of the supply of operating power, the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, since the main process (FIG. 114) does not have a process for monitoring whether the set value is normal or not, the process configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power is not suitable. It becomes possible to make it a thing. In addition, even if the process to monitor whether the set value is normal or not is not set in the process at the start of supply of operating power, the setting can be monitored in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117). Since the configuration executes the process (step S8220), if the set value is abnormal, it is possible to deal with it.

According to the display data transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 performs display settings for the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265, and the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are controlled to correspond to the display data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63. In this case, in a configuration in which multiple display units are provided, such as the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the display IC 266 is not provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the multiple display units, but one display IC 266 is used for multiple display units. This makes it possible to increase the number of display units to be subject to display control while suppressing an increase in the number of display ICs 266. In addition, the transmission interval of the display data from the main CPU 63 to the display IC 266 is set to a transmission interval that allows the display IC 266 to set the display settings for the display circuits 261-265 corresponding to each display unit before it becomes impossible to maintain the display corresponding to the display data on each display unit. This makes it possible to properly display the display corresponding to the display data on each display unit even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is shared by multiple display units.

When the main CPU 63 transmits display data to the display IC 266, it transmits type data to the display IC 266 that enables identification of the type of display circuit 261-265 to which the display data is to be set. As a result, when display data is transmitted from the main CPU 63, the display IC 266 simply sets the display data to the display circuit 261-265 that corresponds to the type data transmitted from the main CPU 63. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is shared by multiple display units, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the display IC 266.

The main CPU 63 transmits display data so that when one update cycle is such that a plurality of display units are subject to setting display data once in a predetermined order, the update cycle is repeated. I do. Thereby, the main CPU 63 only needs to change the display unit to which display data is to be transmitted in accordance with a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 can be simplified.

When a display unit becomes a transmission target, the main CPU 63 transmits display data to that display unit even if the contents of the display data for that display unit are the same as the contents of the display data transmitted the previous time that the display unit was the transmission target. This makes it possible to continue the same display on a specific display unit even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is shared by multiple display units.

The main CPU 63 executes processing for sending display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) that is started by interrupting other processing when the second interrupt period occurs. This makes it possible to set the period in which display data is set for each display unit to a predetermined period. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display IC 266 is used for multiple display units, it is possible to have the display IC 266 set display data for each display unit before it becomes impossible to maintain the display corresponding to the display data on each display unit.

The processing for transmitting display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 that are subject to display settings by the display IC 266 is summarized in the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123). This makes it possible to set the display data to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 at the same cycle.

The main CPU 63 interrupts other processes and executes the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) when the first interrupt period has arrived. In this case, the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is set to a shorter cycle than the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). This makes it possible to transmit display data in a shorter period than in a configuration in which the process of transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

In addition, the process of transmitting display data to the display IC 266 is set in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which has a shorter interrupt cycle than the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), in which the process for advancing the game is set. has been done. This allows the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) to be activated at an appropriate cycle to execute the process for progressing the game, while producing the excellent effects already described. Become.

The second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is started by interrupting even when the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) is being executed. This makes it possible to set the transmission period of the display data to a predetermined period.

When the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is started, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) is prohibited from being interrupted, and when the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is ended, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) is permitted to be interrupted and executed when the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is being executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the process for transmitting display data.

The second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is started by interrupting the main process (Fig. 114) even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S7901 to S7918) is being executed. This makes it possible to control the display of multiple display units even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. Also, because the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is configured to interrupt and start the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it becomes possible to control the display of multiple display units when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the process at the start of the supply of operating power.

Even in a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (Figure 114), the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is interrupted and started, and in this situation, the second timer interrupt process In (FIG. 123), display data for displaying the current setting values on the fourth notification display device 204 is transmitted. As a result, the current setting value can be displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 in a situation where the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed, without complicating the processing configuration of the main process (FIG. 114). It becomes possible to make it possible to do so.

Even after the process at the start of supply of operating power is executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and activated every time the second interrupt period elapses. As a result, by using the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123), it is possible to determine both the situation in which the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and the situation after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. Also, it becomes possible to control the display of a plurality of display units.

Note that an update button 68b is provided as in the first embodiment, and in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting value is updated by one step each time the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value may be updated by one step each time the update button 68b is pressed. Further, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and a turning operation is performed, positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions, and the setting key is inserted. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

In addition, in the setting value update process (Fig. 116), the setting key insertion section 68a may be turned OFF to confirm the selected setting value, and the setting value update process may be terminated by pressing the reset button 68c. In addition, in a configuration in which the update button 68b is provided, in the setting value update process (Fig. 116), the setting key insertion section 68a may be turned OFF to confirm the selected setting value, and the setting value update process may be terminated by pressing the update button 68b.

Further, as a condition for executing the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the condition that the game machine main body 12 is in an open state may not be set, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state. The configuration may be such that the condition that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state and the condition that the front door frame 14 is in the open state are not set.

In addition, the condition for executing the setting confirmation process (Figure 115) may not be set so that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state, or the condition for the front door frame 14 to be in an open state may not be set, or both the condition for the gaming machine main body 12 to be in an open state and the condition for the front door frame 14 to be in an open state may not be set.

In addition, in the main processing (FIG. 114) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, it is identified that the power outage flag is not set to "1" or that the checksum is abnormal. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which RAM clear processing (step S7915) is executed. In this case, after the RAM clearing process (step S7915) is executed, the setting value updating process (step S7918) may be executed, and the notification indicating that the setting value updating process (step S7918) should be executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the game is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, or a configuration in which processing for controlling the progress of the game is started.

Also, in place of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114) is executed after the process of determining whether the power outage flag is set to "1" and the process of comparing the checksum. , may be configured to be executed before these processes. In this case, it is possible to give priority to the process for confirming the set value.

Further, the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is not limited to a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is executed every time the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started; for example, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is The configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed every time it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times). In this case, it is possible to periodically monitor whether or not the set value is normal, while reducing the frequency with which the monitoring is performed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed in the remaining process (steps S7921 to S7924) in the main process (FIG. 114). In this case, it is possible to monitor whether the set value is normal or not by using the free time when the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) are not being executed. It becomes possible.

Also, the configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed when a new round of play is started. More specifically, the configuration may be such that the setting monitoring process (step S8220) is executed before the win/loss determination process is executed when a new round of play is started. This makes it possible to prevent the win/loss determination process from being executed in a situation where the setting value is abnormal.

In addition, if the setting monitoring process (step S8220) identifies an abnormal setting value, the process may proceed to the setting value update process (step S7918).

In addition, if the setting monitoring process (step S8220) identifies an abnormal setting value, the main process (FIG. 114) may be started with a setting abnormality flag set to "1" in the work area 221 for specific control, and the game progress may be stopped with the setting abnormality flag set to "1", and the power must be turned OFF and ON to release the stopped state of the game progress. In this case, even if no operation is performed in the main process (FIG. 114) to execute the setting value update process, by forcibly executing the setting value update process when the setting abnormality flag is set to "1", it is possible to forcibly set a new setting value using the setting value update process set in the main process (FIG. 114).

In addition, the reserved information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the reserved information acquired when the game ball enters the second operating port 34 may be stored separately, and the first special chart display section and the second special chart display section may be provided as the special chart display section 37a corresponding to the reserved information. In this case, the display of the changing pattern in the first special chart display section and the display of the changing pattern in the second special chart display section may be executed in overlapping fashion, and when a predetermined game state is reached, the display of the changing pattern in either one of the special chart display sections may be configured to be extremely long. In this configuration, if the setting value is to be checked until the game is not being played, the waiting time will be long. In response to this, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63, so that the setting value can be checked without causing the above-mentioned waiting time.

In addition, in the low frequency support mode, the duration of the changing display of the patterns in the normal picture display section 38a may be extremely long. In this configuration, if one waits to check the setting value until a situation in which no game is being played occurs, the waiting time becomes long. In response to this, by executing a setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the process when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 begins, it becomes possible to check the setting value without incurring the above-mentioned waiting time.

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) is executed, the display contents of the first to fourth alert display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to those in the above embodiment. For example, instead of displaying the letter "k" on the third alert display device 203, only the central display segment may be illuminated, as with the first alert display device 201 and the second alert display device 202. In addition, the first to third alert display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth alert display device 204 may display a value corresponding to the current setting value.

Further, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the setting value update process (FIG. 116) is executed are not limited to the display contents in the above embodiments, and for example, the third notification Instead of displaying the letter "H" on the display device 203 for notification, it may be configured such that only the central display segment is in a light emitting state, similar to the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. . Alternatively, the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 may be turned off, and the fourth notification display device 204 may display a display corresponding to the current setting value.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the main CPU 63 simultaneously transmits the type data and display data to the display IC 266, the main CPU 63 may be configured to start transmitting the display data after starting to transmit the type data. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display data transmission is started during the transmission of the type data, or a configuration in which the display data transmission is started after the type data transmission is completed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the transmission of the type data is started after the transmission of the display data is started. In this case, the configuration may be such that the transmission of the type data is started during the transmission of the display data, or the transmission of the type data may be started after the transmission of the display data is completed.

Further, the display IC 266 is not limited to a configuration in which only one display IC 266 is provided in common to the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265; It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are provided in one-to-one correspondence. In this configuration, if the period for storing display data in each display IC provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifth display circuits 261 to 265 is short, the display data to each display IC is Depending on the provision period, there is a risk that unintended blinking may occur on each display section. In contrast, by consolidating the process for transmitting display data into the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), which has a relatively short interrupt cycle, as in the above embodiment, display data can be sent to each display IC. It becomes possible to shorten the provision cycle, and it becomes possible to prevent unintended blinking from occurring in each display section.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the winning random number counter C1 is provided in the main RAM 65, a configuration in which a random number circuit is provided to update the random number obtained in the win/loss determination process may be used. In this case, the internal function register setting process in the main process (Figure 114) will set up the random number of the random number circuit to correspond to the random number obtained in the win/loss determination process.

In addition, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), timer interrupt processing is prohibited and permitted before and after each of steps S8201 to S8221, but this may be changed. For example, timer interrupt processing may be prohibited and permitted before and after some of the processes in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117), while timer interrupt processing may not be prohibited or permitted before or after other processes in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). Also, timer interrupt processing may be prohibited and permitted between multiple processes included in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117).

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting to prohibit the interruption of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not performed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is executed with priority over the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117), making it possible to prioritize display control of multiple display units. . In addition, in this configuration, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) is prohibited from interrupting the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) in order to prevent the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) from being activated redundantly. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the interrupt of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is not prohibited.

Furthermore, if both the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) have interrupt triggers, the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is changed to the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117), a configuration may be adopted in which execution of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is prioritized over execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the interrupt trigger is A configuration may also be adopted in which the timer interrupt processing that occurs earlier is started first.

Also, instead of the configuration in which execution of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 117) is prohibited when the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123) is executed. The configuration may be such that the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) is started by interrupting even if the timer is currently running. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of processing for advancing the game over display control of a plurality of display units.

In addition, the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) is not set, and the various processes of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 123) are the main processing (Fig. 114) and the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 117), respectively. It may also be configured to be executed in a distributed manner. For example, in the setting confirmation process (step S7914) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a process is set to be performed by the user. In addition, in the setting value update process (step S7918) in the main process (FIG. 114), a display indicating that the setting is being updated and a display corresponding to the current setting value are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a process is set to be performed by the user. In addition, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117), the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 204 may be configured such that processing for display control is set.

In addition, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is not limited to a configuration in which only the process for display control of multiple display units is executed, and may be configured to execute a process different from the process for display control of multiple display units in addition to or instead of the process for display control of multiple display units. For example, a configuration may be used in which a part of the process for progressing the game is executed in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117), and the rest is executed in the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123). In this case, it is preferable to execute a process for which a relatively short execution cycle is preferable in the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123), which has a relatively short interrupt cycle, and execute a process for which a relatively long execution cycle does not cause problems in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117), which has a relatively long interrupt cycle. Also, among the processes of steps S8202 to S8221 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) of the above embodiment, the power outage information storage process (step S8202) may be executed in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the other processes may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, it is possible to repeatedly execute power outage monitoring at relatively short intervals. In addition to or instead of this configuration, it is also possible to repeatedly execute fraud detection process (step S8206) in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), and the other processes may be executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117). In this case, it is possible to repeatedly execute fraud monitoring at relatively short intervals.

The number of display circuits 261-265 for which the display IC 266 performs display setting of display data is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. ... is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. The number of display circuits 261-265 for which the display IC 266 performs display setting is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. The number of display circuits 261-265 for which the display IC 266 performs display setting is not limited to five, and may be two, three, four, six or more. The number of display circuits 261-265 for which the display

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the set value update process executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 33rd embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 33rd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 33rd embodiment will basically be omitted. In this embodiment, an update button 68b is provided on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment.

Figure 125 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps S8501 to S8508 in the setting value update process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8501). After that, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is greater than or equal to 1, which corresponds to "setting 1", and less than or equal to 6, which corresponds to "setting 6" (step S8502). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S8502, and the set value counter is set to "1" (step S8503). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."

When the determination in step S8502 is affirmative or when the process in step S8503 is executed, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504). When the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8504: NO), and on the condition that the update button 68b is pressed (step S8505: YES), the value of the set value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8506). As a result, the set value is updated to the next higher level each time the update button 68b is pressed once. Also, when the update button 68b is not pressed (step S8505: NO) or the value of the set value counter is incremented by 1, the process returns to step S8502, but when it is determined in step S8502 that the value of the set value counter is 7 or more, the set value counter is set to "1" in step S8503. As a result, when the update button 68b is pressed once in the "Setting 6" situation, the process returns to "Setting 1".

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8504: YES), the current set value is determined and the process advances to step S8507. In step S8507, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off using a setting key. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the setting key insertion section 68a is in an OFF state. If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned off (step S8507: NO), the process of step S8507 is executed again.

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF (step S8507: YES), the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8508).

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the setting value is updated by pressing the update button 68b, the setting value is determined by pressing the reset button 68c, and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned OFF. This completes the setting value update process. That is, in order to end the setting value updating process after updating the setting value in the setting value updating process, it is necessary not only to turn off the setting key insertion part 68a but also to press the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to attempt to play a game using the set values after the set values have been updated illegally.

<Thirty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration related to the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 33rd embodiment. The configurations different from the 33rd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as the 33rd embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the calculation result storage area 234 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control.

Information on the base value calculated by the main CPU 63 is stored in the calculation result storage area 234. The base value is the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on jackpot results nor the high-frequency support mode. It is the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out.

Regarding the calculation of the base value, in detail, in this embodiment, although a normal counter area 231 is provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control, a counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode and a counter area 233 for high frequency support mode are provided. is not provided. As in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal counter area 231 includes a general winning counter 231a for normal use, a special electric winning counter 231b for normal use, a first operating counter 231c for normal use, a second operating counter 231d for normal use, and A normal out counter 231e is provided. If one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the value of the general winning counter 231a for normal use is incremented by 1, and the special When one game ball enters the winning device 32, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the value of the special electric winning counter 231b for normal use is added. The value of the first operation counter 231c is incremented by 1, and when one game ball enters the second operation port 34, the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1, and the value of the second operation counter 231d for normal use is incremented by 1. When one game ball enters, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. Then, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
・Base value: Total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K92 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "To the first operating opening 33" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the second operating port 34")/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

The calculation of the base value is performed each time the result calculation process (Fig. 130) described later is executed in the management process (step S8920) of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) described later. The values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" when the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) becomes the management start reference number in a situation where the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, and when the management start flag is set to "1" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) becomes the shift reference number.

The management start reference number is set to 300, which is smaller than the shift reference number, as in the fifteenth embodiment. At the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is sometimes checked before shipping, and at that time, game balls are placed in each ball entry section and the subsequent operation is checked. The base value under such a situation may be a different value than under a normal gaming situation. Therefore, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the game ball Once the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the management start reference number, which is smaller than the shift reference number, the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0". This makes it possible to reduce the influence of the above operation check on the base value in a situation where normal games are being played after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Note that the reference number for starting management is not limited to 300, but can be any number as long as it is multiple, and may be set to a number less than 300, or may be set to a number greater than 300. Good too.

The shift reference number is set to 60,000 balls. Since the pachinko machine 10 shoots a maximum of 100 game balls per minute, 60,000 balls is the maximum number of balls shot in 10 hours. In this case, the general business hours of the game hall are about 13 hours, and the time during which games are played in neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is about 10 hours. Therefore, the shift reference number is set assuming the maximum number of game balls shot in roughly one business day. By clearing the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 to "0" each time the shift reference number is reached, it is possible to calculate the base value within the range of the shift reference number. Note that the shift reference number is not limited to 60,000 balls and can be any number multiple, and may be set to a number less than 60,000 balls or more than 60,000 balls.

The calculation result storage area 234 is provided with a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a third history area 314 as storage areas for storing information on the base value. There is. These various areas 311 to 314 all have the same storage capacity, specifically, a capacity of 1 byte so that base value information can be stored.

The current area 311 stores the base value calculated in the most recent result calculation process (FIG. 130). In other words, the latest base value is stored in the current area 311.

The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. In this case, if the previous calculation period is after the management start flag is set to "1", the first history area 312 contains the opening/closing execution mode according to the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) becomes the shift reference number in a situation other than the high-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode is Stored. In addition, if the management start flag is set to "1" as the previous calculation period has passed, the first history area 312 contains the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot result in the previous calculation period. The base value at the timing when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (that is, the total number of gaming balls supplied to the gaming area PA) reaches the management start reference number in a situation that is not in any of the high-frequency support modes is Stored.

The second history area 313 stores the final base value for the calculation period two times before. In this case, if the calculation period two times before is a situation after the management start flag was set to "1", the second history area 313 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode in the calculation period two times before becomes the shift reference number (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA). Also, if the management start flag is set to "1" after the calculation period two times before has elapsed, the second history area 313 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode in the calculation period two times before becomes the management start reference number.

The third history area 314 stores the final base value for the calculation period three times before. In this case, if the calculation period three times before is a situation after the management start flag was set to "1", the third history area 314 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode was in effect in the calculation period three times before (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) became the shift reference number. Also, if the management start flag was set to "1" after the calculation period three times before has elapsed, the third history area 314 stores the base value at the timing when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation in which neither the opening and closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode was in effect in the calculation period three times before (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) became the management start reference number.

The base values stored in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 are sequentially notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, each time the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the information is displayed in the predetermined order of current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314. The base value to be notified is switched, and the switching of the base value to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

FIG. 127(a) to FIG. 127(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 are notified in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1". FIG. 127(a) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the current status area 311 is notified, FIG. 127(b) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the first history area 312 is notified, FIG. 127(c) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified, and FIG. 127(d) shows an example of the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified.

As shown in FIG. 127(a) to FIG. 127(d), each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 has eight display segments 321 to 324. Of the eight display segments 321 to 324, seven of the display segments 321 to 324 are rod-shaped light-emitting areas of the same shape and size, and are arranged to form the number "8". On the other hand, one display segment 321 to 324 is a circular light-emitting area, and is provided at the lower right position of the seven display segments 321 to 324 arranged in the number "8" shape. When reporting any of the base values of the various areas 311 to 314, at least one display segment 321 to 324 is in a light-emitting state in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204.

The first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is being reported in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, the character "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201 regardless of the base value of any of the various areas 311 to 314. When information other than the base value is reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the character “b” is not displayed on the first notification display device 201. As a result, by confirming that the letter "b" is displayed on the first notification display device 201, the game hall manager can check the base on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to understand that the value is being reported.

The second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating which base value among the various areas 311 to 314 is being reported. Specifically, in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is being reported, the character "L." is displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(a). In a situation where the base value of the first history area 312 is being reported, the characters "1." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(b). In a situation where the base value of the second history area 313 is being reported, the characters "2." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(c). In a situation where the base value of the third history area 314 is being reported, the characters "3." are displayed on the second notification display device 202 as shown in FIG. 127(d). As a result, by checking the characters displayed on the second notification display device 202, the administrator of the game hall can determine which base value is being reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to understand whether the calculation period is the same as that of the previous calculation period.

In the second notification display device 202, the circular display segments 321 to 324 are in a light emitting state regardless of which base value among the various areas 311 to 314 is being notified. As will be described later, on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, any number from “0” to “9” will be displayed as a display corresponding to the base value. In this case, when any of the numbers "1" to "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 202, the three numbers will be displayed on the second to fourth notification display devices 202 to 204. This makes it difficult to understand the base value. In contrast, the circular display segments 321 to 324 provided at the lower right of the second notification display device 202 are in a light emitting state, so that the second notification display device 202 displays "1" to "1". 3" is displayed, the number displayed on the second notification display device 202 and the number displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. It becomes possible to distinguish and understand numbers.

On the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the number of the base value to be notified is displayed. The base value will be calculated as a decimal number up to the second decimal place, but the number at the first decimal place of the base value is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the number after the decimal point of the base value is The second place number is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. Here, when the base value is "1.00", the number "0" is displayed on each of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204. On the other hand, if the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 that are the target of notification, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device A "-" character is displayed on each of the devices 204. As a result, even when the base value calculated as a decimal to the second decimal place is notified on the two display devices, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, the base value It is possible to distinguish the display contents between the case where the base value is "1.00" and the case where the base value is not yet stored in the areas 311 to 314 that are the target of notification.

Note that the display contents of the combination of the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are the same when the base value is “1.00” and when the base value is “0.00”. On the other hand, in order to distinguish between the two, one of the former and the latter may be configured to maintain the light-emitting state of displaying "00", and the other may display "00" in a blinking state.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 129, we will explain how the base values of the various areas 311 to 314 are notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the management start flag is set to "1". FIG. 129(a) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current state area 311 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 129(b) shows the period during which the base value stored in the first history area 312 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 129(c) shows the period during which the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 129(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 129(e) shows the period from when the calculation period for the base value is newly started until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6,000 balls) in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 129(a), notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the notification target, and the second notification display device 202 displays the base value stored in the current area 311. A display indicating that the base value stored in the current area 311 is to be notified is displayed, and a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204.

Here, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the calculation initial display is performed from timing t1 to timing t2. Specifically, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high-frequency support mode after the new base value calculation period started (i.e., the gaming area During the period until the total number of game balls supplied to the PA reaches the initial standard number (specifically, 6000 balls), the balls will be displayed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202. Instead of continuing to light up the characters, the characters to be displayed are displayed blinking as an initial display of the calculation. Immediately after the calculation period starts, there is little information on the gaming history for calculating the base value, so the actual value of the base value may be a value that deviates significantly from the theoretical value range of the base value. On the other hand, by displaying the initial calculation display immediately after the calculation period starts, it becomes possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the calculation period has just started. .

In addition, in the calculation initial display, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204, which display a number corresponding to the base value, continue to light the number, while the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 display the characters to be displayed in a blinking manner. This makes it possible to notify that the calculation period has just started while not reducing the visibility of the base value. Note that this is not limited to the above, and even in the calculation initial display, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 may be configured to display a blinking display, or both of them may be configured to display a blinking display, or only one of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 may be configured to display a blinking display. In addition, the initial reference number is not limited to 6000, and may be any number as long as it is a plurality of numbers, and may be set to a number less than 6000 or more than 6000.

At time t2, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA since time t1 in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode (i.e. the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6,000), and the calculation initial display ends as shown in FIG. 129(e). As a result, the lighting display starts not only on the third alert display device 203 and the fourth alert display device 204, but also on the first alert display device 201 and the second alert display device 202.

Thereafter, as the display duration period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t3, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(a), and the display is shown in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final base value calculation result in the previous calculation period, initial calculation display is not performed.

Thereafter, as the display duration period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 129(b), and ), notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the final base value calculation result in the calculation period two times ago, initial calculation display is not performed.

After that, at the time t5, the display duration period from the time t4 has elapsed, and notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 ends as shown in FIG. 129(c), and notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 begins as shown in FIG. 129(d). In this case, the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the final calculation result of the base value in the calculation period three times ago, so the initial calculation display is not performed.

After that, at the time t6, the display duration period from the time t5 has elapsed, and as shown in FIG. 129(d), the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 ends, and as shown in FIG. 129(a), the notification of the base value stored in the current state area 311 begins. In this case, in order to notify that the period from when the calculation period for the base value has newly started until the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation other than the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result or the high frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the initial reference number (specifically, 6,000 balls) is displayed from the time t6 to the time t7, as shown in FIG. 129(e).

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t6 at the timing t8, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is finished as shown in FIG. 129(a), and the display is shown in FIG. As shown, notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started. In this case, since the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the final base value calculation result in the previous calculation period, initial calculation display is not performed.

Next, a processing configuration for making it possible to notify the base value as described above will be explained.

The management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which will be described later, is a process corresponding to non-specific control in step S3803, similar to the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Reads the management execution processing program. In this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment.

In the check process, when the entry of one game ball into the general winning port 31 is identified in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the high frequency support mode, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by one, when the entry of one game ball into the special winning device 32 is identified, the value of the normal special winning counter 231b is incremented by one, when the entry of one game ball into the first operating port 33 is identified, the value of the normal first operating counter 231c is incremented by one, when the entry of one game ball into the second operating port 34 is identified, the value of the normal second operating counter 231d is incremented by one, and when the entry of one game ball into the out port 24a is identified, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by one. In addition, the check process executes a result calculation process and a display process.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process. Note that the processing from step S8601 to step S8615 in the result calculation process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a calculation process of the base value is executed (step S8601). In this calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231. The method of calculating the base value has already been explained. Then, the calculated base value is overwritten in the current state area 311 (step S8602).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8603). The management start flag has a value of "0" when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is started for the first time after the Pachinko machine 10 is manufactured. Furthermore, when the non-specific control work area 223 including the management start flag is cleared to "0" and initialized, the value of the management start flag becomes "0". The total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA in a situation where the management start flag is "0" and neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming area PA) When the total number of supplied game balls becomes the management start reference number, "1" is set in the management start flag. Further, when the management start flag is set to "1", the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" and a new calculation period is started. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the influence of the operation check at the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10 to affect the base value in a situation where a normal game is being played after the Pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

If the determination in step S8603 is negative, the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8604). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the management start reference number of 300 (step S8605).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, the management start flag is set to "1" (step S8606). Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step S8607). In the data shift process, information stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , first history area 312→second history area 313, and current area 311→first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314. is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the two previous calculation periods, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is stored as the final base value in the previous calculation period. 1 history area 312. In data shift processing, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR instruction is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes.

However, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", basically no base value information is stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, so in step S8607, management is essentially Only the final base value of the calculation period in a situation where the start flag is not set to "1" is shifted to the first history area 312. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8608).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, the total number is calculated by summing all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step S8609). Then, it is determined whether the calculated total number is greater than the initial reference number of 6000 (step S8610). If a negative determination is made in step S8610, the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8611), and if an affirmative determination is made in step S8610, the corresponding The calculation initial flag is cleared to "0" (step S8612). The calculation initial flag indicates the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the gaming area This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether the total number of game balls supplied to the PA has reached the initial reference number.

When the process of step S8611 or step S8612 is executed, it is determined whether the total number calculated in step S8609 is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60,000 (step S8613). If an affirmative determination is made in step S8613, data shift processing is executed (step S8614). In the data shift process, the information stored in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314 in the same way as in step S8607. 3 history area 314, first history area 312→second history area 313, and current area 311→first history area 312. As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314. is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the two previous calculation periods, and the last calculated base value in the current calculation period is stored as the final base value in the previous calculation period. 1 history area 312. In data shift processing, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR instruction is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step S8615).

Figure 131 is a flowchart showing the display process. Note that steps S8701 to S8714 in the display process are executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8701). If the determination in step S8701 is positive, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is decremented by 1 (step S8702). The switching timing counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to determine that it is time to switch the base values to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 among the base values stored in the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. As already explained, each time the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses, the base values to be notified are switched in a predetermined order of the current state area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314, and the switching of the base values to be notified in the predetermined order is repeated.

When the process of step S8702 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the switching timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0", thereby determining whether the display duration period has elapsed since the base value currently being notified became the target of notification (step S8703). If a positive determination is made in step S8703, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step S8704). Then, if the value of the display target counter after incrementing 1 exceeds the maximum value of "3" (step S8705: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step S8706).

The display target counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to identify the base value to be notified in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from among the base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current status area 311 is the base value to be notified, when the value of the display target counter is "1", the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the base value to be notified, when the value of the display target counter is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the base value to be notified, and when the value of the display target counter is "3", the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the base value to be notified.

If a negative judgment is made in step S8705, or if the processing of step S8706 is executed, a value corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter of the non-specific control work area 223 as a value corresponding to the next switching timing of the notification target (step S8707).

If a negative determination is made in step S8703 or if the process in step S8707 is executed, the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control corresponds to the base value that is the current notification target. Execute the process to set the display data to be displayed. Specifically, first, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8708). The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the base value of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 the value corresponds to in the calculation result storage area 234 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. and display data for causing the process to occur.

Then, the base value is read from the area corresponding to the value of the display target counter among the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, and calculation result data corresponding to the digits in the first decimal place and the digits in the second decimal place in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8709). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a number corresponding to the digit in the first decimal place in the base value of the notification target, and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display a number corresponding to the digit in the second decimal place in the base value of the notification target.

As described above, display data consisting of display type data and calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276. By transmitting the display data to the display IC 266 in a second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) to be described later, a display corresponding to the display data is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. .

Further, the process of step S8709 is executed every time the display process (FIG. 131) is executed, regardless of the switching timing of the base value to be notified. As already explained, each time the calculation result storage process (FIG. 130) is executed, the base value is calculated using the current values of each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, and the calculated base value is It is stored in the current state area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234. In this case, as described above, the process of step S8709 for setting the calculation result data in the display target setting area 276 is performed every time the display process (FIG. 131) is executed regardless of the switching timing of the base value of the notification target. When the base value of the current area 311 is changed in a situation where the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified, the changed base value can be notified.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value of the current area 311 is to be notified based on the value of the display target counter (step S8710), and the calculation initial flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to " 1" is set (step S8711). As already explained, the calculation initial flag is the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode after the new base value calculation period starts. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) has reached the initial reference number. If an affirmative determination is made in both step S8710 and step S8711, the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S8712), and either step S8710 or step S8711 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S8713, the initial display flag is cleared to "0".

The initial display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify a situation in which the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 should be flashed to notify the user that the base value in the current state area 311 is the target of notification and that the base value is the initial base value calculated after the start of the calculation period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described later identifies that the initial display flag is set to "1", not only is the display data stored in the display target setting area 276 transmitted to the display IC 266, but when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are caused to display corresponding to the display data, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 are caused to flash and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 are caused to light up. In addition, if the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) described below determines that the initial display flag is not set to "1", when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are to display a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display target setting area 276, all of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are lit up.

On the other hand, if the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step S8701, regardless of the value of the display target counter, the current area 311 The base value is read, and calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place and second decimal place of the read base value are set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the number at the first decimal place in the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the base value of the current area 311 is displayed on the third notification display device 203. The second decimal place digit in the value is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period will not be reported, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period will be reported. be done.

When the management start flag is not set to "1", calculation result data is set in the display target setting area 276, but display type data is not set. Details will be described later, but when a base value is notified when the management start flag is not set to "1", the display contents of the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 will be different from the display contents when a base value is notified when the management start flag is set to "1".

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 132. Note that the processing in steps S8801 to S8825 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S8801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Then, the internal function register setting process is executed (step S8802). In the internal function register setting process, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to the second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the 33rd embodiment, there are a first timer interrupt process and a second timer interrupt process so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short as the timer interrupt process. Both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are started by interrupting the main process. Also, the second timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt process. Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process are not being executed, the second timer interrupt process is started first regardless of the order in which the periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process. However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process may be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process.

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process is set in a specified register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. In addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, the internal function register setting process also executes processes for setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8803). The start-up processing flag indicates that even if the first timer interrupt processing is activated, among the various processing set for the first timer interrupt processing, processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed. On the other hand, this flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the first timer interrupt process should be terminated without executing the process for advancing the game.

Figure 133 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. As already explained, the first timer interrupt processing is periodically started at a 4 millisecond period, which is the first interrupt period. Also, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set in the program for specific control.

Steps S8901 to S8905 execute the same processing as steps S301 to S305 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment described above. That is, power outage monitoring is executed by executing power outage information storage processing in step S8901. Specifically, as with the power outage information storage processing (FIG. 101) in the 30th embodiment described above, it monitors whether a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cut is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if a power outage is identified, it executes power outage processing and then enters an infinite loop. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. In addition, in step S8902, a random number update process for lottery is executed to update the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal power role opening counter C4. In step S8903, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the numerical information of the random number initial value counter CINI. In step S8904, a counter update process for fluctuation is executed to update the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS. In addition, in step S8905, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether an event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of multiple types of events is monitored, and if any of these multiple types of events has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the game stop flag or the launch processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8906). If "1" is not set to either the game stop flag or the launch processing flag (step S8906: NO), the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is executed. In steps S8907 to S8919, the same processing as steps S8208 to S8220 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in the 33rd embodiment is executed. In addition, in step S8920, the management processing is executed in the same manner as step S8221 of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117) in the 33rd embodiment, but the contents of the check processing of the management execution processing called in the management processing are the contents already described. This check process executes update processing for each counter 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, and also executes result calculation processing (Figure 130) and display processing (Figure 131).

On the other hand, if at least one of the game stop flag and the start-up processing flag is set to "1" (step S8906: YES), the first timer interrupt processing is executed without executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920. finish. In other words, not only when the game stop flag is set to "1" but also when the start-up processing flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt processing. However, the processes in steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed.

As in the 33rd embodiment, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 132) before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is started and the interrupt is permitted (step S8805), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power ends and the remaining processing (steps S8822 to S8825) is started. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 when the start-up processing flag is set to "1" in the first timer interrupt processing as described above, it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process, even if the startup processing in progress flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed, and power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) is being executed, and the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps S8801 to S8819) Even if a power outage occurs in a situation where ) is being executed, it is possible to perform power outage processing in response to the power outage. As already explained in the power outage processing, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control. Since the information is stored, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, even if a power outage occurs during the setting value update process (step S8819), the setting values selected at that time can be stored and retained as the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during execution of the set value update process, there is no need to execute the set value update process again when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Incidentally, when the setting value update process is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not prohibited from interrupting, and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started in the main process (FIG. 132) including the setting value update process, the return address information of the main process (FIG. 132) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was started is finished is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that was started is finished, the main process (FIG. 132) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 132), after the start-up process flag is set to "1" in step S8803, a value corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S8804). In this embodiment, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 from the start of the process of step S8804 until the initial check period has elapsed, in order to allow the manager of the game hall to check whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 provided in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be normally illuminated. Specifically, as the check display, all of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are maintained in an illuminated state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b). In step S8804, information corresponding to this initial check period is set in the check counter.

The initial check period is set to a time longer than the longest time required for the process to control the progress of the game to start if none of the processes in steps S8811, S8812, S8815, and S8819 described below are executed in the main process. Therefore, the game may start in a situation where a check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, interrupt permission is set (step S8805). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt cycle. However, since the start-up process in progress flag was set to "1" in step S8803, even if the first timer interrupt process is started, the various processes of the first timer interrupt process, such as power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring, are executed, but the first timer interrupt process ends without executing any process for progressing the game.

Thereafter, in steps S8806 to S8825, processes similar to steps S7905 to S7924 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. Specifically, in step S8806, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed. That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-third embodiment described above, the main controller 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S8806: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8807). The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 133). The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the last time the power was shut off.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S8807: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step S8808). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the 33rd embodiment. Then, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 that were calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 during the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped are read from the specific control work area 221, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step S8808 (step S8809). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step S8810).

If a negative determination is made in step S8807 or step S8810, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S8811). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly at the time of the previous power shutdown, or if the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to a change in the storage state of information for at least one of the following items since the last time the power was shut off, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed. However, the process for advancing the game will not be executed.

Then, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality occurred in the power failure flag or checksum at the start of the supply of operating power is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step S8812). By receiving the abnormality command, the audio and light emission control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and causes the speaker unit 54 to output a voice saying "Please change the settings." In addition, a text image saying "Please change the settings" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification may be configured to continue when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step S8819) is executed.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (steps S8807 and S8810: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key. Then, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is open to the inner frame 13 and the gaming machine main body 12 is open to the outer frame 11 (step S8814). The front door open sensor 95 is used to detect whether or not the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, as in the thirtieth embodiment. The main body open sensor 96 is used to detect whether or not it is in the open state, as in the above-mentioned 30th embodiment. The setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8813: YES), and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13, and the gaming machine main body is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. 12 is in the open state (step S8814: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step S8815). Details of the setting confirmation process will be explained later.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step S8806: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step S8816). The contents of the RAM clearing process are the same as step S7915 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment. Thereafter, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step S8817: YES), and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13, and the game is being operated with respect to the outer frame 11. If the machine body 12 is in the open state (step S8818: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step S8819). Details of the setting value update process will be explained later.

When the processing of step S8812 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S8813 or step S8814, when the processing of step S8815 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S8817 or step S8818, or when the processing of step S8819 is executed, the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S8820). By clearing the start-up processing in progress flag to "0", the state in which processing to progress the game is not executed even if the first timer interrupt processing is started is released. Note that in step S8820, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S8821). The content of the information included in the return command and the processing content of the audio emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as in step S7920 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment. .

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S8822 to S8825. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S8822 to S8825 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, the remaining processing in steps S8822 to S8825 can be said to be non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps S8822 to S8825, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 134. Note that the processes from step S9001 to step S9014 in the second timer interrupt process are executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9001). By disabling the generation of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) will interrupt the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) even if the first interrupt cycle has elapsed. It is possible to prevent it from being started. Furthermore, since the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) is prohibited from occurring, even if the second interrupt cycle has elapsed during the execution of the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134), the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) is prohibited. It becomes possible to prevent the process (FIG. 134) from being activated redundantly.

Thereafter, the checking counter is updated (step S9002). In the process of updating the checking counter, when the value of the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more, the value of the checking counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, when the checking counter is used to measure the initial check period, the value of the checking counter is periodically decremented each time the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is started. The Rukoto.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S9003). The setting update display flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137). As already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is performed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63. Even if the value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interruption.

The situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting value update process (FIG. 137) in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9003, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update is executed (step S9004). In this setting process, similarly to step S8403 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are updated on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

If a negative determination is made in step S9003, it is determined whether the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step S9005). The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136). As already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, when the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. However, since the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it is necessary to set the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63. Even if the confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being executed, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interruption.

The situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" means that the main CPU 63 is executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 137) in the current processing time of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). This means that the process was started by interrupting the situation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9005, a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed (step S9006). In the setting process, similarly to step S8405 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the thirty-third embodiment, the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are checked on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Display data for displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and displaying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

If the determination in step S9005 is negative, normal setting processing is executed (step S9007). The normal setting processing will be described in detail later.

When the processing of step S9004, step S9006, or step S9007 has been executed, the processing of steps S9008 to S9014 is executed. The processing content of these steps S9008 to S9014 is the same as steps S8407 to S8413 of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) in the 33rd embodiment.

Specifically, first, the transmission state of the signal through the type data signal line LN1 and the type clock signal line LN2 is turned off (step S9008), and the signal is transmitted through the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4. The state is set to OFF state (step S9009). Thereafter, the type counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is updated (step S9010).

The type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing round of the second timer interrupt processing. When the value of the type counter is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the target for transmission, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the target of transmission. When the value of the type counter is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 becomes the transmission target, and when the value of the type counter is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 becomes the transmission target. If the data is to be transmitted and the value of the type counter is "5", the display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 is to be transmitted. In the type counter update process, the value of the type counter is incremented by 1, and if the value of the type counter after adding 1 exceeds the upper limit value of "5", the value of the type counter is set to "1". . As a result, the display data transmission target is sequentially changed in the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 each time the second timer interrupt process is performed.

Thereafter, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step S9011). Specifically, when the value of the type counter is "1", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "2", the type data The type data corresponding to the display circuit 262 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "3", the type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the value of the type counter is "3". When the value of the type counter is "4", the type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main side ROM 64, and when the value of the type counter is "5", the type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main side ROM 64. Read from the side ROM 64.

Then, display data is read from the display data buffers 271 to 275 that correspond to the value of the type counter (step S9012). Specifically, if the type counter value is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271; if the type counter value is "2", display data is read from the second display data buffer 272; if the type counter value is "3", display data is read from the third display data buffer 273; if the type counter value is "4", display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274; and if the type counter value is "5", display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step S9013). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step S9011 is transmitted to the display IC 266. In addition, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step S9012 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) (step S9014).

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the normal setting process in step S9007 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). Note that the processing from step S9101 to step S9109 in the normal setting processing is executed by the main CPU 63 using a specific control program and specific control data.

First, it is determined whether the value of the check counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more (step S9101). If the value of the check counter is 1 or more (step S9101: YES), it means that it is the initial check period. In this case, the data of the check display is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9102). As already explained, the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is display data for display control of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204. In addition, the data of the check display is display data for causing the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 to perform the check display, that is, display data for making all the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 emit light. When the check display data is supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b), all display segments 321-324 in each of the first through fourth alert display devices 201-204 are illuminated as a check display. This allows the amusement hall manager to know whether each of the display segments 321-324 in the first through fourth alert display devices 201-204 can be illuminated normally.

The initial check period can be cancelled when checking the settings or updating the settings. Such a cancellation configuration will be described below. Figure 136 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step S8815 of the main process (Figure 132). Note that steps S9201 to S9206 in the setting confirmation process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, an operation instruction command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step S9201). Upon receiving the operation instruction command, the audio and light emission control device 81 outputs a voice message saying "Please operate the reset button 68c" from the speaker unit 54. This notification continues until the reset button 68c is pressed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9202). If the reset button 68c is not pressed, the process waits in step S9202. When the reset button 68c is pressed (step S9202: YES), the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9203). This cancels the initial check period.

Thereafter, the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step S9204). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), an affirmative determination is made in step S9005 as already explained, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to In step 204, display data for displaying that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and displaying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9006). As a result, similarly to the thirty-third embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the current setting value. will be held.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step S9205: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9206). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The state in which this occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, the initial check period is canceled midway and the current status is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value will be announced. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main processing is executed. Even if the configuration is such that the initial check period is started in the situation where the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the process at the start of supply of operating power is not executed. When confirming the setting value in a situation where the current setting value is to be confirmed, it is possible to cancel the initial check period and display the current setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the set value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

Furthermore, even if the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period starts first, so the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 It is possible to check the set value after checking whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 can normally be in a light emitting state. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process executed in step S8819 of the main process (FIG. 132). Note that the processes from step S9301 to step S9310 in the setting value update process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, an update start command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step S9301). Upon receiving the update start command, the audio and light emission control device 81 outputs a voice message saying "Settings are being changed" from the speaker unit 54. This notification continues until the setting value update process is completed.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is 1 or more corresponding to "setting 1" and 6 or less corresponding to "setting 6" (step S9302). If the value of the set value counter is "0" or 7 or more, a negative determination is made in step S9302, and the set value counter is set to "1" (step S9303). As a result, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "setting 1."

If a positive determination is made in step S9302 or if the processing of step S9303 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned OFF using the setting key (step S9304). In this case, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from an ON state to an OFF state, or it may be such that it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a is in an OFF state.

If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned OFF (step S9304: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305). If the reset button 68c has been pressed (step S9305: YES), and provided that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step S9306: NO), the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step S9307), and the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step S9308).

The initial check period is cancelled by clearing the check counter to "0". In addition, by setting the setting update display flag to "1", the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) makes a positive determination in step S9003 as already explained, and stores display data in the fifth display data buffer 275 for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display an indication that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and to display the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 (step S9004). As a result, similar to the 33rd embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that the setting values are being updated and to display the current setting values.

If the determination in step S9306 is affirmative, or if the processing in step S9308 is executed, the value of the setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control is incremented by 1 (step S9309). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher setting value each time the reset button 68c is pressed once. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step S9305: NO) or the setting value counter value is incremented by 1, the processing returns to step S9302. However, if it is determined in step S9302 that the setting value counter value is 7 or greater, the setting value counter is set to "1" in step S9303. As a result, if the reset button 68c is pressed once in the "setting 6" situation, the setting value returns to "setting 1."

If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off (step 9304: YES), the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step S9310). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The condition that occurs is canceled. In this case, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

When the setting value update process is executed as described above, the initial check period is canceled midway and the current setting value is notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on the condition that the reset button 68c is pressed. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in the main CPU 63, even if the initial check period is started and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a check display while the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main processing is being executed, the initial check period can be canceled and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can display the current setting value when the setting value is updated while the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to update the setting value while checking the current setting value without waiting for the initial check period to elapse.

Furthermore, even if the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed in the main process (FIG. 132), the initial check period starts first, so the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 The setting value can be updated after confirming whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 can normally be in a light emitting state. This makes it possible to update setting values accurately.

In addition, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the setting value in the setting value update process (FIG. 137), the initial check period is canceled. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed to update the setting value, the initial check period is canceled accordingly, which makes it possible to improve the operability for canceling the initial check period.

Returning to the explanation of the normal setting process (FIG. 135), if the value of the check counter is "0" and it is not the initial check period (step S9101: NO), it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S9103). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9103: NO), a setting process for the display before management start is executed for the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 (step S9104). In this setting process, display data for turning on all display segments 321, 322 in the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. Note that the configuration is not limited to one in which all display segments 321, 322 in each of the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 are illuminated, and the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 may each be configured to flash all display segments 321, 322.

Then, the calculation result data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read (step S9105), and the read calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth alarm display devices 203, 204 (step S9106). As already explained, in the display process (FIG. 131), if the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S8701: NO), the base value is read from the current area 311, and the calculation result data corresponding to the digits in the first and second decimal places of the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step S8714). In step S9106, this calculation result data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 as display data to be applied to the third and fourth alarm display devices 203, 204.

When the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in steps S9104 and S9106 is supplied to the display IC 266, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(c), in a situation where all display segments 321, 322 are illuminated in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, the third notification display device 203 displays the first decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period, and the fourth notification display device 204 displays the second decimal place of the base value calculated in the current calculation period. By displaying the numbers corresponding to the base value on the third and fourth notification display devices 203, 204 while all display segments 321, 322 are illuminated in each of the first and second notification display devices 201, 202, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that the currently notified base value is the base value in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1".

In addition, in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", as already explained, each time the display duration period (specifically 5 seconds) elapses, the current area 311 → first history area 312 → first history area 312 → 2 history area 313→3rd history area 314, the base value to be notified is switched in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a predetermined order, whereas the management start flag is changed to 1" is not set, the base value of the current area 311 is maintained as the notification target. Thereby, when the operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is checked at the stage of shipping the Pachinko machine 10, the current base value can be checked at any timing.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9103: YES), the display data set in the display target setting area 276 in the work area 223 for non-specific control is read, and the read display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9107). When the display data is supplied to the display IC 266, if the base value in the current status area 311 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(a) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification; if the base value in the first history area 312 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(b) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification; if the base value in the second history area 313 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(c) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification; and if the base value in the third history area 314 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 127(d) is made on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S9108). As already explained, the initial display flag is used in the first notification to notify that the base value of the current area 311 is the initial base value of the calculation after the start of the calculation period in the situation where the base value of the current area 311 is the target of notification. This flag is used by the main CPU 63 to specify that the display device 201 and the second display device 202 should be displayed blinking. If the initial display flag is set to "1" (step S9108: YES), a blinking setting process is executed for the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 (step S9109).

In the blinking setting process, when a display corresponding to the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display is blinked. Configure the settings to make it work. As a setting for blinking display, specifically, regarding the transmission of display data to the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202, the display data currently set in the fifth display data buffer 275 is set. The corresponding data is sent to the display IC 266 until a predetermined lighting period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and then all display segments 321 and 322 of the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 are turned off. Data indicating the state is transmitted to the display IC 266 until a predetermined light-off period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and thereafter the predetermined light-on period and predetermined light-off period are alternately repeated. As a result, if the base value in the current area 311 becomes the notification target immediately after a new base value calculation period starts, the initial calculation display is performed on the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202. Therefore, it is possible to make the game hall manager understand that the current base value reported on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the value immediately after the start of the new calculation period. It becomes possible.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 138. FIG. 138(a) shows the initial check period, and FIG. 138(b) shows the base value being notified on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1". FIG. 138(c) shows the display period before the start of management, in which the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially announced on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. 138(d) shows a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth display periods. 138(e) shows the display period during the setting update performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. 138(f) shows the timing when the reset button 68c is pressed. FIG. 138(f) shows the display period during setting confirmation during which the display indicating the setting value is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. FIG.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and A case where the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is not executed will be described.

At timing t1, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b).

After that, at timing t2, the initial check period ends without being canceled midway, as shown in FIG. 138(a). In this case, at timing t2, the pre-management display period starts, as shown in FIG. 138(b). During the pre-management display period, as shown in the explanatory diagram in FIG. 128(c), all display segments 321, 322 are illuminated on the first alarm display device 201 and the second alarm display device 202, and a number corresponding to the current base value is displayed on the third alarm display device 203 and the fourth alarm display device 204.

After that, at the timing of t3, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" and the mode is neither the open/close execution mode due to the big win result nor the high frequency support mode, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the management start reference number, which is a number less than the shift reference number. As a result, the management start flag is set to "1", and the pre-management start display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(b). In this case, the normal display period begins at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 138(c). During the normal display period, the base values stored in the various areas 311-314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 as shown in FIG. 127(a) to FIG. 127(d).

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started when the management start flag is set to "1" and the setting confirmation process (Figure 136) and the setting value update process (Figure 137) are not executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power.

At timing t4, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). This starts the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in the explanatory diagram in FIG. 128(b).

After that, at timing t5, the initial check period ends without being canceled midway, as shown in FIG. 138(a). In this case, at timing t5, the normal display period begins, as shown in FIG. 138(c). During the normal display period, the base values stored in the various areas 311-314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, as shown in FIG. 127(a) to FIG. 127(d).

Next, in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is set to "1", the setting value update process (Fig. 137 ) is executed.

At timing t6, an initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 128(b).

Then, in the middle of the initial check period, the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started, and at timing t7, the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 138(f). This ends the initial check period in the middle at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 138(a), and at timing t7, the setting update display period starts as shown in FIG. 138(d).

Thereafter, at timing t8, the display period during setting update ends as shown in FIG. 138(d). In this case, the normal display period starts at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 138(c). In the normal display period, as shown in FIGS. 127(a) to 127(d), the base values stored in various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Announcements will be made sequentially.

Next, we will explain the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started when the management start flag is set to "1" and the setting confirmation process (Figure 136) is executed during the process at the start of the supply of operating power.

At timing t9, the initial check period starts as shown in FIG. 138(a). This starts the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in the explanatory diagram in FIG. 128(b).

Then, in the middle of the initial check period, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is started, and at timing t10, the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 138(f). This ends the initial check period in the middle at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 138(a), and at timing t10, the setting confirmation display period starts as shown in FIG. 138(e).

Then, at timing t11, the setting confirmation display period ends as shown in FIG. 138(e). In this case, at timing t11, the normal display period begins as shown in FIG. 138(c). During the normal display period, the base values stored in the various areas 311-314 in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 as shown in FIG. 127(a) to FIG. 127(d).

Note that when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is performed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power. Or, if the setting value update process (Figure 137) is executed and the initial check period is canceled midway, the display period before starting management starts after the display period during setting update or the display period during setting confirmation ends. It happens.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

An initial check period may occur in which each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is in a light emitting state as a check display. This makes it possible to check whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 is in a light emitting state, and to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. It becomes possible to do so.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts, an initial check period for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 starts. This makes it possible to check early on whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal when the supply of operating power starts.

An initial check period for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started each time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, an initial check period for the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is started without requiring any special operation. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

If a cancellation trigger occurs even before the initial check period has elapsed, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated midway. This makes it possible to terminate the check display even in the middle of the initial check period and to have the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display other information.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an initial check period is started and the above-mentioned check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before the game starts.

In a configuration where predetermined setting-related processes such as setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) and setting value update processing (FIG. 137) are executed in a situation where the processing for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the supply of operating power is started. An initial check period begins in the situation where the current process is being performed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the initial check period into the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power.

In the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) and the setting value update process (FIG. 137), these predetermined settings are Before the related processing is executed, an initial check period is started, and the above-mentioned check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, after confirming whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, the current setting values are confirmed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to confirm the setting values accurately.

Based on the fact that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) was executed in a situation during the initial check period, the first to fourth notifications are executed even if the initial check period has not passed. The above-mentioned check display on the display devices 201 to 204 is ended midway. As a result, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 201 do not have to wait for the initial check period to elapse. After completing the above-mentioned checking process in step 204, it becomes possible to display the current set values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

When the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is executed during the initial check period and the reset button 68c is pressed, the above check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is terminated midway even if the initial check period has not elapsed. This makes it possible to terminate the initial check period at any timing after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) has been started. For example, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is started, it becomes possible to terminate the above check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 and start displaying the current setting value after the manager of the game hall has fully confirmed that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal.

In addition, in the setting value update process (FIG. 137), pressing the reset button 68c updates the setting value of the selection target. In this case, by terminating the check display and starting to display the current setting value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above, a dedicated operation for terminating the check display and starting to display the current setting value is not required. This makes it possible to improve the operability of the work for updating the setting value.

The calculation result storage area 234 stores multiple base values derived using information from the normal counter area 231 for different time periods. This makes it possible to grasp the base values for multiple time periods, and therefore to accurately grasp the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA.

The calculation result storage area 234 includes a current state area 311 in which the most recent base value is stored, and first to third history areas 312 to 314 in which previously derived base values are stored. This makes it possible to grasp the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA not only for the most recent time, but also for past times.

The base values that are repeatedly calculated at relatively short intervals before one calculation period has elapsed are stored in the current area 311, and the base values calculated when one calculation period has elapsed are stored in the first to third It is stored in history areas 312-314. This makes it possible to grasp the latest ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area PA, as well as to grasp the above ratio in the past in units of one calculation period. becomes possible. Furthermore, since base values in units of one calculation period are stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314, the number of base values stored in the first to third history areas 312 to 314 is suppressed. becomes possible.

The various counters 231a-231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" when a calculation period has elapsed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the normal counter area 231. Even if the various counters 231a-231e in the normal counter area 231 are configured to be cleared to "0" in this way, the base values calculated when a calculation period has elapsed are stored in the first to third history areas 312-314, making it possible to later grasp the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA during the past calculation period.

A plurality of history areas 312 to 314 are provided as areas for storing past base values. This makes it possible to compare base values in multiple past calculation periods.

The base values stored in the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 are displayed in sequence on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to grasp the base values for multiple calculation periods individually while limiting the number of notification devices 201 to 204.

Even if the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901), and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, Power outage processing is executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with the power outage.

In a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) includes the power outage information storage process (step S8901), the first timer interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to periodically monitor for the occurrence of a power outage even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated by interrupting even if the remaining process is being executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, by using the first timer interrupt process that is started by interrupting the remaining process, it is possible to periodically monitor the occurrence of a power outage while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. Become.

If the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts and is started while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, " 1" is set, the process for advancing the game is not executed. As a result, in a configuration in which the first timer interrupt process is interrupted and started even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the occurrence of a power outage is periodically monitored. It is possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being executed in a situation where the process at the start of supply is being executed.

In a configuration where the setting value update process (Fig. 137) is executed while the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the power outage information is not updated even when the process for starting the supply of operating power is being executed. Storage processing (step S8901) is executed. As a result, even if a power outage occurs while setting the setting values to be used, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Note that the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to a configuration in which the check display is terminated when the initial check period has elapsed, and an operation for terminating the check display may be performed. The check display may be continued until the check is performed. For example, the operation for terminating the termination may include operating the reset button 68c regardless of whether either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) or the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is being executed. Often, an operation section other than the reset button 68c may be operated. In this case, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or set value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Therefore, it is possible to check the base value or set value after checking whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal. Furthermore, since the check display is terminated based on the operation of the operating unit, it is possible to terminate the check display at a desired timing.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated, regardless of whether or not the supply of operating power has started, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are used for checking. The configuration may be such that the display starts. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when checking the base value or set value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

Further, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c, such as the update button 68b, is operated, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are activated. A configuration may be adopted in which the check display is started, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without any operation of the specific operation unit, the check display is not started. In this case, in a configuration in which the check display is performed upon the start of the supply of operating power, it becomes possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the manager of the gaming hall.

Furthermore, the base value is not limited to the configuration in which the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. The base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when it is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 that the main body is in the open state. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start checking display, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying for checking. The base value may be displayed in step 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before checking the base value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

Also, if the main process (FIG. 132) is started with the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main process is started with the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed when it is determined that the setting value will be confirmed.

Furthermore, if the main processing (Fig. 132) is started when the conditions for executing the setting value update processing (Fig. 137) are satisfied, the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are If the main process is not started and the conditions for executing the setting value update process are not satisfied, a check display may be started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

Also, if the main processing (FIG. 132) is started in a state where either the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 136) or the condition for executing the setting value update processing (FIG. 137) is satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main processing is started in a state where neither the condition for executing the setting confirmation processing nor the condition for executing the setting value update processing is satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed when it is confirmed that the setting value will be confirmed or updated.

The check display is not limited to a configuration in which each of the display segments 321-324 in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201-204 is maintained in an illuminating state, and each of the display segments 321-324 in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201-204 may be configured to flash. The check display may also be configured in such a way that each of the display segments 321-324 in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201-204 is sequentially illuminated one by one or a portion of each of the display segments 321-324 is illuminated at least once within the initial check period.

In addition, the process of displaying the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to a configuration in which the process is executed as a process corresponding to a specific control, but may be a configuration in which the process is executed as a process corresponding to a non-specific control.

Further, if the base value is not stored in any of the first to third history areas 312 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234, the history areas 312 to 314 are stored in the first to fourth notification display devices 201. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the information is not subject to notification in steps 204 to 204. In this case, for example, if the base value is stored in the current area 311 and the first history area 312, but the base value is not stored in the second history area 313 and the third history area 314, the display duration period Each time, the notification targets in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched between the current area 311 and the first history area 312, and the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 It will not be subject to notification.

In addition, the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313 and the third history area 314 of the calculation result memory area 234 are configured to store a base value expressed as a decimal to two decimal places, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that information on a combination of the digit to the first decimal place and the digit to the second decimal place of the base value is stored, or the configuration may be such that information on a combination of the total number of game balls paid out to enable the base value to be calculated (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34") and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) is stored. In the former case, the information in the various areas 311 to 314 can be set directly in the display target setting area 276, and in the latter case, a base value is calculated using the information in the various areas 311 to 314, and then the information on the digits to the first and second decimal places extracted from the base value is set in the display target setting area 276.

The calculation result storage area 234 may be configured to have only the current state area 311 and the first history area 312 as areas for storing base values, or may be configured to have only the current state area 311, the first history area 312, and the second history area 313. Four or more areas may be provided as history areas for storing information on past base values.

Furthermore, the calculation result storage area 234 is not limited to a configuration in which the various areas 311 to 314 have fixed addresses and the base value is shifted in these various areas 311 to 314 as necessary, but may also be configured such that the various areas 311 to 314 are provided as ring buffers.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which a base value is calculated as the mode information, the 61st to 68th parameters may be calculated as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this case, the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured to store all of the 61st to 68th parameters, respectively, or the current status area 311 may be configured to store the 61st to 68th parameters, but the first to third history areas 312 to 314 may store only some parameters, such as the 61st parameter.

Furthermore, in addition to or in place of the base value as mode information, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot result may be calculated and stored, or the probability of occurrence of a high frequency support mode may be calculated and stored.

In addition, the trigger for shifting the base value in the various areas 311 to 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is not limited to when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or exceeds the shift reference number, but may be configured to cause a shift when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 8 hours) has elapsed, or when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, or when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there are multiple triggers for causing a shift.

In addition, the display segments 321, 322 in the first and second alarm display devices 202 are not limited to being maintained in an illuminating state until the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", but may be configured so that the display segments 321, 322 in the first and second alarm display devices 202 are flashing. In addition, the display of "bL.--" → "b1.--" → "b2.--" → "b3.--" may be repeated in the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 until the management start flag is set to "1".

In addition, until the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", a check display in which the display segments 321-324 in each of the first to fourth alarm display devices 201-204 are illuminated is not performed, and instead, each of the display segments 321, 322 in each of the first and second alarm display devices 201, 202 is illuminated or flashing, and a display corresponding to the current base value is performed in the third and fourth alarm display devices 203, 204, so that a display corresponding to the management start flag not being set to "1" is performed.

In addition, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag is set to "1" and game progress is stopped, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to have each of the display segments 321 to 324 emit light in the same way as the check display, or each of the display segments 321 to 324 flash.

Further, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not limited to the configuration in which the main side CPU 63 performs the display control, but may be configured to be performed by a dedicated control means. The configuration may be performed by the display control device 82, or the display control device 82 may perform the configuration. In this case, when displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control body, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 When setting values are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control unit. In addition, when the main side CPU 63 executes the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are Information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control entity so that the check display is started.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 35th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 35th embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step S9401 to step S9426 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

Steps S9401 to S9403 execute the same processing as steps S8801 to S8803 of the main processing (FIG. 132) in the 35th embodiment. After that, interrupt permission is set (step S9404). As a result, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt period. However, since the start-up processing in progress flag is set to "1" in step S9403, even if the first timer interrupt processing is started, the various processes of the first timer interrupt processing, such as power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring, are executed, but the first timer interrupt processing is terminated without executing any process for progressing the game.

After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9405). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. If a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the 35th embodiment.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the checking counter is "0" (step S9406). Then, the process waits in step S9406 until the value of the checking counter becomes "0". As a result, the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continues until the initial check period set in step S9405 has elapsed.

Then, steps S9407 to S9426 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9407 to S9426 are the same as steps S8806 to S8825 in the main processing (FIG. 132) in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main CPU 63 starts processing at the start of the supply of operating power, a check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and in this state, the progress of processing at the start of the supply of operating power is stopped until the initial check period has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent setting confirmation and setting value updates from being performed during the initial check period, making it possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. It also makes it possible to prevent game play from starting in the middle of the initial check period.

Thirty-seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 35th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 35th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 140 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment that is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S9501 to S9525 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps S9501 to S9518, the same processing as steps S7901 to S7918 in the main processing (FIG. 114) in the 33rd embodiment is executed. After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step S9519). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. If a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the 35th embodiment.

Then, the processes from step S9520 onwards are executed. The process contents of steps S9520 to S9525 are the same as steps S7919 to S7924 in the main process (Figure 114) in the 33rd embodiment described above.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps S9501 to S9518) is completed in the main CPU 63 and before the remaining processing (steps S9522 to S9525) is started. This makes it unnecessary to control the initial check period when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

The setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518) are executed as processes at the start of the supply of operating power, whereas the initial check period starts after the processes at the start of the supply of operating power are completed. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, this does not affect the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9518) is executed. Even if neither S9514) nor the setting value update process (S9518) are executed, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing of the main CPU 63 (FIG. 140) includes cases where either the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518). This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither the value update process (step S9518) is executed, and is a process that is executed in common even when neither the value update process (step S9518) is executed, and neither the setting confirmation process (step S9514) nor the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, a check mark is placed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process that is executed later than the setting confirmation process (step S9514) and the setting value update process (step S9518). The process to start the display is set. By setting the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common process, it is possible to simplify the process configuration and achieve the advantages already described. This makes it possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even in a situation where a check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing for advancing the game. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (step S9514) or the setting value update process (step S9518) is executed, the game can be played. It becomes possible to prevent the start timing of the process for proceeding from being delayed.

It is also possible to configure the process after step S9520 not to start until the initial check period has elapsed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game from starting while the check display is being displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<Thirty-eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal setting processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the above-mentioned 35th embodiment. The configuration different from the above-mentioned 35th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 35th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 141 is a flowchart showing the normal setting process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes of steps S9601 to S9605 in the normal setting process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step S9601). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step S9601: NO), check display data is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 (step S9602). By supplying the data for the check display to the display IC 266, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, all the display segments 321 to 324 in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in a light emitting state. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether each of the display segments 321 to 324 of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can normally be in a light emitting state.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step S9601: YES), the process of steps S9603 to S9605 is executed. The process of steps S9603 to S9605 is the same as steps S9107 to S9109 in the normal setting process (FIG. 135) in the 35th embodiment. By executing the process of steps S9603 to S9605, the base values stored in the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially notified by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and when the base value of the current situation area 311 is notified immediately after the start of a new calculation period, the first and second notification display devices 201 and 202 perform an initial calculation display.

According to the above configuration, when the management start flag is not set to "1", there is an initial check period in which check displays are performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is limited to a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1" at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, etc. becomes possible.

<39th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above in the configuration regarding setting values. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

Figures 142(a) to 142(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting correspondence memory area 325 provided in the main ROM 64.

In the setting correspondence memory area 325, a win/lose table for the low probability mode, a win/lose table for the high probability mode, and display data for the setting values used to display the current setting values on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the setting value update process (FIG. 116) are set in correspondence with the setting values of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the setting correspondence memory area 325 includes a first setting information storage area 325a, a second setting information storage area 325b, a third setting information storage area 325c, a fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fifth setting information storage area 325e, and a sixth setting information storage area 325f.

Each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f includes a storage area for storing a low probability mode win/fail table that is referred to when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and a storage area for storing a low probability mode win/fail table that is referred to when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. A storage area for storing the high probability mode validity table that is referred to when the high probability mode is selected, and a storage area for the first to fourth notifications in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 115) and the setting value update process (FIG. 116). A storage area is provided for storing display data of setting values used to display the current setting values on the display devices 201 to 204. In each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, a predetermined area of multiple bytes is secured as a storage area for storing the success/failure table for the low probability mode, and an area for storing the success/failure table for the high probability mode. A predetermined area of multiple bytes is reserved as a storage area for storing setting value display data, and a 1-byte area is reserved as a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Therefore, each of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f has a storage capacity of multiple bytes. In this case, the start address of the first setting information storage area 325a is A(1), the start address of the second setting information storage area 325b is A(2), and the start address of the third setting information storage area 325c The start address of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is A(4), and the start address of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is A(5). The start address of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is A(6).

In the above configuration, the first form of pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has six setting values, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", as the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, as in the above embodiment 33. In this case, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode differs for each of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", while the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same for each of them. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(a), in the first setting information storage area 325a, the first low probability hit/miss table LT (1) corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the low probability mode, the common high probability hit/miss table HT common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the hit/miss table of the high probability mode, and the display data for displaying "1" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. In the second setting information storage area 325b, a second low-probability win/loss table LT (2) corresponding to "Setting 2" is stored in a storage area for storing a win/loss table for the low probability mode, a common high-probability win/loss table HT common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in a storage area for storing a win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "2" is stored in a storage area for storing display data for the setting value.

In the third setting information storage area 325c, a third low probability correctness table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored in a storage area for storing the correctness table for the low probability mode, and a third low probability correctness table LT(3) corresponding to "setting 3" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "3" is stored. In the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in a storage area for storing the correctness table for the low probability mode, and a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the propriety table, and " Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

In the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the fifth low-probability win/loss table LT (5) corresponding to "setting 5" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the common high-probability win/loss table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "5" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value. In the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low-probability win/loss table LT (6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the common high-probability win/loss table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "6" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data of the setting value.

In the case of the configuration of the first form described above, the probability of a jackpot result in low probability mode increases with a larger setting value. On the other hand, the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode is the same regardless of the setting value. Note that since the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode even at "setting 1" is higher than the jackpot probability in low probability mode at "setting 6".

In the first form in which "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as setting values, in order to execute the validity judgment process in Step S504 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), it is executed in Step S503. The process of reading out the validity table will be explained. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the read-out process of the validity table. Note that the processing from step S9701 to step S9705 in the read-out process of the validity table is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9701). The setting value counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine which of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting corresponding storage area 325 should be referenced when reading the win/lose table and when reading the display data for the setting value.

Then, from among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting corresponding storage area 325, a storage area corresponding to the value of the setting value counter read in step S9701 is selected (step S9702). The setting value counter is configured to take any value from "1" to "6" as in the 33rd embodiment. If the setting value counter value is "1", the first setting information storage area 325a is selected. If the setting value counter value is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected. If the setting value counter value is "3", the third setting information storage area 325c is selected. If the setting value counter value is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected. If the setting value counter value is "5", the fifth setting information storage area 325e is selected. If the setting value counter value is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected.

When making this selection, a correspondence table previously stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced. The correspondence table defines the correspondence between the value of the setting value counter and the start addresses of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. In detail, the start address A(1) of the first setting information storage area 325a is set in correspondence with the value of "1" of the setting value counter, the start address A(2) of the second setting information storage area 325b is set in correspondence with the value of "2" of the setting value counter, the start address A(3) of the third setting information storage area 325c is set in correspondence with the value of "3" of the setting value counter, the start address A(4) of the fourth setting information storage area 325d is set in correspondence with the value of "4" of the setting value counter, the start address A(5) of the fifth setting information storage area 325e is set in correspondence with the value of "5" of the setting value counter, and the start address A(6) of the sixth setting information storage area 325f is set in correspondence with the value of "6" of the setting value counter.

After that, if the current win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode (step S9703: NO), the win/lose table for the low probability mode is read from the setting information storage area 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9704). On the other hand, if the current win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S9703: YES), the win/lose table for the high probability mode is read from the setting information storage area 325a to 325f selected in step S9702 (step S9705).

By executing the win/fail table reading process as described above, the win/fail table corresponding to the current win/fail lottery mode is read out from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the value of the setting value counter. Then, in the validity determination process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the read validity table is used to determine whether the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result.

Next, we will explain the process when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started while the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63. do. In this case, in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123), a process for setting the fifth display data buffer 275 while updating the set value is executed (step S8403). FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during a setting update. Note that the processing from step S9801 to step S9805 in the setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the value of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control in the main RAM 65 is read (step S9801). Then, from among the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the setting corresponding storage area 325, a storage area corresponding to the setting value counter value read in step S9801 is selected (step S9802). The setting value counter is configured to take any value from "1" to "6" as in the 33rd embodiment above, and when the setting value counter value is "1", the first setting information storage area 325a is selected, when the setting value counter value is "2", the second setting information storage area 325b is selected, when the setting value counter value is "3", the third setting information storage area 325c is selected, when the setting value counter value is "4", the fourth setting information storage area 325d is selected, when the setting value counter value is "5", the fifth setting information storage area 325e is selected, and when the setting value counter value is "6", the sixth setting information storage area 325f is selected. When making this selection, a corresponding table pre-stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced, similar to the win/lose table read process (Figure 143).

Thereafter, display data of setting values is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f selected in step S9802 (step S9803). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step S9804). Further, display data for displaying a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated on the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step S9805).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9805 is This is performed on the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and a display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step S9804 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed to the first ~Performed on the fourth notification display devices 201-204.

Note that the settings that are executed when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) is interrupted and started while the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63 The setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during confirmation (step S8405) is similar to the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update (FIG. 144) regarding setting of display data of setting values. processing is executed.

Here, in the first form of pachinko machine 10, six setting values from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, but depending on the model and type of pachinko machine 10, fewer than six setting values may be used. Specifically, in the second form of pachinko machine 10 shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(b), three setting values are set: "Setting 1", "Setting 3", and "Setting 6", in the third form of pachinko machine 10 shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(c), four setting values are set: "Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", and "Setting 4", in the fourth form of pachinko machine 10 shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(d), only one setting value, "Setting 1", is set. In this case, regardless of whether the pachinko machine 10 is of the second to fourth form, the setting correspondence memory area 325 having the first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f that allow the setting of six levels of setting values is used, just like the pachinko machine 10 of the first form.

In detail, when the setting corresponding storage area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(b), the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area Various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in 325d. That is, in the first setting information storage area 325a and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, a first low probability correctness table LT (1 ) is stored, and a first high probability correct/fail table HT(1) corresponding to "Setting 1" is stored in the storage area for storing the high probability mode correct/fail table, and the display data of the set value is stored. Display data for displaying "1" is stored in the storage area for storage.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e. That is, in the second setting information storage area 325b and the fifth setting information storage area 325e, a third low probability correctness table LT (3 ) is stored, and a third high probability correctness table HT(3) corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the accuracy table of the high probability mode, and the display data of the setting value is stored. Display data for displaying "3" is stored in the storage area for storage.

The third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f store various information corresponding to "setting 6." In other words, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the sixth setting information storage area 325f, the sixth low-probability win/loss table LT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the sixth high-probability win/loss table HT(6) corresponding to "setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "6" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data for the setting value.

In the case of the second configuration described above, even if the configuration uses a setting correspondence memory area 325 having the first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f, there are fewer setting values set than the number of six, which is the number of the first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f. The probability of a jackpot result in low probability mode increases with a larger setting value, and the probability of a jackpot result in high probability mode increases with a larger setting value. The jackpot probability in high probability mode in "setting 1" is higher than the jackpot probability in low probability mode in "setting 6".

In the case of the configuration of the second embodiment, in the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143), whether the value of the setting value counter is "1" or "4" corresponds to "setting 1". The validity table is read out, and whether the value of the setting value counter is "2" or "5", the validity table corresponding to "setting 3" is read out, and the value of the setting value counter is In either case of "3" or "6", the validity table corresponding to "Setting 6" is read out.

In the process of reading the pass/fail table (Fig. 143), the pass/fail table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This makes it possible to make the processing configuration of the process of reading the pass/fail table (Fig. 143) the same as when a six-stage setting value is set, even when a three-stage setting value is set.

In the case of the second embodiment, when the setting corresponding memory area 325 capable of setting six setting values is used, three setting values are set, so that the number of setting value levels that can be set in the setting corresponding memory area 325 can be divided by the number of setting value levels to be used. In other words, the number of setting value levels to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of setting value levels that can be set in the setting corresponding memory area 325, and is a number different from the maximum number of setting value levels. In this case, the same number of setting information memory areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f so that when the three setting values are arranged one by one in ascending order as one group, the group is repeated. As a result, if the reset button 68c is operated repeatedly during the setting value update process (FIG. 116) when the setting value counter value is "1", the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will change in the following order: "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → ... In other words, a different setting value will be displayed with each operation of the reset button 68c, and if one display cycle is defined as a cycle in which each of the settable setting values is displayed once, a certain number of display cycles will be repeated. This makes it easier to perform setting value update operations.

In the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update, the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This makes it possible to make the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) the same as when a six-stage setting value is set, even when a three-stage setting value is set.

In addition, in the second form of pachinko machine 10, various information corresponding to "setting 1" may be stored in the first setting information storage area 325a and the second setting information storage area 325b, various information corresponding to "setting 3" may be stored in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, and various information corresponding to "setting 6" may be stored in the fifth setting information storage area 325e and the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In other words, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f may be assigned to each setting value to be used, and the same setting value may be set in consecutive setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the setting value counter. In this case, if the reset button 68c is operated repeatedly when the value of the setting value counter is "1" during the setting value update process (Figure 116), the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will change in the following order: "1" → "1" → "3" → "3" → "6" → "6" → "1" → ...

In detail, when the setting corresponding memory area 325 is used in the pachinko machine 10 of the third form, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(c), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the first setting information memory area 325a and the second setting information memory area 325b. In other words, in the first setting information memory area 325a and the second setting information memory area 325b, the first low probability hit/miss table LT (1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the memory area for storing the hit/miss table of the low probability mode, the common high probability hit/miss table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the memory area for storing the hit/miss table of the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "1" is stored in the memory area for storing the display data of the setting value.

The third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d store various information corresponding to "Setting 2." In other words, in the third setting information storage area 325c and the fourth setting information storage area 325d, the second low-probability win/loss table LT (2) corresponding to "Setting 2" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the common high-probability win/loss table HT common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "2" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data for the setting value.

The fifth setting information storage area 325e stores various information corresponding to "Setting 3." In other words, in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, the third low-probability win/loss table LT (3) corresponding to "Setting 3" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the common high-probability win/loss table HT common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "3" is stored in the storage area for storing the display data for the setting value.

Various information corresponding to "Setting 4" is stored in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. That is, in the sixth setting information storage area 325f, a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored in the storage area for storing the correctness table of the low probability mode, and a fourth low probability correctness table LT(4) corresponding to "setting 4" is stored. A common high-probability table HT that is common to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" is stored in the storage area for storing the probability mode probability table, and a storage area for storing display data of setting values. Display data for displaying "4" is stored.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, even if the configuration uses the setting storage area 325 having the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, these first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f The setting value for the number of stages is set to be smaller than the number of 6 stages. The probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode increases as the setting value increases, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is the same regardless of the setting value. Furthermore, since the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is 1/30, the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode even with "setting 1" is higher than the jackpot probability of the low probability mode with "setting 4". There is a high probability.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, in the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143), whether the value of the setting value counter is "1" or "2" corresponds to "setting 1". The validity table is read out, and whether the value of the setting value counter is "3" or "4", the validity table corresponding to "setting 2" is read out, and the value of the setting value counter is If the value of the setting value counter is "5", the validity table corresponding to "Setting 3" is read out, and if the value of the setting value counter is "6", the validity table corresponding to "Setting 4" is read out.

In the read-out process of the validity table (FIG. 143), the validity table is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. As a result, even when four levels of set values are set, the processing configuration of the read/fail table read process (Fig. 143) is the same as when six levels of set values are set. becomes possible.

In the case of the configuration of the third embodiment, when the setting corresponding memory area 325 capable of setting six setting values is used, four setting values are set, so the number of setting value levels that can be set in the setting corresponding memory area 325 cannot be divided by the number of setting value levels to be used. In this case, two consecutive setting information memory areas 325a to 325d are assigned to each of "Setting 1" and "Setting 2" in relation to the value of the setting value counter, and one setting information memory area 325e, 325f is assigned to each of "Setting 3" and "Setting 4". As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from a situation where the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are changed in the following order: "1" → "1" → "2" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "1" → ....

In the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (FIG. 144) during the setting update, the setting value is displayed from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This is a configuration for reading data. As a result, even if four levels of setting values are set, the processing configuration of the setting process (Fig. 144) can be made the same as when six levels of setting values are set. It becomes possible.

In addition, in order to change the display of the setting value in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in response to one operation of the reset button 68c in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), it is preferable that various information corresponding to the same setting value is not set in consecutive setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in relation to the value of the setting value counter. For example, a configuration is conceivable in which various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 325a, various information corresponding to "Setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 325b, various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 325c, various information corresponding to "Setting 4" is set in the fourth setting information storage area 325d, various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the fifth setting information storage area 325e, and various information corresponding to "Setting 2" is set in the sixth setting information storage area 325f. In this case, if the reset button 68c is operated repeatedly when the value of the setting value counter is "1" during the setting value update process (Figure 116), the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will change in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "1" → "2" → "1" → ....

When the setting corresponding memory area 325 is used in the fourth form of pachinko machine 10, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 142(d), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in all of the first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f. In other words, in the first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f, the first low probability win/loss table LT (1) corresponding to "setting 1" is stored in the memory area for storing the win/loss table for the low probability mode, the common high probability win/loss table HT common to "setting 1" to "setting 6" is stored in the memory area for storing the win/loss table for the high probability mode, and display data for displaying "1" is stored in the memory area for storing the display data for the setting value.

In the case of the configuration of the fourth form described above, even if the configuration uses a setting corresponding memory area 325 having first to sixth setting information memory areas 325a to 325f, only one type of setting value is set. Even in this configuration where only one type of setting value is set, the win/fail table read process (Figure 143) is configured to read the win/fail table from the setting information memory area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter. This makes it possible to make the processing configuration of the win/fail table read process (Figure 143) the same as when six levels of setting values are set, even when only one type of setting value is set.

In the case of the fourth embodiment, since there is no need to set a setting value, there is basically no need to execute the setting value update process (Fig. 116). However, if an abnormality occurs in the setting value, the setting value update process (Fig. 116) may be executed. In this case, "setting 1" is assigned to all of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. Therefore, if the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from a situation in which the setting value counter value is "1" in the setting value update process (Fig. 116), the setting value displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will continue to display "1" in the following order: "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → "1" → ...

In the setting process (FIG. 144) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update, the display data of the setting value is read from the setting information storage area 325 corresponding to the value of the setting value counter, regardless of the number of stages of the setting value. This makes it possible to make the processing configuration of the setting process (FIG. 144) the same as when six stages of setting values are set, even when only one type of setting value is set.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is to be used. It happens. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second to fourth forms, a first predetermined number (specifically, six) of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are provided for storing the validity table corresponding to the setting value. In this configuration, the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to share the configuration regarding the setting corresponding storage area 325 with the pachinko machine 10 of the first form in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and changing the number of types of setting values. This makes it possible to easily design the pachinko machine 10 in the case where the pachinko machine 10 is used.

In the setting value update process (step S7918), the numerical information of the setting value counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control is changed each time the reset button 68c is operated, thereby changing the setting value to be used, and the correct/incorrect table of the setting information storage area 325a to 325f corresponding to the changed numerical information is used in the correct/incorrect judgment process, so that the correct/incorrect judgment process is executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used. In this case, each correct/incorrect table of the setting value that can be set is stored in at least one setting information storage area 325a to 325f, and the same correct/incorrect table is stored in a portion of the first predetermined number of multiple setting information storage areas 325a to 325f, so that the correct/incorrect table is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f. This makes it possible to use the first predetermined number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f as is and to use the configuration that determines the setting value to be used using the setting value counter as is, while making it possible to make the number of types of setting values to be used less than the first predetermined number.

The system is configured to read a win/fail table from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f that correspond to the numerical information of the setting value counter, and to execute the win/fail judgment process using the read win/fail table. This makes it possible to use the system's configuration for reading a win/fail table when executing the win/fail judgment process, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number.

When the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed, the display data for the setting value is read from the setting information storage areas 325a to 325f corresponding to the numerical information of the setting value counter, and the display corresponding to the read display data for the setting value is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. This makes it possible to use the configuration for reading the display data for the setting value when performing the display corresponding to the setting value, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number.

The number of stages of the setting value to be used is a divisor of the maximum number of stages of the setting value that can be set in the setting corresponding storage area 325, and is a number different from the maximum number of stages. In this case, the same number of setting information storage areas 325a to 325f are assigned to each of the setting values to be used, and the setting values are assigned to the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f so that when a mode in which three setting values are arranged one by one in ascending order is considered as one group, the group is repeated. As a result, when the reset button 68c is repeatedly operated from a state in which the value of the setting value counter is "1" in the setting value update process (FIG. 116), the setting values displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 will be changed in the following order: "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → "3" → "6" → "1" → ... In other words, the display will be changed to a different setting value for one operation of the reset button 68c, and a certain display rotation will be repeated if the display rotation is a rotation in which the settable setting values are displayed one by one. This makes it easier to update settings.

Note that in a configuration in which the high probability mode validity table does not change depending on the setting value, the high probability mode validity table is stored in the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f of the setting correspondence storage area 325. Instead, the settings may be stored in a storage area different from the setting storage area 325 in the main ROM 64.

In addition, if there is only one setting value to be used, the winning/losing table corresponding to that setting value may be set in only one setting information storage area 325a-325f, and the winning/losing table may not be set in the remaining setting information storage areas 325a-325f. In addition, if there are multiple setting values to be used but the number of stages is less than the number of the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a-325f, the winning/losing table corresponding to each setting value may be set in only one corresponding setting information storage area 325a-325f, and the winning/losing table may not be set in the remaining setting information storage areas 325a-325f. In this configuration, by making the numerical information corresponding to the setting information storage areas 325a-325 where a winning/losing table is not set numerical information that cannot be selected by the setting value counter, it is possible to prevent the setting information storage areas 325a-325f where a winning/losing table is not set from being selected when reading out the winning/losing table or the display data of the setting value.

<Fortieth embodiment>
In the above-mentioned thirty-ninth embodiment, a setting corresponding memory area 325 capable of setting six levels of setting values is utilized, but in the present embodiment, a setting corresponding memory area 326 capable of setting three levels of setting values is utilized.

FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the setting corresponding storage area 326 stored in advance in the main side ROM 64.

The settings storage area 326 is provided with a first settings information storage area 326a, a second settings information storage area 326b, and a third settings information storage area 326c. In the first form of pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 145(a), various information corresponding to "Setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a, and "Setting 2" is set in the second setting information storage area 326b. Various information corresponding to "Setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. In other words, in the first form of pachinko machine 10, the maximum number of settable setting values are set in the setting correspondence storage area 326.

In the second form of pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 145(b), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in all of the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second form, only one type of setting value is set using the setting corresponding storage area 326 in which three levels of setting values can be set.

In the third form of pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 145(c), various information corresponding to "setting 1" is set in the first setting information storage area 326a and the second setting information storage area 326b, and various information corresponding to "setting 3" is set in the third setting information storage area 326c. In other words, in the third form of pachinko machine 10, two levels of setting values are set using the setting corresponding storage area 326, which can set three levels of setting values.

The above configuration allows the setting corresponding memory area 326, which allows three setting values to be set, to be used as is for the second and third forms of pachinko machines 10, which use setting values with fewer than three setting values. Also, as with the thirty-ninth embodiment, the processing configuration for the win/lose table read process (FIG. 143) and the processing configuration for the setting process to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting update (FIG. 144) can be used in common for the first to third forms of pachinko machines 10.

<41st embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) or the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, it is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. This embodiment differs from the thirty-third embodiment in that a predetermined notification is executed on the display section. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

Figure 146 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various display sections provided in an area that is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Various display sections are provided, including a special chart display section 37a, a special chart reserved display section 37b, a regular chart display section 38a, and a regular chart reserved display section 38b. These functions are the same as those of the first embodiment. The special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a are arranged side-by-side, and a round display section 330 is arranged side-by-side with the special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a.

The round display section 330, like the special display section 37a and the regular display section 38a, has seven display segments 331-337. All seven display segments 331-337 are rod-shaped light-emitting areas of the same shape and size, and are arranged to form the number "8". The illumination of the seven display segments 331-337 is individually controlled.

The round display section 330 notifies the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result. In this embodiment, the jackpot results that can be selected when a jackpot is won in the judgment process are the first jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively small, and the round game. There is a second jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the number of executions is relatively large. Specifically, the round game is executed twice in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first jackpot result, and the round game is executed 16 times in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second jackpot result.

In addition, the first jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. In addition, the second jackpot result includes a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode becomes a low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the support mode becomes a low frequency support mode, and a jackpot result in which the winning lottery mode changes to a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. There is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode.

FIG. 146(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the round display section 330.

When an opening and closing execution mode is started in response to any jackpot result, the round display unit 330 changes from a non-display state in which all display segments 331-337 are turned off to a display state in which at least some of the display segments 331-337 are illuminated. While the opening and closing execution mode continues, the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 at the start of the opening and closing execution mode is maintained. Then, when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the round display unit 330 changes from a display state to a non-display state.

In the open/close execution mode in which two rounds of play are executed, the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display unit 330 are turned off and the fifth to seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned on, as shown in FIG. 146(b). In the open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play are executed, the first to fourth display segments 331 to 334 of the round display unit 330 are turned on and the fifth to seventh display segments 335 to 337 are turned off, as shown in FIG. 146(b). This allows the manager of the game hall to know which type of open/close execution mode the open/close execution mode corresponds to by checking the round display unit 330 when the open/close execution mode is executed on the pachinko machine 10.

When the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the master CPU 63, a corresponding display is performed on the round display unit 330. Specifically, when the set value update process (step S7918) is being executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, the fifth display segment 335, and the seventh display segment 337 of the round display unit 330 are turned off, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned on.

The display on the round display section 330 corresponding to the setting value update process (step S7918) is started when the setting value update process (step S7918) is started, and is displayed when the setting value update process (step S7918) is finished. be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display section 330 when the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The display content displayed in 330 is also different. Thereby, the game hall manager can easily understand whether or not the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed by checking the round display section 330. Moreover, such an understanding can be performed using the round display section 330.

If the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed in the main process (FIG. 114) in the main CPU 63, a corresponding display is performed on the round display section 330. Specifically, when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is executed, as shown in FIG. 146(b), the first display segment 331, the third display segment 333, and The fifth display segment 335 and the seventh display segment 337 are turned on, and the second display segment 332, the fourth display segment 334, and the sixth display segment 336 are turned off.

The display on the round display unit 330 corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is started, and is displayed when the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is finished. be terminated. This display content is different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and is also different from the display content displayed on the round display unit 330 when the setting value update process (step S7918) is executed. The displayed content is also different. Thereby, by checking the round display section 330, the game hall manager can easily grasp whether or not the setting confirmation process (step S7914) is being executed. Moreover, such an understanding can be performed using the round display section 330.

In the situation where the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are executed in the main process (FIG. 114), the process for advancing the game is not executed. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) are not executed in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. Further, in a situation where one of the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) is being executed, the other is not executed. Therefore, even if the round display section 330 is also used as a display section for performing each display, the situations in which each display should be performed will not occur redundantly.

The display contents of the round display unit 330 are not limited to the above display contents, and may be any as long as it is possible to distinguish each situation from the display contents of the round display unit 330. For example, one of the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) may be configured so that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are lit. Also, one of the display corresponding to the setting confirmation process (step S7914) and the setting value update process (step S7918) may be configured so that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are lit and maintained in that state, and the other may be configured so that all of the first to seventh display segments 331 to 337 are flashing.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the round display unit 330 displays a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, a configuration may be adopted in which these displays are performed in the special figure display unit 37a. A configuration may be adopted in which these displays are performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. In addition, a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process is displayed on any one of the special figure display section 37a, general figure display section 38a, and round display section 330, and the setting is displayed on the other display section. A configuration may also be adopted in which a display corresponding to the value update process is performed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the reserved information acquired based on the game ball entering the first operating port 33 and the reserved information acquired based on the game ball entering the second operating port 34 are stored separately, and the special chart display unit 37a is provided with a first special chart display unit in which a game round is executed triggered by the reserved information corresponding to the first operating port 33, and a second special chart display unit in which a game round is executed triggered by the reserved information corresponding to the second operating port 34, the first special chart display unit may be configured to display a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and a display corresponding to the setting value update process, the second special chart display unit may be configured to display a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and a display corresponding to the setting value update process, or the first special chart display unit may be configured to display a display corresponding to the setting confirmation process and the second special chart display unit may be configured to display a display corresponding to the setting value update process.

Further, a configuration may be provided in which a dedicated display unit is provided to display that a setting confirmation process is being executed, and to display that a setting value update process is being executed. The configuration may be such that a dedicated display section is provided for displaying that the setting confirmation process is being executed or that the setting value update process is being executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which a display section is provided. In this case, the dedicated display section may be configured to be display-controlled by the main CPU 63, or may be configured to be display-controlled by the audio emission control device 81 or the display control device 82.

<42nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirty-third embodiment described above in the processing configurations of the main processing and the first timer interrupt processing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the thirty-third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those in the thirty-third embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

Figure 147 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps S9901 to S9923 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, power-on initial setting processing is executed (step S9901). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step S9902). In the internal function register setting process, similar to step S7902 of the main process (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment, a first timer interrupt process (a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process) is performed. 148) is set to the first interrupt cycle (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set. ) is set to a second interrupt cycle (specifically, 2 milliseconds) that is shorter than the first interrupt cycle.

After that, interrupt permission is set for the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) (step S9903). As a result, the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt period. On the other hand, interrupt permission is not set for the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148) remains in an interrupt-prohibited state.

Thereafter, the processes from step S9904 to step S9917 are executed. The processing contents of steps S9904 to S9917 are the same as steps S7905 to S7918 of the main processing (FIG. 114) in the thirty-third embodiment.

After steps S9904 to S9917 are completed, interrupt permission is set for the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148) (step S9918). This causes the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148) to interrupt and be started at the first interrupt period. In other words, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 117) is started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) is started at the second interrupt period. Thereafter, steps S9919 to S9923 execute the same processes as steps S7920 to S7924 of the main process (Fig. 114) in the 33rd embodiment.

Figure 148 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. As already explained, the first timer interrupt processing is periodically started at a 4 millisecond period, which is the first interrupt period. Also, the program corresponding to the first timer interrupt processing is set in the program for specific control.

First, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) (step SA101). By prohibiting the occurrence of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148), it is possible to prevent the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being started in duplicate even if the first interrupt period has elapsed during the execution of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148). Also, by prohibiting the occurrence of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123), it is possible to prevent the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) from interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) and starting it up even if the second interrupt period has elapsed.

Thereafter, in steps SA102 to SA121, the same processes as steps S8202 to S8221 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 117) in the thirty-third embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SA107 or if the process in step SA121 is executed, interrupt permission is set to allow the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 148) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 123). (Step SA122).

According to the above configuration, when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed in the main processing (FIG. 147), the interruption of the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) is permitted, but the interruption of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) is not permitted. This makes it possible to execute display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 123) even in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, but to prevent the processing for controlling the progress of the game by the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 148) from being executed.

In addition, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148) does not interrupt the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) and is not started, and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 123) does not interrupt the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 148). This makes it possible to prevent duplicate timer interrupt processes from being started.

<Forty-third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration for displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is different from that of the thirty-fifth embodiment. The configuration that differs from the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the thirty-fifth embodiment will basically be omitted.

In this embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the non-specific control work area 223 is provided with a normal counter area 231. In the normal counter area 231, as in the 15th embodiment, a normal general winning counter 231a, a normal special winning counter 231b, a normal first operation counter 231c, a normal second operation counter 231d, and a normal out counter 231e are provided. In a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode, when one game ball enters the general winning port 31, the value of the normal general winning counter 231a is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the special winning device 32, the value of the normal special winning counter 231b is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the first operating port 33, the value of the normal first operating counter 231c is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the second operating port 34, the value of the normal second operating counter 231d is incremented by 1, when one game ball enters the out port 24a, the value of the normal out counter 231e is incremented by 1. And, when the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode are K91 to K95, the base values are as follows.
Base value: total number of game balls paid out (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning through the general winning port 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "number of prize balls for winning through the first operating port 33" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning through the second operating port 34") / ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95).

In addition to the normal counter area 231, the work area 223 for non-specific control is provided with a calculation result storage area 234. Similar to the thirty-fifth embodiment, the calculation result storage area 234 has a current area 311, a first history area 312, a second history area 313, and a second history area 311 as storage areas for storing base value information. 3 history area 314 (see FIG. 126). The current area 311 stores the most recent base value calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149). The first history area 312 stores the final base value in the previous calculation period. The second history area 313 stores the final base value in the two previous calculation periods. The third history area 314 stores the final base value in the three previous calculation periods.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the result calculation process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management process (step S8920) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is a process corresponding to non-specific control in step S3803, similar to the management process (FIG. 70) in the fifteenth embodiment. Reads the management execution processing program. In this management execution process (FIG. 71), a check process is executed in step S3908 as in the fifteenth embodiment. In this check process, a result calculation process is executed, and a display process (FIG. 150), which will be described later, is executed. Furthermore, the processing from step SA201 to step SA217 in the result calculation process is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a calculation process for the base value is executed (step SA201). In this calculation process, the base value is calculated using the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231, as in the 35th embodiment. Here, in this embodiment, the calculation of the base value is not completed in one processing run of the result calculation process, but is completed by executing the result calculation process a predetermined number of times.

Specifically, in a given processing round of the result calculation process in which a new calculation of the base value is to be started, in step SA201, if the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are K91 to K95, K91 x "number of prize balls for winning through the general winning port 31", K92 x "number of prize balls for winning through the special electric winning device 32", K93 x "number of prize balls for winning through the first operating port 33", K94 x "number of prize balls for winning through the second operating port 34", and the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K91 + K92 + K93 + K94 + K95) are calculated, and each of these calculation results is stored in a calculation memory area provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Then, in step SA201 of the result calculation process for the processing round one round after the above-mentioned predetermined processing round, the various information stored in the calculation memory area is used to calculate the total number of game balls to be paid out (K91 x "number of prize balls for winning at the general winning port 31" + K92 x "number of prize balls for winning at the special electric winning device 32" + K93 x "number of prize balls for winning at the first operating port 33" + K94 x "number of prize balls for winning at the second operating port 34"), and the calculation result is stored in the calculation memory area. Then, in step SA201 of the result calculation process for the processing round two rounds after the above-mentioned predetermined processing round, the above-mentioned base value is calculated using the various information stored in the calculation memory area.

In other words, in this embodiment, the result calculation process needs to be executed three times to calculate one base value. In this case, the result calculation process is called and executed by the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), so it is executed every time the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, one base value is calculated at approximately 12 millisecond intervals. However, this is not limited to this, and the period for calculating one base value may be shorter than the 12 millisecond interval, or longer than the 12 millisecond interval.

By adopting a configuration in which one base value is calculated by executing the result calculation process multiple times as described above, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating the base value. In particular, the result calculation process is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control, so in order to execute the result calculation process, it is necessary not only to read the program for non-specific control and the data for non-specific control, but also to perform the process for specific control. It is necessary to save information in various registers of the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the above. In this case, by reducing the processing load for calculating the base value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for result calculation processing, and as a result, the processing load for executing processing corresponding to non-specific control can be reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the

Even in a configuration where result calculation processing is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, each piece of information in the middle of calculating the base value in each processing time of result calculation processing is used as a workpiece for non-specific control. It is written to area 223. As a result, as the processing corresponding to the specific control is executed between one processing time and the next processing time of the result calculation processing, the main CPU 63 used in the processing corresponding to the non-specific control is Even if the information in the various registers is erased, it is possible to store and hold each piece of information while the base value is being calculated.

Even in a configuration in which the result calculation process is executed multiple times to calculate one base value, the values of all of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are extracted in the first result calculation process to calculate a new base value, and the base value for that calculation is calculated using the extracted values. This makes it possible to calculate one base value without being affected by the change in values, even if the values of the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are changed while the base value is being calculated.

After the base value calculation process is performed in step SA201, it is determined whether or not the calculation of one base value has been completed in the result calculation process of the current processing round (step SA202). If the calculation of one base value has not been completed (step SA202: NO), the processes of steps SA203 to SA205 are not performed, and the base value is not overwritten in the current area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

If the calculation of the first base value has been completed (step SA202: YES), the base value for which the calculation has been completed is overwritten in the current area 311 (step SA203). Thereafter, it is determined whether the shift trigger flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA204). In this embodiment, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (that is, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is When calculation of a new base value is completed after the shift reference number (specifically 60,000) is reached, data shift processing (step SA216) in the calculation result storage area 234 is executed. In this data shift process, information stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area. 314, after shifting in the order of first history area 312 → second history area 313, current area 311 → first history area 312, current area 311 is cleared to "0". The shift trigger flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the situation is after the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number and before data shift processing is executed.

If the shift trigger flag is set to "1" (step SA204: YES), the shift calculation completion flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA205). The shift calculation completion flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to identify that calculation of one base value has been completed after the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number.

If a negative determination is made in step SA202, if a negative determination is made in step SA204, or if the process in step SA205 is executed, "1" is set in the management start flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. It is determined whether it is set (step SA206). If the management start flag is not set to "1" (step SA206: NO), pre-management processing is executed (step SA207). In the pre-management processing, steps S8604 to S8608 of the result calculation processing (FIG. 130) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed.

If the management start flag is set to "1" (step SA206: YES), it is determined whether the shift trigger flag in the non-specific control work area 223 is set to "1" (step SA208). If the shift trigger flag is not set to "1" (step SA208: NO), the total number is calculated by adding up all the values of the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 (step SA209). It is then determined whether the calculated total number is equal to or greater than the shift reference number of 60,000 (step SA210).

If a positive judgment is made in step SA210, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA211). In addition, the pre-shift display flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA212). The pre-shift display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify a situation in which a pre-shift display corresponding to the total number of game balls reaching the shift reference number should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

If the shift trigger flag is set to "1" and an affirmative determination is made in step SA208, it is determined whether or not the shift calculation completion flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1". (Step SA213). As already explained, the computation completion flag at the time of shift is set to "1" when the calculation of the base value of 1 is completed after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. When an affirmative determination is made in step SA213, the shift trigger flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA214). Furthermore, the computation completion flag at the time of shift in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA215).

Thereafter, data shift processing is executed (step SA216). In the data shift process, information stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is transferred from the second history area 313 to the third history area 314. , first history area 312 → second history area 313, current area 311 → first history area 312, and then clears the current area 311 to "0". As a result, the final base value in the two previous calculation periods is stored in the third history area 314 as the final base value in the three previous calculation periods, and the final base value in the one previous calculation period is stored in the third history area 314. is stored in the second history area 313 as the final base value in the calculation period two times ago, and the base value calculated after the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number in the current calculation period is stored once. It is stored in the first history area 312 as the final base value in the previous calculation period. Further, the current area 311 is in a state where no base value is stored. Note that in the data shift process, when shifting information as described above, an LDIR instruction is used. With the LDIR instruction, by specifying the address of the area where the information is to be stored and the address of the area where the information is to be stored, the information stored in the storage source area can be shifted (copied) to the storage destination area. becomes. Thereafter, all the counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" (step SA217).

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing the display processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SA301 to SA320 in the display processing is executed using a program for non-specific control and data for non-specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the management start flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA301). If the determination in step SA301 is negative, similar to step S8714 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the 35th embodiment, the base value is read from the current situation area 311, and the calculation result data corresponding to the digits in the first and second decimal places of the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA302). By transmitting the display data corresponding to the calculation result data to the display IC 266, the digits in the first and second decimal places of the base value in the current situation area 311 are displayed on the third notification display device 203, and the digits in the second decimal place of the base value in the current situation area 311 are displayed on the fourth notification display device 204. With the above configuration, in a situation where the management start flag is not set to "1", the base value in the past calculation period is not notified, and only the base value calculated in the current calculation period is notified. Note that when the management start flag is not set to "1" and the base value is notified, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are the same as those in the 35th embodiment.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SA301, the value of the switching timing counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is subtracted by 1 (step SA303). The switching timing counter determines the timing at which the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are switched in a situation where the base value is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by the main CPU 63. This is a counter for specifying.

In this embodiment, in a situation where the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the play area PA) does not reach the shift reference number in a situation where neither the opening/closing execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode is in effect, the notification of the base values stored in each of the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 is executed for the display duration period (specifically, 5 seconds), and in order to notify that a change in the base value to be notified will occur between the notifications of the base values, an interval non-display is executed for the interval period (specifically, 1 second). Specifically, as the interval non-display, all display segments 321-324 are turned off in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, so that the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 are in a non-display state. By hiding the interval display before the base value to be notified is switched in the predetermined order of current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314, it is possible to make the manager of the amusement hall clearly aware that the base value to be notified is being switched.

In a situation where the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, a corresponding pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Specifically, as the pre-shift display, "A." is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The display content of "A." is display content that is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during either the display duration period of the display corresponding to the base value or the interval period in which the display is not displayed for the interval. be. As a result, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the situation where the pre-shift display is performed is changed to the display duration period of the display corresponding to the base value and the interval period in which the display is not displayed for the interval. can have different display contents. Therefore, when the game hall manager confirms that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number. This makes it possible to understand that the base value is being shifted.

The display contents of the pre-shift display are different from the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the check display is being performed, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the pre-management flag is not set to "1", the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 136) is being performed, and the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204 when the setting value update process (FIG. 137) is being performed. From this point of view, by checking that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number, and therefore a shift of the base value will be performed.

The execution period of the pre-shift display is set to be longer than the interval period (specifically, 1 second) in which the interval non-display is performed. Further, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the display continuation period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the display corresponding to the base value. Specifically, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to 8 seconds. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the pre-shift display may be configured to be longer than the interval period and less than or equal to the display duration period of the display corresponding to the base value, or may be configured to be less than or equal to the interval period. . However, in order to make the game hall manager clearly aware that the pre-shift display is being performed, it is preferable that the execution period of the pre-shift display be set to a longer period than the interval period.

As already explained, in order to complete the calculation of one base value, the result calculation process (FIG. 149) must be performed multiple times, and specifically, the cycle in which one base value is calculated is a 12 millisecond cycle. In addition, the data shift process (step SA216) in which the base value information is shifted between the various areas 311 to 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number is executed after the new calculation of one base value after the shift reference number is reached. In this case, the execution period of the pre-shift display is set to a period longer than the longest period required for the data shift process (step SA216) to be completed when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number. This makes it possible to complete the new calculation of one base value and the data shift process of the base value (step SA216) in a situation in which the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the explanation of the display processing (FIG. 150), when the processing of step SA303 is executed, the base value is displayed by determining whether the value of the switching timing counter after subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether the current measurement target period among the duration period, the interval period during which interval non-display is performed, and the execution period of pre-shift display has elapsed (step SA304). If an affirmative determination is made in step SA304, the situation is such that the pre-shift display should be started by determining whether the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step SA305). If a negative determination is made in step SA305, it is determined whether the interval flag provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA306). The interval flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the situation is such that interval non-display should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step SA306, it means that the base value is the target for which notification should be started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the current switching timing. In this case, the value of the display target counter provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control is incremented by 1 (step SA307). If the value of the display target counter after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "3" (step SA308: YES), the value of the display target counter is cleared to "0" (step SA309).

The counters to be displayed are the first to fourth notification displays among the base values stored in each of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This counter is used by the main CPU 63 to specify the base value to be notified in the devices 201 to 204. Specifically, when the value of the display target counter is "0", the base value stored in the current area 311 is the target of notification, and when the value of the display target counter is "1", the base value stored in the first history area If the base value stored in the second history area 312 is the target of notification, and the value of the counter to be displayed is "2", the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the target of notification, and the value of the counter to be displayed is "3". ”, the base value stored in the third history area 314 becomes the notification target.

If a negative determination is made in step SA308, or if the processing of step SA309 is executed, a value corresponding to the display duration (specifically, 5 seconds) for displaying the base value is set as a value corresponding to the next switching timing in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA310). After that, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" (step SA311). As a result, if the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control has not been set to "1" by the time the next switching timing occurs, interval non-display will be performed when the next switching timing occurs.

Thereafter, a process is executed to set display data corresponding to the base value that is the current notification target in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control. Specifically, similar to step S8708 of the display processing (FIG. 131) in the thirty-fifth embodiment, display type data corresponding to the value of the display target counter is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA312). . The display type data includes display data for causing the first notification display device 201 to display that the notification target of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is the base value, and the base value of the notification target. A display indicating which of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 the value corresponds to in the calculation result storage area 234 is displayed on the second notification display device 202. and display data for causing the process to occur.

Then, similar to step S8709 of the display process (FIG. 131) in the 35th embodiment, the base value is read from the current state area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234, which correspond to the value of the counter to be displayed, and calculation result data corresponding to the first decimal place and the second decimal place in the read base value is set in the display target setting area 276 (step SA313). The calculation result data includes display data for causing the third notification display device 203 to display a number corresponding to the first decimal place in the base value to be notified, and display data for causing the fourth notification display device 204 to display a number corresponding to the second decimal place in the base value to be notified.

By setting the display data consisting of display type data and calculation result data in the display target setting area 276, the display data is set to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) similarly to the thirty-fifth embodiment. The display data corresponding to the display data is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In other words, when the base value of the current area 311 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in FIG. 127(a) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, When the base value of the history area 312 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in FIG. 127(b) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and When the base value of 313 is the subject of notification, a display as shown in FIG. 127(c) is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and When the base value is to be notified, a display as shown in FIG. 127(d) is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, for example.

If the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1" and a positive judgment is made in step SA306, this means that the target for which notification should be started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at the current switching timing is interval non-display. In this case, an interval setting process is executed (step SA314). In this setting process, a value corresponding to the interval period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the switching timing counter in the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing. After that, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA315). As a result, if the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control has not been set to "1" by the time the next switching timing occurs, the base value will be displayed when the next switching timing occurs.

After that, interval data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA316). The interval data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform interval non-display, and specifically, all the This is data for turning off the display segments 321 to 324. By setting the interval data as display data in the display target setting area 276, the interval data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are all in a non-display state. After confirming that the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the non-display state, the game hall manager can understand that it is the interval period.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SA305 because the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the current information. This means that the target for which notification should be started at the switching timing is the pre-shift display. In this case, a pre-shift display period setting process is executed (step SA317). In this setting process, a value corresponding to the execution period of the pre-shift display (specifically, 8 seconds) is set in the switching timing counter of the work area 223 for non-specific control as a value corresponding to the next switching timing.

After that, the interval flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0", the pre-shift display flag in the work area 223 for non-specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA318), and the display target counter in the work area 223 for non-specific control is set to the maximum value "3" (step SA319). By clearing the interval flag to "0", when the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value. Then, when a negative judgment is made in step SA306 to notify the base value by setting the display target counter to the maximum value, the value of the display target counter after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter in step SA307 exceeds the maximum value, and a positive judgment is made in step SA308 to clear the value of the display target counter to "0". As a result, when the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed, the next notification target becomes the base value, and the base value becomes the base value in the current state area 311 of the calculation result storage area 234.

That is, when the pre-shift display is performed, the notification starts from the base value regardless of whether the notification target before the pre-shift display is the base value or the interval non-display. Thereby, when the pre-shift display ends, it becomes possible to confirm the base value without waiting for the interval period to elapse. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine which of the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 the base value that was the last notification target before the pre-shift display was performed. Even if there is, when the pre-shift display ends, the notification starts from the base value of the current area 311. This makes it possible to return the base value notification order in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 to the initial notification order, and immediately after the base value shift occurs. It becomes possible to make it easier for the game hall manager to recognize that this is the case.

Then, pre-shift display data is set in the display target setting area 276 provided in the work area 223 for non-specific control (step SA320). The pre-shift display data is data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a pre-shift display, specifically, data for causing each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display "A.". By setting the pre-shift display data as display data in the display target setting area 276, the pre-shift display data is transmitted to the display IC 266 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and "A." is displayed on each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The manager of the game hall who has confirmed that the pre-shift display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can understand that it is the execution period of the pre-shift display.

Next, referring to the time chart in FIG. 151, the manner in which the base values of the various areas 311-314 are notified by the first to fourth display devices 201-204 when the management start flag is set to "1" will be described. FIG. 151(a) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current state area 311 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201-204, FIG. 151(b) shows the period during which the base value stored in the first history area 312 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201-204, FIG. 151(c) shows the period during which the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201-204, FIG. 151(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201-204, and FIG. FIG. 151(e) shows the period during which interval display is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, FIG. 151(f) shows the period during which pre-shift display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 151(g) shows the timing at which the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000) after the base value calculation period has started and in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 151(a), notification of the base value stored in the current status area 311 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. During this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating that the base value stored in the current status area 311 is the subject of notification, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current status area 311.

After that, at the timing t2, the display duration period from the timing t1 has elapsed, and as shown in FIG. 151(a), the notification of the base value stored in the current status area 311 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 151(e), interval non-display is started in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated at the timing t3, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 151(b), notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. During this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(b), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating that the base value stored in the first history area 312 is the subject of notification, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t3 at the timing t4, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(b), and as shown in FIG. 151(e) As shown in FIG. 3, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended at timing t5, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t4, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 151(c), notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. During this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating that the base value stored in the second history area 313 is the subject of notification, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display a display corresponding to the base value stored in the second history area 313.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the notification of the base value stored in the second history area 313 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(c), and as shown in FIG. 151(e) As shown in FIG. 3, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display ends at timing t7, which is the timing at which the interval period has elapsed from timing t6, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 151(d), notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. At the time of this notification, as shown in FIG. 127(d), the first notification display device 201 displays a display indicating that the base value is the subject of notification, the second notification display device 202 displays a display indicating that the base value stored in the third history area 314 is the subject of notification, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 display a display corresponding to the base value stored in the third history area 314.

After that, at the timing of t8, the display duration period from the timing of t7 has elapsed, and as shown in FIG. 151(d), the notification of the base value stored in the third history area 314 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 151(e), interval non-display is initiated by the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is terminated at the timing of t9, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 151(e).

After that, from timing t9 to timing t10, similar to the timing t1 to timing t2, a display corresponding to the base value stored in the current state area 311 is performed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 151(a), and further, from timing t10 to timing t11, similar to the timing t2 to timing t3, an interval non-display is performed on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 151(e). Then, at timing t11, similar to the timing t3, a display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 151(b).

Thereafter, at timing t12, which is the middle of the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312, as shown in FIG. 151(g), the base value calculation period is newly changed. Since the start, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) in a situation that is neither the opening/closing execution mode depending on the jackpot result nor the high-frequency support mode is shifted. The standard number (specifically 60,000) is reached. However, at the timing of t12, since the display duration period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value of the first history area 312 started at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. The display corresponding to the base value of the 1 history area 312 continues. As a result, even if the timing when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number is arbitrary, the display of the current notification target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be performed as planned. After the period has passed, it becomes possible to start the pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

After that, at the timing of t13, the display duration period from the timing of t11 has elapsed, and as shown in FIG. 151(b), the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. 151(f), the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while another base value is being notified, the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the display duration for the notification of that base value has elapsed. Even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while an interval non-display is being performed, the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the interval period for the interval non-display has elapsed.

Thereafter, the pre-shift display execution period elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14, and the pre-shift display is finished as shown in FIG. 151(f), and the current area 311 Notification of the base value stored in is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In other words, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display starts is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. Notification starts from the base value of the current area 311.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t14 at the timing t15, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 151(a), and as shown in FIG. 151(e). In this way, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended as shown in FIG. 151(e) at timing t16, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from timing t15, and as shown in FIG. 151(b), the base of the first history area 312 is Display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The base values stored in the current state area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. be done. This makes it possible to individually notify the respective base values corresponding to different periods while suppressing the number of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. Furthermore, since each base value is displayed in a predetermined order, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to understand the type of base value being displayed.

The display order of the base values is determined in association with each of the current status area 311, the first history area 312, the second history area 313, and the third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for identifying the type of base value to be displayed when starting a new display of base values.

Before the situation where one base value is displayed changes to the situation where the next base value is displayed, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 change to the interval non-display state. This allows the game hall manager to clearly understand that the type of base value being displayed has been switched.

In a configuration in which the base values are displayed sequentially on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, if the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e. the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 balls) after a new calculation period for the base value is started and the game is not in either the open/close execution mode based on a jackpot result or the high frequency support mode, a pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to use the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to notify that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value stored in the current area 311, first history area 312, second history area 313, and third history area 314 in the calculation result storage area 234 is determined. is shifted to the later storage area in the storage order, and the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 are cleared to "0" and calculation of the base value for a new calculation period is started. Therefore, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the notification content of the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is changed. In this case, if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value notification will be restarted after the pre-shift display is performed, so the total number of game balls will reach the shift reference number. It becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the notification contents of the base value will be changed in response to the change.

If the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while the base value is being displayed, the pre-shift display will begin after the display duration of the base value has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display without interfering with the display of the base value that is already being displayed.

In a configuration in which a plurality of base values stored in the calculation result storage area 234 are sequentially displayed in a predetermined display order, after the pre-shift display is performed, the base values are displayed starting from the first base value in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, it becomes possible to check again from the base value of the first order in the predetermined display order.

In the configuration in which a base value is calculated in the result calculation process (FIG. 149), the result calculation process is executed multiple times from the start of calculation of one base value until the calculation of the base value is completed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for executing the result calculation process, compared to a configuration in which calculation of the base value is completed in one result calculation process.

When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the base value is newly derived at the timing when the shift reference number is reached, and then the base value data shift process (step SA216) is executed. When the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, a pre-shift display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, in a situation where a base value is newly derived and data shift processing of the base value is being performed, it becomes possible to perform a pre-shift display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and It is possible to prevent the display of the previous base value from continuing as it is even though the reference number has been reached.

In addition, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA since the base value calculation period started (i.e., the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area PA Until the total number of game balls (total number of game balls) reaches the initial reference number (specifically 6000 balls), as in the thirty-fifth embodiment above, when the base value of the current area 311 is displayed, the first to fourth A configuration may be adopted in which initial calculation display is performed on the notification display devices 201 to 204.

Also, when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are in the interval non-display state and the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000), the pre-shift display may be immediately started, and when the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displaying the base value and the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000), the pre-shift display may be started when the display duration period for the base value has elapsed. This makes it possible to start the pre-shift display early while preventing the display of the base value that is already being displayed from being terminated midway.

Furthermore, the display contents of the pre-shift display are not limited to those described above, and the display contents on at least a part of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 can be displayed in other situations as well. However, the entire display content of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to be display content that is not displayed in other situations. Furthermore, when the pre-shift display is performed, at least one display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is turned on. A part of the four notification display devices 201 to 204 may have a configuration in which all display segments 321 to 324 are turned off. In addition, when a pre-shift display is performed, the display content of the pre-shift display is not limited to a configuration in which the display content of the pre-shift display is maintained over the execution period of the pre-shift display, and the display content of the pre-shift display is the pre-shift display. It may also be configured to blink over the execution period.

In addition, the execution period of the pre-shift display is not limited to a fixed configuration, and may be configured to vary depending on the period required from when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000 balls) until a new base value is calculated and the data shift process of the base value is completed, for example.

In addition, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, the last of the display cycles of each base value being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. The pre-shift display may be started after the display of the base value of the order (that is, the base value stored in the third history area 314) is completed. Thereby, after the display cycle of each base value is completed, it becomes possible to start a new display cycle of each base value via the pre-shift display.

Also, when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number, calculation of the base value is started using the various counters 231a to 231e in the normal counter area 231 at that time, and when the calculation of the base value is completed, data shift processing (step SA216) is performed. In this case, it is possible to accurately calculate the base value at the time when the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number.

In addition, during the interval period, instead of the interval non-display being performed, predetermined displays are performed on at least some of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and the first to fourth notification displays are The overall display of the devices 201 to 204 may be configured to display an interval display that is different from the display content that may occur in a situation where the base value is notified. For example, in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, only the central display segments 321 to 324 may be turned on to display a "-"; It may be configured such that "-" is displayed on some of the four notification display devices 201 to 204, and the remaining display devices are in a non-display state.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which no interval period is set. In this case, when the display duration period for one base value has elapsed, the display of the next base value to be displayed in turn will begin on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<Forty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the start timing of the pre-shift display is different from that of the 43rd embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the 43rd embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 43rd embodiment is basically omitted.

The start timing of the pre-shift display in this embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 152. FIG. 152(a) shows the period during which the base value stored in the current status area 311 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 152(b) shows the period during which the base value stored in the first history area 312 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 152(c) shows the period during which the base value stored in the second history area 313 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, FIG. 152(d) shows the period during which the base value stored in the third history area 314 is notified by the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, and FIG. FIG. 152(e) shows the period during which interval display is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, FIG. 152(f) shows the period during which pre-shift display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201-204, and FIG. 152(g) shows the timing at which the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000) after the base value calculation period has started and in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to a jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode.

At timings t1 to t11, in the same manner as in the time charts of FIG. 151(a) to FIG. 151(g) in the 43rd embodiment, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 repeatedly display the base value over the display duration period and hide the display for the interval period, and the display corresponding to the base value is repeated in the order of the current area 311 → first history area 312 → second history area 313 → third history area 314 of the calculation result storage area 234. Then, at timing t11, the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 152(b).

After that, at the timing of t12 during which the display corresponding to the base value stored in the first history area 312 is being performed, as shown in FIG. 152(g), the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA since the base value calculation period started in a situation that is neither the open/close execution mode due to the jackpot result nor the high frequency support mode (i.e., the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA) reaches the shift reference number (specifically, 60,000). In this case, at the timing of t12, although the display duration period has not elapsed since the display corresponding to the base value in the first history area 312 started at the timing of t11, the notification of the base value stored in the first history area 312 is terminated as shown in FIG. 152(b), and the pre-shift display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as shown in FIG. 152(f).

Even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while other base values are being notified, the pre-shift display will start on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time. Also, even if the total number of game balls reaches the shift reference number while interval non-display is being performed, the pre-shift display will start on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 at that time.

Thereafter, at the timing t13, the execution period of the pre-shift display has elapsed from the timing t12, so the pre-shift display is finished as shown in FIG. 152(f), and the current area 311 is Notification of the base value stored in is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In other words, even if the notification target when the pre-shift display starts is the base value of the first history area 312, when the pre-shift display ends, it corresponds to the first notification order in the base value notification order. Notification starts from the base value of the current area 311.

Thereafter, when the display duration period elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14, the notification of the base value stored in the current area 311 is ended as shown in FIG. 152(a), and as shown in FIG. 152(e). In this way, interval non-display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This interval non-display is ended as shown in FIG. 152(e) at timing t15, which is the timing when the interval period has elapsed from timing t14, and as shown in FIG. 152(b), the base of the first history area 312 is Display corresponding to the value is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

According to the above configuration, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (i.e., the game ball When the total number of game balls supplied to the area PA reaches the shift reference number (specifically 60,000 balls), at that timing, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the pre-shift information. Display starts. Thereby, it becomes possible to start the pre-shift display early, and it becomes possible to notify early that the total number of game balls has reached the shift reference number.

<Forty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 35th embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 35th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 35th embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SA401 to step SA425 in the main process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step SA401). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the main process is started and then a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) elapses before proceeding to the next process. During this predetermined wait period, the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SA402). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are performed so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. exists. Both the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main process. Further, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated by interrupting the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) interrupts the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) and is not activated. In addition, if both the first interrupt cycle and the second interrupt cycle have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) are not being executed, those cycles The second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started first regardless of the order of progress. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is set in a specified register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. In addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, the internal function register setting process also executes processes for setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1.

Then, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA403). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should end without executing any process for progressing the game, while the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 153) before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is started and interrupt permission is performed (step SA404), as in the 35th embodiment, and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power ends and the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425) is started. In this case, as in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), even if the start-up processing in progress flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed, and power outage monitoring is executed even in a situation where the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is being executed, and the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is executed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) Even if a power outage occurs in a situation where ) is being executed, it is possible to perform power outage processing in response to the power outage. In the power outage processing, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent it from being identified as an abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the settings confirmation process (step SA415) or setting value update process (step SA418), the next operating power supply will be notified that the power outage has occurred during these settings-related processes. This can be specified at the start.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) or the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) or the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is performed in the main process (Figure 153), including the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and setting value update process (step SA418). When activated by an interrupt, information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 153) for returning after the timer interrupt process that is the target of activation is completed is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. , information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt processing is started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that was the activation target ends, the processing returns to the main processing (FIG. 153) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SA403, interrupt permission is set (step SA404). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. However, since the startup processing flag is set to "1" in step SA403, even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, various processing of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) will not be executed. Of these, the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ends without executing processes for advancing the game. .

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SA405). In other words, it is determined whether the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on while the reset button 68c has been pressed, and whether the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has begun. Here, in this embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Also, as in the 11th embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, rather than first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA405: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SA406). When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage processing was appropriately performed during the previous power cutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SA406: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA407). The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read out, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA407 (step SA408). Then, it is determined whether these checksums match (step SA409).

If a negative judgment is made in step SA406 or step SA409, that is, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA410). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), while the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed by making a positive judgment in step S8906. As a result, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" because the power failure processing was not properly performed at the time of the previous power failure, or if the checksums do not match because the storage state of information has changed since the previous power failure for at least one of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, the processing for power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, at the start of supply of operating power, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power failure flag or checksum is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SA411). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed. The configuration may be continued.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA406 and step SA409: YES), "1" is set to the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control. It is determined whether or not (step SA412). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (step SA418) is finished. , in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (step SA418). It will remain until it is executed.

If the setting update display flag is not set to "1" and a negative determination is made in step SA412, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SA413). ). If the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SA413: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). Furthermore, even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key (step SA413: NO), the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". is set (step SA414: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA415). The setting confirmation process will be explained later.

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, as in the 35th embodiment. When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being confirmed and a display indicating the currently set setting value. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is started and cleared to "0" when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is ended, so in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not being executed, the setting confirmation display flag is not basically set to "1". However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. The setting confirmation display flag remains set to "1" until the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed or the setting confirmation process (step SA415) clears the setting confirmation display flag to "0."

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA405: YES), a RAM clear process is executed (step SA416). In the RAM clear process, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (specifically, the setting reference area 341 described later). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the normal power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display unit 37a is erased and the reserved information for the normal map display unit 38a is erased. In addition, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area 342 described later provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed. In addition, in the RAM clear process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SA402 is performed. Note that the process for clearing to "0" and the process for performing the initial setting are not performed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on using a setting key (step SA417). If the ON operation has been performed (step SA417: YES), setting value update processing is executed (step SA418). The setting value update process will be explained later.

If the process of step SA411 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SA414, if the process of step SA415 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SA417, or if the process of step SA418 is executed, the specific control Information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 (step SA419). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SA401 to SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63 and before the remaining processing (steps SA422 to SA425) is started. This makes it unnecessary to control the initial check period when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

In addition, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are executed as processes at the start of the supply of operating power, whereas the initial check period starts after the processes at the start of the supply of operating power are completed. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, this does not affect the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Then, the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA420). By clearing the start-up processing in progress flag to "0", if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, a negative judgment is made in step S8906, which causes not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 to be executed, and the state in which processes for progressing the game are not executed is released. Note that in step SA420, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Then, a return command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step SA421). The information contained in the return command and the processing performed by the audio and light emission control device 81 when the return command is received are the same as those in step S7920 of the main processing (Figure 114) in the 33rd embodiment described above.

Then, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SA422 to SA425. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SA422 to SA425. In this respect, the remaining process of steps SA422 to SA425 can be said to be non-periodic process that is executed non-periodically. In steps SA422 to SA425, the same process is executed as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment.

Next, a configuration regarding setting values in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area regarding setting values provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

As shown in FIG. 154, the work area 221 for specific control has a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. The setting reference area 341 is a memory area in which information for the main CPU 63 to identify the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. In step S503 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 13), the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is identified using the information stored in the setting reference area 341, and a win/lose table corresponding to the identified setting value is read. Then, in step S504, the win/lose judgment process is executed using the read win/lose table. Also, when the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

The setting reference area 341 stores numerical information as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". When numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". When numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". When numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". When numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". When numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6".

The setting update area 342 stores information on the setting values being updated during the setting value update process (step SA418). In other words, in the setting value update process (step SA418), the setting value information of the selection target is updated each time the reset button 68c is pressed, but during this update, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is not changed, and the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is changed. This makes it possible to update the setting value while storing and retaining the setting value information that was set before the setting value update process (step SA418) was started. When the setting value update process (step SA418) is terminated, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 at that time is overwritten in the setting reference area 341. As a result, the setting value updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) is set as the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204.

Numerical information is stored in the setting update area 342 as setting value information. Specifically, when numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 2". When numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

Figure 155 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed in step SA415 of the main process (Figure 153). Note that the processing of steps SA501 to SA504 in the setting confirmation process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

On the condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step SA501: NO), the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SA502). When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and setting processing (step S9006) to the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation is executed.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation. Note that the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in this setting process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the display data of the setting value corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 of the work area 221 for specific control is read (step SA601). Then, the display data of the setting value that has been read is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the work area 221 for specific control as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA602). Also, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display an indication that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being checked is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 (step SA603).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during setting confirmation as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA603 is The information is displayed on the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and a display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA602 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), for example, the display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and the display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are changed to the first ~Performed on the fourth notification display devices 201-204.

Returning to the explanation of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), if an affirmative determination is made in step SA501 or if the process in step SA502 is executed, the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key. It is determined whether the switch has been made (step SA503). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is maintained. In this case, a negative determination is made in step SA503. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: NO), the process of step SA503 is repeated.

If it is specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA503: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SA504). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9006) during setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. The current state is canceled.

As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion section 68a turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (Fig. 153) is started, but the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) is executed in a state in which processing is being executed when the supply of operating power begins, which is the state before the processing that enables game progress is executed in the main processing (Fig. 153). This makes it possible to check the setting values when no game is being played.

Figure 157 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process executed in step SA418 of the main process (Figure 153). Note that the processing of steps SA701 to SA710 in the setting value update process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA701). If the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SA701: NO), the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA702). Then, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 in the work area 221 for specific control is overwritten in the setting update area 342 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SA703). As a result, the setting value information that was set when the supply of operating power was last stopped is set in the setting update area 342.

On the other hand, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, and then the supply of operating power is resumed, and the setting value update process is started without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416) of the main process (FIG. 153), so that the setting update display flag is already set to "1" (step SA701: YES), the process of step SA703 is not executed. In this case, the process of step SA704 and subsequent steps will be executed with the setting value information that was set in the setting update area 342 during the setting value update process before the supply of operating power was stopped remaining unchanged.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), thereby setting the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update. (Step S9004) is executed.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during a setting update. Note that the processing from step SA801 to step SA803 in the setting process is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, setting value display data corresponding to the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 of the specific control work area 221 is read out (step SA801). Then, the display data of the read setting value is set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in the specific control work area 221 as display data to be applied to the fourth notification display device 204 (step SA802). Further, display data for causing the first to third notification display devices 201 to 203 to display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated is set in the fifth display data buffer 275. (Step SA803).

By executing the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update as described above, the display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA803 is This is performed on the third notification display devices 201 to 203, and a display corresponding to the display data set in the fifth display data buffer 275 in step SA802 is performed on the fourth notification display device 204. As a result, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 that have been selected as the update target are displayed. The display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Returning to the explanation of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), if an affirmative determination is made in step SA701 or if the process in step SA703 is executed, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is set to "1" to It is determined whether it is one of "6" (step SA704). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SA704: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SA705). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1."

When an affirmative determination is made in step SA704 or when the process in step SA705 is executed, the setting key insertion unit 68a determines whether or not the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SA706). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a has changed from the reception state corresponding to the ON state to the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. do. Therefore, the OFF state is maintained not only when the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update process is started in a situation where the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state. In this case, a negative determination is made in step SA706.

If the result of the determination in step SA706 is negative, and the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA707: YES), the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SA708). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher setting value each time the reset button 68c is pressed. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA707: NO) or the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SA704. However, if the value in the setting update area 342 is determined to be 7 or greater in step SA704, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SA705. As a result, if the reset button 68c is pressed once in the "setting 6" state, the setting returns to "setting 1."

When it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from an ON state to an OFF state (step SA706: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 (step SA709). As a result, the setting value information resulting from the update in this setting value update process is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to this set information becomes the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SA710). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 (step S9004) during the setting update is not executed. Therefore, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated, and the settings selected to be updated for the pachinko machine 10. The state where the value is displayed is canceled.

Based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, Not only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) but also the setting value updating process (FIG. 157) is executed. Furthermore, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing setting-related processing regarding setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the setting-related process easy to understand for the game hall manager.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, a setting confirmation process is executed, and if the reset button 68c is pressed, a setting value update process is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process, depending on whether the reset button 68c is pressed or not. This makes it possible to make the operation contents for executing the desired process between the setting confirmation process and the setting value update process easy to understand for the manager of the amusement hall. Also, by making the operation contents for executing the setting value update process more than the setting confirmation process, it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to carry out fraudulent acts of setting value update processing.

Next, in the case where power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) or the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) is being executed, the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in Fig. 159.

First, we will explain the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) has been executed.

If the supply of operating power is resumed without the setting key insertion section 68a being turned ON and without the reset button 68c being pressed (i.e., in the case of "no operation"), the main processing (Fig. 153) does not execute any of the RAM clear processing (step SA416), the setting value update processing (step SA418), and the setting confirmation processing (step SA415). If the supply of operating power is resumed while the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON (i.e., in the case of "RAM clear operation"), the main processing (Fig. 153) executes the RAM clear processing (step SA416), but does not execute the setting value update processing (step SA418) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA415). When the supply of operating power is resumed while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON and the reset button 68c is pressed (i.e., when a "setting change operation" is performed), the main processing (FIG. 153) executes a RAM clear process (step SA416) and a setting value update process (step SA418), but the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON but the reset button 68c is not pressed (i.e., when a "setting confirmation operation" is performed), the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed, but the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the setting value update process (step SA418) are not executed.

Next, we will explain the contents of the processing that is executed in the main processing (Figure 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed if power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1").

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 153) executes the RAM clear process (step SA416), while the setting value update process (step SA418) and The setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value The RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed without restarting or newly executing the update process (step SA418). This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of only the RAM clearing process (step SA416) with respect to the "RAM clearing operation". In this case, if the power outage process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the setting value update process (step SA418), the setting value updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) (i.e. Since the information on the changed setting value) is not set in the setting reference area 341, the setting value that was set before the relevant setting value update process (step SA418) is started is used when the supply of operating power is resumed. It can also be used later. Note that the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the RAM clearing process (step SA416).

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, in the main process (Figure 153), RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed and setting value update processing (step SA418) is executed. However, the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed. In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (step SA418) is being executed, if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the RAM will be cleared. After the process (step SA416) is executed, the setting value update process (step SA418) is newly started.

When the RAM clearing process (step SA416) is executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" as described above, so in the setting value updating process (FIG. 157), step SA701 is executed. By making a negative determination, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342. Therefore, if the power outage process is executed before the process of step SA709 is executed in the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped, then the setting value update process (step SA418) ) is invalidated because it is not set in the setting reference area 341. In this case, in the setting value update process (step SA418) after restarting the supply of operating power, the settings that were set before the start of the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power was stopped The setting value will be updated from the value.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a "no operation" state, or when the supply of operating power is resumed in a "settings check operation" state, the main process (FIG. 153) makes a positive determination in step SA412 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred in the power outage flag and checksum, and the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416). If the RAM clear process (step SA416) is not executed, the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is maintained in a state set to "1", so the setting value information in the setting update area 342 is maintained as it is by making a positive determination in step SA701 in the setting value update process (FIG. 157). Therefore, the update of the setting value is resumed from the setting value that was in the middle of being updated in the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, if power outage processing is performed during the setting value update processing (step SA418) and the "RAM clear operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, it is possible to resume the setting value update processing (step SA418) even if the "setting change operation" is not performed.

In particular, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by mistake while the setting value update process (step SA418) is being executed, and in this case, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is immediately turned on. It is conceivable that this will be done. In this case, it is assumed that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 68c while the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and in that case, the "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In this situation, the supply of operating power will be resumed. In this situation, the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed as described above, and the setting value update process (step SA418) before the supply of operating power is stopped in the setting value update process (step SA418). The update of the setting value is restarted from the setting value that is currently being updated. Thereby, even if the above-mentioned event occurs, it is possible to restart updating of the setting values without any problem.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) when restarting will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed when a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 153) executes the RAM clear process (step SA416), but does not execute the setting value update process (step SA418) or the setting confirmation process (step SA415). In other words, even if the power outage process is executed when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if a "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation process (step SA415). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of only the RAM clear process (step SA416) for the "RAM clear operation". Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed.

If the supply of operating power is resumed when a "setting change operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 153) executes a RAM clear process (step SA416) and a setting value update process (step SA418), but does not execute the setting confirmation process (step SA415). In other words, even if a power outage process is executed when the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is being executed, if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) without newly executing the setting confirmation process (step SA415). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the RAM clear process (step SA416) and the setting value update process (step SA418) for the "setting change operation". Even if the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is not executed in this manner, the setting value update process (step SA418) is executed, causing the setting value to be updated to be displayed on the fourth notification display device 204, and when the setting value update process (step SA418) is completed, information about the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341, allowing the amusement hall manager to check the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" when the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed.

If the supply of operating power is resumed when the "settings check operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 153) executes the settings check process (step SA415) on the condition that no abnormalities have occurred with respect to the power outage flag and checksum. As a result, even if power outage processing is executed during the settings check process (step SA415), it is possible to resume checking the setting values by performing the "settings check operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main process (FIG. 153) makes an affirmative determination in step SA414 on the condition that no abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag and checksum. , the setting confirmation process (step SA415) is executed even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on. As a result, even if the power outage process is executed during the setting confirmation process (step SA415) and there is no operation when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting values can be confirmed. It is possible to restart it.

Next, the end timing of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in relation to the operating state of the setting key insertion section 68a will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 160. FIG. 160(a) shows the period when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, FIG. 160(b) shows the period when the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on, and FIG. 160(c) shows the period when the power is on. Figure 160(d) shows the period during which the value update process (Figure 157) is executed, Figure 160(d) shows the period during which the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, and Figure 160(e) shows the period when the power outage process is executed. Indicates the period in which the

First, a case where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) are executed in the normal flow will be described.

At timing t1, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at timing t2, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). An operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is also pressed. Therefore, at timing t3, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. This completes the setting value update process (FIG. 157) as shown in FIG. 160(c).

Furthermore, at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key, and then at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 160(a), the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. Therefore, at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 160(d), the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started. Then, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from an ON state to an OFF state. This ends the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) as shown in FIG. 160(d).

Next, a case will be described in which the power outage process is executed during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157) and the situation is "no operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

At timing t9, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at timing t10, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). An operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is also pressed. Therefore, at timing t11, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). Then, at timing t12 during the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 157), the power is turned off as shown in FIG. In this state, power outage processing is started as shown in FIG. 160(e). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) ends at the timing t12, as shown in FIG. 160(c), and the power outage process ends at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 160(e).

Thereafter, at timing t14, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and in this state, at timing t15, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. In other words, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a "no operation" situation. However, when the pachinko machine 10 was previously powered off, the power outage process was executed during the setting value update process (FIG. 157). Therefore, at timing t16, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started as shown in FIG. 160(c). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in an OFF-operated state from the start timing of step 157), this does not mean that the termination condition for the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is satisfied.

After that, at timing t17 while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in Fig. 160(b), and then at timing t18 as shown in Fig. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from being turned ON to being turned OFF. This ends the setting value update process (Fig. 157) as shown in Fig. 160(c).

Next, we will explain the case where power outage processing is executed during the setting confirmation processing (Figure 155) and the "no operation" status is found when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed.

At the timing of t19, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 160(b), and then at the timing of t20, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 160(a). In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. Therefore, at the timing of t21, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). Then, at the timing of t22 during the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155), the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or a sudden power outage occurs in the commercial power supply, and the power outage process is started as shown in FIG. 160(e). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) ends at the timing of t22 as shown in FIG. 160(d), and the power outage process ends at the timing of t23 as shown in FIG. 160(e).

Thereafter, at timing t24, the setting key insertion part 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(b), and in this state, at timing t25, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 160(a). An ON operation is performed. In this case, the reset button 68c is not pressed. In other words, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a "no operation" situation. However, when the pachinko machine 10 was previously powered off, the power outage process was executed during the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). Therefore, at timing t26, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started as shown in FIG. 160(d). In this case, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is terminated when it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON operation state to the OFF operation state. Even if the setting key insertion section 68a is maintained in the OFF-operated state from the start timing of step 155), this does not mean that the termination condition of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is satisfied.

After that, at timing t27 while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key as shown in Fig. 160(b), and then at timing t28 as shown in Fig. 160(b), the setting key insertion section 68a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. This ends the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) as shown in Fig. 160(d).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In order for the setting value update process (Fig. 157) to be executed, when the supply of operating power is started, it is necessary to perform a "setting change operation" by turning on the setting key insertion section 68a and pressing the reset button 68c. This makes it difficult to attempt to change the setting values illegally. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) may be executed when the supply of operating power is resumed even if a "setting change operation" has not been performed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (Fig. 157).

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, a "setting confirmation operation" is performed to confirm the setting value when the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed instead of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155). This makes it possible to prioritize setting value changes over setting value confirmation, and prevents the game from starting even though the setting value change to be used has not actually been completed. becomes possible.

In a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, the setting values selected to be updated are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to change the setting value while keeping track of the setting value selected to be updated. In addition, by displaying the setting values selected for update in this way, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process (Fig. 157), it becomes possible to substantially confirm the set value.

In a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, not only the display corresponding to the setting value selected as the update target on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 but also the setting value update process are performed. A display corresponding to the situation in which (FIG. 157) is being executed is also displayed. As a result, even if the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is started even though the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) will not be executed. It becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to understand that the game has started.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, if "No operation" or "Setting confirmation operation '', the setting value is changed from the setting value that was selected before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the setting value from the setting value that was selected before the supply of operating power was stopped.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the current The setting value is changed from the setting value to be used. This makes it possible to vary the initial set value when starting to change the set value depending on the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, if the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, Setting value update processing (FIG. 157) is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, there is no need to execute the setting value update process (Figure 157) afterwards. By performing a "RAM clear operation" when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the setting value update process (FIG. 157) from being executed.

In order for the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) to be executed, when the supply of operating power is started, it is necessary to perform a "setting confirmation operation" by turning on the setting key insertion section 68a. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) may be executed when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the "setting confirmation operation" has not been performed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155).

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, if the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155). This makes it possible to prioritize the setting value change operation over the setting value confirmation operation.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 157) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) was started is stored and retained in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the setting value updating processing (Fig. 157) is retained. It becomes possible to change the setting value.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, if there is "no operation" or if a "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting value will start changing from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342, and if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, the setting value will start changing from the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341. This makes it possible to appropriately generate each of these situations.

In order to start the setting value update process (Fig. 157), it is necessary to use the setting key to turn the setting key insertion section 68a ON, making it difficult to illegally start the setting value update process (Fig. 157). In this case, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is not terminated simply by turning the setting key insertion section 68a OFF, but is terminated when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned OFF from an ON state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed, and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed and the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state due to "no operation," the setting value update process (FIG. 157) will not end immediately; the setting value update process (FIG. 157) can be ended by turning the setting key insertion section 68a once ON and then turning it OFF, making it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to end the setting value update process (FIG. 157) at a time that is convenient for him/her.

In order to start the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155), it is necessary to use the setting key to turn on the setting key insertion section 68a, making it difficult to illegally start the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155). In this case, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is not terminated simply by turning off the setting key insertion section 68a, but is terminated when the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off from an ON state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is started when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed and the setting key insertion section 68a is in the OFF state due to "no operation," the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) will not end immediately; the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) can be ended by first turning the setting key insertion section 68a ON and then turning it OFF, making it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to end the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) at a time that is convenient for him/her.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (step SA401 to step SA418) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the remaining processing (step SA422 to step SA418) is completed. Before SA 425) is started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are executed as processes at the start of the supply of operating power, whereas the initial check period starts after the processes at the start of the supply of operating power are completed. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, this does not affect the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, a check display is provided on the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204, regardless of whether the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, or whether neither the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) nor the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth alarm display devices 201 to 204 are normal, regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing (FIG. 153) of the main CPU 63 includes cases where either the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157). This is a process that is commonly executed even when neither the value update process (Figure 157) is executed, and neither the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) nor the setting value update process (Figure 157) is executed, a check mark is placed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a process that is executed later than the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and setting value update process (FIG. 157). The process to start the display is set. By setting the process for starting the check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 as a common process, it is possible to simplify the process configuration and achieve the advantages already described. This makes it possible to achieve the desired effect.

Even if a check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing to progress the game. This makes it possible to prevent delays in the start of processing to progress the game even in a configuration in which a check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed.

Note that if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is restarted and there is "no operation", the setting value update process is executed. (FIG. 157) is not limited to the configuration in which the configuration starts from the setting value that is in the process of being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, but from the current setting value to be used stored in the setting reference area 341. The configuration may be started. In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, if there is no operation, the RAM clearing process ( A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed after step SA416) is executed, or a configuration in which the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. You can also use it as

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and if the supply of operating power is restarted and there is no operation, the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is executed. 157) may not be executed. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 at the start of the next setting value update process (FIG. 157).

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may not be executed if there is "no operation."

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power is resumed and a "RAM clear operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416). In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value that was being changed before the supply of operating power was stopped, or may be started from the setting value currently being used that is stored in the setting reference area 341.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed and a "RAM clear operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value that was being changed before the supply of operating power was stopped, or may be started from the setting value currently being used that is stored in the setting reference area 341.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 155) is being executed, and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is performed without the RAM clear process (step SA416) being executed. may be executed, or the RAM clearing process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the setting value currently being used that is stored in the setting reference area 341, but the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may also be configured to start from the setting value that was in the middle of being changed before the supply of operating power was stopped.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started from the setting value that was being changed before the supply of operating power was stopped, or may be started from the setting value currently being used that is stored in the setting reference area 341.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and then the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is configured to start from the setting value currently being used that is stored in the setting reference area 341, but the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may also be configured to start from the setting value that was in the middle of being changed before the supply of operating power was stopped.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed without executing the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the RAM clear process (step SA416) may be executed after the setting value update process (FIG. 157).

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed, or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed. In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting change operation" is performed, both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The setting value update process (Fig. 157) is not limited to a configuration in which the setting value is started from the setting value that is being changed before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is performed in the setting reference area. The configuration may be such that the process starts from the current setting value of the target to be used stored in 341.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed and a "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416), or the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be executed after the RAM clear process (step SA416).

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed without executing the setting value update process (FIG. 157) if a "setting confirmation operation" is performed. In this case, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 may be overwritten in the setting update area 342 when the next setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, The configuration may be such that the setting value update process (Figure 157) is executed after the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, or the setting value update process (Figure 155) is executed after the setting value update process (Figure 157) is executed. ) may be configured to be executed. Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed, and the "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, A configuration may be adopted in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) and the setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started in a state where the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted to interrupt after a predetermined time for waiting has elapsed in the power-on initial setting process (step SA401), so that the display indicating that the setting value is being updated and the display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 are started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are not limited to the configuration, and these displays may be started without waiting for the predetermined time for waiting to elapse. In addition, even if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the display indicating that the setting value is being updated and the display indicating the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 may be configured to be performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 on the condition that the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a state where the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is not being performed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is started in a situation where the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the power supply for the wait is set in the power-on initial setting process (step SA401). When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is allowed to interrupt after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display indicating that the setting value is being checked is stored in the setting reference area 341. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the display indicating the set value corresponding to the information is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. The configuration may be such that the display starts. Furthermore, even if the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", it is possible to confirm that the setting value is being checked, provided that the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is being executed. The first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may display the setting values corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342. In this case, it is possible to prevent these displays from being performed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is not being executed.

In addition, when the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed, the pattern display device 41 may be configured to display an image indicating that the setting value is being updated, and in addition to or instead of this display, an image indicating the operating procedure for updating the setting value may be displayed, and the display light-emitting unit 53 or speaker unit 54 may be configured to notify the user that the setting value is being updated. In this case, it is possible to make the manager of the amusement hall clearly aware that the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed.

Further, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed, an image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed on the symbol display device 41 may be displayed. In addition to or in place of this, an image showing the operating procedure for checking the set value may be displayed, and the display light emitting unit 53 or the speaker unit 54 may indicate that the set value is being checked. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification shown in FIG. In this case, it becomes possible to make the game hall manager clearly aware that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed.

The operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is not limited to the reset button 68c, but may be a dedicated operation unit such as the update button 68b, or may be an operation unit provided in the main control device 60 to release an abnormal state. In addition, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be configured so that positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 68a and rotated, and the setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the setting key insertion unit 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion unit 68a may be configured so that it can be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value being updated is updated to the next setting value in the sequence.

In addition, when the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to output a corresponding signal to the gaming hall's management computer. In this case, the signal output may be configured to be performed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 100 milliseconds), and the signal output may be configured to continue while the setting value update process (Fig. 157) is being executed. This allows the gaming hall's management computer to know that the setting value update process (Fig. 157) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, a corresponding signal may be externally outputted from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall. In this case, the configuration may be such that the signal output is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds), and the signal output is continued while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed. It is also possible to configure This makes it possible for the game hall management computer to know that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) has been executed in the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the configuration that terminates the process when the key insertion section is changed from the ON state to the OFF state is applied to processes other than the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) and the setting value update process (Figure 157). Good too. For example, in order to display the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, a predetermined key insertion part needs to be operated to the ON position, and a predetermined key insertion part is turned ON. The display may be terminated when it is determined that the state has been changed to the OFF state.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the condition for starting the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is that at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, which is the opening target, is being operated to open. . In this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is being executed, and when the supply of operating power is restarted, there is no operation or no setting confirmation operation. 157, the setting value update process (FIG. 157) may be started even if the release target is not operated.

Also, the configuration may be such that the condition for starting the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is that the opening target, which is at least one of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, has been operated to open. In this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is being executed and "no operation" is displayed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be started even if the opening target has not been operated to open.

In addition, the areas to be initialized in the main RAM 65 may be different between the RAM clear process executed before the setting value update process (Figure 157) and the RAM clear process executed without the setting value update process being executed.

In addition, if the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started in a situation where the setting update display flag is not set to "1", the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the setting value is changed, but may be a configuration in which the setting value is changed from a predetermined initial value. The initial value may be, for example, "Setting 1", "Setting 6", or any other setting value.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is also possible to A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is executed based on the fact that `` has been performed. Even with this configuration, if the setting value update process (Figure 157) ends before the normal termination trigger occurs, the setting value update process (Figure 157) will continue even if no "setting change operation" is performed. By configuring this to be executed, it is possible to give priority to the task of changing setting values.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is also possible to perform the setting confirmation operation in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. '' has been performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) may be executed. Even with this configuration, if the settings confirmation process (Figure 155) is completed before the normal termination trigger occurs, the settings confirmation process (Figure 155) will be executed even if the "settings confirmation operation" is not performed. By configuring this to be executed, it is possible to prioritize the setting value confirmation work.

<Forty-sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the above-mentioned 45th embodiment. The configuration that differs from the above-mentioned 45th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the above-mentioned 45th embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SA901 to step SA925 in the main process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

Steps SA901 to SA904 are the same as steps SA401 to SA404 of the main processing (Figure 153) in the 45th embodiment. Then, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA905). If the supply of operating power is stopped and then resumed while the setting value update processing (step SA918) is being performed, the main processing is started with the setting update display flag set to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step SA905, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906). That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SA906: NO), it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA907). The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 133). The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the previous time the power was shut off.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SA907: YES), a checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 (step SA908). The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the 33rd embodiment. Then, the checksums for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 that were calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 during the power outage processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped are read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated in step SA908 (step SA909). Then, it is determined whether the checksums match (step SA910).

If a negative judgment is made in step SA907 or step SA910, i.e., if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SA911). In addition, an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the power outage flag or checksum when the supply of operating power begins is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step SA912). The processing content of these steps SA911 and SA912 is the same as step SA410 and step SA411 of the main processing (Figure 153) in the 45th embodiment described above.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal (step SA907 and step SA910: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key. (Step SA913). When the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SA913: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SA914). The contents of the setting confirmation process are the same as those in the forty-fifth embodiment. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the setting confirmation process is executed as long as the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on. Not done. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process will not be executed unless the supply of operating power is restarted in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" is performed.

If the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA905: YES) or if the reset button 68c is pressed (step SA906: YES), RAM clear processing is executed (step SA915). The processing contents of the RAM clear processing are the same as the RAM clear processing (step SA416) of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

After that, if the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SA916: YES), the setting value update process is executed regardless of whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (step SA918). On the other hand, if the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SA916: NO), the setting value update process is executed (step SA918) on the condition that the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON (step SA917: YES). In other words, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value update process is being executed, the setting value update process (step SA918) is started anew after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed, regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is resumed.

If the process of step SA912 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SA913, if the process of step SA914 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step SA917, or if the process of step SA918 is executed, step SA919 ~Execute the process of step SA925. The processing contents of step SA919 to step SA925 are the same as steps SA419 to step SA425 of the main processing (FIG. 153) in the forty-fifth embodiment.

Figure 162 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Figure 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (step SA918) or the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is being executed.

When the power failure processing is performed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (step SA918) nor the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) is performed, the contents of the processing performed in the main processing (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter are the same as those in the above 45th embodiment. In other words, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a "no operation" situation, the RAM clear processing (step SA915), the setting value update processing (step SA918), and the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) are not performed in the main processing (FIG. 161). Also, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the RAM clear processing (step SA915) is performed in the main processing (FIG. 161), while the setting value update processing (step SA918) and the setting confirmation processing (step SA914) are not performed. If the supply of operating power is resumed when a "setting change operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 161) executes a RAM clear process (step SA915) and a setting value update process (step SA918), but does not execute a setting confirmation process (step SA914). If the supply of operating power is resumed when a "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 161) executes a setting confirmation process (step SA914), but does not execute a RAM clear process (step SA915) or a setting value update process (step SA918).

Next, we will explain the contents of the processing that is executed in the main processing (Figure 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed if power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (step SA918) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1").

In any of the cases where the supply of operating power is resumed in a "no operation" situation, where the supply of operating power is resumed in a "RAM clear operation" situation, where the supply of operating power is resumed in a "setting change operation" situation, or where the supply of operating power is resumed in a "setting check operation" situation, the main processing (FIG. 161) executes the RAM clear processing (step SA915) and the setting value update processing (step SA918), but does not execute the setting check processing (step SA914). In other words, if the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the setting value update processing (step SA918) is being executed, the setting value update processing (step SA918) is newly started after the RAM clear processing (step SA915) is executed, regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process (step SA918), when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion part when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is Regardless of the operations performed on the reset button 68a and the reset button 68c, the setting value update process (step SA918) can be newly started after the RAM clear process (step SA915) is executed. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the setting values, if the supply of operating power is resumed afterwards, there will be an opportunity to update the setting values and then complete the update. becomes possible. Therefore, even though the supply of operating power is stopped during the update of the setting value, if the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the setting before the previous setting value update process (step SA918) is started. It is possible to prevent the game from starting with the same value.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (step SA918), the setting value update process (step SA918) is executed after the RAM clear process (step SA915) regardless of the operation content when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed according to the operation content.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when restarting will be explained.

If the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the main The contents of the process executed in the process (Figure 161) are as follows: When the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 157) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed. The content of the process is the same as that executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter. In other words, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, if the supply of operating power is resumed afterwards, the operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 will be delayed. Processing corresponding to the operation content is executed.

Confirming the setting value is different from changing the setting value, and even if the game is terminated midway and is not restarted, it will not affect the game. Therefore, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of checking the set values, the process corresponding to the operation when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, so that the administrator of the game hall can It becomes possible to give priority to the details of the operation when turning on the power.

<Forty-seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the power failure process is executed while the setting value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, the contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 161) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter differ from those of the 45th embodiment. The following describes the configurations that differ from the 45th embodiment. Note that the description of the same configurations as the 45th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 163 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Figure 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (Figure 157) or the setting confirmation processing (Figure 155) is being executed.

When power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update processing (FIG. 157) nor the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 155) is being executed, the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed are the same as those in the 45th embodiment. Also, when power failure processing is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step FIG. 155) is being executed (i.e., the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (FIG. 153) when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed are the same as those in the 46th embodiment.

When the power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) is being executed (i.e., the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed is the restart of the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) in the case of "no operation" and "setting confirmation operation", as in the above 45th embodiment. Also, in the case of "RAM clear operation" and "setting change operation", the setting value update processing (Fig. 157) is resumed after the RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear processing (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, but also the setting update display flag and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control are excluded from the targets of initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed when the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting update display flag will be set to "1" when the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157) begins, and setting value updating will begin from the setting value information stored at that time in the setting update area 342.

With the above configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of updating the setting value, not only is the setting value update process (FIG. 157) executed reliably when the supply of operating power is resumed, but it is also possible to resume updating the setting value from the setting value that was in the middle of updating just before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible to continue the work of changing the setting value as is.

<48th embodiment>
In this embodiment, when the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (step SA918) or the setting confirmation process (step SA914) is being executed, the main process ( The content of the process executed in FIG. 161) is different from the forty-fifth embodiment described above. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 164 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Figure 153) when the supply of operating power is resumed after a power outage processing is executed while the setting value update processing (Figure 157) or the setting confirmation processing (Figure 155) is being executed.

If the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 157) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 155) is executed, the main process (Figure 153) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. ) is the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. In addition, if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (step 155) is being executed (that is, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply will be The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 153) upon restarting are the same as in the forty-sixth embodiment.

If the power outage process is executed while the setting value update process (Figure 157) is being executed (that is, the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the main The content of the process executed in the process (Figure 153) is the setting value update process (Figure 157) and setting confirmation in the case of "no operation", in the case of "RAM clear operation", and in the case of "setting confirmation operation". The contents of the process are the same as those executed in the main process (Figure 153) when the power supply is resumed after the power outage process is executed in a situation where none of the main processes (Figure 155) are executed. It is. In other words, in the case of "no operation", none of the RAM clear processing (step SA416), setting value update processing (Fig. 157), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) is executed, and the "RAM clear operation" In this case, RAM clear processing (step SA416) is executed, but setting value update processing (Fig. 157) and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 155) are not executed, and in the case of "setting confirmation operation", Although the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) is executed, the RAM clear process (step SA416) and setting value update process (FIG. 157) are not executed.

In contrast, in the case of a "setting change operation", the setting value update process (FIG. 157) is resumed after the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed. In this case, in the RAM clear process (step SA416), not only the setting reference area 341 provided in the work area 221 for specific control, but also the setting update display flag and setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control are excluded from the targets of initialization. Therefore, even if the RAM clear process (step SA416) is executed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", when the subsequent setting value update process (FIG. 157) is started, the setting update display flag will be set to "1", and the setting value update will be started from the setting value information stored at that time in the setting update area 342.

With the above configuration, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the process corresponding to the operation content by the amusement hall manager when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being updated, and the supply of operating power is resumed when a "setting change operation" is performed, the supply of operating power will be stopped. It becomes possible to restart the update of the setting value from the setting value that was being updated immediately before it was stopped. This makes it possible to continue changing the setting values.

<49th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-fifth embodiment in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 165 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SB101 to SB128 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, the power-on initial setting process is executed (step SB101). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the main process is started and then the process waits until a predetermined waiting time (specifically, one second) has elapsed before proceeding to the next process. During this predetermined waiting period, the operation of the pattern display device 41 is started and the initial setting is completed. In addition, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SB102). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) exist as timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main processing. Also, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not being executed, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started first, regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be configured to be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is set in a specified register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) is set in a specific register of the main CPU 63. In addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, the internal function register setting process also executes processes for setting the numerical ranges of various counters, such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB103). As in the thirty-fifth embodiment, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is activated, the start-up processing flag is used to indicate whether the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is in progress or not. The situation is such that the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) should be terminated without executing the processing for advancing the game, while executing the processing for monitoring power outage, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud. This is a flag for specifying by the main CPU 63.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started in the main processing (Fig. 165), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends and the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started. As in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), in which the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) described later is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, even if the start-up processing in progress flag is set to "1" in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, power outage monitoring is performed even in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or setting value update processing (FIG. 167) described below is being performed among the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), and the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, by executing the power outage information storage process (step S8901) even when the start-up process flag is set to "1", the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ), even if a power outage occurs in a situation where a setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or a setting value update process (FIG. 167), which will be described later, is being executed, the power outage process can be executed in response. In the power outage processing, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is used for specific control. Since the data is stored in the work area 221 of the main side RAM 65, it is possible to prevent it from being identified as an abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167), the next operating power supply will be informed that the power outage has occurred during the setting-related process. This can be specified at the start.

By the way, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not prohibited from interrupting and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167), the return address information of the main process (FIG. 165) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was started is finished is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that was the target of activation is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 165) corresponding to the return address information saved in the specific control stack area 222, and the information saved in the specific control stack area 222 is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing in progress flag to "1" in step SB103, it is determined whether the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB104). The power outage flag is set to "1" when power outage processing is executed in the power outage information storage processing (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 133). The power outage flag is a flag that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether power outage processing was performed appropriately the last time the power was shut off.

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step SB104: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB105). Specifically, first, the checksum is calculated for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222. The method of calculating the checksum is the same as that of the 33rd embodiment. Then, the checksum for the specific control work area 221 and the specific control stack area 222 that was calculated and stored in the specific control work area 221 in the power failure processing executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 was stopped is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether the checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB105: YES), it is determined whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control is within the normal range (step SB106). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for identifying the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored, as in the 45th embodiment. If the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 2". If the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If the numerical information "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 will be "Setting 5." If the numerical information "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 will be "Setting 6." In step SB106, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is any of "1" to "6."

If a positive determination is made in all steps SB104 to SB106, it is determined whether the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB107). The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting update display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being updated and a display indicating the setting value that is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is started and is cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is ended. , in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is not executed, the setting update display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting update display flag is set to "1". The state in which the setting update display flag is set to "1" is maintained until the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" in the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

If a negative determination is made in step SB107 because the setting update display flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB108). That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB108: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB109). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), while a positive determination is made in step S8906, so that steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the previous time the power was cut off, if the checksums do not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power outage in at least one of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, or if the set value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but processing for progressing the game is not executed. If a positive determination is made in step SB109, the processing of steps SB121 and SB122 described below is executed.

If the determination in step SB109 is negative, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB110). If the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB110: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112). Even if the setting key insertion unit 68a has not been turned ON using the setting key (step SB110: NO), if the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB111: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB112).

The setting confirmation display flag is a flag for specifying in the main CPU 63 that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". is set, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting value is being checked and a display indicating the currently set setting value. be exposed. The setting confirmation display flag is a flag that is set to ``1'' when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is started and is cleared to ``0'' when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is ended. , in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed, the setting confirmation display flag is basically not set to "1". However, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently started; In this state, the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1". When the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) to be described later is executed, the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) to be described later is executed, or the setting is confirmed. It is maintained until the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" in the process (FIG. 166).

Not only when the reset button 68c is not pressed as described above and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (that is, when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is executed even when the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" in a situation where no pressing operation is performed. If the power outage process is executed in such a situation, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed even if the "setting confirmation operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to continue checking the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, even if the power outage process is executed while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, if the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of operating power is resumed, Among the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) and setting value updating process (FIG. 167), the process corresponding to the operation performed when the supply of operating power is restarted is executed without executing the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). be done. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) over the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166).

Here, the setting confirmation process executed in step SB112 will be explained. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process. Note that the processing from step SB201 to step SB207 in the setting confirmation processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB201). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, in the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), interrupts of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited. , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed. ) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, when the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to 1, so the first timer interrupt process (Figure 167) is executed. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Then, on condition that the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1" (step SB202). By setting the setting confirmation display flag to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and a setting process (step S9006) is executed for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation. The processing content of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is the same as that of the 45th embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(b), a display indicating that the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, a confirmation start command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB203). By receiving the confirmation start command, the audio emission control device 81 recognizes an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed and the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Display control is performed on the display control device 82 so that the image for making the display possible is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166). This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the operation details. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, the setting key insertion section 68a determines whether the setting key has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204). Specifically, similar to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 155) in the forty-fifth embodiment, the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion section 68a corresponds to the ON state. It is determined whether the reception state corresponding to the OFF state has changed from the reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, not only when the setting key insertion part 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started in a situation where the setting key insertion part 68a is in the OFF state, the OFF state is Even if it is maintained, a negative determination is made in step SB204. If it is not specified that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: NO), the process of step SB204 is repeated.

When it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB204: YES), the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB205). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S9005 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), resulting in a situation in which the setting process (step S9006) for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting confirmation is not executed. Therefore, the state in which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display the indication that the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is being confirmed and the indication of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed is canceled.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB206). As a result, when ending the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and returning to the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 165), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Then, a confirmation return command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step SB207). By receiving the confirmation return command, the audio and light emission control device 81 determines that the main CPU 63 has completed the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), and determines that the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) was performed in the processing at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, it executes processing corresponding to the reception of the confirmation return command. The contents of this processing will be explained later.

As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key insertion section 68a turned on by the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the main processing (Fig. 165) is started, but the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed in a state in which processing is being executed when the supply of operating power begins, which is the state before the processing for progressing the game is executed in the main processing (Fig. 165). This makes it possible to check the setting values when no game is being played.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 165), when the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using a setting key and the setting confirmation display flag is not set to "1" (steps SB110 and Step SB111: NO), a normal return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (Step SB113). By receiving the normal return command, the audio light emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main side CPU 63 has been completed, and also specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power this time has been completed. In the time processing (steps SB101 to SB122), it is determined that none of the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 167) are being executed. . Then, processing corresponding to receiving the normal return command is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on using the setting key (steps SB108 and SB114 :YES), or if it is determined in step SB107 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", a setting value update process is executed (step SB115). Not only when the reset button 68c is pressed as described above and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on (that is, when a "setting change operation" is performed), but also when the reset button 68c is pressed. The setting value is updated by executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167) even when the setting update display flag is set to "1" regardless of whether there is a pressing operation or an ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a. If the power outage process is executed in a situation where the process (Figure 167) is being executed, the operation contents when starting the supply of operating power after that are "No operation", "RAM clear operation", and "Setting change". The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed regardless of whether it is a ``operation'' or a ``setting confirmation operation.'' This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167).

Here, we will explain the setting value update process executed in step SB115. Figure 167 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process. Note that the processing of steps SB301 to SB314 in the setting value update process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SB301). This causes the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) to be started at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) to be started at the second interrupt period.

In this embodiment, the interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are basically prohibited in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed. ) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) or the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed, the startup process flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Figure 167) is executed. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SB302). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step S9004) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Then, the initial setting at the start is performed (step SB303). In this initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" in step SB119 of the main processing (Fig. 165) when the power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power outage and the power outage flag was not set to "1" (step SB104: NO), when the checksums do not match due to the fact that the storage state of information has changed since the previous power outage for at least one of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SB105: NO), or when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is not within the normal range (step SB106: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), but by making a positive determination in step S8906, the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65 as described above, the processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, but the processing for progressing the game is not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the processing of step SB303, it is possible to release the state in which the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 has been identified when the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information about setting values that are being updated in the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. When numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value of the update target (selection target or change target) becomes "setting 1". If numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 2". If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 3". When numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated is "setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 at step SB304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1." That is, in this embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value to be updated is "setting 1".

Thereafter, an update start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB305). When the audio emission control device 81 receives the update start command, it displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, and an image that makes it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value. , and the display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 so that the operation details for terminating the setting value update process (FIG. 167) can be recognized. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 167) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed may be configured to be sent to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Then, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is any one of "1" to "6" (step SB306). If it is not any one of "1" to "6" (step SB306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1".

If a positive determination is made in step SB306 or if the processing of step SB307 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from a reception state corresponding to the ON state to a reception state corresponding to the OFF state. Therefore, a negative determination is made in step SB308 not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update processing is started when the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state and the OFF state is maintained.

If the result of the determination in step SB308 is negative, and the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB309: YES), the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB310). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher level each time the reset button 68c is pressed. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB309: NO) or the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SB306. However, if the value in the setting update area 342 is determined to be 7 or greater in step SB306, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SB307. As a result, if the reset button 68c is pressed once in the "setting 6" state, the setting returns to "setting 1."

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB308: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB311). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 167) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set (step SB312). As a result, when ending the setting value update process (Figure 167) and returning to the process (steps SB101 to SB122) at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main process (Figure 165), the first timer interrupt process (Figure 167) is completed. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Then, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SB313). In the second RAM clear process, similar to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (i.e., the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the normal power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special chart display unit 37a is erased and the reserved information for the normal chart display unit 38a is erased. In addition, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the second RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed. In addition, in the second RAM clear process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SB102 is performed. Note that the process for clearing to "0" and the process for performing the initial setting are not performed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, a return command for updating is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB314). By receiving the return command at the time of update, the audio emission control device 81 specifies that the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also specifies that the current operating power supply is completed. It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the process corresponding to the reception of the update return command is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

Based on not only turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the reset button 68c as described above, but also turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key, Setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed. Further, as already explained, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed based on the fact that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while turning on the setting key insertion part 68a with the setting key without pressing the reset button 68c. executed. This makes it possible to use the ON operation for the setting key insertion section 68a in common as an operation for executing setting-related processing regarding setting values. Therefore, it is possible to make the details of the operation for generating the setting-related process easy to understand for the game hall manager.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on by the setting key, if the reset button 68c is not pressed, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed, and if the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed. This makes it possible to differentiate the process to be executed between the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) depending on whether the reset button 68c is pressed. This makes it possible to make the operation contents for executing the desired process between the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) easy to understand for the manager of the game hall. In addition, by making the operation contents for executing the setting value update process (Fig. 167) more than the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166), it becomes possible to make it particularly difficult to carry out the act of fraudulently executing the setting value update process (Fig. 167).

Returning to the explanation of the main process (Fig. 165), if it is determined in step SB108 that the reset button 68c has been pressed and that the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on using the setting key (step SB114: NO), it is determined whether or not the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB116). The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the setting value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), while the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are not executed by making a positive determination in step S8906. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because power outage processing was not performed properly the previous time the power was cut off, if the checksums do not match because the information storage state has changed since the previous power outage in at least one of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, or if the setting value is abnormal, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring will be executed, but processing for progressing the game will not be executed.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SB116: NO), a first RAM clearing process is executed (step SB117). In the first RAM clearing process, similarly to the RAM clearing process (step SA416) in the forty-fifth embodiment, in the work area 221 for specific control, the area ( That is, except for the setting reference area 341), the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. As a result, the area indicating whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode is cleared to "0", so the win/fail lottery is performed regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The mode is a low probability mode. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. In addition, since the reservation storage area 65a and the general power reservation area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", the reservation information for the special figure display section 37a is erased and the general figure display section The pending information for 38a is deleted. Further, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". Further, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". Furthermore, in the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Furthermore, in the first RAM clearing process, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SB102 is executed.

Note that for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control, processing for clearing to "0" and processing for initializing are not executed. Furthermore, the processing contents of the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) in the setting value update process (FIG. 167), but some of these processing contents are different. It is also possible to have a configuration in which For example, the area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) may not be cleared to "0" and to be initialized in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313). The area to be cleared to 0 and initialized in the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) may not be cleared to 0 and initialized in the first RAM clearing process (step SB117).

Thereafter, a return command upon clearing is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB118). By receiving the return command at the time of clearing, the audio light emission control device 81 specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) has ended in the main CPU 63, and also specifies that the current operating power supply is completed. It is specified that the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SB101 to SB122). Then, the processing corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of clearing is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB119). As already explained, when the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last power cut, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

Then, it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB120: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality occurred in the power failure flag, checksum, or setting value at the start of the supply of operating power is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 (step SB121). By receiving the abnormality command, the sound and light emission control device 81 causes the display light-emitting unit 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the start of the supply of operating power, and outputs a voice saying "Please change the settings" from the speaker unit 54. In addition, a text image saying "Please change the settings" is displayed on the pattern display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the above notification will be restarted when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (Figure 167) is executed.

Then, the external output process in the event of an abnormality is executed (step SB122). In the external output process in the event of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormality signal to the management computer of the game hall is executed. In this case, the signal output of the abnormality signal is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, this is not limited to this, and the signal output of the abnormality signal may be continued under a situation in which the game stop flag is set to "1", and the signal output of the abnormality signal may be stopped by clearing the game stop flag to "0". The abnormality signal may also be output when an abnormality other than an abnormality related to the power outage flag, the checksum, and the set value occurs. For example, the abnormality signal is also output when it is determined that a monitored fraud (detection of an illegal radio wave or detection of an illegal magnetic field) has occurred in the fraud detection process (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133). However, this is not limited to a configuration in which the abnormality signal is shared in this way, and a configuration in which a dedicated abnormality signal is output to the outside for an abnormality related to the power outage flag, the checksum, or the set value, or a configuration in which an abnormality signal corresponding to each of an abnormality related to the power outage flag, an abnormality related to the checksum, and an abnormality related to the set value is output to the outside.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB120: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB114). If the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB114 and step SB120: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB115). The contents of the setting value update process have already been explained. In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while the "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed even if a negative judgment is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 due to an abnormality occurring in the main RAM 65. This makes it possible to prioritize the change of the setting value. In addition, in the setting value update process (Fig. 167), as already explained, the initial setting at the start is executed in step SB303, and the game stop flag is cleared to "0". As a result, when the setting value update process (Figure 167) is executed, it becomes possible to resolve the condition in which an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65 after the setting value update is completed.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON (step SB120: YES, step SB114: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB116). Since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1" in the processing of step SB116 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB119, a positive determination is made in step SB116. In this case, an abnormality command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 in step SB121, and an abnormality signal is output to the outside in step SB122.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106, the operation to the main CPU 63 is Even if power supply is started, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is not executed. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the first RAM clear process is performed. (Step SB117) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the corresponding setting is The game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting (step SB303) at the start of the value update process (FIG. 167). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to not only perform processing to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the setting values. .

In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1", if the "setting change operation" is not performed, that is, if there is no operation, or if the "RAM clear operation" or the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, a positive judgment is made in step SB109 or step SB116, and an abnormality command is sent in step SB121 and an external output process in the event of an abnormality is executed in step SB122. As a result, when the game stop flag is set to "1", an abnormality notification in the pachinko machine 10 and an external output in the event of an abnormality to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 are executed every time the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, regardless of the processing results of steps SB104 to SB106 in the subsequent main processing, unless the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. This makes it possible to make the manager of the game hall aware that the setting value should be changed.

When the process of step SB112, step SB113, step SB115, step SB118, or step SB122 is performed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB123). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continue to display the check, as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Before (steps SB125 to SB128) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the initial check period is It is started after the processing at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Then, the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB124). By clearing the start-up processing in progress flag to "0", if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, a negative judgment is made in step S8906, which causes not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 to be executed, and the state in which processes for progressing the game are not executed is released. Note that in step SB124, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Then, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128. In this respect, the remaining process of steps SB125 to SB128 can be said to be non-periodic process that is executed non-periodically. In steps SB125 to SB128, the same process is executed as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to the time chart in Figure 168, we will explain how the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Figure 134) are permitted when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed. FIG. 168(a) shows the period during which the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is ON, FIG. 168(b) shows the period during which the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed, FIG. 168(c) shows the period during which the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", FIG. 168(d) shows the period during which the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is being executed, FIG. 168(e) shows the period during which interrupts are permitted, FIG. 168(f) shows the period during which the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is being executed, FIG. 168(g) shows the period during which the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is being executed, and FIG. 168(h) shows the period during which the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is being executed.

First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t1, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in a "no operation" situation where none of the "RAM clear operation", "setting change operation" or "setting confirmation operation" is performed. At timing t1, the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) when the supply of operating power begins as shown in FIG. 168(b). Also, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

Thereafter, at timing t2, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(b), and the remaining processing (step SB125) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(d). ~Step SB128) is started. Furthermore, at the timing t2, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 168(c). Note that at the timing when the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started, interrupts are not permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e).

Thereafter, at timing t3, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is completed as shown in FIG. 168(d), and interrupts are permitted as shown in FIG. 168(e). As a result, timer interrupt processing is started as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is executed. It may also be configured to be executed.

Next, we will explain the case where the setting value update process (Figure 167) is executed during the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t4, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "setting change operation" is being performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Further, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1".

Thereafter, at timing t5, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started as shown in FIG. 168(g). In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 168(e). By allowing the interrupt, timer interrupt processing is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) ends, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and if the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) is executed first and the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) ends, the second timer interrupt process (Figure 134) is executed. It may also be configured to be executed. Furthermore, even if the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133) is executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1" as shown in Fig. 168(c), so power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, etc. While the process for monitoring fraud is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

The timer interrupt process ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the setting value update process (FIG. 167) ends at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 168(g). Then, at timing t8, the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends as shown in FIG. 168(b), and the start-up process in progress flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 168(c). Also, at timing t8, the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) starts as shown in FIG. 168(d).

Next, a case will be described in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t9, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 168(a). In this case, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON when the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed. At timing t9, the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) when the supply of operating power begins as shown in FIG. 168(b). Also, as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1".

After that, at the timing of t10, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is started as shown in FIG. 168(h). In this case, an interrupt is permitted at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 168(e). By permitting the interrupt, the timer interrupt process is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 168(f). In this case, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is executed first, and when the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is terminated, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be executed first, and when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated, the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) may be executed. In addition, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 168(c), so that the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed.

The timer interrupt process ends at timing t12 as shown in FIG. 168(f), and then the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) ends at timing t13 as shown in FIG. 168(h). Then, at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 168(b), the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, and as shown in FIG. 168(c), the start-up processing flag is set. Cleared to "0". Further, at the timing of t13, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is started as shown in FIG. 168(d).

As mentioned above, in the situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process ( 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) or setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is being executed. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are permitted to be executed. If the settings confirmation process (FIG. 166) and setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is prevented from interrupting and starting during the process when starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). By doing so, it becomes possible to quickly complete the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process is executed according to the operation of the administrator of the game hall, so the period of time spent in these processes is becomes longer. In this case, if the timer interrupt processing interrupt is still prohibited even when the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) and setting value update processing (Fig. 167) are being executed, the execution of the timer interrupt processing starts. The timing will be extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution timing of the timer interrupt process from becoming extremely late. Furthermore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the process for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. By executing the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It becomes possible to make it happen.

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the start-up process in progress flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) are executed, while it is possible to prevent the processes for progressing the game from being executed.

Next, the progress of processing when an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or setting value occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 169. FIG. 169(a) shows a period in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 169(b) shows a period in which the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed. 169(c) shows the period in which the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is being executed, and FIG. 169(d) shows the period during which the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is being executed, and FIG. ) is being executed, FIG. 169(e) shows a period when the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", and FIG. 169(f) shows the period when the abnormal signal is externally executed. The output period is shown, and FIG. 169(g) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed.

At timing t1, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 169(a). In this case, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON in a "no operation" situation in which none of the "RAM clear operation," "setting change operation," or "setting confirmation operation" is performed. At timing t1, the main CPU 63 starts processing (steps SB101 to SB122) when the supply of operating power begins as shown in FIG. 168(b).

After that, at the timing of t2, an abnormality is identified regarding any of the power outage flag, checksum, and set value, and the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 169(e). Also, at the timing of t2, external output of an abnormality signal is started as shown in FIG. 169(f). This allows the gaming hall's management computer to identify that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 regarding any of the power outage flag, checksum, and set value.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends, and the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) begins, as shown in FIG. 169(c). Also, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 169(f), the external output of the abnormality signal ends. By continuing the external output of the abnormality signal for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t4, it becomes possible for the management computer of the gaming hall to accurately identify that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the power failure flag, the checksum, or the setting value. Also, by making the period during which the external output of the abnormality signal continues constant for a predetermined period, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the external output of the abnormality signal. In addition to the external output of the abnormality signal, an abnormality notification is also performed in the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

Thereafter, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) ends at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 169(c). Then, timer interrupt processing is executed as shown in FIG. 169(d) from timing t5 to timing t6, and residual processing ( Steps SB125 to SB128) are executed, and timer interrupt processing is executed from timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. 169(d). However, as shown in FIG. 169(e), the game stop flag is set to "1", so even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, power failure monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud will occur. Although processing for monitoring is executed, processing for advancing the game is not executed. At timing t8, a power outage process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

After that, at the timing of t9, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON again as shown in FIG. 169(a), and the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started as shown in FIG. 169(b). In this case, the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 169(e). Therefore, an abnormality signal is externally output as shown in FIG. 169(f) from the timing of t10 to the timing of t12. This makes it possible to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize again that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the power outage flag, the checksum, or the setting value. In addition to the external output of the abnormality signal, an abnormality notification is also executed in the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends at the timing of t11, and the remaining process (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed from the timing of t11 to the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 169(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 169(d), the timer interrupt process is executed at the timing of t13. However, since the game stop flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 169(e), even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is executed, the process for monitoring the power outage, updating various counters, and monitoring for fraud is executed, but the process for progressing the game is not executed. At the timing of t14, the power outage process is executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off as shown in FIG. 169(a).

Thereafter, at timing t15, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 169(a), and as shown in FIG. ) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 169(g), the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed from timing t16 to timing t17. By executing the setting value update process (FIG. 167), not only the setting value is changed, but also the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 169(e). Ru. As a result, the state in which execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked due to the occurrence of an information abnormality in the work area 221 for specific control is resolved. Thereafter, the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB128) is executed as shown in FIG. 169(c) from timing t17 to timing t18, and timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t18 as shown in FIG. 169(d). is started.

As mentioned above, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB104 to SB106 in the main process (FIG. 165), the game in the work area 221 for specific control By setting the stop flag to "1", a situation arises in which processing for advancing the game is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a game from being played even though an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control.

Further, the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1" will not be resolved unless the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed. As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (Fig. 167), and an information error occurs in the work area 221 for specific control. In this case, it becomes possible to require not only the processing for initializing the work area 221 for the specific control but also the resetting of the setting values.

Next, the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started will be described with reference to the time chart in Figure 170. Figure 170(a) shows the period during which the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is being executed, Figure 170(b) shows the period during which the processing after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed is executed, Figure 170(c) shows the initial check period, Figure 170(d) shows the period during which the setting value update processing (Figure 167) is being executed, and Figure 170(e) shows the situation in which the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated. FIG. 170(f) shows a period during which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is being executed, and FIG. 170(g) shows a setting confirmation display period during which the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being confirmed and a display indicating the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10.

First, a case will be described in which both the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

As shown in FIG. 170(a), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is executed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. Then, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is finished is started at the timing of t2. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the setting process of the checking counter in step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing of t2. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the check (see FIG. 128(b)). Even during the initial check period, the process for progressing the game is executed, so that the game can be played in a situation where the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displaying the check. After that, the initial check period ends at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 170(c). This causes the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to start displaying the base value.

Next, a case will be described in which the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t4, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. Then, the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed as shown in FIG. 170(d) from timing t5 to timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(e), the setting update display period extends from timing t5 to timing t6.

Thereafter, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t6. As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

Next, a case will be described in which the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

At timing t8, as shown in FIG. 170(a), processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) begins. Then, from timing t9 to timing t10, as shown in FIG. 170(f), processing for setting confirmation (FIG. 166) is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170(g), the display period for setting confirmation is from timing t9 to timing t10.

Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 170(b), the process after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is started. In this case, the initial check period is started by executing the checking counter setting process at step SB122 in the main process (FIG. 165) at the timing t10. As a result, the check display starts on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 (see FIG. 128(b)). Since the process for advancing the game is executed even during the initial check period, the game can be played in a situation where the check display is being performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. . Thereafter, the initial check period ends at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 170(c). As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying the base value.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the remaining processing is performed after the main CPU 63 completes the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). Before (steps SB125 to SB128) are started, an initial check period is started. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

Furthermore, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the initial check period is is started after the processing at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Next, in the case where power failure processing is executed while the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) or the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is being executed, the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 165) when the supply of operating power is resumed thereafter will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in Fig. 171.

If the power outage process is executed in a situation where neither the setting value update process (Figure 167) nor the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is executed, the main process (Figure 165) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed. ) will first be explained.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in the "no operation" situation, the main processing (Fig. 165) includes first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166). ) are not executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 165), while the setting value update process ( FIG. 167) and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting change operation" has been performed, the main process (FIG. 165) executes the setting value update process (FIG. 167), and the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed. ) and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are not executed. When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main processing (FIG. 165) executes the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117) is executed. ) and setting value update processing (FIG. 167) are not executed.

Next, if the power outage process is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (Figure 167) is being executed (that is, a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1"), the subsequent operating power supply The contents of the process executed in the main process (FIG. 165) when restarting will be explained.

If the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "no operation", if the supply of operating power is resumed in the situation of "RAM clear operation", it will operate in the situation that "setting change operation" is performed. Regardless of whether the supply of power is resumed or if the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 165) performs the setting value update process (Figure 165). 167) is executed, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is not executed. In other words, if the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the setting value will be updated no matter what operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. The process (FIG. 167) is started anew.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion part when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is It becomes possible to newly start the setting value update process (FIG. 167) regardless of the operation contents of the reset button 68a and the reset button 68c. This makes it possible to reliably create an opportunity to complete updating of the setting values. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being started even though the setting value update has not been completed.

Furthermore, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting value update process (Fig. 167), the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is uniquely executed regardless of the operation details when restarting the supply of operating power. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which the processing content to be executed is changed depending on the content of each operation.

Next, we will explain the contents of the processing executed in the main processing (Fig. 165) when the supply of operating power is resumed if power outage processing is executed while the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is being executed (i.e., the setting confirmation display flag is set to "1")

If the supply of operating power is resumed when a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the main process (Fig. 165), but the setting value update process (Fig. 167) and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) are not executed. In other words, even if the power outage process is executed when the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed, if a "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the first RAM clear process (step SB117) over the "RAM clear operation". Note that the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" when the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where a "setting change operation" has been performed, the main processing (Fig. 165) executes the setting value update processing (Fig. 167), but does not execute the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166). In other words, even if the power outage processing is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed, if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed without newly executing the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166). This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) for the "setting change operation". Even if the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is not executed in this way, the setting value to be updated is displayed on the fourth notification display device 204 by executing the setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and the information of the setting value to be updated at that time is set in the setting reference area 341 when the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is completed, so that the manager of the game hall can check the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the setting confirmation display flag is cleared to "0" by executing the second RAM clear process (step SB313) during the setting value update process (Figure 167).

If the supply of operating power is resumed in a situation where the "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the main process (Figure 165) is used to confirm the settings on the condition that no abnormality has occurred with respect to the power outage flag, checksum, and setting value. Execute the process (FIG. 166). As a result, even if power outage processing is executed during the setting confirmation process (Figure 166), confirmation of the setting values can be resumed by performing the "setting confirmation operation" when the supply of operating power is resumed. becomes.

When the supply of operating power is resumed in a "no operation" state, the main processing (Fig. 165) executes the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) even if the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON, provided that no abnormalities have occurred with the power outage flag, checksum, or setting value. This makes it possible to resume checking the setting value even if the power outage processing is executed during the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) and the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed in a "no operation" state.

Next, the processing executed by the audio emission control device 81 will be explained. Prior to explaining the processing, the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device 81 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 172.

The audio emission control device 81 includes an audio emission control board 351. A sound and light side MPU 352 is mounted on the sound and light emission control board 351 . The sound and light side MPU 352 includes a sound and light side ROM 354 and a sound and light side RAM 355 in addition to a sound and light side CPU 353 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the above-described elements, the audio-optical side MPU 352 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The sound/light side ROM 354 is a memory (i.e., a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory, and is used for read-only purposes. The sound/light side ROM 354 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound/light side CPU 353.

The sound/light side RAM 355 is a memory (i.e., a volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to retain memory, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound/light side RAM 355 is randomly accessible, and when compared for the same data capacity, it takes less time to read data than the sound/light side ROM 354. The sound/light side RAM 355 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control programs stored in the sound/light side ROM 354.

In addition to the sound/light side MPU 352, the sound/light emission control board 351 is also equipped with an RTC 356 and an RTC memory 357. The RTC 356 is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and is configured to be able to output the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the sound/light side CPU 353. The RTC 356 is provided with a backup power supply, and is capable of measuring date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Furthermore, the RTC 356 is not limited to a configuration in which date and time information is measured, and may be configured to measure only time information.

The RTC memory 357 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The date and time information of the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357 according to instructions from the audio-optical CPU 353. Further, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is read out by the audio-optical CPU 353 as needed. The sound and light side CPU 353 grasps the reference time based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, and executes a time-based production every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) passes based on the reference time. Execute processing to make it. Note that the RTC memory 357 is configured to be supplied with backup power from a backup power supply provided for the RTC 356, and the date and time information is stored and retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC memory 357 may be an EEPROM or the like that does not require an external power supply to store and retain information.

Next, the performance control process executed by the sound/light side CPU 353 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 173. Note that the performance control process is executed when the supply of operating power to the sound/light side CPU 353 is started.

If an update start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB401: YES), update time notification setting processing is executed (step SB402). As already explained, the update start command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 starts the setting value update process (FIG. 167). In the update time notification setting process, an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, an image to make it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value, and a setting value update process (FIG. 167) are displayed. The display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 to make it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the process shown in FIG. 167). This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 167) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54.

If the confirmation start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step SB403: YES), a confirmation notification setting process is executed (step SB404). As already explained, the confirmation start command is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the main side CPU 63 starts the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). In the confirmation notification setting process, an image indicating that the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) is being executed and an image that makes it possible to recognize the operation details for terminating the setting confirmation process (Figure 166) are displayed. Display control is performed on the display control device 82 so that the symbol is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This allows the game hall administrator to recognize that the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being checked, and is necessary for ending the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166). This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the operation details. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54.

When the processing of steps SB401 to SB404 is executed, it is determined whether or not any of the following commands has been received from the main CPU 63: a normal return command, a return command at clearing, a return command at confirmation, or a return command at updating (step SB405). The normal return command is sent when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed without executing any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), the processing for setting confirmation (Fig. 166), and the processing for updating the setting value (Fig. 167). The return command at clearing is sent when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed after the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed. The return command at confirmation is sent when the processing for setting confirmation (Fig. 166) is executed and the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. The restore command during an update is sent when the setting value update process (Figure 167) is executed and the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed.

If these return commands have not been received (step SB405: NO), the process returns to step SB401. The main side CPU 63 transmits one of the return commands to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. In this case, as described above, the sound/light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing from step SB406 until it receives any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63. This prevents the sound and light side CPU 353 from starting normal performance execution control while the main side CPU 63 is executing the process for starting the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122). It becomes possible.

In addition, in a situation where no return command has been received, there is a possibility that an update start command or confirmation start command will be received from the main CPU 63, and if an update start command is received, the setting value update process will be performed as already explained. It is necessary to make a notification corresponding to the execution of (Fig. 167), and when the confirmation start command is received, the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed as already explained. It is necessary to ensure that corresponding notifications are made. In this case, the sound-light side CPU 353 does not execute the processing from step SB406 onwards until it receives any of the return commands from the main side CPU 63, so that when it receives the update start command or confirmation start command, the corresponding notification is sent. It becomes possible to suitably start the process.

If any return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB405: YES), it is determined whether the received return command is a normal return command (step SB406). As already explained, the normal return command is executed when the supply of operating power is started without any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166), and setting value update processing (Fig. 167) being executed. It is transmitted when the processing (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. When the normal return command is received (step SB406: YES), the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read out, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing to perform a time-based effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

If the return command received this time is not a normal return command (step SB406: NO) but is a return command at the time of update (step SB408: YES), an end process of update time notification is executed (step SB409). As already explained, the return command at the time of update is sent to the sound and light side CPU 353 when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is completed by the main side CPU 63. In the update time notification termination process, the notification corresponding to the setting value update process (FIG. 167) started in step SB402 is ended.

If the return command received this time is not a return command at the time of update (step SB408: NO) but a return command at the time of confirmation (step SB410: YES), the confirmation notification end process is executed (step SB411). As already explained, the return command at the time of confirmation is sent to the audio/optical side CPU 353 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is ended by the main side CPU 63. In the confirmation notification end process, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) started in step SB404 is ended.

When the process of step SB407 is executed, when the process of step SB409 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step SB410, or when the process of step SB411 is executed, a process for controlling the execution of a normal performance is executed. Specifically, first, it is judged whether or not it is the timing to start a time-responsive performance (step SB412).

A time-responsive performance is a performance that is executed each time a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed based on a reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. In a time-responsive performance, the display light-emitting unit 53 produces a light-emitting performance corresponding to the time-responsive performance, the speaker unit 54 produces a sound output performance corresponding to the time-responsive performance, and the pattern display device 41 produces a display performance corresponding to the time-responsive performance.

In addition, when a time-based performance is started in a situation where a game-based performance is being executed, the display light emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 execute the time-based performance with priority over the game-based performance. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, an image corresponding to the time-based performance is displayed in a state where the image display corresponding to the performance of the game cycle is displayed in a reduced size on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In addition, if a time-based performance is started in a situation where a performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the display light emitting unit 53 and speaker unit 54 give priority to the time-based performance over the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 41, an image corresponding to the time-based performance is displayed in a state where the image display corresponding to the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is displayed in a reduced size on a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

Since the time-responsive performance is executed each time a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) has elapsed based on a reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, if the reference times of multiple adjacent pachinko machines 10 in an arcade are the same, it becomes possible to simultaneously start the time-responsive performance on those multiple pachinko machines 10. Note that, since the power of multiple pachinko machines 10 is turned ON at the same time in an arcade, the reference times of those multiple pachinko machines 10 will basically be the same.

In step SB412, the reference time is determined based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357. The current date and time information of the RTC 356 is also read. Then, it is determined whether the difference between the reference time and the time corresponding to the current date and time information read from the RTC 356 is an integer multiple of a predetermined time. If a positive determination is made in step SB412, a setting process for a time-responsive performance is executed (step SB413). In the setting process for a time-responsive performance, settings are made to execute a time-responsive performance in the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and a command is sent to the display control device 82 to execute a time-responsive performance in the pattern display device 41. Note that the execution content of the time-responsive performance may be different depending on the number of times the time-responsive performance is executed when the reference time corresponding to the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is used as a reference.

If a negative determination is made in step SB412 or if the process in step SB413 is executed, other processes are executed (step SB414). In other processing, when a command to start a game replay is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are used to start the game replay. If the situation is such that the game cycle performance should be performed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are set to proceed with the game cycle performance, and the game cycle is started. If the situation is such that the performance for the game should be ended, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are set to end the performance for the game. In addition, in other processing, when a command to start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is received from the main CPU 63, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 start the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If the situation is such that the opening/closing execution mode performance should be performed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 are used to proceed with the opening/closing execution mode performance. Settings are made, and when the situation is such that the performance for the opening/closing execution mode should be ended, settings are made for terminating the performance for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54.

Next, the effects corresponding to the contents of the processing executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122) will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 174.

In the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and the setting value updating processing (FIG. 167) are performed. is not executed, the main side CPU 63 transmits a normal return command to the audio-light side CPU 353 when the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed. When the sound and light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it does not perform any notification-related control in response to the command. On the other hand, when the audio-light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command, it stores the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time that is referred to in order to identify the trigger for executing the time-based performance is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

When the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), when the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) ends, the main CPU 63 sends a clear return command to the sound/light CPU 353. When the sound/light CPU 353 receives a clear return command, it does not execute control related to notification. Even if the sound/light CPU 353 receives a clear return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if no new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 before the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned off is stored and held as it is.

If the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) When the process ends, the main side CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of update to the sound and light side CPU 353. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of update, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167). Further, even if the audio-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of update, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new date and time information is not stored in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as is.

If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) When the process ends, the main side CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of confirmation to the sound and light side CPU 353. When the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166). Moreover, even if the sound-light side CPU 353 receives the return command at the time of confirmation, it does not store the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if new date and time information is not stored in the RTC memory 357, the RTC memory is The date and time information stored in 357 is stored and retained as is.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (Fig. 167) is started, the setting value can be changed from a certain starting setting value in the setting value updating process (Fig. 167). It becomes possible to do this. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

The setting value corresponding to the above start is specifically "Setting 1", which has the lowest degree of advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (Figure 167) is started, the setting value is changed from "Setting 1", which has the lowest degree of advantage. As a result, even if the manager of the amusement hall unintentionally ends the setting value update process (Figure 167) immediately after it has started, the setting value will have the lowest degree of advantage, so it is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring to the amusement hall even if play is started in such a situation.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 167) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) was started is stored and retained in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the setting value updating processing (Fig. 167) can be stored and retained. It becomes possible to change the setting value.

When the supply of operating power is started, the main CPU 63 transmits a return command upon clearing when executing the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), and when executing the setting value updating process (FIG. 167). When the return command for updating is sent and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the return command for confirmation is sent, and the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and If none of the settings confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, a normal return command is sent. This enables control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started to be performed not only by the main side CPU 63 but also by the sound and light side CPU 353.

Regardless of whether the sound/light side CPU 353 receives a normal return command, a return command at the time of clearing, a return command at the time of updating, or a return command at the time of confirmation, it makes a positive judgment at step SB405 of the performance control process (Fig. 173) and enters a state in which it executes the processes of steps SB412 to SB414. On the other hand, when it receives a normal return command, it executes a write process to the RTC memory 357 (step SB407), when it receives a return command at the time of updating, it executes an end process of the update notification (step SB409), when it receives a return command at the time of confirmation, it executes an end process of the confirmation notification (step SB411), and when it receives a return command at the time of clearing, it does not execute a dedicated process. This makes it possible to have the sound/light side CPU 353 execute a process corresponding to the progress of the game when any one of the return commands is received, while the sound/light side CPU 353 executes a control corresponding to each return command.

After transmitting any of the return commands, the main CPU 63 ends the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) and starts the processing for controlling the progress of the game (steps S8907 to S8920), and when the sound/light CPU 353 receives any of the return commands, it controls the execution of the presentation corresponding to the progress of the game. This makes it possible for the sound/light CPU 353 to control the execution of the presentation corresponding to the progress of the game after the main CPU 63 is in a situation where it can execute the processing for controlling the progress of the game. In this case, the sound/light CPU 353 executes the processing corresponding to each return command. This makes it possible to have the sound/light CPU 353 recognize the start trigger for the execution control of the presentation corresponding to the progress of the game by using multiple return commands that differ in the execution content of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the sound/light CPU 353.

Since the time-based performance is executed when the time-based performance is executed based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, the time-based performance is executed at the predetermined time. It becomes possible to In this case, if the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), setting value updating process (FIG. 167), or setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. While new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 does not occur, all of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) are executed. If not, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, the situation in which date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 and It is possible to create a situation in which date and time information is not newly stored in the memory 357.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, if a "RAM clear operation" is performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, and if a "setting change operation" is performed, The setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, and when the "setting confirmation operation" is performed, the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in the "no operation" situation, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) ) are not executed. In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started as described above, the first RAM clearing process (step SB117), the setting value updating process (FIG. 167), or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. In this case, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 will not occur, but none of the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), setting value updating processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) will occur. If the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is not executed, the current date and time information measured by the RTC 356 is stored in the RTC memory 357. As a result, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, will the date and time information be newly stored in the RTC memory 357, or will the date and time information not be newly stored in the RTC memory 357? The administrator of the game hall can select the following.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed in the main CPU 63, and the remaining processing (steps SB125 to SB122) is completed. An initial check period is initiated before SB128) is initiated. As a result, there is no need to control the initial check period in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, reducing the processing load in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. becomes possible.

The setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), whereas the initial check period starts after the processes at the start of the supply of operating power are completed. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, this does not affect the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, either the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed, and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal, regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started.

The main processing (FIG. 165) of the main CPU 63 is a processing that is executed in common when either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, and when neither the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) nor the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, and when either the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, a processing that starts a check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as a processing that is executed later in the order of execution than the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) and the setting value update processing (FIG. 167). In this way, the processing that starts a check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is set as a common processing, which makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the processing configuration.

Even if a check display is being executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the main CPU 63 can start processing to progress the game. This makes it possible to prevent delays in the start timing of processing to progress the game even in a configuration in which a check display is executed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after execution of a setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or a setting value update process (FIG. 167).

In the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (step SB101 to step SB122), which is executed when the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether the set value to be used is within the normal range. Processing for monitoring is executed. If the set value to be used is abnormal, a regulated state is entered in which processing for advancing the game is not started. This makes it possible to prevent the process for advancing the game from being started even though the set value to be used is abnormal.

The process for monitoring whether the set value of the target to be used is within the normal range is performed even after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122) is completed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) ) is executed in step S8919. Thereby, even if the setting value of the target to be used becomes abnormal as the game progresses, it becomes possible to deal with it.

In the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), which is executed when the supply of operating power is started in the main CPU 63, it is determined whether the set value to be used is within the normal range. In addition to monitoring, monitoring is performed to see whether the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", and the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are checked. Monitoring is performed to see if the thumb is normal. Then, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or if the checksum is abnormal, a regulated state is entered in which processing for advancing the game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the process for proceeding with the game from being started even though an information abnormality has occurred in the main side RAM 65.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the regulated state is resumed when the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it possible to prevent the state in which execution of processing for advancing the game is restricted due to an information abnormality occurring in the main side RAM 65 from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power. Become.

The above-mentioned restricted state is canceled by executing the set value update process (FIG. 167). Thereby, when the state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is released, it becomes possible to make a new setting of the setting value to be used.

Even in the above-mentioned restricted state, power outage monitoring and various counter updating processes are executed. This makes it possible to ensure the execution of necessary processing even when the progress of the game is restricted as described above. In particular, by performing power outage monitoring, even if the progress of the game is restricted, if a power outage occurs, it becomes possible to deal with it appropriately.

When the above-mentioned restriction state is reached, it is notified that the setting value of the object to be used should be changed. As a result, if an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, it becomes possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to resolve it.

If an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, an abnormality signal is externally outputted to the management computer of the gaming hall. Thereby, if an information abnormality occurs in the main side RAM 65, it becomes possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to resolve the problem.

If an abnormality other than an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, an abnormality signal is output to the gaming hall's management computer. This makes it possible to use the same configuration for external output.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped in a restricted state in which game progress is restricted due to an information abnormality occurring in the main RAM 65, if the restricted state is not yet lifted when the supply of operating power is resumed, an abnormality signal is output to the outside again. As a result, in the restricted state, an abnormality signal is output to the outside every time the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to recognize that an information abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65.

In the situation where the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) and the setting value update process (Fig. 167) are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is executed. The first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (Fig. 134) are prohibited and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is executed. Execution of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is permitted. If the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are not executed, the timer interrupt process is prevented from interrupting and starting during the process at the start of operating power supply (steps SB101 to SB122). By doing so, it becomes possible to quickly complete the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122).

On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed, the process is executed according to the operation of the administrator of the game hall, so the period of time spent in these processes is becomes longer. In this case, if the timer interrupt processing interrupt is still prohibited even when the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) and setting value update processing (Fig. 167) are being executed, the execution of the timer interrupt processing starts. The timing will be extremely slow. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution start timing of the timer interrupt process from becoming extremely late. Furthermore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are being executed, the process for controlling the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed. By executing the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 using the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134). It becomes possible to make it happen.

Furthermore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) or the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is being executed, the start-up process flag is set to "1". Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started while the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) or the setting value update process (Fig. 167) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (Fig. Among the various processes in 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game can be prevented from being executed.

Note that if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. However, when any of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 is performed. It is not limited to configurations where this does not occur. For example, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) are executed, or if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed A configuration may also be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Also, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed, or if the setting value update processing (Fig. 167) is executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. Also, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed, or if the setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) is executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357.

Furthermore, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the setting value update processing (FIG. 167) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Furthermore, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the date and time information is newly stored in the RTC memory 357 when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed. Furthermore, if none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed, and if the first RAM clear processing (step SB117) is executed, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed.

Furthermore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs, and in other cases, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which storage does not occur. Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which storage does not occur. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, and in other cases, new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which storage does not occur. Furthermore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting value updating process (FIG. 167) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs; A configuration may also be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur. If the first RAM clearing process (step SB117) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs; otherwise, the RTC memory 357 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no new storage of date and time information occurs. Furthermore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) or the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, new storage of date and time information in the RTC memory 357 occurs; A configuration may also be adopted in which new storage of date and time information in the memory 357 does not occur.

In addition, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the entire work area 221 for specific control including the setting reference area 341 and the setting update area 342 is A configuration may also be adopted in which the area is cleared to "0" and initialization is executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the second RAM clearing process (step SB313) is not executed in the setting value updating process (FIG. 167).

In addition, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value change may be started from a predetermined setting value other than "Setting 1". For example, the setting value change may be started from "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", or "Setting 6".

In addition, when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is started, the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is overwritten in the setting update area 342, as in the 45th embodiment, and the setting value is changed from the setting value that had been set as the target for use up until that point.

In addition, the process for sending various return commands in the main process (Fig. 165) may be configured to be set as a process before the remaining processes (steps SB125 to SB128) are started. In this case, when any of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (Fig. 167), and the setting confirmation process (Fig. 166) is executed, a corresponding flag may be set, and in the process for sending the various return commands, a return command corresponding to the state of that flag may be sent to the audio/light side CPU 353.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which a time-responsive performance is executed each time a predetermined time has elapsed based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, a configuration in which monitoring is performed to see whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred each time a predetermined time has elapsed based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, or a configuration in which a base value is notified each time a predetermined time has elapsed based on the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357, may be used. In this case, the RTC 356 and the RTC memory 357 may be provided on the main control board 61, and the main CPU 63 may be configured to perform the abnormality monitoring or the base value notification. By simultaneously performing abnormality monitoring on multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in a game hall and notifying the results, for example, on the pattern display device 41, it becomes possible to collectively monitor whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred on multiple pachinko machines 10. In addition, by simultaneously notifying the base value on the pattern display device 41, etc. on multiple pachinko machines 10 set in a game hall, it becomes possible to collectively monitor the base value on a regular basis. The above various notifications are not limited to being sent by the pachinko machine 10 itself, but may be sent via external output to the gaming hall's management computer.

Also, if it is determined that the power outage flag is not set to "1" in the main processing (FIG. 165), if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, or if the setting value in the setting reference area 341 is abnormal. If it is determined, the configuration may be such that the setting value update process (FIG. 165) is forcibly executed regardless of whether or not the "setting change operation" is being performed. This makes it possible to immediately change the set value if an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65.

<50th embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the effect control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU 353. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 175 is a flowchart showing the performance control process in this embodiment executed by the sound/light side CPU 353.

In steps SB501 to SB505, the same processes as steps SB401 to SB405 of the production control process (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed. If any of the normal return command, clear return command, confirmation return command, and update return command is received from the main CPU 63 (step SB505: YES), the currently received return command is other than the normal return command. It is determined whether it is a return command (step SB506).

If the return command received this time is one of the return command for clearing, the return command for confirmation, and the return command for update (step SB506: YES), the production control process in the forty-ninth embodiment (FIG. 173) Similarly to step SB407, the current date and time information of the RTC 356 is read, and the read date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357 (step SB407). As a result, the date and time information that serves as a reference when specifying the timing to perform a time-based effect is stored in the RTC memory 357.

In steps SB508 to SB514, the same processes as steps SB408 to SB414 of the production control process (FIG. 173) in the forty-ninth embodiment are executed.

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action corresponding to the content of the processing executed in the processing at the start of supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122).

Similar to the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB101 to SB122) includes the first RAM clearing processing (step SB117), the setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166), and If none of the setting value update processes (FIG. 167) are executed, the main side CPU 63 sends a normal return command to the sound-light side CPU 353, and if the first RAM clear process (step SB117) is executed, The main side CPU 63 sends a return command when clearing to the sound and light side CPU 353, and when the setting value update process (FIG. 167) is executed, the main side CPU 63 sends a return command when updating to the sound and light side CPU 353. , when the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is executed, the main side CPU 63 transmits a return command at the time of confirmation to the audio/light side CPU 353.

Similarly to the forty-ninth embodiment, when the sound-light side CPU 353 receives a return command at the time of update, it ends the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167), and also terminates the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting value update process (FIG. 167). When the return command is received, the notification corresponding to the execution of the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is terminated. Further, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, even if the sound and light side CPU 353 receives the normal return command and the clear return command, it does not perform notification-related control in response to them.

When the sound/light side CPU 353 receives any of the clearing return command, the updating return command, and the confirmation return command, it stores the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. As a result, information corresponding to the reference time referenced to identify the execution trigger of the time-dependent performance is newly stored in the RTC memory 357. On the other hand, even if the sound/light side CPU 353 receives a normal return command, it does not store the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356 in the RTC memory 357. Since backup power is supplied to the RTC memory 357, if no new date and time information is stored in the RTC memory 357, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 before the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned off is retained.

According to the above configuration, in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB122), one of the first RAM clear process (step SB117), the setting value update process (FIG. 167), and the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) is performed. is executed, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is rewritten to the current date and time information measured in the RTC 356, whereas the processing at the start of supply of operating power (steps SB101 to SB101) If none of the first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (FIG. 167), and setting confirmation processing (FIG. 166) is executed in step SB122), the information stored in the RTC memory 357 Date and time information cannot be rewritten. As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once for maintenance or operation check of the pachinko machine 10 during operation of the game hall, when the supply of operating power is resumed after that, there will be no operation. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 from being rewritten. Therefore, when restarting the supply of operating power after turning off the power to the pachinko machine 10 during operation of the game hall, it is necessary to set the reference time of the time-based performance to be the same with the surrounding pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. However, it is possible to improve the operability for restarting the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is not rewritten by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the "no operation" situation, so the date and time information stored in the RTC memory 357 is When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on so that the information is not rewritten, unintended operations such as first RAM clear processing (step SB117), setting value update processing (Fig. 167), and setting confirmation processing (Fig. 166) are performed. It is possible to prevent the process from being executed.

<51st embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SB601 to step SB630 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

Steps SB601 to SB622 execute the same processes as steps SB101 to SB122 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When the process of step SB612, step SB613, step SB615, step SB618, or step SB622 is executed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB623). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continue to display the check, as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB601 to SB622) is completed in the main CPU 63 and before the remaining processing (steps SB627 to SB630) is started. This makes it unnecessary to control the initial check period when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

Furthermore, while the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) and the setting value update process (FIG. 167) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB601 to SB622), the initial check period is It is started after the processing at the start of supply is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB624). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that a check display is performed in a situation where the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more. The display of 201 to 204 is controlled.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the check counter in the work area 221 for specific control is "0" (step SB625). Then, the process waits in step SB625 until the value of the check counter becomes "0". In this case, since the start-up process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is kept set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) are executed, while the process for progressing the game is not executed and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is terminated. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB623 has elapsed, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the execution of the process for progressing the game is prevented.

Thereafter, the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB626). When the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started by clearing the start-up processing flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S8906, so that not only the processing in steps S8901 to S8905 is executed. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are executed, and the state in which the process for advancing the game is not executed is canceled. Incidentally, in step SB626, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Then, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB627 to SB630. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but there is a remaining time between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB627 to SB630. In this respect, the remaining process of steps SB627 to SB630 can be said to be non-periodic process that is executed non-periodically. In steps SB627 to SB630, the same process is executed as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of a process for advancing the game is blocked. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal under a situation where no game is being played.

<52nd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SB701 to step SB734 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

Unlike the 49th embodiment, the main processing of this embodiment does not execute the power-on initial setting process. Therefore, when the main processing is started, the processing from step SB701 onwards is started without waiting for the lapse of the predetermined wait time. Note that although the power-on initial setting process is not executed, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted when the main processing is started.

In the main process, first, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB701) in the same manner as in step SB102 in the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment, and the start-up process in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB702) in the same manner as in step SB103 in the main process (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment. Then, under the condition that the power outage flag is set to "1", the checksum is normal, the setting value is normal, and further the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (steps SB703 to SB705: YES, step SB706: NO), it is determined whether the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB707).

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB707: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB708). If the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion unit 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB708: NO, step SB709: YES), or if the game stop flag is not set to "1" and the setting key insertion unit 68a is not turned on using the setting key and the setting confirmation display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (steps SB708 and SB709: NO, step SB710: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB711). In the setting confirmation process, the processes of steps SB201 to SB202 and steps SB204 to SB207 are executed in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 166) in the 49th embodiment.

In other words, in the setting confirmation process of this embodiment, the confirmation start command is not sent to the sound/light side CPU 353. Therefore, even if the setting confirmation process is executed in this embodiment, the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process is not executed by the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. As already explained in this embodiment, when the main process is started, the process after step SB701 is started without waiting for the predetermined wait time to elapse, so that the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 may not be completed at the timing when the setting confirmation process is started. In response to this, by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process from being executed by the pattern display device 41 as described above, it is possible to prevent the display control of the pattern display device 41 from being started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed. Note that the notification corresponding to the setting confirmation process may be performed by the display light-emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the pattern display device 41.

After executing the setting confirmation process, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB712). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is activated, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. If the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment. In other words, when the setting confirmation process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to At 204, the check display is started, and the check display is performed in a situation where the progress of the process is not on standby.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed, the game stop flag is not set to "1", the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON using the setting key, and the setting confirmation display flag in the specific control work area 221 is not set to "1" (steps SB707 to SB710: NO), information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the specific control work area 221 (step SB713). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. If a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continue to display the check, as in the 35th embodiment.

Then, interrupt permission is set (step SB714). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started by interrupting at the first interrupt period, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting at the second interrupt period. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are controlled to display a check display when the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more.

Then, the wait process is executed (step SB715). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the check counter in the work area 221 for specific control becomes "0". In this case, since the start-up process flag in the work area 221 for specific control is kept set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is interrupted and started, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) are executed, while the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is terminated without executing the process for progressing the game. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB713 has elapsed, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where the execution of the process for progressing the game is prevented. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the time of waiting in the wait process. In other words, by utilizing the wait period for preventing the execution of processing for progressing the game until the operation of the symbol display device 41 starts and the initial settings are completed, it becomes possible to cause the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a check display. After the wait processing (step SB715) is completed, a normal return command is sent to the sound/light side CPU 353 (step SB716), similar to step SB113 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the 49th embodiment.

When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON using the setting key (step SB707 and step SB717: YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB718). Also, when the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB706: YES), regardless of whether the above-mentioned "setting change operation" has been performed, the setting value update process is executed (step SB717). In the setting value update process, the processes of steps SB301 to SB304 and steps SB306 to SB314 are executed in the setting value update process in the 49th embodiment (FIG. 167).

That is, in the setting value update process of this embodiment, the update start command is not sent to the audio-light side CPU 353. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the set value update process is executed, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 do not provide notification corresponding to the set value update process. In this embodiment, as already explained, when the main process is started, the process from step SB701 onward is started without waiting for the predetermined wait time to elapse, so the symbol is displayed at the timing when the setting value update process is started. There is a possibility that the start of operation and initial settings of the display device 41 have not been completed. On the other hand, by preventing the notification corresponding to the setting value update process from being executed on the symbol display device 41 as described above, display control of the symbol display device 41 is started in a situation where the initial setting is not completed. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the setting value update process is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 but not by the symbol display device 41.

After the set value update process is executed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the check counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB719). The value set in the check counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. If the check counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the check display is continued on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the 35th embodiment. In other words, when the set value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the check display is started on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the set value update process is completed, and the check display is displayed in a situation where the progress of the process is not pending.

When the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON (step SB707: YES, step SB717: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB721) on the condition that the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1" (step SB720: NO). The content of the first RAM clear process is the same as the first RAM clear process (step SB117) of the main process (Figure 165) in the 49th embodiment.

After that, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB722). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. If a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the checking display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the 35th embodiment.

Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (step SB723). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. When the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started, the first to fourth notification display devices are configured so that a check display is performed in a situation where the checking counter is set to a value of 1 or more. The display of 201 to 204 is controlled.

Thereafter, wait processing is executed (step SB724). In the wait process, the process waits until the value of the checking counter in the specific control work area 221 becomes "0". In this case, since the startup processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control remains set to "1", even if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is interrupted and started, Among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, while the processes for advancing the game are not executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended. Therefore, until the initial check period set in step SB722 has elapsed, a check display is displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in a situation where execution of the process for advancing the game is blocked. will continue. In addition, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the waiting time in the wait process. In other words, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 by using the wait period to prevent execution of processing for advancing the game until the symbol display device 41 starts operating and initial settings are completed. This makes it possible to display a check display. After the wait process (step SB724) is completed, a return command upon clearing is sent to the sound-light side CPU 353 (step SB725), similar to step SB118 of the main process (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps SB703 to SB705, after setting the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 to "1" (step SB726), check whether the reset button 68c has been pressed. (Step SB727). If the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion part 68a is turned on using the setting key (step SB717 and step SB727: YES), the setting value update process is performed in step SB718. At the same time, in step SB719, a checking counter setting process is executed. The contents of these processes are as already explained.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB727: NO), if it is determined in step SB720 that the game stop flag is set to "1", or if the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB708 If it is determined that is set, the processes of steps SB728 and SB729 are executed. The processing contents of step SB728 and step SB729 are the same as step SB121 and step SB122 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

When step SB712, step SB716, step SB719, step SB725, or step SB729 is executed, the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB730). When the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0", a negative judgment is made in step S8906 when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, and not only the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 are executed, and the state in which processes for progressing the game are not executed is released. Note that in step SB730, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Then, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps SB731 to SB734. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but there is a remaining time between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the completion time of each timer interrupt process, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining process of steps SB731 to SB734. In this respect, the remaining process of steps SB731 to SB734 can be said to be non-periodic process that is executed non-periodically. In steps SB731 to SB734, the same process is executed as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, if the setting confirmation process (step SB711) and the setting value update process (step SB718) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB701 to SB729), the wait process While waiting for the progress of the process, the check display continues on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. As a result, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 utilize the wait period to prevent execution of processing for progressing the game until the start of operation of the symbol display device 41 and initial settings are completed. It is now possible to display a check display. In addition, it is possible to secure an opportunity to check the check displays on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 before starting the process for advancing the game.

On the other hand, since the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) does not end unless the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off by at least the administrator of the game hall, these setting confirmation processes (step SB711) Or, by the time the set value update process (step SB718) is finished, a time longer than the time required to start the operation of the symbol display device 41 and complete the initial settings will have elapsed. In this case, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, the wait process is not executed. When the value update process (step SB718) is executed, it is possible to prevent the time required until the process for advancing the game is started from becoming excessively long.

In addition, when the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is executed, a check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 after the setting confirmation process (step SB711) or the setting value update process (step SB718) is completed. This makes it possible to perform a check display on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 without affecting the display of the setting values using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

<53rd embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63. Hereinafter, the configuration that is different from the forty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the forty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment that is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SB801 to SB826 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SB801). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Then, the internal function register setting process is executed (step SB802). In the internal function register setting process, as in the 35th embodiment, the interrupt period of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to the first interrupt period (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt period of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), which is a process that periodically interrupts the main process and is started, is set to the second interrupt period (specifically, 2 milliseconds), which is shorter than the first interrupt period.

In other words, in this embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) exist as timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are started by interrupting the main processing. Also, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134). Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) are not being executed, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is started first, regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be configured to be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt periods, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Then, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB803). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should end without executing any process for progressing the game, while the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is started in the main processing (Fig. 165), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power ends and the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. As in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) when the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or the setting value update processing (Fig. 181) described later is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, even if the start-up processing in progress flag is set to "1" in the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133), by executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905, power outage monitoring is performed even in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SB810) or setting value update processing (FIG. 181) described below is being executed among the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826), and the winning random number counter C1, the big win type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, even if the startup processing flag is set to "1", the power outage information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that even if a power outage occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), which will be described later, is being executed among the processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826), a power outage process can be executed. In the power outage process, as in the 35th embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, so that when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), it is possible to identify that a power outage occurred during these setting-related processes at the start of the supply of operating power the next time.

By the way, when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are not prohibited from interrupting and can be interrupted at any timing. In this case, when the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and started in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the return address information of the main process (FIG. 179) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was started is finished is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before the timer interrupt process is started is saved in the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt process that was the target of activation is completed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 179) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and the information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is restored to the various registers of the main CPU 63.

After setting the start-up processing flag to "1" in step SB803, it is determined whether or not the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB804). . When the power outage process is executed in the power outage information storage process (step S8901) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the power outage flag is set to "1". The power outage flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the power outage processing was appropriately performed during the previous power cutoff.

If the power outage flag is set to "1" (step SB804: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step SB805). Specifically, first, checksums are calculated for the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control. The checksum calculation method is the same as in the 33rd embodiment. Thereafter, the work area 221 for specific control and the work area 221 for specific control calculated in the power outage process executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and stored in the work area 221 for specific control. The checksum for the stack area 222 is read, and the read checksum is compared with the checksum calculated as described above in the current main processing. Then, it is determined whether these checksums match.

If the checksums match (step SB805: YES), check whether the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 (see FIG. 154) in the specific control work area 221 is within a normal range. It is determined whether or not (step SB806). The setting reference area 341 is a storage area in which information for specifying the current setting values of the pachinko machine 10 by the main CPU 63 is stored, as in the forty-fifth embodiment. If numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 1". If numerical information of “2” is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is “setting 2”. If numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 3". If numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 4". If numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 5". If numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting reference area 341, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is "setting 6". In step SB806, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting reference area 341 is one of "1" to "6".

If a positive determination is made in all steps SB804 to SB806, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB807). That is, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the reset button 68c is pressed and the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Here, in this embodiment, like the thirty-fifth embodiment, the main control device 60 is provided with a setting key insertion section 68a and a reset button 68c, but is not provided with an update button 68b. Furthermore, the main control device 60 is provided with first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c.

If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB807: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag or setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". (Step SB808).

The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the power outage flag is not set to "1", when the checksums do not match, or when the set value is abnormal. When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last power cut, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

The setting update display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, as in the 35th embodiment. When the setting update display flag is set to "1", the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 display an indication that the setting value is being updated and an indication that the setting value is being updated. The setting update display flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started and cleared to "0" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is terminated. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is not being executed, the setting update display flag is not basically set to "1". However, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the setting update display flag is set to "1" when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started thereafter. The setting update display flag will remain set to "1" until the setting value update process (Figure 181) clears the setting update display flag to "0."

If a negative judgment is made in step SB808 because the game stop flag and the setting update display flag are not set to "1", it is judged whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB809). If the setting key insertion unit 68a has been turned ON using the setting key (step SB809: YES), a setting confirmation process is executed (step SB810). The processing content of the setting confirmation process is the same as the setting confirmation process in the 49th embodiment (FIG. 166). Note that in this embodiment, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the setting confirmation process is not executed unless a "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed.

If the setting key insertion section 68a has not been turned on using a setting key (step SB809: NO), a normal return command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB811). The processing contents executed by the audio emission control device 81 when a normal return command is received are the same as those in the forty-ninth embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion part 68a has been turned on using the setting key (steps SB807 and SB812 :YES), the setting value update process is executed (step SB813). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", the "setting change operation" is not performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. The setting value update process will not be executed until then. Details of the setting value update process will be explained later.

If it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is pressed, and it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned on using the setting key (step SB812: NO), the specified It is determined whether the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB814).

If both the game stop flag and the setting update display flag are not set to "1" (step SB814: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step SB815). In the first RAM clear process, similar to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the specific control work area 221 (i.e., the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the normal power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special map display unit 37a is erased and the reserved information for the normal map display unit 38a is erased. In addition, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, in the first RAM clearing process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed. In addition, in the first RAM clearing process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SB802 is performed. Note that the process for clearing to "0" and the process for performing the initial setting are not performed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Then, a clear-time return command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 81 (step SB816). The processing contents executed by the audio and light emission control device 81 when the clear-time return command is received are the same as those in the 49th embodiment.

When the process of step SB810, step SB811, step SB813, or step SB816 is executed, information corresponding to the initial check period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in a checking counter provided in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB817). The value set in the checking counter is decremented by 1 each time the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is started, as in the 35th embodiment. When a value of 1 or more is set in the checking counter, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 continue to display the check, as in the 35th embodiment.

According to the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial check period is started after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power in the main CPU 63 (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is completed and before the remaining processing (steps SB819 to SB822) is started. This makes it unnecessary to control the initial check period when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

In addition, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are executed as the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826); The initial check period starts after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. As a result, even if the check display is performed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 during the initial check period, the setting values are not displayed using the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. It is possible to avoid any influence.

Then, the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SB818). By clearing the start-up processing in progress flag to "0", if the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started, a negative judgment is made in step S8906, which causes not only the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 but also the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 to be executed, and the state in which processing for progressing the game is not executed is released. Note that in step SB818, the power outage flag in the work area 221 for specific control is also cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822. In other words, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), but between the first timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, There will be a remaining time. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step SB819 to step SB822 is repeatedly executed using this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly. In steps SB819 to SB822, the same processes as steps S113 to S116 of the main process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

In the main process (FIG. 179), if a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, that is, if the power outage flag is not set to "1", if the checksums do not match, or if the set value is abnormal If so, the game stop flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SB823). As already explained, when the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and an affirmative determination is made in step S8906. The processes from step S8907 to step S8920 are not executed. As a result, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed properly during the previous power shutdown, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control If the checksums do not match due to changes in the storage state of information on at least one side since the last power cut, or if the set values are abnormal, power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and unauthorized While the process for monitoring is executed, the process for advancing the game is not executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB824). If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB824: NO), an abnormality command indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the power outage flag, checksum, or set value at the start of supply of operating power is sent to the audio emission control device 81. (Step SB825). Upon receiving the abnormality command, the audio light emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a manner corresponding to the information abnormality at the time of starting supply of operating power, and also issues a message from the speaker section 54 saying, ``Please change the settings.'' ” will be output. Further, a character image "Please change the settings" is displayed on the symbol display device 41. These notifications are maintained until the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and are terminated when the supply of operating power to the Pachinko machine 10 is stopped. However, even if the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is once stopped, the above notification will not be sent when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed until the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. It will be restarted.

Thereafter, external output processing in the event of an abnormality is executed (step SB826). In the external output process at the time of an abnormality, a process for externally outputting an abnormal signal to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed. In this case, the abnormality signal is output for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a situation where an event that triggers the execution of the process in step SB826 occurs, the signal output of the abnormal signal continues, and the event that triggers the execution of the process in step SB826 does not occur. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the signal output of the abnormal signal is stopped when the abnormality signal is not detected. Furthermore, the abnormality signal is not output only in step SB826, but may also be output through other processing. For example, an abnormal signal may also be generated when it is identified that fraud has occurred in the monitored object (detection of unauthorized radio waves or detection of unauthorized magnetism) in the fraud detection processing (step S8905) of the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). It is output externally. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration in which the abnormal signal is also used, and a configuration in which the abnormal signal dedicated to step SB826 is output externally may be adopted.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB824: YES), it is determined whether the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB812). When the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using a setting key (step SB812 and step SB824: YES), a setting value update process is executed (step SB813). In other words, if operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63 while a "setting change operation" is being performed, an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 65, so a negative result is determined in any of steps SB804 to SB806. Even if a determination is made, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. This makes it possible to prioritize changes to set values.

On the other hand, if the reset button 68c is pressed but the setting key insertion section 68a is not turned ON (step SB824: YES, step SB812: NO), it is determined whether the game stop flag or the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SB814). Since the game stop flag is naturally set to "1" in the processing of step SB814 after the game stop flag is set to "1" in step SB823, a positive determination is made in step SB814. In this case, an abnormal command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormal signal is output to the outside in step SB826. Thereafter, the remaining processing of steps SB819 to SB822 is performed without executing the processing of steps SB817 and SB818.

In other words, if an abnormality regarding the power outage flag, checksum, and set value occurs and a negative determination is made in any of steps SB804 to SB806, the operation to the main CPU 63 is performed while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. Even if power supply is started, the first RAM clearing process (step SB815) is not executed. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the game stop flag is set to "1" and a "RAM clear operation" is being performed, the first RAM clear process is performed. (Step SB815) is not executed. This prevents the game stop flag from being set to "1" even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if a "setting change operation" is being performed, the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag is set to "1" and the details are As will be described later, the game stop flag is cleared to "0" in the initial setting at the start of the setting value update process (FIG. 181). As a result, in order to eliminate the state in which the game stop flag is set to "1", it becomes necessary to execute the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, when an information abnormality occurs in the work area 221 for specific control, it is possible to not only perform processing to initialize the work area 221 for specific control, but also to reset the setting values. .

Here, if it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c is not pressed, the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" in step SB808. If it is determined that this is the case, an abnormality command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 in step SB825, and an abnormality signal is outputted to the outside in step SB826. After executing these processes, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818. Further, when it is determined in step SB807 that the reset button 68c has been pressed and it is determined in step SB812 that the setting key insertion part 68a has not been operated to turn on (that is, when a "RAM clear operation" has been performed) ), if the game stop flag or setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SB814, and a sound emission is performed in step SB825. The abnormality command is transmitted to the control device 81, and at the same time, an abnormality signal is outputted to the outside in step SB826. After executing these processes, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps SB819 to SB822 without executing the processes of steps SB817 and SB818.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 180, a description will be given of the subsequent processing when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed. . FIG. 180(a) shows the period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, and FIG. 180(b) shows the processing at the start of supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). FIG. 180(c) shows a period in which the process is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is completed, FIG. 180(d) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, and FIG. 180(e) shows the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 being set to "1". FIG. 180(f) shows a period when the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", and FIG. 180(g) shows an abnormal signal being output to the outside. Indicates the period.

At timing t1, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON when a "setting change operation" has been performed. At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts processing when the supply of operating power starts (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826), and the start-up processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 180(f).

Thereafter, at timing t2, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started as shown in FIG. 180(d). In this case, at the timing t2, the setting update display flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 180(e).

After that, as shown in FIG. 180(d), at timing t3 when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) ends, and as shown in FIG. 180(d), the setting value update process (FIG. 181) ends.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed again as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "RAM clear operation" is being performed. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts the process for starting the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 180(e) and 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control have been set to "1" since before the previous operation power supply was stopped. " is set.

This time, since the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where the setting update display flag is set to "1", the first RAM clear process (step SB815 ) is not executed, and the abnormal signal is output to the outside for a predetermined period (for example, 100 milliseconds) from timing t5 to timing t7, as shown in FIG. 180(g). Also, at timing t5, abnormality notification based on transmission of the abnormality command is started.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) that began at time t4 ends at time t6. Then, at time t6, the process after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, and steps SB823 to SB826) ends starts.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 180(f), since the start-up processing flag in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1", it is assumed that the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is started. In this case, processes for monitoring power outages, updating various counters, and monitoring fraud are executed, but processes for advancing the game are not executed. Thereafter, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 180(a), the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, thereby stopping the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63. Further, at the timing t8, the post-supply process ends as shown in FIG. 180(c).

After that, at timing t9, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again as shown in FIG. 180(a). In this case, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on when the "setting change operation" has been performed. At timing t9, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the main CPU 63 starts processing when the supply of operating power starts (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826). Also, as shown in FIG. 180(e) and FIG. 180(f), both the setting update display flag and the startup processing in progress flag in the work area 221 for specific control remain set to "1" as they were before the previous stoppage of the supply of operating power.

Thereafter, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed as shown in FIG. 180(d) from timing t10 to timing t11. In this case, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) ends normally. Then, at timing t11, which is the timing at which the process ends, the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(e). Further, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 180(b), the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is completed. As a result, at the timing t11, the start-up processing flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 180(f). Then, at the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 180(c), the process after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is started. In this case, the start-up processing flag has already been cleared to "0", so when the first timer interrupt processing (Figure 133) is started, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is performed. In addition to this, processing for advancing the game is executed.

As described above, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (Figure 181) is being executed, unless a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) will send an abnormal command to the audio and light emission control device 81 and output an abnormal signal externally, and even if a "RAM clear operation" has been performed, the first RAM clear process (step SB815) will not be executed, and even if a "setting confirmation operation" has been performed, the setting confirmation process (step SB810) will not be executed. Furthermore, when an abnormal command is sent to the sound and light emission control device 81 and an abnormal signal is externally output, the remaining processes (steps SB819 to SB822) are executed without clearing the start-up process flag to "0" in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB818). Therefore, even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed. As a result, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, it becomes necessary to resume the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 when the "setting change operation" is performed and execute the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the setting value.

Next, the setting value update process in this embodiment, which is executed in step SB813 of the main process (FIG. 179), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 181. Note that the processes in steps SB901 to SB918 in the setting value update process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, set the OFF confirmation flag 361 to "1" (step SB901). The OFF confirmation flag 361 is provided in the work area 221 for specific control, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 182. Even in this embodiment, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the value of the setting update area 342 of the work area 221 for specific control, i.e., the setting value to be updated, is incremented by 1 each time the reset button 68c is pressed. In this case, in order to increment the setting value to be updated only by "1" for each pressing of the reset button 68c, when the reset button 68c goes from a non-operating state to an operating state, i.e., when the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 68c switches from a non-operating state to an operating state, the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, thereby incrementing the setting value to be updated by 1.

In this configuration, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is a flag for checking whether the timing is when pressing of the reset button 68c has started when checking whether the reset button 68c has been pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181). After the process of determining whether the reset button 68c has been pressed (step SB910) is executed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), if it is determined that the reset button 68c has been pressed, the flag is set to "1" or the set state of "1" is maintained, and if it is determined that the reset button 68c has not been pressed, the flag is cleared to "0" or the state of "0" is maintained.

As already explained, the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed on the condition that it is determined in step SB807 or step SB824 of the main process (FIG. 179) that the reset button 68c is being pressed. In these steps SB807 and SB824, the main CPU 63 determines whether the reset button 68c is being pressed by directly monitoring the input port to which the detection signal from the detection sensor that detects whether the reset button 68c is being pressed is input. In this case, instead of checking the start and end timing of the pressing of the reset button 68c, it checks whether the reset button 68c is being pressed. Therefore, in step SB807 or step SB824, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not checked, and a positive determination is made if a signal corresponding to the reset button 68c being pressed is input to the input port.

However, in this configuration, the end timing of pressing the reset button 68c when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 10 to start the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) and the start timing of the setting value updating process (FIG. 181) are different. Depending on the relationship, there will be cases where the pressing operation becomes a trigger for adding 1 to the setting value to be updated, and cases where it does not become the trigger. In this case, the update mode of the setting value to be updated changes depending on the end timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, resulting in a decrease in operability. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in a situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the setting value update process is performed. (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901, which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After executing the process of step SB901, interrupt permission is set (step SB902). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle. In this embodiment, as in the forty-ninth embodiment, the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) basically includes the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). Interrupts in the 2-timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited, and interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) and the setting value update process (FIG. 181) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (step SB801 to step SB818, step SB823 to step SB826), the In a situation where execution of the 1st timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the 2nd timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) is prohibited and the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, Execution of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 134) is permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SB810) or the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SB903). By setting the setting update display flag to "1" and making an affirmative determination in step S9003 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134), the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is executed. (Step S9004) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Thereafter, initial settings at the time of starting are performed (step SB904). In the initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". If the power outage flag is not set to "1" because the power outage processing was not performed appropriately during the previous power outage (step SB804: NO), the game stop flag is set to the specific control work area 221 and If the checksums do not match because the storage state of information in at least one of the stack areas 222 for specific control has changed since the last time the power was shut off (step SB805: NO), or the setting reference area 341 This flag is set to "1" in step SB823 of the main process (FIG. 179) when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in is not within the normal range (step SB806: NO). When the game stop flag is set to "1", steps S8901 to S8905 are executed in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), and when an affirmative determination is made in step S8906, steps S8907 to S8905 are executed. Do not execute the process in S8920. As a result, when an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 as described above occurs, processing for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring is executed, while processing for advancing the game is executed. It will not be done. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the process of step SB904, the state in which the occurrence of information abnormality in the main side RAM 65 is identified can be canceled when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is executed. becomes possible.

Then, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SB905). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information on the setting value being updated is stored in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated (selected or changed) becomes "Setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SB905, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1." In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

Thereafter, an update start command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB906). Upon receiving the update start command, the audio emission control device 81 displays an image indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, and an image for making it possible to recognize the operation details for changing the setting value. , and the display control device 82 is controlled to display an image on the symbol display device 41 to make it possible to recognize the operation details for ending the setting value update process (FIG. 181). This allows the game hall manager to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and the operation details and setting value update process necessary to change the setting value (Figure 181) It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize the details of the operation required to end the game. In addition to or instead of the notification being executed by the symbol display device 41, the notification may be executed by at least one of the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. Further, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed may be provided to a device external to the pachinko machine 10, such as a management computer of a game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SB907). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SB907: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SB908). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

If a positive determination is made in step SB907 or if the processing of step SB908 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state using the setting key (step SB909). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from a reception state corresponding to the ON state to a reception state corresponding to the OFF state.

If a negative determination is made in step SB909, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed by directly monitoring an input port into which a detection signal from a detection sensor that detects whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. If the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is cleared to "0" (step SB911), and then the process returns to step SB907.

If the reset button 68c is pressed (step SB910: YES), it is determined whether the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is "0" (step SB912). If the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), the current confirmation timing is not the start timing of the pressing operation of the reset button 68c, but the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is being continued. Therefore, the process returns to step SB907 without adding 1 to the setting value to be updated.

If the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" (step SB912: YES), this means that the current confirmation timing is the start timing of pressing the reset button 68c. In this case, after setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 to "1" (step SB913), the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB914). As a result, the setting value is updated to the next higher setting value each time the reset button 68c is pressed once. Also, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SB910: NO), if the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" (step SB912: NO), or if the value of the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SB914), the process returns to step SB907. However, if it is determined in step SB907 that the value of the setting update area 342 is 7 or more, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 in step SB908. As a result, if the reset button 68c is pressed once when the setting is "Setting 6," the setting will return to "Setting 1."

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SB909: YES), the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 ( Step SB915). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 181) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, interrupts are prohibited (step SB916). As a result, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is terminated and the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 179) (steps SB801 to SB818, steps SB823 to SB826) is returned to, interrupts in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 134) are prohibited.

Then, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SB917). In the second RAM clear process, similar to the RAM clear process (step SA416) in the 45th embodiment, the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is executed, except for the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the work area 221 for specific control (i.e., the setting reference area 341). As a result, the area indicating whether the winning/losing lottery mode is the high probability mode or not is cleared to "0", so that the winning/losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game round is not being executed, and the open/close execution mode is not being executed, and further, the normal map display unit 38a is not displayed in a variable manner and the normal power role 34a is in a closed state. In addition, the reserved storage area 65a and the normal power reserved area 65c provided in the work area 221 for specific control are also cleared to "0", so that the reserved information for the special chart display unit 37a is erased and the reserved information for the normal chart display unit 38a is erased. In addition, the setting update display flag and the setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0". In addition, the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In addition, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". In the second RAM clear process, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and the initial setting is performed. In addition, in the second RAM clear process, various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0" and then the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the same process as the internal function register setting process of step SB802 is performed. Note that the process for clearing to "0" and the process for performing the initial setting are not performed for the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SB918). The processing contents executed by the audio emission control device 81 when a return command at the time of update is received are the same as in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, the manner in which the setting values to be updated are updated will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 183. FIG. 183(a) shows the period during which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, FIG. 183(b) shows the operation status of the setting key insertion part 68a, and FIG. 183(c) shows the operation of the reset button 68c. 183(d) shows the period during which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, FIG. 183(e) shows the setting status of the OFF confirmation flag 361, and FIG. 183(f) shows the setting Indicates the update timing of the value.

First, we will explain a comparative example in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1" when the setting value update process (Figure 181) is started.

At timing t1, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, at timing t2 when the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued, the power ON operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183(a). In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process ( 181) is started.

In this comparative example, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1", so at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 183(e), the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0". Then, at timing t4, when the reset button 68c continues to be pressed when the power is turned on, it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed while the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0", and the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 183(f). Also, at timing t4, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1", as shown in FIG. 183(e).

In other words, in the above comparative example, pressing the reset button 68c when turning on the power continues even after the setting value update process (Figure 181) has begun, and this pressing operation triggers the setting value to be updated to be incremented by 1. In this case, the setting value to be updated ends up being updated even though the amusement hall manager has no intention of updating the setting value to be updated.

Next, a description will be given of this embodiment in which the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started.

At timing t5, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on using the setting key as shown in FIG. 183(b), and the reset button 68c is pressed as shown in FIG. 183(c). Then, at timing t6, when the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c are continued, the power ON operation of the Pachinko machine 10 is performed as shown in FIG. 183(a). In this case, since the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where the "setting change operation" is performed, the setting value update process ( 181) is started. When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, a process of setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 to "1" is executed in step SB901. Therefore, at timing t7, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 183(e). Since the timing at which this OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" is before the timing at which it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), ), even if the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is continued during the power ON operation, the set value to be updated is not incremented by 1. Thereafter, at timing t8, the pressing operation of the reset button 68c is completed as shown in FIG. 183(c), and the OFF confirmation flag 361 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 183(e).

Then, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the reset button 68c is pressed from time t9 to time t10, from time t11 to time t12, and from time t13 to time t14. In this case, the reset button 68c is pressed when the value of the OFF confirmation flag 361 is "0" at each of times t9, t11, and t13, so the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 at each of these times, as shown in FIG. 183(f).

Thereafter, at the timing t15, the setting key insertion section 68a is turned off as shown in FIG. ) ends.

As described above, in the configuration in which the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c is pressed in the situation where the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "0", the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is started, the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901, which is executed before the process of determining whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the pressing operation of the reset button 68c when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting value is changed from a predetermined starting setting value. As a result, regardless of the setting value to be used before the setting value updating process (Fig. 181) is started, the setting value can be changed from a certain starting setting value in the setting value updating process (Fig. 181). It becomes possible to do this. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

Specifically, the setting value corresponding to the start is "Setting 1", which has the lowest advantage. Therefore, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the setting values are changed starting from "Setting 1" which has the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the game hall unintentionally terminates the setting value updating process (Fig. 181) immediately after starting the setting value updating process (Fig. 181), the setting value with the lowest degree of advantage is set. Therefore, even if a game is started in such a situation, it is possible to prevent an unintended disadvantage from occurring in the game hall.

The work area 221 for specific control is provided with a setting reference area 341 and a setting update area 342. Information corresponding to the setting value to be used is stored in the setting reference area 341, and setting value update processing is performed. Information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the situation where (FIG. 181) is being executed is stored in the setting update area 342. As a result, while the information on the setting values that were set before the setting value update processing (Fig. 181) was started is stored and retained in the setting reference area 341, the information to be updated in the setting value updating processing (Fig. 181) is retained. It becomes possible to change the setting value.

If the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is being executed, a restricted state will be entered in which processing to progress the game will not be started when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently resumed. This makes it possible to prevent processing to progress the game from being started even if the setting value update process (Fig. 181) has not been completed.

Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped while the setting value update process (Fig. 181) is being executed, the above-mentioned restricted state will not occur if the "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is subsequently resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of processes for progressing the game from being restricted even when the setting value is changed.

Even in the above-mentioned restricted state, power outage monitoring and various counter update processes are performed. This makes it possible to ensure that necessary processes are executed even in a state in which game progress is restricted as described above. In particular, by executing power outage monitoring, it becomes possible to appropriately respond to a power outage if it occurs even in a state in which game progress is restricted.

Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the regulated state is resumed when the supply of operating power is restarted. As a result, in a situation where the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is being executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the release from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of.

In a configuration in which the setting value to be updated is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the reset button 68c has been pressed while the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "0," the OFF confirmation flag 361 is set to "1" in step SB901, which is executed prior to the process of determining whether the reset button 68c has been pressed, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 due to the reset button 68c being pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

Note that in the case where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting confirmation process ( When step SB810) is executed, the configuration may be such that the setting update display flag is cleared to "0" and the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted. By executing the setting confirmation process (step SB810), the current setting value of the object to be used is notified, so that the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the setting value of the object to be used. In such a case, even if the execution of the process for advancing the game is not restricted, the game will not proceed with the setting values not expected by the administrator of the gaming hall.

In addition, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting value update process (FIG. 181), whether or not a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is forcibly executed regardless of the setting value update process (FIG. 181). This makes it possible to forcibly change the set value.

In addition, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), a restricted state may be established in which the execution of processing for progressing the game is restricted when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed. In this case, the restricted state may not be established when the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed, and in addition to or instead of this configuration, the restricted state may not be established when the setting value update process (Figure 181) is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed.

In addition, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the setting confirmation process (step SB810), whether or not a "setting confirmation operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently restarted. The configuration may be such that the setting confirmation process (step SB810) is forcibly executed regardless of the settings. This makes it possible to forcibly confirm the set value.

In addition, in the setting value update process (FIG. 181), if it is determined that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in the first processing cycle and that the reset button 68c has been pressed in the second processing cycle, the setting value of the selection target is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is determined that the reset button 68c has not been pressed in each of the past consecutive processing cycles and if it is determined that the reset button 68c has been pressed in one processing cycle or multiple consecutive processing cycles in that situation, the setting value of the selection target may be changed. Even in this case, when the setting value update process (FIG. 181) is started, the information on the confirmation history of the pressing of the reset button 68c in the past consecutive processing cycles is rewritten to information corresponding to the reset button 68c being pressed, so that the setting value of the selection target is not changed in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) by pressing the reset button 68c to start the setting value update process (FIG. 181).

<Fifty-fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 53rd embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 53rd embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 53rd embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC101 to step SC128 in the main processing is executed using a specific control program and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

In steps SC101 to SC106, the same processes as steps SB801 to SB806 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed. If an affirmative determination is made in all steps SC104 to SC106, it is determined whether or not the reset button 68c is pressed (step SC107). Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SC107: NO), it is determined whether the setting update display flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC108). ). If the reset button 68c is not pressed and the setting update display flag is not set to "1" (step SC107 and step SC108: NO), the game stop flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". ” is set (step SC109). If the game stop flag is set to "1", an abnormality command is transmitted in step SC127, and external output processing at the time of abnormality is executed in step SC128.

If the game stop flag is not set to "1" (step SC109: NO), the process advances to step SC110. In steps SC110 to SC112, the same processes as steps SB809 to SB811 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed.

If it is determined in step SC107 that the reset button 68c is pressed, or if it is determined in step SC108 that the setting update display flag is set to "1", in step SC113 the setting key insertion section 68a It is determined whether or not the button is turned on using the setting key. If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned on (step SC113: YES), after setting the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the work area 221 for specific control to "1" (step SC114), the setting A value update process is executed (step SC115). Note that in steps SC116 to SC128, the same processes as steps SB114 to SB826 of the main process (FIG. 179) in the 53rd embodiment are executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115), when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in a "no operation" situation or a "RAM clear operation" situation, the situation in which the processing for progressing the game is blocked continues as in the 53rd embodiment. On the other hand, the setting value update process (step SC115) is executed not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in a "setting change operation" situation, but also when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed in a "setting confirmation operation" situation. This makes it easier to execute the setting value update process (step SC115) when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped during the execution of the setting value update process (step SC115).

In particular, in a configuration in which the "setting change operation" requires the setting key insertion section 68a to be turned ON using the setting key and the reset button 68c to be pressed, and the "setting confirmation operation" requires the setting key insertion section 68a to be turned ON, if the setting update display flag is set to "1", the setting value update process (step SC115) is executed even if the reset button 68c is not pressed because the setting key insertion section 68a is turned ON. This makes it possible to execute the setting value update process (step SC115) by starting the setting value update process (step SC115) by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 when the "setting change operation" has been performed, but then accidentally turning off the power during the process, while maintaining the setting key insertion section 68a in the ON state in order to quickly return the power to the ON state afterwards, even if the reset button 68c is not pressed.

In this embodiment, if it is determined in step SC112 that the setting key insertion section 68a has been turned ON, the OFF confirmation flag 361 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" in step SC114 before the setting value update process (step SC115) is started. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value to be updated from being incremented by 1 when the reset button 68c is pressed when the power is turned ON, even if the OFF confirmation flag 361 is not set to "1" when the setting value update process (step SC115) is started. Incidentally, in the setting value update process (step SC115) in this embodiment, the process of step SB901 in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) in the 53rd embodiment is not executed, and steps SB902 to SB918 are executed.

In addition, in the setting value update process (step SC115), it is identified that the reset button 68c is not pressed in the previous processing time in two consecutive processing times, and the reset button 68c is pressed in the subsequent processing time. Although the configuration is such that the setting value of the selection target is changed when it is determined that a pressing operation is being performed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the reset button 68c is changed at each of a plurality of consecutive past processing times. When it is determined that the reset button 68c is not being pressed, and in that situation, it is determined that the reset button 68c is being pressed in one processing time or in a plurality of consecutive processing times, the setting value of the selection target is changed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Even in this case, when the setting value update process (step SC115) is started, information regarding the confirmation history of the press operation of the reset button 68c in a plurality of consecutive past processing times is stored. By rewriting the information to the information corresponding to the setting value update process (FIG. 181), the setting value to be selected in the setting value update process (FIG. 181) will be changed by pressing the reset button 68c to start the setting value update process (FIG. 181). It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<Fifty-fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the main processing executed by the main CPU 63 is different from that of the 49th embodiment. The configuration that differs from the 49th embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 49th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this embodiment that is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SC201 to SC230 in the main processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, a power-on initial setting process is executed (step SC201). In the power-on initial setting process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed after the main process is started. During this predetermined wait period, the start of operation and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. Also, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted.

Thereafter, internal function register setting processing is executed (step SC202). In the internal function register setting process, as in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, is set as the first interrupt cycle. (specifically, 4 milliseconds), and set the interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (Figure 188), which is a process that is started by periodically interrupting the main process, to be longer than the first interrupt cycle. The second interrupt period is also set to be a short period (specifically, 2 milliseconds).

That is, in this embodiment, as in the 35th embodiment, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) exist as timer interrupt processing so that the interrupt period is relatively long and short. Both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are started by interrupting the main processing. Also, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) is started by interrupting the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). On the other hand, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) is not started by interrupting the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188). Also, if both the first interrupt period and the second interrupt period have elapsed in a situation where both the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are not being executed, the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) is started first, regardless of the order in which those periods have elapsed. In this respect, it can be said that the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is a process that is started with priority over the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). However, this is not limited to this, and the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) may be configured to be started with priority over the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188).

In the internal function register setting process, the first interrupt cycle of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is set in a predetermined register of the main CPU 63, and the second interrupt cycle of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is set as the main interrupt cycle. Set in a specific register of the side CPU 63. Further, in the internal function register setting process, in addition to setting the first and second interrupt cycles, for example, setting process of the numerical range of various counters such as the numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 is executed.

Then, the start-up processing flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC203). As in the 35th embodiment, the start-up processing flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify that even if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is started, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) should end without executing any process for progressing the game, while the various processes set in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed.

The start-up processing flag is set to "1" when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is started in the main processing (Fig. 185), and is cleared to "0" before the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) ends and the remaining processing (steps SC227 to SC230) is started. As in the 35th embodiment, in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 133), if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the processing of steps S8907 to S8920 is not executed, making it possible to prevent the processing for progressing the game from being executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (step SC216) of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is being executed. On the other hand, as described above, in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), even if the start-up process in progress flag is set to "1", by executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905, power outage monitoring is performed even in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or setting value update process (step SC216) of the processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is being executed, and the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and random number initial value counter CINI are updated, and further fraud detection is performed.

In particular, even if the start-up processing flag is set to "1", the power outage information storage process (step S8901) is executed, so that even if a power outage occurs in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) of the processes at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is being executed, it is possible to execute the power outage processing. In the power outage processing, as in the 35th embodiment, the power outage flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored in the work area 221 for specific control, so that when the supply of operating power is restarted, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality in the main RAM 65 from being identified. As a result, if a power outage occurs during the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216), it is possible to identify that a power outage occurred during these setting-related processes at the start of the next supply of operating power.

Incidentally, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216) is being executed, neither the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) nor the second timer interrupt process (Figure 188) Interrupts are not prohibited and can be interrupted at any time. In this case, if the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) or the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is activated by interrupting the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (step SC216), Information on the return address of the main process (FIG. 185) for returning after the timer interrupt process that was the target of activation is completed is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control, and the timer interrupt process is activated. The information of various registers of the main CPU 63 immediately before is saved to the stack area 222 for specific control. Then, when the timer interrupt processing that has been activated ends, the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 185) corresponding to the return address information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control, and The information saved in the stack area 222 for specific control is returned to various registers of the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, the display start flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" (step SC204). The display start flag specifies that the main CPU 63 is in a situation where display control of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a should be started after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. This is a flag for

Then, in steps SC205 to SC225, the same processing as steps SB104 to SB124 in the main processing (FIG. 165) in the above-mentioned 49th embodiment is executed. In this case, the processing contents executed in the main processing (FIG. 185) in relation to the combination of the situation at the time of the previous stop of the supply of operating power and the operation contents at the time of the start of the current supply of operating power are the processing contents shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 171, as in the above-mentioned 49th embodiment. For example, if the power failure processing is executed in a situation where neither the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) nor the setting value update processing (step SC216) is executed, or if the power failure processing is executed in a situation where the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is executed, and the "RAM clear operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the first RAM clear processing (step SC218) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 185). In addition, if power failure processing is performed while the setting value update processing (step SC216) is being performed, the second RAM clear processing (step SB313 in FIG. 167 in the 49th embodiment) is performed in the setting value update processing (step SC216) regardless of which operation is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed. Also, even if power failure processing is performed without the setting value update processing (step SC216) being performed, if a "setting change operation" is performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, the second RAM clear processing (step SB313 in FIG. 49 in the 49th embodiment) is performed in the setting value update processing (step SC216).

In the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process, the clearing target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are performed, but the clearing non-target area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is not cleared to "0" and initial settings are not performed. Figure 186 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the clearing target area 371 and the clearing non-target area 372 provided in the work area 221 for specific control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 from the power supply unit for power outage provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 as power for memory retention. By supplying backup power to the main RAM 65 in this manner, backup power is also supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control. Then, by supplying backup power to the work area 221 for specific control, backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372. As a result, even if the power supply to the main CPU 63 is stopped because the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, backup power is supplied to the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372, and information is stored and retained in these clear target area 371 and non-clear target area 372.

The area to be cleared 371 includes a second display data buffer 272, a fourth display data buffer 274, and a fifth display data buffer 275. The second display data buffer 272 is an area where display data for causing the special figure pending display section 37b to perform a predetermined display is set, similar to the thirty-third embodiment. If the pending information for the special figure display section 37a is newly stored in the pending storage area 65a in the pending information acquisition process (step S401) in the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 12), the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the display control means (step S8915) stores the display data corresponding to the number of pending information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the pending storage area 65a in the second display data buffer 272. is set to In addition, if the pending information for the special figure display section 37a is used as the execution trigger for the game round in the data setting process (step S502) in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the first timer interrupt process ( After the display control means (step S8915) in FIG. 133), the display data corresponding to the number of pending information for the special figure display section 37a stored in the pending storage area 65a is stored in the second display data buffer 272. Set.

The fourth display data buffer 274 is an area in which display data for causing the ordinary drawing reservation display section 38b to perform a predetermined display is stored, as in the thirty-third embodiment. If the hold information for the general use figure display section 38a is newly stored in the general electric power holding area 65c in the general electric power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the first timer After the storage, the display control means (step S8915) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 133) displays the display data corresponding to the number of hold information for the power grid display unit 38a stored in the power grid storage area 65c in the fourth display. It is set in the data buffer 274. In addition, in the general-purpose electric power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133), the pending information for the ordinary electrician display section 38a is digested as an execution trigger for the variable display time of the ordinary electrician display section 38a. In this case, the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) corresponds to the number of hold information for the general power grid display section 38a stored in the general power grid holding area 65c after the extinguishment. The display data to be displayed is set in the fourth display data buffer 274.

The fifth display data buffer 275 is an area where display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform a predetermined display is set, as in the thirty-third embodiment. Setting of display data to the fifth display data buffer 275 is executed in steps SC403, SC405, and SC406 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), which will be described later.

In addition to the second display data buffer 272, fourth display data buffer 274, and fifth display data buffer 275, the clear target area 371 also includes a reserve storage area 65a in which reserved information for the special map display unit 37a is stored, and a regular power reserve area 65c in which reserved information for the regular map display unit 38a is stored. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the reserved information for the special map display unit 37a and the reserved information for the regular map display unit 38a are erased. In this case, the clear target area 371 includes the second display data buffer 272 and the fourth display data buffer 274 as described above. As a result, when the reserved storage area 65a is initialized and the reserved information for the special drawing display unit 37a is zero, the display content of the special drawing reserved display unit 37b can also be changed to a display content showing that there is zero reserved information for the special drawing display unit 37a, and when the regular power reserved area 65c is initialized and the reserved information for the regular drawing display unit 38a is zero, the display content of the regular drawing reserved display unit 38b can also be changed to a display content showing that there is zero reserved information for the regular drawing display unit 38a.

In addition, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, as in the above 49th embodiment, after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, the base value information is basically displayed, but in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), if the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) is executed, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, and if the setting value update processing (step SC216) is executed, the setting value being updated is displayed, and further, when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, a check display is performed. In other words, in the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, when the supply of operating power is resumed, information different from the base value information displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped is displayed. Therefore, even if the fifth display data buffer 275 is initialized when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, no problems will occur with the display contents of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

The area to be cleared 371 includes, in addition to the above-mentioned areas, an area for special figure/special electric line control and an area for ordinary figure/general electric line control. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode regardless of the win/fail lottery mode immediately before the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. In addition, the game cycle is not being executed, the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, and the general figure display section 38a is not being displayed in a variable manner, and the general electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. situation. Additionally, the setting update display flag and setting confirmation display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the setting update area 342 provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". be done. Additionally, the stack area 222 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Further, initial settings are executed after various registers of the main CPU 63 are also cleared to "0". In this initial setting, processing similar to the internal function register setting processing in step SC202 is executed.

Note that the processing contents of the first RAM clearing process are the same as the processing contents of the second RAM clearing process in the setting value updating process, but a configuration may be adopted in which some of these processing contents are different. For example, the area to be cleared to "0" and initialized in the first RAM clearing process may not be cleared to "0" and to be initialized in the second RAM clearing process; The area to be cleared and initialized may be set to "0" in the first RAM clearing process and not to be cleared and initialized.

The non-clearable area 372 includes the first display data buffer 271, the third display data buffer 273, and the initial display flag 373. The first display data buffer 271 is an area in which display data for causing the special chart display unit 37a to perform a specified display is stored, as in the thirty-third embodiment described above. In step S513 in the special chart change start process (FIG. 13), a process for starting the changing display of the pattern in the special chart display unit 37a is executed, and display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change in the special chart display unit 37a is set in the first display data buffer 271 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133). In addition, a process for updating the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a is executed in the special chart change process (step S407) in the special chart special electric control process (FIG. 12), and the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) sets display data for progressing the change display of the pattern of the special chart display unit 37a in the first display data buffer 271. In addition, a process for setting the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a to display contents corresponding to the processing results of the win/loss judgment process (step S504) and the allocation judgment process (step S506) in the current game round in the special chart special electric control process (FIG. 12) is executed, and the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) sets display data for making the special chart display unit 37a display corresponding to the result of the current game round in the special chart display unit 37a in the first display data buffer 271. The display data set in this case will be the display data selected in step S507 or step S509 of the special chart change start process (FIG. 13) at the start of the current game round. Also, the display data set in this case will be stored and held in the first display data buffer 271 until the special chart display unit 37a is in a state where a new game round can be started.

The third display data buffer 273 is an area in which display data for making the normal map display unit 38a perform a predetermined display is stored, as in the 33rd embodiment. A process for starting the display of the changing pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is executed in the normal map normal power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), and the display data corresponding to the display at the start of the change in the normal map display unit 38a is set in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133). In addition, a process for updating the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a is executed in the normal map normal power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133), and the display data for progressing the display of the changing pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is set in the third display data buffer 273 by the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 133). In addition, in the normal map normal power control process (step S8914) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133), a process is executed to set the display content of the normal map display unit 38a to display content corresponding to the result of the normal power opening lottery in the current variable display round, and the display control means (step S8915) in the first timer interrupt process (Figure 133) sets display data in the third display data buffer 273 to cause the normal map display unit 38a to display corresponding to the result of the current variable display round. The display data set in this case is stored and held in the third display data buffer 273 until the situation becomes such that a new variable display round can be started in the normal map display unit 38a.

The initial display completed flag 373 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not the situation is after the initial display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a at the factory shipping stage has been completed. By including the initial display completed flag 373 in the non-clearable area 372, once the initial display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a at the factory shipping stage has been confirmed, it is possible to prevent the initial display from being performed when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed.

Since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are included in the non-clearable area 372, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, when the display of the special chart display unit 37a and the ordinary chart display unit 38a starts after the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to restore the display contents of these special chart display unit 37a and ordinary chart display unit 38a to the display contents before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, even if the player checks the special chart display unit 37a and the ordinary chart display unit 38a after the supply of operating power is resumed, it will be impossible to determine whether the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In particular, since the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process (step SC216) that allows changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, when the second RAM clearing process is executed, the special figure display section When the display content of at least one of the display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a becomes the display content corresponding to the execution of the second RAM clearing process, or is changed from the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped, the display content changes. By checking the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a, it is possible to predict whether or not the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed. On the other hand, even if the second RAM clearing process is executed, when the display of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a is started after the supply of operating power is started, these special figure display sections 37a Then, the display content of the ordinary figure display section 38a returns to the display content before the supply of operating power was stopped. Thereby, even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed.

In addition to the above-mentioned areas, the non-clearing area 372 includes an area (ie, setting reference area 341) in which setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Thereby, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as is. Furthermore, the non-clear target area 372 also includes a work area 223 for non-specific control and a stack area 224 for non-specific control.

Incidentally, since backup power is not supplied to the RAM of the sound and light-emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the supply of operating power to the sound and light-emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 is stopped, the information stored in the RAM of these sound and light-emitting control device 81 and display control device 82 is erased. However, if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of operating power is started, a command is sent from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light-emitting control device 81 to restore the execution state of the performance to the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped, and the content of the execution control of the performance in the sound and light-emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 is restored to the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped.

Returning to the explanation of the main process (FIG. 185), after executing the process of step SC225, a display start process is executed (step SC226). Thereafter, residual processing is executed in steps SC227 to SC230. The processing contents of steps SC227 to SC230 are the same as steps SB125 to SB128 of the main processing (FIG. 165) in the forty-ninth embodiment.

Next, the display start process executed in step SC226 of the main process (FIG. 185) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 187. Note that the processes from step SC301 to step SC305 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 373 is not set to "1" (step SC301: NO), the initial display data for the special map is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302), and the initial display data for the regular map is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC302). Display data is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC303). Then, the initial display flag 373 is set to "1" (step SC304).

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, initial display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. Although the display content of the initial display in the special figure display section 37a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting sections provided in the special figure display section 37a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order. In addition, by controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the initial display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Although the display content of the initial display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting parts provided on the ordinary figure display section 38a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order.

On the other hand, if the initial display completed flag 373 is set to "1" (step SC301: YES), the processes of step SC302 and step SC303 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. Furthermore, as already explained, since the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the area 372 that is not subject to clearing, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are performed in the main process (FIG. 185). Even if either of these is executed, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data that was stored immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored immediately before the supply of the data is stopped is stored as is.

When a positive judgment is made in step SC301, or when the processing of step SC304 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC305). The display start flag is a flag for the master CPU 63 to determine whether or not to start display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the master CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b, and when the display start flag is set to "1", the master CPU 63 starts display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b.

As already explained, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main processing (Figure 185). The timing of this processing is before the timing when the second timer interrupt processing (Figure 188) for executing display control of the special map display unit 37a, special map pending display unit 37b, regular map display unit 38a, regular map pending display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started. Then, as already explained, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start processing (Figure 187) which is executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) has ended. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b are maintained in an off state, and display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b begins after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed.

Next, the second timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. The processes of steps SC401 to SC415 in the second timer interrupt process are executed using the program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63. In addition, the second timer interrupt process allows interrupts when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is started, and prohibits interrupts when the setting confirmation process (step SC213) is ended. In addition, the second timer interrupt process allows interrupts when the setting value update process (step SC216) is started, and prohibits interrupts when the setting value update process (step SC216) is ended. In addition, the second interrupt process allows interrupts from when the interrupt permission is set in step SC230 of the main process (FIG. 185) until the interrupt prohibition is set in step SC227 of the main process (FIG. 185). The same applies to the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133).

In steps SC401 to SC409, the same processing as steps S8401 to S8409 in the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 123) in the 33rd embodiment is executed. Then, it is determined whether the value of the type counter is "5" or not (step SC410). As in the 33rd embodiment, the type counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the display data transmission target among the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 in the current processing of the second timer interrupt process. If the type counter value is "1", the display data of the first display data buffer 271 is the transmission target, if the type counter value is "2", the display data of the second display data buffer 272 is the transmission target, if the type counter value is "3", the display data of the third display data buffer 273 is the transmission target, if the type counter value is "4", the display data of the fourth display data buffer 274 is the transmission target, and if the type counter value is "5", the display data of the fifth display data buffer 275 is the transmission target.

If the value of the type counter is any one of "1" to "4", i.e., if any one of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the regular map display unit 38a, and the regular map reserved display unit 38b is to be displayed and controlled (step SC410: NO), it is determined whether the display start flag of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC411). If the value of the type counter is "5" (step SC410: YES), or if the value of the type counter is any one of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is set to "1" (step SC410: NO, step SC411: YES), the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 are executed.

In the processing of steps SC412 to SC414, first, type data corresponding to the value of the type counter is read from the main ROM 64 (step SC412). Specifically, if the type counter value is "1", type data corresponding to the first display circuit 261 is read from the main ROM 64; if the type counter value is "2", type data corresponding to the second display circuit 262 is read from the main ROM 64; if the type counter value is "3", type data corresponding to the third display circuit 263 is read from the main ROM 64; if the type counter value is "4", type data corresponding to the fourth display circuit 264 is read from the main ROM 64; and if the type counter value is "5", type data corresponding to the fifth display circuit 265 is read from the main ROM 64.

Then, display data is read from the display data buffers 271-275 that correspond to the value of the type counter (step SC413). Specifically, if the type counter value is "1", display data is read from the first display data buffer 271; if the type counter value is "2", display data is read from the second display data buffer 272; if the type counter value is "3", display data is read from the third display data buffer 273; if the type counter value is "4", display data is read from the fourth display data buffer 274; and if the type counter value is "5", display data is read from the fifth display data buffer 275.

Thereafter, various signal transmission processing is executed (step SC414). In the transmission process, signals are output to the type data signal line LN1 and type clock signal line LN2 so that the type data read in step SC412 is transmitted to the display IC 266. Further, in the transmission process, signals are output to the display data signal line LN3 and the display clock signal line LN4 so that the display data read in step SC413 is transmitted to the display IC 266.

On the other hand, if the value of the type counter is one of "1" to "4" and the display start flag is not set to "1" (step SC410 and step SC411: NO), the processing in step SC412 to step SC414 do not execute. As a result, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, until the display start flag is set to "1", the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the general symbol display section 38a And, without starting the display control of the regular symbol reservation display section 38b, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the ordinary symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC411, or if the process in step SC414 is executed, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of the first timer interrupt process and the second timer interrupt process (step SC415).

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Since the initial display flag 373 has not yet been set to "1" at the time of shipment from the factory, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the displays on the special symbol display section 37a and the regular symbol display section 38a are displayed. When started, initial display is started in these special figure display section 37a and regular figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that a picture is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. continues until the variable display starts. The initial display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts.

If it is not at the factory shipping stage, that is, if the initial display flag 373 has already been set to "1", the first RAM clearing process is performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). If the process is executed, the setting value update process is executed, the setting confirmation process is executed, or even if these processes are not executed, the supply of operating power is stopped. The display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is controlled so that the display contents are displayed immediately before. Thereby, even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked, it is possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed.

In particular, the display contents when the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a is started are the same as the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the user from identifying whether the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed, even if the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are confirmed and memorized, and then the display contents initially displayed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a after the supply of operating power starts are confirmed.

In addition, by setting the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the clear target area 372 that is not subject to execution of the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process in the work area 221 for specific control, The display contents when the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a start displaying are the same as the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The configuration is as follows. In other words, no special processing is required to prevent it from being possible to identify whether or not the setting value update process (step SC216) has been executed even if the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in processing load.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 are provided in the area 372 not to be cleared, and the first display data buffer 271 is provided in the area 372 not to be cleared. However, the third display data buffer 273 may be provided in the area to be cleared 371. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the special figure display section 37a will display the display contents from before the supply of operating power was stopped. will be started, and an initial display will be performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Further, instead of this, the third display data buffer 273 is provided in the non-clear target area 372, but the first display data buffer 271 may be provided in the clear target area 371. In this case, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the general figure display section 38a will display the display contents from before the supply of operating power was stopped. will be started, but an initial display will be performed in the special figure display section 37a.

Further, in a configuration in which a round display section is provided as a display section whose display is controlled by the main side CPU 63 for notifying the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result. Alternatively, an area in which display data for displaying on the round display unit is stored may be provided in the non-clear target area 372. In this case, when the supply of operating power is stopped while a predetermined display is being displayed on the round display section, and when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. Even so, the predetermined display will be restarted on the round display section.

In addition, all the display sections whose display is directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the ordinary symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, are used for display purposes. The area in which the display data of is stored may not be initialized by the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. In this case, any display section that is directly controlled for display by the main CPU 63 will not be supplied with operating power, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the operating power supply is started. The display will be based on the display content before it was stopped. In addition, in this configuration, although the special figure pending display section 37b and the regular figure pending display section 38b start displaying the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped, the corresponding pending information is 0 after that. A configuration may be adopted in which the display content is switched to correspond to the number of items.

In addition, the area where display data for displaying in the special figure pending display section 37b and the general figure pending display section 38b is stored is initialized when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed. However, the special figure pending display section 37b and the regular figure pending display section 38b may be configured to be displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of pieces of corresponding pending information. In this case, by executing the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process, a display indicating that the corresponding pending information is 0 is displayed in each of the special figure pending display section 37b and the general figure pending display section 38b. Even if the number of pending information is 0, it would be difficult for the player to understand that the display indicating that the number of pending information is 0 is displayed. Even so, it becomes difficult to identify whether the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed.

<Fifty-sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 55th embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the 55th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 55th embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 190 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area set in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control.

The clearing target area 371 includes a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for causing the special symbol reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display, and a second display data buffer 272 that stores display data for causing the special symbol reservation display section 37b to perform a predetermined display. In addition to the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data is stored and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to perform predetermined display is stored. , a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the special figure display section 37a to perform a predetermined display is stored, and a first display data buffer 271 in which display data for causing the regular figure display section 38a to perform a predetermined display is stored. A 3-display data buffer 273 is provided. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clearing process in the setting value update process (step SC216), the supply of operating power is The display data corresponding to the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before they are stopped will be erased.

In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, the clear target area 371 is also provided with an initial display flag 375. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not it is necessary to perform initial display in the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display flag 375 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), when the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a is started after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is executed, the initial display is performed in these special map display unit 37a and ordinary map display unit 38a.

Figure 191 is a flowchart showing the display start processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SC501 to SC511 in the display start processing is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC501: NO), the initial display data for the special map is set to the first display data buffer 271 (step SC502), and the initial display data for the regular map is set to the third display data buffer 273 (step SC503). Then, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC504).

The display of the special chart display unit 37a is controlled using the initial display data for the special chart stored in the first display data buffer 271, and the initial display is performed on the special chart display unit 37a. The display content of the initial display on the special chart display unit 37a is arbitrary, but for example, all of the multiple light-emitting units provided on the special chart display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light-emitting state, or some of the multiple light-emitting units provided on the special chart display unit 37a may be configured to be in a light-emitting state. When some of the light-emitting units are in a light-emitting state, the light-emitting units that are in a light-emitting state and the light-emitting units that are maintained in an unlit state may be configured to alternate in the arrangement order. In addition, the display content of the initial display on the special chart display unit 37a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed to notify the game result of the game round on the special chart display unit 37a. In addition, the display content of the initial display on the special chart display unit 37a is different from the display content displayed when the pattern variation display is being performed on the special chart display unit 37a. This makes it possible to clearly identify that the initial display is being performed on the special chart display unit 37a.

By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the initial display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, initial display is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. Although the display content of the initial display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is arbitrary, for example, it may be configured such that all of the plurality of light emitting parts provided on the ordinary figure display section 38a are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. When some of the light emitting parts are in the light emitting state, the light emitting parts that are in the light emitting state and the light emitting parts that are maintained in the unlit state may be arranged alternately in the arrangement order. In addition, the display content of the initial display on the common picture display section 38a is different from the display content that is stopped and displayed on the common picture display section 38a to notify the result of the Shinden opening lottery in the variable display time. There is. Further, the initial display content on the ordinary figure display section 38a is different from the display content displayed in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. Thereby, it becomes possible to clearly specify that the initial display is being performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, the game cycle can be executed by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the game cycle is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of (step SC505). In the storage area, information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is started is stored, and information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is ended is stored in the memory area. be removed from the area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SC506). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the game round nor during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 and step SC506: NO), the initial display data for the special figure is changed to the first display data. It is set in the buffer 271 (step SC507). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the initial display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, the initial display described above is performed in the special figure display section 37a. On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during the execution of the game round or the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SC505 or step SC506: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the first display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped remains stored in the first display data buffer 271 as is. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If a positive judgment is made in step SC505, if a positive judgment is made in step SC506, or if the processing of step SC507 is executed, by referring to a memory area in which information indicating whether the normal map display unit 38a is displaying changes in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is determined whether the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of operating power was stopped during the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a (step SC508). When the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is started, information indicating that the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is being executed is stored in the memory area, and when the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is ended, information indicating that the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is being executed is erased from the memory area. The information in this memory area is stored and maintained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, as long as backup power is being supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and is also stored and maintained even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the general power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is possible to It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped (step SC509). This storage area stores information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is started, and information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is ended. Information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. It is also stored and retained even if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a nor during the execution of the ordinary power open state (step SC508 and step SC509: NO), the ordinary figure display unit 38a The initial display data of is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC510). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the initial display data for ordinary figures stored in the third display data buffer 273, the initial display described above is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. On the other hand, if the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped was either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture on the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state (step SC508 or step SC509: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary figures is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the third display data buffer 273. . Therefore, when the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

When the processing of step SC504 is executed, when a positive judgment is made in step SC508, when a positive judgment is made in step SC509, or when the processing of step SC510 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC511). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not to start display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the regular map display unit 38a, and the regular map reserved display unit 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b, and when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 191) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 191), even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is In addition to setting initial display data for special figures, initial display data for regular figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in the display contents starts the initial display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a in a situation where both the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed. You will be able to understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1", and the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a start displaying. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1", so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts and the display of the special chart display unit 37a and the ordinary chart display unit 38a starts, the initial display starts in these special chart display unit 37a and ordinary chart display unit 38a. The initial display in the special chart display unit 37a continues until the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the start condition of the game round is met, and the display of the changing pattern starts in the special chart display unit 37a. The initial display in the ordinary chart display unit 38a continues until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the changing pattern starts in the ordinary chart display unit 38a. In addition, even at the factory shipping stage, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1", so the initial display will start in the special map display section 37a and the regular map display section 38a.

As described above, whether the first RAM clear process is executed based on the "RAM clear operation" or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed based on the "setting change operation", when the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a starts, an initial display is performed on these special map display units 37a and ordinary map display units 38a, so that even if the display contents of these display units 37a, 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts and the display starts on the special map display unit 37a and ordinary map display unit 38a, it is not possible to know whether the first RAM clear process or the setting value update process has been executed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to determine whether the setting value update process has been executed or not even if the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and ordinary map display unit 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts.

Even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process when the supply of operating power starts (steps SC201 to SC223), if the situation when the supply of operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of a game round nor during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the initial display will be started in the special chart display unit 37a when display is started in the special chart display unit 37a. Also, even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process when the supply of operating power starts (steps SC201 to SC223), if the situation when the supply of operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the variable display of the picture in the normal chart display unit 38a nor during the execution of the normal power open state, the initial display will be started in the normal chart display unit 38a when display is started in the normal chart display unit 38a. As already explained, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the initial display is performed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process from being identified, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is being performed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power starts.

On the other hand, if the supply of operating power is stopped during either the execution of a game round or the execution of an open/close execution mode, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display of the special chart display unit 37a is controlled so that when display is started on the special chart display unit 37a, the display content is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. Also, if the supply of operating power is stopped during either the execution of the variable display of the image on the normal chart display unit 38a or the execution of the normal power open state, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display of the normal chart display unit 38a is controlled so that when display is started on the normal chart display unit 38a, the display content is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, if the supply of operating power is resumed and the game status immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped is resumed, it is possible to start displaying the special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a in a manner that corresponds to the resumption of the game status.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the special figure display section 37a are different depending on whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started, the contents of the initial display displayed on the general figure display section 38a are different depending on whether the first RAM clearing process is executed or the second RAM clearing process is executed. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a, whereas the general figure display section 38a In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped are displayed. Further, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the initial display is performed on the regular figure display section 38a, whereas the special figure display section 37a In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped are displayed.

Also, there may be multiple types of initial display for the special map display unit 37a, and when the supply of operating power is started and an initial display is performed on the special map display unit 37a, the initial display selected by lottery may be performed on the special map display unit 37a. Also, there may be multiple types of initial display for the regular map display unit 38a, and when the supply of operating power is started and an initial display is performed on the regular map display unit 38a, the initial display selected by lottery may be performed on the regular map display unit 38a.

In addition, in a configuration in which a round display unit for notifying the number of rounds of play that will occur in the open/close execution mode triggered by a jackpot result is provided as a display unit controlled by the main CPU 63, the round display unit may be configured to perform an initial display in either the case where the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed when the supply of operating power is started, or the case where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process has been executed. As a result, even if one checks the round display unit, it is not possible to determine whether the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In addition, all the display sections whose display is directly controlled by the main CPU 63, including the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b, are supplied with operating power. The initial display is It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done. In addition, in this configuration, although the initial display is once started in the special figure reservation display section 37b and the regular figure reservation display section 38b, the display contents are switched to the display contents corresponding to the fact that the corresponding reservation information is 0 pieces. It may also be a configuration.

Also, when the supply of operating power is started, if the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) may be executed, whereas when the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) may not be executed. Also, when the supply of operating power is started, if the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) may be executed, whereas when the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC502 to SC503 of the display start process (FIG. 191) may not be executed.

<Fifty-seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 56th embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the 56th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 56th embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC601 to step SC605 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63. Further, first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275 and an initial display flag 375 are provided in a clearing target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC601: NO), the loss display data for the special drawing is set to the first display data buffer 271 (step SC602), and the loss display data for the regular drawing is set to the third display data buffer 273 (step SC603). Then, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC604).

The deviation display data for the special figure is selected in the stop result setting process for the deviation result (step S509) when the result of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is a deviation result. This is the display data that will be displayed. That is, the winning display data for the special figure is display data for finally displaying a winning result on the special figure display section 37a in a game round in which the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result. Since only one type of missing display data for special figures is set, there is also one type of missing display data in the special figure display section 37a. In addition, there are multiple types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a game round in which the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result, but the winning display is different from these multiple types of winning displays. This is the displayed content.

By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the missed display data for the special figure stored in the first display data buffer 271, a missed display is performed in the special figure display section 37a. The display content of the off display is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured such that only one of the plurality of light emitting parts provided in the special figure display section 37a is in a light emitting state, or a plurality of light emitting parts are in a light emitting state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is set.

The loss display data for ordinary electricity is used to execute the general electricity opening lottery when the result of the ordinary electricity opening lottery in the ordinary electricity electricity opening control process (step S8914) of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) is an unsuccessful result. This is display data for causing the ordinary figure display section 38a to finally perform an out-of-order display in the variable display times of the ordinary figure display section 38a corresponding to . Since only one type of out-of-place display data for ordinary figures is set, there is also one type of out-of-place display in the ordinary figure display section 38a. In addition, only one type of winning display is set to be finally displayed on the general map display section 38a in the variable display times of the general public map display section 38a where the result of the public power open lottery is the winning result, but the winning display is The display content is different from the winning display.

The display of the regular map display unit 38a is controlled using the miss display data for the regular map stored in the third display data buffer 273, and a miss display is performed on the regular map display unit 38a. The display content of the miss display is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured so that only one of the multiple light-emitting elements provided on the regular map display unit 38a is in a light-emitting state, or it may be configured so that multiple light-emitting elements are in a light-emitting state.

When a positive judgment is made in step SC601, or when the processing of step SC604 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC605). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for the master CPU 63 to determine whether or not to start display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the master CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b, and when the display start flag is set to "1", the master CPU 63 starts display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 193) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (Fig. 193), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (Fig. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is set to lose display data for the special chart, and the third display data buffer 273 is set to lose display data for the regular chart. In this case, if display control of the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the loss display will start immediately after the display content displayed immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a is displayed. If this happens, a player who visually observes this change in the display content will be able to understand that a loss display has started on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed. In contrast, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 during the display start process (FIG. 191), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special map display area 37a and the regular map display area 38a begins. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned changes in the display content from occurring.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC601: YES), the processes of steps SC602 and SC603 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 remains in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored, and the third display data buffer 273 remains in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special map display unit 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the special map display unit 37a. Also, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the regular map display unit 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the regular map display unit 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, "1" is set in the initial display flag 375. " is not set, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are not set. The display section 38a starts displaying the error. The missing display on the special figure display section 37a is when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that the special symbol display section 37a displays a pattern. continues until the variable display starts. The out-of-game display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will start displaying out of place.

As described above, whether the first RAM clear process is executed or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, when the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a starts, the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a display "off". Therefore, even if the display contents of the display units 37a, 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts and the display starts on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a, it is not possible to know whether the first RAM clear process or the setting value update process has been executed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to determine whether the setting value update process has been executed or not, even if the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before the display. Here, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is almost always cut off when neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is being executed at the end of business hours of the game hall, and furthermore, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when the game hall is closed. In most cases, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when neither the variable display times nor the normal power open state is executed. In other words, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are basically out-of-order displays. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and An out-of-order display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are displaying an error when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that either one has been executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of out-of-display displays on the special figure display section 37a, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, those multiple types are displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one predetermined type of out-of-out display among out-of-out display is performed on the special figure display section 37a. In addition, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of out-of-order display on the normal figure display section 38a, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, those multiple types A configuration may be adopted in which one type of predetermined type of out-of-out display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) may not be executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC602 to SC603 of the display start process (FIG. 193) may not be executed.

<Fifty-eighth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed are different from those of the 55th embodiment. Below, the configurations different from the 55th embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configuration as the 55th embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area provided in the clear target area 371 and the non-clear target area 372 of the work area 221 for specific control.

The clear target area 371 includes not only the second display data buffer 272 in which display data for making the special chart reserved display unit 37b perform a predetermined display, the fourth display data buffer 274 in which display data for making the normal chart reserved display unit 38b perform a predetermined display, and the fifth display data buffer 275 in which display data for making the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 perform a predetermined display, but also the first display data buffer 271 in which display data for making the special chart display unit 37a perform a predetermined display, and the third display data buffer 273 in which display data for making the normal chart display unit 38a perform a predetermined display. Therefore, when the first RAM clear process (step SC218) is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process (step SC216) is executed, the display data corresponding to the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a and the normal chart display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is erased.

In addition to the first to fifth display data buffers 271 to 275, the clear target area 371 is also provided with an initial display flag 375. The initial display flag 375 is a flag for the main CPU 63 to identify whether or not it is necessary to display a miss as the initial display in the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a. Since the initial display flag 375 is provided in the clear target area 371, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the initial display flag 375 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the special map display unit 37a and the regular map display unit 38a will display a miss as the initial display after the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is executed.

In the non-clearable area 372, there is provided an initial display counter 381 for special drawings and an initial display counter 382 for normal drawings. The initial display counter 381 for special drawings is a counter for determining by lottery which type of special drawing loss display will be displayed when the display of the special drawing display unit 37a starts and a loss display is to be displayed as the initial display on the special drawing display unit 37a, from among the multiple types of loss displays for special drawings. The numerical range that the initial display counter 381 for special drawings can take is "0 to 59", but is not limited to this and can be any value.

The regular map initial display counter 382 is a counter that determines by lottery which type of regular map failure display will be displayed when the regular map display section 38a starts displaying a failure as the initial display and the regular map display section 38a is to display a failure. The possible numerical range of the regular map initial display counter 382 is "0 to 59", but is not limited to this and can be any value.

The initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for regular figures are provided in the non-clear target area 372 as described above. As a result, if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 is continued in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the first RAM clear process or the Even if the 2RAM clearing process is executed, the initial display counter 381 for special symbols and the initial display counter 382 for regular symbols are not initialized, and the numerical information immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored. is maintained.

The numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for regular figures are updated periodically by the first timer interrupt process in a situation where activation of the first timer interrupt process is permitted. be done. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the first timer interrupt process in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SC701 to step SC722 in the first timer interrupt processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

In steps SC705 and SC705, the same processes as steps S8901 and S8905 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the thirty-fifth embodiment are executed. After that, the initial display counter update process for the special figure is executed (step SC706). In the update process, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 381 for special figures, and after adding 1 to the read numerical information, the numerical information after the addition of 1 is overwritten on the initial display counter 381 for special figures. do. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, "59"), it is cleared to "0".

Then, in step SC707, it is determined whether or not either the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". If either flag is set to "1" (step SC707: YES), the first timer interrupt process is terminated without executing the processes of steps SC708 to SC722. If neither flag is set to "1" (step SC707: NO), the initial display counter update process for the normal map is executed (step SC708). In this update process, the current numerical information is read from the initial display counter 382 for the normal map, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and the numerical information after the increment is overwritten on the initial display counter 382 for the normal map. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value (specifically, "59"), it is cleared to "0". In steps SC709 to SC722, the same process as steps S8907 to S8920 of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 133) in the 35th embodiment is executed.

Here, the initial display counter update process for special figures (step SC706) is set as a process that is executed regardless of whether the game stop flag or the start-up processing flag is set to "1". On the other hand, the initial display counter update process for ordinary figures (step SC708) is set as a process that is not executed when the game stop flag or the starting process flag is set to "1". This allows the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures to have different update frequencies, and the initial display counter 381 for special figures and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures. This makes it possible to prevent the files from becoming synchronized.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC801 to step SC807 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC801: NO), a lottery process for the loss display data for the special chart is executed (step SC802). In the lottery process for the loss display data for the special chart, a loss display lottery table 383 for the special chart pre-stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced. FIG. 198(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the loss display lottery table 383 for the special chart. As shown in FIG. 198(a), the loss display data for the special chart includes the first loss display data for the special chart, the second loss display data for the special chart, and the third loss display data for the special chart.

The first out of line display data for special figures, the second out of line display data for special figures, and the third out of line display data for special figures are based on the results of the validity judgment process (step S504) of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). This is display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for a wrong result (step S509) when the result is a wrong result. In other words, the first to third miss display data for special figures are display data for finally displaying a miss on the special figure display section 37a in a game game in which the result of the judgment process is a miss. . The first out of line display data for special figures is data for displaying the first out of line indication for special figures on the special figure display section 37a, and the second out of line display data for special figures is data for displaying the first out of line indication for special figures. This is data for displaying the display on the special figure display section 37a, and the third off display data for the special figure is data for displaying the third off display for the special figure on the special figure display section 37a. The display contents of the first out-of-place display for the special figure, the second out-of-place display for the special figure, and the third out-of-place display for the special figure are different from each other. In addition, there are multiple types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the special figure display section 37a in a game round where the result of the win/fail judgment process is a winning result, but the first to third winning displays for special figures are The display content is different from these multiple types of winning displays. In addition, in the stop result setting process for a missed result (step S509), the special figure initial display counter 381 and the special figure missed display lottery table 383 are used to determine the missed display displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Select the type from the first to third out-of-place displays for special figures.

In the special figure losing display lottery table 383, a numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set for each of the first to third missing display data for the special figure. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "0 to 19" is set for the first out-of-place display data for the special figure, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "20 to 39" is set, and the initial display counter for the special figure of "40 to 59" is set for the third out of display data for the special figure. A numerical range of 381 is set. In other words, the selection probability of the first missing display data for special figures, the second missing display data for special figures, and the third missing display data for special figures in the lottery process of the missing display data for special figures is "1/3". ” are the same.

In the lottery process for the special figure missing display data, after reading the special figure missing display lottery table 383, the special figure initial display counter 381 provided in the non-clear target area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is read out. Obtain the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information against the special figure out-of-place display lottery table 383, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for the special figure and the second out-of-place display data for the special figure. Select from the out of line display data and the third out of line display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the loss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC803). The display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is used to control the display of the special chart display unit 37a, and the loss display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special chart display unit 37a. In other words, when the first loss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first loss display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, when the second loss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second loss display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, and when the third loss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the third loss display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a.

Thereafter, a lottery process for out-of-place display data for ordinary figures is executed (step SC804). In the lottery process for the losing display data for ordinary figures, reference is made to the losing display lottery table 384 for ordinary figures stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance. FIG. 198(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the losing display lottery table 384 for ordinary figures. As shown in FIG. 198(b), as the deviation display data for ordinary figures, there are first deviation display data for ordinary figures, second deviation display data for ordinary figures, and third deviation display data for ordinary figures. ing.

The first deviation display data for ordinary figures, the second deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures are generated in the ordinary figures and general electric power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), when the result of the general electricity release lottery executed using the general electricity accessory opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the general electricity accessory 34a is a loss result, This is display data for causing the general figure display section 38a to finally display a deviation for a normal figure during the variable display times of the figure display section 38a. The first deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures. This is data for displaying the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third out of place display data for ordinary figures is data for causing the third out of place display for ordinary figures to be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display contents of the first out-of-order display for ordinary figures, the second out-of-place indication for ordinary figures, and the third out-of-order indication for ordinary figures are different from each other. In addition, there are multiple types of winning displays that are finally displayed on the general map display section 38a in the fluctuating display times in which the result of the public power open lottery is the winning result. The display content is different from these multiple types of winning displays. In addition, in the ordinary figure general electricity control process (step SC716), the type of missing display to be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a is determined by using the ordinary figure initial display counter 382 and the ordinary figure missing display lottery table 384. Select from the 1st to 3rd outlier displays for ordinary figures.

In the out-of-order display lottery table 384 for normal-sized figures, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for normal-sized figures is set for each of the first to third out-of-place display data for ordinary figures. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures of "0 to 19" is set for the first deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the first deviation display data for ordinary figures. In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set as "20 to 39", and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures as "40 to 59" is set for the third out-of-order display data for ordinary figures. A numerical range of 382 is set. In other words, in the lottery process for the out-of-place display data for normal figures, the selection probability of the first out-of-place display data for normal figures, the second out-of-place display data for normal figures, and the third out-of-place display data for ordinary figures is "1/3". ” are the same.

In the lottery process for the loss display data for normal maps, the loss display lottery table 384 for normal maps is read, and then the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for normal maps provided in the non-clearable area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is obtained. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the loss display lottery table 384 for normal maps, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from among the first loss display data for normal maps, the second loss display data for normal maps, and the third loss display data for normal maps.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the losing display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC805). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the regular map display unit 38a, and the losing display corresponding to the display data is performed in the regular map display unit 38a. In other words, when the first losing display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first losing display for the regular map is performed in the regular map display unit 38a, when the second losing display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second losing display for the regular map is performed in the regular map display unit 38a, and when the third losing display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the third losing display for the regular map is performed in the regular map display unit 38a.

After executing the processes of steps SC802 to SC805, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC806).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC801 or when the process in step SC806 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC807). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main processing (Fig. 185). The timing of this processing is before the timing when the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 188) for executing display control of the special map display unit 37a, special map pending display unit 37b, regular map display unit 38a, regular map pending display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start processing (Fig. 197) that is executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) has ended. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b are maintained in an off state, and display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b begins after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed.

In particular, as already explained, in the display start process (Fig. 197), when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (Fig. 185), one of the first to third failure display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, and one of the first to third failure display data for the regular chart is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the failure display will start immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a. If this happens, a player who visually observes such a change in the display content will be able to understand that a failure display has started on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed. In contrast, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 during the display start process (FIG. 197), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special map display area 37a and the regular map display area 38a begins. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned changes in the display content from occurring.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC801: YES), the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 remains in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is, and the third display data buffer 273 remains in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special map display unit 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the special map display unit 37a. Also, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the regular map display unit 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the regular map display unit 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, the initial Since the display flag 375 is not set to "1", when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, these special figures are not set. Missing display starts in the figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. The missing display on the special figure display section 37a is when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that the special symbol display section 37a displays a pattern. continues until the variable display starts. The out-of-game display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will start displaying out of place.

As described above, whether the first RAM clear process is executed or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, when the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a starts, the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a display "off". Therefore, even if the display contents of the display units 37a, 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts and the display starts on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a, it is not possible to know whether the first RAM clear process or the setting value update process has been executed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to determine whether the setting value update process has been executed or not, even if the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before being displayed. Here, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is almost always cut off when neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is being executed at the end of business hours of the game hall, and furthermore, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when the game hall is closed. In most cases, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off when neither the variable display times nor the normal power open state is executed. In other words, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped are basically out-of-order displays. As already explained, even when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and An out-of-order display is performed on the normal figure display section 38a. As a result, even if it is confirmed that the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are displaying an error when the supply of operating power is started, the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify that either one has been executed.

In particular, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of loss displays for special charts, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, a loss display type selected by lottery from among the multiple types of loss displays is displayed on the special chart display unit 37a. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process has been executed from the type of loss display that is first displayed on the special chart display unit 37a when the supply of operating power is started.

Similarly, in a configuration in which there are multiple types of failure displays for normal maps, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, a failure display type selected by lottery from among the multiple types of failure displays is displayed on the normal map display unit 38a. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process has been executed from the type of failure display that is first displayed on the normal map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started.

In addition, the selection probabilities of the first losing display data for special charts, the second losing display data for special charts, and the third losing display data for special charts in the lottery process (step SC802) for the losing display data for special charts executed in the display start process (Figure 197) are not limited to a configuration in which the selection probabilities are the same, but may be substantially the same with slight differences, or may be configured to have significantly different selection probabilities.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC802) of the missing display data for the special figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first missing display data for the special figure, the second lost display data for the special figure, and the special The respective selection probabilities of the third winning display data for the figures are the first winning display data for the special pattern, the second winning display data for the special pattern, and the third winning display for the special pattern in the game game when the result is a winning result. Although the configuration is such that the selection probabilities are the same as the respective selection probabilities of the data, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the selection probabilities are slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities may be significantly different.

In addition, the selection probabilities of the first losing display data for regular maps, the second losing display data for regular maps, and the third losing display data for regular maps in the lottery process (step SC804) for the losing display data for regular maps executed in the display start process (Figure 197) are not limited to being the same, but may be substantially the same with slight differences, or may be significantly different from one another.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC804) for the out-of-order display data for the normal figure executed in the display start process (FIG. 197), the first out-of-place display data for the normal figure, the second out-of-line display data for the normal figure, and the normal out-of-place display data The selection probabilities of the third out-of-line display data for figures are the first out-of-out display data for normal figures, the second out-of-place display data for normal figures, and the third out-of-place display data for normal figures in the fluctuating display times when the result is out. Although the selection probabilities are the same as the respective selection probabilities of the display data, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection probabilities may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities may be significantly different.

Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) may not be executed. Further, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SC802 to SC805 of the display start process (FIG. 197) may not be executed.

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed, the first to third outliers for special figures are The display data is not limited to a configuration in which the display data is selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC802 is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first out-of-place display data for the special figure → the special figure The second out of line display data for the special figure → the third out of line display data for the special figure → the first out of line display data for the special figure →... The out of line display data for the special figure to be selected are arranged in a predetermined order. The configuration may be changed in sequence.

In addition, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, in step SC804 of the display start process (FIG. 197), the first to third outliers for normal figures are The display data is not limited to a configuration in which the display data is selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC804 is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first out-of-order display data for ordinary figures → for ordinary figures is changed. The second deviation display data for ordinary figures→the third deviation display data for ordinary figures→the first deviation display data for ordinary figures→... The deviation display data for ordinary figures to be selected are arranged in a predetermined order. The configuration may be changed in sequence.

<59th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed are different from the above-described fifty-eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifty-eighth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifty-eighth embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SC901 to step SC907 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SC901: NO), a lottery process for the initial display data for the special chart is executed (step SC902). In the lottery process for the initial display data for the special chart, an initial display lottery table 385 for the special chart pre-stored in the main ROM 64 is referenced. FIG. 200(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 385 for the special chart. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the initial display data for the special chart includes the first miss display data for the special chart, the second miss display data for the special chart, the third miss display data for the special chart, the first winning display data for the special chart, the second winning display data for the special chart, and the third winning display data for the special chart.

The first miss display data for the special chart, the second miss display data for the special chart, and the third miss display data for the special chart are display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the miss result (step S509) when the result of the win/loss determination process (step S504) of the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 13) is a miss result. Also, the first winning display data for the special chart, the second winning display data for the special chart, and the third winning display data for the special chart are display data that can be selected by lottery in the stop result setting process for the jackpot result (step S507) when the result of the win/loss determination process (step S504) of the special chart fluctuation start process (Figure 13) is a win result. In other words, the first to third loss display data for the special chart are display data for ultimately displaying a loss on the special chart display unit 37a in a game round in which the result of the win/loss determination process is a loss result, and the first to third win display data for the special chart are display data for ultimately displaying a win on the special chart display unit 37a in a game round in which the result of the win/loss determination process is a win result.

The first failure display data for the special chart is data for displaying the first failure display for the special chart on the special chart display unit 37a, the second failure display data for the special chart is data for displaying the second failure display for the special chart on the special chart display unit 37a, and the third failure display data for the special chart is data for displaying the third failure display for the special chart on the special chart display unit 37a. Also, the first winning display data for the special chart is data for displaying the first winning display for the special chart on the special chart display unit 37a, the second winning display data for the special chart is data for displaying the second winning display for the special chart on the special chart display unit 37a, and the third winning display data for the special chart is data for displaying the third winning display for the special chart on the special chart display unit 37a. The first winning display for the special chart is finally displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in a game round in which the result of the winning/losing determination process (step S504) of the special chart change start process (FIG. 13) is a winning result and the result of the allocation determination process (step S506) is a low-probability big winning result. In addition, the second winning display for the special chart is finally displayed on the special chart display section 37a in a game in which the result of the winning/losing determination process (step S504) of the special chart change start process (FIG. 13) is a winning result and the result of the allocation determination process (step S506) is a low-winning, high-probability jackpot result. In addition, the third winning display for the special chart is finally displayed on the special chart display section 37a in a game in which the result of the winning/losing determination process (step S504) of the special chart change start process (FIG. 13) is a winning result and the result of the allocation determination process (step S506) is the most favorable jackpot result. The display contents of these first losing display for the special chart, second losing display for the special chart, third losing display for the special chart, first winning display for the special chart, second winning display for the special chart, and third winning display for the special chart are mutually different.

The initial display lottery table 385 for special figures includes initial display counters 381 for special figures for each of the first to third winning display data for special figures and the first to third winning display data for special figures. A numerical range is set. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "0 to 9" is set for the first out-of-place display data for the special figure, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set to In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special figures "10 to 19" is set, and the initial display counter 381 for special figures "20 to 29" is set for the third out of display data for special figures. The numerical range of 381 is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special symbols is set as "30 to 39" for the first winning display data for special symbols. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure of "40-49" is set for the 2nd win display data, and the special figure of "50-59" for the 3rd win display data for the special figure. The numerical range of the initial display counter 381 is set. In other words, in the lottery process of the initial display data for special figures, the first winning display data for special drawings, the second winning display data for special drawings, the third winning display data for special drawings, and the first winning display data for special drawings. The selection probabilities of the display data, the second winning display data for special symbols, and the third winning display data for special symbols are "1/6", which is the same.

In the lottery process for the initial display data for special figures, after reading the initial display lottery table 385 for special figures, the initial display counter 381 for special figures provided in the area 372 that is not to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control is Obtain the current numerical information of. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information against the initial display lottery table 385 for special figures, the display data to be displayed this time is the first out-of-place display data for special figures and the second out of line display data for special figures. It is selected from among the winning display data, the third winning display data for special symbols, the first winning display data for special symbols, the second winning display data for special symbols, and the third winning display data for special symbols.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SC903). The display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is used to control the display of the special chart display unit 37a, and the special chart display unit 37a displays a miss or win corresponding to the display data. In other words, when the first miss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first miss display for the special chart is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a, when the second miss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second miss display for the special chart is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a, and when the third miss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the third miss display for the special chart is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a. In addition, when the first hit display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first hit display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, when the second hit display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second hit display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, and when the third hit display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the third hit display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a.

Thereafter, a lottery process for initial display data for common figures is executed (step SC904). In the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures, the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance is referred to. FIG. 200(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the initial display data for ordinary figures include first deviation display data for ordinary figures, second deviation display data for ordinary figures, third deviation display data for ordinary figures, and ordinary figures. There is winning display data for the game.

The first deviation display data for ordinary figures, the second deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures are generated in the ordinary figures and general electric power control process (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196). ), when the result of the general electricity release lottery executed using the general electricity accessory opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the general electricity accessory 34a is a loss result, This is display data for causing the general figure display section 38a to finally display a deviation for a normal figure during the variable display times of the figure display section 38a. In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned general power opening lottery is a winning result, the winning display data for general power is displayed in the general power map display section 38a in the fluctuation display time of the general power map display section 38a. This is display data for displaying a hit.

The first deviation display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is the data for displaying the first deviation indication for ordinary figures. This is data for displaying the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third out of place display data for ordinary figures is data for causing the third out of place display for ordinary figures to be displayed on the ordinary figure display section 38a. Moreover, the win display data for ordinary figures is data for displaying the winning indication for ordinary figures on the ordinary figure display section 38a. The display contents of the first miss display for ordinary figures, the second miss display for ordinary figures, the third miss display for ordinary figures, and the hit display for ordinary figures are different from each other.

In the initial display lottery table 386 for ordinary figures, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for each of the first to third loss display data for ordinary figures and the winning display data for ordinary figures. has been done. Specifically, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures of "0 to 14" is set for the first deviation display data for ordinary figures, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the first deviation display data for ordinary figures. In contrast, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set as "15 to 29", and the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures as "30 to 44" is set for the third out-of-order display data for ordinary figures. A numerical value range of 382 is set, and a numerical value range of "45 to 59" for the initial display counter 382 for ordinary symbols is set for the winning display data for ordinary symbols. That is, in the lottery process of the initial display data for ordinary figures, the first lose display data for ordinary figures, the second lose display data for ordinary figures, the third lose display data for ordinary figures, and the winning display data for ordinary figures. The selection probabilities are "1/4" and the same.

In the lottery process for the initial display data for normal maps, the initial display lottery table 386 for normal maps is read, and then the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for normal maps provided in the non-clearable area 372 in the work area 221 for specific control is obtained. Then, by comparing the obtained numerical information with the initial display lottery table 386 for normal maps, the display data to be displayed this time is selected from among the first losing display data for normal maps, the second losing display data for normal maps, the third losing display data for normal maps, and the winning display data for normal maps.

The display data selected in the initial display data lottery process for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SC905). By controlling the display of the ordinary figure display section 38a using the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273, a miss display or a hit display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a. . That is, when the first out-of-place display data for the normal figure is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first out-of-line display data for the normal figure is performed in the normal figure display section 38a, and the third display data buffer 273 When the second deviation display data for ordinary figures is set, the second deviation display for ordinary figures is performed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the third deviation display data for ordinary figures is displayed in the third display data buffer 273. When the display data is set, the third winning display for the normal pattern is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, and when the winning display data for the normal pattern is set in the third display data buffer 273, the normal pattern is displayed. A win display for the normal figure is performed on the figure display section 38a.

After executing the processes from step SC902 to step SC905, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SC906).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC901 or if the process in step SC906 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SC907). . Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start the display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the regular symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main processing (Fig. 185). The timing of this processing is before the timing when the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 188) for executing display control of the special map display unit 37a, special map reserved display unit 37b, regular map display unit 38a, regular map reserved display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start processing (Fig. 199) that is executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) has ended. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b are maintained in an off state, and display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b begins after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed.

In particular, in the display start process (Fig. 199), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (Fig. 185), either the first to third loss display data for the special chart or the first to third win display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, and either the first to third loss display data for the regular chart or the win display data for the regular chart is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the loss display or win display will start immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a. In that case, a player who visually observes such a change in the display content can understand that the loss display or win display has started on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed. In contrast, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 during the display start process (FIG. 199), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special map display area 37a and the regular map display area 38a begins. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned changes in the display content from occurring.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SC901: YES), the processes of steps SC902 to SC905 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, "1" is set in the initial display flag 375. " is not set, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a are not set. A miss display or a win display starts on the display section 38a. The missed display or the hit display on the special figure display section 37a is performed when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the game round start condition is satisfied. This continues until the variable display of the pattern starts at . The miss display or the win display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the fluctuating display of the symbols on the normal figure display section 38a starts. Note that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the factory shipping stage, the special symbol display section 37a and the regular symbol display section 38a will start displaying a loss or a win.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a display a miss or a hit, the supply of operating power is started and the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are started. Even if the display contents of the display sections 37a and 38a are checked when the display is started, it is not possible to determine which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

If the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), when the display is started on the special map display unit 37a, the display on the special map display unit 37a will start with the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the display is started on the normal map display unit 38a, the display on the normal map display unit 38a will start with the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. In other words, when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display content of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a will depend on the situation at the time when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content will be diverse. In contrast, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a display a miss or win display determined by lottery. As a result, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), it is possible to diversify the display contents of the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a, as in the case where the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223). Therefore, even if the display is confirmed when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a is started, it is possible to make it difficult to identify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed.

In addition, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure which can be selected when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) The display data on the display section 38a is display data that can be selected during normal gaming. As a result, the first RAM clearing process or It becomes possible to diversify the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed.

In the lottery process (step SC902) for the initial display data for the special chart executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), the selection probabilities of the first losing display data for the special chart, the second losing display data for the special chart, the third losing display data for the special chart, the first winning display data for the special chart, the second winning display data for the special chart, and the third winning display data for the special chart are not limited to being the same, but may be substantially the same with some differences, or may be significantly different in selection probabilities. As a configuration with significantly different selection probabilities, for example, the total selection probability of the first to third losing display data for the special chart may be higher than the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for the special chart, or may be lower.

In addition, in the lottery process (step SC904) for the initial display data for ordinary figures that is executed in the display start process (FIG. 199), the first outlier display data for ordinary figures, the second outlier display data for ordinary figures, the second outlier display data for ordinary figures, The selection probabilities of the third winning display data for figures and the winning display data for regular figures are not limited to the same configuration, but may be slightly different but substantially the same, or the selection probabilities can be significantly different. It may be configured as a probability.

The display data selected in the lottery process (step SC902) for the initial display data for special symbols executed in the display start process (Fig. 199) may include display data for displaying a display that is not included in the stopping results of a game round.The display data selected in the lottery process (step SC904) for the initial display data for normal symbols executed in the display start process (Fig. 199) may include display data for displaying a display that is not included in the stopping results of a variable display round.

Also, when the supply of operating power is started, if the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) may be executed, whereas when the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) may not be executed. Also, when the supply of operating power is started, if the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) may be executed, whereas when the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SC902 to SC905 of the display start process (FIG. 199) may not be executed.

In addition, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third outliers for special figures are The display data and the first to third winning display data for special symbols are not limited to the configuration in which they are selected by lottery, and each time the process of step SC902 is executed when the supply of operating power is started. 1st winning display data for special figure → 2nd winning display data for special figure → 3rd winning display data for special figure → 1st winning display data for special figure → 2nd winning display data for special figure → The display data to be selected may be sequentially changed in a predetermined order, such as third winning display data for special symbols→first losing display data for special symbols→...

In addition, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed, the first to third loss display data for normal maps and the first to third winning display data for normal maps are not limited to being selected by lottery in step SC904 of the display start process (Fig. 199). Each time the process of step SC904 is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the display data to be selected may be changed in a predetermined order, such as the first loss display data for normal maps → the second loss display data for normal maps → the third loss display data for normal maps → the winning display data for normal maps → the first loss display data for normal maps → ....

<60th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed are different from the above-described 59th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-ninth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifty-ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 202 is a flowchart showing the display start process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps SD101 to SD115 in the display start process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD101: NO), the process of steps SD102 to SD106 is executed. The process contents of steps SD102 to SD106 are the same as steps SC901 to SC906 of the display start process (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, a miss display or a win display is performed when the display of the special map display area 37a and the regular map display area 38a starts, just like the 59th embodiment.

If the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD101: YES), information indicating whether a game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the storage area where the game is played, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of the game round (step SD107). In the storage area, information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is started is stored, and information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is ended is stored in the memory area. be removed from the area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clearing target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SD108). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of a game round nor during the execution of the open/close execution mode (step SD107 and step SD108: NO), a lottery process for the initial display data for the special chart is executed (step SD109). The processing content of the lottery process for the initial display data for the special chart is the same as step SD102, and more specifically, is the same as step SC902 of the display start processing (Fig. 199) in the 59th embodiment. As a result, when starting the display of the special chart display unit 37a, one of the first loss display data for the special chart, the second loss display data for the special chart, the third loss display data for the special chart, the first winning display data for the special chart, the second winning display data for the special chart, and the third winning display data for the special chart is selected as the display data for causing the special chart display unit 37a to display a loss or a win when the display of the special chart display unit 37a is started.

The display data selected in the lottery process of the initial display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD110). The display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is used to control the display of the special chart display unit 37a, and the special chart display unit 37a displays a miss or win corresponding to the display data. In other words, when the first miss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first miss display for the special chart is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a, when the second miss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second miss display for the special chart is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a, and when the third miss display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the third miss display for the special chart is displayed in the special chart display unit 37a. In addition, when the first hit display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first hit display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, when the second hit display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second hit display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, and when the third hit display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the third hit display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was during the execution of the game round or the execution of the opening/closing execution mode (step SD107 or step SD108: YES), the initial display data for the special figure is Since the first display data buffer 271 is not set, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the first display data buffer 271. Therefore, when the display on the special figure display section 37a is started, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD107, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD108, or if the process of step SD110 is executed, the fluctuation of the general figure display section 38a in the clearing target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control By referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the image is being displayed is stored, the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of the operating power is stopped during the fluctuating display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a. It is determined whether the situation is the same (step SD111). The storage area stores information indicating that the fluctuating display of the pattern is being executed in the fuji display section 38a when the fluctuating display of the picture is started on the fuji display section 38a. When the fluctuating display of the picture is ended in step , information indicating that the fluctuating display of the picture is being executed in the ordinary picture display section 38a is deleted from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to a memory area in which information indicating whether or not the normal power release state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of the normal power release state (step SD112). When the normal power release state is started, information indicating that the normal power release state is being executed is stored in the memory area, and when the normal power release state is ended, information indicating that the normal power release state is being executed is erased from the memory area. The information in the memory area is stored and retained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and is stored and retained if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped, the regular map display unit 38a was not displaying a changing pattern or was in the regular power open state (step SD111 and step SD112: NO), a lottery process for the initial display data for the regular map is executed (step SD113). The processing content of the lottery process for the initial display data for the regular map is the same as step SD104, and more specifically, it is the same as step SC904 of the display start processing (FIG. 199) in the 59th embodiment above. As a result, when the display of the regular map display unit 38a is started, one of the first loss display data for the regular map, the second loss display data for the regular map, the third loss display data for the regular map, and the win display data for the regular map is selected as the display data for causing the regular map display unit 38a to display a loss or a win when the display of the regular map display unit 38a is started.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD114). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the regular map display unit 38a, and the regular map display unit 38a displays a miss or win corresponding to the display data. In other words, when the first miss display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the regular map display unit 38a displays a first miss for the regular map, when the second miss display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the regular map display unit 38a displays a second miss for the regular map, when the third miss display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the regular map display unit 38a displays a third miss for the regular map, and when the win display data for the regular map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the regular map display unit 38a displays a win for the regular map.

On the other hand, if the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was either while the image changing display in the normal map display unit 38a was in progress or while the normal power open state was in progress (step SD111 or step SD112: YES), the initial display data for the normal map is not set in the third display data buffer 273, and the display data stored before the supply of operating power was stopped remains stored in the third display data buffer 273. Therefore, when display in the normal map display unit 38a is started, the display content of the normal map display unit 38a immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped will be resumed as it was.

If the process of step SD106 is executed, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD111, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD112, or if the process of step SD114 is executed, the area to be cleared in the work area 221 for specific control 371 is set to "1" (step SD115). Similar to the 55th embodiment, the display start flag mainly determines whether or not to start display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. This is a flag for identification by the side CPU 63. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b. , when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 202) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special symbol display section 37a, the special symbol reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, as already explained, in the display start process (Fig. 202), even in a situation where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (Fig. 185), initial display data for special figures may be set in the first display data buffer 271, and initial display data for ordinary figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial display will start immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a. If this happens, a player who visually observes such a change in the display content will be able to understand that the initial display has started on the special figure display unit 37a and the ordinary figure display unit 38a in a situation where neither the first RAM clear process nor the second RAM clear process is executed. In contrast, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 during the display start process (FIG. 202), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special map display area 37a and the regular map display area 38a begins. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned changes in the display content from occurring.

Next, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started will be explained. FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a corresponding to the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

When the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1", so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts and the display of the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a starts, the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a start displaying a miss or win. The miss or win display in the special chart display unit 37a continues until the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the start condition of the game round is met, and the special chart display unit 37a starts displaying a changing pattern. The miss or win display in the regular chart display unit 38a continues until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the regular chart display unit 38a starts displaying a changing pattern. Furthermore, even at the factory shipping stage, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1", so the special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a will start displaying a loss or win.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the start is started, the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a display a miss or a hit, and the supply of operating power is started to the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. Even if the contents displayed on the display sections 37a and 38a are checked when the display is started, it is not possible to determine which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process when the supply of operating power starts (steps SC201 to SC223), if the situation when the supply of operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of a game round nor during the execution of the open/close execution mode, a loss display or a win display will be started in the special chart display unit 37a when display is started in the special chart display unit 37a. Also, even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process when the supply of operating power starts (steps SC201 to SC223), if the situation when the supply of operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the variable display of the pattern in the normal chart display unit 38a nor during the execution of the normal power open state, a loss display or a win display will be started in the normal chart display unit 38a when display is started in the normal chart display unit 38a. As already explained, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), a miss or win display is displayed on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process from being identified, even if it is confirmed that a miss or win display is being displayed on the special chart display unit 37a and the regular chart display unit 38a when the supply of operating power starts.

On the other hand, if the supply of operating power is stopped during either the execution of a game round or the execution of an open/close execution mode, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display of the special chart display unit 37a is controlled so that when display is started on the special chart display unit 37a, the display content is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. Also, if the supply of operating power is stopped during either the execution of the variable display of the image on the normal chart display unit 38a or the execution of the normal power open state, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display of the normal chart display unit 38a is controlled so that when display is started on the normal chart display unit 38a, the display content is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, if the supply of operating power is resumed and the game status immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped is resumed, it is possible to start displaying the special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a in a manner that corresponds to the resumption of the game status.

In the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) for the initial display data for the special chart executed in the display start process (Fig. 202), the selection probabilities of the first losing display data for the special chart, the second losing display data for the special chart, the third losing display data for the special chart, the first winning display data for the special chart, the second winning display data for the special chart, and the third winning display data for the special chart are not limited to being the same, but may be substantially the same with some differences, or may be significantly different in selection probabilities. As a configuration with significantly different selection probabilities, for example, the total selection probability of the first to third losing display data for the special chart may be higher than the total selection probability of the first to third winning display data for the special chart, or may be lower.

In addition, the selection probabilities of the first losing display data for regular maps, the second losing display data for regular maps, the third losing display data for regular maps, and the winning display data for regular maps in the lottery process (steps SD104 and SD113) for the initial display data for regular maps executed in the display start process (Fig. 202) are not limited to being the same, and may be substantially the same with slight differences, or may be significantly different.

In addition, as the display data selected in the lottery process (step SD102, step SD109) of initial display data for special symbols executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), a display that is not included in the stop result of the game round is selected. A configuration may also be adopted in which display data for causing the process to be performed is included. In addition, as display data selected in the initial display data lottery process (steps SD104, step SD113) for ordinary figures executed in the display start process (FIG. 202), displays that are not included in the stop results of the variable display times It may also be configured to include display data for causing the process to occur.

Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the first RAM clearing process is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the second RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) may not be executed. Furthermore, when the supply of operating power is started and the second RAM clearing process is executed, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) are executed, while the first RAM clearing process is executed. In this case, steps SD102 to SD105 of the display start process (FIG. 202) may not be executed.

<61st embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from the above-mentioned 56th embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifty-sixth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the 56th embodiment will be basically omitted.

Figure 204 is a flowchart showing the display start process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes in steps SD201 to SD219 in the display start process are executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD201: NO), the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "7", which corresponds to the number of light-emitting parts provided in the special chart display section 37a (step SD202). The lottery target counter is a counter that allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not it is necessary to execute the processes of steps SD203 to SD207 or the processes of steps SD211 to SD215.

Thereafter, a random number value is obtained from the special figure random number circuit corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD203). In this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of special pattern random number circuits corresponding to the number of light emitting sections provided in the special pattern display section 37a. Specifically, since seven light emitting parts are provided in the special figure display section 37a, seven special figure random number circuits are provided. These seven random number circuits for special symbols are held at relatively short periods (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds) and each has a different period when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. It is configured to update a random value to be used, and even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by supplying backup power. This configuration is capable of storing and holding the random value just before the random number.

When the seven light emitting parts of the special figure display section 37a are used as the first to seventh light emitting parts and the seven special figure random number circuits are used as the first to seventh special figure random number circuits, the first special figure The random number circuit for the special figure corresponds to the first light emitting part, the random number circuit for the second special figure corresponds to the second light emitting part, the random number circuit for the third special figure corresponds to the third light emitting part, The random number circuit for the 4th special figure corresponds to the 4th light emitting part, the random number circuit for the 5th special figure corresponds to the 5th light emitting part, and the random number circuit for the 6th special figure corresponds to the 6th light emitting part. The seventh special figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting section. In addition, when the value of the lottery target counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting part and the first special symbol random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "6", the second It corresponds to the light emitting part and the random number circuit for the second special figure, and if the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting part and the random number circuit for the third special figure, and the lottery target When the value of the counter is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting part and the fourth random number circuit for special symbols, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "3", it corresponds to the fifth light emitting part and the fourth special figure random number circuit. It corresponds to the random number circuit for the 5th special figure, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "2", it corresponds to the 6th light emitting part and the 6th special figure random number circuit, and the value of the lottery target counter is "2". When it is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting section and the seventh special figure random number circuit. Note that the random number circuits for the first to seventh special symbols all have the same numerical range of random numbers (for example, "0 to 255").

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for special symbols is executed (step SD204). In the lighting lottery process for special symbols, the lighting lottery table for special symbols is read from the main side ROM 64. In the lighting lottery table for special symbols, half of the random values that can be obtained in the first to seventh random number circuits for special symbols are set as winning random values. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD203 is checked against the lighting lottery table for special symbols.

If the result of the lighting lottery process for the special chart is a lighting win (step SD205: YES), lighting information is stored in an area corresponding to the current value of the lottery target counter among the clear target areas 371 in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD206). Note that each area set up corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD202 is executed.

Then, the value of the lottery counter is decremented by 1 (step SD207), and it is determined whether the value of the lottery counter after decrement is "0" (step SD208). If the determination is negative in step SD208, the processing of steps SD203 to SD207 is executed again.

If the determination in step SD208 is affirmative, the initial display data for the special drawing is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD209). The initial display data for the special drawing is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to each of the values of the lottery target counter of "1" to "7". For example, if lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter of "7", "5", and "1" is stored, while lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored, the initial display data for the special drawing that enables the initial display of the special drawing in which the first light-emitting unit, the third light-emitting unit, and the seventh light-emitting unit of the special drawing display unit 37a are in a light-emitting state and the second light-emitting unit, the fourth light-emitting unit, the fifth light-emitting unit, and the sixth light-emitting unit are in an unlit state is set in the first display data buffer 271.

The display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is used to control the display of the special chart display unit 37a, and an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the special chart display unit 37a. The display content that can be displayed on the special chart display unit 37a as the initial display includes display content that can be displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in normal play, and also includes display content that is not displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in normal play. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the special chart display unit 37a as the initial display and that can be displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in normal play includes a loss display for the special chart that is finally displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in a play round that results in a loss, and a win display for the special chart that is finally displayed on the special chart display unit 37a in a play round that results in a win.

Then, the lottery target counter provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "7", which corresponds to the number of light-emitting elements provided in the general map display unit 38a (step SD210).

Then, a random number value is obtained from the random number circuit for the normal map corresponding to the value of the lottery target counter (step SD211). In this embodiment, the main control board 61 is provided with a number of random number circuits for the normal map corresponding to the number of light-emitting elements provided in the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, seven light-emitting elements are provided in the normal map display unit 38a, so seven random number circuits for the normal map are provided. These seven random number circuits for the normal map are configured to update the random number value they hold at different periods, each of which is a relatively short period (for example, 1 microsecond to 7 microseconds), when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and further, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, backup power is supplied, so that the random number value immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped can be stored and held.

When the seven light emitting parts of the ordinary figure display section 38a are used as the first to seventh light emitting parts, and the seven random number circuits for ordinary figures are used as the first to seventh random number circuits for ordinary figures, the first ordinary figure The random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the first light emitting part, the second random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the second light emitting part, and the third random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the third light emitting part, The 4th random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the 4th light emitting part, the 5th random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the 5th light emitting part, and the 6th random number circuit for ordinary figures corresponds to the 6th light emitting part. The seventh general figure random number circuit corresponds to the seventh light emitting section. In addition, when the value of the lottery target counter is "7", it corresponds to the first light emitting part and the first random number circuit, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "6", it corresponds to the second random number circuit. It corresponds to the light emitting part and the second random number circuit for general figures, and if the value of the lottery target counter is "5", it corresponds to the third light emitting part and the third random number circuit for general figures, and it corresponds to the random number circuit for the third general figure. When the value of the counter is "4", it corresponds to the fourth light emitting part and the fourth random number circuit for general figures, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "3", it corresponds to the fifth light emitting part and the fourth random number circuit. It corresponds to the random number circuit for 5 ordinary figures, and when the value of the lottery target counter is "2", it corresponds to the 6th light emitting part and the 6th random number circuit for ordinary figures, and the value of the lottery target counter is "2". When it is "1", it corresponds to the seventh light emitting section and the seventh general random number circuit. Note that the numerical range of random numbers in the first to seventh random number circuits for common figures is the same (for example, "0 to 255").

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for ordinary figures is executed (step SD212). In the lighting lottery process for ordinary figures, the lighting lottery table for ordinary figures is read from the main side ROM 64. In the lighting lottery table for regular figures, half of the random numbers that can be obtained in the first to seventh random number circuits for regular figures are set as winning random numbers. Then, the random number value obtained in step SD211 is checked against the lighting lottery table for ordinary figures.

If the result of the lighting lottery process for ordinary figures is a lighting win (step SD213: YES), lighting information is displayed in the area corresponding to the current lottery target counter value among the clear target areas 371 in the work area 221 for specific control. is stored (step SD214). Note that each area provided corresponding to the lottery target counter is cleared to "0" when the process of step SD210 is executed.

Then, the value of the lottery counter is decremented by 1 (step SD215), and it is determined whether the value of the lottery counter after decrement is "0" (step SD216). If the determination is negative in step SD216, the processing of steps SD211 to SD215 is executed again.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD216, the initial display data for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD217). The initial display data for the general figure is determined by the presence or absence of lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter of "1" to "7". For example, while the lighting information corresponding to the values of the lottery target counter are "7", "5", and "1" is stored, the lighting information corresponding to other values of the lottery target counter is not stored. In this case, the first light emitting section, the third light emitting section, and the seventh light emitting section of the normal figure display section 38a are in the light emitting state, and the second light emitting section, the fourth light emitting section, the fifth light emitting section, and the sixth light emitting section are in the light emitting state. Initial display data for the ordinary figure that enables execution of the initial display for the ordinary figure in the unlit state is set in the third display data buffer 273.

The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the regular map display section 38a, and an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed on the regular map display section 38a. The display content that can be displayed on the regular map display section 38a as the initial display includes display content that can be displayed on the regular map display section 38a in normal play, and also includes display content that is not displayed on the regular map display section 38a in normal play. In addition, the display content that can be displayed on the regular map display section 38a as the initial display and that can be displayed on the regular map display section 38a in normal play includes a loss display for regular maps that is finally displayed on the regular map display section 38a in the time when a loss result is displayed in a variable display, and a win display for regular maps that is finally displayed on the regular map display section 38a in the time when a win result is displayed in a variable display.

After executing the processes of steps SD202 to SD217, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD218).

When a positive judgment is made in step SD201, or when the processing of step SD218 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD219). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for the master CPU 63 to determine whether or not to start display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the master CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b, and when the display start flag is set to "1", the master CPU 63 starts display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b.

As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main processing (Fig. 185). The timing of this processing is before the timing when the second timer interrupt processing (Fig. 188) for executing display control of the special map display unit 37a, special map reserved display unit 37b, regular map display unit 38a, regular map reserved display unit 38b, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is first executed after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 has started. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start processing (Fig. 204) that is executed after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) has ended. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b are maintained in an off state, and display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b begins after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 204), if either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (FIG. 185) as already explained, the special image is stored in the first display data buffer 271. At the same time, initial display data for ordinary figures is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. Then, the player who visually observes such a change in display content will start the initial display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a in a situation where either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process has been executed. I can understand what happened. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 204), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD201: YES), the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 is not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 remains in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is, and the third display data buffer 273 remains in a state in which the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special map display unit 37a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the special map display unit 37a. Also, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the regular map display unit 38a is started, the display corresponding to the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is performed in the regular map display unit 38a.

As described in detail above, when the first RAM clearing process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clearing process is executed in the setting value update process, the initial Since the display flag 375 is not set to "1", when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started, these special symbols are not set. Initial display is started in the figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. The initial display on the special figure display section 37a is when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the start condition for the game round is satisfied, so that a picture is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. continues until the variable display starts. The initial display on the normal figure display section 38a continues until a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the variable display of the symbol on the normal figure display section 38a starts. It should be noted that since the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" even at the time of shipment from the factory, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will start displaying out of place.

Regardless of whether the first RAM clearing process is executed as described above or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display on the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is When the start is started, the initial display is performed on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a, and the supply of operating power is started, and the display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a. Even if you check the display contents of these display units 37a and 38a when the process is started, it is not possible to know which of the first RAM clearing process and the setting value updating process has been executed. As a result, even if the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is not possible to specify whether or not the setting value update process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a starts displaying. In this case, the special figure display section 37a starts displaying the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and when the regular figure display section 38a starts displaying, the supply of operating power stops. The display on the ordinary figure display section 38a starts with the display contents immediately before being displayed. In other words, if the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the general figure The display content of the display unit 38a depends on the situation at the timing when the supply of operating power is stopped, and the display content varies. On the other hand, if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the special figure display section 37a and the normal The initial display is determined by lottery and displayed on the diagram display section 38a. As a result, even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), when the supply of operating power starts. As in the case where the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process were not executed in the process (steps SC201 to SC223), the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a are It becomes possible to diversify. Therefore, even if the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is confirmed when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is confirmed, either the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process This makes it difficult to identify what has been executed.

In particular, when determining the display contents of the initial display, the lighting lottery process is executed for each light emitting part for each of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. This makes it possible to diversify the display contents that can be selected as the initial display.

In addition, the processing of steps SD202 to SD218 of the display start processing (Fig. 204) may be executed even if the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing are not executed when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, even if the special chart display unit 37a and the normal chart display unit 38a are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the first RAM clear processing and the second RAM clear processing were executed when the supply of operating power is started. In addition, in this configuration, if the special chart display unit 37a is in the middle of displaying the changing pattern or is in the middle of the opening and closing execution mode just before the supply of operating power is stopped, the processing of steps SD202 to SD209 of the display start processing (Fig. 204) may be not executed, so that the display of the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped is resumed on the special chart display unit 37a. Also, if the regular picture display unit 38a was in the middle of displaying a changing pattern immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped, or if the regular power was in the middle of being released, the process of steps SD210 to SD217 of the display start process (FIG. 204) may be prevented from being executed, so that the display of the content displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped may be resumed on the special picture display unit 37a.

In addition, in the special figure lighting lottery process (step SD204) of the display start process (FIG. 204), a lottery is not performed to determine whether each light emitting part of the special figure display section 37a is individually lit. , 2 or 3, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to turn on the lights in units of a predetermined plurality of units. In addition, in the lighting lottery process (step SD212) for ordinary figures in the display start process (FIG. 204), a lottery is not performed to determine whether each light emitting part of the ordinary figure display section 38a is to be turned on individually. , 2 or 3, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to turn on the lights in units of a predetermined plurality of units.

Also, when the supply of operating power is started, if the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (Fig. 204) may be executed, whereas when the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (Fig. 204) may not be executed. Also, when the supply of operating power is started, if the second RAM clear process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (Fig. 204) may be executed, whereas when the first RAM clear process is executed, steps SD202 to SD217 of the display start process (Fig. 204) may not be executed.

<62nd embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started are different from the above-mentioned 58th embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration different from the fifty-eighth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the fifty-eighth embodiment described above will be basically omitted.

Figure 205 is a flowchart showing the setting value update process in this embodiment, which is executed in step SC216 in the main processing (Figure 185) of the main CPU 63. Note that the processing of steps SD301 to SD316 in the setting value update process is executed using a program for specific control and data for specific control in the main CPU 63.

First, interrupt permission is set (step SD301). As a result, the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is interrupted and activated in the first interrupt cycle, and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) is interrupted and activated in the second interrupt cycle.

In this embodiment, in the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), interrupts of the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are basically prohibited. , interrupts are permitted in the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) and the setting value update process (see FIG. 205) are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the first timer interrupt process (see FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are prohibited and the setting confirmation processing (step SC213) or the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is executed, the first timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196) is prohibited. ) and second timer interrupt processing (FIG. 188) are permitted. However, in a situation where the setting confirmation process (step SC213) or the setting value update process (Fig. 205) is being executed, the start-up processing flag is set to "1", so the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196) is started, among the various processes of the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196), the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, while the processes for proceeding with the game are executed. The first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) is ended without any process being executed.

Thereafter, on the condition that the setting update display flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is not set to "1", the setting update display flag is set to "1" (step SD302). By setting the setting update display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step SC402 of the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188), and the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update is performed. (Step SC403) is executed. The contents of the setting process for the fifth display data buffer 275 during the setting update are the same as in the forty-fifth embodiment. By executing this process, for example, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 124(a), a display indicating that the setting values of the pachinko machine 10 are being updated and the pachinko machine 10 being selected as an update target are displayed. The currently set values are displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204.

Then, the initial setting at the start is performed (step SD303). In this initial setting, the game stop flag provided in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0". The game stop flag is a flag that is set to "1" in step SC220 of the main processing (Fig. 185) when the power outage processing was not performed properly at the previous power outage and the power outage flag was not set to "1" (step SC205: NO), when the checksum does not match due to the fact that the storage state of information has changed since the previous power outage for at least one of the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control (step SC206: NO), or when the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting reference area 341 is not within the normal range (step SC207: NO). By setting the game stop flag to "1", the processing of steps SC701 to SC706 is executed in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 196), while the processing of steps SC708 to SC722 is not executed by making a positive judgment in step SC707. As a result, when an information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65 as described above, the processes for power outage monitoring, updating of various counters, and fraud monitoring are executed, but the processes for progressing the game are not executed. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" in the processing of step SD303, it becomes possible to release the state in which the occurrence of an information abnormality in the main RAM 65 has been identified when the setting value update processing (FIG. 205) is executed.

Then, "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (see FIG. 154) in the work area 221 for specific control (step SD304). The setting update area 342 is a storage area in which information on the setting value being updated is stored in the setting value update process (FIG. 205) as in the 45th embodiment. When the numerical information of "1" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated (selected or changed) becomes "Setting 1". When the numerical information of "2" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 2". When the numerical information of "3" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 3". When the numerical information of "4" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 4". When the numerical information of "5" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 5". When the numerical information of "6" is stored in the setting update area 342, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 6".

By setting "1" in the setting update area 342 in step SD304, the setting value to be updated becomes "setting 1". That is, in this embodiment, no matter what the current setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is, when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is started, the setting value to be updated will be "setting 1".

Then, the sound and light emission control device 81 transmits an update start command (step SD305). By receiving the update start command, the sound and light emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 so that an image indicating that the setting value update process (Fig. 205) is being executed, an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for changing the setting value, and an image for enabling the user to recognize the operation content for terminating the setting value update process (Fig. 205) are displayed on the pattern display device 41. This allows the manager of the game hall to recognize that the setting value is being changed, and allows the manager of the game hall to recognize the operation content required to change the setting value and the operation content required to terminate the setting value update process (Fig. 205). In addition to or instead of the above notification being executed by the pattern display device 41, at least one of the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 may be configured to be executed. Also, an external output indicating that the setting value update process (Fig. 205) is being executed may be executed to a device outside the pachinko machine 10, such as the management computer of the game hall.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is one of "1" to "6" (step SD306). If it is not one of "1" to "6" (step SD306: NO), "1" is set in the setting update area 342 (step SD307). As a result, the setting value to be updated becomes "Setting 1."

If a positive determination is made in step SD306 or if the processing of step SD307 is executed, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 68a has switched from an ON state to an OFF state using the setting key (step SD308). Specifically, it is determined whether the reception state of the signal received from the detection sensor that detects the state of the setting key insertion unit 68a has changed from a reception state corresponding to an ON state to a reception state corresponding to an OFF state. Therefore, a negative determination is made in step SD308 not only when the setting key insertion unit 68a is maintained in the ON state, but also when the setting value update processing is started when the setting key insertion unit 68a is in the OFF state and the OFF state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step SD308, the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1 (step SD310), provided that the reset button 68c is pressed (step SD309: YES). Thereby, each time the reset button 68c is pressed once, the setting value is updated to one level higher. Further, if the reset button 68c is not pressed (step SD309: NO) or if the value in the setting update area 342 is incremented by 1, the process returns to step SD306, but the settings are updated in step SD306. If it is determined that the value in the area 342 for setting is 7 or more, "1" is set in the area 342 for setting update in step SD307. As a result, when the reset button 68c is pressed once in the situation of "Setting 6", the state returns to "Setting 1".

If it is determined that the setting key insertion section 68a has switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step SD308: YES), the setting value corresponding to the information stored in the setting update area 342 is stored in the setting reference area 341. By determining whether or not the setting value is greater than or equal to the setting value corresponding to the information, the setting value that is greater than or equal to the advantageousness of the setting value that was selected before the current setting value update process (Fig. 205) was started is determined. It is determined whether it has been selected in the current setting value update process (FIG. 205) (step SD311). When an affirmative determination is made in step SD311, the rising expectation flag provided in the clearing target area 371 in the specific control work area 221 is set to "1" (step SD312). The increase expectation flag indicates whether or not a setting value that is higher than or equal to the advantageous value of the setting value selected up to that point in the processing at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is set on the main side. This is a flag for identification by the CPU 63.

If a negative determination is made in step SD311, or if the process in step SD312 is executed, the setting value information stored in the setting update area 342 is overwritten in the setting reference area 341 (step SD313). As a result, the setting value information updated in the current setting value update process (FIG. 205) is set in the setting reference area 341, and the setting value corresponding to the set information is changed to the current setting value. This is the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, interrupts are disabled (step SD314). As a result, when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is terminated and the process at the start of the supply of operating power in the main process (FIG. 185) (steps SC201 to SC223) is resumed, interrupts in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196) and the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) are disabled.

Then, the second RAM clear process is executed (step SD315). In the second RAM clear process, similar to the first RAM clear process (step SC218) in the main process (FIG. 185), the area set in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is cleared to "0" and initial settings are executed. Note that the area in which the setting value information indicating the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is set (i.e., the setting reference area 341) is set in the clear non-target area 372, not in the clear target area 371.

Thereafter, a return command at the time of update is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step SD316). By receiving the return command at the time of update, the audio light emission control device 81 specifies that the processing for starting the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) in the main side CPU 63 has ended, and also specifies that the current operating power supply is completed. It is specified that the setting value update process (FIG. 205) has been executed in the process at the start of supply (steps SC201 to SC223). Then, similar to the forty-ninth embodiment described above, the process corresponding to the reception of the return command at the time of update is executed.

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processing from step SD401 to step SD413 in the display start processing is executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD401: NO), check whether the rise expectation flag of the area to be cleared 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1". Determination is made (step SD402). If the rising expectation flag is not set to "1" (step SD402: NO), the first display distribution table 391 for special symbols provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD403), and the rising expectation flag is set to "1". 1" is set (step SD402: YES), the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD404).

Figure 207 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings, and Figure 207 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings. In both the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings and the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings, the first initial display data for special drawings, the second initial display data for special drawings, and the third initial display data for special drawings are present as the initial display data for special drawings.

The first initial display data for special drawings is data for displaying the first initial display for special drawings on the special drawing display unit 37a, the second initial display data for special drawings is data for displaying the second initial display for special drawings on the special drawing display unit 37a, and the third initial display data for special drawings is data for displaying the third initial display for special drawings on the special drawing display unit 37a. The display contents of the first initial display for special drawings, the second initial display for special drawings, and the third initial display for special drawings are mutually different.

The first initial display data for the special chart, the second initial display data for the special chart, and the third initial display data for the special chart are display data that are not selected in either the stop result setting process for a jackpot result (step S507) or the stop result setting process for a miss result (step S509) in the special chart change start process (Figure 13). Therefore, the first initial display for the special chart, the second initial display for the special chart, and the third initial display for the special chart are different from the display content that may ultimately be stopped and displayed on the special chart display unit 37a during a game round. Furthermore, the first initial display for the special chart, the second initial display for the special chart, and the third initial display for the special chart are display content that are not selected as display targets when a picture change display is performed on the special chart display unit 37a during a game round. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display on the special chart display unit 37a starts with either the first initial display for the special chart, the second initial display for the special chart, or the third initial display for the special chart, it becomes possible to know that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process has been performed in the process at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223).

As shown in FIGS. 207(a) and 207(b), the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures each include the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures. - A numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is set for each of the third initial display data. The initial display counter 381 for the special figure is provided in the non-clear target area 372 as in the above-described 58th embodiment, so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the initial display counter 381 is stored in the main RAM 65. If the supply of backup power is continued, the value immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped without being initialized even if the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed. The state in which the information is stored is maintained. Moreover, the numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is updated in step SC706 in the first timer interrupt process (FIG. 196), similarly to the above-mentioned 58th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 207(a), in the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings is set to "0 to 39" for the first initial display data for special drawings, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings is set to "40 to 54" for the second initial display data for special drawings, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings is set to "55 to 59" for the third initial display data for special drawings. In other words, in the first display allocation table 391 for special drawings, the selection probability of the first initial display data for special drawings is 2/3, which is the highest selection probability, the selection probability of the second initial display data for special drawings is 1/4, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the third initial display data for special drawings is 1/12, which is the lowest selection probability.

As shown in FIG. 207(b), in the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings is set to "0 to 9" for the first initial display data for special drawings, the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings is set to "10 to 39" for the second initial display data for special drawings, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 381 for special drawings is set to "40 to 59" for the third initial display data for special drawings. In other words, in the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings, the selection probability of the second initial display data for special drawings is 1/2, which is the highest selection probability, the selection probability of the third initial display data for special drawings is 1/3, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the first initial display data for special drawings is 1/6, which is the lowest selection probability.

Returning to the explanation of the display start process (FIG. 206), after executing the process of step SD403 or the process of step SD404, a lottery process of the initial display data for special symbols is executed (step SD405). In the lottery process of the initial display data for the special figure, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for the special figure is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is read out from the main side ROM 64 in step SD403 as the first display distribution table 391 for special symbols, or in step SD404 as the second display distribution table for special symbols read out from the main side ROM64. 392, the display data to be displayed this time can be selected from among the first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures. select.

The display data selected in the lottery process of initial display data for special figures is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD406). By controlling the display of the special figure display section 37a using the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271, an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special figure display section 37a. That is, when the first initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special figure is performed in the special figure display section 37a, and the first display data buffer 271 When the second initial display data for the special figure is set in the special figure display section 37a, the second initial display for the special figure is performed in the first display data buffer 271, and the third initial display data for the special figure is set in the first display data buffer 271. When the display data is set, a third initial display for the special figure is performed on the special figure display section 37a.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the rise expectation flag of the area to be cleared 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD407). If the rising expectation flag is not set to "1" (step SD407: NO), the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD408), and the rising expectation flag is set to "1". If "1" is set (step SD407: YES), the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step SD409).

Figure 207 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first display allocation table 393 for regular maps, and Figure 207 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second display allocation table 394 for regular maps. In both the first display allocation table 393 for regular maps and the second display allocation table 394 for regular maps, the first initial display data for regular maps, the second initial display data for regular maps, and the third initial display data for regular maps are present as initial display data for regular maps.

The first initial display data for regular maps is data for displaying the first initial display for regular maps on the regular map display unit 38a, the second initial display data for regular maps is data for displaying the second initial display for regular maps on the regular map display unit 38a, and the third initial display data for regular maps is data for displaying the third initial display for regular maps on the regular map display unit 38a. The display contents of the first initial display for regular maps, the second initial display for regular maps, and the third initial display for regular maps are mutually different.

The first initial display data for the normal map, the second initial display data for the normal map, and the third initial display data for the normal map are display data that are not selected in either the case where the result of the normal power opening lottery executed using the normal power role opening counter C4 to determine whether or not to open the normal power role 34a in the normal map normal power control processing (step SC716) in the first timer interrupt processing (Fig. 196) is a miss result or a win result. Therefore, the first initial display for the normal map, the second initial display for the normal map, and the third initial display for the normal map are different from the display contents that can be finally stopped and displayed on the normal map display section 38a in the variable display time. Furthermore, the first initial display for the normal map, the second initial display for the normal map, and the third initial display for the normal map are display contents that are not selected as display targets when the picture variable display is performed on the normal map display section 38a in the variable display time. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started and the display on the normal map display unit 38a starts with either the first initial display for normal maps, the second initial display for normal maps, or the third initial display for normal maps, it becomes possible to know that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process has been performed in the process at the start of the current supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223).

In the first display allocation table 393 for normal maps and the second display allocation table 394 for normal maps, as shown in Fig. 207(c) and Fig. 207(d), the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is set for each of the first to third initial display data for normal maps. Since the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is provided in the non-clearable area 372 as in the 58th embodiment, if the supply of backup power to the main RAM 65 continues in a situation in which the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the state in which the numerical information immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored is maintained without being initialized even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed. In addition, the numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is updated in step SC708 in the first timer interrupt process (Fig. 196) as in the 58th embodiment.

In the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures, as shown in FIG. A numerical range is set, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for the common figure of "30 to 49" is set for the second initial display data for the common figure, and the third initial display data for the common figure is set. A numerical value range of "50 to 59" for the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is set for the display data. In other words, in the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures, the selection probability of the first initial display data for ordinary figures is 1/2, which means that the selection probability is the highest, and the second initial display data for ordinary figures has the highest selection probability. The selection probability of the data is 1/3, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the third initial display data for ordinary figures is 1/6, which is the lowest selection probability.

As shown in FIG. 207(d), in the second display allocation table 394 for regular maps, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for regular maps is set to "0-19" for the first initial display data for regular maps, the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for regular maps is set to "20-29" for the second initial display data for regular maps, and the numerical range of the initial display counter 382 for regular maps is set to "30-59" for the third initial display data for regular maps. In other words, in the second display allocation table 394 for regular maps, the selection probability of the third initial display data for regular maps is 1/2, which is the highest selection probability, the selection probability of the first initial display data for regular maps is 1/3, which is the second highest selection probability, and the selection probability of the second initial display data for regular maps is 1/6, which is the lowest selection probability.

Returning to the explanation of the display start process (FIG. 206), after executing the process of step SD408 or the process of step SD409, a lottery process of initial display data for ordinary figures is executed (step SD410). In the lottery process for the initial display data for ordinary figures, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for ordinary figures is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is read out from the main side ROM 64 in step SD408 as the first display distribution table 393 for regular figures, or in step SD409 as the second display distribution table for ordinary figures read out from the main side ROM64. 394, the display data to be displayed this time can be selected from among the first initial display data for ordinary figures, the second initial display data for ordinary figures, and the third initial display data for ordinary figures. select.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD411). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the ordinary map display unit 38a, and an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a. In other words, when the first initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the ordinary map is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a, when the second initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second initial display for the ordinary map is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a, and when the third initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the third initial display for the ordinary map is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a.

After executing the processes of steps SD402 to SD411, the initial display flag 375 provided in the clear target area 371 in the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD412).

When a positive judgment is made in step SD401, or when the processing of step SD412 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD413). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for the master CPU 63 to determine whether or not to start display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the master CPU 63 does not perform display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b, and when the display start flag is set to "1", the master CPU 63 starts display control of the special chart display unit 37a, the special chart reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary chart display unit 38a, and the ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 206) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (Fig. 206), as already explained, when either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed in the main process (Fig. 185), one of the first to third initial display data for the special map is set in the first display data buffer 271, and one of the first to third initial display data for the normal map is set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if the display control of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the initial display will start immediately after the display content immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is displayed on the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and the third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (Fig. 206), the display start flag is set to "1" after the process of setting the display data is completed, and the display of the special map display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned change in the display content from occurring.

On the other hand, if the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD401: YES), the processes from step SD402 to step SD412 are not executed. Therefore, the first display data buffer 271 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, and the third display data buffer 273 stores the display data stored immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. The display data stored in is stored as is. In this case, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, the display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A display corresponding to the above is displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Further, when the display start flag is set to "1" and the display of the general figure display section 38a is started, the display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped. A corresponding display is performed on the ordinary figure display section 38a.

As described above in detail, when the first RAM clear process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1", so when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts and the display of the special chart display unit 37a and the ordinary chart display unit 38a starts, the initial display starts in these special chart display unit 37a and ordinary chart display unit 38a. The initial display in the special chart display unit 37a continues until the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the start condition of the game round is met, and the display of the changing pattern starts in the special chart display unit 37a. The initial display in the ordinary chart display unit 38a continues until the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the display of the changing pattern starts in the ordinary chart display unit 38a. In addition, even at the factory shipping stage, the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1", so the initial display will start in the special map display section 37a and the regular map display section 38a.

As described above, whether the first RAM clear process is executed or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed, when the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a starts, an initial display is performed on these special map display units 37a and ordinary map display units 38a, so that even if the display contents of these display units 37a, 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts and the display starts on the special map display unit 37a and ordinary map display unit 38a, it is not possible to know whether the first RAM clear process or the setting value update process has been executed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to determine whether the setting value update process has been executed or not even if the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and ordinary map display unit 38a are checked when the supply of operating power starts.

On the other hand, when the set value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is selected in the set value update process (FIG. 205), the special figure display section 37a If the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is selected as the table for determining the initial display to be performed, but the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is not executed or the setting value is updated. In the process (FIG. 205), if a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is not selected, the first display for the special figure is used as a table for determining the initial display to be performed on the special figure display section 37a. Display distribution table 391 is selected. The initial display selection mode is different between the first display distribution table 391 for special symbols and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols. As a result, by checking the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special figure display section 37a is started, a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value is newly set. It becomes possible to predict whether or not the

Similarly, when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a setting value equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is selected in the setting value update process (FIG. 205), the second display allocation table 394 for normal maps is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the normal map display unit 38a. On the other hand, when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is not executed or when a setting value equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is not selected in the setting value update process (FIG. 205), the first display allocation table 393 for normal maps is selected as a table for determining the initial display to be performed by the normal map display unit 38a. The selection mode of the initial display is different between the first display allocation table 393 for normal maps and the second display allocation table 394 for normal maps. As a result, by checking the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, it is possible to predict whether a new setting value equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value has been set.

Furthermore, as described above, when the supply of operating power is started and the display is started, it is possible to predict whether or not a new set value has been set that is more advantageous than the previous set value based on the contents of the initial display. There are a plurality of display sections such as a special figure display section 37a and a regular figure display section 38a as possible display sections. As a result, there will be more information to use when predicting whether or not a new set value has been set that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value, making it possible to improve the accuracy of the prediction by the player. .

In addition, in the setting value update process (Fig. 205), if a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set, the increase expectation flag is set to "1" and the special symbol is used for the initial display data lottery. It is not limited to the configuration in which the second display distribution table 392 or the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures is referred to, and in the setting value update process (FIG. 205), the setting value is more advantageous than the previous setting value. When the set value is set, the rising expectation flag is set to "1", and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols or the second display distribution table 394 for regular symbols is referred to when drawing the initial display data. When the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is executed, the increase expectation flag is set to "1" and the initial display data is drawn by lottery regardless of which setting value is newly set. At this time, the second display distribution table 392 for special figures or the second display distribution table 394 for regular figures may be referred to.

In addition, the initial display data for special figures that can be selected when the first display distribution table 391 for special figures is referred to and the special figure that can be selected when the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is referred to. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the initial display data for the special figure completely matches the initial display data for the special figure set in the first display distribution table 391 for the special figure and the initial display data for the special figure. A configuration may be adopted in which the initial display data for the special figure set in the second display distribution table 392 does not completely match. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will clearly differ depending on whether "1" is set to the rising expectation flag in the setting value update process (FIG. 205). Therefore, by checking the display contents of the special figure display section 37a when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not a set value that is higher than the advantage of the previous set value has been set. becomes possible.

In addition, although initial display data for special figures that are common to each of the first display distribution table 391 for special figures and the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is set, It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is initial display data for special symbols that is set in one of the first display distribution table 391 and the second display distribution table 392 for special symbols and not in the other. In this case, if the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for special figures that is set only in the first display distribution table 391 for special figures is executed in the special figure display section 37a, the settings up to that point It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantageous value has not been set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for a special figure set only in the second display distribution table 392 for special figures is executed in the special figure display section 37a, the settings up to that point are It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is higher than the advantage of the value has been set.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to a case where the initial display data for the ordinary map that can be selected when referring to the first display allocation table 393 for ordinary maps and the initial display data for the ordinary map that can be selected when referring to the second display allocation table 394 for ordinary maps are completely consistent, and the initial display data for the ordinary map set in the first display allocation table 393 for ordinary maps and the initial display data for the ordinary map set in the second display allocation table 394 for ordinary maps may not completely match. In this case, the display content of the ordinary map display unit 38a will clearly differ depending on whether the increase expectation flag is set to "1" in the setting value update process (Figure 205). Therefore, by checking the display content of the ordinary map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to clearly identify whether a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value has been set.

Furthermore, although common initial display data for ordinary figures is set for each of the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures, The configuration may be such that there is initial display data for ordinary figures that is set in one of the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures and the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures and not set in the other. In this case, if the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for ordinary figures set only in the first display distribution table 393 for ordinary figures is executed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the previous settings It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is equal to or higher than the advantageous value has not been set. On the other hand, when the initial display corresponding to the initial display data for ordinary figures set only in the second display distribution table 394 for ordinary figures is executed in the ordinary figure display section 38a, the previous settings It becomes possible to specify that a set value that is higher than the advantage of the value has been set.

In addition, the initial display data for the special figure is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and the initial display data for the special figure selected when the rising expectation flag is set to 1 is 1. In addition to only one type, there is only one type of initial display data for the special figure selected when the rising expectation flag is not set to "1", and furthermore, the initial display data for each special figure is different. A configuration may also be used. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a will differ depending on whether or not a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set.

In addition, the initial display data for ordinary figures is not limited to the configuration determined by lottery, and the initial display data for ordinary figures selected when the rising expectation flag is set to ``1'' is 1. In addition to only one type, only one type of initial display data for common figures is selected when the rise expectation flag is not set to "1", and furthermore, the initial display data for each common figure is different. A configuration may also be used. In this case, the display contents of the ordinary map display section 38a will differ depending on whether or not a setting value that is higher than the advantage of the previous setting value is set.

<63rd embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is restarted are different from the above-mentioned 62nd embodiment. The configuration that is different from the sixty-second embodiment described above will be described below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixty-second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing display start processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the processes from step SD501 to step SD514 in the display start process are executed using a specific control program and specific control data in the main CPU 63.

If the initial display flag 375 is not set to "1" (step SD501: NO), a lottery process for initial display is executed (step SD502). In the initial display lottery process, the same processes as steps SD402 to SD411 of the display start process (FIG. 206) in the sixty-second embodiment are executed. As a result, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process of the setting value update process is executed, the display of the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is started in the same manner as in the 62nd embodiment. Initial display is performed in case. Thereafter, the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD503).

If the initial display flag 375 is set to "1" (step SD501: YES), information indicating whether a game round is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored. By referring to the storage area where the game is played, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped during the execution of the game round (step SD504). In the storage area, information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is started is stored, and information indicating that the game session is being executed when the game session is ended is stored in the memory area. be removed from the area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, the operating power is It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power has been stopped (step SD505). The storage area stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Information is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when the power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of a game round nor during the execution of the open/close execution mode (step SD504 and step SD505: NO), the first display allocation table 391 for special figures is read from the main ROM 64 (step SD506). Then, a lottery process for the initial display data for special figures is executed (step SD507). In the lottery process for the initial display data for special figures, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 381 for special figures is acquired. Then, the acquired numerical information is compared with the first display allocation table 391 for special figures read from the main ROM 64 in step SD506, and the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for special figures, the second initial display data for special figures, and the third initial display data for special figures.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271 (step SD508). The display data stored in the first display data buffer 271 is used to control the display of the special chart display unit 37a, and an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the special chart display unit 37a. In other words, when the first initial display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the first initial display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, when the second initial display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the second initial display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a, and when the third initial display data for the special chart is set in the first display data buffer 271, the third initial display for the special chart is performed in the special chart display unit 37a.

On the other hand, if the supply of operating power was last stopped during either a game round or the opening/closing execution mode (step SD504 or step SD505: YES), the initial display data for the special chart is not set in the first display data buffer 271, and the display data stored before the supply of operating power was stopped remains stored in the first display data buffer 271. Therefore, when display on the special chart display unit 37a is started, the display content of the special chart display unit 37a immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped is resumed as is.

If a positive judgment is made in step SD504, if a positive judgment is made in step SD505, or if the processing of step SD508 is executed, by referring to a memory area in which information indicating whether the normal map display unit 38a is displaying changes in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is determined whether the supply of operating power has been resumed after the supply of operating power was stopped during the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a (step SD509). When the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is started, information indicating that the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is being executed is stored in the memory area, and when the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is ended, information indicating that the display of changes in the pattern in the normal map display unit 38a is being executed is erased from the memory area. The information in this memory area is stored and maintained even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, as long as backup power is being supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and is stored and maintained if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed.

In addition, by referring to the storage area in which information indicating whether or not the general power open state is being executed in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is stored, it is possible to It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped (step SD510). This storage area stores information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is started, and information indicating that the general power open state is being executed when the general power open state is ended. Information indicating that there is is erased from the storage area. Even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the information in the storage area is stored and retained as long as backup power is supplied to the work area 221 for specific control, and the information in the main CPU 63 is maintained. If the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process are not executed when power supply is resumed, the memory is retained.

If the last time the supply of operating power was stopped was neither during the execution of the variable display of the image in the normal map display unit 38a nor during the execution of the normal power open state (step SD509 and step SD510: NO), the first display allocation table 393 for normal maps is read from the main ROM 64 (step SD511). Then, a lottery process for the initial display data for normal maps is executed (step SD512). In the lottery process for the initial display data for normal maps, the current numerical information of the initial display counter 382 for normal maps is obtained. Then, the obtained numerical information is compared with the first display allocation table 393 for normal maps read from the main ROM 64 in step SD511, and the display data to be displayed this time is selected from the first initial display data for normal maps, the second initial display data for normal maps, and the third initial display data for normal maps.

The display data selected in the lottery process for the initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273 (step SD513). The display data stored in the third display data buffer 273 is used to control the display of the ordinary map display unit 38a, and an initial display corresponding to the display data is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a. In other words, when the first initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the first initial display for the ordinary map is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a, when the second initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the second initial display for the ordinary map is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a, and when the third initial display data for the ordinary map is set in the third display data buffer 273, the third initial display for the ordinary map is performed in the ordinary map display unit 38a.

On the other hand, if the previous time when the supply of operating power was stopped was either during the execution of the fluctuating display of the picture on the general figure display section 38a or during the execution of the general power open state (step SD509 or step SD510: YES), Since the initial display data for ordinary figures is not set in the third display data buffer 273, the display data stored before the supply of operating power is stopped is stored as is in the third display data buffer 273. . Therefore, when the display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped will be resumed as they are.

When the processing of step SD503 is executed, when a positive judgment is made in step SD509, when a positive judgment is made in step SD510, or when the processing of step SD513 is executed, the display start flag provided in the clear target area 371 of the work area 221 for specific control is set to "1" (step SD514). As in the 55th embodiment, the display start flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not to start display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b. When the value of the display start flag is "0", the main CPU 63 does not control the display of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b, and when the display start flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 starts display control of the special map display unit 37a, the special map reserved display unit 37b, the ordinary map display unit 38a, and the ordinary map reserved display unit 38b.

As in the fifty-fifth embodiment, the display start flag is cleared to "0" in step SC204 of the main process (FIG. 185). This processing timing is after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started. The timing is earlier than the timing at which the second timer interrupt process (FIG. 188) for executing display control of the notification display devices 201 to 204 is executed for the first time. Then, the display start flag is set to "1" in the display start process (FIG. 202) that is executed after the process at the start of supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed. As a result, immediately after the supply of operating power is resumed, the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b are maintained in the off state, and the supply of operating power is maintained. After the processing at the start (steps SC201 to SC223) is completed, display control of the special figure display section 37a, the special figure reservation display section 37b, the regular symbol display section 38a, and the ordinary symbol reservation display section 38b is started.

In particular, in the display start process (FIG. 202), even if both the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 185), the first display data buffer 271 is In addition to setting initial display data for special figures, initial display data for regular figures may be set in the third display data buffer 273. In this case, if display control of the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section 38a is started immediately after the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is started, then the special figure display section 37a and the ordinary figure display section The initial display will start immediately after the display contents immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped at step 38a. On the other hand, when display data is set in the first display data buffer 271 and third display data buffer 273 in the display start process (FIG. 208), the display start flag is set after the process for setting the display data is completed. is set to "1" and the display of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a is started. This makes it possible to prevent the display content from changing as described above.

According to the above configuration, even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of a game round nor during the execution of the open/close execution mode, the initial display is started in the special chart display unit 37a when display is started in the special chart display unit 37a. Also, even if the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), if the situation in which the supply of operating power is stopped is neither during the execution of the variable display of the picture in the normal chart display unit 38a nor during the execution of the normal power open state, the initial display is started in the normal chart display unit 38a when display is started in the normal chart display unit 38a. As already explained, even if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the initial display is performed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process from being identified, even if it is confirmed that the initial display is being performed on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a when the supply of operating power starts.

In addition, when the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process of the setting value update process are not executed and the initial display is performed on the special chart display unit 37a and the normal chart display unit 38a, the first display allocation table 391 for special charts and the first display allocation table 393 for normal charts are referenced during the lottery process of the initial display data. This makes it possible to refer to the second display allocation table 392 for special charts and the second display allocation table 394 for normal charts during the lottery process of the initial display data only when the setting value update process (FIG. 205) is executed and a new setting value is set that is equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value. Therefore, even if it is configured such that it is not possible to specify that either the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process has been executed as described above, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not a new setting value equal to or higher than the advantage of the previous setting value has been set by checking the contents of the initial display when the supply of operating power is started and the display of the special chart display unit 37a and the normal chart display unit 38a is started.

On the other hand, if the supply of operating power is stopped during either the execution of a game round or the execution of an open/close execution mode, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display of the special chart display unit 37a is controlled so that when display is started on the special chart display unit 37a, the display content is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. Also, if the supply of operating power is stopped during either the execution of the variable display of the image on the normal chart display unit 38a or the execution of the normal power open state, and the first RAM clear process and the second RAM clear process are not executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power (steps SC201 to SC223), the display of the normal chart display unit 38a is controlled so that when display is started on the normal chart display unit 38a, the display content is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, if the supply of operating power is resumed and the game status immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped is resumed, it is possible to start displaying the special chart display section 37a and the regular chart display section 38a in a manner that corresponds to the resumption of the game status.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs per unit game is calculated as a parameter indicating the frequency of the open/close execution mode. However, in addition to or instead of this, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs may be calculated by dividing the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs by the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA. In addition to or instead of this, the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs may be calculated by dividing the number of times the open/close execution mode occurs by the total number of balls that enter the first actuation port 33 and the second actuation port 34. This configuration may also be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments.

(2) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the parameters indicating the frequency of occurrence of the high-frequency support mode are the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode per unit game and the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition to or in place of this, the configuration may be configured to calculate the result of dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA. good. In addition to or in place of this, the result is calculated by dividing the number of occurrences of the high-frequency support mode by the total number of balls entering the first operating port 33 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34. It may also be a configuration. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(3) The game result that triggers the opening and closing execution mode may include not only a big win result but also a small win result. When a small win result occurs, the opening and closing execution mode occurs, but the win/lose selection mode and the support mode do not change before and after the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, the opening and closing execution mode that results in a small win may be configured to be a low-frequency winning mode. In this case, when a big win result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the big win result may be stored in the history memory 117, and when a small win result occurs, history information corresponding to the occurrence of the small win result may be stored in the history memory 117. In addition, in this configuration, a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the big win result and a parameter indicating the occurrence frequency of the small win result may be calculated by using the history information stored in the history memory 117. In addition, this configuration may be applied to the above-mentioned 15th to 63rd embodiments.

The probability of winning a small win result may be configured to change depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, or may not change. When the probability of winning a small win result is configured to change depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning a small win result, or the higher the setting value, the lower the probability of winning a small win result.

In addition, in a configuration in which a small win result exists, the allocation ratio of the type of big win result in the case of a big win may be different between the reserved information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 and the reserved information acquired when the game ball enters the second operating port 34, and when aiming for the ball to enter the first operating port 33, a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the area in the game area PA to the left of the variable display unit 36, and when aiming for the ball to enter the second operating port 34, a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the area in the game area PA to the right of the variable display unit 36. Furthermore, a small win result may be generated based on the reserved information acquired when the game ball enters the first operating port 33.

In this configuration, the following 51st parameter may be present as a result of managing the game history. The normal period is the sum of the period during which the opening and closing execution mode is executed triggered by a small winning result based on the ball entering the first operating port 33 and the period during which the low-frequency support mode is executed instead of the opening and closing execution mode. The number of balls entering the out port 24a during the normal period is the number of balls entering K51, the number of balls entering the general winning port 31 during the normal period is the number of balls entering K52, the number of balls entering the special winning device 32 during the normal period is the number of balls entering K53, the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 during the normal period is the number of balls entering K54, and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 during the normal period is the number of balls entering K55.
・The 51st parameter: The total number of game balls paid out during the normal period (K52 x "Number of prize balls for winning the general winning port 31" + K53 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special winning device 32" + K54 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K55 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the play area PA during the normal period (K51 + K52 + K53 + K54 + K55). In the configuration in which the 51st parameter is calculated, if the probability of winning the small win varies depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter will vary depending on the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is erased when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed. On the other hand, if the probability of winning the small win result does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the normal value of the 51st parameter does not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the history information used to calculate the 51st parameter is not erased even if the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

(4) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the history memory 117 regardless of which type of jackpot result occurs. Therefore, history information corresponding to the type of jackpot result may be stored in the history memory 117. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a parameter indicating the frequency of occurrence is calculated for each type of jackpot result. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(5) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the various parameters (the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the forty-first to forty-second parameters) are periodically calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA reaches the calculation trigger number (e.g., 10,000 balls), when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, or when the number of game plays reaches the calculation trigger number (e.g., 1,000 times). In this case, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" when the various parameters are calculated. This configuration may also be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments.

(6) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, each time it is time to calculate various parameters, the first to eighth parameters, the eleventh to eighteenth parameters, the twenty-first to twenty-sixth parameters, the thirty-first parameter, and the Although the configuration is such that all of the 41st and 42nd parameters are calculated, the configuration is not limited to this, and only some of the various parameters mentioned above are subject to calculation at one calculation timing, and each time the calculation timing comes A configuration may also be adopted in which the parameter groups to be calculated are sequentially changed. For example, at one calculation timing, the 1st to 8th parameters are calculated, at the next calculation timing, the 11th to 18th parameters are calculated, at the next calculation timing, the 21st to 26th parameters are calculated, and then A configuration may be adopted in which the 31st parameter and the 41st to 42nd parameters are calculated at the timing, and thereafter, the change of the calculation target in the above order is repeated every time the calculation timing comes. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating parameters when one calculation timing is reached. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(7) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, calculations of various parameters using history information in the history memory 117 may be executed on the condition that a game is being played. For example, the configuration may be such that calculations of various parameters are executed on the condition that game balls are supplied to the game area PA. This makes it possible to prevent calculations of various parameters from being needlessly repeated even though no game is being played. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(8) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, the configuration is not limited to one in which a management IC 66 is provided separately from the main CPU 63, and the functions of the management IC 66 may be performed by the main CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence information is stored in advance in the main ROM 64. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a history memory 117, a calculation result memory 131, and a separate storage memory 171 are provided separately from the main RAM 65, and the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65. In a configuration in which the functions of the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 are performed in the main RAM 65, when the clear process (steps S105 and S117) of the main RAM 65 is performed, some or all of the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be cleared to "0", or the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 may be excluded from the targets of the "0" clear, and may be cleared to "0" when the corresponding clear conditions in each of the above embodiments are met. In addition, the manual operation contents for executing the clear process may be different between the areas corresponding to the history memory 117, the calculation result memory 131, and the separate storage memory 171 in the main RAM 65 and the other areas. In addition, the function of the management IC 66 may be performed by the audio and light emission control device 81.

(9) In the first to fourteenth embodiments described above, when a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10, the history information in the history memory 117 is stored and retained without being deleted; A configuration may also be adopted in which various parameters stored in the result memory 131 are deleted. Thereby, after a new setting of the setting state is performed, it is possible to prevent notification of various parameters calculated before the new setting is performed. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(10) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., even if the main CPU 63 executes a setting value update process), if the setting value has not changed before and after the setting, the process of clearing the history memory 117 may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the history information in the history memory 117 from being erased even if the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, even if the clear process (step S117) is executed on all areas in the main RAM 65 for storing the setting values, the areas are not cleared to "0", so that the main CPU 63 can determine whether the setting value has changed before and after the setting value update process (step S118). In this case, if the main CPU 63 determines that the setting value has not changed, it may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 does not execute the setting update recognition process, and if the main CPU 63 determines that the setting value has changed, it may output a signal to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 executes the setting update recognition process.

In addition, when a signal indicating that a new setting has been made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 may be configured to determine whether or not the setting value has been changed by referring to the history information stored in the history memory 117. In this case, if the management CPU 112 determines that the setting value has not been changed, it is possible to not execute the process of clearing the history memory 117, and to execute the process of clearing the history memory 117 when the management CPU 112 determines that the setting value has been changed.

(11) In the third to fifth embodiments described above, even if a new setting is made to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., even if the main CPU 63 executes a setting value update process), if the setting value has not changed before and after the setting, the calculation process of various parameters triggered by the new setting of the setting state may not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated in response to the new setting of the setting state even if the setting value has not been changed.

In this configuration, the area for storing setting values in the main side RAM 65 is configured so that it is not cleared to "0" even if the entire clearing process (step S117) is executed, so that the setting value update process ( It becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to specify whether the set value has been changed before or after step S118). In this case, if the main CPU 63 identifies that the setting value has not been changed, a signal is output to the management CPU 112 so that the setting update recognition process is not executed in the management CPU 112, and the main CPU 63 If it is determined that the setting value has been changed, a signal may be output to the management CPU 112 so that the management CPU 112 executes a setting update recognition process.

Furthermore, when a signal indicating that a new setting of the pachinko machine 10 has been set is received from the main CPU 63, the management CPU 112 can refer to the history information stored in the history memory 117. It may be configured to specify whether or not the setting value has been changed. In this case, if the management CPU 112 determines that the setting values have not been changed, calculations of various parameters triggered by new settings in the current setting state are not executed, and the management CPU 112 When it is determined that a value has been changed, calculations of various parameters can be executed using the new setting of the current setting state as a trigger.

(12) In the third to fifth embodiments, when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, various parameters are not calculated in the various calculation processes (step S1807) at that time, but the various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are stored in the area to be stored among the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171, and the information stored in the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0". In this case, since there is no need to calculate various parameters when a new setting of the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is made, it is possible to quickly complete the storage of various parameters in the separate storage memory 171.

(13) In the third to fifth embodiments, the contents of the various parameters stored in the first to fifth separate storage areas 172 to 176 of the separate storage memory 171 may be configured to be displayed on the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c or other display devices by performing a specified display start operation. The specified display start operation may be performed by operating a dedicated operation unit, or a predetermined dedicated operation may be performed on an operation unit for performing other operations. This makes it possible to easily check the various parameters stored in the separate storage memory 171.

(14) The out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history), but this The structure is not limited to, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are subject to storage of history information. You can also use it as For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storing historical information, or a configuration in which only the general winning opening 31 is subject to storing historical information may be adopted. It's good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball during a predetermined period with respect to the ball entry part for which the history information is stored.

(15) Signal paths 118a-118c are set to transmit information corresponding to the ball's entry results for the first entry port detection sensor 42a, the second entry port detection sensor 43a, and the third entry port detection sensor 44a, respectively. However, this is not limited to this, and information corresponding to the ball entry results for the same type of entry port may be transmitted as one type of information even if there are multiple ball entry ports of the same type and multiple ball entry detection sensors corresponding to them. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(16) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, this is not limited to the above, and the correspondence information may be pre-stored in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute a process to cause the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and therefore it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(17) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be capable of two-way communication, and the correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting the transmission of the correspondence information is received from the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(18) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each of the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a. However, this is not limited to this, and a dedicated signal path may be provided for transmitting the correspondence information from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This allows the management IC 66 to determine what type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 based on the type of buffer 122a to 122o that receives the information.

(19) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may directly execute notification control of the notification means so that a notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received is performed, or the main CPU 63 may transmit a command corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received to the audio and light-emitting control device 81, so that a notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters is performed using the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54.

(20) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 is activated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. Various parameters may be calculated, and the contents of the calculated various parameters may be notified using the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, etc. In this case, when the gaming hall starts business, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry state of game balls in the gaming area PA on the previous business day was normal. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(21) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the first to fourteenth embodiments are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game cannot be started at . As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is prohibited, a configuration in which each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and a configuration in which the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the win/fail determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the reset button 68c is pressed, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. It is also possible to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner. Further, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is abnormal. Further, the configuration may be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments described above.

(22) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information may not be performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. In this case, the history information may be read by an external device electrically connected to the reading terminal 68d, and the calculation of various parameters using the read history information may be performed by the operator performing the reading operation, or the calculation of various parameters using the read history information may be performed in the external device. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112. This configuration may also be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments.

(23) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is provided with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 The configuration may be such that it is possible to calculate various parameters using history information and to output information on history information or various parameters. Thereby, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it becomes possible to read history information and various parameters with an external device.

(24) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the read terminal 68d used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is configured to also be used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters by an external device, but this is not limited to the above, and the terminal used to read history information or various parameters by an external device may be provided separately from the read terminal 68d for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used to read history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62, or may be provided in a position on the main control board 61 separate from the MPU 62.

(25) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 are not limited to being provided as non-volatile storage means such as flash memory. For example, any of the memories 116, 117, and 131 may be provided as volatile storage means that require a supply of power to store and hold information, and backup power may be supplied to the memory so that information can be stored and held even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, or backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply and launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65.

(26) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and performs storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113, and a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. Also, in the sixth embodiment, for example, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the counter value corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is incremented by one. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using the history information at that time. Furthermore, when a trigger for external output to the read terminal 68d occurs, the hardware circuit outputs the various parameters that are the calculation results to the outside, as well as the history information to the outside.

(27) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be configured as separate chips, as separate boards, or as separate control devices.

(28) Regarding the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the number of balls entered is counted, while the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 A configuration may be adopted in which history information including RTC information is stored regarding the entry of balls into the bonus opportunity entry section that triggers the payout of prize balls and the judgment process. As a result, it is possible to extract the history of the entry of game balls into the bonus-opportunity ball entry section, and to calculate the frequency of entry of game balls into each bonus-opportunity ball entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined event that triggers the storage of history information includes events other than those in the above embodiments. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a becomes full, the timing at which the full state starts, and the timing at which the full state is canceled is stored as history information. The structure may be such that at least one of the fact that the no-ball state has been reached, the timing at which the no-ball state is started, and the timing at which the no-ball state is canceled is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. In particular, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 is released is stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(30) In the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 can recognize that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. You can also use it as Furthermore, in the first embodiment, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 15th buffer 122o of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the setting value update signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the fifteenth buffer 122o corresponds to the setting value update signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, there is no need to previously set in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(31) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when the management IC 66 is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(32) The display device that displays the setting values being updated in the setting value update process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the pattern display device 41 or a dedicated display device. Also, the display device that displays the setting values in the setting confirmation process is not limited to the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, and may be the pattern display device 41 or a dedicated display device.

(33) The operation unit operated to update the setting value in the setting value update process is not limited to the update button 68b, and may be the reset button 68c. Further, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 68a and a turning operation is performed, positions corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are set as the rotation operation positions, and the setting key is inserted. A configuration may be adopted in which a setting value corresponding to the rotation operation position of the portion 68a is set. In addition, the setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time a rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. The configuration may be updated.

(34) In the above first to tenth and fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c are arranged side by side, but they may be arranged side by side vertically, diagonally, or in two rows, one above the other. In the above eleventh to fourteenth and twenty-second to sixty-third embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are arranged side by side, but they may be arranged side by side vertically, diagonally, or in two rows, one above the other. In the above fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be used as display devices for displaying the results of game history management.

(35) In the first to fourteenth embodiments, the history information used to calculate parameters whose normal values change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the history information of the change object) and the history information used to calculate parameters whose normal values do not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as the history information of the non-change object) may be stored in different areas in the history memory 117. In this case, when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the area in the history memory 117 in which the history information of the change object is stored may be cleared to "0", while the area in the history memory 117 in which the history information of the non-change object is stored may not be cleared to "0". This allows accurate calculation of parameters whose normal values change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 even after the setting value is changed, and the accuracy of calculation of parameters whose normal values do not change according to the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. This configuration may also be applied to the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments.

(36) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments, the stack area 222 for specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may not be specified in advance in the main RAM 65. Even in this case, areas corresponding to these stack areas 222 and 224 will be designated as the main RAM 65 at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, but if the area is designated in excess of the storage capacity of the area. When the information storage process is executed, information that is not originally planned will be written in an area that is not originally planned, so the configuration may be such that the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0".

(37) In the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments described above, when the main side RAM 65 clearing process (step S105, step S117) is executed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are The work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to 0, but the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are not cleared to 0. In step S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". . In addition, in the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 (steps S105 and S117), not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the normal counter area 231, the counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, and the high frequency Although the support mode counter area 233 is cleared to "0", the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, it becomes possible to protect the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

(38) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, the operation for clearing the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control to “0” and the work area 223 for non-specific control and the The configuration may be such that the operation for clearing the specific control stack area 224 to "0" is a different operation. For example, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are cleared to "0", and the update button 68b is pressed. When the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while the pachinko machine 10 is being operated, the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to selectively erase each piece of information. In addition, in this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while operating both the update button 68b and the reset button 68c, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control , the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to improve work efficiency when erasing information in each area 221 to 224 all at once in the configuration that allows selective erasure as described above.

(39) In the fifteenth to eighteenth and twentieth embodiments, as in the nineteenth embodiment, when starting the process corresponding to non-specific control, the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is set to the workpiece for non-specific control. The information may be saved to the area 223 and the saved information may be returned to the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 when returning to the process corresponding to the specific control. As a result, even if the information on the stack pointer of the main CPU 63 is variable when the process corresponding to non-specific control is started, when the process corresponding to non-specific control is finished, the main CPU 63 It becomes possible to restore the state of the stack pointer of the CPU 63 to the state before the processing corresponding to the non-specific control was started.

(40) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, processing for collecting gaming history information as processing corresponding to non-specific control, processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and The configuration is such that processing for notifying calculation results is executed, but only part of these processes is executed as processing corresponding to non-specific control, and the rest is executed as processing corresponding to specific control. You can also use it as Additionally, in addition to or in place of the processing for collecting game history information, the processing for calculating various parameters using the collected history information, and the processing for notifying the calculation results, processing other than these processing may be performed. The configuration may be such that the process is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of fraud monitoring and notification of monitoring results is executed as a process corresponding to non-specific control.

(41) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the main CPU 63 returns to the process corresponding to specific control from the situation where the process corresponding to non-specific control is being executed, the flag register of the main CPU 63, Although the configuration is such that neither the stack pointer nor the various registers are saved to the main side RAM 65, instead of this, the main side CPU 63 can switch from a situation in which a process corresponding to non-specific control is being executed to a process corresponding to specific control. When returning, at least some information among the flag register, stack pointer, and various registers of the main CPU 63 is saved to the main RAM 65, and the process corresponding to the non-specific control is started again using the saved information. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the data is returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to carry over and use the information of the main CPU 63 used in processing corresponding to non-specific control.

(42) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments described above, various parameters are calculated when the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area reaches 6000. The total number of game balls may be more or less than 6000. For example, various parameters may be calculated when the total number of game balls ejected from the game area reaches 60,000. In this case, the storage capacity required to store the game history information will increase, but as in the twenty-first embodiment, the game history information is stored in the management RAM 241 externally attached to the MPU 62. By having a storage configuration, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to an increase in the storage capacity.

(43) In the above fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, the 61st to 68th parameters are calculated as the result of managing the game history. In addition to or instead of this, at least some of the 31st, 41st, and 42nd parameters in the first embodiment may be calculated.

(44) In the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control In addition, not only the stack area 222 for specific control, but also the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be cleared to "0". In this case, when a process to newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, the high frequency The support mode counter area 233 and the calculation result storage area 234 are cleared to "0".

In addition, when a process for newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, not only the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control but also the normal counter area 231, the counter area for opening/closing execution mode 232, and the counter area for high frequency support mode 233 are cleared to "0", but the calculation result storage area 234 may not be cleared to "0". In this case, it is possible to protect the information stored in the calculation result storage area 234.

In addition, when a process to newly set the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control are set to "0". ''Although the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to ``0'', the configuration may be such that they are not cleared. In this case, it becomes possible to protect the information stored in the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control.

In addition, when the above configuration (43) is provided, when the process of newly setting the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed or when the setting state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the above-mentioned first Although the history information for calculating the 31st parameter, 41st parameter, and 42nd parameter in the embodiment is deleted, the normal counter area 231, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 232, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 233 And the calculation result storage area 234 may be configured not to be cleared to "0".

(45) In the first to sixty-third embodiments described above, instead of using the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA to calculate various parameters, the total number of game balls supplied to the game area PA may be used. In this case, for example, a detection sensor may be provided to detect game balls that have been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and reached the game area PA, and the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA may be measured based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In this configuration, since it is not necessary to measure the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 24a, the outlet detection sensor 48a may not be provided.

(46) In the fifteenth to sixty-third embodiments, at least part of the information of various registers and stack pointers of the main CPU 63 is stored in the stack area 222 for specific control or the stack area 224 for non-specific control. It may also be configured to be saved by a load command. In this case, when saving information to the stack areas 222 and 224, it is necessary to update the information of the stack pointer of the main CPU 63. Alternatively, the information saved in the stack areas 222 and 224 may be returned to the corresponding storage area of the main CPU 63 by a load command. In this case as well, when information is returned from the stack areas 222 and 224, it is necessary to update the information in the stack pointer of the main CPU 63.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting value update process is being executed, a corresponding notification may be issued by any of the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to clearly understand that the setting value update process is being executed.

(48) In each of the embodiments described above, a history of new setting values may be stored in the main RAM 65. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a history of new setting values is stored in a RAM provided in the audio emission control device 81. In this case, each time the setting value update process is completed, a command including information on the setting value set in the setting value update process is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the audio light emission control device 81, and the voice emission control device 81 is configured to cumulatively store information indicating that a setting value has been newly set and information indicating the setting value at that time in the RAM of the audio emission control device 81 each time the command is received. In this configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed, the setting history of the setting values cumulatively stored in the RAM of the sound emission control device 81 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

(49) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting value is newly set in the setting value update process, the information indicating the number of game balls to be put out stored in the payout control device 77 is not deleted. However, instead of this, the information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out may be deleted. In addition, if the setting value update process is executed but the setting value is not changed, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out will not be deleted, and if the setting value is changed, the information indicating the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out will not be deleted. The information indicating the number of game balls may be deleted.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, if the setting value update process is executed but the setting value is not changed, each area 221 to 224 of the main side RAM 65 will not be cleared to "0" and the setting value will be changed. When changed, at least a portion of each area 221 to 224 of the main side RAM 65 may be cleared to "0". For example, when a setting value is changed, areas other than the setting value counter in the specific control work area 221 may be cleared to "0".

(51) In the above 22nd to 63rd embodiments, the configuration may be such that the movement of the movable object related to the profit of the game continues even in a situation where the main CPU 63 is executing a process for confirming the setting value in the setting confirmation process (FIG. 87). For example, in a configuration in which a V zone and a non-V zone are provided in the ball entry means that allows balls to enter in the open/close execution mode, and a distribution member that distributes game balls that have entered the ball entry means to either the V zone or the non-V zone is provided, the configuration may be such that the operation of the distribution member continues even in a situation where the process for confirming the setting value is being executed in the setting confirmation process. In this case, it is possible to make it impossible to fraudulently create a situation in which the process for confirming the setting value is executed in the setting confirmation process and stop the operation of the distribution member. In addition to the above-mentioned distribution member, a movable object that continues to operate even when the process for confirming the setting value is being executed in the setting confirmation process can be a distribution member that distributes game balls to either an advantageous opening, which will result in a round of play being generated when a game ball enters the ball entry means, or an outlet, which will discharge a game ball that has entered the ball entry means without allowing it to enter the advantageous opening.

(52) In the above-mentioned 22nd to 63rd embodiments, at least one of the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may be configured not to be monitored for information abnormalities. In this case, even if it is determined that an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control and the stack area 222 for specific control, by configuring the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control not to be cleared to "0", it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the work area 223 for non-specific control and the stack area 224 for non-specific control are cleared to "0" based on the occurrence of an information abnormality.

(53) In the above-mentioned 22nd to 63rd embodiments, the monitoring of whether or not an information abnormality has occurred in the work area 221 for specific control, the stack area 222 for specific control, the work area 223 for non-specific control, and the stack area 224 for non-specific control may all be configured to be executed by processing corresponding to non-specific control. Also, the processing for clearing each of the areas 221 to 224 to "0" when an information abnormality has occurred may all be configured to be executed by processing corresponding to non-specific control.

(54) In each of the above embodiments, the main RAM 65 requires a power supply to store and retain information, and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. However, the main RAM 65 may be configured as a non-volatile memory that does not require a power supply to store and retain information.

(55) In each of the above embodiments, in the various clearing processes of the main side RAM 65, the target area of the main side RAM 65 is initialized by executing a process of clearing it to "0" and a process of initializing it. Alternatively, the target area may be initialized by performing an initial setting process without performing a "0" clearing process.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, if the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value update process is executed without requiring any other operation. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Furthermore, instead of the setting key insertion section 68a that is turned on and off by a setting key, a setting switch that can be turned on and off directly by hand may be provided. Further, if the setting key insertion part 68a is not provided and the reset button 68c is pressed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the setting value is reset without requiring any other operation. A configuration may also be used in which update processing is executed. In this case, a structure may be provided in which a cover member is provided so that the reset button 68c can be switched between a closed state that covers it and an open state that does not cover it, and a locking device that locks this cover member in the closed state position. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(57) In the setting value update process, if the setting key insertion section 68a is held in the OFF position for a predetermined period of time, the selected setting value may be confirmed and the setting value update process may be terminated. In addition, if a termination reference period (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since the setting value update process was started, the selected setting value may be automatically confirmed and the setting value update process may be terminated. In addition, in the setting value update process, if the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed and held for a period of time equal to or longer than the termination reference period (e.g., 10 seconds), the selected setting value may be confirmed and the setting value update process may be terminated.

(58) The setting key insertion part 68a is configured to be able to be rotated further than the ON position, and each time the rotation operation beyond the ON position is performed, the setting value in the middle of updating is changed to the setting value in the next order. In the configuration updated to , when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the setting key insertion part 68a is operated to the ON position, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started. The setting confirmation process may be terminated when the setting key insertion section 68a is operated to the OFF position. In addition, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started in a situation where the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is pressed, a setting confirmation process that allows confirmation of the setting value is started, and the button is pressed. The setting confirmation process may be configured to end when the pressing operation is released. In addition, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly operated on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion part 68a that is operated on and off by the setting key, when the setting switch is turned on and off, the main When the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started, and when the setting switch is turned OFF or turned ON after the OFF operation. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting confirmation process is ended. In addition, in a configuration in which a setting switch that is directly operated on and off by hand is provided instead of the setting key insertion part 68a that is operated on and off by the setting key, when the setting switch is turned on and off, the main The configuration is such that when the supply of operating power to the side CPU 63 is started, a setting confirmation process that enables confirmation of the setting value is started, and when the reset button 68c is pressed, the setting confirmation process is ended. Good too.

(59) In each of the above embodiments, when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is executed, an image corresponding to the procedure may be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and a sound corresponding to the procedure may be output from the speaker unit 54 to assist the process. For example, in the setting value update process in the above-mentioned 33rd embodiment, the reset button 68c may be pressed to notify that the setting value is changed by one step, and the setting key insertion unit 68a may be turned OFF to notify that the setting value update process is terminated. This makes it easier to update the setting value. Note that the display control of the pattern display device 41 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound emission control device 81, so that when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is started, a corresponding command is transmitted from the main CPU 63, and when the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is terminated, a corresponding command is transmitted from the main CPU 63.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, the check display of the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to continue until an operation for terminating the check display is performed, rather than being terminated when the initial check period has elapsed. The operation for terminating the check display may be, for example, the operation of the reset button 68c regardless of whether the setting confirmation process or the setting value update process is being performed, or an operation unit other than the reset button 68c. In this case, the check display is continued on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 until it is time to check the base value or the setting value on the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204, so that it is possible to check the base value or the setting value after checking whether the first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 are normal. In addition, since the check display is terminated based on the operation of the operation unit, it is possible to terminate the check display at a desired timing.

(61) In each of the above embodiments, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be configured to start a check display when a predetermined operation unit such as the update button 68b or the reset button 68c is operated regardless of whether the supply of operating power has started. In this case, it is possible to start the check display at a desired timing when checking the base value or the set value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be ended when a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed, or the check display may be ended when the above-mentioned predetermined operation unit operated to start the check display or another operation unit is operated.

(62) In each of the above embodiments, if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started while a specific operation unit other than the reset button 68c, such as the update button 68b, is operated, the first to fourth notification A configuration may also be adopted in which the check display on the display devices 201 to 204 is started, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started without any operation of the specific operation unit, the check display is not started. . In this case, in a configuration in which the check display is performed upon the start of the supply of operating power, it becomes possible to select whether or not to start the check display by the operation of the manager of the gaming hall.

(63) In each of the above embodiments, the base value is not displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 regardless of whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state; 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, the base value may be displayed on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start checking display, and then the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 start displaying for checking. The base value may be displayed in step 204. This makes it possible to check whether the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are normal before checking the base value. In addition, in this configuration, the check display may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the check display may be terminated using the above-mentioned predetermined operation section operated to start the check display or a separate operation section. The check display may be configured to end when the operation unit is operated.

(64) In each of the above embodiments, if the main process is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process are satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main process is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process are not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed when it is determined that the setting value will be confirmed.

(65) In each of the above embodiments, if the main processing is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting value update processing are satisfied, the check display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may not be started, and if the main processing is started in a state where the conditions for executing the setting value update processing are not satisfied, the check display may be started. In this case, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed when it is confirmed that the setting value will be updated.

(66) In each of the above embodiments, if the main process is started with either the conditions for executing the setting confirmation process or the conditions for executing the setting value update process, the first to fourth notifications are sent. If the main processing is started without the checking display of the display devices 201 to 204 starting and the conditions for executing the setting confirmation processing and the conditions for executing the setting value update processing are not satisfied. may be configured such that a check display is started. In this case, if it is certain that the set value will be confirmed or updated, it is possible to prevent the check display from being displayed.

(67) In each of the above embodiments, in the check display, each display segment 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 is not maintained in a light emitting state, but the first to fourth Each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the notification display devices 201 to 204 may be in a blinking state. In addition, in the check display, each of the display segments 321 to 324 in each of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 becomes a light emitting state one by one or a plurality of segments one by one, and within the range of the initial check period. Each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be configured to be in a light emitting state at least once.

(68) In each of the above embodiments, the process of causing the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 to display a check display may be configured to be executed as a process corresponding to a non-specific control, rather than as a process corresponding to a specific control.

(69) In each of the above embodiments, the display control of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 may be performed not by the main CPU 63 but by a dedicated control means, and the sound emission control device 81 or a display control device 82 may be used. In this case, when displaying the base value on the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the base value to be notified is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control body, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 When setting values are displayed on the fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, the setting values to be notified are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control means that is the main control unit. In addition, when the main side CPU 63 executes the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power, the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 are Information corresponding to the start of the check display is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control means serving as the control entity so that the check display is started.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, if the power outage flag is not set to "1" or the checksums do not match, the game stop flag is set to "1" and the progress of the game is stopped. In the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a light emitting state in the same way as the check display, or each of the display segments 321 to 324 may be in a blinking state. good.

(71) In each of the above embodiments, the setting value update process may be executed not only when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, but also when a setting change trigger occurs after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. This makes it possible to eliminate the need to turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF and ON when starting the setting value update process.

(72) In each of the above embodiments, the “setting change operation” and the “setting confirmation operation” may have a reverse relationship. In other words, when the reset button 68c is pressed and the setting key insertion section 68a is turned on, it is determined that the "setting confirmation operation" is being performed, and when the reset button 68c is not pressed and the settings are set A configuration may be adopted in which it is specified that a "setting change operation" is being performed when the key insertion section 68a is turned on. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the "setting change operation" and the "setting confirmation operation" do not overlap at all.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, the setting value update process is started based on the start of the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 when the reset button 68c is pressed, and instead of changing the setting value of the selection target every time the reset button 68c is pressed in the setting value update process, the operation unit operated to start the setting value update process and the operation unit operated to change the setting value of the selection target in the setting value update process may not be the same.

(74) In the above-mentioned 49th to 63rd embodiments, the second RAM clear process is executed after the process of setting the information in the setting update area 342 in the setting reference area 341 in the setting value update process, i.e., the process of setting the setting value to be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second RAM clear process may be executed before the process of setting the setting value to be used. In this case, the second RAM clear process may be executed instead of performing the initial settings at the start of the setting value update process.

In addition, in the setting value update process, since both the initial setting at the start and the second RAM clearing process are not executed, even if the setting value to be used is set in the setting value update process, the area to be cleared 371 It is also possible to configure a configuration in which initialization is not performed. When this configuration is applied to the 55th to 63rd embodiments, when the "RAM clear operation" is performed and the first RAM clear process is executed, the clear target area 371 is initialized. , when the setting value update process is executed, the initialization of the area to be cleared 371 will not be executed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the above 56th embodiment, even if the setting value update process is executed, the initial display may be performed in the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a, A configuration may also be adopted in which the initial display is not performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the 57th to 58th embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a will display an error. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the error display is not performed. Further, when the above configuration is applied to the 59th to 60th embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a will not display a miss or a hit. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning display or the winning display is not performed. In addition, when the above configuration is applied to the 61st embodiment, even if the setting value update process is executed, each light emitting section of the special figure display section 37a and each light emitting section of the regular figure display section 38a will be lit. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery process is executed, or a configuration in which the lighting lottery process is not executed. Furthermore, when the above configuration is applied to the sixty-second to sixty-third embodiments, even if the setting value update process is executed, the initial display data lottery process (step SD405) in the display start process (FIGS. 206 and 208) , step SD410, step SD502) may be executed, or a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery processing of the initial display data (step SD405, step SD410, step SD502) is not executed.

(75) In the above-mentioned embodiments 49 to 63, instead of the configuration in which the display data for display on the special map display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 65 that requires a power supply to store and hold information, the display data may be stored in a memory that does not require a power supply to store and hold information and is used for both reading and writing. In this case, the display data stored in the memory may not be erased during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process, or the clear target area 371 may be initialized and the display data stored in the memory may be erased during the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process. This configuration may also be applied to the display data for display on the general map display unit 38a.

(76) In the above-mentioned 55th to 63rd embodiments, the reservation information on the special drawing side is obtained when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 and the information is obtained when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34. It is also possible to apply a configuration in which the reservation information on the special figure side that has been released is stored separately, and the reservation information on the second actuation port 34 side is digested with priority; A configuration may be applied in which the pending information on the 33 side is digested with priority, or a configuration in which the pending information on the 33 side is digested in the acquisition order regardless of whether it is the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 may be applied. Good too. Further, in the above configuration, instead of the plurality of operating ports being arranged vertically in parallel, a structure may be adopted in which the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are arranged in parallel on the left and right, and both of these operating ports may be arranged side by side. The openings may be arranged diagonally in parallel. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing operation device 28, the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged apart from each other so that a prize can be aimed only at the first operating port 33 or only at the second operating port 34. It may also be a configuration. In addition, when the pending information acquired due to the occurrence of a winning in the first operating port 33 is subject to the judgment of validity, and when the pending information obtained due to the occurrence of a winning in the second operating port 34 is A configuration may be adopted in which the profit obtained by the player differs depending on whether the game is subject to a determination of validity or failure.

In the above configuration, as the special figure display section 37a, there is a first special figure display section that displays the result of judgment on the validity of the reservation information acquired based on winnings in the first operation port 33, and a first special figure display section that displays the result of judgment on the validity of reservation information acquired based on winnings in the first operation port 33; It is also possible to separately provide a second special figure display section that displays the result of the determination of the validity of the reservation information acquired based on the winnings. In this case, prior to or based on the reservation information acquired based on winning the first operating port 33 becoming the target of the determination of success or failure, the first special symbol display section displays the picture. At the same time as the variable display starts, a stop result corresponding to the hit/fail determination is displayed, and the variable display for one game is ended. In addition, prior to or based on the reservation information acquired based on the winning to the second actuation port 34 becoming the subject of the judgment, the second special figure display section displays the picture. At the same time as the fluctuating display is started, a stop result corresponding to the hit/fail determination is displayed, and the fluctuating display for one game is ended.

In the configuration in which the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part are provided as described above, the special figure display part 37a when the supply of operating power is started in the fifty-fifth to sixty-third embodiments. The structure of the display contents may be applied to each of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part, or it may be applied only to one of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part. It's okay.

In addition, in the configuration in which the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part are separately provided as described above, one of the first special figure display part and the second special figure display part is used to display the changing pattern. A configuration may also be adopted in which when the target game round is being executed, the game round in which the other is the target of the variable display of symbols is not executed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a game round in which the first special figure display section is the object of variable display of symbols and a game round in which the second special figure display section is the object of variable display of symbols can be executed overlappingly. In this configuration where the game rounds can be executed overlappingly, as a result of the game rounds on the second special figure display section, the expected number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is higher than when the result is a jackpot. A configuration may also be adopted in which a small winning result is set in which the number of small winnings decreases, and the winning probability of the small winning result is set higher than that of a jackpot result. In this configuration, when the supply of operating power is stopped, there is a high possibility that a win display corresponding to either a jackpot result or a small win result will be displayed on the special figure display section 37a. Therefore, when the first RAM clearing process or the second RAM clearing process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the first to third out-of-range display data for the special figure and the It is preferable that any one of the first to third winning display data for special figures be selected.

(77) The characteristic display content configuration when the supply of operating power is started in the 55th to 63rd embodiments is applied to both the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. The configuration is not limited, and may be configured to be applied only to one of the special figure display section 37a and the regular figure display section 38a. For example, the configuration of characteristic display contents when the supply of operating power is started may be configured to be applied only to the special figure display section 37a, or may be configured to be applied only to the regular figure display section 38a. Good too.

(78) In the above-mentioned embodiments 55 to 63, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the display of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a is not started until the display start flag is set to "1". However, this is not limited to this, and the display start flag may be disabled, and when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the display on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a may be started. In this case, if the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process is executed when the supply of operating power is started, the display contents of the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a will be switched to the display corresponding to the execution of the first RAM clear process or the second RAM clear process after the display immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped is started on the special map display unit 37a and the ordinary map display unit 38a.

(79) Instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio/light emitting control device 81 based on a command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 may be configured to control the audio/light emitting control device 81 based on a command sent from the main control device 60. Also, instead of a configuration in which the audio/light emitting control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, the functions of one of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Also, the configuration of the command sent from the main control device 60 to the audio/light emitting control device 81 and the configuration of the command sent from the audio/light emitting control device 81 to the display control device 82 may be arbitrary.

(80) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, the result of the lottery process for the role executed when starting one game based on the operation of the start lever may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of winning for each role may be calculated using the history information. When a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it may be stored as history information, and the actual probability of transition to the special gaming state may be calculated using the history information. Alternatively, the ratio of the number of games stayed in the special gaming state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by an external device, or a notification corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be made by the gaming machine itself. In addition, a configuration may be made in which there are multiple setting states such as "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," and the winning probability in the lottery process for the role may be changed depending on the setting state. In this case, the configurations in the above embodiments may be applied to the handling of history information when the setting state is newly set or the setting value is changed, the calculation of various parameters, and the handling of repeated changes.

(81) The characteristic configurations of the first to sixty-third embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the thirtieth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the forty-fifth embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the fifty-fifth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fifty-fifth embodiment may be combined. A characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the eleventh embodiment, and a characteristic configuration of the thirty-third embodiment, The characteristic configuration of the forty-third embodiment described above and the characteristic configuration of the fifty-eighth embodiment described above may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment described above and the characteristic configuration of the fifteenth embodiment described above may be combined. a characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned 29th embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the above-mentioned 34th embodiment, and the above-mentioned 49th embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the above embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the sixtieth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment may be combined. a characteristic configuration of the twenty-second embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the thirty-fifth embodiment, a characteristic configuration of the thirty-ninth embodiment, and a characteristic configuration of the fifty-third embodiment. It is also possible to combine the characteristic configuration of Embodiment 1 with the characteristic configuration of the 62nd embodiment. Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixty-third embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the above-mentioned other embodiments may be applied in any combination.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a history storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of the game being played in a history storage means (a history memory 117);
an information erasing means for erasing at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means when at least one condition is that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means (a function for executing the process of step S1809 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2109 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 in the management CPU 112 in the sixth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2608 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, at least a portion of the history information stored in the history storage means is erased on at least one condition that a setting value to be used has been newly set. This makes it possible to adjust the contents of the history storage means so that the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be appropriately managed in the situation after a new setting of the setting value to be used is performed. .

Feature A2. A ball entry means (first actuation port 33, second actuation port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the master CPU 63) for awarding a bonus (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination that the special information corresponds to the bonus information,
A gaming machine as described in feature A1, characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result being obtained in the award judgment varies depending on the set value.

According to feature A2, in a so-called pachinko machine, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result depending on a set value. In this case, by having the configuration of feature A1 above, the history storage means can be used to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a situation after the probability of the assignment response result is changed. It becomes possible to adjust the content.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that the information erasing means erases all of the history information stored in the history storage means under at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means.

According to feature A3, when the setting value to be used is newly set, all history information stored in the history storage means is erased, making it possible to identify the frequency of occurrence of a specified event based on the timing when the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature A4. The information erasing means erases some of the history information stored in the history storage means, with at least one condition being that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that part of the history information stored in the history storage means is retained.

According to feature A4, when a new setting value to be used is set, it is possible to erase history information that is not necessary for managing the frequency of occurrence of a specified event thereafter, and to leave history information that is necessary for managing the frequency of occurrence of a specified event thereafter. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of a specified event after a new setting value to be used is set.

Feature A5. The history information stored in the history storage means includes first history information (history information indicating that an opening/closing execution mode has occurred) in which the occurrence probability of the predetermined event corresponding to the history information varies according to the set value, and second history information (history information indicating that a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA) in which the occurrence probability does not vary according to the set value,
The gaming machine described in feature A4, characterized in that the information erasing means erases the first history information stored in the history storage means and leaves the second history information stored in the history storage means, under at least one condition that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means.

According to feature A5, when a new setting value to be used is set, the first history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability varies according to the setting value is erased, and the second history information corresponding to a predetermined event whose occurrence probability does not vary according to the setting value is not erased. As a result, if the first history information before the setting value to be used is newly set is carried over after the setting value is newly set, the first history information that is not preferable for identifying the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the first history information can be erased when the setting value is newly set. On the other hand, by not erasing the second history information even if the setting value to be used is newly set, it is possible to secure a large number of second history information to be referenced when identifying the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information, and therefore it is possible to accurately identify the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event corresponding to the second history information.

Feature A6. A ball entry means (first actuation port 33, second actuation port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the master CPU 63) for awarding a bonus (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination that the special information corresponds to the bonus information,
The probability of the grant corresponding result being obtained in the grant determination varies depending on the set value,
the first history information includes information corresponding to the granting of the benefit,
The gaming machine described in feature A5, wherein the second history information includes information corresponding to the ejection of a gaming ball from the gaming area in a predetermined manner.

According to feature A6, the probability of awarding a bonus varies depending on the set value, so by erasing the first history information when a new set value to be used is set, it becomes possible to determine the frequency of awarding a bonus under the circumstances of the newly set set value. On the other hand, since the frequency with which game balls are discharged from the game area does not vary depending on the set value, by not erasing the second history information even when a new set value to be used is set, it becomes possible to accurately determine the frequency with which game balls are discharged from the game area in a predetermined manner.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A6, wherein the information erasing means erases at least a portion of the history information when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means and a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means.

According to feature A7, if the history storage means does not store a predetermined amount of predetermined history information, the history information is not erased even if a new setting value to be used is set. This makes it possible to prevent the history information from being repeatedly erased in the history storage means even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where play is not being performed.

Feature A8. With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information derivation means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

According to feature A8, having the configuration of feature A1 above, at least a part of the history information stored in the history storage means is stored on at least one condition that a new setting value to be used has been set. In the configuration to be deleted, a mode in which the history information stored in the history storage means is used to correspond to the gaming results in a predetermined period when a new setting value to be used is set. Information is derived. As a result, even if at least part of the history information is erased when the setting value is changed, it is possible to grasp the management results of gaming history such as the frequency of occurrence of specified events in the situation before the setting value was changed. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature A9, when a new set value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the set value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature A10. The gaming machine described in Feature A9, characterized in that the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of mode information.

According to feature A10, since it is possible to store multiple pieces of behavior information in the behavior information storage means, it is possible to grasp the results of managing the game history over multiple periods based on the timing at which the setting value was newly set. In addition, even if new setting of the setting value is repeatedly performed in a situation where no game is being played, it is possible to increase the likelihood that behavior information derived using history information of a situation where game play is actually being performed will remain in the behavior information storage means.

Feature A11. The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the aspect information,
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a means for executing special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs more than the specified number of times under specified conditions (in the third embodiment, a function for executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63), as described in feature A9 or A10.

According to feature A11, when new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, special processing is executed in order to prevent the behavior information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the behavior information storage means. This makes it possible to deal with such behavior.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A8 to A11, wherein the information deriving means derives the behavior information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means.

According to feature A12, mode information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, so it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived in vain. .

Feature A13. The information erasing means erases the history information from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means. If a specified amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, before the setting value is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted.

According to feature A13, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the setting is not stored before the setting is made. The history information that was previously saved will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made.

Feature A14. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means includes:
If the predetermined event occurs during a predetermined period from when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until the cancellation condition is met, the corresponding history information is stored in the first history storage means and A means for storing in both the second history storage means (a function for executing the process of step S2604 in the management CPU 112);
When the predetermined event occurs during a period other than the predetermined period, means for storing the corresponding history information in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as a storage target. (Function to execute the process of step S2603 in the management CPU 112);
Equipped with
The information erasing means erases the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that was previously set as the storage target when the cancellation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13.

According to feature A14, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored before the setting is made is not erased until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to identify the results of managing the game history for a specified period of time even if a new setting value is set. In addition, this effect can be achieved simply by appropriately changing the history storage means to store the history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature A15. Deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period by using the history information stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage target. The gaming machine according to feature A14, further comprising information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature A15, even in a situation where a new setting of the set value causes history information to be stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means, it is possible to appropriately derive behavior information using the history information.

In addition, for the configuration of features A1 to A15, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P20, features P2 to P30, features P4 to P50, features P6 to P70, features P8 to P90, features P10 to P110, features P11 to P120, features P12 to P130, features P13 to P140, features P14 to P150, features P15 to P160, features P16 to P170, features P17 to P190, features P20 to P220, features P21 to P230, features P22 to P240, features P23 to P250, features P24 to P260, features P25 to P270, features P26 to P280, features P27 to P300, features P31 to P320, features P32 to P330, features P31 to P340, features P31 to P350, features P31 to P360, features P31 to P370, features P31 to P380, features P31 to P390, features P41 to P420, features P41 to P430, features P41 to P440, features P41 to P450, features P41 to P460, features P41 to P470, features P41 to P480, features P41 to P490, features P51 to P520, features P51 to P530, features P51 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a history storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of the game being played in a history storage means (a history memory 117);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified history information stored in the history storage means before the setting value to be used is set by the setting means is stored and retained in the history storage means even after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to feature B1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is not erased but is retained. This makes it possible to continue storing the previous history information in the history storage means even if a new setting value to be used is set, and makes it possible to identify the results of game history management by using the history information accumulated in the history storage means over a long period of time.

Feature B2. When the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history storage execution means stores the corresponding history information in the history storage means (first storage execution means at the time of setting). In the embodiment, the game according to feature B1 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2408 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. Machine.

According to feature B2, in a configuration in which history information is not erased but is stored and maintained even when a new setting value to be used is set, history information corresponding to the new setting of the setting value to be used is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to distinguish between history information before the new setting value to be used is set and history information after it is set.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the setting storage execution means stores information corresponding to the set value as the history information in the history storage means when the set value to be used is set by the setting means.

According to feature B3, by referring to history information, it is possible to specify the contents of setting values set in the past.

Feature B4. The history storage means includes a plurality of correspondence history storage means (history memories 181 to 186 for settings 1 to 6) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to feature B4, since a correspondence history storage means is provided corresponding to each set value, it is possible to store history information separately for each set value.

Feature B5. A gaming machine according to Feature B4, characterized in that when the setting means sets the setting value to be used, the corresponding history storage means corresponding to the set setting value is set as the storage target for the history information thereafter (a function for executing the process of step S2406 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature B5, when a setting value to be used is newly set, the correspondence history storage means corresponding to that setting value is to be stored for subsequent history information, so that It becomes possible to distinguish and store history information.

Feature B6. Information derivation means (display output processing in the management side CPU 112 The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which history information is stored separately for each setting value, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to the currently set setting value.

Feature B7. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) for awarding a privilege (open/close execution mode) to the player; a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

Feature B7 makes it possible to vary the probability of a corresponding result being awarded in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

In addition, for the configuration of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a history storage execution means (a function of executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of the game being played in a history storage means (a history memory 117);
a post-setting handling means (a function for executing the processes of step S2506 and steps S2605 to S2609 in the management CPU 112) that does not erase the history information from the time when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means until a specific amount or more of the predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, until a specific amount of predetermined history information is newly stored in the history storage means, even if a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, it will not be stored before the setting is made. History information will not be deleted. This makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period even if new settings are made.

Feature C2. The post-setting response means sets the setting value when a predetermined amount of the history information is stored in the history storage means in excess of the specified amount after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the history information stored in the history storage means is deleted before the above is performed.

According to feature C2, when a specific amount of history information is stored in the history storage means that makes it possible to specify the gaming history management results for a predetermined period after a new setting value is set. In this case, the history information stored in the history storage means is erased before the new settings are made. This makes it possible to prevent useless history information from being continuously stored in the history storage means.

Feature C3. The history storage means includes a first history storage means (first history memory 191) and a second history storage means (second history memory 192),
The history storage execution means includes:
When the predetermined event occurs, means for storing the corresponding history information in the first history storage means and the second history storage means that are set to be stored (step S2603 in the management CPU 112) function) and
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. Means for storing the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means (management CPU 112) until the specified amount or more is stored. function of executing the process of step S2604);
Equipped with
The post-setting response means are:
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. means for changing the storage target between the first history storage means and the second history storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the management CPU 112) when the specified amount or more is stored;
After the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the predetermined history information is stored in the side of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is not set as the storage target. When the specified amount or more is stored, means for erasing the history information of the side that has been set as the storage target among the first history storage means and the second history storage means (step S2608 in the management CPU 112) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C3, even if a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored before the setting is made is not erased until a specific amount of history information is newly stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible to identify the results of managing the game history for a specified period of time even if a new setting value is set. In addition, this effect can be achieved simply by appropriately changing the history storage means to store the history information between the first history storage means and the second history storage means.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C3 is characterized in that it is equipped with information derivation means (a function for executing the process of step S2703 in the management CPU 112) that derives behavior information corresponding to the results of a game during a predetermined period of time using the history information stored in the one of the first history storage means and the second history storage means that is set as the storage target.

According to feature C4, even if the history information is stored in both the first history storage means and the second history storage means due to a new setting of the setting value, the manner in which the history information is used is It becomes possible to derive information appropriately.

Feature C5. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
an information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) that determines whether the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) for awarding a privilege (open/close execution mode) to the player; a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

Feature C5 makes it possible to vary the probability of a corresponding result being awarded in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Special execution means (in the third embodiment, monitoring of repeated changes in the management CPU 112 (a function to execute a process, a function to execute a repeated change monitoring process in the main CPU 63 in the fourth embodiment, a function to make a negative determination in step S2106 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. In this case, special processing is executed under at least one condition that the new setting value to be used is set in a special situation. This makes it possible to deal with cases in which a new setting value is set under unfavorable circumstances.

Feature D2. Feature D1 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing on the condition that at least one condition is that setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed a specified number of times or more in the special situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D2, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is executed in a special situation, the special process is not executed if the number of executions is less than a specific number of times. This makes it possible to prevent special processing from being executed even when a regular worker sets a new set value less than a specific number of times in a special situation.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the special execution means executes the special process under at least one condition that the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed in a situation where, as the special situation, a game has not been played since the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed or a game has not been played at a predetermined level since the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means has been executed.

According to feature D3, special processing is executed when a new setting value to be used is made in a situation where a game is not being played or a game is not actually being played. If such an act occurs, it will be possible to deal with it.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the special execution means executes a notification process as the special process.

According to feature D4, the notification process is executed with at least one condition that a new setting of the setting value to be used is executed in a special situation. This makes it possible to prompt the user to take action when a new set value is set under an unfavorable situation.

Feature D5. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game. )and,
With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information deriving means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D5, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive behavior information corresponding to the game results during a specified period. This makes it possible to grasp the results of game history management, such as the frequency of occurrence of a specified event in the situation before the setting value was changed.

Feature D6. The special execution means causes the information derivation means to derive the aspect information as the special processing, with at least one condition that the setting value to be used by the setting means is set in the special situation. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that the gaming machine does not allow users to perform.

According to feature D6, even if a new setting of a setting value to be used is made, if the setting is made in an unfavorable situation, mode information is not derived. This makes it possible to prevent aspect information from being derived in vain.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in Feature D5 or D6, characterized in that it is equipped with a behavior information storage means (separate storage memory 171) that stores the behavior information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature D7, when a new setting value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When the form information is derived, the form information is stored in the form information storage means. Thereby, even if the setting value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the setting value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature D8, since it is possible to store multiple pieces of behavior information in the behavior information storage means, it is possible to grasp the results of managing the game history over multiple periods based on the timing when the setting value was newly set. In addition, even if new setting values are repeatedly set in a situation where no game is being played, it is possible to increase the likelihood that behavior information derived using history information of a situation where game play is actually being played will remain in the behavior information storage means.

Feature D9. The mode information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of the mode information,
Feature D7 characterized in that the special execution means executes the special processing when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means more than the predetermined number of times in the special situation. Or the gaming machine described in D8.

According to feature D9, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature D10. A ball entry means (first actuation port 33, second actuation port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus awarding means (a function for executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the master CPU 63) for awarding a bonus (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus determination that the special information corresponds to the bonus information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result being obtained in the award judgment varies depending on the set value.

Feature D10 makes it possible to vary the probability of a corresponding result being awarded in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event in the history storage means (history memory 117) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game. )and,
With at least one condition that the setting value to be used is set by the setting means, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to respond to the gaming results in a predetermined period. information deriving means (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1807 in the management side CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2107 in the management side CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

In this case, when a new set value is set to be used, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the gaming results in a predetermined period. derived. This makes it possible to grasp the management results of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events in the situation before the setting value is changed.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising mode information storage means (separate storage memory 171) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature E2, when a new set value to be used is set, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to generate mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period. When derived, the aspect information is stored in the aspect information storage means. Thereby, even if the set value is changed, it becomes possible to grasp the management result of the gaming history in the situation before the set value was changed at any subsequent timing.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information.

According to feature E3, since it is possible to store multiple pieces of behavior information in the behavior information storage means, it is possible to grasp the results of managing the game history over multiple periods based on the timing when the setting value was newly set. Furthermore, even if new setting of the setting value is repeated under circumstances in which no game is being played, it is possible to increase the likelihood that behavior information derived using history information of a situation in which game play is actually being played will remain in the behavior information storage means.

Feature E4: The aspect information storage means is capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of aspect information;
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in feature E2 or E3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing special processing when the setting of the setting value to be used by the setting means occurs more than the specified number of times under specified conditions (in the third embodiment, a function for executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing monitoring processing of repeated changes in the main CPU 63).

According to feature E4, in order to prevent the mode information derived using the history information of the situation where the game is actually being played from remaining in the mode information storage means, the set value is set in a situation where no game is played. If a new setting is repeated, special processing is performed for it. This makes it possible to deal with the act.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information when a predetermined amount or more of the history information is stored in the history storage means. .

According to feature E5, since behavior information is derived when a predetermined amount or more of predetermined history information is stored in the history storage means, it is possible to prevent behavior information from being derived unnecessarily.

Feature E6. Ball entry means (first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Information acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
an attachment determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the attachment information;
Based on the awarding result that the special information corresponds to the awarding information in the awarding determination, a privilege awarding means (steps in the main CPU 63) that awards a privilege (opening/closing execution mode) to the player. a function of executing the processing from S409 to S412);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the award corresponding result in the award determination varies depending on the set value.

According to feature E6, it is possible to vary the probability of a grant corresponding result in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, the above feature D group, and the above feature E group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, in which the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A ball entry means (first actuation port 33, second actuation port 34) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S401 in the main CPU 63) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means;
An assignment determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the assignment information;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S409 to S412 in the master CPU 63) that grants a bonus (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the result of the bonus correspondence that the special information corresponds to the bonus information in the bonus determination;
A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the advantage degree of the player;
Equipped with
the grant determination means has a high probability mode and a low probability mode as modes of the grant determination such that the probability of the grant corresponding result being obtained is relatively high and low;
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of achieving the award corresponding result at least in the low probability mode varies according to the set value.

Feature F1 makes it possible to vary the probability of a bonus corresponding result in at least the low probability mode in a so-called pachinko machine according to a set value. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the probability of a bonus corresponding result in the low probability mode is favorable or unfavorable even in a single gaming machine. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the probability of the award corresponding result in the high probability mode does not vary depending on the set value.

According to feature F2, the probability of an award corresponding result in low probability mode is changed according to the set value, while the probability of an award corresponding result in high probability mode is not changed according to the set value, thereby making it possible to limit the influence of the set value to the situation in low probability mode.

Feature F3. There are multiple types of benefits,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the selection mode of the benefit does not vary depending on the set value.

According to feature F3, the probability of receiving a corresponding result in low probability mode is changed according to the setting value, while the selection mode of benefits is not changed according to the setting value, thereby reducing the influence of the setting value. can be restricted to situations in low probability mode.

In addition, for the configuration of features F1 to F3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

According to the invention related to the above feature group F, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, in which the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
A second information display control means (step S202 and step S208 in the main CPU 63 in the first to tenth embodiments) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to another information different from the mode information is displayed In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3101, S3103, and S3109. In the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs steps S3201, S3202, and S3204. and a function of executing the process of step S3210, a function of executing the abnormality display process in the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a predetermined period is derived. Then, a display corresponding to the behavior information is performed by the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the results of management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, the information display means not only displays corresponding to the behavior information but also displays corresponding to other information. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that the period during which the information display means displays the mode information is distinguished from the period during which the information display means displays the other information.

According to feature G2, by understanding the situation in which display is being performed on the information display means, it is possible to determine which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to other information is being performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to specify.

Feature G3. The second information display control means displays the information corresponding to the separate information by controlling the display of the information display means so that the display mode is different from the display mode when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein

According to feature G3, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to identify whether the display corresponding to the mode information or the display corresponding to the different information is being performed on the information display means.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the information display means includes a plurality of individual information display means (first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) each capable of performing a plurality of types of display.

According to feature G4, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information. In addition, the presence of multiple individual information display means makes it possible to make the display mode significantly different between when a display corresponding to mode information is displayed and when a display corresponding to different information is displayed. .

Feature G5. The gaming machine described in Feature G4, characterized in that when the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the different information to be performed, a predetermined individual information display means (the first alert display device 69a and the second alert display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments, the first alert display device 201, the second alert display device 202, and the third alert display device 203 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, and the first alert display device 201 and the second alert display device 202 in the thirteenth embodiment) among the plurality of individual information display means that is not in a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed is in a non-display state.

According to feature G5, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature G6. When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a specific individual information display means (the second information display means) which is in a display state when displaying the aspect information among the plurality of individual information display means. In the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification device display device 204) in a display state,
The display content of the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the separate information is performed may be displayed on the specific individual information display means when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed. The gaming machine according to feature G5.

According to feature G6, the display content that can be displayed when a display corresponding to mode information is made on a specific individual information display means can also be displayed when a display corresponding to other information is made, making it possible to avoid restricting the display content when a display corresponding to mode information is made. Also, even if a specific individual information display means is configured to be able to display the same content, a specific individual information display means that has the configuration of feature G5 above and is not in a hidden state when a display corresponding to mode information is made will be in a hidden state when a display corresponding to other information is made, making it possible to identify which display is being made on multiple individual information display means.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the first information display control means puts each of the plurality of individual information display means into a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be displayed.

According to feature G7, when a display corresponding to mode information is made, each of the multiple individual information display means is in a display state, making it possible to clearly distinguish this from a case where a display corresponding to other information is made in which a specific individual information display means is in a non-display state.

Feature G8. The first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display of the aspect information, the predetermined individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G7, characterized in that the game machine is not maintained in the same state as above.

According to feature G8, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature G9. The second information display control means controls one specific individual information display means among the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the third notification display device 69c, the eleventh, and the twelfth display devices). In the embodiment, any one of features G5 to G8 is characterized in that the fourth notification display device 204) displays a display corresponding to the separate information, and the remaining individual information display means is in a non-display state. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature G9, when a display corresponding to different information is made, only one individual information display means is in a display state, making it easier to know whether a display corresponding to different information is made or not.

Feature G10. The individual information display means are arranged in a predetermined direction;
A gaming machine described in feature G9, characterized in that the specific individual information display means is located at the end of the multiple individual information display means arranged in the specified direction in the specified direction.

According to feature G10, since one individual information display means in which a display corresponding to separate information is displayed is located at an end in a predetermined direction, it is possible to determine whether or not a display corresponding to separate information is being performed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature G11. The first information display control means is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first notification display device 69a, the eleventh ~ In the fourteenth embodiment, a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed is performed on the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202), and a plurality of the individual information display means Individual information display means for displaying results (in the first to tenth embodiments, the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c; in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments, the individual information display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c) A display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed is performed on the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G10, wherein the predetermined individual information display means corresponds to the individual information display means for the type display target.

According to feature G11, when a display corresponding to aspect information is to be performed, a display corresponding to the type of aspect information to be displayed is performed on the individual information display means for the type display target, and an individual information display for the result display target is performed. The means performs a display corresponding to the content of the mode information to be displayed. This makes it easier to understand the mode information to be displayed. In this case, when the display corresponding to separate information is performed, the individual information display means for which the type is displayed is hidden, so the state in which the type display is hidden corresponds to the separate information. It will be easier to understand if separate information is displayed.

Feature G12: The information display means has a plurality of unit light-emitting elements (display segments 201a to 201g, 202a to 202g), and is configured to be able to perform a predetermined display by a combination of unit light-emitting elements that are in a light-emitting state among the plurality of unit light-emitting elements;
The second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the other information to be made by turning on a unit light-emitting unit among the plurality of unit light-emitting units that can be turned on when a display corresponding to the status information is made, and causes a combination of the unit light-emitting units that are turned on when a display corresponding to the other information is made to be a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to the status information is made.

According to feature G12, by making the unit light-emitting units that can be made to emit light when a display corresponding to the mode information is made emit light, a display corresponding to the other information is made, which makes it possible to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information without placing restrictions on the content of the display corresponding to the mode information as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of unit light-emitting units that emit light when a display corresponding to the other information is made is a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to the mode information is made. As a result, by grasping the combination of unit light-emitting units that emit light, it becomes possible to grasp whether a display corresponding to the mode information or a display corresponding to the other information is being made.

Feature G13: The display mode of the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means is in a plurality of modes;
A gaming machine as described in feature G12, characterized in that among the plurality of unit light-emitting units, there are no unit light-emitting units that do not emit light even when all of the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed.

According to feature G13, when a display corresponding to the aspect information is made, any combination of unit light-emitting elements is made to emit light, so that it is possible to diversify the display corresponding to the aspect information while placing as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the aspect information.

Feature G14. Specific individual information display means as the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including a third notification display device 203 and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided,
When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature G12 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in G13.

According to feature G14, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to mode information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature G15: Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G14, characterized in that the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the other information to be performed in a situation where the setting value can be changed.

According to feature G15, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for notifying that the setting value can be changed.

Feature G16. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to the currently selected setting value to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature G16, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the mode information can also be used as the display means for displaying the setting value that is being changed.

Feature G17. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G1 to G16, characterized in that the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine to be displayed as a display corresponding to the other information.

According to feature G17, the information display means for displaying information corresponding to the status information can also be used as a display means for displaying information corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine.

Feature G18. The gaming machine described in Feature G17, wherein the second information display control means, when causing a display corresponding to the abnormal condition to be displayed in a situation in which the abnormal condition is not occurring, causes a display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal condition to be displayed.

According to feature G18, it is possible to clearly identify whether or not an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when the game is executed in the history storage means (history memory 117);
information derivation means for deriving aspect information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period of time using the history information stored in the history storage means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1402 to S1412 in the management CPU 112 in the first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2107 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment);
a first information display control means (a function of executing a display process in the management CPU 112) for controlling the display of an information display means (the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
A second information display control means for controlling the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to another information different from the aspect information is performed (in the first to tenth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of steps S202 and S208 in the main CPU 63; in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3101, S3103, and S3109 in the main CPU 63; in the twelfth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3201, S3202, S3204, and S3210 in the main CPU 63; in the thirteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing for abnormality display in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
the information display means has a plurality of unit light-emitting elements (display segments 201 a to 201 g, 202 a to 202 g) and is configured to be able to perform a predetermined display by a combination of unit light-emitting elements that are in a light-emitting state among the plurality of unit light-emitting elements;
The second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the other information to be made by turning on a unit light-emitting unit among the plurality of unit light-emitting units that can be turned on when a display corresponding to the status information is made, and causes a combination of the unit light-emitting units that are turned on when a display corresponding to the other information is made to be a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to the status information is made.

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Further, in the information display means, not only a display corresponding to the mode information but also a display corresponding to other information is performed. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the information display means.

In addition, by making the unit light-emitting units that can be made to emit light when a display corresponding to the mode information is made emit light, a display corresponding to the other information is made, which makes it possible to diversify the display corresponding to the mode information without placing restrictions on the content of the display corresponding to the mode information as much as possible. On the other hand, the combination of unit light-emitting units that emit light when a display corresponding to the other information is made is a combination that does not exist when a display corresponding to the mode information is made. In this way, by knowing the combination of unit light-emitting units that emit light, it becomes possible to know whether a display corresponding to the mode information or a display corresponding to the other information is being made.

Feature H2. There are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the mode information in the information display means,
The game according to feature H1, wherein among the plurality of unit light emitting parts, there is no unit light emitting part that does not enter a light emitting state even if all the displays corresponding to the mode information of the plurality of modes are performed. Machine.

According to feature H2, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, the unit light emitting parts of any combination are set to the light emitting state. Therefore, in order to diversify the display corresponding to the aspect information, It becomes possible to place as few restrictions as possible on the content of the display corresponding to the information.

Feature H3. Specific individual information display means as the information display means (the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the thirteenth In the embodiment, a plurality of individual information display means including a third notification display device 203 and a fourth notification display device 204 are provided,
When causing a display corresponding to the separate information to be displayed, the second information display control means selects a predetermined individual information display means from among the plurality of individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to the aspect information is displayed. Information display means (first notification display device 69a and second notification display device 69b in the first to tenth embodiments; first notification display device 201 and second notification device in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments) Feature H1 characterized in that the display device 202 and the third notification display device 203 (in the thirteenth embodiment, the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202) are in a non-display state. Or the gaming machine described in H2.

According to feature H3, a predetermined individual information display means that does not go into a non-display state when a display corresponding to aspect information is performed becomes a non-display state when a display corresponding to another information is performed. As a result, simply by understanding the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state, it is possible to clearly identify which of the display corresponding to mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed. becomes possible.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be performed.

According to feature H4, when a display corresponding to mode information is made, each of the multiple individual information display means is in a display state, making it possible to clearly distinguish this from a case where a display corresponding to other information is made in which a specific individual information display means is in a non-display state.

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H3 or H4, wherein the first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the status information on the information display means, and even when the display of the status information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state.

According to feature H5, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to separate information is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means. becomes possible.

Feature H6. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A gaming machine described in any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the other information to be performed in a situation in which the setting value can be changed.

According to feature H6, the information display means that displays the status information can also be used as a display means for notifying the user that the setting value can be changed.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second information display control means causes information corresponding to the currently selected setting value to be displayed as the display corresponding to the separate information.

According to feature H7, the information display means that displays the display corresponding to the aspect information can also be used as the display means for displaying the setting value that is being changed.

In addition, for the configuration of features H1 to H7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
A first information display control means (management side a function of executing display processing in the CPU 112);
a second information display control means (a function for executing abnormality display processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to an abnormal state of the gaming machine is displayed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a predetermined period is derived. Then, a display corresponding to the behavior information is performed by the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the results of management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, the information display means not only displays corresponding to the behavior information, but also displays corresponding to abnormal states of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to effectively use the information display means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, wherein the second information display control means, when causing a display corresponding to the abnormal condition to be displayed in a situation in which the abnormal condition is not occurring, causes a display corresponding to the absence of the abnormal condition to be displayed.

According to feature I2, it is possible to clearly identify whether an abnormal state has occurred by checking the information display means.

Feature I3. Feature I1 or I2 is characterized in that a period during which a display corresponding to the mode information is displayed on the information display means and a period during which a display corresponding to the abnormal state is performed on the information display means is distinguished. The game machine described.

According to feature I3, by grasping the state in which the display is being performed on the information display means, it is possible to identify whether the display corresponding to the status information or the abnormal state is being performed on the information display means.

Feature I4. The gaming machine described in Feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the second information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display mode different from the display mode when a display corresponding to the status information is made is made, thereby making a display corresponding to the abnormal state.

According to feature I4, by grasping the display mode of the information display means, it is possible to identify whether the display corresponding to the mode information or the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being displayed on the information display means.

Feature I5. Features I1 to I4 characterized in that the information display means includes a plurality of individual information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) each capable of displaying a plurality of types of information. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature I5, by using a plurality of individual information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information, it is possible to display a wide variety of mode information. Furthermore, by having multiple individual information display means, it is possible to make the display mode significantly different between when the display corresponding to the mode information is displayed and when the display corresponding to the abnormal state is displayed. .

Feature I6. The gaming machine described in Feature I5, characterized in that when the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be displayed, a predetermined individual information display means (the first alert display device 201 and the second alert display device 202) among the plurality of individual information display means that is not in a hidden state when a display corresponding to the mode information is performed is in a hidden state.

According to feature I6, a specific individual information display means that is not in a hidden state when a display corresponding to the mode information is made is in a hidden state when a display corresponding to an abnormal state is made. This makes it possible to clearly identify whether a display corresponding to the mode information or a display corresponding to an abnormal state is being made, simply by grasping the type of individual information display means that is in a hidden state.

Feature I7. When the second information display control means causes a display corresponding to the abnormal state to be performed, a specific individual information display means (the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204) that is in a display state when the aspect information is displayed among the plurality of individual information display means is in a display state;
A gaming machine as described in feature I6, characterized in that the display content of the specific individual information display means when a display corresponding to the abnormal state is made can be displayed on the specific individual information display means when a display corresponding to the status information is made.

According to feature I7, the display content that can be displayed when a display corresponding to mode information is made on a specific individual information display means can also be displayed when a display corresponding to an abnormal state is made, making it possible to avoid restricting the display content when a display corresponding to mode information is made. Furthermore, even if a specific individual information display means is configured to be able to display the same content, a specific individual information display means that has the configuration of feature I7 and is not in a hidden state when a display corresponding to mode information is made becomes in a hidden state when a display corresponding to an abnormal state is made, making it possible to identify which display is being made on multiple individual information display means.

Feature I8. The gaming machine described in Feature I6 or I7, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the multiple individual information display means to a display state when performing a display corresponding to the mode information.

According to feature I8, when the display corresponding to the aspect information is performed, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state, so this corresponds to an abnormal state in which a predetermined individual information display means is in the non-display state. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the display from the display.

Feature I9. The gaming machine described in any one of Features I6 to I8, wherein the first information display control means sequentially changes the display of the status information on the information display means, and even when the display of the status information is changed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state.

According to feature I9, when display corresponding to mode information is performed, the predetermined individual information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. As a result, it is possible to specify which of the display corresponding to the mode information and the display corresponding to the abnormal state is being performed on the plurality of individual information display means, regardless of the timing at which the plurality of individual information display means are checked. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (history memory 117); )and,
Information deriving means (in the first embodiment, step S1402 to step S1412 in the management CPU 112 (in the third embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1807 in the management CPU 112; in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2107 in the management CPU 112),
The information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to In the fourteenth embodiment, a first information display control means (a function for executing display processing in the management CPU 112) that controls the display of the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204);
Equipped with
The first information display control means sequentially changes the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means, and even when changing the display corresponding to the aspect information, the information display means does not display any information. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is prevented from being maintained in a state.

According to feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to the event is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a predetermined period is derived. Then, a display corresponding to the behavior information is performed by the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the results of management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, when a display corresponding to the behavior information is performed, the information display means is not maintained in a non-display state. This makes it possible to identify a display corresponding to the behavior information regardless of the timing at which the information display means is checked.

Feature J2. As the information display means, individual information display means (in the first to tenth embodiments, the first to third notification display devices 69a to 69c, the eleventh to fourteenth In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature J1 is provided with a plurality of first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204).

According to feature J2, by using multiple individual information display means to display information corresponding to the behavior information, it is possible to display a wide variety of behavior information.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the first information display control means sets each of the plurality of individual information display means to a display state when causing the display corresponding to the aspect information to be performed.

According to feature J3, each of the plurality of individual information display means is in the display state when the display corresponding to the mode information is performed, and even when the display corresponding to the mode information is changed, the display state is not changed. maintained. This makes it easier to understand the aspect information.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in Feature J2 or J3, characterized in that the first information display control means causes a display corresponding to the type of the aspect information to be displayed on an individual information display means to be a type display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (the first notification display device 69a in the first to tenth embodiments, and the first notification display device 201 and the second notification display device 202 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments), and causes a display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed on an individual information display means to be a result display target that is a part of the plurality of individual information display means (the second notification display device 69b and the third notification display device 69c in the first to tenth embodiments, and the third notification display device 203 and the fourth notification display device 204 in the eleventh to fourteenth embodiments).

According to feature J4, when a display corresponding to the aspect information is made, a display corresponding to the type of aspect information to be displayed is made in the individual information display means of the type display target, and a display corresponding to the content of the aspect information to be displayed is made in the individual information display means of the result display target. This makes it easier to grasp the aspect information to be displayed.

In addition, for the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. The device is provided with a history storage execution means (a function for executing a history setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when the game is executed, in the history storage means (history memory 117);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the history storage execution means is equipped with a means (a function of making a negative judgment in step S3501 in the main CPU 63) that prevents the history information from being stored in the history storage means even if the specified event occurs when a restricted situation is present.

According to feature K1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, in a restricted situation, history information is not stored even if a predetermined event occurs, so it is possible to prevent history information from being stored in situations where it is undesirable to store history information. .

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the restriction situation can occur as a situation from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started until a restriction release event occurs.

According to feature K2, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined event due to an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power from being stored as history information.

Feature K3: A means for setting the limiting state when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the limiting condition is satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S3610 in the main CPU 63);
A means for not setting the limiting state when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means is started and the limiting condition is not satisfied (a function for executing the process of step S3621 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature K3, there are cases in which a restriction situation is set and cases in which it is not set, depending on whether or not a restriction condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to avoid being set to a restricted status as needed.

Feature K4. A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that the restricted state can occur from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means starts until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number.

Feature K4 makes it possible to prevent history information from being stored until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power begins.

Feature K5. A history storage execution means (a function for executing a normal ball entry management process in the main CPU 63, a ball entry management process during the opening and closing execution mode, and a ball entry management process during the high frequency support mode) for storing corresponding game history information in a history storage means (a normal counter area 231, a counter area 232 for the opening and closing execution mode, and a ball entry management process during the high frequency support mode) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game;
An information deriving means (a function for executing the process of step S4208 in the master CPU 63) for deriving behavior information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period by utilizing the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information deriving means does not derive the status information when a restricted situation occurs.

According to feature K5, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a predetermined period. This makes it possible to grasp the results of management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, since behavior information is not derived in the case of a restricted situation even if a predetermined event occurs, it is possible to prevent behavior information from being derived in a situation in which it is not desirable to derive behavior information.

Feature K6. The gaming machine described in Feature K5, characterized in that the restricted state can occur from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means begins until a restriction release event occurs.

According to feature K6, it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived using history information based on the occurrence of a predetermined event in an operation check immediately after the start of supply of operating power.

Feature K7. A gaming machine according to Feature K5 or K6, characterized in that the restricted state can occur from when the supply of operating power to the history storage execution means starts until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number.

According to feature K7, it is possible to prevent mode information from being derived until the number of game balls discharged from the game area reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number after the supply of operating power is started.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature G group, the above feature H group, the above feature I group, the above feature J group, and the above feature K group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least one of the items stored in the internal storage means is evacuation execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main side CPU 63; In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment, the function of executing the process of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63, and in the 18th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S4502 in the main CPU 63. a function of executing the process of S4602, a function of executing the processes of step S4701 and step S4703 in the main CPU 63 in the 19th embodiment),
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3804 and A function to execute the process from step S3910 to step S3915, a function to execute the process from step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the 16th embodiment, and a function to execute the process from step S4510 to step S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment. (in the 18th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step S4605 in the main CPU 63, and in the 19th embodiment, a function to execute the processing in step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the execution of the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to the execution of the second predetermined process, at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed when the second predetermined process is executed. Also, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. This makes it possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process when the second predetermined process is terminated. As a result, it becomes possible to perform various controls in an optimal manner.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the predetermined information is part of the information stored in the internal storage means.

According to feature L2, only a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is evacuated to the specified storage means, making it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to evacuate the information from the internal storage means in the specified storage means.

Feature L3. The internal storage means has a first storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) and a second storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and registers other than IY registers),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the first storage area in the second predetermined process, but not to store information in the second storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the saving execution means saves the information stored in the first storage area to the predetermined storage means.

According to feature L3, when the situation changes from one in which the first predetermined process is being executed to one in which the second predetermined process is being executed, or when the situation changes to one in which the second predetermined process is being executed, information in the first storage area that is to be stored in the second predetermined process in the internal storage means is saved to the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to save information from the internal storage means in the predetermined storage means, while making it possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process when the second predetermined process is completed.

Feature L4. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the save execution means saves the specified information in the second specified memory area.

According to feature L4, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to make a clear difference. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is information is saved to the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature L5. The save execution means is
A means for saving first predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage means, to the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed (a function for executing the processing of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment);
A means for saving second predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage means, to the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63; and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4702 and S4703 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine according to feature L4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature L5, the first predetermined information, which is a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved to a first predetermined storage area by a first predetermined process, and the second predetermined information, which is a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved to a second predetermined storage area by a second predetermined process. This makes it possible to save each piece of information stored in the internal storage means at a time that is favorable for the information, and also makes it possible to distribute the process for saving the information between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the first predetermined information is information in a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

According to feature L6, it is possible to appropriately save information in the flag register in a situation where the first predetermined process is being executed.

Feature L7. The second predetermined storage area is
a stack area (non-specific control stack area 224) into which information can be written by a push command and into which information can be read by a pop command;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L6, wherein the save execution means saves the specified information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature L7, when the situation changes from one in which the first predetermined process is being executed to one in which the second predetermined process is being executed, or when the situation changes to one in which the second predetermined process is being executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved to one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to consolidate the destinations for saving information, and to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature L8. The gaming machine described in Feature L7, wherein the save execution means saves the specified information to the work area.

According to feature L8, since the work area is used as the destination for saving at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means, it is possible to save the information without making cumulative changes to the stack pointer.

Feature L9. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L8, characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to feature L9, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and it is also possible to treat the second predetermined storage area as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. becomes.

Feature L10. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (stack area 224 for non-specific control) into which information can be written with a push command and read with a pop command;
a work area (work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature L10, it becomes possible to consolidate the save destinations of the predetermined information, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for saving the predetermined information and the processing configuration for restoring the predetermined information.

Feature L11. The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the saving execution means saves the predetermined information to the work area.

According to feature L11, the destination for saving specific information is the work area, making it possible to save the information without making cumulative changes to the stack pointer.

Feature L12. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation execution means stores the internal storage means when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature L11, further comprising a means for saving specific information, which is a part of the information stored in the stack area, into the stack area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63). .

According to feature L12, in a configuration in which predetermined information is saved to a work area, specific information is saved to a stack area. This makes it possible to distribute and save information stored in the internal storage means to the work area and stack area.

Feature L13. The gaming machine according to feature L12, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to feature L13, by saving predetermined information, which has a larger amount of information than specific information, in the work area, it is possible to prevent a large amount of information from being cumulatively stored in the stack area when saving information stored in the internal storage means.

Feature L14: When the state of executing the first predetermined process changes to the state of executing the second predetermined process, or when the state of executing the second predetermined process changes, information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L13, characterized in that information of a stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not subject to saving by the save execution means.

According to feature L14, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means, so it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the stack pointer information is not saved, if the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the one before the start of the second predetermined process without saving the stack pointer information as described above. It is possible.

Feature L15. A gaming machine according to feature L14, characterized in that it is provided with a means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process is completed (a function for executing the process of step S3909 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the eighteenth embodiment).

According to feature L15, when or after the second specified process is terminated, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the state before the second specified process was started.

Feature L16. When the situation changes from executing the first predetermined process to executing the second predetermined process, or when the situation changes to executing the second predetermined process, the stack pointer is set to the second predetermined process. means for setting the corresponding second response start information (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3901 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4501 in the main CPU 63; In the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature L14 or L15 is provided with a function of executing the process of step S4601 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature L16, when the second predetermined process is started, second corresponding start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, making it possible to store information in the stack area at an appropriate address in the second predetermined process.

Feature L17. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of a game;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L16, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature L17, a process for controlling the progress of a game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of a game is executed.

Feature L18: The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature L17 is characterized in that the second specified memory area is equipped with a history memory area (normal counter area 231, counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, counter area 233 for high frequency support mode) in which corresponding game history information is stored when a specified event occurs as a result of the game being played.

According to feature L18, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by executing a process for controlling the progress of the game as the first predetermined process, and executing a process for managing the game history as the second predetermined process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature L19. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature L18, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature L19, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature L20. The gaming machine according to feature L19, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature L20, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any timing. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L20, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least one of the items stored in the internal storage means is evacuation execution means (in the 15th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63, in the 17th embodiment In the 18th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4502 to S4507, and in the 19th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4701 and S4602. function to execute the process of S4703),
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, step S3910 in the main CPU 63) returns the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means A function to execute the process in step S3915, a function to execute the process in steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S4605 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment, In the 19th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the saving execution means saves the predetermined information in the predetermined storage means in response to a load command.

According to feature M1, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the execution of the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to the execution of the second predetermined process, the predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved to the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the second predetermined process is executed when the second predetermined process is executed. In addition, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. This makes it possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process when the second predetermined process is terminated. When the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the execution of the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to the execution of the second predetermined process, the predetermined information is saved to the predetermined storage means by a load command. This makes it possible to save the predetermined information without changing the stack pointer.

Feature M2. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (non-specific control stack area 224) into which information can be written by a push command and into which information can be read by a pop command;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature M1, wherein the save execution means saves the specified information in the work area.

According to feature M2, since the predetermined information, which is at least part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved to the work area, the information is saved without cumulatively changing the stack pointer. becomes possible.

Feature M3. The predetermined information is a part of information stored in the internal storage means,
The evacuation execution means stores the internal storage means when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature M2, further comprising means for saving specific information, which is part of the information stored in the stack area, into the stack area (a function of executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63). .

According to feature M3, in a configuration in which predetermined information is saved in the work area, specific information is saved in the stack area. This allows the information stored in the internal storage means to be distributed and saved in the work area and the stack area.

Feature M4. The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the predetermined information has a larger amount of information than the specific information.

According to feature M4, by saving predetermined information, which has a larger amount of information than specific information, in the work area, it is possible to prevent a large amount of information from being cumulatively stored in the stack area when saving information stored in the internal storage means.

Feature M5. The work area is
a first work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second work area (a work area 223 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features M2 to M4, wherein the save execution means saves the specified information in the second work area.

According to feature M5, by providing the first work area and the second work area in the work area, the storage destination of information in the work area is clearly different between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. becomes possible. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is information is saved to the second work area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the first work area.

Feature M6. The first work area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information
The second work area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature M5, characterized in that information cannot be stored.

According to feature M6, it becomes possible to treat the first work area as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and it becomes possible to treat the second work area as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. .

Feature M7. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means includes:
A first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing among the various processing (a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
A second predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) that executes a second predetermined processing among the various processing;
When the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed or when the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed is reached, a save execution means saves predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63; and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63);
A restoration execution means for restoring the specified information saved in the specified storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second specified process is completed (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S4605 in the main CPU 63; and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The predetermined storage means includes:
a stack area (non-specific control stack area 224) into which information can be written by a push command and into which information can be read by a pop command;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the save execution means saves the specified information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature M7, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least part of the predetermined information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Further, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process.

In addition, when the situation changes from one in which the first predetermined process is being executed to one in which the second predetermined process is being executed, or when the situation changes to one in which the second predetermined process is being executed, the above-mentioned predetermined information is saved to one of the stack area and the work area in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to consolidate the destinations for saving information, and to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Note that for the configuration of features M1 to M7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means includes:
A first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing among the various processing (a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
A second predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments) that executes a second predetermined processing among the various processing;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that when the situation changes from one in which the first specified process is being executed to one in which the second specified process is being executed, the information of a stack pointer stored in the internal memory means becomes fixed information.

According to feature N1, when the situation changes from the situation in which the first predetermined process is executed to the situation in which the second predetermined process is executed, the information of the stack pointer provided in the internal storage means becomes fixed information, so that the second predetermined process is executed. There is no need to save information on the stack pointer when starting a predetermined process. This eliminates the need to secure a storage area for saving stack pointer information. Also, when the situation changes from executing the first predetermined process to executing the second predetermined process, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so the stack pointer information should not be saved as described above. However, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the information before the start of the second predetermined process.

Feature N2. Means for setting the fixed information in the stack pointer when or after the second predetermined process (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process in step S3909 in the main CPU 63, in the seventeenth embodiment) In the embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature N1 is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S4509 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step S4604 in the main CPU 63 in the 18th embodiment. .

According to feature N2, when or after the second specified process is terminated, it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the state before the second specified process was started.

Feature N3. A gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for setting second response start information corresponding to the second predetermined processing in the stack pointer when the situation changes from one in which the first predetermined processing is being executed to one in which the second predetermined processing is being executed (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S3901 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4501 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4601 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature N3, when the second predetermined process is started, second corresponding start information corresponding to the second predetermined process is set in the stack pointer, making it possible to store information in the stack area at an appropriate address in the second predetermined process.

Feature N4. When the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is being executed or when the situation where the second predetermined process is being executed is reached, a save execution means for saving predetermined information, which is at least a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3802 and steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63; in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63);
a return execution means for returning the specified information saved in the specified storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second specified process is completed (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S3804 and S3910 to S3915 in the main CPU 63; in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S4404 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S4510 to S4515 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of step S4605 in the main CPU 63; and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S4705 and S4706 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features N1 to N3, characterized in that information of a stack pointer provided in the internal storage means is not subject to saving by the save execution means.

According to feature N4, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information is stored in the internal storage means. At least some of the information is saved in a predetermined storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the internal storage means from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Furthermore, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it becomes possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the internal storage means before execution of the second predetermined process. Furthermore, since the stack pointer information is not to be saved, there is no need to secure a capacity for saving the stack pointer information in the predetermined storage means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the capacity of the predetermined storage means. Furthermore, even in a configuration where the stack pointer information is not saved, if the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or the situation where the second predetermined process is executed. In this case, the stack pointer information becomes fixed information, so it is possible to restore the stack pointer information to the one before the start of the second predetermined process without saving the stack pointer information as described above. It is possible.

Feature N5. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature N4, wherein the save execution means saves the specified information to the second specified memory area.

According to feature N5, since the predetermined storage means is provided with the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area, the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means can be determined by the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It becomes possible to make a clear difference. Thereby, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the information stored in the internal storage means is information is saved to the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the internal storage means immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and also makes it possible to save the information without using the first predetermined storage area.

Feature N6. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Impossible to memorize information,
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature N5, characterized in that it is not possible to store information about objects.

According to feature N6, it is possible to treat the first predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and it is also possible to treat the second predetermined storage area as a dedicated storage area for the second predetermined process. becomes.

Note that for the configuration of features N1 to N6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
When the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed, at least a portion of the storage in the internal storage means is stored. A first state setting means (which executes the processing of steps S4803 to S4808 in the main CPU 63) to set the state of the predetermined storage area (WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register) to a predetermined state. function) and
a second state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4903 to S4908 in the main CPU 63) that sets the state of the predetermined storage area to the predetermined state when or after the second predetermined process is finished;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature O1, when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the predetermined storage area of the internal storage means The state of the predetermined storage area is set to a predetermined state, and when or after the second predetermined process ends, the state of the predetermined storage area is set to the predetermined state again. This allows the state of the predetermined storage area to be in the predetermined state before and after the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area caused by one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process from affecting the other process. From the above, it becomes possible to perform various types of control suitably.

Feature O2. The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the predetermined state is a state when supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature O2, the specified memory area is set to the specified state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so the processing configuration for setting the specified state can be simplified.

Feature O3. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the predetermined storage area is cleared to "0".

According to feature O3, the specified memory area is set to a "0" cleared state as the specified state, so the processing configuration for setting the specified state can be simplified.

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the predetermined storage area is a part of the storage area in the internal storage means.

According to feature O4, only a portion of the storage area of the internal storage means is set to a predetermined state, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load required for setting the predetermined state.

Feature O5. The internal storage means includes at least the predetermined storage area and another storage area (registers other than the WA register, BC register, DE register, HL register, IX register, and IY register),
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to store information in the predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process, but not to store information in the separate storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the first state setting means and the second state setting means are configured not to change the state of the separate storage area.

According to feature O5, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the second predetermined process is stored in the internal storage means. A predetermined storage area in which information is to be stored is set to a predetermined state. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the predetermined storage area caused by the first predetermined process from affecting the second predetermined process. In addition, since the state of the separate storage area is not changed, setting it to the predetermined state when the second predetermined process is started does not affect the process after the second predetermined process ends. It becomes possible.

Feature O6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features O1 to O5, characterized in that the information in the specified memory area before the first state setting means sets the specified state is information that is not used after the second specified process is completed.

According to feature O6, even if the specified memory area is set to a specified state when the second specified process is executed or when the second specified process is executed, it is possible to prevent the processing after the second specified process is completed from being affected.

Feature O7. A portion stored in the internal storage means when the situation changes from executing the first predetermined process to executing the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to executing the second predetermined process. evacuation execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63) for saving predetermined information (information of the flag register) that is information on the information in the predetermined storage means (main RAM 65);
return execution means for restoring the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means to the internal storage means when or after the second predetermined process is finished (a function for executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63); and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O7, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the execution of the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to the execution of the second predetermined process, the predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, is saved to the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to prevent information stored in the internal storage means when the first predetermined process is executed and which will be necessary when the first predetermined process is subsequently executed from being overwritten when the second predetermined process is executed. Also, when or after the second predetermined process is terminated, the predetermined information saved in the predetermined storage means is restored to the internal storage means. This makes it possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process from the state of the internal storage means before the execution of the second predetermined process when the second predetermined process is terminated.

Feature O8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of a game;
A gaming machine described in any one of features O1 to O7, characterized in that the second specified process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature O8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature O9. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature O8 is characterized in that the second specified memory area is provided with a history memory area (normal counter area 231, counter area 232 for opening/closing execution mode, counter area 233 for high frequency support mode) in which corresponding game history information is stored when a specified event occurs as a result of the game being played.

According to feature O9, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the specified event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by executing a process for controlling the progress of the game as the first specified process, and executing a process for managing the game history as the second specified process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature O10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature O9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature O10, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature O11. The gaming machine described in Feature O10, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature O11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

In addition, in comparison with the configuration of features O1 to O11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
A first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-first embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature P1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent information used in one of the first and second predetermined processes from being erased when the other process is executed.

Feature P2. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature P2, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the gaming history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature P3. The gaming machine described in Feature P2, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of the game being played is stored.

According to feature P3, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P4. The gaming machine described in Feature P3, characterized in that the second predetermined process execution means includes information derivation means (a function for executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that uses the history information stored in the history storage area to derive behavior information corresponding to the game results during a predetermined period.

According to feature P4, by deriving behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a specified period of time using the history information stored in the history storage area, it becomes possible to grasp the results of management of the play history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a specified event.

Feature P5. The gaming machine described in Feature P4, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature P5, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Feature P6: A first saving means for saving the first predetermined information, which is a part of the information stored in the internal storage means, in the first predetermined processing when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed, to the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined processing (a function for executing the processing of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment);
A second saving means for saving second predetermined information, which is a part of information stored in the internal storage means, to the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined processing when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined processing is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined processing is being executed (in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S3902 to S3907 in the main CPU 63; in the seventeenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4502 to S4507 in the main CPU 63; in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S4602 in the main CPU 63; and in the nineteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4701 and S4703 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature P6, the first predetermined information that is part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process, and the part of the information stored in the internal storage means is saved in the first predetermined storage area in the first predetermined process. The second predetermined information is saved in the second predetermined storage area in the second predetermined process. As a result, it becomes possible to save each piece of information stored in the internal storage means at a timing that is preferable, and the process for saving information is executed in a distributed manner between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. becomes possible.

Feature P7. When or after the second predetermined process is finished, first return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the main (a function of executing the process of step S3804 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main side CPU 63 in the 16th embodiment);
When or after the second predetermined process is finished, a second return execution means (in the fifteenth embodiment, the main In the 17th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S3910 to S3915, and in the 18th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S4605. (a function of executing the process, in the nineteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S4705 and step S4706 in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature P6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature P7, when or after the second predetermined process is completed, the first predetermined information saved in the first predetermined storage area is restored to the internal storage means, and the second predetermined information saved in the second predetermined storage area is restored to the internal storage means, so that it is possible to restore the state of the internal storage means to the state before the second predetermined process was started.

Feature P8. The gaming machine described in feature P6 or P7, characterized in that the first predetermined information includes information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means.

Feature P8 makes it possible to properly save the information in the flag register when the first specified process is being executed.

Feature P9. A gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P8, characterized in that the second predetermined information includes information of all registers of the internal storage means.

According to feature P9, the information in all registers of the internal storage means is saved together, eliminating the need to selectively save register information.

Feature P10. The second predetermined storage area is
a stack area (a non-specific control stack area 224) in which information is written by a push command and in which information is read by a pop command;
A work area (non-specific control work area 223) in which information is written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature P9, wherein the second save execution means saves the second specified information to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature P10, the information of all registers of the internal storage means is saved to one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to consolidate the destinations for saving the information of all registers, and simplifies the processing configuration for saving and restoring the information.

Feature P11. The gaming machine according to feature P10, wherein the second saving execution means saves the second predetermined information to the stack area.

According to feature P11, it is possible to save information in all registers while not using the work area.

Feature P12. The gaming machine according to any one of features P6 to P11, wherein the second predetermined information includes information on a stack pointer of the internal storage means.

Feature P12 makes it possible to properly save stack pointer information when the first specified process is being executed.

In addition, for the configuration of features P1 to P12, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

According to the invention related to the feature L group, the feature M group, the feature N group, the feature O group, and the feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. A control unit (MPU 62) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage unit (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the process;
History storage means (management RAM 241) that is provided as a separate chip from the control means and is capable of temporarily storing information;
Equipped with
The control means includes a history storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63, 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing ball entry management processing during opening/closing execution mode and ball entry management processing during high frequency support mode.

According to feature Q1, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the specified event. Furthermore, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, since the history storage means is provided as a chip separate from the control means, it is possible to increase the memory capacity for storing history information while using a general-purpose control means.

Features Q2. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the control means includes a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) that temporarily stores information when executing various processes.

According to feature Q2, in a configuration that includes not only a predetermined storage means provided in the control means but also a history storage means provided as a chip separate from the control means, it is possible to store and hold a large amount of history information by storing the history information in the history storage means.

Feature Q3. The gaming machine described in Feature Q2, wherein the control means temporarily stores information in the predetermined storage means when executing processing related to the history information.

According to feature Q3, in a configuration in which the history storage means for storing history information is provided as a separate chip from the control means, when processing related to history information is executed, a predetermined storage means provided in the control means is used. Since the information is temporarily stored, it is possible to prevent the processing speed from decreasing excessively when processing related to history information is executed.

Feature Q4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the control means includes information derivation means (a function for executing the process of step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that utilizes the history information stored in the history storage means to derive behavior information corresponding to game results during a predetermined period.

According to feature Q4, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to the game results in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Features Q5. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature Q5, when behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a specified period is derived using history information, the behavior information is stored in the behavior information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the results of game history management at any time.

In addition, for the configuration of features Q1 to Q5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

According to the invention related to the feature Q group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A situation generating means for generating a setting possible situation in which it is possible to change the setting value to be used based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including a first event and a second event when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started (a function for executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature R1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in order to set the set value to be used, multiple events including the first event and the second event must occur when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. Must be. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used.

Feature R2. An open grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) (a function of executing the process of step S5505, a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment),
Feature R1 characterized in that the situation generation means specifies that the first event has occurred based on the fact that the opening/closing body is recognized by the openness recognition means as being in an open state. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature R2, the opening and closing body must be in the open state in order for the setting value to be used to be set. This makes it possible to highlight the fraudulent act if someone tries to fraudulently set the setting value to be used, which makes it easier to discover the fraudulent act.

Feature R3. Separate opening/closing means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main side CPU 63; in another embodiment, the main side CPU 63 (in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63),
The situation generation means is characterized in that it specifies that the second event has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body is grasped by the separate openness grasping means. The gaming machine described in feature R2.

According to feature R3, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening/closing body but also to open another opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R4: The setting means is configured to select the setting value to be used and/or set the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c),
The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the predetermined operation means is configured to be operable by opening a separate opening/closing body.

According to feature R4, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless an opening/closing body that is different from the other opening/closing body that is opened to enable the operation of the specified operating means is opened. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used, and makes the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R5. The opening and closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine of the gaming area into which the gaming balls flow,
A gaming machine described in any one of features R2 to R4, characterized in that the gaming area is opened to the front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to feature R5, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening/closing body to open the gaming area to the front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features R1 to R5, characterized in that the situation generating means determines that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on a predetermined operation being performed using a setting key on a setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a).

According to feature R6, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a specific operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section, but also to cause a different event to occur. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used.

Feature R7. A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R6, characterized in that the situation generating means identifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the occurrence of a predetermined game event (operation of the launch operating device 28, entry of a ball into the through gate 35) that occurs when a game is played.

According to feature R7, in order to set the setting value to be used, not only is it necessary to cause a specific game event that occurs when a game is played to occur, but it is also necessary to cause a different event to occur. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used.

Feature R8. The gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R7, characterized in that the situation generating means determines that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the detection of a gaming ball by a ball entry detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) that detects that a gaming ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion provided in the gaming area.

According to feature R8, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to have a game ball enter a specific ball entry section, and a separate event must occur. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used.

Feature R9. A setting value notification means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that notifies the setting value to be used set by the setting means by a notification means,
The gaming machine described in any one of features R1 to R8, characterized in that the setting value notification means notifies the setting value to be used, which is set by the setting means, based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including the first event and the second event.

Feature R9 makes it difficult to fraudulently check setting values. In addition, the manager of the amusement hall only needs to cause the first and second events to occur whether setting the setting value to be used or checking the setting value, so the tasks are standardized and each task is easy to understand.

Feature R10. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A situation generating means for generating a setting possible situation in which the setting means can set the setting value to be used based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including both a predetermined operation using a setting key on a setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) and another event different from the predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section (a function for executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature R10, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. In this case, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a specified operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section, but also to cause a different event to occur. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used.

Feature R11. An open grasping means for grasping that the opening/closing body (front door frame 14) is in an open state (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5005 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) (a function of executing the process of step S5505, a function of executing the process of step S5703 in the main CPU 63 in the 23rd embodiment),
Feature R10 is characterized in that the situation generation means specifies that the other event has occurred based on the fact that the opening/closing body is recognized by the openness recognition means as being in the open state. The game machine described.

According to feature R11, in order to set the setting value to be used, the opening/closing body needs to be in an open state. As a result, if an act of fraudulently setting a setting value to be used is performed, it becomes possible to highlight the fraudulent act, and as a result, it becomes easier to discover the fraudulent act. .

Feature R12. Separate opening/closing means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5006 in the main side CPU 63; in another embodiment, the main side CPU 63 (in the twenty-third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5704 in the main CPU 63),
The situation generating means identifies that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the fact that the separate opening/closing body is in an open state is grasped by the separate opening grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature R11.

According to feature R12, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to open the opening/closing body but also to open another opening/closing body. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R13. The setting means selects at least one of the setting value to be used and setting the setting value to be used, based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (update button 68b, reset button 68c). The configuration is to perform
The gaming machine according to feature R11 or R12, wherein the predetermined operating means is configured to be operable by opening a separate opening/closing body.

According to feature R13, the setting value to be used cannot be set unless an opening/closing body that is different from the other opening/closing body that is opened to enable operation of the specified operating means is opened. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used, and makes the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R14. The opening/closing body defines the front side of the gaming machine in the gaming area where the gaming balls flow down,
The gaming machine according to any one of features R11 to R13, wherein the gaming area is opened to the front of the gaming machine by opening the opening/closing body.

According to feature R14, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary to open the opening/closing body to open the gaming area to the front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and it is also possible to make the fraudulent behavior noticeable.

Feature R15. The situation generation means generates the plurality of events based on the fact that a predetermined game event (operation of the firing operation device 28, ball entering the through gate 35) occurs when a game is played. The gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R14, characterized in that it is specified that one of the events has occurred.

According to feature R15, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section, but also to cause a predetermined game event that occurs when a game is played. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used.

Feature R16. A gaming machine according to any one of features R10 to R15, characterized in that the situation generating means determines that one of the plurality of events has occurred based on the detection of a gaming ball by a ball entry detection means (gate detection sensor 49a) that detects that a gaming ball has entered a predetermined ball entry portion provided in the gaming area.

According to feature R16, in order to set the setting value to be used, it is necessary not only to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section, but also to have a game ball enter a predetermined ball entry section. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used.

Feature R17: A setting value notification means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) is provided for notifying the setting value to be used set by the setting means through a notification means;
The gaming machine described in any one of features R10 to R16, characterized in that the setting value notification means notifies the notification means of the setting value to be used, which is set by the setting means, based on the occurrence of a plurality of events including both the specified operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion portion and the separate event.

Feature R17 makes it difficult to fraudulently check setting values. In addition, whether the amusement hall manager is setting a setting value to be used or checking a setting value, he or she only needs to perform a specific operation using the setting key in the setting key insertion section and cause a different event to occur, so the tasks are standardized and each task is easy to understand.

Note that for the configuration of features R1 to R17, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention relating to the above feature group R can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

However, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to deal with fraudulent activity against gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group S>
Feature S1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A situation generating means for generating a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S5003 to S5006 and steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, in the 23rd embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63, in the 24th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, and in the 25th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63);
A setting value grasping means for grasping whether the setting value before the setting possible state is the same as the setting value set by the setting means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5017 and steps S5111 to S5112 in the main CPU 63, and in another embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5611 to S5612 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature S1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, it is understood whether the setting value before the setting possible situation is the same as the setting value set in the setting possible situation. This makes it possible to execute processing corresponding to whether the setting values are the same across the setting possible situation. Therefore, when the setting value to be used is set, it is possible to create a favorable situation for the setting result, and it becomes possible to perform the setting value setting work in an optimal manner.

Feature S2. The gaming machine described in feature S1 is characterized by having a simultaneous processing means (a function for executing the processing of step S5113 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment) that executes a corresponding simultaneous processing based on the fact that the setting value grasping means has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible state is reached is the same as the setting value set by the setting means.

According to feature S2, when the setting values are the same across the settable situation, the same-time processing is executed, making it possible to create a situation that is favorable for the setting values being the same.

Feature S3. The gaming machine according to feature S2, wherein the same time means executes, as the same time process, a process for making a notification corresponding to the fact that the setting value has not been changed.

According to feature S3, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the set values are the same across the settable situations.

Feature S4. Based on the fact that the setting value grasping means has grasped that the setting value before the setting possible situation is different from the setting value set by the setting means, a corresponding non-same time process is executed. (In the twenty-second embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S5114; in another embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S5614.) The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3.

According to feature S4, if the setting value is not the same across the settable state, non-identical processing is executed, making it possible to create a favorable situation in response to the change in the setting value.

Feature S5. The gaming machine according to feature S4, wherein the non-same time means executes, as the non-same time process, a process for making a notification corresponding to the change of the setting value. .

According to feature S5, it is possible to notify the game hall manager or the like that the setting value has been changed while the setting is possible.

Feature S6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features S1 to S5, characterized in that the situation generating means brings about the settable situation based on the occurrence of a need to erase information from the storage means that stores the setting value after the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means has started.

According to feature S6, when it becomes necessary to erase information from the storage means that stores the setting value, the setting state becomes possible, so that it is possible to prevent gameplay from continuing even though the setting value information has been erased. In this case, the configuration of feature S1 described above is provided, and it is possible to grasp whether the setting value before the setting state becomes possible and the setting value set in the setting state are the same. This makes it possible to execute processing that corresponds to whether the setting values are the same across the setting state.

Feature S7. A gaming machine according to feature S6, characterized in that it is provided with a means for issuing a notification that the setting value has not been changed based on the setting value grasping means grasping that the setting value before the setting possible state is reached is the same as the setting value set by the setting means (a function for executing the process of step S5113 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S5613 in the main CPU 63 in another embodiment).

According to feature S7, even if a setting possible situation occurs due to the erasure of information in the storage means, if the setting values are the same across the setting possible situation, the setting values will not be changed. An announcement will be made in response to the failure. This makes it possible to notify the player that the setting value has not been changed even if the setting becomes possible in the middle of the game, and the player can feel safe even if the setting becomes possible in the middle of the game. It becomes possible to continue playing the game with care.

Feature S8. The situation generating means is
A first status generating means for causing the setting possible status to occur based on the start of the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means (in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5003 to S5006 in the main CPU 63, in another embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 to S5507 in the main CPU 63, and in the 23rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5703 to S5705 and step S5715 in the main CPU 63);
A second situation generating means for causing the setting possible situation to occur based on the occurrence of a need to erase information from the storage means for storing the setting value after the supply of operating power to the control means has started (a function for executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5408 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features S1 to S7, characterized in that the setting value grasping means grasps whether the setting value before the settable situation occurs is the same as the setting value set by the setting means, regardless of whether the settable situation is caused by the first situation generating means or the second situation generating means.

According to feature S8, when it becomes necessary to erase the information of the storage means that stores the set value, the setting status becomes available, so that it is possible to prevent gameplay from continuing despite the setting value information being erased. In this case, by using the same processing as when the setting status becomes available based on the start of the supply of operating power to the control means, when the setting status becomes available as a result of the information of the storage means being erased, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to whether the setting value is the same across the setting status.

In addition, for the configuration of features S1 to S8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features S can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to create a favorable situation when a setting value that determines the advantage of the gaming machine is set, and improvements are still needed in this regard. There is room for

<Characteristic T group>
Feature T1. It includes a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to twenty-fifth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
A first monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the first predetermined storage area is normal (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5401 to S5404 in the main CPU 63, in the 24th embodiment) A function to execute the processing of steps S5801 to S5804 in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the processing of steps S5901 to S5904 in the main CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S7701 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment. ~Function to execute the process of step S7703),
A second monitoring execution means for monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the 22nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S5405 to S5408 in the main CPU 63, in the 24th embodiment) A function of executing the processing of steps S5809, step S5810, step S5812 and step S5813 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps S6101, step S6102, step S6105 and step S6106 in the main side CPU 63 in the 25th embodiment, In the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7706 to S7708 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature T1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process. It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. Further, by monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal, the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process are performed. It becomes possible to specify whether the situation is such that each of the processes can be performed normally.

Feature T2. The game according to feature T1, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in either the first predetermined process or the second predetermined process. Machine.

According to feature T2, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal or not and monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. It is executed centrally. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which monitoring of each storage area is executed in a distributed manner in the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, wherein the monitoring by the first monitoring execution means and the monitoring by the second monitoring execution means are executed in the first predetermined process.

According to feature T3, monitoring whether the first predetermined storage area is normal or not and monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal or not can be collectively executed in the first predetermined process. becomes.

Feature T4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features T1 to T3, characterized in that it is provided with a predetermined erasing means (a function for executing the process of step S5410 in the main CPU 63 in the 22nd embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps S5806, S5811, and S5814 in the main CPU 63 in the 24th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of steps S5906, S6103, and S6107 in the main CPU 63) that erases information from the first predetermined storage area based on the first monitoring execution means identifying that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal.

According to feature T4, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature T5. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the first predetermined storage area based on the fact that the first monitoring execution means specifies that the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, and erases the information in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T4, characterized in that information in the area is erased.

According to feature T5, if the first specified storage area is abnormal, not only the first specified storage area but also the second specified storage area is erased. This makes it possible to erase the information in the second specified storage area regardless of the monitoring results by the second monitoring execution means if there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the second specified storage area.

Feature T6. The predetermined erasing means may erase information in the second predetermined storage area based on the second monitoring execution means specifying that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal. The gaming machine described in T4 or T5.

According to feature T6, when the first predetermined storage area is abnormal, the information in the first predetermined storage area is erased, so that the first predetermined process is executed while the first predetermined storage area is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature T7. The predetermined erasing means erases the information in the second predetermined storage area based on the second monitoring execution means specifying that the second predetermined storage area is abnormal, and deletes the information in the first predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T6, characterized in that information in the area is erased.

According to feature T7, if the second specified storage area is abnormal, not only the second specified storage area but also the first specified storage area is erased. This makes it possible to erase the information in the first specified storage area regardless of the monitoring results by the first monitoring execution means when there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the first specified storage area.

Feature T8. According to any one of features T4 to T7, the process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is performed in either one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. gaming machines.

According to feature T8, the process of erasing information in each predetermined storage area based on the identification of an abnormality is performed collectively in one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to a configuration in which erasing information in each storage area is executed in a distributed manner in the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process.

Feature T9. The gaming machine according to any one of features T4 to T7, wherein a process for erasing information by the predetermined erasing means is executed in the first predetermined process.

According to feature T9, it becomes possible to collectively execute the process of erasing information in each predetermined storage area based on the identification of an abnormality in the first predetermined process.

Feature T10. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T9, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature T10, a process for controlling the progress of a game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of a game is executed.

Feature T11. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature T11, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by executing a process for controlling the progress of the game as the first predetermined process, and executing a process for managing the game history as the second predetermined process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature T12. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature T11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature T12, by deriving behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a specified period of time using the history information stored in the history storage area, it becomes possible to grasp the results of management of the play history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a specified event.

Feature T13. The gaming machine described in feature T12, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature T13, when behavior information corresponding to the results of a game during a specified period is derived using history information, the behavior information is stored in a behavior information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the results of managing the game history at any time. In addition, by executing a process for controlling the progress of a game as the first specified process and a process for managing the game history as the second specified process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the behavior information storage area from being overwritten when the process for controlling the progress of a game is executed.

Note that for the configuration of features T1 to T13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature U group>
Feature U1. A control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processing,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a flag register provided in the internal storage means when the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed or when the situation changes to a situation where the second predetermined process is executed; state setting means (in the 26th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the 27th embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63) A function to execute the processes of S6302 to S6307 and S6312);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature U1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the flag register of the internal storage means is The state is set to a specific state. This makes it possible to start the second predetermined process in a situation where the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform various controls.

Feature U2. The gaming machine described in Feature U1, characterized in that the specific state is a state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started.

According to feature U2, the flag register is set to a specific state when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, so the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified.

Feature U3. The gaming machine described in feature U1 or U2, wherein the specific state is a state in which the flag register is cleared to "0."

According to feature U3, the flag register is set to a specific state, i.e., a cleared state of "0", so the processing configuration for setting the specific state can be simplified.

Feature U4. Means for causing the state of the flag register to become the specific state when or after the second predetermined process is completed (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, executing the processes of steps S6213 to S6218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function (in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S6314 to S6322 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature U4, the state of the flag register is set to a specific state not only when the state changes from the state in which the first predetermined process is being executed to the state in which the second predetermined process is being executed or when the state changes to the state in which the second predetermined process is being executed, but also when the second predetermined process is terminated or has been terminated. This makes it possible to resume the first predetermined process in a state in which the state of the flag register is in a predetermined specific state. It is also possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state before and after the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent the state of the flag register due to one of the first and second predetermined processes from affecting the other process.

Feature U5. A predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) is provided in which information is temporarily stored when the control means executes processing,
The state setting means includes:
A means for causing the state of a predetermined storage area in the predetermined storage means to become the specific state (in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6202 to S6204 in the main CPU 63, and in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6302 to S6307 in the main CPU 63);
A means for causing the information stored in the predetermined storage area to be stored in the flag register, thereby causing the state of the flag register to become the specific state (in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S6312 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine described in any one of features U1 to U4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature U5, even if the configuration does not allow the state of the flag register to be directly set to a specific state as a command from the control means, it is possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state by writing information to a specified storage means and reading out that information.

Feature U6. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (a stack area 222 for specific control) into which the control means can write information in response to a push command and into which the control means can read information in response to a pop command;
a work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which the control means can write and read information in response to a load command;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature U5, characterized in that the specified memory area is provided in the stack area.

According to feature U6, even in a configuration in which information stored in the work area cannot be directly written to the flag register, the state of the flag register can be specified by using writing of information to the stack area and reading of the information. It is possible to set the status.

Feature U7. When the situation changes from the situation where the first predetermined process is being executed to the situation where the second predetermined process is being executed or when the situation where the second predetermined process is being executed is reached, a means for causing the state of a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means to become a predetermined state (in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6205 to S6210 in the main CPU 63, and in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6308 to S6311 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine described in any one of features U1 to U6, characterized in that the state setting means sets the state of the flag register to the specific state after the state of the specified register is set to the specified state.

The state of the flag register can change each time various processes are executed by the control means. In this case, according to feature U7, the state of the flag register is set to a specific state after the state of the specified register is set to a specified state, so that it is possible to make the flag register be in a specific state immediately before the second specified process is started.

Feature U8. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means is a means for causing the state of the flag register to become a specific state (in the 26th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6202 to S6204 and step S6211 in the main CPU 63, and in the 27th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6302 to S6307 and step S6312 in the main CPU 63).

Feature U8 makes it possible to set the state of the flag register to a specific state as needed.

In addition, for the configuration of features U1 to U8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature V Group>
Feature V1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes and temporarily stores information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing the processes;
The control means includes:
A first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing among the various processing (a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
A second predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) that executes a second predetermined processing among the various processing;
a save execution means for saving information of a flag register provided in the internal storage means to a predetermined storage means (main RAM 65) when the state in which the first predetermined process is being executed changes to the state in which the second predetermined process is being executed or when the state in which the second predetermined process is being executed is reached (a function for executing the process of step S3802 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S4402 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S4802 in the main CPU 63 in the twentieth embodiment, a function for executing the process of steps S6402 to S6405 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of steps S6502 to S6509 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-ninth embodiment);
a restoration execution means for restoring the information of the flag register saved in the predetermined storage means to the flag register when or after the second predetermined process is completed (a function for executing the process of step S3804 in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S4810 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6407 to S6415 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S6511 to S6518 in the main CPU 63 in the twenty-ninth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature V1, when the situation where the first predetermined process is executed changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, or when the situation changes to the situation where the second predetermined process is executed, the information in the flag register is stored in the predetermined memory. be evacuated by means. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is executed, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flag register from being rewritten when the first predetermined process is executed. Furthermore, when or after the second predetermined process is finished, the information saved in the predetermined storage means is returned to the flag register. Thereby, when the second predetermined process is completed, it is possible to execute a process different from the second predetermined process based on the state of the flag register before execution of the second predetermined process. From the above, it becomes possible to perform various types of control suitably.

Feature V2. The predetermined storage means is
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature V1, wherein the save execution means saves the information of the flag register to the first specified memory area.

According to feature V2, by providing the predetermined storage means with a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area, it is possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to prevent information used in one of the first and second predetermined processes from being erased when the other process is executed. In this case, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the execution of the second predetermined process or when the situation changes to the execution of the second predetermined process, the information in the flag register is saved to the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to save the information in the flag register immediately before the start of the second predetermined process, and to save the information without using the second predetermined storage area.

Feature V3. The first predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the first predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the second predetermined process is executed. Inability to remember information
The second predetermined storage area is capable of storing and reading information when the second predetermined process is executed, and is capable of reading information when the first predetermined process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature V2, characterized in that information cannot be stored.

Feature V3 makes it possible to treat the first specified memory area as a memory area dedicated to the first specified process, and to treat the second specified memory area as a memory area dedicated to the second specified process.

Feature V4. The predetermined storage means is
a stack area (a stack area 222 for specific control) into which information can be written by a push command and into which information can be read by a pop command;
A work area (a work area 221 for specific control) in which information can be written and read by a load command;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features V1 to V3, characterized in that the save execution means saves the information of the flag register to one of the stack area and the work area.

According to feature V4, when the situation changes from the execution of the first predetermined process to the execution of the second predetermined process, or when the situation changes to the execution of the second predetermined process, the information in the flag register is saved to one of the stack area and the work area in the second predetermined memory area. This makes it possible to consolidate the destinations for saving information, and to simplify the processing configuration for saving and the processing configuration for restoring.

Feature V5. The gaming machine described in Feature V4, wherein the save execution means saves the information in the flag register to the work area.

According to feature V5, the destination for saving the flag register information is the work area, so that the information can be saved without making cumulative changes to the stack pointer.

Feature V6. The evacuation execution means is
Means for storing the information of the flag register in a predetermined register provided in the internal storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S6402 and step S6403 in the main CPU 63; in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a main function) a function of executing the processing of steps S6502 to S6505 in the side CPU 63);
Means for storing information of the flag register stored in the predetermined register in the predetermined storage means (in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6404 in the main CPU 63, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the main CPU 63 function of executing the process of step S6506);
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature V6, even if the configuration does not allow the information in the flag register to be directly saved to the specified storage means as an instruction from the control means, it is possible to save the information in the flag register to the specified storage means by writing information to the specified register and writing the information stored in the specified register to the specified storage means.

Note that for the configuration of features V1 to V6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means includes:
A first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing among the various processing (a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
A second predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) that executes a second predetermined processing among the various processing;
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
An abnormal event monitoring means (program monitoring unit 252) for monitoring whether or not an abnormal event has occurred;
an erasure status generating means (a reset signal output unit 251) that generates a status in which an information erasure process is executed on at least the first predetermined storage area based on the abnormal event being identified by the abnormal event monitoring means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature W1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, and the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process. It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. Further, based on the identification that an abnormal event has occurred, information erasure processing is performed on at least the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as is even though an abnormal event has occurred.

Feature W2. The control means includes:
Means for executing processing for storing power outage response information when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped (in the 30th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S6709 and step S6710 in the main CPU 63) , in the 32nd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S7609 to S7611 in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of operating power to the control means is started in a situation where the power outage response information is not stored and the process at the time of supply start is executed, the information erasing process is performed for at least the first predetermined storage area. means (in the 30th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S6607 in the main CPU 63, in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the clearing process in the case of an abnormality in the main CPU 63; In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S7704, S7705, S7808, and S7810 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The erasure situation generating means causes the control means to start the supply in a situation where the power outage response information is not stored, based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring means has identified that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature W1, characterized in that the processing at the time is executed.

According to feature W2, when the supply of operating power to the control means is started and the process at the time of supply start is executed in a situation where power outage response information is not stored, the information erasing process is performed at least in the first predetermined manner. By being executed on the storage area, the information in the first predetermined storage area is retained as is when the supply of operating power to the control means is started in a situation where the processing at the time of a power outage is not properly performed. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in the current state. In this case, based on the fact that it has been identified that an abnormal event has occurred, the control means executes the process at the time of supply start in a situation where power outage response information is not stored. As a result, by utilizing a configuration that executes information erasure processing when the control means executes processing at the time of supply start in a situation where power outage response information is not stored, information is stored in response to the occurrence of an abnormal event. It becomes possible to execute the erasing process.

Feature W3. The control means executes various processes when receiving a reset signal, and when receiving the reset signal from a situation where operating power is being supplied and the reset signal is not being received. The processing at the time of supply start is started based on the situation where
The erasing situation generating means is configured to cause the control means to set a state in which the reset signal is not received based on the fact that the abnormal event monitoring means has identified that the abnormal event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature W2, wherein the gaming machine receives the reset signal.

Feature W3 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above by switching the reception state of the reset signal.

Feature W4. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (a register and a program counter of the main CPU 63) when executing a process, and stores information stored in the internal storage means in the first predetermined storage. It is a configuration that can be temporarily evacuated to an area,
The abnormal event monitoring means monitors whether an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the internal storage means as the abnormal event,
Any one of features W1 to W3, wherein the erasing situation generating means generates a situation in which the erasing process of the information is performed on at least both the first predetermined storage area and the internal storage means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature W4, since the information stored in the internal storage means can be temporarily saved to the first predetermined storage area, when an abnormality occurs regarding the information stored in the internal storage means, the first predetermined storage area is saved. 1. There is also a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the information stored in the predetermined storage area. In this case, if an abnormality occurs with respect to the information stored in the internal storage means, information deletion processing is performed not only on the internal storage means but also on the first predetermined storage area. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed in that state even though an abnormality has occurred with respect to the information stored in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature W5. The gaming machine described in any one of Features W1 to W4, characterized in that the erasure status generating means prevents the information erasure process from being executed on the second predetermined storage area even if the abnormal event monitoring means identifies that the abnormal event has occurred.

Feature W5 makes it possible to store and retain information in the second specified storage area even if an abnormal event occurs.

Feature W6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features W1 to W4, characterized in that the erasure situation generating means generates a situation in which the information erasure process is executed for both the first specified storage area and the second specified storage area based on the abnormal event monitoring means identifying the occurrence of the abnormal event.

According to feature W6, information deletion processing is performed on both the first predetermined storage area and the second predetermined storage area based on the identification that an abnormal event has occurred. This makes it possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed with the information in the first predetermined storage area being retained as is even though an abnormal event has occurred, and also to It is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained as it is even though the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained.

Feature W7. The information erasing process for the first predetermined storage area is executed in the first predetermined process, and the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is executed in the second predetermined process. The gaming machine according to feature W6.

According to feature W7, also regarding the information erasure process, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to

Feature W8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature W8, a process for controlling the progress of a game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of a game is executed.

Feature W9. The second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, opening/closing execution mode counter area 232) in which game history information corresponding to a predetermined event occurring as a result of a game being executed is stored. , a high-frequency support mode counter area 233).

According to feature W9, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the specified event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by executing a process for controlling the progress of the game as the first specified process, and executing a process for managing the game history as the second specified process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature W10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature W9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature W10, by deriving behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a specified period of time using the history information stored in the history storage area, it becomes possible to grasp the results of management of the play history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a specified event.

Feature W11. The gaming machine described in Feature W10, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature W11, when behavior information corresponding to the results of a game during a specified period is derived using history information, the behavior information is stored in a behavior information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the results of game history management at any time. In addition, by executing a process for controlling the progress of a game as the first specified process and a process for managing the game history as the second specified process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the behavior information storage area from being overwritten when the process for controlling the progress of a game is executed.

Note that for the configuration of features W1 to W11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group X>
Features X1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means is
a first predetermined process execution means for executing the first predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing processes other than the management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a second predetermined process execution means for executing a second predetermined process among the various processes (a function for executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
a first predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control, stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
a second predetermined storage area (work area 223 for non-specific control, stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
Equipped with
The second predetermined process execution means is configured to perform an information deletion process on the second predetermined storage area as the second predetermined process based on the occurrence of an erasure trigger. In the 25th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute the process of step S6103 and step S6107, in the 30th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute the process of step S7204, and in the 31st embodiment, the main CPU 63 (a function of executing the process of step S7508 in the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7808 and step S7810 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature X1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage destination of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent information used in the first predetermined process or the second predetermined process from being erased when one of the other processes is executed.

In addition, when an erasure trigger occurs, an information erasure process is executed on the second specified storage area, so it is possible to prevent the second specified process from being executed in a state where the information in the second specified storage area is retained as is, even if some abnormality has occurred in the second specified storage area. In addition, because the information erasure process is executed by the second specified process, it is possible to prevent the first specified process from being involved in updating the information in the second specified storage area.

Features X2. The erasure execution means executes the information erasure process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing non-erasure target information (management monitoring flag, return address information, information on various registers) from being erased. The gaming machine described in feature X1.

According to feature X2, the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area is performed while ensuring that non-erasure target information in the second predetermined storage area is not erased. This makes it possible to perform the information erasing process on the second predetermined storage area while preventing even necessary information from being erased.

Feature X3. The second predetermined process execution means is configured to execute the second predetermined process when a situation in which the first predetermined process is executed changes to a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed or a situation in which the second predetermined process is executed. Storage execution means (in the 30th embodiment A function to execute the processing of steps S7102 to S7107 in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the processing of steps S7502 to S7507 in the main CPU 63 in the 31st embodiment, and a function to execute the processing of step S7802 in the main CPU 63 in the 32nd embodiment. - a function to execute the process of step S7807),
The game according to feature Machine.

According to the feature It becomes possible to perform information deletion processing on the storage area.

Features X4. The storage execution means stores, as the return correspondence information, information on a return address of the program when the second predetermined process ends and the program returns to the first predetermined process in the second predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature X3.

According to feature X4, an information erasure process is performed on the second specified storage area while preventing the information of the return address of the program from being erased when returning to the first specified processing, so that even if an information erasure process is performed on the second specified storage area, it is possible to return to the specified program in the first specified processing when the second specified processing is completed.

Feature X5. The control means is configured to temporarily store information in an internal storage means (register of the main CPU 63) when executing processing,
The gaming machine according to feature X3 or X4, wherein the storage execution means stores the information stored in the internal storage means in the second predetermined storage area as the return correspondence information.

According to feature X5, an information erasure process is performed on the second specified storage area while preventing the information in the internal storage means used in the first specified process from being erased. Therefore, even if an information erasure process is performed on the second specified storage area, when the second specified process is completed, it is possible to restore the information used in the first specified process to the internal storage means.

Features X6. The erasure execution means causes the information erasure process to be executed on the second predetermined storage area based on the occurrence of an abnormality in the second predetermined storage area, as the occurrence of the erasure trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X5.

According to feature X6, when an abnormality occurs in the second specified storage area, an information erasure process is executed on the second specified storage area, so that it is possible to prevent the second specified process from being executed while an abnormality remains in the second specified storage area.

Feature X7. The second predetermined process execution means executes the second predetermined process by monitoring whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal (in the thirtieth embodiment, the second predetermined process execution means monitors whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal) The gaming machine according to feature X6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing processing.

According to feature X7, not only the information deletion process for the second predetermined storage area but also the monitoring of whether or not the second predetermined storage area is normal is performed in the second predetermined process without intervening the first predetermined process. Therefore, it is possible to execute monitoring whether the second predetermined storage area is normal or not and executing the information erasing process for the second predetermined storage area as a series of processes in the second predetermined process. .

Feature X8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of a game;
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature X8, a process for controlling the progress of a game is executed as the first predetermined process, and a process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that it is possible to prevent information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of a game is executed.

Feature X9. The gaming machine described in Feature X8, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a history storage area (normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of the game being played is stored.

According to feature X9, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage area. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Features X10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature

According to feature X10, by deriving behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a specified period of time using the history information stored in the history storage area, it becomes possible to grasp the results of management of the play history, such as the frequency of occurrence of a specified event.

Features X11. The gaming machine according to feature X10, wherein the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (calculation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature X11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features X1 to X11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic Group Y>
Feature Y1. Equipped with a control means (main CPU 63) that executes various processes,
The control means includes:
A first predetermined processing execution means for executing a first predetermined processing among the various processing (a function for executing processing other than the management execution processing in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments);
A second predetermined processing execution means (a function of executing a management execution process in the main CPU 63 in the fifteenth to thirty-fourth embodiments) that executes a second predetermined processing among the various processing;
a first predetermined storage area (a work area 221 for specific control, a stack area 222 for specific control) in which information is stored when the first predetermined process is executed;
A second predetermined storage area (a work area 223 for non-specific control, a stack area 224 for non-specific control) in which information is stored when the second predetermined process is executed;
a first calculation means for calculating first reference numerical information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area (in the 30th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S6604 and S6710 in the main CPU 63; in the 31st embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step S7304 in the main CPU 63; in the 32nd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S7610 and S7701 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature Y1, a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area are provided, the first predetermined storage area is treated as a dedicated storage area for the first predetermined process, and the second predetermined storage area is It is treated as a storage area dedicated to the second predetermined process. This makes it possible to clearly differentiate the storage location of information in the predetermined storage means between the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process. Therefore, when executing one of the first predetermined process and the second predetermined process, it is possible to prevent information used in the other process from being deleted. In this case, first reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the first predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the first reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether an information abnormality has occurred only in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y2. Information erasing means for performing information erasing processing on the first predetermined storage area based on identifying the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculating means; (In the 30th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main side CPU 63, in the 31st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7401 and step S7402 in the main side CPU 63, and in the 32nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S7407 in the main side CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature Y1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S7704 and step S7705 in the CPU 63.

According to feature Y2, when an abnormality is identified with respect to the first reference numerical information, an information erasure process is executed for the first specified storage area, so that it is possible to prevent the first specified process from being executed in a state where the information in the first specified storage area is retained as is, even if an information abnormality has occurred.

Feature Y3. The first calculation means is
a first power outage calculation unit (in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6710 in the main CPU 63; In the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7610 in the main CPU 63),
A first power-on calculation means that calculates the first reference numerical information when the supply of operating power to the control means is started (in the 30th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S6604 in the main CPU 63) , in the 31st embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7304 in the main CPU 63, and in the 32nd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7701 in the main CPU 63),
Equipped with
The information erasing means is based on the fact that the first reference numerical information calculated by the first power outage calculation means and the first reference numerical information calculated by the first power on calculation means do not match. , the gaming machine according to feature Y2, wherein the information erasing process is executed on at least the first predetermined storage area.

According to feature Y3, it is possible to determine whether or not the information in the first predetermined storage area is stored and retained even when the supply of operating power is stopped by calculating the first reference numerical information. becomes. If the information in the first predetermined storage area is not stored and retained after the supply of operating power is stopped, information deletion processing is executed for the first predetermined storage area, so that an information error occurs. It is possible to prevent the first predetermined process from being executed while the information in the first predetermined storage area is held as is despite the occurrence of the above.

Feature Y4. The gaming machine described in feature Y2 or Y3, characterized in that the information erasing means does not execute the information erasing process for the second predetermined memory area even if it identifies the occurrence of an abnormality in the first reference numerical information calculated by the first calculation means.

According to feature Y4, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified regarding the first reference numerical information, information deletion processing is executed for the first predetermined storage area, while information deletion processing is performed for the second predetermined storage area. Processing is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent even the information in the second predetermined storage area from being erased in a situation where an information abnormality occurs in the first predetermined storage area.

Feature Y5. A gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y4, characterized in that the first reference numerical information is information that does not change depending on the information stored in the second predetermined memory area.

According to feature Y5, in a configuration in which a first predetermined storage area and a second predetermined storage area exist, it is possible to individually identify information abnormalities regarding the first predetermined storage area using the first reference numerical information. It becomes possible.

Feature Y6. A gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y5, characterized in that it is provided with a second calculation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S7611 and S7706 in the main CPU 63) for calculating second reference numerical information corresponding to the plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined memory area.

According to feature Y6, second reference numerical information corresponding to a plurality of pieces of information stored in the second predetermined storage area is calculated. By using the second reference numerical information, it is possible to specify whether an information abnormality has occurred only in the second predetermined storage area.

Feature Y7. The gaming machine described in Feature Y6 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7808 and S7810 in the main CPU 63) for causing an information erasure process to be executed on at least the second predetermined memory area based on the identification of the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the second reference numerical information calculated by the second calculation means.

According to feature Y7, when the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the second reference numerical information is identified, information deletion processing is performed on the second predetermined storage area, so that even though an information abnormality has occurred, First, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined process from being executed while the information in the second predetermined storage area is retained as is.

Feature Y8. The first predetermined process includes a process for controlling the progress of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Y1 to Y7, wherein the second predetermined process includes a process for managing a gaming history.

According to feature Y8, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, thereby controlling the progress of the game. It becomes possible to prevent the information used in the process for managing the game history from being rewritten when executing the process for managing the game history.

Feature Y9. The gaming machine described in Feature Y8, characterized in that the second predetermined memory area includes a history memory area (normal counter area 231, open/close execution mode counter area 232, high frequency support mode counter area 233) in which history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs as a result of the game being played is stored.

According to feature Y9, when a specified event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage area. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of times or frequency of occurrence of the specified event, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the frequency of occurrence of the specified event. Furthermore, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by executing a process for controlling the progress of the game as the first specified process, and executing a process for managing the game history as the second specified process, it becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the history storage area from being rewritten when the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed.

Feature Y10. The second predetermined process execution means is an information derivation means (step S4208 in the main CPU 63) that derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage area. The gaming machine according to feature Y9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature Y10, the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, can be managed by deriving mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period using history information stored in the history storage area. It becomes possible to understand the results.

Feature Y11. The gaming machine described in Feature Y10, characterized in that the second predetermined storage area includes a mode information storage area (computation result storage area 234) that stores the mode information derived by the information derivation means.

According to feature Y11, when mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period is derived using history information, the mode information is stored in the mode information storage area. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results at any time. In addition, the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed as the first predetermined process, and the process for managing the game history is executed as the second predetermined process, so that the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed. It becomes possible to prevent the information stored in the mode information storage area from being rewritten during execution.

Note that for the configuration of features Y1 to Y11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention relating to the above feature group T, feature group U, feature group V, feature group W, feature group X, and feature group Y can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform various controls, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group Z>
Feature Z1. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A situation generating means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7905, S7916, and S7917 in the main CPU 63) that makes it possible to change the setting value to be used;
A setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that notifies the setting value of the target to be used in a situation where the setting is not possible when the supply of operating power to the control means (main CPU 63) having the setting means is started and processing at the start of supply is being executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature Z1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, in order to check the set value that is set to be used, it is necessary to temporarily stop the supply of operating power to the control means and then restart the supply of operating power to the control means. . This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values. Further, since the set value is notified while the supply start process is being executed, there is no need to notify the set value when the game is interrupted. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the setting value.

Feature Z2. The gaming machine according to feature Z1, wherein the situation generation means causes the settable situation to occur in a situation where the supply start process is being executed.

According to feature Z2, a setting possible situation in which setting values to be used can be set and a situation in which setting values to be used are notified in situations where settings are not possible are defined at the time of supply start. It becomes possible to summarize the situation in which processing is being executed.

Feature Z3. A first identification means (a function for executing the processes of steps S7912 and S7916 in the main CPU 63) for identifying the occurrence of a first trigger event is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature Z1 or Z2, characterized in that the setting notification means notifies the user of the setting value to be used in a situation that is not a settable situation, based on the situation in which the processing at the start of supply is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event has been identified by the first identification means.

According to feature Z3, in order to notify the setting value of the target device, it is necessary not only to start the supply of operating power to the control means but also to cause a first trigger event to occur. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting value.

Feature Z4. The gaming machine described in Feature Z3, characterized in that the first triggering event is a predetermined operation being performed using a setting key on the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a).

According to feature Z4, in order to notify the setting of the target to be used, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Feature Z5. The setting notification means notifies the setting value of the target to be used in the situation where the setting is not possible when a notification condition is satisfied based on the situation where the supply start processing is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identification means,
the situation generating means sets the setting possible situation when a setting condition is satisfied based on a situation in which the supply start processing is being executed and the occurrence of the first trigger event is identified by the first identifying means,
A gaming machine described in feature Z3 or Z4, characterized in that the notification condition and the set condition are different.

According to feature Z5, in both cases of generating a settable situation and notifying a setting value to be used, not only the supply of operating power to the control means is started, but also the first trigger event is triggered. need to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to fraudulently set a setting value to be used, and to fraudulently attempt to confirm a setting value to be used. On the other hand, because the setting conditions for generating the configurable status and the notification conditions for notifying the setting value to be used are different, the situation in which the configurable status and the setting value to be used are announced is different. It becomes possible to cause either one of these to occur independently.

Feature Z6. comprising a second identifying means (a function of executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63) for identifying the occurrence of the second trigger event,
The setting condition is a situation in which the occurrence of the first trigger event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, and the second specifying means specifies the occurrence of the first trigger event. Established on the basis that the occurrence of the triggering event is specified,
The notification condition is a situation in which the first specifying means specifies the occurrence of the first trigger event in a situation where the supply start process is being executed, and the second specifying device specifies the second trigger event. The gaming machine according to feature Z5, characterized in that the triggering event is established based on a situation in which the occurrence of the triggering event is not specified.

According to feature Z6, in order to generate the settable situation, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and not only to generate the first trigger event but also to generate the second trigger event. As a result, whether the set value to be used is set or the set value to be used is notified, it not only starts supplying operating power to the control means. In a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a first trigger event, it is possible to make the operation for generating a settable situation more complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to more intensively prevent acts of attempting to set setting values to be used illegally.

Feature Z7. The gaming machine according to feature Z6, wherein the second trigger event is that a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) is operated.

According to feature Z7, in order to generate a setting possible state, it is necessary to start the supply of operating power to the control means and not only generate a first trigger event but also operate a specific operation means. This makes it difficult to fraudulently set the setting value to be used, while preventing the operation to legitimately generate a setting possible state from becoming excessively complicated.

Feature Z8. A gaming machine as described in feature Z6 or Z7, characterized in that it is provided with an information erasing means (a function for executing the processing of step S7915 in the main CPU 63) that executes an information erasing process based on the situation in which the occurrence of the second triggering event is identified by the second identification means in a situation in which the processing at the start of the supply is being executed.

According to feature Z8, the conditions for generating a settable situation and the setting values to be used in a situation that is not a settable situation are established by using the second trigger event necessary to execute the information deletion process. It becomes possible to make the conditions for making the notification different.

Feature Z9. The gaming machine described in Feature Z8, wherein the information erasing means executes the information erasing process even if the setting possible situation occurs.

Feature Z9 makes it possible to execute the information erasure process when the setting is possible.

Feature Z10. A gaming machine according to feature Z8 or Z9, characterized in that when the supply start processing is being executed and the occurrence of the second triggering event is identified by the second identification means but the occurrence of the first triggering event is not identified by the first identification means, the setting is not enabled but the information erasing process is executed by the information erasing means.

According to feature Z10, depending on whether or not the first trigger event is generated when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, information erasure processing is executed and a setting possible state is reached; It is possible to select a case where the deletion process is executed but the setting is not possible.

Note that for the configuration of features Z1 to Z10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group a>
Feature a1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of step S7905, step S7916, and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
an information erasing means (a function that executes the process of step S7915 in the main CPU 63) that executes information erasing processing;
a setting notification means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for notifying the setting value of the usage target in a situation where the setting is not possible;
a first specifying means for specifying the occurrence of a first trigger event (a function of executing the processes of step S7912 and step S7916 in the main CPU 63);
a second specifying means for specifying the occurrence of the second trigger event (a function for executing the process of step S7905 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The situation generating means specifies that the first triggering event occurs in a situation where the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started and processing at the time of supply start is being executed, by the first specifying means. and the occurrence of the second triggering event is specified by the second specifying means, so that the setting possible situation is set;
The information erasing means performs the information erasing process based on the fact that the second specifying means has identified the occurrence of the second trigger event in the situation where the supply start process is being executed. Run
A situation in which the occurrence of the second triggering event is specified by the second specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, and the occurrence of the first triggering event is specified by the first specifying means. If the situation is such that the setting is not possible, the information erasing means executes the information erasing process, although the setting is not possible.
The setting notification means is configured to detect a situation in which the occurrence of the first triggering event is specified by the first specifying means in a situation where the process at the time of supply start is being executed, and the second specifying means detects the occurrence of the first trigger event. A gaming machine characterized in that the setting value of the target to be used in a situation where the setting is not possible is notified based on the situation where the occurrence of a triggering event is not specified.

According to feature a1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value will be the one to be used. In addition, since the configuration allows for the execution of an information erasure process, it is possible to prevent play from being played despite the occurrence of an information anomaly. In addition, since the configuration allows for the notification of the setting value set to be used, it is possible to check the setting value.

In this case, in order to confirm the set value that is set to be used, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate a first trigger event. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

In addition, in order to generate a settable situation, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate not only the first trigger event but also the second trigger event. As a result, whether the set value to be used is set or the set value to be used is notified, it not only starts supplying operating power to the control means. In a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a first trigger event, it is possible to make the operation for generating a settable situation more complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to more intensively prevent acts of attempting to set setting values to be used illegally.

In addition, by utilizing the second trigger event required to execute the information erasure process, it is possible to differentiate between the conditions for generating a setting possible situation and the conditions for notifying the setting value to be used in a situation where the setting is not possible.

Also, depending on whether or not the first trigger event occurs when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, the information deletion process may be executed and the setting becomes possible, or the information deletion process may be executed. It becomes possible to select whether or not the setting is possible for execution.

Feature a2. The gaming machine described in feature a1, characterized in that the first triggering event is a predetermined operation being performed using a setting key on the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a).

According to feature a2, in order to notify the setting of the target to be used, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation using the setting key on the setting key insertion section. This makes it difficult to illegally check the setting values.

Feature a3. The gaming machine described in feature a1 or a2, characterized in that the second triggering event is the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature a3, in order to generate the settable situation, it is necessary not only to start supplying operating power to the control means and to generate the first trigger event, but also to operate the predetermined operation means. This makes it difficult for people to illegally set setting values to be used, while also preventing the operations to legitimately create a setting-enabled situation from becoming excessively complicated. becomes possible.

In addition, for the configuration of features a1 to a3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature group Z and feature group a can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably confirm the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. .

<Characteristic group b>
Feature b1. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
a situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of step S7905, step S7916, and step S7917 in the main CPU 63) for creating a setting possible situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed;
a setting monitoring means (a function of executing the process of step S8220 in the main CPU 63) that executes a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply that is executed when the supply of operating power to the control means having the setting means is started.

According to feature b1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. In addition, a setting monitoring process is executed to monitor whether the setting value to be used is abnormal, so if the setting value to be used is abnormal, it is possible to deal with it. In addition, since the processing at the start of supply does not include a setting monitoring process, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while preventing an increase in the processing load of the processing at the start of supply.

Feature b2. The gaming machine according to feature b1, wherein the situation generating means generates the settable situation in a situation where the supply start process is being executed.

According to feature b2, since the setting possible situation occurs in a situation where the processing at the start of supply is being executed, it is possible to set the setting value to be used before the game starts. . In this case, since the setting value to be used is set in the process at the start of supply, the processing load of the process at the start of supply increases accordingly. On the other hand, with the configuration of feature b1 above, since the settings monitoring process is not included in the process at the start of supply, the processing load of the process at the start of supply is not further increased, and the It becomes possible to monitor whether or not the set value is abnormal.

Feature b3. The gaming machine described in feature b1 or b2, characterized in that the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process after the process at the start of the supply is completed.

According to feature b3, since the setting monitoring process is executed after the process at the start of supply is completed, the setting value to be used is detected to be abnormal while preventing the processing load of the process at the start of supply from increasing. It becomes possible to monitor whether the

Feature b4. The gaming machine described in feature b3, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process each time a monitoring trigger occurs after the process at the start of the supply is completed.

According to feature b4, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it becomes easier to identify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature b5. The device includes a means for executing an interrupt process that is periodically started (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine described in any one of features b1 to b4, characterized in that the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to feature b5, the setting monitoring process is executed each time the device is started periodically, which makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the setting values of the target device are abnormal.

Feature b6. A gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b5, characterized in that the setting monitoring means includes a means for regulating the progress of the game based on the determination in the setting monitoring process that the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal (a function for executing the processes of steps S8207 and S8302 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature b6, if it is determined that the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal, the progress of the game is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the game from continuing even if the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal.

Feature b7. The setting monitoring means is configured to provide a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should occur based on the fact that the setting value of the target to be used is determined to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. The gaming machine according to any one of features b1 to b6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for executing the process (a function of executing the process of step S8303 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature b7, when it is determined that the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal, a notification is issued to enable the player to recognize that a setting possible situation should be generated, so that when the setting value of the target to be used becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the manager of the amusement hall to resolve the abnormality.

Note that for the configuration of features b1 to b7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention relating to the above feature group b can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the settings that determine the advantageous degree of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group c>
Feature c1. A predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204 for notification),
A predetermined display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (a function for executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified display control means is equipped with a check control means (in the 35th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S9102 in the main CPU 63, and in the 38th embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S9602 in the main CPU 63) that causes the specified display means to display a check display that enables confirmation of whether the specified display means is normal or not based on the occurrence of a check trigger.

According to feature c1, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a check opportunity. This makes it possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c2. The predetermined display means has a plurality of light emitting parts (display segments 321 to 324),
The gaming machine according to feature c1, wherein the check display is a display that allows confirmation that each of the plurality of light emitting parts can be in a light emitting state.

According to feature c2, each of the multiple light-emitting parts of the specified display means is illuminated as a check display. This makes it possible to check whether each of the multiple light-emitting parts of the specified display means is illuminated.

Feature c3. The gaming machine according to feature c1 or c2, characterized in that the check trigger occurs when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c3, since a check display is performed when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to quickly confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal.

Feature c4. A gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c3, characterized in that the check trigger occurs each time the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c4, it is possible to check whether the predetermined display means is normal each time the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c5. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c4, wherein the check opportunity is generated without requiring an operation for generating the check opportunity when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c5, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed without requiring any special operation, which makes it easy to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature c6. The check control means causes the predetermined display means to display the check display when the supply of the operating power is started and the check trigger has occurred, and when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c5, wherein the predetermined display means does not display the check display when the check opportunity has not occurred.

According to feature c6, when the supply of operating power has started and a check trigger has occurred, a check display is displayed, making it possible to check whether the specified display means is normal or not before play begins on the gaming machine. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power has started but a check trigger has not occurred, a check display is not displayed, making it possible to prevent a check display from being displayed in situations where it is not necessary.

Feature c7. A means (a function for executing the process of step S8606 in the main CPU 63) is provided for storing information in a usage correspondence storage means (management start flag) based on the fact that the gaming machine is used in a predetermined manner,
The check control means is such that the check trigger occurs when the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the usage correspondence storage means does not correspond to the usage correspondence information. when the predetermined display means makes the check display, and the supply of operating power is started and the information stored in the usage compatible storage means corresponds to the usage compatible information. The gaming machine according to feature c6, wherein the predetermined display means does not display the check display on the assumption that the check opportunity has not occurred.

According to feature c7, until the gaming machine is used in a predetermined manner, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means when the supply of operating power is started, and the gaming machine is used in a predetermined manner. Even if the supply of operating power is started based on this, no check display is performed on the predetermined display means. As a result, for example, at the shipping stage of a game machine, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means, so that it can be checked whether the predetermined display means is normal or not. After the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to prevent the checking display from being displayed on the predetermined display means even if the supply of operating power is started.

Feature c8. The check control means
A display termination means for terminating the check display in the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a termination trigger (a function for executing the process of step S9002 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101);
A canceling means for terminating the check display in the predetermined display means based on the occurrence of a canceling trigger even in a situation where the termination trigger has not occurred (a function for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101, a function for executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101);
A gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to characteristic c8, the check display is terminated based on the occurrence of a cancellation trigger even if the check display termination trigger has not occurred, so that the check display is performed on the predetermined display means. Even so, it is possible to terminate the check display midway and display another display.

Feature c9. The gaming machine described in feature c8, characterized in that the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of a specified operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature c9, since a cancellation opportunity occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at any timing.

Feature c10. The predetermined display control means includes a separate display control means (a function of executing the processes of step S9004 and step S9006 in the main CPU 63) that causes a separate display different from the check display to be performed when a separate display execution status occurs. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature c8 or c9, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the separate display execution status.

According to feature c10, when a cancellation trigger occurs based on the fact that a separate display is being executed, the check display is terminated, making it possible to prioritize the separate display over the check display.

Feature c11. Features c1 to 1 are characterized by comprising means for waiting for the progress of processing in a situation where the check display is being executed on the predetermined display means (a function for executing the processing of step S9406 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of c10.

According to feature c11, since a check display is performed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the progress of processing is on standby, it is possible to perform a check display while suppressing an increase in processing load.

Feature c12. A gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c11, characterized in that the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means before the process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature c12, when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes possible to check whether the specified display means is normal or not before a game is played on the gaming machine.

Feature c13. A setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63 in the 35th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63 in the 36th embodiment);
Equipped with
A configuration in which a predetermined setting-related process (a setting confirmation process, a setting value update process) related to the setting value can be executed in a situation in which the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature c12, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the specified display means when processing is being executed at the start of the supply of operating power.

According to feature c13, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Furthermore, predetermined setting-related processing regarding setting values may be executed in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. This allows setting-related processing to be executed at a stage before the game starts. In this case, a check display is started on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means with respect to the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power.

Feature c14. The check control means is a means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (in the 35th embodiment, step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63). (in the thirty-sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S9404 and step S9405 in the main CPU 63).

Feature c14 makes it possible to check whether a specified display means is normal before a specified setting-related process is executed.

Feature c15. The gaming machine described in feature c13 or c14, characterized in that the predetermined display control means includes a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed (a function for executing the processes of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature c15, when a specified setting-related process is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the specified display means, so that the manager of the amusement hall can ascertain the current setting value by checking the specified display means. In this case, the configuration of feature c13 is provided, and not only the specified setting-related process but also the process for starting a check display on the specified display means is integrated into the process at the start of the supply of operating power, so that the task of checking the specified display means to ascertain whether the specified display means is normal and the task of checking the specified display means to ascertain the current setting value can be performed together in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

Furthermore, when the configuration of feature c14 is provided, the predetermined display means starts displaying a check before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the predetermined display means is normal. After checking whether or not the current setting value is set, it becomes possible to check the current setting value using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values.

Feature c16. The check control means includes:
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (a function for executing the processes of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the occurrence of a cancellation opportunity in the predetermined setting-related process in a situation where the check display is being performed (a function and step of executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) (a function to make a negative determination in S9101, a function to execute the process in step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature c15, comprising:

According to feature c16, before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the check display starts on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in a situation where a check display is being performed and a cancellation opportunity occurs, the check display is terminated. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Feature c17. The gaming machine according to feature c16, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature c17, since a cancellation opportunity occurs based on the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is possible to end the check display at any timing.

Feature c18. As the predetermined setting-related process, a means for executing a process to bring about a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) In the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in steps S8806, S8817, and S8818. The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c17.

According to feature c18, the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power includes not only the processing for setting the setting value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. becomes possible.

Feature c19. The setting means updates the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (a reset button 68c) in the setting possible situation;
The check control means
A means for starting the check display in the predetermined display means before the setting possible state is reached (a function for executing the processes of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
A means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible state when the check display is being performed (a function for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101, a function for executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature c18 is characterized in that the specified display control means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) for causing the specified display means to display the current setting value after the check display has ended in the setting possible status.

According to feature c19, since the check display is started on the specified display means before the current setting value is displayed on the specified display means, it is possible to check the current setting value using the specified display means after checking whether the specified display means is normal. This makes it possible to accurately check the setting value. Also, when the check display is being displayed, if the setting becomes possible and the specified operating means is operated, the check display is ended and the current setting value is displayed. This makes it possible to end the check display and display the current setting value on the specified display means when the setting becomes possible, without waiting for the check display to end. This makes it possible to check the current setting value early.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the setting values to be used are updated based on the operation of a predetermined operation means in a setting possible state, the check display is updated based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a setting possible state. Since the check display is terminated and the current set values are displayed, no special operation is required to terminate the check display and display the current set values. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of updating the setting values to be used.

Feature c20. The predetermined setting-related process includes means for executing a process for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c13 to c19.

According to feature c20, for the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to consolidate not only the processing for checking the current setting value but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible.

Feature c21. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features c1 to c20.

According to feature c21, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of feature c1 above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether or not the information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history is being accurately displayed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to confirm.

In addition, for the configuration of features c1 to c21, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P20, features P2 to P30, features P4 to P50, features P6 to P70, features P8 to P90, features P10 to P110, features P11 to P120, features P12 to P130, features P13 to P140, features P14 to P150, features P15 to P160, features P16 to P170, features P17 to P190, features P20 to P220, features P21 to P230, features P22 to P240, features P23 to P250, features P24 to P260, features P25 to P270, features P26 to P280, features P27 to P300, features P31 to P320, features P32 to P330, features P32 to P340, features P32 to P350, features P32 to P360, features P32 to P370, features P41 to P42, features P41 to P43, features P41 to P44, features P41 to P45, features P41 to P46, features P41 to P47, features P41 to P48, features P41 to P49, features P51 to P52, features P51 to P53, features P51 to P54, features P51 to P55, features P61 to P62, features P71 to P7 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature d group>
Feature d1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a predetermined display control means (a function for executing second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means is configured to check whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before a process for controlling the progress of the game is executed when the supply of operating power is started. Check control means (in the 35th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9102 in the main CPU 63, and in the 38th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9602 in the main CPU 63) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of

According to the feature d1, by performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to confirm whether the predetermined display means is normal. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the check display starts before the processing for controlling the progress of the game is executed, so when the supply of operating power is started, the gaming machine It becomes possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal before playing the game.

Feature d2. a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 35th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A configuration in which predetermined setting-related processing (setting confirmation processing, setting value updating processing) regarding the setting value can be executed in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine according to feature d1, wherein the check control means starts the check display on the predetermined display means in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature d2, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. In addition, a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value can be executed in a situation where processing is being executed when the supply of operating power starts. This makes it possible to execute the setting-related process at a stage before the start of play. In this case, a check display is started on the predetermined display means in a situation where processing is being executed when the supply of operating power starts. This makes it possible to integrate not only the predetermined setting-related process but also the processing for starting a check display on the predetermined display means in the processing when the supply of operating power starts.

Feature d3. The gaming machine described in feature d2, characterized in that the check control means includes a means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the timing for the predetermined setting-related processing to be executed (a function for executing the processing of steps S8804 and S8805 on the main CPU 63 in the 35th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of steps S9404 and S9405 on the main CPU 63 in the 36th embodiment).

Feature d3 makes it possible to check whether the specified display means is normal before the specified setting-related process is executed.

Feature d4. The gaming machine described in feature d2 or d3, characterized in that the predetermined display control means includes a means for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed (a function for executing the processes of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature d4, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so the game hall manager can check the current setting value by checking the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to understand. In this case, the configuration of feature d2 is provided, and the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power includes not only the predetermined setting-related processing but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. , the work of checking the predetermined display means to understand whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, and the work of checking the predetermined display means to understand the current setting value are performed at the time of starting the supply of operating power. This makes it possible to do this all at once in a situation where the

Furthermore, in the case of having the configuration of feature d3 above, the predetermined display means starts displaying a check before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that the predetermined display means is normal. After checking whether or not the current setting value is set, it becomes possible to check the current setting value using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values.

Feature d5. The check control means includes:
means for starting the check display on the predetermined display means before the predetermined setting-related process can be executed (a function for executing the processes of step S8804 and step S8805 in the main CPU 63);
Means for terminating the check display based on the occurrence of a cancellation opportunity in the predetermined setting-related process in a situation where the check display is being performed (a function and step of executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63) (a function to make a negative determination in S9101, a function to execute the process in step S9308 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make a negative determination in step S9101);
The gaming machine according to feature d4, comprising:

According to feature d5, before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the check display starts on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether the predetermined display means is normal or not, , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. In addition, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed in a situation where a check display is being performed and a cancellation opportunity occurs, the check display is terminated. As a result, when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the check display can be ended and the current setting value can be displayed on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Feature d6. The gaming machine according to feature d5, wherein the cancellation trigger occurs based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c).

According to feature d6, a cancellation trigger occurs when a specific operating means is operated, making it possible to end the check display at any time.

Feature d7. As the predetermined setting-related process, a means for executing a process to bring about a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the thirty-fifth embodiment, a step in the main CPU 63) In the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in steps S8806, S8817, and S8818. The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d6.

According to feature d7, for the processing at the start of supply of operating power, not only the processing for setting the setting value to be used but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means is integrated. becomes possible.

Feature d8. The setting means updates the setting value to be used based on the operation of a predetermined operation means (reset button 68c) in the setting possible situation;
The check control means
A means for starting the check display in the predetermined display means before the setting possible state is reached (a function for executing the processes of steps S8804 and S8805 in the main CPU 63);
A means for terminating the check display based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in the setting possible state when the check display is being performed (a function for executing the process of step S9203 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101, a function for executing the process of step S9308 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a negative determination in step S9101);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature d7 is characterized in that the specified display control means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63) for causing the specified display means to display the current setting value after the check display has ended in the settable status.

According to feature d8, before the current set value is displayed on the predetermined display means, the check display starts on the predetermined display means, so that after confirming whether or not the predetermined display means is normal. , it becomes possible to check the current setting values using a predetermined display means. This makes it possible to accurately check the set values. Furthermore, when the check display is being performed and the setting becomes possible and the predetermined operating means is operated, the check display is terminated and the current set value is displayed. This makes it possible to end the check display and display the current setting value on the predetermined display means without waiting for the check display to end when the setting is possible. . Therefore, it becomes possible to check the current setting values at an early stage.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the setting value to be used is updated based on the operation of a specific operating means in a setting possible situation, the check display is ended and the current setting value is displayed based on the operation of a specific operating means in a setting possible situation, so no dedicated operation is required to end the check display and display the current setting value. This makes it possible to improve the operability of the work to update the setting value to be used.

Feature d9. The predetermined setting-related process includes means for executing a process for displaying the current setting value on the predetermined display means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features d2 to d8.

According to feature d9, for the processing at the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to consolidate not only the processing for checking the current set value but also the processing for starting the check display on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible.

Feature d10. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features d1 to d9.

According to feature d10, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of feature d1 above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether the information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history on the predetermined display means is being accurately displayed. It becomes possible to confirm.

Note that for the configuration of features d1 to d10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature c group and the feature d group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration that makes it possible to check whether the display on the specified display means is being performed accurately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group e>
Feature e1. History storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) ) and
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S8601 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the aspect information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the aspect information derived at different timings by the information deriving means.

According to feature e1, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. In addition, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive behavior information corresponding to the result of the game, and the derived behavior information is stored in the behavior information storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and by using this managed information, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. In addition, the behavior information storage means can store multiple behavior information derived at different times. This makes it possible to grasp the occurrence frequency of a predetermined event over multiple time periods, and therefore makes it possible to accurately grasp the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event.

Feature e2. The mode information storage means includes:
a most recent storage area (current area 311) for storing the most recent aspect information derived by the information deriving means;
A past storage area (first to third history areas 312 to 314) that stores the aspect information derived by the information deriving means before the aspect information stored in the latest storage area. The gaming machine according to feature e1.

According to feature e2, since both the latest aspect information and the past aspect information derived before that are stored, not only the latest occurrence frequency of a predetermined event but also the past ones can be grasped. becomes possible.

Feature e3. A period lapse determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63) for determining that a predetermined period has passed from the occurrence of a period start trigger to the occurrence of a period end trigger;
A recent storage execution means (a function of executing the process of step S8602 in the main CPU 63) for storing the aspect information derived by the information derivation means in the recent storage area in a situation where the time lapse determination means has not determined that the predetermined time period has lapsed;
A past memory execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8607 and S8614 in the master CPU 63) for storing, in the past memory area, period-corresponding status information corresponding to the game results during the predetermined period derived by the information derivation means using the history information stored in the history storage means based on the determination by the period elapse determination means that the predetermined period has elapsed;
The gaming machine according to feature e2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature e3, aspect information derived in a situation where a predetermined period has not yet elapsed is stored in the latest storage area, and aspect information derived when the predetermined period has elapsed is stored in the past storage area. be done. This makes it possible to grasp the latest frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and also to grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in the past in units of a predetermined period. Further, since the past storage area stores aspect information in units of a predetermined period, it is possible to suppress the number of aspect information stored in the past storage area.

Feature e4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means (processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature e3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following functions.

According to feature e4, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage means. Even if the history information is erased when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the behavior information derived using the history information during the predetermined period of time is stored in the past storage area, so it is possible to grasp later the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event during the predetermined period of time.

Feature e5. A gaming machine according to any one of features e2 to e4, characterized in that the past memory area is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the behavior information derived at different times.

According to feature e5, since a plurality of pieces of aspect information are stored in the past storage area, it is possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to a plurality of periods.

Feature e6. A period lapse determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8605 and S8613 in the main CPU 63) for determining that a predetermined period has passed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of a predetermined period end trigger;
A past memory execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S8607 and S8614 in the master CPU 63) for storing, in the mode information storage means, period-corresponding mode information corresponding to the game results during the predetermined period derived by the information derivation means using the history information stored in the history storage means, based on the determination by the period elapse determination means that the predetermined period has elapsed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features e1 to e5, characterized in that the mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of period-corresponding mode information corresponding to each of the different specified periods.

According to feature e6, since a plurality of pieces of past aspect information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored, it is possible to cope with multiple periods while suppressing the number of aspect information stored in the aspect information storage means. It becomes possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events.

Feature e7. The gaming machine described in feature e6 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the time lapse determination means determining that the predetermined time period has lapsed (a function for executing the processing of steps S8608 and S8615 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature e7, since the history information in the history information storage means is erased when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history information storage means. Even if the history information is erased when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the behavior information derived using the history information during the predetermined period of time is stored in the past storage area, so it is possible to grasp later the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event during the predetermined period of time.

Feature e8. A gaming machine according to any one of features e1 to e7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for controlling the notification means (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of status information stored in the status information storage means are sequentially executed (a function for executing the processing of steps S8702 to S8709 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature e8, notification corresponding to the mode information is performed by the notification means. This makes it possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Moreover, since notifications corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information are performed sequentially, it is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of notification means.

Feature e9: The behavior information storage means includes a first storage area (first history area 312) capable of storing the behavior information, and a second storage area (second history area 313) capable of storing the behavior information;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8607 and S8614 in the main CPU 63) for shifting the status information stored in the first memory area to the second memory area by an instruction including at least an LDIR instruction when an information shift trigger occurs.

Feature e9 makes it possible to shift state information between storage areas using a simple processing configuration.

Note that for the configuration of features e1 to e9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention relating to the above feature group e can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature f group>
Feature f1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 35th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63);
A power outage monitoring means (a function of executing the process of step S8901 in the main CPU 63 )and,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature f1, the power outage monitoring process is executed even when the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, so that if a power outage occurs while the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, it becomes possible to respond appropriately.

Feature f2. The device is provided with a means for executing an interrupt process that is periodically started (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
The interrupt process includes the power outage monitoring process,
A gaming machine described in feature f1, characterized in that the interrupt processing can be started by interrupting when the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature f2, even when processing is being executed at the start of the supply of operating power, the interrupt processing is periodically started, so that it is possible to periodically monitor for the occurrence of a power outage even when processing is being executed at the start of the supply of operating power.

Feature f3. The gaming machine described in feature f2, characterized in that the interrupt process can be started by interrupting even in a situation where post-termination process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power has ended.

According to feature f3, the occurrence of a power outage can be regularly monitored in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, by using an interrupt process that can be interrupted and started in a situation where the post-completion process is being executed. This makes it possible to do so.

Feature f4. The interrupt process includes a progress corresponding process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63) executed to control the progress of the game,
If the interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed, the power failure monitoring process is executed, but the progress response process is not executed,
According to feature f3, when the interrupt process interrupts and is started in a situation where the post-termination process is being executed, both the power outage monitoring process and the progress response process can be executed. gaming machines.

According to feature f4, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power outage is periodically monitored when processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed by using an interrupt process that can be started in an interrupt state when post-termination processing is being executed, it is possible to prevent the execution of progress response processing for controlling the progress of the game even if the interrupt process is started in an interrupt state when processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed.

Feature f5. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
Any one of the features f1 to f4, characterized in that in a situation where the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed, a setting possible situation may occur in which the setting value to be used can be changed. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature f5, the power outage monitoring process is executed even when the setting values to be used are being set, so a power outage occurs while the setting values to be used are being set. Even if this happens, it will be possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature f6. The gaming machine described in feature f5, characterized in that if the supply of operating power is stopped after the occurrence of a power outage is identified in the power outage monitoring process, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to play the game with the setting value that was set as the target for use before the supply of operating power was stopped.

According to feature f6, even if a power outage occurs in a situation where setting values to be used are being set, the power outage monitoring process identifies the occurrence of a power outage, so the supply of operating power is resumed. In this case, it becomes possible to play the game in a situation where the setting values that were selected at the time of the power outage are used. As a result, even if a power outage occurs while the setting values to be used are being set, there is no need to set the setting values again when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Note that for the configuration of features f1 to f6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group f, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately deal with the occurrence of a power outage, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature g group>
Feature g1. A setting correspondence storage means (the setting correspondence storage area 325 in the 39th embodiment, and the setting correspondence storage area 326 in the 40th embodiment) having a first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas (the first to sixth setting information storage areas 325a to 325f in the 39th embodiment, and the first to third setting information storage areas 326a to 326c in the 40th embodiment) for storing setting correspondence information (a win/lose table for a low probability mode, a win/lose table for a high probability mode) corresponding to the advantageous degree of a player;
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63);
A profit-related means (a function for executing a special chart variation start process in the master CPU 63) for executing a profit-related process (step S504) related to the player's profit by using the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence memory area corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine, characterized in that the number of types of setting values that can be set by the setting means is less than the first predetermined number.

According to feature g1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so that the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, in a configuration in which a first predetermined number of setting correspondence memory areas for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values are provided, the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first predetermined number. This makes it possible to share the configuration related to the setting correspondence memory means with a gaming machine in which the number of types of setting values to be used is the first predetermined number, and it becomes possible to simplify the design work of the gaming machine when the number of types of setting values is changed. As a result, it is possible to make the configuration related to the setting values preferable.

Feature g2. comprising a correspondence information storage means (setting value counter in the work area 221 for specific control) capable of storing and holding correspondence information corresponding to each of the first predetermined number of setting correspondence storage areas;
The setting means sets the setting value to be used by changing the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means based on a change operation,
The setting correspondence information of the setting values that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting correspondence storage area, and is part of the first predetermined number and corresponds to a plurality of the setting correspondences. The configuration is such that the same setting correspondence information is stored in the storage areas, so that the setting correspondence information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of the setting correspondence storage areas. The gaming machine described in g1.

According to feature g2, the setting value to be used is changed by changing the corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means based on the change operation, and the setting corresponding information in the setting corresponding memory area corresponding to the changed corresponding information is used in the benefit-related process, so that the benefit-related process is executed in a manner corresponding to the setting value to be used. In this case, the setting corresponding information of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is stored in at least one setting corresponding memory area, and the same setting corresponding information is stored in multiple setting corresponding memory areas that are part of the first predetermined number, so that the setting corresponding information is stored in all of the first predetermined number of setting corresponding memory areas. This makes it possible to use the first predetermined number of setting corresponding memory areas as is and to use the corresponding information storage means to determine the setting value to be used as is, while making it possible to make the number of types of setting values to be used less than the first predetermined number.

Feature g3. The profit-related means is
A means for reading out the setting correspondence information from the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means (a function for executing a win/loss table read process in the main CPU 63);
A means for executing the profit-related processing using the read-out setting correspondence information (a function for executing the processing of step S504 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine described in feature g2 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature g3, even if the configuration has a configuration in which the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the setting correspondence corresponding to the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. Since the profit-related process may be executed using the setting correspondence information read from the storage area, it is possible to use the configuration for reading the setting correspondence information as is when executing the profit-related process.

Feature g4: A predetermined display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S9801 to S9804 in the main CPU 63) is provided to cause a predetermined display means (the fourth notification display device 204) to perform a display corresponding to the current setting value in a situation where the corresponding information stored and held in the corresponding information storage means can be changed;
The predetermined display control means is
A means for reading out display information of a setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the corresponding information of the corresponding information storage means (a function for executing the processing of steps S9801 to S9803 in the main CPU 63);
A means for causing the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the display information of the read setting value (a function for executing the process of step S9804 in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature g2 or g3, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature g4, when changing the setting value to be used, it is possible to change the setting value while checking the display corresponding to the current setting value displayed on the specified display means. In this case, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first specified number, the configuration is such that display information of the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means is read, and a display corresponding to the read display information of the setting value is performed on the specified display means. This makes it possible to directly use the configuration that reads the display information of the setting value when executing the display corresponding to the setting value.

Feature g5. The number of types of the setting value that can be set by the setting means is a divisor of the first predetermined number and is different from the first predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to feature g4, wherein the number of the setting correspondence storage areas in which the setting correspondence information corresponding to each setting value is stored is the same number among the setting values.

According to feature g5, even if the number of types of setting values to be used is smaller than the first predetermined number, the frequency at which the display corresponding to the setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means is limited. It is possible to make each setting value the same.

Feature g6. The setting correspondence information corresponding to the same setting value is not stored in the setting correspondence storage area corresponding to the correspondence information in a consecutive order in the change order of the correspondence information stored and held in the correspondence information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature g4 or g5, characterized in that:

According to feature g6, it is possible to change the setting value to be displayed on the specified display means each time a change operation is performed. This makes it possible to improve the operability of the change operation even if the number of types of setting values to be used is less than the first specified number.

In addition, for the configuration of features g1 to g6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic group g, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic h group>
Feature h1. Display means (special figure display section 37a, special figure reservation display section 37b, regular figure display section 38a, ordinary figure reservation display section 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204, first to fifth display circuits 261 ~265) and
a display control means (main CPU 63) that transmits display data (display data signal, display clock signal) corresponding to display content to be displayed on the display means;
Display execution means (display IC 266) that performs display settings on the display means so that display content corresponds to the display data when the display data is transmitted by the display control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
comprising a plurality of the display means,
The display control means includes a sequential transmission means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) for sequentially transmitting the display data corresponding to each of the plurality of display means to the display execution means,
When the display data is transmitted by the display control means, the display execution means transmits display content corresponding to the display data to a display means to which the display data is set among the plurality of display means. The above display settings are made so that
The transmission interval of the display data from the sequential transmission means to the display execution means is such that the display execution means transmits the display data to each display means before the display corresponding to the display data can no longer be maintained in each display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the display setting is performed at a transmission interval.

According to feature h1, the display execution means performs display settings for the display means in accordance with the display data transmitted from the display control means, and thereby the display means is display-controlled so that the display content corresponds to the display data. Ru. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means. In this case, in a configuration where a plurality of display means are provided, the display execution means is not provided in one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of display means, but one display execution means is provided for the plurality of display means. Execution means are shared. This makes it possible to increase the number of display means while suppressing an increase in the number of display execution means. In addition, the transmission interval of display data from the display control means to the display execution means is such that the display setting by the display execution means for each display means is determined before the display corresponding to the display data can no longer be maintained on each display means. The transmission interval is set at which the transmission will be performed. As a result, even in a configuration where one display execution means is used for a plurality of display means, it is possible to appropriately display the display data on each display means. From the above, it is possible to provide a suitable configuration for controlling the display of the display means.

Feature h2. When transmitting the display data to the display execution means, the sequential transmission means transmits identifying information (type data signal, type clock signal) that enables identification of the type of the display means to which the display data is set. The gaming machine according to feature h1, characterized in that the information is transmitted to the display execution means.

According to feature h2, when display data is transmitted from the display control means, the display execution means sets the display data to the display means corresponding to the identifiable information transmitted from the display control means. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration of the display execution means even in a configuration in which one display execution means is shared by multiple display means.

Feature h3. The gaming machine according to feature h1 or h2, characterized in that the sequential transmission means transmits the display data so that an update cycle is repeated when each of the display means is set to the display data once in a predetermined order.

According to feature h3, the display control means only needs to change the display means to which display data is to be sent in a predetermined order, so that the processing configuration of the display control means can be simplified.

Feature h4. The sequential transmission means is configured to transmit data to one of the display means, even if the content of the display data for one of the display means is the same as the content of the display data when the display data was previously transmitted with the display means as the transmission target. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h3, wherein the gaming machine transmits the display data when the game machine becomes a game machine.

According to feature h4, even if the content of the display data to be transmitted has not been changed, the display data is transmitted. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display execution means is shared for multiple display means, it is possible to continue the same display on a specified display means.

Feature h5. The sequential transmission means executes a process for transmitting the display data in a predetermined interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) that is activated by interrupting a situation in which a predetermined process is being executed in the display control unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features h1 to h4.

According to feature h5, since the process for transmitting display data is executed in the predetermined interrupt process, it is possible to set the display data to each display means at a predetermined cycle. Therefore, even in a configuration in which one display execution means is used for multiple display means, before it becomes impossible to maintain the display corresponding to the display data on each display means, the It becomes possible to set the display data by the display execution means.

Feature h6. According to feature h5, the processing for transmitting the display data by the display execution means to the plurality of display means to be subjected to the display settings is integrated into the predetermined interrupt processing. Game machine.

According to feature h6, it is possible to set the display data to each display means to be set by the display execution means at the same cycle.

Feature h7. The display control means includes means for interrupting and activating a specific interrupt process (first timer interrupt process) while the predetermined process is being executed (a function for executing the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63). ,
The gaming machine according to feature h5 or h6, wherein the interrupt cycle of the predetermined interrupt process is shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process.

According to feature h7, a process in which display data is transmitted to the display execution means is executed in a predetermined interrupt process that has a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to transmit display data in a shorter period than in a configuration in which the process of transmitting display data to the display execution means is executed in specific interrupt processing.

Feature h8. The gaming machine described in feature h7, characterized in that a process for progressing the game is executed in the specific interrupt process.

Feature h8 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while allowing specific interrupt processing to be initiated at an appropriate period for executing processing to progress the game.

Feature h9. The gaming machine described in feature h7 or h8, characterized in that the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the specific interrupt process is being executed.

According to feature h9, the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the specific interrupt process is being executed, so that the transmission period of the display data can be set to a predetermined period even in a configuration in which the specific interrupt process is started by interrupting.

Feature h10. Features h7 to h9 characterized in that when the predetermined interrupt processing is started, the interruption of the specific interrupt processing is prohibited, and when the predetermined interrupt processing is ended, the interruption of the specific interrupt processing is permitted. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Feature h10 makes it possible to prevent a specific interrupt process from being executed in an interrupt situation where a specific interrupt process is being executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the process for transmitting display data.

Feature h11. The display control means is a means for executing processing at the time of starting supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (in the 33rd embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63). , in the 35th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of steps S8801 to S8819 in the main CPU 63, in the 36th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of steps S9401 to S9420 in the main CPU 63, and in the 37th embodiment In the 42nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9501 to S9518, and in the 42nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9901 to S9917.
The gaming machine according to any one of features h5 to h10, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature h11, it is possible to control the display of a plurality of display means even in a situation where processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the configuration is such that a predetermined interrupt process is activated by interrupting the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is possible to supply the operating power without complicating the processing configuration for the process at the start of the supply of operating power. It becomes possible to control the display of a plurality of display means in a situation where the processing at the time of starting is being executed.

Feature h12. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A configuration in which a setting value to be used can be changed in a state in which a process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine described in feature h11, wherein the sequential transmission means transmits the display data to the display execution means so that a display corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on a specified display means in the settable situation.

According to feature h12, when the setting value to be used is being set, the current setting value is displayed on a specified display means, making it easier to set the setting value to be used.

Feature h13. The display control means includes a means for executing a progress response process to control the progress of a game after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
the sequential transmission means transmits to the display execution means the display data for causing a corresponding display corresponding to a result of the execution of the progress corresponding process to be performed on at least a part of the plurality of display means,
The gaming machine according to feature h11 or h12, wherein the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting even after the process at the start of the supply of operating power has ended.

According to feature h13, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, multiple interrupts can be performed both in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It becomes possible to control the display of the display means.

In addition, for the configuration of features h1 to h13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P20, features P2 to P30, features P4 to P50, features P6 to P70, features P8 to P90, features P10 to P110, features P11 to P120, features P12 to P130, features P13 to P140, features P14 to P150, features P15 to P160, features P16 to P170, features P17 to P190, features P21 to P220, features P22 to P230, features P23 to P240, features P24 to P250, features P25 to P260, features P26 to P270, features P27 to P280, features P29 to P300, features P30 to P310, features P30 to P320, features P30 to P330, features P30 to P340, features P30 to P350, features P30 to P360, features P30 to P370, features P30 to P390, features P40 to P410, features P40 to P420, features P40 to P430, features P40 to P440, features P40 to P450, features P50 to P510, features P60 to P610, features P70 to P710, features P80 to P910, features P90 to P920, features P10 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature i group>
Feature i1. A first interrupt execution means (a function of executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that interrupts the other process and executes a first interrupt process based on the lapse of a first interrupt period while the other process is being executed;
A second interrupt execution means (a function of executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that interrupts the other process and executes a second interrupt process based on the lapse of a second interrupt period while the other process is being executed;
Equipped with
the second interrupt period is shorter than the first interrupt period,
A gaming machine characterized in that processing for controlling the display of predetermined display means (special chart display unit 37a, special chart reserved display unit 37b, regular chart display unit 38a, regular chart reserved display unit 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) is executed by the second interrupt processing.

According to feature i1, processing for display control of a specified display means is executed in a specified interrupt process that has a cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle of the specific interrupt process. This makes it possible to perform display control of the specified display means in a cycle shorter than that of a configuration in which processing for display control of a specified display means is executed in a specific interrupt process.

Feature i2. The gaming machine according to feature i1, wherein processing for advancing the game is executed in the first interrupt processing.

According to feature i2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while activating the first interrupt process at an appropriate cycle to execute the process for advancing the game.

Feature i3. The gaming machine according to feature i1 or i2, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the first interrupt process is being executed.

According to feature i3, the second interrupt process is activated by interrupting even when the first interrupt process is being executed, so even if the configuration is such that the first interrupt process is activated by interrupting, the predetermined display is It becomes possible to perform display control of the means at a predetermined period.

Feature i4. A gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i3, characterized in that an interrupt of the first interrupt process is prohibited when the second interrupt process is started, and an interrupt of the first interrupt process is permitted when the second interrupt process is ended.

According to feature i4, it is possible to prevent the first interrupt process from interrupting and being executed in a situation where the second interrupt process is being executed. This makes it possible to give priority to display control of a predetermined display means.

Feature i5. A means for executing processing at the time of starting supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (a function for executing main processing in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features i1 to i4, wherein the second interrupt process is started by interrupting even when the process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature i5, it is possible to control the display of a specified display means even in a situation where processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. In addition, since the second interrupt processing is configured to interrupt and start the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, it is possible to control the display of a specified display means in a situation where processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power.

Feature i6. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main side CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
In a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed, the configuration can be a setting enable situation in which the setting value to be used can be changed,
The second interrupt execution means is characterized in that the second interrupt processing executes processing for causing the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the current setting value in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine according to feature i5.

According to feature i6, when the setting value to be used is being set, the current setting value is displayed on a specified display means, making it easier to set the setting value to be used.

Feature i7. The gaming machine according to feature i5 or i6, wherein the second interrupt execution means executes the second interrupt processing based on the elapse of the second interrupt period even after the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power has ended.

According to feature i7, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, the predetermined interrupt processing can be performed both in a situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed and in a situation after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to control the display of the display means.

In addition, for the configuration of features i1 to i7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group h and feature group i can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration for displaying on the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature j1. Means for executing processing at the start of supply of operating power based on the start of supply of operating power (in the 33rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S7901 to S7918 in the main CPU 63, In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S8801 to S8819, in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S9401 to S9420, and in the 37th embodiment, the main CPU 63 (in the 42nd embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S9901 to S9917 in the main CPU 63);
Predetermined interrupt execution means that interrupts the process at the start of supply of operating power and executes a predetermined interrupt process (a function to execute the first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63, a function to execute the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature j1, even if the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the specified interrupt processing is interrupted and started, so it is possible to prioritize the execution of the processing set as the specified interrupt processing even immediately after the supply of operating power starts. In addition, since there is no need to set the processing set as the specified interrupt processing for the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the processing set as the specified interrupt processing even immediately after the supply of operating power starts without complicating the processing configuration of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power. As a result, it is possible to preferably perform processing when the supply of operating power starts.

Feature j2. The gaming machine described in feature j1, characterized in that the predetermined interrupt execution means executes processing for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (special chart display unit 37a, special chart reserved display unit 37b, ordinary chart display unit 38a, ordinary chart reserved display unit 38b, first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) by the predetermined interrupt processing.

Feature j2 makes it possible to display a specified display on a specified display means even immediately after the supply of operating power begins.

Feature j3. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the master CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A configuration in which a setting value to be used can be changed in a state in which a process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine described in feature j1 or j2 is characterized in that the specified interrupt execution means executes processing by the specified interrupt processing so that a display corresponding to the current setting value is displayed on a specified display means (fourth notification display device 204) in the settable situation.

According to feature j3, since the current setting value is displayed on the predetermined display means in a situation where the setting value to be used is being set, it becomes easier to perform the work of setting the setting value to be used. .

Features j4. According to any of features j1 to j3, the predetermined interrupt execution means executes the predetermined interrupt processing based on the elapse of a predetermined interrupt period even after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is completed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature j4, by using the predetermined interrupt processing, the predetermined interrupt processing can be performed both in the situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed and in the situation after the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is completed. It becomes possible to execute processing set as interrupt processing.

Feature j5. The gaming machine described in any one of features j1 to j4, characterized in that the predetermined interrupt execution means executes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage in the predetermined interrupt process.

According to feature j5, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, so that a power outage occurs in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed. If this occurs, it becomes possible to deal with it appropriately.

Feature j6. The predetermined interrupt process includes a progress response process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the master CPU 63) that is executed to control the progress of the game,
When the predetermined interrupt process is started by interrupting in a situation where the process at the start of the supply of the operating power is being executed, the power outage monitoring process is executed, but the progress response process is not executed,
The gaming machine described in feature j5 is characterized in that when the specified interrupt process is started in an interrupt manner while the post-termination process (steps S8822 to S8825 in the main CPU 63) is being executed after the process at the start of the supply of operating power has been completed, both the power outage monitoring process and the progress response process can be executed.

According to feature j6, the occurrence of a power outage can be monitored in a situation where a process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed by using a predetermined interrupt process that can be interrupted and activated in a situation where a post-termination process is being executed. In a configuration where operations are performed periodically, even if a predetermined interrupt process is interrupted and started while the process at the start of the supply of operating power is being executed, the process corresponding to the progress to control the progress of the game will not be executed. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, for the configuration of features j1 to j6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group j can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be performed appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group k>
Feature k1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing corresponding game history information in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) when a predetermined event occurs due to the execution of a game;
An information deriving means (a function for executing the process of step SA201 in the master CPU 63) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to a game result by utilizing the history information stored in the history storage means;
A mode information display control means (a function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the information display means (the first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
A predetermined corresponding display control means (a function of executing the processing of step SA320 in the main CPU 63 and the second timer interrupt processing) that causes a predetermined corresponding display (pre-shift display) to be performed on the information display means before a display corresponding to the mode information is newly started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature k1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Further, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game, and the information display means displays a display corresponding to the derived mode information. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Furthermore, a predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means before a new display corresponding to the mode information is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. As a result, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it becomes possible to cause the information display means to display a predetermined corresponding display with priority over the display corresponding to the aspect information, and to use the information display means to It becomes possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Feature k2. Equipped with a period lapse determination means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for determining that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of a predetermined period end trigger;
The gaming machine described in feature k1 is characterized in that the specified corresponding display control means determines that the specified display trigger has occurred when the period elapsed determination means determines that the specified period has elapsed, and causes the specified corresponding display to be displayed on the information display means.

According to feature k2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined corresponding display is made on the information display means, and then a new display corresponding to the mode information is started on the information display means. This makes it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to recognize that the mode information displayed on the information display means is from after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Feature k3: The information deriving means derives the behavior information by using the history information corresponding to the predetermined event that occurred after the predetermined period, based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed being identified by the period elapse identifying means,
The gaming machine described in feature k2, characterized in that the specified corresponding display control means, based on the period elapsed determination means determining that the specified period has elapsed, causes the specified corresponding display to be displayed on the information display means before the information display means displays the information corresponding to the behavior information derived by the information derivation means using the historical information corresponding to the specified event that occurred after the specified period.

According to feature k3, in a configuration in which new derivation of behavior information is performed based on the passage of a predetermined period of time, when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means, and then a display corresponding to the newly derived behavior information is performed after the passage of the predetermined period of time. This enables the manager of the game hall to know whether the display corresponding to the behavior information on the information display means is a display corresponding to the newly derived behavior information after the passage of the predetermined period of time.

Feature k4. Means for erasing the history information stored in the history storage means based on the fact that the predetermined period has passed by the period elapse specifying means (executing the process of step SA217 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature k3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to feature k4, since the history information in the history information storage means is deleted when a predetermined period of time has passed, it is possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the history information storage means.

Feature k5. Based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has passed by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the above-mentioned aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period-related aspect information ),
The mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is displayed,
The predetermined correspondence display control means displays the period correspondence newly stored in the aspect information storage means by the storage execution means based on the fact that the period elapse specifying means specifies that the predetermined period has elapsed. The game according to any one of features k2 to k4, characterized in that the predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means before the display corresponding to the mode information is performed on the information display means. Machine.

According to feature k5, past behavior information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding behavior information, and a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information is performed by the information display means. This allows the manager of the amusement hall to understand the past period-corresponding behavior information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined period has elapsed, after the information display means has performed a predetermined corresponding display, a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information newly derived due to the elapse of the predetermined period is performed. This allows the manager of the amusement hall to understand whether the display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information on the information display means corresponds to the period-corresponding behavior information newly derived based on the elapse of the predetermined period.

Feature k6: The mode information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the period-corresponding mode information corresponding to each of the different predetermined periods;
The gaming machine described in feature k5, wherein the mode information display control means controls the display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to each of the multiple period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed.

According to feature k6, a plurality of pieces of past period-corresponding form information derived in units of a predetermined period are stored, and a display corresponding to the plurality of period-corresponding form information is performed on the information display means. It becomes possible to compare the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event corresponding to a predetermined period.

Feature k7. In a situation where a display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, the information display means is set to a pre-switching state (interval non-display state) before displaying a display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k6, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing the processing of step SA316 and the second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63.

According to feature k7, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means returns to the pre-switching state, allowing the manager of the amusement hall to clearly understand that the mode information to be displayed has been switched. In this case, the configuration of feature k1 is provided, and a predetermined corresponding display is performed on the information display means based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. This makes it possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger by using the information display means that displays corresponding to different mode information with the pre-switching state in between.

Feature k8. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, wherein the predetermined corresponding display control means, when the predetermined display trigger occurs, starts the predetermined corresponding display on the information display means even if the display duration period of the display corresponding to the mode information has not elapsed.

According to feature k8, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started even if the display corresponding to the mode information is in the middle. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify at an early stage that a predetermined display trigger has occurred.

Feature k9. When the predetermined display trigger occurs during the display duration period of the display corresponding to the aspect information, the predetermined corresponding display control means controls the predetermined corresponding display to the information display unit after the display duration period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k7, characterized in that the gaming machine is started with

According to feature k9, even if a predetermined display trigger occurs, the predetermined corresponding display is started after the display corresponding to the mode information displayed at that time is completed. This makes it possible to notify that a predetermined display trigger has occurred while not interfering with the display corresponding to the mode information that is already being performed.

Feature k10. comprising mode information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the mode information derived by the information derivation means,
The aspect information storage means has a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , a second history area 313, and a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k9.

According to feature k10, since notifications corresponding to each of a plurality of aspect information are executed sequentially, it is possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods while suppressing the number of information display means. becomes. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is executed sequentially according to the predetermined display order, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the type of mode information to be displayed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature k11. The gaming machine according to feature k10, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to feature k11, since a predetermined display order of displays corresponding to aspect information is determined in association with a plurality of specific storage areas, when starting a new display corresponding to one aspect information, the display target It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for specifying the type of aspect information.

Feature k12. When causing the information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display has been performed by the information display means, the mode information display control means may display information in the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to feature k10 or k11, characterized in that the game machine starts from a display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

According to feature k12, after the predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the display starts from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. Thereby, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it becomes possible to confirm the display corresponding to the mode information again from the first order of the predetermined display order.

Feature k13. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the fact that the period elapse specifying means specifies that the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game results in the period in the plurality of specific storage areas as period-corresponding mode information;
Equipped with
Any one of features k10 to k12, characterized in that the storage execution means stores the period-corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas in accordance with the order derived by the information derivation means. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature k13, it becomes possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information according to the order in which it was derived.

Feature k14. The gaming machine according to any one of features k1 to k13, wherein the information derivation means executes an information derivation process for deriving the aspect information based on the occurrence of a process execution trigger, and executes the information derivation process multiple times from the start of derivation of the aspect information to the completion of derivation of the aspect information.

According to feature k14, the information derivation process is executed multiple times from when the derivation of the behavior information is started until the derivation of the behavior information is completed, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the information derivation process compared to a configuration in which the derivation of the behavior information is completed in a single information derivation process.

Feature k15. A period lapse determination means (a function for executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) for determining that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger to the occurrence of a predetermined period end trigger;
a storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps SA203 and SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing, based on the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed by the period elapse determination means, the status information corresponding to the game results during the predetermined period derived by the information derivation means using the history information stored in the history storage means as period-corresponding status information in a status information storage means (a calculation result storage area 234);
Equipped with
the behavior information display control means controls display of the information display means so that a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information stored in the behavior information storage means is performed,
The gaming machine described in feature k14 is characterized in that the specified corresponding display control means determines that the specified display trigger has occurred when the period elapsed determination means determines that the specified period has elapsed, and causes the specified corresponding display to be displayed on the information display means.

According to feature k15, past behavior information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding behavior information, and a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information is performed by the information display means. This allows the manager of the game hall to understand the past period-corresponding behavior information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information newly derived due to the passage of the predetermined period is performed after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means. This allows the manager of the game hall to understand whether the display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information in the information display means corresponds to the newly derived period-corresponding behavior information based on the passage of the predetermined period. In addition, since it is possible to perform the predetermined corresponding display during the period in which the period-corresponding behavior information is being derived, it is possible to prevent a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information from being performed regardless of the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed and the period-corresponding behavior information is being derived.

Feature k16. The gaming machine described in feature k15, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence for a period longer than the longest period required for the information derivation means to derive one of the aspect information.

According to feature k16, when a predetermined period has passed and period correspondence information is in the process of being derived, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means.

In addition, for the configuration of features k1 to k16, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P20, features P2 to P30, features P4 to P50, features P6 to P70, features P8 to P90, features P10 to P110, features P11 to P120, features P12 to P130, features P13 to P140, features P14 to P150, features P15 to P160, features P16 to P170, features P17 to P190, features P20 to P220, features P21 to P230, features P22 to P240, features P23 to P250, features P24 to P260, features P25 to P300, features P26 to P310, features P27 to P320, features P28 to P330, features P29 to P40, features P30 to P41, features P31 to P42, features P32 to P43, features P33 to P44, features P34 to P45, features P35 to P46, features P36 to P47, features P37 to P48, features P38 to P49, features P40 to P51, features P41 to P52, features P42 to P53, features P43 to P44, features P44 to P45, features P45 to P54, features P46 to P47, features P47 to P48, features P48 to P55, features P4 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics group>
Feature l1. History storage execution means (normal ball entry management processing in the main side CPU 63) that stores game history information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined event due to the execution of a game in the history storage means (normal counter area 231) ) and
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step SA201 in the main CPU 63) for deriving mode information (base value) corresponding to the result of the game using the history information stored in the history storage means;
aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) for storing the aspect information derived by the information deriving means;
Mode information display control means (main side) that controls the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the mode information stored in the mode information storage means is displayed. (a function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the CPU 63);
Equipped with
The aspect information storage means has a plurality of specific storage areas (current area 311, first history area 312) so as to be able to store each of the plurality of aspect information derived at different timings by the information derivation means. , a second history area 313, and a third history area 314),
The aspect information display control means controls the information display means so that displays corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas are sequentially executed according to a predetermined display order. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature 11, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Furthermore, the history information stored in the history storage means is used to derive the mode information corresponding to the result of the game, and the information display means displays a display corresponding to the derived mode information. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events.

Moreover, since the aspect information storage means stores a plurality of aspect information derived at different timings and the notification corresponding to each of the plurality of aspect information is sequentially executed, the number of information display means can be suppressed. , it becomes possible to individually grasp the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event in a plurality of periods. In addition, since the display corresponding to each of the plurality of mode information stored in the plurality of specific storage areas is executed sequentially according to the predetermined display order, the administrator of the game hall can grasp the type of mode information to be displayed. It becomes easier to do.

Feature l2. The gaming machine according to feature 11, wherein a predetermined display order is determined in association with the plurality of specific storage areas.

According to feature l2, a predetermined display order for displaying the aspect information is determined in association with a plurality of specific storage areas, so that when starting a new display corresponding to one aspect information, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for identifying the type of aspect information to be displayed.

Feature l3. A predetermined response display that causes a predetermined response display (pre-shift display) to be performed on the information display means before a new display corresponding to the mode information is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. comprising a control means (a function of executing the process of step SA320 and the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63),
When causing the information display means to display a display corresponding to the mode information after the predetermined correspondence display has been performed by the information display means, the mode information display control means may display information in the first order in the predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to feature 11 or 12, characterized in that the game machine starts from the display corresponding to the corresponding aspect information.

According to feature l3, after a predetermined corresponding display is performed based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the display starts from the display corresponding to the aspect corresponding to the first order in the predetermined display order. This makes it possible to check the display corresponding to the aspect information from the first order in the predetermined display order again when a predetermined display trigger occurs.

Feature l4. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the period elapse specifying means specifying that the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined information derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. storage execution means (a function of executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the mode information corresponding to the game result in the period in the plurality of specific storage areas as period-corresponding mode information;
Equipped with
Any one of features 11 to 13, characterized in that the storage execution means stores the period-corresponding mode information in the plurality of specific storage areas according to the order derived by the information derivation means. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature 14, it becomes possible to confirm the period correspondence mode information according to the order in which it was derived.

Feature l5. In a situation where a display corresponding to the mode information is being performed, the information display means is set to a pre-switching state (interval non-display state) before displaying a display corresponding to the mode information different from the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features 11 to 14, further comprising means for executing step SA316 processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63.

According to feature l5, when the mode information to be displayed is switched, the information display means returns to the pre-switching state, allowing the manager of the amusement hall to clearly understand that the mode information to be displayed has been switched.

Note that for the configuration of features l1 to l5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature group m>
Feature m1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing normal ball entry management processing in the main CPU 63) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when the game is executed in the history storage means (normal counter area 231);
An information deriving means (a function for executing the process of step SA201 in the master CPU 63) for deriving aspect information (base value) corresponding to a game result by utilizing the history information stored in the history storage means;
Equipped with
The information derivation means executes an information derivation process for deriving the status information based on the occurrence of a processing execution trigger, and is characterized in that the information derivation process is executed multiple times from the start of derivation of the status information to the completion of derivation of the status information.

According to feature m1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. By storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, unauthorized access to and unauthorized modification of the history information can be prevented. Furthermore, by using the history information stored in the history storage means to derive mode information corresponding to gaming results in a predetermined period, management results of gaming history such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be grasped. becomes possible. In addition, since the information derivation process is executed multiple times from the start of deriving the aspect information until the derivation of the aspect information is completed, compared to a configuration in which the derivation of the aspect information is completed in one information derivation process. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for executing information derivation processing.

Feature m2. a period elapse specifying means (a function of executing the process of step SA210 in the main CPU 63) that specifies that a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of a predetermined period start trigger until the predetermined period end trigger occurs;
Based on the fact that the predetermined period of time has elapsed has been specified by the period elapse specifying means, the predetermined information is derived by the information deriving means using the history information stored in the history storage means. Storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of step SA203 and step SA216 in the main CPU 63) for storing the above-mentioned aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in the period in the aspect information storage means (calculation result storage area 234) as period-related aspect information )and,
mode information display control means (for controlling the display of the information display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) so that a display corresponding to the period-corresponding mode information stored in the mode information storage means is performed; a function of executing display processing and second timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63;
Predetermined correspondence display control means (step SA320 in the main CPU 63 processing and second timer interrupt processing);
The gaming machine according to feature m1, comprising:

According to feature m2, past behavior information derived in units of a predetermined period is stored as period-corresponding behavior information, and a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information is performed by the information display means. This allows the manager of the game hall to understand the past period-corresponding behavior information derived in units of a predetermined period by checking the information display means. In addition, when a predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information newly derived due to the elapse of the predetermined period is performed after the predetermined corresponding display is performed by the information display means. This allows the manager of the game hall to understand whether the display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information in the information display means corresponds to the newly derived period-corresponding behavior information based on the elapse of the predetermined period. In addition, since it is possible to make the predetermined corresponding display during the period in which the period-corresponding behavior information is being derived, it is possible to prevent a display corresponding to the period-corresponding behavior information from being displayed regardless of the fact that the predetermined period has elapsed and the period-corresponding behavior information is being derived.

Feature m3. The gaming machine described in feature m2, wherein the predetermined correspondence display control means causes the information display means to display the predetermined correspondence for a period longer than the longest period required for the information derivation means to derive one of the aspect information.

According to feature m3, when a predetermined period has passed and the period correspondence information is in the process of being derived, a predetermined correspondence display is performed on the information display means.

In addition, for the configuration of features m1 to m3, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group k, feature group l, and feature group m can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, in which the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature n group>
Feature n1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 45th embodiment, a function and step of making an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63 A function to make an affirmative determination in SA417, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, and a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA917),
Based on the fact that the second setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) is performed when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used that is set by the setting means is determined. a notification generating means (a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The situation generation means is configured to enable the setting even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped during the settable situation and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. (in the 45th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA412 in the main CPU 63, and in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63) A game machine characterized by being equipped with a function to perform the following functions.

According to feature n1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so any act of attempting to illegally change the set value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible.

Further, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting possible state, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the setting possible state will be reached. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value to be used is being changed, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value to be used will be notified rather than the setting value to be used. It becomes possible to give priority to the change of values, and it becomes possible to prevent the game from being started even though the change of the setting value to be used has not actually been completed.

Feature n2. A gaming machine according to feature n1, characterized in that it is equipped with a status notification means (a function for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63 and a function for executing second timer interrupt processing) that notifies the user of a setting value that is being changed in the setting possible status.

According to feature n2, when the setting is possible, the setting value being changed is notified, so that it is possible to change the setting value while understanding the current setting value. In addition, by notifying the setting value being changed in this way when the setting is possible, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power starts, the setting is possible, so that it is possible to actually check the setting value even if the configuration is such that the setting value change operation takes priority.

Feature n3. A feature characterized in that both the situation notification means and the notification generation means display target setting values on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine described in n2.

According to feature n3, the target setting value is displayed on the specified display means whether the setting value is changed or confirmed, so that the specified display means can be used for both situations. Also, even if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started and the configuration is such that the setting is possible, the setting value is displayed on the specified display means when the setting is possible, so that the manager of the amusement hall who performed the second setting-related operation can visually check the setting value by looking at the specified display means.

Feature n4. In feature n3, the situation notification means causes the predetermined display means to display a display corresponding to the setting value in the process of being changed and a display corresponding to the setting possible situation. The game machine described.

According to feature n4, when the setting is possible, not only is a display corresponding to the setting value being changed displayed on a specified display means, but also a display corresponding to the setting being possible. This makes it easier for the amusement hall manager to understand that the setting is possible when the setting is possible despite the second setting-related operation being performed if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible state and then the supply of operating power is started again.

Feature n5. The after-start generation means is configured to enable the set value to be changed from the set value that was selected when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable state when the settable state is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n4.

According to feature n5, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting possible state, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to continue changing the setting value from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped.

Feature n6: A setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
a selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The situation generation means includes a means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the settable situation (a function for executing the processing of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
the setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation, thereby setting a setting value that was a selection target in the setting possible situation as a target for use;
A gaming machine described in any one of features n1 to n5, characterized in that, when the settable situation is reached, the post-start generation means makes it possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence memory means if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the settable situation.

According to feature n6, a setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and a selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the setting possible situation are provided, so that it is possible to change the setting value in the setting possible situation while storing and holding information on the setting value that was set before the setting possible situation was started. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting possible situation and then resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information that was stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting possible situation, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to continue the operation of changing the setting value from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped.

Feature n7. The situation generating means may be configured to generate the first setting-related operation when the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. Means for making it possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA417 in the main CPU 63, In the 46th embodiment, the gaming machine according to feature n6 is provided with a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature n7, if the second setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible situation, the supply of operating power is stopped. It is possible to resume changing the setting value from the setting value that was subject to change before the change was made, while the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power was stopped in the middle of the setting possible situation. In this case, if the second setting-related operation is performed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to vary the initial set value when starting to change the set value depending on the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

Feature n8. The gaming machine described in any one of features n1 to n7, characterized in that the post-start generating means can cause the settable state to occur when the supply of operating power is stopped during the settable state and the supply of operating power is then started, even if neither the first setting-related operation nor the second setting-related operation is performed.

According to feature n8, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a setting possible situation, both the first setting-related operation and the second setting-related operation are performed when the subsequent operation power supply is started. Even if the setting value is not changed, the setting may become possible, so if the operating power supply is stopped while the setting value is being changed, the setting value should be changed when the operating power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to actively create a situation where this is possible.

Feature n9. The first setting-related operation includes setting the setting key insertion part (setting key insertion part 68a) to a predetermined corresponding state (turned ON state) by the setting key,
The situation generating means terminates the settable situation based on the setting key insertion section specifying that the setting key has changed from the predetermined corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (OFF operated state). The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function of executing the processing of step SA709 and step SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature n9, since it is necessary to use the setting key to put the setting key insertion part into a specific corresponding state in order to make the setting possible, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In this case, the setting possible state does not end just because the setting key insertion part is in a specific corresponding state, but ends when the setting key insertion part is changed from the specific corresponding state to the specific corresponding state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the setting possible state and the supply of operating power is then started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific corresponding state, the setting possible state is not immediately ended, but the setting possible state is ended by changing the setting key insertion part from the specific corresponding state to the specific corresponding state and then again from the specific corresponding state to the specific corresponding state, so that it is possible to end the setting possible state at a timing that is preferable for the manager of the game hall.

Feature n10. The situation generation means is configured to detect a situation when the supply of operating power is stopped while the notification generation means is notifying the setting value of the target to be used, and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features n1 to n9, characterized in that when the first setting-related operation is performed, the setting becomes possible.

According to feature n10, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value of the target to be used is being notified, if the first setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power starts thereafter, the setting becomes available. This makes it possible to prioritize changing the setting value over checking the setting value.

Note that for the configuration of features n1 to n10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group o>
Feature o1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
midway restarting means for restarting the predetermined setting-related process from the middle after the supply of operating power is subsequently started based on the fact that the supply of operating power has been stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed; In the 45th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA412, and the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA414, and in the 46th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916. function to make a positive judgment), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature o1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, the specified setting-related process will be resumed from the middle when the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the specified setting-related process, it is possible to continue the specified setting-related process when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Features o2. The setting-related execution means executes a predetermined setting-related operation (if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, an ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c; the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation operation). If it is a process, the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a.
The gaming machine according to feature o1, wherein the midway restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed.

According to feature o2, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the predetermined setting-related process is restarted from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. , it becomes possible to give priority to restarting a predetermined setting-related process from the middle.

Feature o3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started;
The intermediate restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started;
If the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, and the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the mid-resuming means causes the The gaming machine according to feature o2, characterized in that the predetermined setting-related process is not restarted from the middle, but the predetermined setting-related process is newly started by the setting-related execution means.

According to feature o3, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of illegally executing the predetermined setting-related process. In this case, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related process and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the predetermined setting-related process is resumed from the middle even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed, so that it is possible to prioritize resuming the predetermined setting-related process from the middle. On the other hand, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related process and then the supply of operating power is resumed, if the predetermined setting-related operation is performed, the predetermined setting-related process is not resumed from the middle but is started anew. As a result, when the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to select either starting the predetermined setting-related process anew or resuming the predetermined setting-related process from the middle depending on whether the predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature o4. The predetermined setting-related operation includes the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) being in a predetermined corresponding state (ON state) by the setting key,
The gaming machine described in feature o2 or o3 is characterized in that the setting-related execution means is equipped with a means for terminating the specified setting-related processing based on determining that the setting key insertion section has been changed from the specified corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (state turned OFF) by the setting key (a function for executing processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature o4, in order to start a predetermined setting-related process, it is necessary to use a setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state, and therefore, it is impossible to perform an act of unauthorized execution of a predetermined setting-related process. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, even if the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific compatible state, the The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specific compatibility state to the predetermined compatibility state and then further changing from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. Therefore, it becomes possible to finish the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature o5. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to feature o5, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to resume changing the setting value from the setting value that was in the middle of the change. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to continue changing the setting value.

Feature o6. The predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing the setting value to be used,
a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) that stores setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the predetermined setting related process;
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means includes:
The predetermined setting-related process includes means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means (main side a function of executing the process of step SA708 in the CPU 63);
As the predetermined setting-related process, when a termination trigger occurs, information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is stored as the setting correspondence information in the setting correspondence storage means, means for setting the setting value that was the selection target to be used (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, the midway restart means restarts the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features o1 to o5, characterized in that it is possible to change the game machine.

According to feature o6, a setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used and a selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being changed in the setting possible situation are provided, so that it is possible to change the setting value in the setting possible situation while storing and holding information on the setting value that was set before the setting possible situation was started. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information that was stored in the selection correspondence storage means when the supply of operating power was stopped. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to continue the operation of changing the setting value from the state immediately before the supply of operating power was stopped.

Feature o7. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on a predetermined setting-related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started;
The intermediate restart means restarts the predetermined setting-related process from the middle based on the fact that the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started;
The setting-related execution means is configured to perform, in a case where the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, and when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the predetermined setting-related operation is performed. , means for making it possible to change the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step SA417 in the main CPU 63); (in the 46th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature o7, when the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value, the operating power is While it is possible to resume changing the set value from the set value that was subject to change before the supply of power was stopped, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the set value is being changed If a predetermined setting-related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to vary the initial set value when starting to change the set value depending on the operation content when the supply of operating power is restarted.

In addition, for the configuration of features o1 to o7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature p group>
Feature p1. A means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a use target from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
and a setting-related execution means (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function for executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value based on a predetermined setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, and an ON operation of the setting key insertion unit 68a if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process),
The setting-related execution means is a post-supply execution means which, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related processing is completed, executes the specified setting-related processing even if the specified setting-related operation is not performed after the supply of operating power is subsequently started (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making a positive judgment at step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making a positive judgment at step SA414 in the main CPU 63; in the 46th embodiment, a function of making a positive judgment at steps SA905 and SA916 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature p1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. Also, it is possible to execute a specified setting-related process by performing a specified setting-related operation. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the specified setting-related process will be executed even if the specified setting-related operation has not been performed. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the specified setting-related process.

Feature p2: The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started;
The gaming machine according to feature p1, wherein the post-supply execution means executes the specified setting-related processing when the supply of operating power starts even if the specified setting-related operation is not performed.

According to feature p2, since a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on a predetermined setting-related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started, an act of causing a predetermined setting-related process to be executed fraudulently. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, if the supply of operating power is restarted after the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of a predetermined setting-related process, the predetermined setting-related process will be executed even if the predetermined setting-related operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature p3. The predetermined setting-related operation includes the setting key insertion section (the setting key insertion section 68a) being in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which the setting key is operated to ON) by the setting key,
The gaming machine described in feature p1 or p2 is characterized in that the setting-related execution means is equipped with a means for terminating the specified setting-related processing based on determining that the setting key insertion section has been changed from the specified corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (a state where the setting key has been turned OFF) by the setting key (a function for executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature p3, in order to start a predetermined setting-related process, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state, so it is impossible to perform an act of unauthorized execution of a predetermined setting-related process. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, even if the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific compatible state, the The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specific compatibility state to the predetermined compatibility state and then further changing from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. Therefore, it becomes possible to finish the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature p4. The post-supply execution means is configured to perform a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started thereafter even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p3, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is not executed in the case where the setting-related process is performed.

According to feature p4, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of a specific setting-related process, if the supply of operating power is started thereafter and a specific related operation is performed, the specific setting-related process is not executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of a specific setting-related process, if there is no need to execute the specific setting-related process thereafter, it is possible to prevent the specific setting-related process from being executed by performing a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature p5. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p4, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying setting values to be used.

According to feature p5, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, when the supply of operating power is subsequently started again, the notification of the setting value is restarted even if a specific setting-related operation is not performed. This makes it possible to give priority to the notification of the setting value.

Feature p6. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that a specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 45th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function of making an affirmative determination at step SA417 in the main CPU 63) (in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA917);
Equipped with
The post-supply execution means executes the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process. , the predetermined setting-related process is not executed;
The situation generating means is configured to perform the specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started after that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process. The gaming machine according to feature p5, characterized in that when the setting is possible, the setting becomes possible.

According to feature p6, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if the supply of operating power is started thereafter and a specific related operation is performed, the setting value is not notified, but a setting possible state in which the setting value can be changed is established. This makes it possible to prioritize the occurrence of a setting possible state over the notification of the setting value when a specific related operation is performed to set the setting possible state in which the setting value can be changed.

Feature p7. The gaming machine according to any one of features p1 to p6, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for changing a setting value to be used.

According to feature p7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to change the set value when the supply of operating power is resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the set value, it is possible to continue the work of changing the set value when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Note that for the configuration of features p1 to p7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Q group>
Feature q1. Means for executing profit grant processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values at multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution unit that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means executes a specific related operation (predetermined setting-related processing) when the supply of operating power is started after that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed. If the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process, a RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, and if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, a RAM clear operation) is performed, the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature q1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect that the more advantageous setting value will be the setting value to be used. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, if a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the specified setting-related process will not be executed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, if there is no need to execute the specified setting-related process afterwards, it is possible to prevent the specified setting-related process from being executed by performing a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature q2. The gaming machine described in feature q1, wherein the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to feature q2, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if the supply of operating power is started afterwards and a specific related operation is performed, the setting is Value notification is not restarted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if there is no need to notify the setting value afterwards, when the supply of operating power is started. By performing specific related operations, it is possible to prevent setting values from being notified.

Feature q3. The setting-related execution means executes a predetermined setting-related operation (if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process, an ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c; the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation operation). If it is a process, the predetermined setting-related process is executed based on the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a, and the supply of operating power is performed before the predetermined setting-related process is completed. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, if the specific related operation is performed instead of the predetermined setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the predetermined setting related process is not executed. The gaming machine according to q1 or q2.

According to feature q3, since it is necessary to perform a predetermined setting-related operation in order to perform a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of fraudulently executing a predetermined setting-related process.

Feature q4. The gaming machine described in Feature q3, characterized in that the setting-related execution means is provided with a means for executing the predetermined setting-related processing even if the predetermined setting-related operation has not been performed if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed and the supply of operating power is then started and the specific related operation has not been performed (in the 45th embodiment, a function for making a positive determination at step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a positive determination at step SA414 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature q4, if the supply of operating power is stopped before a specific setting-related process is completed, it is possible to select whether or not to execute a specific setting-related process without performing a specific setting-related operation, depending on whether or not a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature q5. The predetermined setting-related operation includes the setting key insertion section (the setting key insertion section 68a) being in a predetermined corresponding state (a state in which it is operated to be ON) by the setting key,
The gaming machine described in feature q4 is characterized in that the setting-related execution means is equipped with a means for terminating the specified setting-related processing based on determining that the setting key insertion section has been changed from the specified corresponding state to a specific corresponding state (a state where the setting key has been turned OFF) by the setting key (a function for executing the processing of step SA504 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the processing of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature q5, in order to start a predetermined setting-related process, it is necessary to use the setting key to bring the setting key insertion part into a predetermined compatible state. It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In this case, the predetermined setting-related processing does not end only when the setting key insertion section is in the specific compatibility state, but ends when the setting key insertion section is changed from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related processing is completed, and the supply of operating power is subsequently started while the setting key insertion part is in a specific compatible state, the The predetermined setting-related processing is not terminated, and the predetermined setting-related processing is terminated by changing the setting key insertion section from the specific compatibility state to the predetermined compatibility state and then further changing from the predetermined compatibility state to the specific compatibility state. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the predetermined setting-related processing at a timing that is convenient for the administrator of the gaming hall.

Feature q6. A gaming machine according to any one of features q1 to q5, characterized in that it is equipped with a separate execution means for executing a separate process different from the predetermined setting-related process based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing only a RAM clear process in the main CPU 63 and not executing a setting value update process if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting confirmation process, or a function for executing a RAM clear process and a setting value update process in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing only a RAM clear process in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment and not executing a setting value update process if the predetermined setting-related process is a setting value update process).

According to feature q6, when the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed by using a specific related operation performed to execute another process, the supply of operating power is subsequently stopped. It is possible to prevent a predetermined setting-related process from being executed when the process is started.

Feature q7. The gaming machine according to feature q6, wherein the separate execution means executes the separate process based on the specific related operation being performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed.

According to feature q7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the supply of operating power is started after that, and a specific related operation is performed. It becomes possible to give priority to the execution of another process over a predetermined setting-related process.

Feature q8. In feature q6 or q7, the predetermined setting-related process is a process for notifying a setting value to be used, and the separate process is a process for changing a setting value to be used. The game machine described.

According to feature q8, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the notification of the setting value will not be resumed. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting value is being notified, if there is no need to notify the setting value after that, it is possible to prevent the notification of the setting value by performing a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is started. Also, as an operation for preventing the notification of the setting value in this way, it is possible to use a specific related operation for executing a process to change the setting value.

Note that for the configuration of features q1 to q8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic r group>
Feature r1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step SA709 in the main CPU 63) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
Situation generation means (in the 45th embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63 In the 46th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63, and the function of making an affirmative determination in step SA917 in the main CPU 63. )and,
a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The situation generation means is means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. (a function of executing the process of step SA708 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting value that was the selection target in the setting possible situation is set as the usage target.

According to feature r1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, a setting correspondence storage means for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and a selection correspondence storage means for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation are provided. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the setting possible situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the setting possible situation started.

Feature r2. The gaming machine according to feature r1, wherein the situation generating means is provided with a first change executing means (a function of making a positive determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that enables a change of a setting value from a setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the previous setting possible situation in the setting possible situation that occurs after the setting possible situation ends before the occurrence of the termination trigger.

Feature r2. When a configurable situation is started after the configurable situation has ended before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means. As a result, even if the configurable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs, when the configurable situation is resumed, it is possible to continue the change operation of the setting value from the setting value last selected in the previous configurable situation.

Feature r3. The situation generating means generates a setting corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible situation that occurs after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to feature r2, further comprising a second change execution means (a function of making a negative determination in step SA701 in the main CPU 63) that allows the setting value to be changed from the value.

According to feature r3, when a configurable situation is started after the configurable situation ends before the termination trigger occurs, the setting value is changed from the setting value that was last selected in the previous configurable situation. Not only is it possible to restart the setting, but also it corresponds to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means when the setting possible situation is started after the setting possible situation ends before the termination trigger occurs. It becomes possible to change the setting value from the setting value. This allows the initial setting value when starting to change the setting value to be different depending on the situation when the settable situation is restarted.

Feature r4. The gaming machine described in feature r3, wherein the second change execution means enables the change of the setting value from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means in the setting possible situation that occurs after the setting possible situation that ended due to the occurrence of the ending trigger.

According to feature r4, in normal setting possible situations, the setting value will be changed from the currently used setting value.

Feature r5. The gaming machine according to feature r3 or r4, characterized in that the situation generating means includes means (a function for executing the processes of steps SA405, SA412, and SA417 in the main CPU 63) for causing one of the following situations to occur: a situation in which the setting value can be changed from the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means, and a situation in which the setting value can be changed from the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means, based on a specific related operation being performed when the setting possible situation begins after the setting possible situation ends before the end trigger occurs in the setting possible situation.

According to feature r5, when a configurable situation starts after a configurable situation ends before an end trigger occurs, the amusement hall manager can select whether to resume changing the setting value from the setting value last selected in the previous configurable situation, or to start changing the setting value from the setting value currently being used.

Feature r6. In the setting possible situation, the setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature r6, it is possible to change the setting value while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible state.

Feature r7. A gaming machine according to any one of features r1 to r6, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63) for displaying the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means on a predetermined display means (first to fourth display devices 201 to 204) in a situation where the setting is not possible.

According to feature r7, it is possible to check the current setting values of the target to be used as needed.

In addition, for the configuration of features r1 to r7, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

According to the invention relating to the above n group of features, the o group of features, the p group of features, the q group of features, and the r group of features, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding the setting values that determine the advantage of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Features group>
Feature s1. A predetermined response start means for starting a predetermined response process (setting confirmation process, setting value update process) based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) is in a predetermined response state (ON operation state) by a predetermined key (in the 45th embodiment, a function for making a positive determination at step SA413 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a positive determination at step SA417 in the main CPU 63; in the 46th embodiment, a function for making a positive determination at step SA913 in the main CPU 63 and a function for making a positive determination at step SA917);
A predetermined response end means (a function for executing the processes of steps SA709 and SA710 in the main CPU 63) that ends the predetermined response process based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion unit has been changed from the predetermined response state to a specific response state (a state in which the predetermined key insertion unit has been turned off) by the predetermined key;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature s1, in order to start the predetermined response process, it is necessary to use a predetermined key to put the predetermined key insertion part into a predetermined response state, making it difficult to perform acts that attempt to start the predetermined response process illegally. In this case, the predetermined response process does not end just because the predetermined key insertion part is in a specific response state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion part is changed from a predetermined response state to a specific response state. As a result, even if the predetermined response process is started in a situation where the predetermined key insertion part is in a specific response state for some reason, the predetermined response process is not immediately ended, but is ended by changing the predetermined key insertion part from a specific response state to a predetermined response state and then again from the predetermined response state to a specific response state, making it possible to end the predetermined response process at a timing that is favorable to the manager of the game hall.

Feature s2. Another starting means (in the forty-fifth embodiment, step SA412 in the main CPU 63 and a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA414 in the main CPU 63; in the 46th embodiment, a function to make an affirmative judgment in step SA905 and step SA916 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature s1.

According to feature s2, the predetermined response process is started even when the predetermined key insertion unit is in a specific response state based on the fact that the specific start condition is satisfied, so it is possible to diversify the trigger for starting the predetermined response process. However, in this configuration, the predetermined response process is started when the predetermined key insertion unit is in a specific response state, but with the configuration of feature s1, the predetermined response process does not end just because the predetermined key insertion unit is in a specific response state, but ends when the predetermined key insertion unit is changed from the predetermined response state to the specific response state. As a result, even if the predetermined response process is started when the predetermined key insertion unit is in a specific response state, the predetermined response process is not immediately ended, and the predetermined response process is ended by changing the predetermined key insertion unit from the specific response state to the predetermined response state and then again from the predetermined response state to the specific response state, so it is possible to end the predetermined response process at a timing that is favorable to the manager of the game hall.

Feature s3: The predetermined response start means starts the predetermined response process based on the predetermined key insertion unit being in the predetermined response state when the supply of operating power is started,
A gaming machine as described in feature S2, characterized in that the specific start condition is met when the supply of operating power is stopped while the specified response processing is being executed and then the supply of operating power is resumed.

According to feature s3, when the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined response process is started based on the fact that the predetermined key insertion part is in the predetermined response state, so it is difficult to start the predetermined response process fraudulently. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform such actions. In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a predetermined response process is being executed, if the supply of operating power is resumed and the specific start condition is met, the predetermined key insertion part will respond to the predetermined response. The predetermined response process is started even if it is not in this state. This makes it possible to give priority to starting the predetermined response process if the predetermined response process ends midway.

Feature s4. The device is provided with a means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a use target from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
A gaming machine according to any one of features s1 to s3, wherein the predetermined corresponding process is a process related to the set value.

According to feature s4, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects in processing related to setting values.

In addition, for the configuration of features s1 to s4, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features makes it possible to solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, for example, by the control means to determine whether or not to generate a gaming state advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary for the processing in the control means to proceed smoothly, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature t group>
Feature t1. A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S205 to S207 in the main CPU 63, In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S3106 to S3108, in the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S3207 to S3209, and in the 22nd embodiment In the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps S5605 to S5607, and in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing step SB915. ) and
A situation generating means (in the first embodiment, step S103 in the main CPU 63 In the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in steps S5503 to S5507. In the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 makes an affirmative decision in step SB113. , in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63);
When the setting is possible, a start response means (in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S201) changes the setting value from a predetermined start response setting value. In the 11th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step S3102; in the 12th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step S3203; in the 22nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 (in the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step SB304; in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process in step SB905);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature t1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed from the predetermined starting setting value. As a result, irrespective of the setting value of the object to be used before the setting possible state, in the setting possible state, it is possible to change the setting value from a certain starting setting value. Therefore, the content of the setting value changing operation becomes easy for the operator to understand.

Feature t2. The gaming machine according to feature t1, wherein the setting value corresponding to the start is a setting value with the lowest advantage ("setting 1").

According to feature t2, when the setting becomes possible, the setting value is changed starting from the setting value with the lowest advantage. As a result, even if the administrator of the game hall unintentionally terminates the setting possible situation immediately after the setting possible situation, the setting value will be the least advantageous, so in such a situation, the game It is possible to prevent unintended disadvantages from occurring in the game hall even if the game is performed.

Feature t3. a setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting values set by the setting means;
selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value selected in the setting possible situation;
Equipped with
The situation generation means is means for changing the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value to be selected is changed when a change trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. (In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB307 and step SB310 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step SB908 and step SB914 in the main CPU 63),
The setting means stores information corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means in the setting correspondence storage means as the setting correspondence information when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation. Accordingly, the setting values that were to be selected in the setting possible situation are set to be used,
The game according to feature t1 or t2, wherein the start response means stores the selection response information corresponding to the setting value of the start response in the selection response storage means when the setting possible situation occurs. Machine.

According to feature t3, the setting correspondence storage means stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation. By providing this, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the settable situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the settable situation started.

Feature t4. In the setting possible situation, a setting value corresponding to the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature t3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means for executing the processing of steps SA801 to SA803 in the main CPU 63.

According to the feature t4, it is possible to change the setting value while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible state.

Feature t5. In a situation where the setting is not possible, the setting value corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the setting correspondence storage means is displayed on a predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204). The gaming machine according to feature t3 or t4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a means for executing the processing in steps SA601 to SA603 in the main CPU 63.

Feature t5 makes it possible to check the currently used setting values as needed.

Note that for the configuration of features t1 to t5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention relating to the above group of features t can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have an optimal configuration for the setting values that determine the advantageous degree of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature group u>
Feature u1. A first control means (MPU 62),
A second control means (acoustic/optical side MPU 352) that executes control corresponding to the information transmitted by the first control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first control means is
A first transmission means (a function for executing the process of step SB314 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB918 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment) for transmitting first start correspondence information (a return command at the time of update) based on the fact that the first start situation occurs when the supply of operating power is started;
a second transmission means for transmitting second start response information (a return command upon confirmation or a return command upon clearing) based on the fact that the second start status is reached when the supply of operating power has started (a function for executing the processing of step SB118 or step SB207 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB618 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB725 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB816 in the main CPU 63, and a function for executing the processing of step SC118 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature u1, in a configuration in which control corresponding to information transmitted by the first control means is executed by the second control means, when the supply of operating power is started, the first control means transmits first start response information based on the first start status, and transmits second start response information based on the second start status. This makes it possible for control corresponding to the type of start status when the supply of operating power is started to be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

Feature u2. The first control means may perform processing at the time of starting supply of operating power (according to the 49th embodiment Steps SB101 to SB122, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 51st embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, In the embodiment No. 54, the gaming machine according to feature u1, wherein at least part of the processing contents of steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128) are configured to be different.

According to feature u2, when the supply of operating power is started, at least a part of the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power in the first control means is performed depending on which of the first start situation and the second start situation. Since the processing contents are different, it becomes possible for the first control means to execute a process corresponding to the start situation as a process when starting the supply of operating power.

Feature u3. The second control means
A start support execution means that executes start support processing regardless of whether the first start support information is received or the second start support information is received. function) and
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, a predetermined correspondence process is executed, and the other of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received. a predetermined response execution means (a function of executing the processes of step SB407, step SB409, and step SB411 in the sound-light side CPU 353) that does not execute the predetermined response process when the start response information is received;
The gaming machine according to feature u1 or u2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature u3, the second control means executes the start response process regardless of whether it receives the first start response information or the second start response information, so it is possible to have the second control means execute the start response process in response to the transmission of any of the start response information from the first control means. Furthermore, the second control means executes a predetermined response process when it receives one of the first start response information and the second start response information, but does not execute the predetermined response process when it receives the other start response information. This makes it possible for the control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started to be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means.

Feature u4. One of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start-responsive operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) being performed when the supply of operating power is started;
A gaming machine described in feature u3, characterized in that the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the fact that the specified start-response operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature u4, when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to vary the content of the control executed by not only the first control means but also the second control means depending on whether or not a predetermined start-responsive operation is performed.

Feature u5. The first control means is configured to execute a process (steps S8907 to S8920) for controlling the progress of a game after transmitting any one of a plurality of types of start response information including the first start response information and the second start response information;
The gaming machine described in feature u3 or u4 is characterized in that the second control means is configured to execute processing corresponding to the progress of the game (steps SB412 to SB414) after receiving any one of the multiple types of start response information.

According to feature u5, the first control means transmits any of the start response information before starting the process for controlling the progress of the game, and the second control means executes the process corresponding to the progress of the game after receiving any of the start response information. This makes it possible for the second control means to execute the process corresponding to the progress of the game after the first control means is in a situation to execute the process for controlling the progress of the game. In this case, by having the configuration of feature u3, it becomes possible to have the second control means recognize the start trigger of the process corresponding to the progress of the game by using multiple pieces of start response information that differ in whether or not the second control means executes a predetermined response process.

Feature u6. The first control means is
A means for executing a common response process in either the first start status or the second start status when the supply of operating power is started (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SB101 to SB103 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SB601 to SB603 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SB701 and SB702 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63; and in the 54th embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps SC101 to SC103 in the main CPU 63);
a means for executing a specific response process based on the start status of one of the first start status and the second start status when the supply of operating power is started, and not executing the specific response process based on the start status of the other of the first start status and the second start status when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing the process of step SB112, step SB115, or step SB117 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment; a function for executing the process of step SB612, step SB615, or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment; a function for executing the process of step SB711, step SB718, or step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment; a function for executing the process of step SB810, step SB813, or step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment;
A gaming machine described in any one of features u1 to u5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature u6, the first control means executes the common response process regardless of whether the first start situation is the first start situation or the second start situation. The specific response process is executed in one of the two start situations. As a result, the first control means executes the common response process regardless of the start situation, and the first control means executes the process corresponding to the type of start situation. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. 2. Since the start response information is transmitted, the control corresponding to the type of start situation when the supply of operating power is started can be performed not only by the first control means but also by the second control means. Become.

Feature u7. The first control means is
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the master CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB915 in the master CPU 63);
a first response execution means for determining that the first start situation is a setting possible situation (a situation in which a setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed based on a first setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c) when the supply of operating power is started (a function for making a positive determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function for making a positive determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function for making a positive determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function for making a positive determination at step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and a function for making a positive determination at step SC113 in the 54th embodiment);
A second response execution means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that, based on a second setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a) being performed when the supply of operating power is started, notifies the setting value to be used that is set by the setting means as the second start situation;
A gaming machine described in any one of features u1 to u6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature u7, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so any act of attempting to illegally change the set value to be used It is possible to make it difficult to perform. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. Since the second start correspondence information is transmitted, it is possible for the second control means to perform different controls depending on whether the setting is possible or when the setting value to be used is notified.

Feature u8. The first control means includes:
Means for executing profit grant processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values at multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
A first response execution means (setting value update processing or setting confirmation in the main CPU 63 functions), and
A second response execution means (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a main side The function of executing the process of step SB117 in the CPU 63, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB721 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, In the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB815; in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SC117);
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u7.

According to feature u8, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value is executed based on the first start situation, and when the supply of operating power is started, the second start situation is the first start situation. Based on this, another corresponding process different from the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Thereby, it is possible to cause a case in which a predetermined setting-related process is executed or a case in which it is not executed depending on the starting situation when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, the first control means has the configuration of feature u1 above, and the first control means transmits the first start correspondence information based on the first start situation, and transmits the first start correspondence information based on the second start situation. 2. In order to transmit the start correspondence information, it is possible to cause the second control means to perform different control depending on whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed by the first control means or not. .

Feature u9. The gaming machine according to feature u8, wherein the second response execution means executes processing for initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the first control means as the separate response processing.

According to feature u9, it is possible to cause a case where a specified setting-related process is executed and a specified storage area of the first control means is initialized depending on the start status when the supply of operating power is started. In this case, the configuration of feature u1 is provided, and the first control means transmits the first start response information based on the first start status and transmits the second start response information based on the second start status, so that it is possible for the second control means to perform different controls depending on whether the specified setting-related process is executed by the first control means or whether the specified storage area is initialized.

Feature u10. The second control means
When one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measuring means (RTC 356) that enables time measurement is stored in a time correspondence memory. Means for storing in the means (RTC memory 357) (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB407 in the sound and light side CPU 353, and in the 50th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB507 in the sound and light side CPU 353) function) and
Means for executing time-based processing when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time-based information stored in the time-based storage means (in the 49th embodiment, executing the process of step SB413 in the audio-light side CPU 353) (in the fiftieth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB513 in the sound and light side CPU 353),
The gaming machine according to any one of features u1 to u9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature u10, the second control means executes the time-based processing when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time-based information stored in the time-based storage means, so that the timing when the predetermined time has arrived This makes it possible to perform time-based processing. In this case, when one of the first start correspondence information and the second start correspondence information is received, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

In addition, for the configuration of features u1 to u10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P20, features P2 to P30, features P4 to P50, features P6 to P70, features P8 to P90, features P10 to P110, features P11 to P120, features P12 to P130, features P13 to P140, features P14 to P150, features P15 to P160, features P16 to P170, features P17 to P190, features P20 to P220, features P21 to P240, features P22 to P260, features P23 to P270, features P24 to P280, features P25 to P290, features P26 to P300, features P31 to P320, features P32 to P330, features P32 to P340, features P32 to P350, features P32 to P360, features P32 to P370, features P32 to P380, features P41 to P420, features P41 to P430, features P41 to P440, features P41 to P450, features P41 to P460, features P41 to P470, features P41 to P480, features P41 to P490, features P51 to P520, features P51 to P530, features P51 to P540, features P51 to P550, features P 12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature v group>
Feature v1. A time storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step SB407 in the sound/light side CPU 353 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB507 in the sound/light side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment) for storing time correspondence information measured by a time measurement means (RTC 356) that enables time measurement in a time correspondence storage means (RTC memory 357);
a time correspondence execution means for executing a time correspondence process when a processing execution timing is reached based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means (a function for executing the process of step SB413 in the sound/light side CPU 353 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB513 in the sound/light side CPU 353 in the 50th embodiment);
Equipped with
The time memory execution means stores the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means in the time correspondence storage means based on a first start situation when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where no operation is performed, and in the fifty-ninth embodiment, a case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation is performed) and does not store the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means in the time correspondence storage means based on a second start situation when the supply of operating power is started (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where a RAM clear operation, a setting change operation, or a setting confirmation operation is performed, and in the fifty-ninth embodiment, a case where the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed in a situation where no operation is performed).

According to feature v1, the time correspondence processing is executed when the processing execution timing is reached based on the time correspondence information stored in the time correspondence storage means, so it is possible to execute the time correspondence processing at a timing when a predetermined time is reached. In this case, if the supply of operating power is started and a first start situation occurs, the time correspondence information measured by the time measurement means is stored in the time correspondence storage means, and if the supply of operating power is started and a second start situation occurs, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to select between a situation in which the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which it is not newly stored.

Features v2. One of the first start situation and the second start situation indicates that a predetermined start response operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Occurs based on
Feature v1, wherein the other of the first start situation and the second start situation occurs based on the predetermined start response operation not being performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature v2, when the supply of operating power starts, it is possible to select between a situation in which time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means and a situation in which time correspondence information is not newly stored, depending on whether or not a specified start correspondence operation is performed.

Features v3. The second start situation occurs based on a predetermined start response operation (RAM clear operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation) performed when the supply of operating power is started,
The gaming machine according to feature v1 or v2, wherein the first start situation occurs based on the fact that the predetermined start-related operation is not performed when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature v3, if a predetermined start response operation is not performed when the supply of operating power is started, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the supply of operating power is started. In this case, when a predetermined start corresponding operation is performed, the time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the time correspondence information is basically newly stored in the time correspondence storage means, and the time can be changed by performing a predetermined start correspondence operation as necessary. It becomes possible to prevent correspondence information from being stored in the time correspondence storage means.

Features v4. When the supply of operating power is started, specific response processing is executed based on the fact that one of the first start situation and the second start situation is established, and the supply of operating power is started. means for not executing the specific response process based on the fact that the other of the first start situation and the second start situation has occurred in the case (in the forty-ninth embodiment, step SB112 in the main CPU 63, step A function to execute the process of SB115 or step SB117, a function to execute the process of step SB612, step SB615 or step SB617 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function to execute the process in the main CPU 63 in step SB711 and step SB11 in the 52nd embodiment A function to execute the process of SB718 or step SB721, a function to execute the process of step SB810, step SB813, or step SB815 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function to execute the process in the main CPU 63 in step SC111 and step SB815 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step SC115 or step SC117.

According to feature v4, a specific response process is executed when the start status is one of the first start status and the second start status. In this case, the configuration of feature v1 is provided, and time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the first start status, and time correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the second start status. This makes it possible to associate whether or not a specific response process is executed with whether or not new time correspondence information is stored.

Feature v5. A gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a specific response process based on the second start situation being reached when the supply of operating power is started, and not executing the specific response process based on the first start situation being reached when the supply of operating power is started (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB112, step SB115, or step SB117 in the master CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB612, step SB615, or step SB617 in the master CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB711, step SB718, or step SB721 in the master CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB810, step SB813, or step SB815 in the master CPU 63; and in the 54th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC111, step SC115, or step SC117 in the master CPU 63).

According to feature v5, the specific response process is executed when the starting situation is the second starting situation among the first starting situation and the second starting situation. In this case, the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the configuration of feature v1 described above, based on the fact that the first start situation is set, and the time correspondence information is newly stored in the time correspondence storage means based on the fact that the second start situation is set. The correspondence information is not stored in the time correspondence storage means. This makes it possible to prevent time correspondence information from being newly stored in the time correspondence storage means when specific correspondence processing is executed.

Features v6. Means for executing a common response process regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started in the first start situation or in the second start situation (49th embodiment) In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SB101 to SB103. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes steps SB601 to SB603. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 performs the steps A function to execute the processing of SB701 and step SB702, a function to execute the processing of steps SB801 to SB803 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps SC101 to Step SC103 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature v4 or v5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following.

According to feature v6, a common response process is executed regardless of whether the start status is the first or second start status, while a specific response process is executed when the start status is either the first or second start status. This makes it possible to execute a common response process regardless of the start status, while also executing a process that corresponds to the type of start status.

Features v7. Means for executing profit grant processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
a setting-related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting-related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v6.

According to feature v7, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In addition, when the supply of operating power begins, a predetermined setting-related process is executed based on whether the start status is one of the first start status and the second start status. This makes it possible to associate whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed with whether new time correspondence information is stored.

Features v8. Initializing a predetermined storage area provided in the control means based on one of the first start situation and the second start situation when the supply of operating power is started. means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB117 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB617 in the main CPU 63) A function of executing the process of step SB721, a function of executing the process of step SB815 in the main side CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC117 in the main side CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features v1 to v7.

According to feature v8, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area of the first control means is initialized based on whether the start status is one of the first start status and the second start status. This makes it possible to associate whether the predetermined storage area has been initialized with whether or not new time correspondence information has been stored.

Note that for the configuration of features v1 to v8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature u group and the feature v group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be performed appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature w group>
Feature w1. A predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
A predetermined display control means for controlling the display of the predetermined display means (a function for executing a second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
A setting related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means
A means for causing the predetermined display means to display information related to the setting value when the predetermined setting-related process is executed (a function for executing the processes of steps S9004 and S9006 in the main CPU 63);
a check control means for causing the predetermined display means to perform a check display for enabling confirmation of whether or not the predetermined display means is normal after the predetermined setting-related processing has been executed (a function for executing processing of step S9519 in the main CPU 63 in the 37th embodiment, a function for executing processing of step SA419 in the main CPU 63 in the 45th embodiment, a function for executing processing of step SA919 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, a function for executing processing of step SB123 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing processing of step SB623 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps SB712 and SB719 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, a function for executing processing of step SB817 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function for executing processing of step SC119 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature w1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In addition, when a specified setting-related process is executed, a display related to the setting value is displayed on the specified display means, so the manager of the amusement hall can grasp the current setting value by checking the specified display means. In addition, a check display is displayed on the specified display means, so it is possible to check whether the specified display means is normal or not.

In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process is executed, and then a check display is displayed on the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to prioritize the display of the setting value when the predetermined setting-related process is executed over the check display, without the need for an adjustment process such as terminating the check display midway when the predetermined setting-related process is started.

Feature w2. The check control means displays the check display regardless of whether the supply of operating power is started, the predetermined setting-related process is executed, or the predetermined setting-related process is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature w1, wherein the gaming machine causes the predetermined display means to perform the following.

According to feature w2, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is performed on the predetermined display means regardless of whether or not a predetermined setting-related process is executed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the predetermined display means is normal regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature w3. A common process is set as a process at the start of supply when the supply of operating power is started, which is a process that is commonly executed whether the predetermined setting-related process is executed or not, and is executed later in the order of execution than the predetermined setting-related process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed;
A gaming machine according to feature w1 or w2, characterized in that the common processing is set to a processing for starting the check display on the specified display means.

According to feature w3, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is displayed on the specified display means regardless of whether a specified setting-related process is executed or not. This makes it possible to check whether the specified display means is normal or not regardless of the situation when the supply of operating power is started. In addition, since the process for causing the specified display means to start the check display is set as a common process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature w4. Equipped with a means for executing a process for progressing a game after the supply of operating power is started and the process at the start of the supply is completed (a function for executing the processes of steps S8907 to S8920 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine described in any one of features w1 to w3, characterized in that processing for progressing the game can be started even when the check display is being executed on the specified display means.

According to feature w4, processing for progressing the game can be started even when a check display is being executed on the specified display means, so that even if a check display is executed on the specified display means after execution of the specified setting-related processing, it is possible to prevent a delay in the start timing of processing for progressing the game.

Feature w5. Equipped with a delay execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps SB715 and SB724 in the main CPU 63) that executes a delay process that enables delaying the start of a process for progressing a game when the supply of operating power is started;
A gaming machine described in any one of features w1 to w4, characterized in that the check control means causes the specified display means to start the check display before the delay processing is started when the supply of operating power is started and the specified setting-related processing is not executed.

According to feature w5, the initial settings of various devices are completed by executing a delay process that makes it possible to delay the start of the process for progressing the game when the supply of operating power is started. It becomes possible to start processing for advancing the game later. In this case, if the predetermined setting-related processing is not executed when the supply of operating power is started, a check display on the predetermined display means is started before the delay processing is started. This makes it possible to display a check display using the period during which the start of the process for advancing the game is delayed.

Feature w6. The gaming machine according to feature w5, wherein the delay execution means does not execute the delay process when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

According to feature w6, since a predetermined period of time is required when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before the process for proceeding with the game is started. Become. In this case, by preventing the delay process from being executed when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, the start of the process for advancing the game in a situation where the predetermined setting-related process is executed is extremely delayed. This makes it possible to avoid delays.

Features w7. The setting-related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63, In the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 (a function to make an affirmative determination at SB812, a function to make an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
Generating a notification so that the setting value to be used is notified based on a second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) when the supply of operating power is started. means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature w7, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform a first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power starts, making it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, the setting value to be used is notified by performing a second setting-related operation when the supply of operating power starts, making it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to check the setting value to be used as necessary.

Feature w8. A gaming machine according to any one of features w1 to w7, characterized in that the predetermined display control means has a means for displaying information corresponding to the results of game history management on the predetermined display means (a function for executing the processes of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature w8, it is possible to notify the gaming hall manager of the gaming history management results. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature w1 described above and performing a check display on the predetermined display means, it is possible to check whether information corresponding to the management result of the gaming history is being accurately displayed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to confirm.

In addition, for the configuration of features w1 to w8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature x group>
Features x1. Predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204),
a predetermined display control means (a function of executing the second timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the predetermined display means;
A means for executing a process for advancing the game after the supply of operating power is started and the situation after the start of the supply is completed (a function for executing the processes from step S8907 to step S8920 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The predetermined display control means is a check control means (36th embodiment) that causes the predetermined display means to perform a check display that allows checking whether or not the predetermined display means is normal in the situation after the start of supply. In the 52nd embodiment, the main side CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step S9405, and in the 52nd embodiment, the main side CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB713 and step SB722),
A delay situation (in the 36th embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S9406 A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which a situation in which the main side CPU 63 executes the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 can occur.

According to feature x1, when the supply of operating power is started, a check display is displayed on the specified display means, making it possible to check whether the specified display means is normal. In this case, when the check display is displayed, a delay situation may occur that makes it possible to delay the start of processing for progressing the game. This makes it possible to ensure an opportunity to check the check display on the specified display means before processing for progressing the game is started. Furthermore, the occurrence of a delay situation makes it possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before processing for progressing the game is started. Then, it becomes possible to make use of this delay situation to cause the specified display means to display a check display.

Features x2. Means for causing the delay situation to occur in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means (in the 36th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S9406 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment) The gaming machine according to feature x1, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of step SB715 and step SB724 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature x2, since the situation where the check display is being performed is a delayed situation, the process for advancing the game should not be started while the check display is being performed. becomes possible.

Features x3. When the supply of operating power is started, in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means based on the first start situation, the delay situation occurs and the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature x1 or x2, wherein the delay situation does not occur in a situation where the check display is performed on the predetermined display means based on the second start situation.

According to feature x3, in the first starting situation, a delay situation occurs in a situation where a check display is being performed on the predetermined display means, so that the game is allowed to proceed while the check display is being performed. This makes it possible to prevent the process from starting, and in the case of the second start situation, to prevent a delay situation from occurring in a situation where a check display is performed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to prevent the start timing of processing for advancing the game from becoming extremely late.

Feature x4. A means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a use target from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
A setting related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
the first start status is a status in which the predetermined setting-related process is not executed in the post-supply start status,
The gaming machine according to feature x3, wherein the second start situation is a situation in which the specified setting-related processing is executed in the post-supply start situation.

According to feature x4, since a predetermined period of time is required when a predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to complete the initial settings of various devices before the process for progressing the game is started. In this case, by preventing a delay situation when a check display is being displayed on the predetermined display means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to prevent the start of the process for progressing the game from being extremely delayed when the predetermined setting-related process is executed.

Features x5. The setting-related execution means includes:
When the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used is changed based on the fact that the first setting-related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. A situation generating means (in the 49th embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63, In the 51st embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB717 of the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the step in the main CPU 63 (a function to make an affirmative determination at SB812, a function to make an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
Generating a notification so that the setting value to be used is notified based on a second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) when the supply of operating power is started. means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to feature x4, comprising:

According to feature x5, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform a first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power starts, making it possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting value to be used. In addition, the setting value to be used is notified by performing a second setting-related operation when the supply of operating power starts, making it possible for the manager of the amusement hall to check the setting value to be used as necessary.

Features x6. The predetermined display control means includes means for displaying information corresponding to the management results of the game history on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S8708, S8709, and S9107 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of features x1 to x5.

According to feature x6, it is possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the results of the gaming history management. In this case, by having the configuration of feature x1 and a check display being performed on the specified display means, it is possible to check whether the information corresponding to the results of the gaming history management is being displayed accurately on the specified display means.

For the configuration of features x1 to x6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P1 2, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h1 ~h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features w and group of features x can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that allows it to be confirmed whether or not the display on the predetermined display means is being performed accurately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. be.

<Feature y group>
Feature y1. A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB311 in the master CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB915 in the master CPU 63);
a status generating means for generating a setting possible status (a status in which a setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 49th embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the main CPU 63; and in the 54th embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63);
a setting monitoring means for executing a setting monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal (a function for executing the process of step SB106 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB606 in the main CPU 63 in the 51st embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB705 in the main CPU 63 in the 52nd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting monitoring process is included in the supply start process executed when the supply of operating power to a control means having the setting means is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 51st embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, and steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128 in the 54th embodiment).

According to feature y1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be the one to be used. In addition, a setting monitoring process is executed to monitor whether the setting value to be used is abnormal, so if the setting value to be used is abnormal, it is possible to deal with this. In addition, since the process at the start of supply includes a setting monitoring process, it is possible to prevent the process for progressing the game from being started even if the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y2. The gaming machine according to feature y1, wherein the setting monitoring means executes the setting monitoring process every time a monitoring opportunity occurs even after the process at the start of supply is completed.

According to feature y2, since the setting monitoring process is executed every time a monitoring opportunity occurs after the process at the start of supply is completed, it becomes easier to identify that the setting value to be used is abnormal.

Feature y3. A means for executing periodically activated interrupt processing (a function for executing the first timer interrupt processing in the main CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to feature y2, wherein the interrupt processing includes the setting monitoring processing.

According to feature y3, the setting monitoring process is executed each time the device is started periodically, which makes it possible to increase the frequency of monitoring whether the setting values of the target device are abnormal.

Feature y4. The setting monitoring means sets a regulated state in which execution of a predetermined progressing process for advancing the game is regulated based on the fact that the setting value of the target to be used is identified as abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Regulation means (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB63 in the main CPU 63) In the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB823, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SC125). The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y3.

According to feature y4, when it is specified that the setting value to be used is abnormal, execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated, so even if the setting value to be used is abnormal. It becomes possible to prevent the game from being started regardless of the situation.

Feature y5. Means for canceling the restricted state based on the occurrence of the setting possible situation (in the 49th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing step SB904 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to feature y4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

Feature y5 makes it possible to set new settings for the settings of the target when the situation in which the settings of the target are abnormal is resolved.

Feature y6. Feature y4 or y5, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to enter the regulating state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the situation where the regulating state is present. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature y6, it is possible to prevent a state in which execution of a predetermined progress process is restricted due to an abnormal setting value of a usage target from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature y7. Features y4 to 4, characterized in that the device is provided with means for executing non-restrictive processing different from the predetermined progress processing even in the regulated state (a function for executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of y6.

According to feature y7, it is possible to execute non-restricted processes even in a situation where the execution of a specific progress process is restricted due to an abnormal setting value of the target to be used. This makes it possible to ensure that necessary processes are executed even in a restricted state.

Feature y8. The gaming machine described in feature y7, characterized in that the non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature y8, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that when a power outage occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature y9. The setting monitoring means is configured to provide a notification that allows the player to recognize that the setting possible situation should occur based on the fact that the setting value of the target to be used is determined to be abnormal in the setting monitoring process. Means for executing the process (in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63, the 52nd embodiment) In the embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB728, in the 53rd embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SB825, and in the 54th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step SC127 The gaming machine according to any one of features y1 to y8, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of:

According to feature y9, when it is determined that the setting value of the target to be used is abnormal, a notification is issued to enable the player to recognize that a setting possible situation should be generated, so that when the setting value of the target to be used becomes abnormal, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall to resolve the abnormality.

Note that for the configuration of features y1 to y9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The invention relating to the above feature group y can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the settings that determine the advantageous degree of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics z group>
Features z1. Predetermined monitoring means (33rd embodiment) for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started. In the 35th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps S7906 and S7909, in the 35th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps S8807 and S8810, and in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a step A function to execute the process of S9408 and step S9411, a function to execute the process of step S9506 and step S9509 in the main CPU 63 in the 37th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S9905 and step S9908 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment In the 45th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SA406 and SA409, and in the 46th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SA907 and SA910. In the 49th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB104 to SB106, in the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SB604 to SB606, and in the 52nd embodiment, the main The function of executing the processing of steps SB703 to SB705 in the side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of steps SB804 to SB806 of the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of steps SC104 to SB806 of the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment function of executing the process of step SC106);
Regulation means for setting a regulation state in which execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing a game is regulated based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the predetermined monitoring means (33rd embodiment) In the 35th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S8811, and in the 36th embodiment, the main CPU 63 executes the process of step S9412. In the 37th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9510 in the main CPU 63, in the 42nd embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9909 in the main CPU 63, and in the 45th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S9909 in the main CPU 63. The function of executing the process of step SA410, the function of executing the process of step SA911 in the main CPU 63 in the 46th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SA911 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, In the embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB619 in the main CPU 63, in the 52nd embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, the function executes the process of step SB823 in the main CPU 63. a function to execute, in the 54th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SC125 in the main CPU 63),
Means for executing a non-restrictive process different from the predetermined progress process even in the regulated state (in the 33rd embodiment, a function to execute the processes of steps S8201 to S8206 in the main CPU 63, in the 35th embodiment (a function of executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processing of steps SA101 to step SA106 in the main CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature z1, when it is determined that a specified abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a specified memory area, the execution of a specified progression process for progressing the game is restricted, making it possible to prevent the game from starting despite the occurrence of a specified abnormality. In addition, even in a situation in which the execution of a specified progression process is restricted due to the occurrence of a specified abnormality, it becomes possible to ensure that non-restricted processing is executed. This makes it possible to ensure that necessary processing is executed even in a restricted state.

Features z2. The non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage. The gaming machine according to feature z1.

According to feature z2, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the regulated state, so if a power outage occurs in the regulated state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature z3. The gaming machine according to feature z1 or z2, wherein the regulating means is configured to return to the regulated state when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the gaming machine is in the regulated state.

Feature z3 makes it possible to ensure that the state in which the execution of a specified progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of a specified abnormality is not lifted simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature z4. A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the master CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB915 in the master CPU 63);
a status generating means for generating a setting possible status (a status in which a setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 49th embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the main CPU 63; and in the 54th embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine according to any one of features z1 to z3, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature z4, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be the one to be used. In this case, if a specified abnormality occurs with the information stored in the specified memory area, there is a possibility that an abnormality has also occurred with the setting value. In contrast, with the configuration of feature z1 described above, if it is determined that a specified abnormality has occurred with the information stored in the specified memory area, the execution of the specified progress process for progressing the game is restricted, so it is possible to prevent the game from starting despite the possibility that an abnormality has occurred with the setting value.

Features z5. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should occur based on the fact that the predetermined abnormality has occurred by the predetermined monitoring means ( In the 49th embodiment, the function of executing step SB121 in the main CPU 63, in the 51st embodiment, the function of executing step SB621 in the main CPU 63, and in the 52nd embodiment, step SB728 in the main CPU 63 (in the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function to execute the process in step SC127 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature z4, characterized by:

According to feature z5, when it is determined that a specified abnormality has occurred, a notification is issued to enable the player to recognize that a setting possible situation should occur, so that when a specified abnormality occurs, it is possible to prompt the manager of the amusement hall to set the setting value.

Feature z6. A gaming machine according to feature z4 or z5, characterized in that it is provided with a means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the setting possible state (a function for executing the process of step SB303 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB904 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment).

According to feature z6, it is possible to make a new setting of the setting value to be used when a situation in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred is canceled.

Note that for the configuration of features z1 to z6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αA group>
Feature αA1. Predetermined monitoring means (49th embodiment) that monitors whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area (work area 221 for specific control) when supply of operating power is started. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SB104 to SB106. In the 51st embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function to execute steps SB604 to SB606. In the 52nd embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a step A function to execute the processing from SB703 to step SB705, a function to execute the processing from step SB804 to step SB806 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, a function to execute the processing from step SC104 to step SC106 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment. ) and
If the predetermined monitoring means identifies that the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the execution content of the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is determined by the predetermined monitoring means that the predetermined abnormality has occurred. Regulation means for making the execution content different from that in the case where there was no execution (in the 49th embodiment, a function to execute the process of step SB119 in the main CPU 63, and in the 51st embodiment, a function to execute the process in step SB619 in the main CPU 63) In the 52nd embodiment, the function to execute the process of step SB726 in the main CPU 63, in the 53rd embodiment, the function to execute the process in step SB823 in the main CPU 63, in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC125 in the CPU 63);
Specific output means (in the 49th embodiment, the process of step SB122 in the main CPU 63 In the 51st embodiment, the function to execute step SB622 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, the function to execute step SB729 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, the main (a function of executing the process of step SB826 in the side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step SC128 in the main side CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature αA1, when it is determined that a specified abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a specified memory area, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of operating power is different from that when the specified abnormality has not occurred, making it possible to prevent processing from proceeding normally despite the occurrence of a specified abnormality. In addition, a specific output is sent to the outside of the gaming machine based on the determination that a specified abnormality has occurred. This makes it possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to deal with the occurrence of the specified abnormality.

Feature αA2. The gaming machine described in Feature αA1, characterized in that the specific output means performs the specific output to the outside of the gaming machine even when it is determined that an event other than the predetermined abnormality has occurred.

According to feature αA2, a specific output is performed to the outside of the gaming machine even when an event different from a predetermined abnormality occurs. This allows the configuration to be used for specific output.

Feature αA3. The specific output means is configured to control the gaming machine when the predetermined abnormality occurs when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the predetermined abnormality occurs. The gaming machine according to feature αA1 or αA2, characterized in that the specific output is performed externally.

According to feature αA3, in a situation where a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is possible to perform a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine each time the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it easier for the game hall manager to recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

Feature αA4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αA1 to αA3, characterized in that the regulating means sets a regulated state in which the execution of a predetermined progression process for progressing the game is restricted based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the predetermined monitoring means.

According to feature αA4, when it is identified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to information stored in a predetermined storage area, execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game is regulated, so that the predetermined abnormality is detected. It is possible to prevent a game from being started even though a problem has occurred.

Feature αA5. A gaming machine according to feature αA4, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing non-regulated processing different from the predetermined progression processing even in the regulated state (a function for executing processing of steps S8201 to S8206 in the master CPU 63 in the 33rd embodiment, a function for executing processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the master CPU 63 in the 35th embodiment, and a function for executing processing of steps SA101 to SA106 in the master CPU 63 in the 42nd embodiment).

According to feature αA5, even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted due to the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Feature αA6. The gaming machine described in Feature αA5, characterized in that the non-regulated process includes a power outage monitoring process for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage (step S8201 in the 33rd embodiment, step S8901 in the 35th embodiment, and step SA102 in the 42nd embodiment).

According to feature αA6, power outage monitoring processing is performed even in a regulated state, making it possible to respond appropriately if a power outage occurs in a regulated state.

Feature αA7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αA4 to αA6, characterized in that the regulating means is configured to return to the regulated state when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the regulated state is in effect.

Feature αA7 makes it possible to ensure that the state in which the execution of a specified progress process is restricted due to the occurrence of a specified abnormality is not lifted simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αA8. A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level (in the forty-ninth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB311 in the master CPU 63; in the fifty-third embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB915 in the master CPU 63);
a status generating means for generating a setting possible status (a status in which a setting value update process is executed) in which the setting value to be used can be changed (in the 49th embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB114 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB614 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB717 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB812 in the main CPU 63; and in the 54th embodiment, a function for making an affirmative determination at step SC113 in the main CPU 63);
A gaming machine described in any one of features αA4 to αA7, characterized by having:

According to feature αA8, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, if a specified abnormality occurs with the information stored in the specified memory area, there is a possibility that an abnormality also occurs with the setting value. In contrast, with the configuration of feature αA1, if it is determined that a specified abnormality occurs with the information stored in the specified memory area, the execution content of the process at the start of the supply of operating power is different from that when a specified abnormality does not occur, so it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding normally despite the possibility that an abnormality occurs with the setting value. In addition, a specific output is output to the outside of the gaming machine based on the determination that a specified abnormality occurs, so it is possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall to deal with the possibility that an abnormality occurs with the setting value.

Feature αA9. A gaming machine according to feature αA8, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a notification that allows the player to recognize that the settable situation should be generated based on the occurrence of the specified abnormality being identified by the specified monitoring means (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB121 in the main CPU 63; in the 51st embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB621 in the main CPU 63; in the 52nd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB728 in the main CPU 63; in the 53rd embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SB825 in the main CPU 63; and in the 54th embodiment, a function for executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature αA9, when it is specified that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, a notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that a settable situation should occur, so that when a predetermined abnormality occurs, It becomes possible to prompt the game hall manager to set the set value.

Feature αA10. The regulating means, based on the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality being identified by the predetermined monitoring means, sets a regulated state in which execution of a predetermined progression process for progressing a game is restricted;
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in feature αA8 or αA9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for releasing the restricted state based on the occurrence of the settable situation (in the 49th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB303 in the main CPU 63, and in the 53rd embodiment, a function for executing the processing of step SB904 in the main CPU 63).

Feature αA10 makes it possible to set new settings for the target setting when the situation in which a specified abnormality occurs is resolved.

Note that for the configuration of features αA1 to αA10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αB group>
Feature αB1. Means for starting processing at the start of supply of operating power when supply of operating power is started (steps SB101 to SB122 in the 49th embodiment, steps SB601 to SB622 in the 51st embodiment, steps SB701 to SB729 in the 52nd embodiment, steps SB801 to SB818 and steps SB823 to SB826 in the 53rd embodiment, steps SC101 to SC120 and steps SC125 to SC128 in the 54th embodiment);
A means for executing an interrupt process that is periodically started (a function for executing a first timer interrupt process in the main CPU 63);
A means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a target for use from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
A setting related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process or a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting related process related to the setting value as part of the process at the start of the supply of the operating power;
A permission setting means for setting the execution of the interrupt processing from a prohibited state to a permitted state when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of the operating power (a function for executing the processing of step SB201 or step SB301 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step SB901 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αB1, the setting value to be used is set from multiple setting value stages corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In addition, the specified setting-related processing related to the setting value is executed as part of the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, making it difficult to perform acts that attempt to execute the specified setting-related processing fraudulently.

In this case, when a specific setting-related process is executed in the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the execution of interrupt processes changes from a prohibited state to a permitted state. In other words, while the execution of interrupt processes is basically prohibited in the process at the start of the supply of operating power, the interrupt processes can interrupt and be started in the specific setting-related process. By basically prohibiting the execution of interrupt processes in the process at the start of the supply of operating power, it is possible to shorten the time required for the processing at the start of the supply of operating power to be completed. On the other hand, since the specific setting-related process executes processing related to setting values, it is expected that the time required for the processing to be completed will be longer, and by permitting the execution of interrupt processes in a situation where such a specific setting-related process is being executed, it is possible to make the execution mode of the processing preferable.

Feature αB2. The gaming machine according to feature αB1, wherein the setting-related execution means terminates the predetermined setting-related process based on a termination trigger operation being performed in the predetermined setting-related process.

According to feature αB2, the predetermined setting-related process is continued until an end triggering operation is performed, so the time required to complete the process tends to be long. In this case, with the configuration of feature αB1 described above, execution of interrupt processing is permitted in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, so it is possible to make the execution mode of the process suitable. .

Feature αB3. A gaming machine according to feature αB1 or αB2, characterized in that it is provided with a prohibition setting means (a function for executing the process of step SB206 or step SB312 in the main CPU 63 in the 49th embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step SB916 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment) that sets the state in which execution of the interrupt process is permitted to a state in which execution of the interrupt process is prohibited when the predetermined setting-related process is completed.

According to feature αB3, when the specified setting-related process is completed, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited again. This makes it possible to limit the period during which execution of the interrupt process is permitted in a situation in which processing is being executed when the supply of operating power starts to the period during which the specified setting-related process is being executed.

Feature αB4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αB1 to αB3, characterized in that the interrupt process includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature αB4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even when a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, so the configuration can take a long time to complete the predetermined setting-related process. However, if a power outage occurs while a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, it becomes possible to appropriately deal with the power outage.

Feature αB5. The interrupt process includes a progress response process (steps S8907 to S8920 in the master CPU 63) that is executed to control the progress of the game,
When the interrupt process is started by interrupting the execution of the predetermined setting-related process, the power outage monitoring process is executed, but the progress response process is not executed,
A gaming machine as described in feature αB4, characterized in that when the interrupt processing is started after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power has been completed, both the power outage monitoring processing and the progress response processing can be executed.

According to feature αB5, in a configuration in which the occurrence of a power outage is periodically monitored in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed, an interrupt process is interrupted and activated in a situation where a predetermined setting-related process is being executed. Even if there is a problem, it is possible to prevent the progress corresponding processing for controlling the progress of the game from being executed.

Feature αB6: The setting related execution means is
A means for executing a changeable process in which the setting value to be used as the predetermined setting-related process can be changed based on a first setting-related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c) being performed when the supply of operating power is started (a function for executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63);
When the supply of operating power is started, a setting notification process is executed to notify the setting value to be used as the predetermined setting-related process based on a second setting-related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a) being performed (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features αB1 to αB5, characterized in that the permission setting means sets the execution of the interrupt processing from a state in which execution is prohibited to a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the changeable processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power, and sets the execution of the interrupt processing from a state in which execution is prohibited to a state in which execution of the interrupt processing is permitted when the setting notification processing is executed in the processing at the start of the supply of operating power.

According to feature αB6, in order to change the setting value to be used, it is necessary to perform the first setting-related operation when the supply of operating power is started, so the setting value to be used cannot be changed illegally. This makes it possible to make it difficult to perform the desired action. In addition, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used will be notified by performing the second setting-related operation, so the administrator of the game hall can check the setting value to be used as necessary. becomes possible.

In addition, for the configuration of features αB1 to αB6, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h 1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature z group, the above feature αA group, and the above feature αB group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, processing needs to be performed appropriately when the supply of operating power is started, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic αC group>
Feature αC1. A means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a use target from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
A setting related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting related process regarding the setting value when the supply of operating power is started;
a restricting means for restricting the execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing a game when the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process and the supply of operating power is started thereafter (a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function for making an affirmative determination at steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αC1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is regulated. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Feature αC2. The regulating means is configured such that the predetermined setting-related process is executed even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. The gaming machine according to feature αC1, wherein the gaming machine does not enter the restricted state when

According to feature αC2, it is possible to prevent the execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted even when a predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. .

Feature αC3. A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or αC2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing non-regulated processing different from the predetermined progression processing even in the regulated state (a function for executing the processing of steps S8901 to S8905 in the master CPU 63).

Feature αC3 makes it possible to execute non-restricted processes even in a situation where the execution of a specific progress process is restricted. This makes it possible to ensure that necessary processes are executed even in a restricted state.

Feature αC4. The gaming machine described in Feature αC3, characterized in that the non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature αC4, the power outage monitoring process is executed even in the restricted state, so that when a power outage occurs in the restricted state, it is possible to appropriately deal with it.

Feature αC5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αC1 to αC4, characterized in that the regulating means causes the regulated state to be restored when the supply of operating power is resumed even if the supply of operating power is stopped while the regulated state is in effect.

According to feature αC5, it is possible to prevent the state in which execution of the predetermined progress process is restricted from being canceled simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αC6. Means for executing notification that allows the player to recognize that the predetermined setting-related process should be executed based on the regulation state (in the 53rd embodiment, In any one of the features αC1 to αC5, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing the process of step SB825, and in the 54th embodiment, the function of executing the process of step SC127 in the main CPU 63. The game machine described.

According to feature αC6, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to execute the predetermined setting-related process again. Become.

Feature αC7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αC1 to αC6, characterized in that the restricting means does not enter the restricted state based on the performance of a specific related operation (turning on the setting key insertion section 68a and pressing the reset button 68c) even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature αC7, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before a predetermined setting-related process is completed, the game can be progressed by performing a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is restarted. It becomes possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

Feature αC8. The gaming machine according to feature αC7, wherein the setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related process based on the specific related operation being performed when supply of operating power is started. .

According to feature αC8, it is possible to prevent the execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game from being restricted even when a predetermined setting-related process is executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. .

Feature αC9: The specific related operation includes a setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) being set to a predetermined corresponding state (ON state) by a setting key, and another predetermined operation (pressing operation of the reset button 68c),
The gaming machine described in feature αC8 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is started again, the regulating means does not enter the regulated state based on the setting key insertion section being in the specified corresponding state even if the other specified operation is not performed.

According to feature αC9, even if no specific related operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the setting key insertion unit is in a predetermined corresponding state, so that the execution of the predetermined progress process for progressing through the game is not restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the execution of the predetermined setting-related process and the setting key insertion unit is in a predetermined corresponding state but the power is turned on without performing any other predetermined operation.

Feature αC10. When the supply of operating power is started, another related process regarding the setting value is executed based on the setting key insertion section being brought into the predetermined corresponding state in a situation where the other predetermined operation is not performed. The gaming machine according to feature αC9, further comprising a separate related execution means (a function of executing a setting confirmation process in the main CPU 63).

According to feature αC10, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, by performing an operation to execute another related process when restarting the supply of operating power, It becomes possible to prevent the execution of a predetermined progression process for advancing the game from being restricted.

Feature αC11. A gaming machine according to Feature αC10, characterized in that if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, and the supply of operating power is then started again, the specified setting-related process is executed without executing the other related process, based on the setting key insertion section being placed in the specified corresponding state in a situation in which the other specified operation is not being performed.

According to feature αC11, when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, an operation is performed to cause another related process to be executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. A predetermined setting-related process is executed instead of a separate related process. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αC12. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables changing the setting value to be used;
The gaming machine described in feature αC11, wherein the other related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to feature αC12, when the supply of operating power is stopped while changing the setting value to be used, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting value to be used is notified. It becomes possible to give priority to the execution of the process for changing the setting value to be used over the process.

Feature αC13. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αC1 to αC12, characterized in that the predetermined setting-related process is a process that allows the setting value to be changed.

According to feature αC13, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the setting value to be used, there is a process to proceed with the game when the supply of operating power is resumed. Execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the setting value change has not been completed.

Note that for the configuration of features αC1 to αC13, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature αD group>
Feature αD1. A means for executing a profit awarding process in a manner corresponding to a set value set as a use target from among a plurality of set values corresponding to the player's advantage level (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 and S504 in the master CPU 63);
A setting related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined setting related process regarding the setting value based on a specific related operation (an ON operation of the setting key insertion portion 68a and a pressing operation of the reset button 68c) when the supply of operating power is started;
A separate related execution means (a function of executing a setting value update process in the main CPU 63) that executes a predetermined separate related process regarding the setting value based on a predetermined related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a) when the supply of operating power is started;
a restricting means for restricting the execution of a predetermined progress process for progressing a game when the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the predetermined setting-related process and the supply of operating power is started thereafter (a function for making an affirmative determination at step SB808 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function for making an affirmative determination at steps SC108 and SC116 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment);
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the regulating means does not enter the regulated state based on the fact that the specific related operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the specified setting-related processing, and does not enter the regulated state based on the fact that the specific related operation has been performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the completion of the specified setting-related processing.

According to feature αD1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related processing, and the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game is regulated. Ru. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the predetermined setting-related processing has not been completed.

Further, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, execution of the predetermined progress process is not restricted because a specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being restricted even when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed upon restarting the supply of operating power.

In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, the execution of the specified progress process will be restricted even if the specified related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed. Not done. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted when an operation for executing a process related to the set value is performed.

Feature αD2. A gaming machine according to Feature αD1, characterized in that if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related process is completed, and the supply of operating power is then started, the specified setting-related process is executed without executing the other related process based on the specified related operation being performed.

According to feature αD2, when the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, an operation is performed to cause another related process to be executed when the supply of operating power is restarted. A predetermined setting-related process is executed instead of a separate related process. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of predetermined setting-related processing.

Feature αD3. The specific related operation includes the setting key insertion section (setting key insertion section 68a) being brought into a predetermined compatible state (ON operation state) by the setting key, and other predetermined operations (pressing the reset button 68c). ) is being carried out,
Feature αD2, characterized in that the predetermined related operation includes the setting key insertion section being brought into the predetermined corresponding state by the setting key, but does not include the other predetermined operation being performed. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature αD3, even if no specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is restarted, the setting key insertion section is set to a predetermined compatible state, so that a predetermined progress process for progressing the game is executed. This makes it possible to prevent regulations from being regulated. As a result, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during execution of a predetermined setting-related process, the setting key insertion part is in the predetermined compatible state, but the power is turned on without performing any other predetermined operations. Even if this occurs, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined progress process from being restricted.

Feature αD4. The predetermined setting-related process is a process that enables the setting value to be used to be changed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features αD1 to αD3, characterized in that the other related process is a process for notifying the setting value to be used.

According to feature αD4, if the supply of operating power is stopped in the middle of the process for changing the setting value to be used, when the supply of operating power is restarted afterwards, there is a process to proceed with the game. Execution of the predetermined progress process is regulated. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined progress processing for advancing the game from being executed even though the setting value change has not been completed. Additionally, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the setting values to be used are being changed, a process is performed that allows the setting values to be used to be changed when the supply of operating power is restarted. The predetermined progress process is performed not only when an operation is performed to cause the process to be executed, but also when an operation is performed to notify the setting value to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the above from being restricted.

Feature αD5. Features αD1 to D1 are characterized in that the present invention includes a means for executing a non-restrictive process different from the predetermined progress process even in the regulated state (a function of executing the processes of steps S8901 to S8905 in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to any one of αD4.

According to feature αD5, even in a situation where execution of the predetermined progression process is restricted, the non-restricted process can be executed. This makes it possible to ensure execution of necessary processing even in a restricted state.

Feature αD6. The gaming machine according to feature αD5, wherein the non-regulated processing includes a power outage monitoring process (step S8901) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage.

According to feature αD6, power outage monitoring processing is performed even in a regulated state, making it possible to respond appropriately if a power outage occurs in a regulated state.

Feature αD7. Features αD1 to αD6, wherein the regulating means is configured to enter the regulated state when the supply of operating power is restarted even if the supply of operating power is stopped in the regulated state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Feature αD7 makes it possible to ensure that the state in which the execution of a specified progress process is restricted is not lifted simply by stopping the supply of operating power.

Feature αD8. A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a notification that enables the player to recognize that the situation requires the execution of the predetermined setting-related processing based on the entry into the restricted state (a function for executing the processing of step SB825 in the main CPU 63 in the 53rd embodiment, and a function for executing the processing of step SC127 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment).

According to feature αD8, if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing a predetermined setting-related process, it is possible to prompt the gaming hall manager to re-execute the predetermined setting-related process. Become.

Feature αD9. Means for executing profit grant processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values at multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined setting-related process regarding the set value is executed based on the fact that a specific related operation (the ON operation of the setting key insertion section 68a and the pressing operation of the reset button 68c) is performed. a setting-related execution means (a function for executing setting value update processing in the main CPU 63);
A regulation that restricts the execution of a predetermined progress process for advancing the game when the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed and the supply of operating power is started thereafter. state regulation means (in the 53rd embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SB808 in the main CPU 63; in the 54th embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step SC108 and step SC116 in the main CPU 63); ,
Equipped with
The specific related operation includes a first related operation (ON operation of the setting key insertion part 68a) and a second related operation (pressing the reset button 68c),
The regulating means may be configured such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped before completing the predetermined setting-related process, the specific related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is started thereafter. , and even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the predetermined setting-related process is completed, if the supply of operating power is started thereafter, the above-mentioned A gaming machine characterized in that the restricted state is not set based on the fact that the first related operation among the first related operation and the second related operation is performed.

According to feature αD9, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will expect the more advantageous setting value to be used. In this case, if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related processing is completed and then the supply of operating power is resumed, the execution of the specified progress processing for progressing the game is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the specified progress processing for progressing the game from being executed even if the specified setting-related processing has not been completed.

In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related processing is completed, the execution of the specified progress processing is not restricted by performing a specific related operation when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the specified progress processing for progressing the game from being restricted even when the specified setting-related processing is executed when the supply of operating power is resumed.

In addition, even if the supply of operating power is stopped before the specified setting-related processing is completed, if the first related operation is performed when the supply of operating power is resumed, the execution of the specified progress processing is not restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the specified progress processing from being restricted when some operations for executing the specified setting-related processing are performed.

Note that for the configuration of features αD1 to αD9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αE group>
Feature αE1. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable situation (setting value A situation generation means (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63) function to make a positive judgment), and
an operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
When the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is not operated, the storage state becomes a non-operation corresponding state, and the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated. an operation compatible storage means (OFF confirmation flag 361) whose storage state becomes an operation compatible state when
The selection is made based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in a situation where the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation correspondence state in the settable situation. Selection target changing means for changing target setting values (a function of executing the process of step SB914 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The configuration is such that the setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation,
This gaming machine includes a state setting means (a 53rd embodiment In the 54th embodiment, a gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63 in the 54th embodiment.

According to feature αE1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to create a settable situation in which it is possible to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to turn on the power while a specific related operation including the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting values to be used. In addition, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means that is operated to cause a setting possible situation, the number of operation means required to change the setting value is It is possible to suppress it. In addition, in the setting possible situation, the setting value to be selected is changed based on the fact that it is specified that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated in a situation where the storage state of the operation corresponding storage means is the non-operation corresponding state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value to be selected from being changed multiple times in response to one operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means.

In this case, when the settable situation is started or when the settable situation is started, the storage state of the operation compatible storage means is set to the operation compatible state. As a result, if the operation of the predetermined response operation means to cause a settable situation continues even after the start of the settable situation, the setting value to be selected will be changed by the operation of the predetermined response operation means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature αE2. The gaming machine described in Feature αE1, wherein the situation generating means determines that the predetermined corresponding operation means is being operated when the detection state of the means for detecting the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means is an operation detection state, regardless of the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means.

According to feature αE2, when determining whether a specific related operation has been performed, the configuration does not determine whether the specific corresponding operation means has switched from a non-operated state to an operated state, but determines whether the specific corresponding operation means has been operated, so that it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for determining whether a setting possible situation has occurred.

Feature αE3: A setting correspondence storage means (setting reference area 341) for storing setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used;
a selection correspondence storage means (setting update area 342) for storing selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value being selected;
Equipped with
the selection target changing means changes the selection correspondence information stored in the selection correspondence storage means so that the setting value that is the selection target is changed, based on the fact that the operation identifying means identifies that the predetermined corresponding operation means has been operated in a situation in which the storage state of the operation correspondence storage means is the non-operation corresponding state in the settable situation,
The gaming machine described in feature αE1 or αE2 is characterized in that the situation generation means sets the setting value that was a selection target in the settable situation as the target for use by storing information corresponding to the selection response information stored in the selection response storage means as the setting response information when the termination trigger occurs in the settable situation.

According to feature αE3, the setting correspondence storage means stores the setting correspondence information corresponding to the setting value to be used, and the selection correspondence storage means stores the selection correspondence information corresponding to the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation. By providing this, it becomes possible to change the setting value in the settable situation while storing and retaining information on the setting value that was set before the settable situation started.

Feature αE4. Means for displaying the setting values to be selected in the setting possible state on predetermined display means (first to fourth notification display devices 201 to 204) (step SA801 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of step SA803).

According to feature αE4, it is possible to change a setting value while checking the setting value that is being changed in the setting possible situation.

Feature αE5. Means for executing profit granting processing in a manner corresponding to a setting value set to be used from among setting values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level (processing of step S503 and step S504 in the main CPU 63) ) and
When the supply of operating power is started, a settable situation (setting value A situation generation means (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step SB812 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, in step SC113 in the main CPU 63) function to make a positive judgment), and
an operation specifying means (a function for executing the process of step SB910 in the main CPU 63) for specifying whether or not the predetermined corresponding operation means is operated;
Selection object changing means (step SB914 in the main CPU 63 function) and
Equipped with
The configuration is such that the setting value to be selected is the setting value to be used when a termination trigger occurs in the setting possible situation,
In this gaming machine, when the supply of operating power for generating the settable situation is started, the operation of the predetermined corresponding operation means triggers a change in the setting value to be selected in the settable situation. A means for preventing it from being handled as an operation (in the 53rd embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SB901 in the main CPU 63, and in the 54th embodiment, a function of executing the process of step SC114 in the main CPU 63). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature αE5, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that In addition, in order to create a settable situation in which it is possible to change the set value to be used, it is necessary to turn on the power while a specific related operation including the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally change the setting values to be used. In addition, since the setting value of the selection target is changed based on the operation of a predetermined corresponding operation means that is operated to cause a setting possible situation, the number of operation means required to change the setting value is It is possible to suppress it.

In this case, the operation of the predetermined response operation means when the supply of operating power to generate the settable situation is started is treated as the operation that triggers the change of the setting value to be selected in the settable situation. It will be made sure that there is no such thing. As a result, if the operation of the predetermined response operation means to cause a settable situation continues even after the start of the settable situation, the setting value to be selected will be changed by the operation of the predetermined response operation means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, in relation to the configuration of features αE1 to αE5, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h 1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above-mentioned feature αC group, feature αD group, and feature αE group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores gaming balls given to a player, and the gaming balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a gaming ball launching device and launched toward the gaming area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball is paid out from, for example, a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko machines, and in this case, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the gaming ball launching device, and the gaming balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have an optimal configuration for the setting values that determine the advantageous degree of the gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic αF group>
Feature αF1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273);
a specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initialization means (second RAM clearing of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 55th embodiment) based on the start of supply of operating power function to perform processing), and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to feature αF1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display storage area in which display data for displaying on the specific display unit is set is not initialized by the initialization unit. As a result, when the supply of operating power is started, the display contents of the specific display means can be changed to It becomes possible to display the display contents before the supply of the information was stopped. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is made impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. becomes possible.

Feature αF2. Setting means (55th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value to be used is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature αF1.

According to feature αF2, when the setting value to be used is newly set or when the setting value is newly set, the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means, so that it is possible to start a game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized when the setting value to be used is newly set. In this case, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means in association with the new setting of the setting value to be used, the display storage area in which the display data for displaying on the specific display means is set is not initialized by the initialization means. This makes it possible to make the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started the display contents before the supply of operating power is stopped, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the setting value to be used is newly set.

Feature αF3. When the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (when the "RAM clear operation" is performed in a situation where no information abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65 and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1"), even if the setting value to be used is not set by the setting means, a separate initialization means (a function of executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment) is provided to initialize the predetermined storage area;
A gaming machine described in feature αF2, characterized in that the display memory area is not initialized by the separate initialization means.

According to feature αF3, when the supply of operating power is started, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value to be used is not newly set, so that it is possible to start a game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized even in a situation where the setting value to be used is not newly set. In this case, the display storage area in which the display data for displaying on the specific display means is set is not initialized, whether the setting value to be used is newly set or not, whether the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, or not, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started can be the display content before the supply of operating power is stopped, regardless of whether the setting value is newly set, whether the setting value is not newly set, whether the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, or not. Therefore, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the setting value has been newly set and whether the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied.

Feature αF4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features αF1 to αF3, characterized in that it is provided with a means (power supply/launch control device 78) for supplying backup power to the display memory area and the specified memory area when operating power is not being supplied to the specific display control means.

According to feature αF4, even if the display memory area and the specified memory area are configured to require a supply of operating power in order to store and retain information, backup power is supplied to the display memory area and the specified memory area when operating power is not being supplied to the specific display control means, so that information can be stored and retained in the display memory area and the specified memory area even when operating power is not being supplied to the specific display means.

Feature αF5. It is determined whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set in the predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores display data corresponding to the result (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result. and set it to
The specific display control means responds to the determination result of the provision determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF4, characterized in that the specific display means displays the following information.

According to feature αF5, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the decision result of whether or not to grant the player a bonus, so that the player focuses on the specific display means. In this case, by having the configuration described in feature αF1 above, even if the specific storage area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started, the display storage area in which the display data for displaying on the specific display means is set is not initialized by the initialization means. This makes it possible for the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started to be the display content before the supply of operating power was stopped, regardless of whether the specific storage area was initialized by the initialization means or not. Therefore, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the initialization of the specific storage area was performed by the initialization means.

Feature αF6. Even if the privilege granting information is deleted from the predetermined storage area by initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means, the display storage area is not initialized by the initialization unit. The gaming machine according to feature αF5.

According to feature αF6, if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the benefit provision information is deleted from the predetermined storage area, thereby stopping the supply of operating power. Even if the bonus grant information is stored in a predetermined storage area before the bonus grant information is deleted, when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to start the game with the bonus grant information erased. In this case, even if the benefit provision information is deleted from the predetermined storage area, the display storage area where the display data for displaying on the specific display means is set is initialized by the initialization means. not be converted into As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. This allows you to prioritize things.

Feature αF7. The specific display means includes a first specific display means (special map display unit 37a) and a second specific display means (general map display unit 38a),
The display memory area includes a first display memory area (first display data buffer 271) and a second display memory area (third display data buffer 273),
The display data setting means includes:
A first display data setting means for setting display data in the first display memory area (a function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the special chart display unit 37a);
A second display data setting means for setting display data in the second display memory area (a function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the general map display unit 38a);
Equipped with
The specific display control means
A first specific display control means for controlling the display of the first specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the first display memory area is performed (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the special chart display unit 37a);
A second specific display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63 with respect to the general map display unit 38a) for controlling the display of the second specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the second display memory area is performed;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features αF1 to αF6, characterized in that the first display memory area and the second display memory area are not initialized by the initialization means.

According to feature αF7, it is possible to make the display content when the supply of operating power to both the first specific display means and the second specific display means starts to be the display content before the supply of operating power was stopped, regardless of whether the specified memory area was initialized by the initialization means or not. Therefore, even if the player checks the display content of either the first specific display means or the second specific display means when the supply of operating power starts, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the specified memory area has been initialized by the initialization means.

Feature αF8. When the supply of operating power is started, the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed, and the process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initializing means is carried out at the time of starting the supply of operating power. It is a configuration included in the processing of
Any one of features αF1 to αF7, characterized in that, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts the display of the specific display unit after the processing at the time of starting the supply of operating power is completed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature αF8, regardless of whether the specified memory area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to make it possible to start displaying on the specific display means at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed.

Feature αF9. Equipped with a situation generating means (a function for executing the process of step SC216 of the master CPU 63 in the 55th embodiment) that makes it possible to set a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level based on the start of the supply of operating power,
the initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting enabling situation occurs or after the setting enabling situation occurs,
A gaming machine described in feature αF8, characterized in that the settable situation occurs in a situation where processing is being executed when the supply of operating power begins.

According to feature αF9, regardless of whether a settable situation occurs or not, the display on the specific display means is started at a timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that for the configuration of features αF1 to αF9, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αG group>
Feature αG1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273);
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Initialization means (main in the 56th embodiment) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 56th embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the side CPU 63);
Equipped with
The display data setting means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and to set the display data by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means (step SC502 in the main CPU 63) sets specific correspondence display data in the display storage area for causing the specified display means to display a specified correspondence even if the predetermined storage area is not initialized. , a function of executing the processes of step SC503, step SC507, and step SC510).

According to feature αG1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to determine whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αG2. Setting means (56th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αG1.

According to feature αG2, when the supply of operating power is started and the setting value of the object to be used is set or when the setting value is set, a specified memory area is initialized, so that when a new setting value of the object to be used is set, it is possible to start playing in a situation where the specified memory area has been initialized. In this case, a specific corresponding display is performed on the specific display means in both cases where the specified memory area has been initialized and where it has not been initialized in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value of the object to be used. This makes it possible to prevent a player from identifying whether a new setting value of the object to be used has been set even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αG3. When the supply of operating power is started and the predetermined initialization conditions are met (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), separate initialization means ( function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the 56th embodiment),
The correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area even when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature αG2.

According to feature αG3, if the supply of operating power is started and a specified initialization condition is met, the specified memory area is initialized even if the setting value is not set, so that it is possible to start playing in a situation where the specified memory area is initialized even in a situation where a new setting value is not set. In this case, a specific response display is performed on the specific display means in any of the following cases: if a new setting value is set, if a new setting value is not set, if a specified initialization condition is met, and if a specified initialization condition is not met. This makes it possible to prevent a player from identifying whether a new setting value has been set and whether a specified initialization condition has been met even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αG4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features αG1 to αG3, characterized in that the corresponding setting means does not set the specific corresponding display data in the display memory area when the supply of operating power is stopped during a specified regulated situation (during execution of a game round, during execution of an open/close execution mode, during execution of a variable display round in the normal map display section 38a, during execution of a normal power open state) and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the specified memory area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to feature αG4, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined regulation situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the predetermined storage area is not initialized, the display storage area Since the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped under a specified regulatory situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the specified storage area is not initialized, the supply of operating power will be stopped. It becomes possible to start displaying the specific display means from the display content of the specific display means when the display is stopped.

Feature αG5. It is determined whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is set in the predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the storage area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The display data setting means stores display data corresponding to the result (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means in the display storage area when it is time to display the determination result. Set to
The specific display control means corresponds to the determination result of the provision determination means by controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG4, characterized in that the specific display means displays the following information.

According to feature αG5, a display corresponding to the decision result of whether or not to grant the player a bonus is displayed on the specific display means, drawing the player's attention to the specific display means. In this case, by having the configuration described in feature αG1 above, a specific corresponding display is displayed on the specific display means both when the supply of operating power is started and when the specific memory area is initialized or not initialized. This makes it possible to prevent a player from determining whether or not the specific memory area has been initialized by the initialization means, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αG6. The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is performed after the variable display of the symbols is started;
The correspondence setting means performs the initialization when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the specific display means is displaying a variable pattern, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αG5, characterized in that when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area.

According to feature αG6, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a picture is being performed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is If the display storage area is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, and therefore the display data that would be displayed when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, a predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a fluctuating display of a picture is being performed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. If not, it becomes possible to restart the variable display of the picture on the specific display means.

Feature αG7: When the bonus granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the bonus granting means grants the bonus after a display corresponding to the bonus being granted is displayed on the specific display means;
The gaming machine described in feature αG5 or αG6 is characterized in that the corresponding setting means does not set the specific corresponding display data in the display memory area if the supply of operating power is stopped while the bonus is being granted by the bonus granting means and then the supply of operating power is started again and the specified memory area is not initialized by the initialization means.

According to feature αG7, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is not initialized. Since the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, the display data in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a benefit is granted, and the specified storage area is not initialized when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the benefit It becomes possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation in which .

Feature αG8. When the specific display means performs the specific display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means controls the specific display after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG7, characterized in that the display of the means is started.

According to feature αG8, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αG9. A configuration in which a process at the start of supply of operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and a process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the process at the start of supply of operating power,
The gaming machine described in feature αG8 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means after processing is executed at the start of the supply of operating power.

According to feature αG9, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αG10. Setting means (56th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. and
The gaming machine according to feature αG9, wherein the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting means in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αG10, regardless of whether a new setting is made for the setting value to be used or not, it is possible to make the display on the specific display means start at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed.

In addition, for the configuration of features αG1 to αG10, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h 1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristic αH group>
Feature αH1. Specific display means (special map display section 37a, general map display section 38a),
A display data setting means for setting display data in a display memory area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the case of the fifty-fifth to fifty-seventh embodiments, and a function for executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the case of the fifty-eighth to sixtieth embodiments);
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display memory area is performed;
A setting means (a function for executing the process of step SC216 of the master CPU 63 in the fifty-fifth to sixtieth embodiments) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is such that it is impossible to distinguish between a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used has not been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature αH1, in order to set the setting value to be used by setting the setting value to be used in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of supply of operating power, In this case, it becomes necessary to start a new supply of operating power, and even if the setting value to be used is set illegally, it becomes difficult to do so. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started indicates that the setting value that will be used when the supply of operating power is started and that the supply of operating power is The displayed content makes it impossible to distinguish that this is a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set when the setting value is started. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH2. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Display data setting means for setting display data in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (in the case of the 56th to 57th embodiments, executes the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) (in the case of the 58th to 60th embodiments, the function of executing the process of step SC717 in the main CPU 63),
specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is performed; ,
Setting means (56th to A function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment);
Equipped with
The display data setting means sets the setting value to be used by the setting means when supply of operating power is started, and when the setting value to be used is set by the setting means when supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means for setting specific correspondence display data in the display storage area for causing the specified display means to perform a specific correspondence display even in the case of a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used is not set. (In the 56th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC502, SC503, SC507, and SC510. In the 57th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC602 and SC603. In the 58th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC802 to SC805, in the 59th embodiment, the main CPU 63 has a function of executing steps SC902 to SC905, and in the 60th embodiment A gaming machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a function for executing the processes of steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114 in the main CPU 63.

According to feature αH2, the setting value to be used is set in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that in order to set the setting value to be used, it becomes necessary to start the supply of operating power anew, making it difficult to set the setting value to be used fraudulently. In this case, a specific response display is displayed on the specific display means in both cases where the setting value to be used is set when the supply of operating power starts, and in the case of a specified situation where the setting value to be used is not set when the supply of operating power starts. This makes it possible to prevent a player from identifying whether the setting value to be used has been set or not, even if he or she checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power starts.

Feature αH3. When the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (when an information abnormality does not occur in the main RAM 65 and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1", and a "RAM clear operation" is performed), a separate initialization means (a function for executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 56th to 60th embodiments) is provided to initialize the predetermined storage area;
The gaming machine described in feature αH2 is characterized in that the corresponding setting means sets the specific corresponding display data in the display memory area in both cases where the specified memory area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started and where the setting value of the object to be used is set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature αH3, if the supply of operating power is started and a specified initialization condition is met, the specified memory area is initialized, making it possible to start playing in a situation where the specified memory area has been initialized. In this case, in both cases where the setting value of the object to be used has been set and where the specified memory area has been initialized, a specific corresponding display is made on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started. This makes it possible for a player to be unable to distinguish whether a new setting of the setting value of the object to be used or the initialization of the specified memory area has been performed, even if he or she checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αH4. Initialization means (fifty-sixth to The gaming machine according to feature αH2 or αH3, further comprising a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment.

According to feature αH4, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, when the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started is not set. In any of the predetermined situations, a specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been set. It becomes possible.

Feature αH5. A bonus determination means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to grant a bonus to a player, and for storing bonus grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of the big win result) in the predetermined memory area when a bonus is granted to the player;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the master CPU 63) that grants a bonus (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the bonus granting information is stored in the predetermined memory area;
Equipped with
The display data setting means sets display data corresponding to the result of the determination by the grant determination means (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) in the display memory area when it is time to display the determination result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features αH2 to αH4, characterized in that the specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display memory area is displayed, thereby causing a display corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means to be displayed on the specific display means.

According to feature αH5, a display corresponding to the decision result of whether or not to grant a bonus to the player is displayed on the specific display means, so that the player will pay attention to the specific display means. In this case, by having the configuration described in feature αH1 above, a specific corresponding display is displayed on the specific display means in both cases where a setting value to be used when the supply of operating power starts is set and in a specified situation where a setting value to be used when the supply of operating power starts is not set. This makes it possible to prevent a player from identifying whether or not a setting value to be used has been set, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power starts.

Feature αH6. The gaming machine according to feature αH5, wherein the specific correspondence display data is display data used as display data corresponding to the result.

According to feature αH6, when the supply of operating power is started, a specific corresponding display is performed on the specific display means using the result-corresponding display data used to notify the result of the determination by the grant determination means. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the display data while preventing a player from identifying whether or not the setting value to be used has been set even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αH7. In feature αH6, the specific corresponding display data is display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player, among the display data corresponding to the result. The game machine described.

When the game hall is closed, the power supply to the game machine is usually cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays a display content corresponding to the decision in the granting decision means that the bonus will not be awarded to the player. In this case, according to feature αH7, in both cases where the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started is set and in the case of a specified situation where the setting value to be used when the supply of operating power is started is not set, the display content of the specific display means corresponds to the decision in the granting decision means that the bonus will not be awarded to the player. As a result, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make the player recognize that the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the setting value to be used has been set.

Feature αH8. There are multiple types of specific correspondence display data,
According to any one of features αH2 to αH7, the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data to be used from among the plurality of types of the specific correspondence display data in the display storage area. gaming machines.

Feature αH8 makes it possible to diversify the display content of the specific response display of the specific display means when the supply of operating power begins.

Feature αH9. When the specific display means performs the specific display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means controls the specific display after the specific display data is set in the display storage area. The gaming machine according to any one of features αH2 to αH8, characterized in that the display of the means is started.

According to feature αH9, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αH10. The setting means sets the setting value to be used in a situation where a process at the start of supply of operating power is being executed,
The gaming machine described in feature αH9 is characterized in that the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means after processing is executed when the supply of operating power starts when the supply of operating power starts.

According to feature αH10, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the setting value to be used is not set, the process at the start of supply of operating power is performed. It becomes possible to start the specific correspondence display on the specific display means at a timing after the completion of the display.

Feature αH11. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") separate initialization means (56th to 56th) for initializing the predetermined storage area even if the setting value is not set by the setting means a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No.
The separate initialization means initializes the predetermined storage area in a situation where the process at the time of starting supply of operating power is being executed;
The correspondence setting means configures the setting by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. In any case where a value is set, the specific corresponding display data is set in the display storage area,
Feature αH9 or αH10 is characterized in that the specific display control unit starts the display of the specific display unit after the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started. The game machine described.

According to feature αH11, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is met, a predetermined storage area is initialized, so new settings for the setting values to be used are performed. Even in a situation where the predetermined storage area is not available, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. In this case, whether the setting value to be used is set or the specified storage area is initialized, a specific display means will display a specific response when the supply of operating power is started. will be held. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, neither new setting of the setting value to be used nor initialization of the predetermined storage area will be performed. This makes it possible to make it impossible to distinguish between In addition, regardless of whether the setting value to be used is set or the predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means It becomes possible to start a specific correspondence display in .

Note that for the configuration of features αH1 to αH11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αI group>
Feature αI1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Decide whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (clear target area 371 in the 57th to 60th embodiments);
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
When it is time to display the determination result, display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, Display data setting means to be set in the third display data buffer 273 (a function of executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the 57th embodiment, the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 60th embodiments) function of executing the process of step SC717);
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is displayed by the specific display means. a specific display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initializing means (57th to 57th to (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No. 60);
Equipped with
The display data setting means sets specific corresponding display data to be used as display data corresponding to the result when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initializing means when supply of operating power is started. Correspondence setting means to be set in the display storage area (in the 57th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step SC602 and step SC603 in the main CPU 63, and in the 58th embodiment, a function to execute the processing of step SC802 to step SC805 in the main CPU 63) The function to be executed, in the 59th embodiment, the function to execute the processing of step SC902 to step SC905 in the main CPU 63, and in the 60th embodiment, the function to execute the processing in the main CPU 63 from step SD102 to step SD105, step SD109, step SD110, and step SD113 and a function of executing the process of step SD114).

According to feature αI1, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. Furthermore, by initializing the predetermined storage area based on the start of supply of operating power, it is possible to start the game in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determination means is set in the display storage area. be done. As a result, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when notifying the determination result of the provision determination means. It becomes the content. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make it impossible to identify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized. Become.

Feature αI2. Setting means (57th to a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixtieth embodiment,
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to feature αI1.

According to feature αI2, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value to be used, the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determination means is displayed and stored. Set to area. As a result, even if the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is displayed when notifying the determination result of the provision determination means. It becomes the content. Therefore, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the setting value to be used has been newly set. It becomes possible.

Feature αI3. When the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (when an information abnormality does not occur in the main RAM 65 and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1", and a "RAM clear operation" is performed), even if the setting value of the target to be used is not set by the setting means, a separate initialization means (a function for executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 57th to 60th embodiments) is provided to initialize the predetermined memory area;
The gaming machine described in feature αI2 is characterized in that the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data in the display memory area even when the specified memory area is initialized by the separate initialization means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature αI3, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied, the predetermined storage area is initialized even if the setting value of the target to be used is not set, so that it is possible to start playing in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized even in a situation where a new setting of the target to be used is not set. In this case, whether the setting value of the target to be used is newly set or the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the grant determination means is set in the display storage area. As a result, whether the setting value of the target to be used is newly set or the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the predetermined storage area is initialized, the display content of the specific display means becomes the display content displayed when notifying the determination result of the grant determination means. Therefore, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the setting value of the target to be used has been newly set and whether the predetermined initialization condition has been satisfied.

Feature αI4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features αI1 to αI3, characterized in that the specific corresponding display data is, among the result corresponding display data, display data that is used when the award determination means determines not to award the bonus to the player.

When the gaming hall closes, the power supply to the gaming machine is usually cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays a display content corresponding to the decision by the award decision means that no bonus will be awarded to the player. In this case, according to feature αI4, when the supply of operating power is started and the specific memory area is initialized, the display content of the specific display means becomes a display content corresponding to the decision by the award decision means that no bonus will be awarded to the player. As a result, even if a player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to make the player recognize that the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the specific memory area has been initialized.

Feature αI5. There are multiple types of the specific correspondence display data,
A gaming machine described in any one of features αI1 to αI4, characterized in that the correspondence setting means sets the specific correspondence display data that is to be used from among multiple types of the specific correspondence display data in the display memory area.

Feature αI5 makes it possible to diversify the display content of the specific response display of the specific display means when the supply of operating power begins.

Feature αI6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features αI1 to αI5, characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started and the specific corresponding display is performed on the specific display means, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means after the specific corresponding display data is set in the display memory area.

Feature αI6 makes it possible to prevent the display content from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific response display is displayed when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αI7: A configuration in which a process at the start of supply of operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and a process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the process at the start of supply of operating power,
The gaming machine described in feature αI6 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means after processing is executed at the start of the supply of operating power.

According to feature αI7, regardless of whether the specified memory area is initialized by the initialization means or not, it is possible to make it possible to start displaying on the specific display means at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed.

Feature αI8. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SC216 of the master CPU 63 in the 57th to 60th embodiments) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power;
the initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting means sets the setting value of the object to be used or after the setting means sets the setting value of the object to be used,
The gaming machine described in feature αI7 is characterized in that the setting of the setting value of the object to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where processing is being executed when the supply of operating power begins.

According to feature αI8, regardless of whether or not a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the specific display means is displayed at a timing after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start the display.

In addition, for the configuration of features αI1 to αI8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h 1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature αJ group>
Feature αJ1. Specific display means (special map display unit 37a, general map display unit 38a),
A display data setting means for setting display data in a display memory area (first display data buffer 271, third display data buffer 273) (a function for executing the processing of step SC717 in the main CPU 63 in the fifty-eighth to sixtieth embodiments, and a function for executing the processing of step S8915 in the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment);
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) that controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display memory area is performed;
An initialization means (a function of executing a second RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 58th to 61st embodiments) for initializing a predetermined memory area (a clear target area 371 in the 58th to 61st embodiments) including the display memory area based on the start of the supply of operating power;
A correspondence setting means for setting the display content of the specific display means to a specific correspondence display when the predetermined memory area is initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started (in the 58th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SC802 to SC805 in the main CPU 63; in the 59th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SC902 to SC905 in the main CPU 63; in the 60th embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD102 to SD105, step SD109, step SD110, step SD113, and step SD114 in the main CPU 63; in the 61st embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps SD202 to SD217 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are multiple types of specific correspondence displays.

According to feature αJ1, the predetermined storage area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, so that the game can be started in a situation where the predetermined storage area is initialized. It becomes possible. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started becomes the specific corresponding display. There are multiple types of specific correspondence displays. This allows the display contents of the specific display means to be diversified when a predetermined storage area is initialized. Therefore, even if the display contents of the specific display means are checked when the supply of operating power is started, it becomes difficult to specify whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ2. The correspondence setting means provides a specific correspondence display for causing the specific display means to display the specific correspondence when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means when supply of operating power is started. data is set in the display storage area,
The gaming machine according to feature αJ1, wherein a plurality of types of specific correspondence display data exist.

According to feature αJ2, when the supply of operating power is started and the specified memory area is initialized, one of the multiple types of specific correspondence display data is set in the display memory area, thereby performing a specific correspondence display in the specific display means. This makes it possible to cause the specific display means to perform a specific correspondence display simply by selecting one type of specific correspondence display data from the multiple types of predetermined specific correspondence display data and setting it in the display memory area, thereby simplifying the processing configuration for causing the specific display means to perform one type of specific correspondence display from the multiple types of specific correspondence displays.

Feature αJ3: A bonus determination means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) for determining whether or not to grant a bonus to a player, and for storing bonus grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of the big win result) in the predetermined memory area when a bonus is granted to the player;
A bonus granting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S408 to S412 in the master CPU 63) that grants a bonus (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the bonus granting information is stored in the predetermined memory area;
Equipped with
The display data setting means sets display data corresponding to the result of the determination by the grant determination means (the display data selected in step S507 or step S509) in the display memory area when it is time to display the determination result,
the specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display memory area is performed, thereby causing a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means to be performed on the specific display means;
The gaming machine described in feature αJ2 is characterized in that the specific corresponding display data is display data used as display data corresponding to the result.

According to feature αJ3, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, when the supply of operating power is started using the display data corresponding to the result used to notify the determination result of the provision determining means, the specific display means performs a specific correspondence display. As a result, while suppressing the increase in the display data capacity, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to ensure that the predetermined storage area is not initialized. It becomes possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not the

Feature αJ4. The gaming machine described in Feature αJ3, characterized in that the specific corresponding display data is, among the result corresponding display data, display data that is used when the award determination means determines not to award the bonus to the player.

When the gaming hall closes, the power supply to the gaming machine is usually cut off in a situation where the specific display means displays a display content corresponding to the decision by the award decision means not to award a bonus to the player. In this case, according to feature αJ4, even if the specific memory area is initialized when the supply of operating power starts, the display content of the specific display means will be the display content corresponding to the decision by the award decision means not to award a bonus to the player. As a result, even if a player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power starts, it is possible for the player to recognize that the display content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether the specific memory area has been initialized or not.

Feature αJ5. The specific correspondence display data includes, among the display data corresponding to the results, display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player, and display data that is used when the award determining means decides not to award the benefit to the player. The gaming machine according to feature αJ3, characterized in that the gaming machine includes both display data to be used when it is decided to grant the benefit.

According to feature αJ5, when the predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is started, and when the award determining means determines not to award a benefit to the player, the display and award determining means Any of the displays in the case where it is determined that a benefit is to be given to the player is performed on the specific display means as a specific corresponding display. As a result, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, the displayed content is the display content that was displayed before the supply of operating power was stopped. This makes it possible for the player to recognize this, and it becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not a predetermined storage area has been initialized.

Feature αJ6. Setting means (58th to a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the sixty-first embodiment,
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ5.

According to feature αJ6, a predetermined storage area is initialized when or when the setting value of the target of use is set when the supply of operating power is started. When the setting value is newly set, it becomes possible to start the game with the predetermined storage area initialized. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized in conjunction with the new setting of the setting value to be used, one of the multiple types of specific correspondence displays will be displayed in the specific display means. It will be done. As a result, the display contents of the specific display means will be diversified when new settings are made for the setting values to be used, and the player will be able to display the Even if the contents are confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether new settings have been made for the setting values to be used.

Feature αJ7. If the predetermined initialization conditions are met when the supply of operating power is started (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") separate initialization means (58th to 58th) for initializing the predetermined storage area even when the setting value is not set by the setting means) a function of executing the first RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment No.
The correspondence setting means configures the use by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αJ6, characterized in that the display content of the specific display means is made to be a specific correspondence display in any case where a target setting value is set.

According to feature αJ7, if the supply of operating power is started and a specified initialization condition is met, the specified memory area is initialized even if the setting value is not set, so it is possible to start playing in a situation where the specified memory area is initialized even in a situation where a new setting value is not set. In this case, a specific response display is performed on the specific display means in both cases where a new setting value is set and where the specified initialization condition is met and the specified memory area is initialized. This makes it possible to prevent a player from identifying whether a new setting value has been set and whether the specified initialization condition has been met, even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αJ8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features αJ1 to αJ7, characterized in that the correspondence setting means causes the display content of the specific display means to become the specific correspondence display even if the specified memory area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature αJ8, when the supply of operating power is started, the specific correspondence display is performed by the specific display means both when the predetermined storage area is initialized and when it is not initialized. As a result, even if the player checks the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is impossible to determine whether or not the predetermined storage area has been initialized by the initialization means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature αJ9. The correspondence setting means determines whether or not the operating power is supplied in a predetermined regulation situation (during the execution of a game round, during the opening/closing execution mode, during the execution of the fluctuation display round on the normal figure display section 38a, during the execution of the normal power open state). specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed if the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the initialization means when the supply of operating power is started after the stoppage; The gaming machine according to feature αJ8, wherein: is not set in the display storage area.

According to feature αJ9, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a specified regulated situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the specified storage area is not initialized, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display storage area, and the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display storage area as is. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a specified regulated situation and the supply of operating power is subsequently started and the specified storage area is not initialized, it is possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped.

Feature αJ10. The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is performed after the variable display of the symbols is started;
The correspondence setting means performs the initialization in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a pattern is being displayed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The gaming machine according to feature αJ8 or αJ9, characterized in that when the predetermined storage area is not initialized by the means, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed is not set in the display storage area. .

According to feature αJ10, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a variable display of a picture is being displayed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started, the predetermined storage area is If the display storage area is not initialized, the specific correspondence display data is not set in the display storage area, and therefore the display data that would be displayed when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held as is in the display storage area. As a result, a predetermined storage area is initialized when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a fluctuating display of a picture is being performed on the specific display means, and when the supply of operating power is subsequently started. If not, it becomes possible to restart the variable display of the picture on the specific display means.

Feature αJ11. When the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area, the benefit granting means grants the benefit after a display corresponding to the granting of the benefit is displayed on the specific display means. It is a thing,
The correspondence setting means is configured to cause the initialization means to set the above-mentioned behavior by the initialization means in the case where the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means and the supply of operating power is subsequently started. The game according to any one of features αJ8 to αJ10, characterized in that when the predetermined storage area is not initialized, specific correspondence display data for causing the specific correspondence display to be performed is not set in the display storage area. Machine.

According to feature αJ11, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted and the supply of operating power is then started and the specified memory area is not initialized, the specific corresponding display data is not set in the display memory area, and the display data when the supply of operating power is stopped is stored and held in the display memory area as it is. As a result, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where a privilege is granted and the supply of operating power is then started and the specified memory area is not initialized, it is possible to start the display of the specific display means from the display content corresponding to the situation where the privilege is granted.

Feature αJ12. When the specific display means performs the specific response display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means in a state where the specific response display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ11.

According to feature αJ12, display contents are prevented from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific corresponding display is performed when the supply of operating power is started. becomes possible.

Feature αJ13. A configuration in which a process at the start of supply of operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and a process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the process at the start of supply of operating power,
The gaming machine described in feature αJ12 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means after processing is executed at the start of the supply of operating power.

According to feature αJ13, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at a timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αJ14. In a settable situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power, a setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SC216 of the master CPU 63 in the 58th to 61st embodiments) is provided for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
the initialization means is configured to initialize the predetermined storage area when the setting means sets the setting value of the object to be used or after the setting means sets the setting value of the object to be used,
A gaming machine described in feature αJ13, characterized in that the setting of the setting value of the target to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where processing is being executed when the supply of operating power begins.

According to feature αJ14, regardless of whether a new setting is made for the setting value of the target to be used or not, it is possible to make the display on the specific display means start at a timing after the processing at the start of the supply of operating power is completed.

Note that for the configuration of features αJ1 to αJ14, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic αK group>
Feature αK1. Specific display means (special figure display section 37a, regular figure display section 38a),
Decide whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function of executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment);
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
When it is time to display the determination result, display data (display data selected in step S507 or step S509) corresponding to the determination result of the provision determining means is displayed in the display storage area (first display data buffer 271, a display data setting unit (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) to set the display data in the third display data buffer 273;
By controlling the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data corresponding to the result stored in the display storage area is displayed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means is displayed by the specific display means. a specific display control means (a function for executing the processing of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63);
Initialization means (main in the 61st embodiment) that initializes a predetermined storage area (clear target area 371 in the 61st embodiment) including the display storage area based on the start of supply of operating power (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the side CPU 63);
Correspondence setting means (main CPU 63 (a function to execute the processing of steps SD202 to SD217);
Equipped with
There are multiple types of specific correspondence displays,
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of types of specific corresponding displays include display contents that are not selected as displays corresponding to the determination result of the award determining means.

According to feature αK1, the specified memory area is initialized based on the start of the supply of operating power, and it is possible to start a game in a situation where the specified memory area has been initialized. In this case, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power starts becomes a specific correspondence display. There are multiple types of the specific correspondence display, and the multiple types of specific correspondence displays include display content that is not selected as a display corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means. This diversifies the display content of the specific display means when the specified memory area is initialized. Therefore, even if the display content of the specific display means is checked when the supply of operating power starts, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the specified memory area has been initialized.

Feature αK2. The gaming machine described in Feature αK1, characterized in that the multiple types of specific corresponding displays include display contents that can be selected as displays corresponding to the determination results of the award determination means and display contents that cannot be selected as displays corresponding to the determination results of the award determination means.

According to feature αK2, the multiple types of specific corresponding displays include both display contents that can be selected as displays corresponding to the determination results of the grant determination means and display contents that cannot be selected, making it possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means when the specified memory area is initialized.

Feature αK3. The specific display means has a plurality of light-emitting units,
The gaming machine described in feature αK1 or αK2, characterized in that the correspondence setting means executes a lottery process (step SD204, step SD212) to determine whether or not to turn on each of the multiple light-emitting units individually, and sets display data for a lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process for each of the multiple light-emitting units in the display memory area, thereby causing the specific correspondence display to be performed.

According to feature αK3, a lottery process is executed to determine whether each of the multiple light-emitting elements in the specific display means is turned on or not, and the display content of the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process is displayed on the specific display means as a specific corresponding display when the specific memory area is initialized. This makes it possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means when the specific memory area is initialized, and also makes it possible to make the display content of the specific display means when the specific memory area is initialized irregular.

Feature αK4. In a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power, a setting means (a function for executing the processing of step SC216 of the master CPU 63 in the 61st embodiment) is provided for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A gaming machine described in any one of features αK1 to αK3, characterized in that the initialization means initializes the specified memory area when the setting value of the object to be used is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the object to be used is set by the setting means.

According to feature αK4, when the supply of operating power is started and the setting value of the target to be used is set or when the setting value is set, a specified memory area is initialized, so that when a new setting of the target to be used is made, it is possible to start playing in a situation where the specified memory area is initialized. In this case, when the specified memory area is initialized in association with the new setting of the setting value of the target to be used, one of multiple types of specific response displays is displayed on the specific display means. This diversifies the display content of the specific display means when a new setting of the setting value of the target to be used is made, and it becomes possible to prevent a player from identifying whether a new setting of the setting value of the target to be used has been made even if the player checks the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αK5. When the supply of operating power is started and the predetermined initialization conditions are met (no information abnormality regarding the main RAM 65 has occurred, and the setting update display flag and game stop flag are not set to "1") (when a "RAM clear operation" is performed in the situation), a separate initialization means (a separate initialization means (a second 61 embodiment),
The correspondence setting means configures the use by the setting means when the predetermined storage area is initialized by the separate initialization means when supply of operating power is started, and when supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature αK4, wherein the display content of the specific display means is made to be a specific correspondence display in any case where a target setting value is set.

According to feature αK5, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied when the supply of operating power is started, a predetermined storage area is initialized even if a set value is not set. Even in a situation where new settings are not made, it is possible to start a game in a situation where a predetermined storage area has been initialized. In this case, whether a new set value is set or a predetermined initialization condition is met and a predetermined storage area is initialized, the specific display means displays a specific correspondence display. It will be done. As a result, even if the player confirms the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power has started, it is possible to check whether new settings have been made and whether the predetermined initialization conditions have been met. It becomes possible to make it impossible to specify whether or not the

Feature αK6. When the specific display means performs the specific response display when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means in a state where the specific response display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK5.

Feature αK6 makes it possible to prevent the display content from being displayed on the specific display means when the supply of operating power is stopped before the specific response display is displayed when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature αK7: A configuration in which a process at the start of supply of operating power is executed when the supply of operating power is started, and a process of initializing the predetermined storage area by the initialization means is included in the process at the start of supply of operating power,
The gaming machine described in feature αK6 is characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the specific display control means starts displaying the specific display means after processing is executed at the start of the supply of operating power.

According to feature αK7, regardless of whether the predetermined storage area is initialized by the initialization means or not, the specific display means is activated at the timing after the processing at the start of supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start displaying the .

Feature αK8. Setting means (56th item) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that has occurred based on the start of the supply of operating power. (a function of executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
The initializing means initializes the predetermined storage area when the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit or after the setting value of the target to be used is set by the setting unit. and
The gaming machine according to feature αK7, wherein the setting of the setting value of the target to be used by the setting means occurs in a situation where the process at the time of starting the supply of operating power is being executed.

According to feature αK8, regardless of whether or not a new setting is made for the setting value to be used, the specific display means is displayed at a timing after the process at the start of the supply of operating power is completed. It becomes possible to start the display.

Note that for the configuration of features αK1 to αK8, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, Features I1 to I9, Features J1 to J4, Features K1 to K7, Features L1 to L20, Features M1 to M7, Features N1 to N6, Features O1 to O11, Features P1 to P12, Features Q1 to Q5, Features R1 to R17, Features S1 to S8, Features T1 to T13, Features U1 to U8, Features V1 to V6, Features W1 to W11, Features X1 to X11, Features Y1 to Y11, Features Z1 to Z10, Features a1 to a3, Features b1 to b7, features c1-c21, features d1-d10, features e1-e9, features f1-f6, features g1-g6, features h1-h13, features i1-i7, features j1-j6, features k1-k16, features l1- l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z6, features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to Any one or more configurations among αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the above feature αF group, the above feature αG group, the above feature αH group, the above feature αI group, the above feature αJ group, and the above feature αK group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to make the operation at the time of starting the supply of operating power suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature αL group>
Feature αL1. Specific display means (special map display unit 37a, general map display unit 38a),
A specific display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps SC412 to SC414 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the display of the specific display means;
A setting means (a function for executing the process of step SC216 of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power;
Equipped with
The specific display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a mode determination means (a mode of referring to the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings, a mode of referring to the second display allocation table 394 for normal drawings) that determines the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started in a determination mode corresponding to the suggested target situation (a mode of referring to the second display allocation table 392 for special drawings, a mode of referring to the second display allocation table 394 for normal drawings) based on the fact that the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means and that a setting value that is equal to or more advantageous than the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped or a setting value that is more advantageous than the setting value before the supply of operating power is stopped has been set by the setting means as the setting value to be used.

According to feature αL1, by checking the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started, it is possible to predict that a new setting value to be used has been set, or that the advantage of the setting value to be used has become equal to or greater than the advantage of the previous setting value. This makes it possible to allow the player to make predictions regarding the setting value using the display content of the specific display means, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature αL2. The aspect determining means determines that the set value is equal to or higher than the advantage of the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped, or that the set value is more advantageous than the set value before the supply of operating power is stopped. determining the display contents of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started based on the setting value set by the setting means as the setting value to be used, in a determination manner corresponding to the suggestion target situation, and operating the In the case where the supply of operating power is started based on the setting means setting a setting value lower than the advantage of the setting value before the power supply is stopped as the setting value to be used. A mode of determining the display content of the specific display means corresponding to a non-suggestion target situation (a mode of referring to the first display distribution table 391 for special figures, a mode of referring to the first display distribution table 393 for regular figures) The gaming machine according to feature αL1, wherein the gaming machine is determined by:

According to feature αL2, when the degree of advantage of the setting value to be used becomes equal to or greater than the degree of advantage of the previous setting value or becomes higher than the degree of advantage of the previous setting value, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the suggested target situation, and when the degree of advantage of the setting value to be used becomes lower than the previous setting value, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation. This makes it easier to predict whether the degree of advantage of the setting value to be used becomes equal to or greater than the degree of advantage of the previous setting value or becomes higher than the degree of advantage of the previous setting value.

Feature αL3. The gaming machine described in Feature αL2, characterized in that the mode determining means determines the display content of the specific display means in a determination mode corresponding to the non-suggested target situation when the supply of operating power is started based on the fact that the setting value to be used has not been set by the setting means.

According to feature αL3, even if the setting value to be used is not newly set when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination manner corresponding to a non-suggested target situation, so that when the display content of the specific display means is determined in a determination manner corresponding to a non-suggested target situation, it becomes impossible to determine whether the situation is one in which the setting value to be used is not newly set or one in which the advantage of the setting value to be used has become lower than before.

Feature αL4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features αL1 to αL3, characterized in that the mode determination means determines the display content of the specific display means by lottery according to a lottery mode corresponding to the suggested situation when the suggested situation is present.

Feature αL4 makes it possible to diversify the display content of the specific display means in a suggested situation. This makes it possible to make it impossible to clearly identify whether or not the situation is a suggested situation, even if the specific display means is checked.

Feature αL5. The mode determining means is characterized in that, in the case of a non-suggestion target situation that is not the suggestion target situation, the display content of the specific display means is determined by lottery in a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. The gaming machine according to feature αL4.

According to feature αL5, it is possible to diversify the display contents of the specific display means in non-suggestion target situations. This makes it possible to make it impossible to clearly identify whether or not the situation is a non-suggestion target situation even if the specific display means is checked.

Feature αL6. The display contents that can be selected by lottery in a lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation and the display contents of the specific display means selected by a lottery mode in a lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. There are common display contents (first to third initial displays for special figures, first to third initial displays for regular figures) among the possible display contents, and the selection probability of the common display contents is The gaming machine according to feature αL5, wherein the lottery mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation is different from the lottery mode corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation.

According to feature αL6, the common display content is displayed using the specific display means regardless of whether the situation is a suggestion target situation or a non-suggestion target situation, so it is clear whether the situation is a suggestion target situation or a non-suggestion target situation. This makes it possible to make it impossible for the person to be identified. On the other hand, the selection probability of the common display content is different depending on whether the situation is a suggestion target or a non-suggestion target situation. It becomes possible to predict whether there will be any.

Feature αL7. comprising display data setting means (a function for executing the process of step S8915 in the main CPU 63) for setting display data in the display storage area,
The specific display control means controls the display of the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display storage area is displayed,
Initialization for initializing a predetermined storage area including the display storage area when the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting means or after the setting value of the usage target is set by the setting unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with means (a function of executing the second RAM clearing process of the main CPU 63 in the sixty-second to sixty-third embodiments).

According to feature αL7, when the supply of operating power is started, the setting value of the target to be used is set, or when the setting value is set, a specified memory area is initialized in association with the setting, so that when a new setting value of the target to be used is set, it is possible to start playing in a situation where the specified memory area has been initialized. In this case, by having the configuration of feature αL1 described above, it is possible to use the situation where the display memory area is initialized in association with the initialization of the specified memory area to predict whether or not the suggested target situation is present based on the display content of the specific display means.

Feature αL8. When the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (when an information abnormality does not occur in the main RAM 65 and the setting update display flag and the game stop flag are not set to "1", and a "RAM clear operation" is performed), a separate initialization means (a function for executing the first RAM clear process of the main CPU 63 in the 62nd to 63rd embodiments) is provided to initialize the predetermined storage area;
The gaming machine described in feature αL7 is characterized in that the mode determination means determines the display content of the specific display means when the specified memory area is initialized by the separate initialization means and the supply of operating power is started in a determination mode corresponding to a non-suggested target situation.

According to feature αL8, when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined initialization condition is met, the predetermined storage area is initialized, so that the game cannot be played in a situation where the predetermined storage area has been initialized. It becomes possible to start. In this case, if the predetermined storage area is initialized by a separate initialization means, the display content of the specific display means when the supply of operating power is started is determined in a manner corresponding to the non-suggestion target situation. Therefore, it becomes easier to predict whether the situation is a suggestion target situation or not.

Feature αL9. Decide whether or not to grant a benefit to a player, and when granting a benefit to a player, benefit grant information (information of "1" set in a flag corresponding to the type of jackpot result) is stored in a predetermined manner. A provision determining means (a function for executing the process of step S508 in the main CPU 63) to be stored in the area;
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S408 to S412 in the main CPU 63) that grants a benefit (opening/closing execution mode) to a player based on the fact that the benefit granting information is stored in the predetermined storage area. )and,
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features αL1 to αL8, wherein the specific display control unit causes the specific display unit to display a display corresponding to the determination result of the grant determining unit.

According to feature αL9, the specific display means displays a display corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to give a benefit to the player, so that the player pays attention to the specific display means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature αL1, it becomes possible to achieve the excellent effects described above using the specific display means.

Feature αL10. The gaming machine described in Feature αL9, characterized in that the display content of the specific display means determined in a determination manner corresponding to the suggested target situation is display content that is not displayed when a display corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means is performed on the specific display means.

According to the feature αL10, it is possible to distinguish the display content determined in the determination mode corresponding to the suggestion target situation from the display content corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means.

Feature αL11. The gaming machine described in any one of Features αL1 to αL10, characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started and the display content determined by the mode determination means is displayed on the specific display means, the specific display control means starts the display on the specific display means in a state in which the display content determined by the mode determination means is displayed.

According to feature αL11, when the supply of operating power is stopped before the display according to the display content determined by the mode determining means is displayed when the supply of operating power is started, the display content is displayed by the specific display means. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, for the configuration of features αL1 to αL11, features A1 to A15, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F3, features G1 to G18, features H1 to H7, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L20, features M1 to M7, features N1 to N6, features O1 to O11, features P1 to P12, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R17, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T13, features U1 to U8, features V1 to V6, features W1 to W11, features X1 to X11, features Y1 to Y11, features Z1 to Z10, features a1 to a3, features b1 to b7, features c1 to c21, features d1 to d10, features e1 to e9, features f1 to f6, features g1 to g6, feature h 1 to h13, features i1 to i7, features j1 to j6, features k1 to k16, features l1 to l5, features m1 to m3, features n1 to n10, features o1 to o7, features p1 to p7, features q1 to q8, features r1 to r7, features s1 to s4, features t1 to t5, features u1 to u10, features v1 to v8, features w1 to w8, features x1 to x6, features y1 to y9, features z1 to z 6. Any one or more of the features αA1 to αA10, features αB1 to αB6, features αC1 to αC13, features αD1 to αD9, features αE1 to αE5, features αF1 to αF9, features αG1 to αG10, features αH1 to αH11, features αI1 to αI8, features αJ1 to αJ14, features αK1 to αK8, and features αL1 to αL11 may be applied. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

According to the invention related to the above characteristic αL group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front side of the machine for storing game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. It is fired toward the game area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are transferred to the game ball launcher. The surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: gaming machines equipped with a picture display device that variably displays multiple pictures, in which the variable display of the multiple pictures is started by operating a start operation means, the variable display of the multiple pictures is stopped by operating a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a bonus is given to the player according to the picture after the stop.

10... Pachinko machine, 12... Game machine main body, 14... Front door frame, 28... Launch operation device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 35... Through gate, 37a... Special chart display section, 38a... Regular chart display section, 49a... Gate detection sensor, 62... MPU, 63... Main CPU, 65... Main RAM, 68a... Setting key insertion section, 68b... Update button, 68c... Reset button, 69a... First notification display device, 69b... Second notification display device, 69c... Third notification display device, 78... Power supply and launch control device, 112... Management CPU, 117... History memo 171: memory for storing different settings; 181-186: memory for storing history for settings 1-6; 191: memory for first history; 192: memory for second history; 201: display device for first notification; 201a-201g: display segments; 202: display device for second notification; 202a-202g: display segments; 203: display device for third notification; 204: display device for fourth notification; 221: work area for specific control; 222: stack area for specific control; 223: work area for non-specific control; 224: stack area for non-specific control; 23 1...normal counter area, 232...open/close execution mode counter area, 233...high frequency support mode counter area, 234...calculation result storage area, 241...management RAM, 251...reset signal output section, 252...program monitoring section, 266...display IC, 271...first display data buffer, 273...third display data buffer, 311...current state area, 312...first history area, 313...second history area, 314...third history area, 321-324...display segments, 325...setting correspondence storage area, 325a ~325f...first to sixth setting information storage areas, 326...setting correspondence storage area, 326a-326c...first to third setting information storage areas, 341...setting reference area, 342...setting update area, 352...sound/light side MPU, 353...sound/light side CPU, 356...RTC, 357...RTC memory, 361...OFF confirmation flag, 371...clear target area, 391...first display allocation table for special drawings, 392...second display allocation table for special drawings, 393...first display allocation table for regular drawings, 394...second display allocation table for regular drawings.

Claims (1)

A specific display means;
a display data setting means for setting display data in a display memory area;
a specific display control means for controlling the specific display means so that a display corresponding to the display data stored in the display memory area is performed;
A setting means for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to an advantage level of a player in a setting possible situation that occurs based on the start of the supply of operating power;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that when the supply of operating power is started, the display content of the specific display means is such that it is impossible to distinguish between a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used has been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started and a predetermined situation in which the setting value to be used has not been set by the setting means when the supply of operating power is started.

Images